Cambridge IGCSE Chemistry Coursebook 5e - Pagenumber

CAMBRIDGE
UN IVE RS ITY PRE SS
M Cambridge A,..e,sment
V
Coursebo lmemational Education
CAMBRIDGE
UNIVERSITY PRESS
I
t
r
Chemistry
for Cambridge IGCSE™
r
i
Richard Harwood, Chris Millington & Ian Lodge
),
I
I
'
L -.-
I
I
r--
r
\. ---
CAMBRIDGE
U NIVERSirY PRESS
University Printing House, Cambridge cs2 8es, United Kingdom

One Liberty Plaza, 20th Floor, New York, NY 10006, USA
477 Williamstown Road, Port Melbourne, vie 3207, Australia
314-321, 3rd Floor, Plot 3, Splendor Forum, Jasola District Centre, New Delhi - 110025, India
79 Anson Road, #06-04/06, Singapore 079906
Cambridge University Press is part of the University of Cambridge. ...

It furthers the University's mission by disseminating knowledge in the pursuit of education,
learning and research at the highest international levels of excellence.
www.cambridge.org
Information on this title: www.cambridge.org/9781108951609
© Cambridge University Press 2021
This publication is in copyright. Subject to statutory exception
and to the provisions of relevant collective licensing agreements,
no reproduction of any part may take place without the written
permission of Cambridge University Press.
First published 1998
Second edition 2002
Third edition 2010
Fourth edition 2014
Fifth edition 2021
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 l
Printld in Italy by L.E.G.0. S.p.A.
A catalogue record for this publication is available from the British Library
ISBN 978-1-108-9;160-9 Coursebook with Digital Access (2 Years)
ISBN 978-1-108-97040-2 Digital Coursebook (2 Years)
ISBN 978-1-108-94830-2 Coursebook eBook
Additional resources for this publication at www.cambridge.org/go
.,
NOTICE TO TEACHERS IN THE UK NOTICE TO TEACHERS
It is illegal to reproduce any part of this work in material form Cambridge International copyright material in this publication is
(including photocopying and electronic storage) except under the reproduced under licence and remains the intellectual property of
following circumstances: Cambridge Assessment International Education.
(i) where you are abiding by a licence granted to your school or Exam -style questions and sample answers have been written by the
institution by the Copyright Licensing Agency; authors. In examinations, the way marks are awarded may be different.
(ii) where no such licence exists, or where you wish to exceed the terms References to assessment and/or assessment preparation are the
of a licence, and you have gained the written permission of Cambridge publisher's interpretation of the syllabus requirements and may not
University Press; fully reflect the approach of Cambridge Assessment International
Education.
(iii) where you are allowed to reproduce without permission under
the provisions of Chapter 3 of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act
1988, which covers, for example, the reproduction of short passages
within certain types of educational anthology and reproduction for the
purposes of setting examination questions.
,,
I
I: ... ---..,DEDICATED
1 < > TEACHER
I ~---... AWARDS
) CAMBRIDGE IGCSE™ CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
>·Contents
How to use this series vi 6 Electrochemistry 124
6 .1 Types of electrical conductivity 126
How to use this book viii Products of electrolysis 130
6 .2
6.3 Hydrogen as a fuel 139
Introduction X
7 Chemical energetics 148

1 States of matter · 1
7 .1 Physical and chemical changes 150
1.1 States of matter 3
7 .2 Exothermic and endothermic reactions 151
1.2 Kinetic particle theory of matter 11
1.3 M ixtures of substances and diffusion 14 8 Rates of reaction 163
8.1 Factors affecting the rate of reaction 165
2 Atomic structure 28
8.2 Collision theory of reaction rate 174
2.1 Atoms and elements 30
2.2 Isotopes 34 9 Reversible reactions and
2.3 Electronic configuration of elements 38 183
equilibrium
9.1 Reversible reactions 185
3 Chemical bonding 47 .....,,
9.2 Haber process and Contact process 190
3.1 Non-metallic substances and
covalent bonding 49 9.3 Fertilisers 197
3.2 Ions and ionic bonding 57
10 Redox reactions 203
3.3 Giant structures 62
10.1 Combustion, oxidation and reduction 205
4 Chemical formulae and equations 73 10 .2 Redox reactions 207
4.1 Chemical names and formulae 75
11 Acids and bases 219
., 4.2 Chemical equations for reactions 83
11.1 The nature of acids and bases 221
4 .3 Relative masses of atoms and
87 11 .2 Characteristic reactions of acids 230
molecules
5 Chemica l calculations 99 12 Preparation of salts 242

The mole and Avogadro's constant IOI 12.1 T he importance of salts - an
5.1
introduction 244
5.2 The mole and chemical equations 108
12.2 Preparation of salts 248
5.3 Moles and solution chemistry 115
iv )
Contents
...:,
··'
13 The Periodic Table 259 19 Reactions of organic compounds 362

13.1 Classifying the elements 261 19.1 Characteristic reactions of different
13.2 Trends in groups 265 homologous series 364
13.3 Trends across a period 270 19.2 Chemistry of ethanol 371
19.3 Carboxylic acids and esters 373
-· 14 Metallic elements and alloys 277
14.1 The properties of metals 279 20 Petrochemicals and polymers 380
14.2 Uses of metals 284 20.1 Petroleum and its products 382
20.2 Polymers 387
f 14.3 Alloys 286
Plastics 395
20.3
15 Reactivity of metals 295
15.1 The metal reactivity series 297 21 Experimental design and
'\ 15.2 Metal displacement reactions 301 separation techniques 404
21 .1 Experimental design 406
16 Extraction and corrosion 21 .2 Separation and purification 410'
,:;--
of metals 309 21 .3 Chromatography 417
·- 16.1 Metal extraction and the reactivity
series 311 22 Chemical analysis 426
16.2 Corrosion of metals 317 22.1 Tests to identify common cations 428
22.2 Tests to identify common anions 435
17 Chemistry of our environment 325 22.3 Tests to identify common gases 438
17.1 Air quality 327 22.4 Quantitative analysis:
17.2 Carbon dioxide, methane and acid- base titrations 440
;
climate change 331
• 17.3 Water 334 G lossary 447
~- 18 Introduction to organic chemistry 344 Appendix: Periodic Table 458

18.1 Names and formulae of organic
compounds 346 Index 459
; 18.2 Structural formulae, homologous
series and isomerism 353 Acknowledgements 467
.-
.....
V
>
The digital teacher's resource contains detailed guidance for all topics of the syllabus,
., including common misconceptions identifying areas where learners might need
extra support, as well as an engaging bank of lesson ideas for each syllabus topic.
Differentiation is emphasised with advice for identification of different learner
needs and suggestions of appropriate interventions ·
to support and stretch learners. The teacher's
resource also contains support for preparing
and carrying out all the investigations in the
practical workbook, including a set of sample
results for when practicals aren' t possible.
The teacher's resource also contains scaffolded
worksheets and unit tests for each chapter.
Answers for all components are accessible to
teachers for free on the Cambridge GO platform.
•
lot~--
Chemistry
Chemistry
lot e...i.ndgelGCSE"
) CAMBRIDGE IGCSET"' CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
> -H ow to use this book '

Throughout this book, you will notice lots of different features that will help your learning. These are explained below.
LEARNING INTENTIONS
These set t rae scene for each chapter, belp with navigation thmugh the cowrsebook and indicate the
important comcepts in each topic.
This contains questions and activities on subject knowledge you will need before starting this chapter.
SCIENCE IN CONTEXT Questions

TJ:\is feature presents rea l-wodd examples Appearing throughout the text, questions give you a
an<d applieati0ns of trne content iri a chapter, chance to check that you have understood the topic you
eAcowragimg yow to look further into topics that have just read about. The a nswers to these questions are
may g0 beyond the syllabus. There ar.e discussion accessible to teachers for free on the Cambridge GO site.
e;fl!lestiofls at the end, which look at some 0f the
benefits ancl pr.oblems of these appli.1.::ati0!'ls, and ACTIVITY
enc0urage y0u t0 look forther ii;ito the t0pics.
Activities give you an opportunity to check and
develop your understanding throughout the text
EXPERIMENTAL SKILLS in a more active way, for example by creating
presentations, posters or role plays. When activities
., This feature focuses on developing your practical have answers, teachers can find these for free on
skills. They include lists of equipment required and the Cambridge GO site.
any safety issues, step-by-step instructions so you
can carry out the experiment, and questions to
help you think about what you have learnt. COMMAND WORDS
Command words that appear in the syllabus and

KEY W ORDS might be used in exams are highlighted in the
exam-style questions. In the margin, you will fi nd
Key vocabulary is highlighted in the text when it the Cambridge International definit ion. You will
is first introduced, and definitions are given in boxes also find these definitions in t he Glossary at the
near the vocabulary. You will also fi nd definit ions of back of the book.
these words in the Glossary at the back of this book.
Supplement content: ~~r~ m~terial is _intended for students who are studying the Supplement content of the syllabus
? as well as the Core, this 1s md1cated usmg the arrow and the bar, as on the left here. You may also see just an arrow
(and no bar), in boxed features such as the Key Words where part of the definition is Supplement.
viii )
How to use this book
WORKED EXAMPLE SELF/PEER ASSESSMENT

Wherever you need to know how to use a formula to At t he end of some activities and experimental
carry out a ca lculation, there are worked examples skills boxes, yol:l will find opportunities to help
boxes to show you how to do this. you assess your own work, or t hat of your
classmates, and consieJer how you can improve
t he way you learn.
,.
These activities ask you to t hink about the These boxes tell you where information in the
approach that you take to your work, and how book is extension content, and is not part of
you might improve this in the future. the syllabus.
SUMMARY .
There is a summary of key points at the end of each chapter.
PROJECT
Projects allow you to apply your learning from the whole chapter to group activities such as making posters or
presentat ions, or taking part in debates. They may give you the opportunity to extend your learnin g beyond
the syllabus if you want to.
EXAM-STYLE QUESTIONS
Questions at the end of each chapter provide more demanding exam-style questions, some of which may
require use of knowledge from previous chapters. The answers to these questions are accessible to teachers for free on
the Cambridge GO site.
SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST ·
The summary checklists are followed by 'I can' statements which relate to the Learning intentions at the beginning
of the chapter. You might find it helpful to rate how confident you are for each of these statements when you are
revising. You should revisit any topics that you rated ' Needs more work' or 'A lmost there'.
Core
Supplement
ix )
> CAMBRIDGE IGCSE™ CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
>•Introduction
Chemistry is a: laboratory science: its subject material and theories are based on
experimental observation. However, its scope reaches out beyond the laboratory
into every aspect of our lives - to our understanding of the nature of our planet,
the environment we live in, the resources available to us and the factors that affect
our health.
This is the fifth edition of our Cambridge !GCSE™ Chemistry Coursebook,
and it provides everything that you need to support your course for Cambridge
IGCSE Chemistry (0620/0971). It provides full coverage of the syllabus for
examinations from 2023 onwards.
The chapters are arranged in the same sequence as the topics in the syllabus.
The various features that you will find in these chapters are explained in the How to
use this book section.
Many of the questions you will meet during your course test whether you have a deep
understanding of the facts and concepts you have learnt. It is therefore not enough just
to learn words and diagrams that you can repeat in answer to questions; you need to
ensure that you really understand each concept fully. Trying to answer the questions
that you will find within each chapter, and at the end of each chapter, should help you
to do this.
Although you will study your chemistry as a series of different topics, it is important V
to appreciate that aJl of these topics link up with each other. You need to make links
between different areas of the syllabus to answer some questions.
As you work through your course, make sure that you keep reflecting on the work
that you did earlier and how it relates to the current topic that you are study.ing.
T he reflection boxes throughout the chapters ask you to think about how you learn,
which may help you to make the very best use of your time and abilities as your course
progresses. You can also use the self-evaluation checklists at the end of each chapter
to decide how well you have understood each topic in the syllabus, and whether or not
., you need to do more work on each one.
Practical skills are an important part of your chemistry course. You will develop
these skills as you do experiments and other practical work related to the topics you
are studying.
Note to teachers:
Guidance on safety has been included for each of the practical investigations in this
coursebook. You should make sure that they do not contravene any school, education
authority or government regulations. You and your school are responsible for
safety matters.
X >
learn that matter cari exist in three different states: solid, liquid or gas
• understand that substances can change state depending on the physical conditions
• understand that matter is made up of '\/ery small particles such as atoms or molecules
• see how changes in temperature produce changes of state by affecting the motion of the
particles involved
• learn how to describe the structure of the physical states in terms of the arrangement and movement
of particles
• describe how changes in temperature and pressure affect the volume of a gas
• explain diffusion in terms of the movement of particles
1
I
, GETTING STARTED
You will know about solids, liquids and gases from
MATTER
general life experience and your science courses.
However, the ideas concerning the ways in which
one state of matter changes into another are
more complex.
Spray a small amount of air freshener at the front
of a room. How does the smell spread around the can be elements, can be solid, is made upof
room? Shake the can. Can you hear the liquid in compounds liquid or gas p articles: atoms,
or mixtures molecules or ions
it? Or try placing some liquid perfume in a dish in
front of you and see how long it takes for someone
to notice the scent some distance away. Discuss
these observations in terms of changes of state and
the movement of the molecules involved.
occupies a has a mass
Look at the flowchart (Figure 1.1). Working in volume in space
groups, can you add more detail to improve and
extend t he flowchart?
Figure 1.1: Flowchart of the nature of matter.
LORD OF THE RINGS

.,__,,
Saturn is perhaps the most beautiful of the Figure 1.2 also shows the pastel colours of the
planets of our solar system. Saturn has fascinated clouds of ammonia and methane in Saturn's
astronomers, even the famous Galileo, because of atmosphere. However, the bulk of the planet is
its mysterious rings. Galileo himself was <;;onfused made of hydrogen and helium gases. Deep in the
by the rings, thinking at first that the rings were centre of these ~ightweight gases is a small rocky
planets. The Pioneer, Voyager and Cassini-H1:1ygens core, surrounded by a liquid layer of the gases.
space probes have sent back a lot of information to The hydrogen is liquid because of the high
Earth about the st ructu~e of the moons and ring!t pressure in the inner regions of the planet nearest
of Saturn. Figure 1.2 is an image captured by the the core. The liquid hydrogen shows metallic
Hubble Space Teleseope. The photografDl:i shows properties, producing the planet's magnetic field.
• the rings at close to their maximum tilt (angle) to A study of Saturn's physical structure emphasises
the Earth, which shows their magnificenc;:e. how substances that we know on Earth can exist in
unusual physical states in different environments.
Each ring around Saturn is made up of a stream of
icy particles, following each other nose-to-tail, like Discussion questions
cars in a traffic jam, around the planet. The particles
can be of widely varying sizes. The rings resemble a 1 Why are the planets Jupiter and Saturn called
snowstorm, in which tiny snowflakes are mixed with ' gas giants'? What progression do we see in the
snowballs that can be as large as a house. The ice physical nature of the planets as we move away
that surrounds one of the most spectacular planets from the Sun?
of our solar system is made of water, which is the 2 Why does hydrogen only exist as a liquid under
same substance (with the same chemical formula, such extreme conditions of temperature and
H20) that covers so much of the Earth's surface. pressure?
I
Figure 1.2: Saturn and its rings. A photograph taken by the

Hubble Space Telescope.
'
(
l
2
> j
2
,·
1 States of matter
1~ 1 States of matter The volume of a gas at a fixed temperature can easily be

reduced by increasing the pressure on the gas. Gases are
easily compressed ('squashed'). Liquids are only slightly
There are many different kinds of matter . The word
is use:d to cover all the substances and materials of compressible, and the volume of a solid is unaffected by
changing the pressure.
which the-universe is composed. Samples of all of these
materials have two properties in common: they each
occupy space (they have volume) and they have mass. KEY WORDS
Chemistry is the study of how matter behaves, and of matter: anything that occupies space and
how one kind of substance can be changed into another. has mass
Whichever chemical substance we study, we find that the
substance can exist in three different forms (or physical states of matter: solid, liquid and gas are the
states) depending on the conditions. These three different three states of matter in which any substance
states of matter are known as solid, liquid and gas. can exist, depending on the conditions of
Changing the temperature and/or pressure can change temperature and pressure
the state in which a substance exists (Figure 1.3).
fluid: a gas or a liquid; they are able to flow
Each of the different physical states have certain general
characteristics that are true whatever chemical substance
is being considered. These are summarised in Table l. l.
Table I.I highlights a major difference between solids
and the other two physical states. Liquids and gases are
able to flow, but a solid has a fixed shape and volume.
Liquids and gases are fluids . This means that liquids and
gases can be poured, or pumped, from one container to
another. The three physical states also show differences
in the way they respond to changes in temperature
and pressure. All three show an increase in volume (an
expansion) when the temperature is increased and a
decrease in volume (a contraction) when the temperature
is lowered. The effect is much bigger for a gas than for a
solid or a liquid. Figure 1.3: Gallium metal melts with t he warmth of the hand. .
Physical state Volume ' Density Shape

.. Fluidity
.c "'·
' ...
solid has a fixed volume high has a definite shape does not flow
moderate no defin ite shape - takes generally flows
liquid has a fixed volume
to high the shape of the container easily
no fixed volume - expands no definite shape - takes
gas low flows easily
to fil l the container the shape of the container
Table 1.1: Differences in the properties of the three stat es of matter.
3 > ,--
3
Cha,nges in state
gas
0 Evaporation and
c: c: § condensation take
.g .g place over a range
e :ll
0 'i::
of temperatures; boiling
Sublimation: a few ~ g_ takes place at a specific
C: ~ ~ temperature.
solids change directly 0 r--L:........:.~--..,,...---,
from solid to gas on heating; ~
.§
the term sublimation
1i liquid
is used for the change in :,
<I)
either direction.
Melting: a pure substance
Note that sublimation is melts suddenly at a particular
not required knowledge. Ol
C
temperature.
+" Freezing: the reverse takes
al
E place sharply at the same
temperature.
solid
Figure 1.4: Changes of physical state and the effect of increasing temperature at atmospheric pressure.
Large increases, or decreases, in temperature and

pressure can cause changes that are more dramatic than KEYWORDS
expansion. or contraction. They can cause a substance to
melting point (m .p ): the temperature at which a
change its physical state. The changes between the three
solid turns into a liquid - it has the same value as
states of matter are shown in Figure 1.4. At atmospheric
the freezing point; a pure substance has a sharp
pressure, these changes can occur by raising or lowering
melting point
. the temperature of the substance .
Melting and freezing

The temperature at which a substance turns to a liquid
solid
..
increasing temperature
~
is called the melting point (111,J>,). This always happens gas
~ ~
at one particular temperature for each substance
(Figure 1.5). The process is reversed at precisely the
same temperature if a liquid is cooled down. It is then
-
called the freezing point (f.p.). The melting point and
freezing point of any given substance are both the same
melting point boi ling point
temperature. For example, the melting and freezing of (m.p.) (b.p.)
pure water take place at O°C.
decreasing temperature
Figure 1.5: Relationship between the melting and boiling

points of a subst ance.
4
>
..:
4
1 States of matter
Sublimation
A few solids, such as solid carbon dioxide, do not
melt when t hey are heated at normal pressures.
Instead, they turn directly into gas. Solid carbon
dioxide-is often called 'dry ice' because the
surface of the block is dry (Figure 1.6). This is
different to a normal ice cube, which has a thin
film of liquid water on the surface.
This change of state is called sublimation: the
solid sublimes (see Figure 1 .4). Sublimation is
a direct change of state from solid to gas, or
gas to solid; the liquid phase is bypassed. As
with melting, this also happens at one particular
temperature for each pure solid.
Evaporation, boiling and condensation

If a liquid is left with its surface exposed to the air, it
evaporates. When liquids change into gases in this way,
the process is called evaporation. Evaporation takes place ·
from the surface of the liquid. The larger the surface Figure 1.6: Solid carbon dioxide sublimes. The white smoke
area, the faster the liquid evaporates. The warmer the is composed of water droplets condensed from the air; there
liquid is, the faster it evaporates. The hot climate around is no liquid film on the solid pieces.
the Dead Sea means that water evaporates easily and the
sea has a high salt concentration (Figure 1.7).
5
Eventually, at a certain temperature, a liquid becomes

a
hot enough for gas to form within the liquid and not just
at the ~urface. Bubbles of gas appear inside the liquid
(Figure 1.8a). This process is known as boiling. It takes
p lace at a specific temperature, kn own as the boiling point
for each pure liquid (Figure 1.5).
Water evaporates fairly easily and has a relatively low
boiling point (100°C). Water is quite a volatile liquid.
Ethanol, with a boiling point of 78 °C, is more volatile
than water. It has a higher volatility than water and
evaporates more easily.
The reverse of evaporation is condensation. This is
usually brought about by cooling. However, we saw b
earlier that the gas state is the one most affected
by changes in pressure. It is possible, at normal
temperatures, to conden.se a gas into a liquid by
increasing the pressure,-without cooling.
We can see these different processes in action if we look
closely at a kettle as water boils (F igure 1.8b). Colourless,
invisible water vapour escapes from the kettle. Water
vapour is present in the clear region we can see at the
mouth of the kettle. The visible cloud of steam is made
up of droplets of liquid water formed by condensation as
the vapour cools in the air.
Figure 1.8 a: Water boiling in a glass kettle; bubbles are
KEY WORDS formed throughout the liquid. b: A boiling kettle produces
colourless, invisible water vapour that then condenses to
boiling: the process of change from liquid to gas produce a cloud of steam.
at the boiling point of the substance; a condition
under which gas bubbles are able to form within a
For a beaker of boiling water, the bubbles form when
liquid - gas molecules escape from the body of a
there are enough high-energy water molecules to give
liquid, not just from its surface
a pocket of gas with a pressure equal to atmospheric
boiling point: the temperature at which a liquid pressure. The boiling point of a liquid can change if
.. boils, when the pressure of the gas created above the surrounding pressure changes. The value given for
t he liquid equals atmospheri c pressure the boiling point is usually stated at the pressure of the
atmosphere at sea level (atmospheric pressure or standard
volatile: term that describes a liquid that pressure). If the surrounding pressure falls, the boiling
evaporates easily; it is a liquid with a low boiling point falls. The boiling point of water at standard
point because th ere are only weak intermolecular pressure is 100°C. On a high mountain, the boiling
forces between the molecules in the liquid point is lower than 100°C. If the surrounding pressure is
volatilit~: the property·of how easily a increased, the b oiling point rises.
liquid evaporates
~ondensation: t he change of a vapour or a gas
into a liquid; during this process heat is given out
to t he surroundings
6 >
6
1 States o.fJmatter
Pure substances Effect of impurities

A pure.substanue:. consists of only one substance without Seawater is impure water. This fact can be easily
any contaminating impurities. A pure substance melts demonstrated if you put some seawater in a dish and heat
and boils at definite temperatures. Table 1.2 shows it until all of the water evaporates. A solid residue of salt is
the precise melting points and boiling points of some left behind in the dish (you can see this effect in Figure 1.7,
common substances at atmospheric pressure. which shows solid salt formations on the surface of the
Dead Sea).
Impurities often affect the value of the melting or boiling
BoiliAg point of a substance. An impure substance sometimes
point melts or boils over a range of temperatures, not at the
1°c precise point of the pure substance.
oxygen gas -219 -183 Seawater freezes at a temperature below the freezing
nitrogen point of pure water (0 °C) and boils at a temperature
gas -210 - 196 above the boiling point of pure water (100 °C). Other
ethanol substances that contain impurities show differences in
(alcohol}
liquid - 117 78
their freezing and boiling points when compared with the
water Ii uid 0 100 known values for the pure substance.
sulfur solid 115 444
common
salt (sodium solid
Questions
801 1465
chloride) 1 State the names for the following physical changes:
copper solid 1083 2600 a liquid to solid
.~ carbon b liquid to gas at a precise temperature
gas -]BC
•>
dioxide c gas to liquid.
C•>Sublimes at atmospheric pressure 2 The melting and boiling points of three pure
substances are given in Table 1.3.
Table 1.2: Melting and boiling points of some common
chem ical substances.
Substance
Melting point Beiling point
;oc ;oc
ethanol -1 17 78
KEY WORDS
- - - -- -
methane - 182 -164
pure substance: a single chemical element
or compound - it melts and boils at definite
mercury -30 357
precise temperatures Table 1.3: Melting and boiling points of ethanol,
methane and mercury.
The values for the melting point and boiling point of a
pure substance are precise and predictable. This means a All three substances have negative values for
that we can use them to test the purity of a sample. their melting point. Which of them has the
These values can also be used to check the identity of lowest melting point?
an unknown substance. The melting point of a solid can b Which two substances are liquids at room
be measured using an electrically heated melting-point temperature? Explain your answer.
apparatus or by the apparatus described later in Figure 1.9. c What effect does the presence of an impurity
A substance's melting and boiling points in relation to have on the freezing point of a liq uid?
room temperature (standard taken as 25 °C) determine
whether it is usually seen as a solid, a liquid or a gas.
For example, if the melting point is below 25 °c and
the boiling point is above 25 °C, the substance will be a
liquid at room temperature.
il >
7
8
1 States of matte r
EXPERIMENTA L SKILLS 1.1
Plotting a cooling' curve Safety

In this experiment, you are going to plot It is important that you follow the safety ru les
cooling curves fo r two substances, A and B. This set out by your teacher for all practicals. In
experiment investigates the energy changes particular, pay attention to the type of Bunsen
taking place as a liquid cools down below its burner flame needed as well as the concentrations
freezing point. and volumes of chemicals used. Wear eye
protection throughout.
You will need: Getting started
• two beakers (250 cm-3) Before starting the experiment, make sure you
• Bunsen burner are fam iliar with the scale on the thermometer
·you are using. You will need to be able to read it
• tripod confidently. You can check on your readi ng of the
thermometer as you are heating up the water-bath .
• gauze
Make sure you and your partner are clear as to the
• heat-resistant mat
tasks you each have.
• stopwatch, stopclock er other timer
Method
• two boiling tubes labelled A and B
1 Fill a 250cm 3 beaker three-quarters full of water
• two stirring ther,mometers (-10 to 11Q 0 C). and heat using a Bunsen burner to make a
water-bath. Place a thermometer in the water.
Substance A is paraffin wax (choose a low m.p. Heat the water until it is at 90°C.
type, m.p. around 55 °C). Substance B is either
2 Put boiling t ubes containing a sample of each
octadecanoic acid (stearic acid) m.p. 70°C or
solid A and B into the water-bath (Figure 1.11 ).
phenyl salicylate (salol) m.p. 43 °C.
3 When t he solid has melted, place a
thermometer in each tube. There should be
boiling tube
enough liquid to cover the bulb at the base of
the thermometer.
.. 4 Remove the tubes from the water-bath and

stand them in an empty beaker for support.
250cm3
beake r hot water
,- 5 Look at the thermometer and record the
sample A sample B temperature in each tube. Then start the timer.
gauze
6 Look at the thermometer and record the
temperat ure in each tube every minute until the .
temperature reaches 40°C.
i
heat
tripod
7 Plot a graph for each set of readings with t ime
on the x-axis and temperature on the y-axis.
Questions
1 Which of the two substances is a pure

substance? Explain your answer.
Figure 1.11: Samples A and B are melted in a water-bath.
2 Explain any ways in which your method could
be improved to g ive more reliable results.
9 >
9
) CAMBRIDGE rGCSE™ CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
CONTINUED
Self-assessment
Complete the self-assessment checklist below to assess your graph drawing skills.
For each pofnt, award yourself:
2 marks if you did it really well

1 mark if you made a good attempt at it and partly succeeded
O mar;ks if you did not try to do it, or did mot succeed
~--- - -- - -- ·r
~ ""-·•- - - - - - - - ~....., - ~ , r ~ - - -
_, ~~~'i:.-~.:..-;:-: ( ~ -- - - i,--1~-1,,1
i=1__"~.. _.,,;r-!,.d
1,
Have you drawn the axes with a ruler, using most of the width and height of the grid?
,,
Have you used a good scale for th e x-axis and the y-axis, going up in 0.25s, 0.5s,
1 s or 2s? (Note that the axes do not necessarily need to start at the origin (0,0).)
Have you labelled the axes correctly, giving the correct units for the scales on
both axes?
Have you plotted each point precisely and correctly?
Have you used a small, neat cross or encircled dot for each point?
Have you drawn a single, clear best-fit line through each set of points?
Have you ignored any anomalous results when drawing the line through each set
of points?
Total (out of 14):
Your total score will reflect how clear and well-presented your graph is. Drawing graphs is an important skill
in chemistry as you need be able to deduce reliable information from your graph.
Take a look at where you gave yourself 2 ma~ks and where you gave yourself less than 2 marks. What did
you do well, and what aspects will you focus on next time? Having thought about your assessment, talk it
through with your teacher to gain further advice on areas that would help you improve your presentation
of graphical data.
Questions energy absorb ed energy absorbed

5 Sketch a cooling curve for water from 80°C to • gas
- 20°C, noting what is taking place in the different
regions of the graph.
6 Energy is needed to overcome the forces of C
attraction holding the particles in position in a solid.
Energy is absorbed during melting. Figure 1. 12 energy released
shows how energy is involved in the different
Figure 1.12: Energy changes involved in different cha nges
changes of state. Complete Figure 1.12 by providing
of state.
labels for the positions A, B and C.
10 )
10
;I States of ~att,e r
7 As an a lternative to following the cooli ng of a

substa nce, it is possible to draw a heating curve.
AJl
Figure 1.13 shows the heating curve for substance X.
A solid cannot A liquid can flow; it is a A gas is a fluid

flow. It has a flu id. It has a definite and spreads
solid+ definite shape volume but takes the throughout its
Ii uid and volume. shape of its container. container. It
has no definite
A volume.
Time Figure 1.14: The basic d ifferences between the physical

properties of the three states of matter.
Figure 1.13: Heating curve for substance X.
What physical state, or states, will X be in a t points Main p~ int s of the kine1ic
A, B, C a nd D on the curve?
pc\r:ticle t heory
The -kiQetic pa~tfok U1el)O'of matter describes the three
1.2 Kinetic particle different states, and the changes between them, in terms
of the mov.ement of particles. The major points of the
theory of matter theory are:
• All matter is made up of very small particles
Existence of atoms (different substances contain different types of
particles, such as atoms, 1J1Ql('j:~l11Sc,r ions).
-and molecule_s • Parti<;les are moving all the time (the higher the
temperature, the higher the average energy of
Elements and compounds mix and react to produce the
the particles).
wo rld around us. They produce massive objects 1such as
the 'gas giants' (the planets Jupiter and Saturn) that we • The freedom of movement and the arrangement of the
met at the start of this chapter. They also give rise to the particles is different for the three states of matter.
tiny highly structured crystals of solid sugar or salt. How • The pressure of a gas is produced by the atoms
do the elements organise themselves to give this variety? or molecules of the gas hitting the waJls of the
How can an element exist in the three different states of container. The more often the particles collide with
matter simply through a change i.n temperature? the walls, the greater the pressure.
Our modern understanding is based on the idea that ~-- ----- .
all matter is divided into very small particles known as ._t KE.Y\W.ORQS . _- '-'-"-=- I
Jwu1, The key ideas in our understanding are that:
,~r,n he smallest particle of an element that can
• each element is composed of its own tyVi of atom take part in a chernical reaction
• atoms of different elements can combine to make ,;,pef.i-o-p;tttk,~ ¢ ~fY=
a theory which accounts
t he molecules of a compound.
for the bulk properties of the different states of
This idea that all substaiices consist of very small particles matter in terms of the movement of particles
begins to explain the structure of the three different states (atoms or molecules) - the theory explains what
of matter. The different levels of freedom of movement of happens during changes in physical state
the particles explains some of the different featw·es of the
~i:\-11~:a group of atoms hel<:J together by
three states. Figure 1.14 illustrates the basic featutes of the
three states we discussed earlier (see Table 1.1). covalent bonds
...
11
12
1 States of matter
These faster moving

particles escape
l A
Condensation:
gas and liquid
both p resent
/
Freezing:
B liquid and solid
liquid both present
/
C
solid
Time
Figure 1.16: Faster moving particles leaving the surface of Figure 1.17: The energy changes taking place during the
a liquid, causing evaporation. cooling of a gas to a solid.
The fact that the space between the rapidly moving The cooling of the gas gives rise to a sequence of changes
particles in a gas is much greater than in the other two during which the particles move less rapidly and interact
states of matter explains why the volume of a gas is more strongly with each other. The substance passes
much more easily changed by conditions of temperature through the liquid state, eventually becoming a solid.
and pressure. If the temperature is raised then the Over the course of the experiment the temperature falls.
gas particles move faster and there is less chance of However, the graph shows two periods during which the
,,.. interaction between them. The gas particles move temperature remains constant. These regions are the time
faster and more freely and occ upy a greater volume. when first condensation, and then freezing takes place.
The opposite is true if the temperature is lowered. The
In region A (Figure t .17), the temperature is falling.
particles are moving more slowly. They are more likely to
The energy of the particles decreases. The particles
interact with each other and move together to occupy a
move more slowly and interact wit h each other more
smalJer volume.
strongly. The particles begin to come together to form
Changes in pressure also affect the volume of a gas the liquid. As the intermolecular forces increase between
sample. An increase in pressure pushes the par\icles the particles, energy is given out. This results in the
closer together meaning that the moving particles are temperature staying constant until the gas is completely
more Likely to interact with each other and move closer condensed to liquid.
together. The opposite is true when the external pressure
Once the liquid is formed the temperature starts to fall
is lowered. The particles occupy a greater space and
again (region B). The liquid cools. The particles in the
interactions between the particles are less likely.
liquid slow down and eventually the solid begins to form.
The forces holding the solid together form and energy
is given out. While the solid is forming this release of
The interpretation of a energy keeps the temperature constant. The temperature
stays the same until freezing is complete.
cooling curve
A fter the solid has formed the temperature falls again
The way the particles in the three states are arranged and
(region C). T he particles in the solid vibrate less strongly
interact with each other also helps to explain the energy
as the temperature falls.
changes involved when a substance is heated or cooled.
Figure 1.17 summarises the energy changes that take place
at the different stages of a cooling-curve experiment. KEYWORDS
intermolecular forces: the weak attractive forces
that act between molecules
13 >
13
) CAMBRIDGE IGGSE1'M CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
The key points about the processes taking place during

condensation and freezing are: 1.3 Mixtures of
• as the particles come closer together, new forces of
interaction take place substances ancJl diffusion
• this means that energy is given out during The chemical world is very complex, owing to the vast
these changes range of pure substances available and to the variety of
ways in which these pure substances can mix with each
• therefore, the temperature remains unchanged until other. EachmixtuFe must be made from at least two
the ltquid or solid is totally formed . parts, which may be either solid, liquid or gas. There are
As energy is given out during these changes, a number of different ways in which the three states can
condensation and freezing are exothermic c'hang'es be combined. In some, the states are completely mixed to
(Chapter 7). become one single state or phase. Technically, the term
soluiR>ii' is used for this type of mixture composed of two
Carrying out the experiment in the opposite direction, or more substances.
starting from the solid, would give a heating ct'irve. In
this case, the temperature stays constant during melting Solid salt dissolves in liquid water to produce a liquid
and b6iling. At these stages, energy has fo be put in to mixture. This is called a salt solution (Figure 1.18).
overcome the forces between the particles. The energy The solid has completely disappeared into the liquid.
put in breaks these interactions and the particles are able In general terms, the solid that dissolves in the liquid is
to n\ove more freely and faster. As energy has to be put called the solute'•The liquid in which the solid dissolves
in during these changes, melting, evaporation and boiling is called the s'olvenf In other types of mixture, the
are endothermic dianges (Chapter 7). states remain separate. One phase is broken up into
small particles, droplets or bubbles, within the main
What are the forces that hold a solid or liquid together? phase. The most obvious example of this type of
They must be attractive forces between the particles. mixture is a suspension of fine particles of a solid in a
They are the forces that acl when a substance condenses liquid, such as we often get after a precipitation reaeticm
or freezes. Their formation releases energy. However, (Chapters 12 and 22).
their nature depends on the substance involved. For
substances such as water or ethanol they act between the
molecules present, and so are iniermolecuiar forces. KEY WORDS
~ - - --------- - - - - -- --
m fx-ture: two or more substances mixed together
but not chemically combined - the substances
can be separated by physical means
exoth~ffitfc chanE{es: a process or chemical I
reaction in which neat energy is produced and sofution: is formed when a substance (solute)
released to the surroundings. dissolves into another substance (solvent)
) t:.H for an exothermic change has a
sofbt~: the solid substance that has dissolved in a
negative value.
liquid (the solvent) to form a solution
~iidot~f:iFffi rc tAan~i : a process or chemical
reaction that takes in heat from the surroundings. S"olvent: the liquid that dissolves the solid solute
to form a solution; water is the most common
) t:.H for an endothermic change has a
solvent but liquids in organic chemistry that can
positive value.
act as solvents are called organic solvents
sbsptnsion: a mixture containing small particles

of an insoluble solid, or droplets of an insoluble
liquid, spread (suspended) throughout a liquid
.... ~e~l~i\ t:lon, _~~r•a r~action in which an

insoluble salt is prepared from solutions of two
soluble salts
14 >
14
1 States of matter
Solubility of solids in liquids

If we try to dissolve a substance such as copper(II)
solid
solute sulfate in a fixed volume of water, the solution becomes
more concentrated as we add more solid. A concentrated
solution contains a high proportion of solute. A dilute
solution contains a small proportion of solute. If we
keep adding more solid, a point is reached when no
more will dissolve at that temperature. This is a saturated
solution. To get more solid to dissolve, the temperature
must be increased. The concentration of solute in a
.
dissolving saturated solution is the solubility of the solute at
that temperature.
The solubility of most solids increases with temperature.
solution -
The process of crystallisation depends on these
liquid solvent
solute particles observations. When a saturated solution is cooled, the
cannot be seen solution can hold less solute at the lower temperature
and some solute crystallises out.
Figure 1.18: When solute dissolves in a solvent, the solute
particles are completely dispersed in the liquid.
KEY WORDS
soluble: a solute t hat dissolves in a
Solutions particular solvent
We most often think of a solution as being made of a insoluble: a substance that does not dissolve in a
solid dissolved in a liquid. Two-thirds of the Earth's particular solvent
surface is covered by a solution of various salts in miscible: if two liquids form a completely uniform
water. The salts are totally dispersed in the water and mixture when added together, they are said to
cannot be seen. However, other substances that are not be miscible
normally solid are dissolved in seawater. For example,
the dissolved gases, oxygen and carbon dioxide, are alloys: mixtures of elements (usually metals)
important for life to exist in the oceans. designed to have the properties useful for a
particular purpose, e.g. solder (an alloy of t in and
lead) has a low melting point
A closer look at solutions
.. Water is the commonest solvent in use, but other saturated solution: a solution that contains
liquids are also important. Most of these other solvents as much dissolved solute as possible at a
are organic liquids, such as ethanol, propanone and particular temperature
trichloroethane. These organic solvents are important concentration: a measure of how much solute
because they wi11 often dissolve substances that do not
is dissolved in a solvent to make a solution.
dissolve in water. If a substance dissolves in a solvent, it
Solutions can be dilute (with a high proportion of
is said to be soluble; if it does not dissolve, it is insoluble.
solvent), or concentrated (with a high proportion
Less obvious, but quite common, are solutions of one of solute)
liquid in another. Alcohol mixes (dissolves) coi'npletely
solubility: a measure of how much of a solute
with water. Alcohol and water are completely mistilbfe:
dissolves in a solvent at a particular temperature
this means that they make a solution.
Alloys are similar mixtures of metals, though we do not
usually call them solutions. They are made by mixing the
liquid metals together (dissolving one metal in the other)
before solidifying the alloy.
15 )
15
Solubility of gases in liquids

Unlike most solids, gases become Jess soluble in water as
the temperature rises. The solubility of gases from the
air in water is quite small, but the amount of dissolved
oxygen is enough to support fish and other aquatic life.
The solubility of gases increases with pressure. Sparkling
drinks contain carbon dioxide dissolved under pressure.
They 'fizz' when the pressure is released by opening the
container. T hey go 'flat' if the container is left to stand
open, and more quickly if left to stand in a warm place.
Diffusion in fluids
Some of the earliest evidence for the kinetic model of Figure 1.19: The diffusion of potassium manganate(VII)
the states of matter came from observations on diffusion, in water.
where particles spread to fill the space available to them.
Whether a solid begins to break up like this in a liquid
The main ideas involved in diffusion are:
depends on the particular solid and liquid involved.
• particles move from a region of higher But the spreading of the solute particles throughout the
concentration towards a region of lower liquid is an example of diffusion. Diffusion in solution is
concentration; eventually, the particles are evenly also important when the solute is a gas. This is especially
spread. Their concentration is the same throughout. important in breathing. Diffusion contributes to the
movement of oxygen from the lungs to the blood, and of
• the rate of diffusion in liquids is much slower than
in gases. carbon dioxide from the blood to the lungs.
• diffusion does not take place in solids as the

Diffusion of gases
particles cannot move from place to place.
A few drops of liquid bromine are put into a gas jar and
the lid is repla.ced. The liquid bromine evaporates easily.
l<EY WORD Liquid bromine is highly volatile. After a short time, the
diffusion: the process by which different brown gas begins to spread throughout the jar. The jar
1
fluids mix as a result of the random motions of becomes full of brown gas. Bromine vaporises easily and
their particles its gas will completely fill the container (Figure 1.20).
,. L__ __ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ ~
Gases diffuse to fill all the space available to them.
Diffusion is important for our 'sensing' of the world
around us. It is the way that smells reach us.
Dissolving
The atoms or molecules in gases move at high speeds.
A potassium manganate(VII) crystal is placed at the
We are being bombarded constantly by nitrogen and
bottom of a dish of water. The dish is then left to stand.
oxygen molecules in the air, which are travelling at about
At first the water around the crystal becomes purple as
l800km/hour. However, these particles collide very
the solid dissolves (Figure 1.19). Particles move off from
frequently with other particles in the air (many millions
the surface of the crystal into the water. Eventual!y,
of collisions per second), so their path is not direct.
the crystal dissolves completely and the purple colour
These frequent collisions slow down the overall rate of
spreads through the liquid. The whole solution becomes
diffusion from one place to another. The pressure of a
purple. The particles from the solid become evenly
gas is the result of collisions of the fast-moving particles
spread through the water.
with the walls of the container.
16 )
16
1 States of matter
Not all gases diffuse at the same rate. The speed at

which a gas diffuses depends on the mass of the particles
involved. At the same temperature, molecules that
have a lower mass move, on average, faster than those
with a higher mass. This is shown by the experiment in
Figure J .21 . The ammonia and hydrochloric acid fumes
react when they meet, producing a white smoke ring of
ammonium chloride. This smoke ring is made of fine
particles of solid ammonium chloride. The fact that the
ring is not formed halfway along the tube shows that
ammonia, the lighter molecule of the two, diffuses faster.
The important points derived from the kinetic particle
theory relevant here are:
• heavier gas particles move more slowly than lighter
particles at the same temperature
• larger molecules diffuse more slowly than
smaller ones
• the rate of diffusion is inversely related to the mass
of the particles
• the average speed of the particles increases with an
increase m temperature.
Figure 1.20: Bromine vapour diffuses throughout the

container to fill the space available.
Figure 1.21 : Ammonia and hydrochloric acid fumes diffuse at different rates.
17 )
17
EXPERIMENTAL SKILLS 1.2
Investigating diffusion in liquids Met hod

This experiment helps to demonstrate the process 11 Put a Petri dish on a white tile or piece of white
of diffusion in a liquid. Diffusion is shown by t he paper. Fill the Petri dish nearly to the top with
formation of an insoluble precipitate where the ions deionised water.
meet in a solution.
2 Using tweezers, put a crystal of silver nitrate at
one side of the dish and a crystal of potassium
You will need: iodide at the other side (Figure 1.22}.
• Petri dish 3 Look at the crystals. Notice that as crystals
begin to dissolve in t he water, a new
• tweezers
compound is formed within the solution.
• white tile
Petri dish
• silver nitrate, one cryst al
containing water
• potassium iodide, one crystal
1 crystal of
• distilled or dei0nised water
silver nitrate
1 crystal of
• test-tubes potassium
iodide
• silver nitrate solution
• pota,ssium iodide solution
• dropping pipettes.
Figure 1.22: Experiment to investigate diffusion
Safety th rough water.
Wear eye protection throughout. Use tweezers

to handle the crystals. Be careful with chemicals. Questions
Never ingest them and always wash your 1 What is the precipitate formed in this reaction?
hands after handling t hem. Note that silver
nitrate is corrosive, oxid ising and can st ain 2 Write a word equation to show the reaction
.. t he skin. Silver nitrate is also hazardous to the

aquatic environment. Waste silver nitrate solution
taking place.
3 What factors control where the solid is formed
must not be· poured down the drain.
in the Petri dish?
Getting started 4 Why does the solid not form exactly in the
Before starting, try the reaction between potassium middle of the dish?
iodide and silver nitrate solutions in a test-tube.
Add 1 cm3 of aqueous silver nitrate to a similar
volume of potassium iodide solution. Note the
formation of the precipitate, particularly its colour.
18 >
18
1 States of matter
Questions porous pot

air~ allows gas
8 A small amount of liquid bromine is placed in a gas molecules
jar, which is then sealed with a lid. Evaporation of to d iffuse
the liquid bromine takes place. air
Bri<J) -+ Brz<g)
Use the ideas of the kinetic theory to explain why,
after about an hour, the gaseous bromine molecules
have spread to evenly occupy the whole container.
same level
9 A teacher carried out a class demonstration on
both sides
diffusion similar to that using ammonia (M, = 17)
and hydrochloric acid (M, = 36.5) (Figure l.21).
However, they replaced the ammonia with coloured
methylamine (M, = 31), which reacts in a similar liquid
way to ammonia (note that M , is the relative
molecular mass of the substance).
a Where would you predict the position of the a
smoke ring to be in this experiment? Explain
your answer. hydrogen
b Suggest other gases similar to hydrochloric porous pot
acid that could replace it in this demonstration
(use textbooks or the internet to find a air
possible acid).
10 Experiments comparing the rate of diffusion of
different gases can be done using the apparatus higher level
shown in Figure 1.23. this side
large
A cylinder of porous pot is used through which gas b eaker
molecules are able to pass. Any change in pressure
in the cylinder pot shows itself in a change of liquid
levels in the side tube. When there is air both inside
and outside the pot, the liquid levels are the same.
I
Explain why the levels of liquid change when
hydrogen is placed outside the porous pot cylinder
(Figure l.23 b). b
Figure 1.23: Gas d iffusi on through a porous pot a: with air

KEY WORDS
inside and outside the pot, b: with hydrogen o utside, air
porous pot: an unglazed pot that has channels inside, the pot .
(pores) through which gases can pass
19 >
19
) CAMBRIDGE IGCSE'l'"4 CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
ACTIVITY 1.1
The k inetic model of matter Your model, diagram or display should answer
three of the following questions:
Modelling the arrangement of the particles in a
solid, liquid or gas is one way to help understand • Why can three states of matter exist?
the properties of the d ifferent states of matter.
• Why is it that it takes time for a solid to melt?
Working in a small group, create a model or visual
representation that explains the movement of the • Why do solids not diffuse over a normal
particles in the different states. Think about: time period?
• What could you use to represent the particles? • What is different about substances that means
(Balls or marbles in a tray or dish, circular that they each have different melting points?
pieces of card on a plate, groups of people, • Different substances also have different boiling
symbols perhaps?) points. Is the reason for this similar to why they
• How will you arrange the particles to have different melting points?
demonstrate solids, liquids and gases? • Why is it that you can feel a liquid cool when it
• How could you represent the movement of evaporates in your hand?
the particles? After you have taken time to answer the questions,
each group should choose one of the questions to
demonstrate how your model works to the rest of
the class.
-- -
R~F~ECTION "
To understand some the ideas introduced in this • Are there any experiments which give you clues
chapter, you need to be able to think about the to the exi~ence of sub-microscopic particles?
behaviour of particles smaller than you can see.
• How useful do you find the different approaches?
., What strategies could you use to help you to
visualise particles such as atoms and molec~les?
SUMMARY
There are three different physical states in which a substance can exist: solid, liquid or gas.
The structures of solids, liquids and gases can be described in terms of particle separation, arrangement
and motion.
Different changes in state can take place, including melting and freezing, evaporation and condensation,
and boiling.
Changes of state can be produced by changing conditions of temperature and/or pressure.
Pure substances have precise melting and boiling points.
The kinetic particle model describes the idea that the particles of a substance are in constant morion and that
the nature and amount of motion of these particles differs in a solid, liquid or gas.
,...
20 )
20
1 States of matter
CONTINUED
Changing physical state involves energy being absorbed or given out, the temperature of the substance staying
> constant while the change takes place (as illustrated by the experimental construction of cooling curves).
Changes in temperature or the external pressure produce changes in the volumes of gases which can be
explained in terms of the kinetic particle theory.
D iffusion in liquids and gases is the spreading of part icles to fill all of the space available.
The rate of diffusion of a gas is dependent on molecular size, with molecules of lower mass diffusing more
> quickly than those of higher mass.
PROJECT
The 'Goldilocks principle' The 'Goldilocks Zone': Earth orbits the Sun at
just the right distance for liquid water to exist on
How we experience the world around us depends
its surface. It is neither too hot nor too cold for
upon the physical conditions and states in which
this. Research this situation, which is known as the
substances exist. This is particularly true in the case
'Goldllocks Zone', and its meaning. Then think how
of water. The Earth is the only body in our solar it applies t o the orbits of Venus, Earth and Mars.
system where water exists in all three states of matter.
Exo-planets and life beyond our solar system:
Work in a group of three or four. Use the internet to
The Kepler and CHEOPS probes have searched
search for some information on the topics listed
for planets outside our solar syst em (exo-planets)
here. Then select one to research in detail.
where life may have evolved. Research these
The presence of water: What is distinctive about missions and find o\:lt the characteristics of the
the p hysical conditions on Earth that mean that life other solar systems and planets they were hoping
could begin, and continue to exist, here? Why is to find.
water so important when thinking about how life Decide how you will share out the tasks between
began? Is Earth the only planet to have water and
the members of your group. Then bring your
therefore life? Have other planets had wa~r iA their
research together as an illustrated talk delivered
past? Recent space t o the whole class. A good illustrated talk should
.. probes have been
sent to try to find
include the following:
water o n Mars • a clear structure
and t he moons
of Jupiter and • a strong introduction that includes det ails of
the question(s) you have investigated
Saturn (Figure
1.24). Research the • a short summary of the d ifferent areas you
various missions to researched: make sure your points are in a
find out whether sensible order
there are other
planets in our solar • a list of the key conclusions at the end
system where life
may have existed.
• the key information presented in a graphic
Figure 1.24: Saturn's moon format (e.g. as a table, chart, pie cbart)
Enceladus has a global ocean instead of just text: illustrations will make your
of liqµid salty water beneath presentation much easier for your audience to
its crust. understand and help them to remember your
key points.
21 )
21
.,
1 A group of friends sit sharing a spet:ial meal together. When the food
was put on the table, they could all smell the.appetising food. How did
the smell reach them when the dishes were placed on the table?
A decomposition
B diffusion
C distillation
D decolourisation [1]
2 The figure shows one of the changes of physical state.
Which change of state is shown?

A boili,ng
B condensation
C melting
D evaporation [1]
3 The figure shows ice cubes floating on the surface in a glass of fizzy drink.
In which of A-D are the partieles close together but free to move past
each other?
A bubbles B glass C d1tink D iee cubes [1]
22 )
22
1 States of matter
CONTINUED
4 Which of A- D in the figure shows the process 0f diffusion?
Key
o} .
• d ifferent atoms
----------11 09• •• 0 .o 0 .
[1]
5 An experiment on the diffusion of ammonia and hydrogen chloride gases

is carried out in a glass tube. The gases are given off by solutions held at
each end of the tube.
!II Cd■
A
\
cotton wool cot ton wool
soaked in soaked in
concentrat ed concentrated
hydrochloric ammonia
acid solut ion
When the two gases meet, they react to produce a white solid,
ammonium chloride.
Which line (A-D) shows where the white solid is formed? [1]
23 )
23
) CAMBRIDGE' IGCSE™ CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
., t•· •l• \' .,;;, * • -

:__ CO~ITINUED ·
6 The figure shows the arrangement of particles in each state of matter.
solid liquid gas COMMAND WORDS

a In a gas, the particles are moving rapidly and randomly. Describe the describe: state the
.movement of the particles in a liquid. (2) points of a topic /
b How does the movement of the particles in a solid change when it give characteristics
is heated? (11 and main featu res
c What name is given to the process which happens when liquid water explain, set out
changes to water vapour at roem temperature? (1) purposes or
d What is meant by the termfreezing? (1 ) reasons/make
[Total: 5) the relationships
between things
.....
7 A teacher o~ns a bottle of perfume at the front of her laboratory. She
notices a smell of flowers. A few minutes later, students at the frc;m t of
,, evident/provide
why and/or how and
the lab notice the smell too. Those students at the back do not notice it support with relevant
un ti! later. evidence
a What two processes must take place for the smell from the perfume to
reach the back of the lab? (2)
Later in the day, when the room had oooled, the teacher tries the same
experiment with a different class. The smell is the same but it takes
longer to reach the back of the lab.
b Explain this observation by reference te the particles ef perfume. (21
[Total: 4)
24 )
24
1 States of matter
> . he figure shows the change in tem~rdture as a substance cools down.
~
.....
~
2
~
Q)
a. A
E
~
Melting point C
8
D
Time/s
is happening to the substance between C and
soaked in indicator soaked in

ammonia paper hydrochloric
' acid
25 >
25
CONTINUED
26 >
26
1 States of matter
SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST '• ' ·"'";'>,•;;._~:,•.,
After studying this chapter, think about how confident you are with the different topics. This will help you to see
any gaps in your knowledge and help you to learn more effectively.
state the major differences between the three states

I.I
of matter
describe the changes of state observed with
I.I
increasing or decreasing temperature
describe the effect of changes in temperature on the
1.2
motion of particles in the different states of matter
interpret the shape of a cooling curve for a
> substance in terms of the kinetic particle theory
1.2
state the effects of changing temperature and

1.2
pressure on the volume of a gas
explain, in terms of the kinetic particle theory, the
> effects of changing temperature and pressure on the

volumes of gases
1.2
,0, understand how solids and gases can dissolve in

1.3
,,:
liquids and the terms used to describe this
describe diffusion in gases and liquids 1.3
describe the effect of relative molecular mass on the
1.3
rate of diffusion of a gas
27
learn how atoms are the_particles that make up the different elements
• study the nuclear model of the atom
• learn abm:Jt the relative charge and mass '<!If the subatomic particles: the proton, neutron and electron
• discover how the structure of any atom is defined by its proton number and mass number
• learn how the isotopes of an element have the same proton number but different numbers of neutrons
• le-arn h-ow the electrr011s -in 'l:lm atom ,are .organised in shells around the nucleus
• see how the electronic comfigur-ati0r:1 of 't he atoms of an element relates to its position in the
Periodic Table
~l _: :)_~am_that _the isotopes .o~.ar:i ~lement all have the same chemical propert(~s
1L~-.:: _.._ ·~ .~-::•t · - · -~ · · . ' :" -~·Ji:}•~,~~1~'!¥-": :""''" "-~;._t.<.~~,~•~..S~W,1i.
·, • -~·, · ~, • ~ ?_-'-'. ··
..).t~:~ ~~~,~~:.t ·~ow:: ?5~1culate ~h.;~. re'9t v,~_,<'!to_mic mass of an el~ment_. ·.. · ., ,. .. · . ,:.
28
2 Atomic structure
r.....,
GETTING STARTED
Your earlier science courses will have introduced 1 What do you understand that the formula of
you to the world of the very small. In b iology, water means? What do the letters 'H' and 'O'
you may have used a microscope to look at some mean in the formula? What is the difference
microscope slides to see the detail of leaves and between an atom·and a molecule?
small flies. In chemistry, we have seen that matter
is made up of very small part icles such as atoms 2 . Are you aware of there being any particles that
are smaller than an atom?
or molecules.
We have also seen that the chemical formula for
water is H2O. From your previous studies, discuss
the following questions to begin your study of the
sub-microscopic world:
SEEING IS BELIEVING
Scientists have used new imaging techniques New forms of atomic microscope have been
to 'see' atoms. Over the past few decades, the developed, including the atomic force microscope
use of scanning tunnelling microscopes (STM) and the quantum microscope. More recent
- a form of 'atomic microscopy' - has opened advances using both scanning tunnelling and
up the manipulation of the atomic world. In atomic force microscopes have led to the building
1990, scientists at the Zurich laboratories of the of specific individual molecules. One such molecule
multinational technology company IBM were able was built to celebrate the 2012 Olympic Games in
to create an 'atomic logo' using individual xenon London. The single molecule was created using
atoms. The ability to move and position individual a combination of clever synthetic chemistry and
atoms has led to otner images of interactions state-of-the-art imaging technique. As you would
between atoms. One such image is the atomic expect, this molecule, called olympicene, was
'corral' of 48 iron atoms arranged in a ring, which made up of five rings and was about 100 000 times
appeared in the international press (Figure 2.1). thinner than a human hair. Further advances in
microscopy and image processing are anticipated
that will allow us to observe digitally and 'see' the
reactions between individual atoms.
Discussion questions
1 Which atoms do you think form the basic
structure of olympicene? Think of the element
that forms the basis of life.
2 Olympicene was made up of five hexagons
arranged with shared sides as in a honeycomb.
Predict the structure of the molecule. How
many atoms do you think make up the skeleton
structu~e 0f the five rings of olympicene?
Figure 2.1: An atomic 'corral' of 48 iron atoms in a ring
on a copper surface. The iron atoms are viewed using a
scanning tunnelling microscope (IBM, published 1993).
29 >
29
2.1 Atoms·and elements 98% of the mass of the Earth's crust. Two elements,
silicon and oxygen, which are bound together in silicate
Every substance around us is made up of atoms. They rocks, make up almost three-quarters of the crust. Only
are the incredibly small particles from which all the certain elements are able to form the complex compounds
that are found in living things.,For example, the human
material world is built (Figure 2.2).
body contains 65% oxygen, I 8% carbon, I0% hydrogen,
We talked of atoms, and the molecules they can form, 3% nitro~en, 2% calcium and 2% of other elements.
when discussing the kinetic particle theory of matter
in Chapter I. A substance made up of just one type of
KEYWORDS
atom is called an element. Elements cannot be broken
down into anything simpler py chemical reactions. element: a substance that cannot be further
There are now I 18 known elements, but most of divided into simpler substances by chemical
the known mass of the universe consists of just two methods; all the atoms of an element contain the
elements, hydrogen (92%) and helium (7%), with all same number of protons
the other elements contributing only l % to the total compound: a substance formed by the chemical
(Figure 2.3). How a certain number of these elements combination of two or more elements in
concentrated together to form the Earth is of great fixed proportions
interest and significance. There are 94 elements found
naturally on Earth but just eight account for more than
Decreasing size
..,,__o-
Die Grain of sand Bacteria haemoglobin Atom
1 cm 1 1 1 1
100 cm 10000 cm 1000000 cm 1000000000 cm
Figure 2.2: A sense of perspective on the size of the atom.
30
2 At omic structure
b
Structure -of the atom
-
KEY WORDS
Our modem understanding of the atom is based on
electron! a subatomic particle with negligible
the atomic theory put forward by the English chemist
mass and a relative charge of - 1; electrons are
John Dalton in 1807. Dalton's idea was that atoms were
present in all atoms, locat ed in the shells (energy
the basic building blocks of the elements. He thou_g ht
levels) outside the nucleus
of them as indivisible particles that could join together
to inake molecules. Although certain parts of the proton: a subatomic particle with a relat ive
theory have had to change as a result of what we have atomic mass of 1 and a charge of +1 found in the
discovered since Dalton's time, his theory was one of nucleus of all atoms
the great leaps of understanding in chemistry. It meant
that we could explain many natural processes. Whereas nucleus: (of an atom) t he central reg ion of an
Dalton only had theories for the existence of atoms, atom that is made up of t he protons and neutrons
modern techniques (e.g. scanning tunnelling microscopy) of the atom; the electrons orbit around the
can now directly reveal the presence of individual atoms. nucleus in different 'shells' or 'energy .levels'
Research since Dalton's time has shown that atoms are neutron: an uncharged subatom ic particle
made up of several subatomic particles. The electron was present in t he nucleus of atoms - a neutron has a
discovered in 1897, followed soon after by the proton. mass of 1 relative to a proton
Crucial experiments then showed that an atom is mostly
subatomiC' particles: very small particles -
space occupied by the negatively charged electrons,
protons, neutrons and electrons - from which all
surrounding a very small, positively charged nucleus. The atoms are made
nucleus is at the centre of the atom and contains almost
all the mass of the atom. By 1932, when the neutron was
discovered, it was clear that atoms consisted of three
subatomic particles - protons, neutrons and electrons.
These particles are universal - all atoms are made from
them. The atom remains the smallest particle that shows
the chemical characteristics of a particular element.
Note that the term subatomic particles, while a useful
description, is not an essential term to learn.
,
ACTIVITY 2.1
I Understanding atomic structure - a timeline On your t imeline, try to answer the

of discovery following questions:
The discovery of the nature of the subatomic 1 What was remarkable about th~ structure
I particles that make up all atoms took place in a
relatively short space of t ime around the beginning
of t he atom suggested by the Geiger and
Marsden gold foil experiments carried out in
of t he 20th cent ury. Working in a group, investigate Rutherforp's laboratory?
this key period in the history of science and
produce a timeline showing how our understanding 2 What is it about t he nat ure of the neutron
of t he model of t he atom developed. You should t hat made it the last of the part icles to
include word s and phrases such as: be discovered?
indivisible, subatomic particles, protons, neutrons, Once your t imeline is complete, work individually to
electrons, 'plum pudding' model, nuclear model, answer this question:
nucleus, orbiting electrons.
3 What do you t hink was the most import ant
Key scientists to research include J. J. Thompson, discovery? Justify your answer.
Hantaro Nagaoka, Ernest Rutherford, James
Chadwick and Niels Bohr.
I 31 )
31
CONTINUED
Peef assessment Points to consider when preparing your own timeline

Once y0ur group has completed a timeline and you
and in your review of the other group's work:
have all answered the questions as a group and • Are all the major discoveries and
individually (question 3), exchange your group's experiments included?
timeline and answers with another group. Now
review the timeline and the answers prepared by • Has the work and discoveries of any scientists
the other group. When you have finished your other than those listed in the introduction
group review, share your feedba~k and cemments been included?
with each other. • Are the events in the correct time sequence?
• Is the timeline presented in a clear way

and can the information be quickly and
easily understood?
Characteristics of protons, I,-,

r l
. .' .. 7
r( • • ' _I
,, "1 ','~. - .·
, -
, - 'r;ffr ~~\ ~~-~
·'' i ·;m!ffflW~~~-
, z 4::i~
-~1~.._,,,.,,,
'*I
) ~ )~ 1~•.t.-.'
_;..] 1 ''½f -,~ -------'---·

neutrons and electrons .J__
proton
-- •
1 +1 in nucleus
The three subatomic particles are found in distinct
neutron 1 0 in nucleus
regions of the atom. The protons and neutrons are
located in the small central nucleus. The electrons 1
are present in the space surrounding the nucleus. The outside
electron 1840 -1
nucleus
electrons are held within the atom by an electrostatic (negligible)
force of attraction between them and the positive charge
of the protons in the nucleus. Table 2.1: Properties of the subatomic particles.
The key characteristics of these three subatomic

particles are listed in Table 2.1. You will note that The simplest atom is the hydrogen atom, which has one
proton in its nucleus. It is the only atom that has no
protons and neutrons have almost the same mass. Bbth
are given a relative mass of I. Electrons have virtually neutrons; it consists of one proton and one electron.
., no mass (1/1840 or 0.00054 of the mass of a proton). The next simplest atom is that of helium. This has
An important feature of these different particles is two protons and two neutrons in the nucleus, and two
their electric charge. Protons and electrons have equal orbiting electrons (Figure 2.4).
and opposite charges (+I and -1, respectively), while
neutrons are electrically neutral (have no charge).
Although atoms contain electrically charged particles,
the atoms themselves are electrically neutral (they have
no overall charge). This must mean that in any atom
there are an equal number of protons and electrons. In
this way, the total positive charge on the nucleus (due to
the protons) is balanced by the total negative charge of
the orbiting electrons.
32 >
32
2 Atomic structure
ucleus made present is called the mass number or nuclt.>on number of an

of protons e electron atom. The mass number is given the symbol A.
and neutrons e/ This has one negative electrical charge (-1 ).
It has hardly any mass.
The proton 8 has one positive charge KEYWO~DS . . .
(+ 1) and a mass of 1 unit.
proton number (or atomic number) (Z): the
II e neutron e has no electrical charge
and a mass of 1 unit.
number of protons in the nucleus of an atom
mass number (or nucleon number} (A): the total

number of protons and neutrons in the nucl eus of
A helium atom has these charged particles in it: an atom
2 protons charge +2-,__ these charges
2 electrons charge -2 ~ cancel out
We say the charges balance. An important way of representing a particular atom
The atom has no overall electrical charge. of an element is to combine the chemical symbol of
A helium atom has: the element (discussed in more detail in Chapter 4)
2 protons mass 2 units with the proton and mass numbers of the atom. The
2 neutrons mass 2 units symbol Z representing the proton number and symbol A
2 electrons with hardly any mass representing the mass number of an atom can be written
So a helium atom has a tota l mass of: alongside the symbol for that element, in the general
2 + 2 = 4 units
format; X. Figure 2.5 shows how a helium atom's
Figure 2.4: Structure of a helium atom. structure is written in this way.
This is the mass number, This is the symbol

Lithium is the next simplest atom after helium. the number of protons for helium.
A lithium atom has three protons, four neutrons and anc;! neutronr together.
three electrons. The subatomic arrangement of larger
atoms gets more complicated with the addition of more
protons and electrons. The number of neutrons required 4
This is the atomic He
to hold the nucleus together increases as the atomic
number (proton number).- 2
size increases. An atom of gold consists of 79 protons,
118 neutrons and 79 electrons.
Figure 2.5: Representing the structure o f a helium atom
using the format ; X .
Proton {atomic) number and + • ~ ~ '
Using this format, an atom of lithium is represented'as _.,,

., mass {nucleon) number ; Li. The atoms of-parbon, oxygen am! uranium ar,er
Only hydrogen atoms have one proton in their nuclei.
represented as ~C, :o 8
and~2 U.
Only helium atoms have two protons. Indeed, only gold When the proton and inass numbers are known for the
atoms have 79 protons. The number of protons in the atoms of an element, we can work out the following:
nucleus of an atom determines which element it is. T his
• proton number (Z) = number of protons in
important number is known as the proton number or the· nucleus
atomic number of an atom. The proton number is given . : ·' .. .
the symbol Z. • mass number (A) = number of protons -t number
of ..neutrons
,
We have seen that protons alone do not make up all
the mass of an atom. The neutrons in the nucleus also It is also possible to establish two other
contribute to the total mass. Because a proton and important relationships:
a neutron have the same relative mass, the mass of a • number of electrons = number of protons
particular atom depends on the total number of protons = atomic number
and neutrons present. Protons and neutrons are known as
nucleons and the total number of protons and neutrons • number of neutrons = mass number - atomic
number= A-Z
33 )
33
'·,,
-'
. ·t
-- - - - -- ~--- - - - -· _::...L \
-- --
hydrogen H 1 1 1 0 1
helium He 2 4 2 2 2
lithium Li 3 7 3 4 3
beryllium Be 4 9 4 5 4
carbon C 6 12 6 6 6
oxygen 0 8 16 8 8 8
sodium Na 11 23 11 12 11
calcium Ca 20 40 20 20 20
gold Au 79 197 79 118 79
uranium u 92 238 92 146 92
Table 2.2: Subatomic composition and structure of atoms of d ifferent elements.
Table 2.2 shows the numbers of protons, neutrons and

electrons in particular atoms in various elements. Note 2.2 Isotopes
that the rules apply even to the smallest or largest atoms.
An atom of any element is defined by the number of the Measuring the mass of atoms
different constituent subatomic particles present in that
A single atom cannot be weighed on a balance.
atom. The most important number is the proton number
However, the mass of one atom can be compared to
of that atom as it defines which element it belongs to. We
that of another using a mass spectrometer. Since we are
shall see later in this chapter, and in Chapter 4, that the
comparing the masses of atoms, the values we obtain
Periodic Table of the elements is arranged in order of
are relative values and we need to set a standard against
increasing proton number. For example, magnesium is
which other atoms are measured. The element carbon
the twelfth atom in the table, so it must have 12 protons
and 12 electrons in its atoms. has been chose_n as the standard. Carbon was chosen as
the standard because, as we shall see in Chapters 18-20,
there are far more compounds containing carbon than
any other element. The masses of all other atoms are
Questions compared to the mass of a carbon atom. This gives a
., 1 What are the relative masses of a proton, neutron series of values of the relath·e atomic mass (A ) for the
and electron, given that a proton has a mass of 1? different elements. '
2 How many protons, neutrons and electrons are
there in an atom of phosphorus, which has a proton KEYWORDS
number of 15 and a mass number of 31?
3 Explain the terms atom and element, and include mass spectrometer: an instrument in which
a clear description of the relationship between the atoms or molecules are ionised and then
two terms. accelerated; the ions are then separated
according to their mass
4 Explain why neutrons are important in making the
nucleus of an atom stable. You need to consider the relative atomic mass (A) : the average mass of
charges on the different subatomic particles present. naturally occurring atoms of an element on a
scale where the carbon-12 atom has a mass of
exactly 12 units
.....
34 )
34
2 Atomic structure
However, analysing the masses of various elements Charact eristics of isotopes

showed up a complication. Pure samples of many
elements (e.g. carbon, hydrogen and chlorine) are found The difference between isotopes of the same element is
to contain atoms that have different masses. This is just the number of neutrons in the atoms. The atoms
despite the fact that the atoms have the same numbers have the same number of protons and electrons. The
of protons and electrons. The different masses observed isotopes of an element are defined by their difference in
are the result of the presence of different numbers of mass number. The isotopes are referred to using their
neutrons in the nuclei of atoms of the same element. mass number. For example, the isotopes of carbon are
When this occurs, the atoms of the same element are carbon-12, carbon-13 and carbon-I 4. Table 2.4 gives the
called isotopes. details of the isotopes of several elements.
Because there are several isotopes of carbon, the
standard against which all atomic masses are measured
has to be defined precisely. The isotope carbon-12 is used hydrogen deuterium
tritium<•J
as this standard. One atom of carbon-12 is given the (99.99%) (0.01%)
mass of 12 precisely. From this we obtain l atomic mass
:H !H ~H
unit (a.m.u.)=-&: x mass of one atom of carbon-12. Hydrogen t - - -- --+- -- ---1- - - - - - l
1 proton 1 proton 1 proton
Table 2.3 gives some examples of the values obtained
for other elements. It shows that carbon-12 atoms are 0 neutrons 1 neutron 2 neutrons
12 times as heavy as hydrogen atoms, which are the 1 electron 1 electron 1 electron
lightest atoms of all. Calcium atoms are 40 times as carbon-12 carbon-13 carbon-14M
heavy as hydrogen atoms. (98. 9%) (1.1 %) (trace)
L I
'
I
1
'_ - - - ~ ~
.I
I'
I
Carbon
6 rotons
6 neutrons
6 rotons
7 neutrons
6 rotons
8 neutrons
carbon C 12 6 electrons 6 electrons 6 electrons
hydrogen H 1 neon-20 neon-21 neon-22
oxygen 0 16 (90.5%) (0.3%) (9.2%)
calcium Ca 40
Neon
copper Cu 64 \ 10 rotons 10 protons 10 rotons
gold Au 197 10 neutrons 11 neutrons 12 neutrons
., Table 2.3: Relative atomic masses of some elements . 10 elect rons 10 electrons 10 electrons
chlorine-35
chlorine-37 (25%)
(75%)
KEY WORD
isoto pes: atoms of the same element that have Chlorine

17 protons 17 protons
the same proton number but a different nucleon
number; they have different numbers of neutrons 18 neutrons 20 neutrons
in t heir nuclei. Some isotopes are radioactive 17 electrons 17 electrons
because their nuclei are unstable (radioisotopes).
<
•>Tritium and carbon-14 atoms are radioactive
isotopes because their nuclei are unstable.
Table 2.4: Several elements that exist as mixtures
of isotopes.
as )
35
) CAMBRIDGE !GCSE™ CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
Many elements have naturally occurring isotopes. The isotopes of an element have the same chemical
Hydrogen, the simplest element, has two naturally properties because they contain the same number of
occurring isotopes: hydrogen and deuterium (Figure 2.6). electrons and therefore the same electronic configuration.
A third isotope, tritium, can be made artificially. It is the number of electrons in an atom t hat determines
the way in which it forms bonds and reacts with other
atoms. However, some physical properties of the isotopes
Key are different. T he masses of the atoms differ and
©= electron therefore other properties, such as density and rate of
®= proton diffusion, a lso vary.
@= neutron
A visual illustration of how the presence of isotopes
affects physical properties is the difference in density
: = nucleus between ordinary ice and heavy-water ice (frozen
.... - ....
deuterium oxide, Dp). Frozen deuterium oxide has
Figure 2.6: Isotopes of hydrogen: hydrogen(; HJ, a I 0.6% greater density than ordinary ice. Normal ice
deuterium (; HJ and tritium(; HJ. cubes float in water, but a heavy-water ice cube will sink
(Figure 2.8).
Questions
5 Which of the diagrams A, B or C represents the
nucleus of an atom of the carbon-14 isotope
(Figure 2.7)?
Figure 2.8: A heavy-water ice cube (frozen D2O) sinks in

water (left). An ordinary ice cube floats (right).
6 protons 6 protons 6 protons

6 neutrons
Tritium and carbon-14 illustrate another difference in
8 neutrons 7 neutrons
physical properties that can occur between isotopes,
{l} proton ~ neutron as they are radioactive. The imbalance of neutrons
and protons in their nuclei causes them to be unstable
Figure 2.7: The nuclei of carbon isotopes. so the nuclei break up spontaneously (without any
., external energy being supplied), emitting certain types of
6 An atom of neon has 10 protons, 10 electrons and radiation. They are known as radioisotopes.
11 neutrons. How many nucleons does it contain?
7 What is the difference in terms of subatomic
particles between an atom of chlorine-35 and an Calculating relative atomic mass
atom of chlorine-37?
Most elements exist naturally as a mixture of isotopes.
8 By considering t1'e subatomic particles Therefore, the value we use for the atomic mass of an
present, explain why an atom of nitrogen is element is an average mass. This takes into account the
electrically neutral. proportions (abundance) of all the naturally occurring
isotopes. [fa particular isotope is present in a high
proportion, it will make a large contribution to the
average. This average value for the mass of an atom of an
element is known as the relative atomic mass (A,).
The existence of isotopes also explains why the accurate
values for t he relative atomic masses of most elements
are not whole nu mbers. However, to make calculations
36 >
36
2 Atomic structure
- more straightforward, in this book the values are This value for the relative atomic mass of chlorine can be
rounded to the nearest whole number. This is also true in calculated by finding the total mass of I 00 atoms.
the Periodic Table in this book (see Appendix). There is Mass of 100 atoms of chorine = (35 x 75.0) + (37 x
one exception, chlorine, where this would be misleading.
25.0) = 3550
Chlorine has two isotopes, chlorine-35 and chlorine-37,
in an approximate ratio of 3 : 1 (or 75.0% :25.0%). If the 3550
ratio was 1: 1 (or 50%: 50%), then the relative atomic
Then the average mass of one atom =100 =35.5
mass of chlorine would be 36. The actual value is 35.5. Thus, for chlorine A, (Cl) = 35.5
WORKED EXAMPLE 2.1
Calculat ing relative atomic m~~s ·

!
Lithium has two isotopes, Li and ~Li . The relative The isotopes of magnesium and their abundances are
abundance of these two isotopes is shown in given in Table 2.5.
Figure 2.9.
100
92.5% magnesium-25 10.1
magnesium-26 26 / 12 Mg 11 .3
Table 2.5: Isotopes of magnesium·.
Calculate the relative atomic mass of magnesium.

Step 1. Review data provided.
Step 2. Calculate total mass of I00 atoms of magnesium.
= (24 x 78.6) + (25 x IO.I)+ (26 x 11.3) = 2432.7
7.5%
0 +--,--,---r----r---.---+---l'-.--..--..- Step 3. Calculate the average mass of a magnesium atom.
0 5 10
2 27
Atomic IT)ass
= ~~ 0 = 24.327
Figure 2.9: Isotopes of lithium.
Step 4. Round your answer to the required level of
Calculate the relative atomic mass of lithium. accuracy asked for.
Relative atomic mass of magnesium= 24.3 (to three
Step 1. Look at Figure 2.9. The graph shows you that
significant figures) ( Note that the answer co both of these
the lithium sample consists of 7.5% lithium-6 and
worked examples is given to the same number of significant
92.5% lithium-?.
figures as the lowest accuracy of the data given. )
Step 2. Calculate the mass of 100 atoms by multiplying Here are two further examples for you to try for yourself.
the mass of each isotope by its relative abundance.
1 Iridium has two isotopes. These isotopes are
Total mass of 100 atoms of lithium= (6 x 7.5) + iridium-191 and iridium-193. A natural sample of
(7 X 92.5) = 692.5 iridium consists of 37 .3% iridium-I 91 . Calculate
Step 3. Calculate the average mass of one lithium atom the relative atomic mass of iridium from the data.
by dividing the total mass by JOO. 2 Bromine is an element with two isotopes:
Average mass of one lithium atom 692.5 / 100 = 6.925 bromine-79 and bromine-81 . Usually, the relative
atomic mass of bromine is given as 80. What does
Step 4. Round your answer to required level of accuracy. this value for the A, of bromine tell you about the
Relative atomic mass of lithium= 6.9 (to two approximate proportions of the two isotopes in a
significant figures) natural sample?
37 >
37
In 1913, Niels Bohr, working with Ernest Rutherford,

2.3 Electronic developed a theory to explain bow electrons were
arranged in atoms. This theory helps to explain bow the
configuration of elements
Electrons in shells
The aurora borealis is a spectacular display seen in the
sky in the far north (a similar phenomenon - the aurora
increasin
energy an
distance
from
l
colours in the flame test are produced.
gd
f>OfH;)f)fl§f) third level
flfl0Qfl@fl@
sometimes appears full
with eight electrons but
can expand to a total of 18
second level only room for eight
electrons
australis - occurs in the southern hemisphere). It is nucleus
caused by radiation from the Sun moving the electrons in 0§ first level only room for two
atoms of the gases of the atmosphere. electrons
;,;:;;&
Similar colour effects can be created in a simpler way in
the laboratory by heating the compounds of some metals Figure 2.12: The different energy levels (shells) in an atom
in a Bunsen flame (Figure 2.1 O; see also the flame tests in (not to scale). Electrons fill the shells starting from the one
Chapter 22). closest to the nucleus.
A simplified version of Bohr's atomic theory of the

arrangement of electrons in an atom can be summarised
as follows (see Figures 2.12 and 2.13):
• electrons are in orbit around the central nucleus of
the atom
• the electron orbits are called electron shell,; (or
energy levels) and have different energies
• shells that are further from the nucleus have
higher energies
• the shells are filled starting with the one with lowest
Figure 2.10: Some flame test colours for different elements.
energy (cfosest to the nucleus)
These flame test colours are also seen in fireworks. Different • the first shell can hold only two electrons
metal compounds are used in various types of firework • the second and subsequent shells can hold eight
to produce the spectacular effects we see at displays electrons to give a stable (noble gas) arrangement
~ (Figure 2.11 ). The colours produced are due to electrons of electrons.
in the atom moving between two different electron shells.
electron shei s (energy levels}: (of electrons) the

allowed energies of electrons in atoms - electrons
fill these shells (or levels) starting with the one
closest to the nucleus
ator c heory a model of the atom in which

electrons can only occupy certain shells (or
energy levels) moving outwards from the nucleus
of an atom
38
2 Atomic structure
First or lowest energy Second energy level. 20 elements in the Periodic Table (see the Appendix) are
level. Only two electrons Eight elect rons can shown in Table 2.6.
can fit into this level. fit int o this level.
For any atom, the combination of the arrangement
of electrons in shells with the numbers of protons and
neutrons makes it possible to draw a full subatomic
representation. Figure 2.14 shows such a representation for
an atom of carbon-12 (carbon atoms being possibly the
most versatile atoms in the universe; see Chapters 18-20).
,.- -·~0 ---- 6electro ns
Third energy level. ,' ' , outsid e
11
, ".. nucleus
Eight electrons can ,' , ,'.,. .. ...... '\
fit into t his level to
nucleus made of
p rotons and neutrons
give a stab le
arrangement. ~)<!
.
:
.,' \; 9
Figure 2.13: Bohr's atomic theory of the arrangement o f
.
'
' '
'
,
,'
,
nucleus ' " .. - ~ ~ ,

electrons in an atom. contains 6 proton$,.. ,"
and6 neutrons '•-- - Q- ·. · ·'
Further evidence was found that supported these ideas
Figure 2.14: A visualisation of the subatomic structure
of how the electrons are arranged in atoms. The number
of carbon-12.
and arrangement of the electrons in the atoms of the first
~ -
',')'' ,, · , --' ' "IV'J.1\r'/ , ~::~,:.1:,
~ .. ·., ' - ~
1G.'~:l, "\-1 li1~ - ,~:ii/."''
hydrogen H 1 • 1
helium He 2 •• 2
lit hium Li 3 •• • 2, 1
beryllium Be 4 •• •• 2,2
boron B 5 •• ••• 2,3
carbon C 6 •• '
•••• 2,4
nitrogen N 7 •• ••••• 2,5
oxygen 0 8 •• •••••• 2,6
fluorine F 9 •• ••••••• 2,7
neon Ne 10 •• •••••••• 2,8
sodium Na 11 •• •••••••• • 2,8,1
magnesium Mg 12 •• •••••••• •• 2,8,2
aluminium Al 13 •• •••••••• ••• 2,8,3
silicon Si 14 •• •••••••• •••• 2,8,4
phosphorus p 15 •• •••••••• ••••• 2,8,5
sulfur s 16 •• •••••••• •••••• 2,8,6
chlorin e Cl 17 •• •••••••• ••••••• 2,8,7
argon Ar 18 •• •••••••• •••••••• 2,8,8
potassium K 19 •• •••••••• •••••••• • 2,8,8,1
calcium Ca 20 •• •••••••• •••••••• •• 2,8,8,2
Table 2 .6: Electronic confi gurations of the first 20 elements.
l;
39
potassium 19K
sodium 11Na
lithium 3Li
@)
We can write this: We can write this: We can write this:
(2,1] (2,8,1] [2,8,8, 1]
Figure 2.15: Different ways of showing electron structure.
The electron arrangement or electronic configuration can

be given simply in terms of numbers: 2,8,4 for silicon, for KEYWORDS
example. You should make sure that you remember how to electronic configuration: a shorthand method of
work out the electron arrangements of the first 20 elements describing the arrangem ent of electrons within
and can draw them in rings (shells) as in Figure 2:15. the electron shells (or energy levels) of an atom;
also referred to as electronic structure
EXPERIMENTAL SKILLS 2 .1
A chemical rainbow! Safety

How are the spectacular colours of fireworks Wear eye protection throughout. Be careful with
produced? The essential ingredients of fireworks chemicals. Never ingest them and always wash your ·
are the explosive mixture and the metal hands after handling them. All the salt solutions are
compounds (also known as salts - see Chapters low hazard at ~his concentration, except CuCl2(aq),
11 and 12) that produce the distinctive colours. which is harmful and a skin/eye irritant.
This experiment explores how different metal salts
produce d ifferent colours as a result of d iffere11t Getting started
electron shifts within the atoms present. You will need a roaring flame on your Bunsen burner
.. to carry out these tests. Practise getting this hottest
You will need: flame using your burner by varying the air supply.
If available, you should practise using a hand-
• a Bunsen burner
held spectroscope before you take your practical
• a heat-resistant mat observations. Be aware that the energy of the light
given out by the salts (and its frequency) is related to
• a nichrome wire loop the colour produced.
• dilute hydrochloric acid solution
M ethod
(0.1 mol dm-3)
1 In a darkened room, place the Bunsen burner on
• a hand-held spectroscope (if available)
a heat-resistant mat and light the Bunsen burner.
• several different solutions of metal salts
2 Heat a nichrome loop in in a roaring Bunsen
(concentration 0.5 mol dm-3): NaCl(aq),
flame and then dip the loop into the dilute
KCl(aq), LiCl(aq), CuCliaq) and CaCliaq);
hydrochloric acid solution. Repeat this process
for example. A 0.1 mol dm-3 BaCliaq)
several times to clean the loop and remove
solution can also be used.
any contaminants.
40 >
40
2 Atomic structure
CONTINUED
3 Dip t he loop into one of the salt solutions 5 Rinse the loop with the dilute hydrochloric acid
and then hold it in the hot part of the roaring solu!ion and flame it several times to clean away
Bunsen fla me. any remaining salt solution.
4 Observe the colo ur p roduced in the flame; repeat 6 Continue to test the other salt solutions in the
using a hand-held sp ectroscope, noting the colour same way.
of the major lines prod uced.
Questions
1 Is it the metal or non-meta l p resent in the salts that is responsible for the colour emitted in the flame?
2 Is the flame colo ur seen the result of a chemical or physical change?
3 Table 2.7 shows the genera l relationship between the colour, frequency and e nergy of the light released.
The bigger the change in e nergy level of the e lectrons, the greater the energy of the light released.
Which of the metal salt solutions prod uces light of

Frequency I
1,C olour th e g reatest energy? Put the salt solutions in order
THz
of the energy change involved, from t he least to
Re d 405-480 the greatest.
Orange 480-510
Yellow 510-530
Green 530-600
Cyan (bl ue-green) 600-620 energy
620-680 increasing
Blue Table 2.7: Frequency (in terahertz, THz) of the different
Vio let 680- 790 ,I. colours of the visible spectrum.
Electronic config_uration GROUPS
.
and the Periodic Table
Electron arrangement is key to
II
QJ
Ill IV V VI VII
--
VI II
2
He
understanding and predjcting the
2, 1 2, 2 2, 3 2, 4 2, 5 2,6 2,7 2, 8
properties and characteristics of an 2
Li Be B C N 0 F Ne
element. The properties and characteristics
of each element, when compared to other 2,8, 1 2,8, 2 2,8, 3 2,8, 4 2,8, 5 2,8, 6 2,8,7 2,8, 8
3
elements, are the basis for how all known
VJ
Na Mg A/ Si p s Cl Ar
elements are arranged in the Periodic Table. 0 2,8,8, 1 2,8,8,
Q 4
You can directly link the electronic a:: K Ca
w
configuration of an element to its position a.
in the Periodic Table (Figure 2.16). 5 Sr'
6 Ba
7 an argon atom
Figure 2.16: The relationship between an
a potassium atom
element's position in the Periodic Table and
the electronic configuration of its atoms.
41
) CAMBQIDGE IGCSE™ CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
Group and period number When the atoms of elements other than the noble gases
Figure 2.16 indicates that the number of outer electrons combine together to form molecules, the atoms involved
in an atom is the same as the group number for the often achieve the same stable arrangement of electrons
element in the Periodic Table. The number of ocGupied characteristic of the noble gases. We will explore the
electron shells in an atom tells you the period (row) formation of chemical bonds in detail in Chapter 3.
number of the element in the table.
KEY WORDS
Elements in the same group have the same number of
outer electrons. For the elements in Groups I to VII, the Roble gases: elements in Group VIII - a group of
number of the group is the number of electrons in the stable, very unreactive gases
outer shell. As you move across a period in the table, a
shell of electrons is being filled.
The properties of an element are closely determined by the
number of outer electrons in the atom. The elements in Q uestio ns
Group II have two outer electrons. The elements in Period 3
9 a What are the maximum numbers of electrons
have three shells of electrons. A magnesium atom has
that ca·n fill the first and the second shells
two electrons in its third (outer) shell and is in Group TI.
(energy levels) of an atom?
A potassium atom has one electron in its fourth, outer shell,
and is in Group I and Period 4 (Figure 2.16). An argon b What is the electron arrangement of a calcium
atom has an outer shell containing eight electrons - a very atom, which has an atomic number of 20?
stable arrangement - and is in Group VIII (the noble gases). c How many electrons are there in the outer shells
of the atoms of the noble gases argon and neon?
KEYWORDS 10 Carbon-12 and carbon-14 are different isotopes of
carbon. How many electrons are there in an atom of
group number: the number of the vertical each isotope?
column that an element is in on the 11 The electronic configurations of the atoms of four
Peri odic Table elements are:
period (row) number: the horizontal row of A 2,4 B 2,8,18,7
t he Periodic Table that an element is in C 2,8,4 D 2,8,8
a Which two elements are in Group IV of the
Periodic Table? Explain your answer.
The noble gas electron_ic configuration' b Which element is a noble gas? Explain your
Noble gases (Group VIII) are very unreactive gases. The answer.
.,atoms of the noble gas elements all have a very stable c Which of these elements is in Group VII of the
electron arrangement. That means their atoms exist Periodic Table? Explain your answer.
naturally as single atoms. Noble gas atoms do not make
d Which two elements are in the third period (row)
chemical bonds with the atoms of other elements by
of the Periodic Table? Explain your answer.
sharing or transferring their outer electrons. Noble gas
atoms all have a 'full' outer shell of electrons (Table 2.8). e What is the proton number of element C!
This means that they usually have eight electrons in their Explain your answer.
outer shell.
Helium 2 2
Neon 10 2 2,8
Argon 18 3 2,8,8 8
*The other noble gases in Group VIII (krypton, xenon, and radon) a/so have eight outer electrons.
Table 2.8: Electronic configurations of noble g as elements.
42 )
42
2 Atomic structure
REFLECTION
Do you find diagrams help you to visualise the structure, movement and interaction of small objects such
as atoms and molecules?
If diagrams do not help, can you think of other ways that could? Discuss your ideas with a partner.
SUMMARY ,
The elements are the basic building units of the material world - they cannot be chemically broken down into
anything simpler.
The atoms of the elements are made up of different combinations of the subatomic particles (protons,
neutrons and electrons) and an element is made up of atoms that all have the same number of protons.
These subatomic particles have particular electrical charges and relative masses.
In any atom, the protons and neutrons are bound together in a centra l nucleus, and the electrons 'orbit' the
r
nucleus in different energy levels (or shells).
The number of protons in an atom is defined as the proton (atomic) number (Z) of the element and the total
number of protons and neutrons in as atom is defined as the mass (nucleon) number (A).
Isotopes of the same element can exist and differ only in the number of neutrons in their nuclei.
The chemical properties of all the isotopes of an element are the same as they have the same
> electl'onic configuration.
The relative atomic mass of an element can be calculated from data on the abundance of the different
> isotopes of that element.
The electrons in atoms are arranged in different shells (or energy levels) that are at different distances from
the nucleus of the atom. I
Each shell (or energy level) has a maximum number of el_ectrons that it can contain and the electrons fill the
shells closest to the nucleus first.
The electronic configuration of an element determines the group number and period number of that element
in the Periodic Table.
43
PROJECT
Modelling the structure of an atom Now it is your turn to try to represent an atom by
creating a 3D model.
You will have seen many differ.en-t r.epresentations
of atoms in the media. Often images show Working in groups, construct a model of either:
electrons orbiting like planets (Figure 2.17a). After
completing this chapter, you will have learnt much • a planetary model of a simple atom, or
more about atomic structure, and understand that • a model showing the energy levels
electrons are arranged around a central nucleus in that electrons can occupy in an atom -
energy levels (Figure 2.17b). representing the energy levels like trays with
a certain number of electrons on each tray (see
a Figure 2.15 for the basis of such a model).
Having constructed your model, take a moment to
assess how well it represents an atom. Be critical
of your model and discuss the limitations of the
model with your group.
How well does your model represent what you have
learnt in this chapter?
laminated card
Figure 2.17 a: A planetary model of an atomic showing

three electrons orbiting a nucleus. b: Model ohhe
electron energy levels in an atom.
44 >
44
2 Atomic structure
1 The structure of an atom is defined by two numbers: the proton
(atomic) 1i-11ml;,er and the mass (nucleon) number. What is the electronic
configuration of an atom with proton number 5 and mass number 11?
A 2,8,1 B 3,2 C 2,3 D 1,8,2 [1]
2 Cadmium is an element that has several isotopes. One of these isotopes
is 1!~d. Which particle in the table is another isotope of cadmium?
A 48 64
B 48. 112
C 112 48
D 64 48 [1]
r
COMMAND WORDS
I 3 Elements in the Periodic Table are arranged in order of their proton number.
a Define the meaning of the term.proton number. [1] define: give precise
~ meaning
l b Argon, proton number 18, has a larger mass number than potassium,
proton number 19. Explain why this is. (2] explain; set out
c Complete this table showing the properties of the three particles that purposes or
7
> make up atoms. reasons/make
,,,-, the relationships
'Patti~ ~?:;: ,,, l\:i,;narge .· IVias~ Positi9.n iti ~om between things
;
proton + evident/provide
f why and/or how and
neutron 1 in the nucleus
support with relevant
,.- electron - [5] evidence
d An atom of which element has only two of the three particles listed in I ~tfltf; expreSS in
the table above? ' (1] clear terms
e Argon and helium are both noble gases. In what way are their
electron structures similar? (1]
(Total: 10]
4 •~ and ':C are two isotopes of the element carbon.

a In what way does the structure of their atoms differ? [3]
b Carbon reacts with oxygen to produce carbon dioxide. What is the
electronic configuration of an oxygen atom? [1]
c Germanium (A, =32) is an element in the same group as carbon.
How many electrons does germanium have in its outer electron shell? [1]
ii State which period of the Periodic Table germanium is found in. [1]
(Total: 6]
r
r
r
45
CONTINUED
•H•:
> :~f
1• ' - •·· .' · '. ·. . . ~ ' .. ·• ·,· ' , -...:-• ,~,,•
Sf The clement copper has two main isotopes ~;C,ll an~ ;~cu. Bot,h' isol<:>pes~. · -:··
h~vc the_saiyie chemical properties. . _: , · • . -~ .;: -\j{i, ;
:\F~ .Explai11 why the chemical properties of th_e~: l~~<>, iJ<>topes arc the st!)]fl'. (2)
(::'.; jb The .Periodic Table gives t he approximate relative atomic mass of ·/'-</
ml\1, as
copper 64. •· ·· ·· -t\?P':·.· > _..:<·:/· COMMAND WORD
"i"< ·, · Natural copper consists of 70.0'Y., •'Cu and·J_0.0% "'Cu. Calculate the ,, ,; calculate: work out
·.t;'t accurate relative atomic mass of copper. · ·:• ••A~_l, from given facts,
;,, · FTot'al·. 4) figures or information
i~i;:,:;,;.' \.1l l 1
1
SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST
After studying this chapter, think about how confident you are with the different topics. T his will help you to see
a ny gaps in your knowledge a nd help you to learn more effectively.
understand that matter is made u p of elements

2. 1
and compounds
describe the structure of the atom as a central
nucleus surrounded by electrons
2.1 .....
define the properties of protons, neutrons and
electrons, and the meaning of the proton (atomic
2.1
number) number and nucleon (mass) number of
an atom
define isotopes as atoms of an element with the
2.2
same proton number but different nucleon numtlers -
describe isotopes of an element as having the

) same chemical properties as they have the same 2.2
electronic configuration
calculate the relative atomic mass of an element
> from the relative masses and abundancies of

its isotopes
2.2
describe the electronic configuration of an atom and

the significance of it in terms of the position of the 2.3
element in the Periodic Table
determine the electronic configuration of atoms
2.3
with proton numbers l to 20
46 >
46
outline t he d ifferences between elements, compounds and mixtures
• understand that a covalent bond is formed by sharing a pair of outer electrons between two atoms and
describe bonding in simple molecules
• wnderstand the formation of ions and that an ionic bond is t he strong electrostatic force of attraction
between oppositely charge-d ions
• relate the properties of simple molecular and ionic compounds to their structure and bonding
• outline the g iant eovalent structures of d iamond and graphite and relate these to their uses
47
) CAMBRIDGE I.GCSE™ CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
CONTINUED
) explain p ysical properties of metals in terms of metallic bonding.
. GETTING STARTED
In groups, use a molecular model-building kit or simple construction materials such as plasti cine and
drinking straws to build models of two or three simple molecules that you have encountered in your earlier
science courses. It would be useful to build models of compounds such as:
• water • ammonia • methane.

Use t he models to d iscuss what you remember of.the t ype of bond ing in the molecules and how the bonds
are _m ade. It would be useful also to recall t he shapes of t hese d ifferent molecules if you have covered
that previously.
EXPLOITING THE PROPERTIES OF GRAPHENE

Tw0 different forms of carbon are fam iliar to us in Hig h-quality graphene is strong, has a low density,
everyday life. When we write with a pencil or make and is almost transparent. Graphene has many
a chan::oal *etch, we are slfqing layers of graphite int eresting properties:
onto t he pal"er. Diamonds are used as precious
• it is an exc;;ellent conductor of heat and
gemstones in jewellery and can be a very special --:
electricity (300 times better t han copper)
gift for someone. Diamond and graphite are two
structural for.ms of this particularly importal'lt • the intcoduction of graphene,,into plastics could
.elememt, carbon, and we wrll look at them in more make t hose plastics electrically conducting
detail later in this chapter.
• it behaves as a semiconductor and may one
However, interest in different structurcal types of day replace silicon in computer chips and
ear.hon has grown d ramatically in recel'lt years other techn0logy applications, it is 200 times
as other new forms have been d iscovered. The strol'lger than steel and is imc:redibly flexible.
discovery ofthe fu ller,enes (such as C40) and carbon
., rianotubes.has led to many new technological Of t he d ifferent forms of carbon, g raphene is ihe
applications. Even more recently (in 2004), afurther most chemically reactive. Membranes of graphene
new form of aarbon - graphene - has been isolated oxide have been shown to f ilter water and clean it,
at the University of Mahchest er in the UK. Andre suggesting possible uses in desalination and water
Geim and Konstantin Nov0selov were awarded the purificat ion. This application is highly significant for
Nobel Prize in Physics in 2010 and the potential for countries where water supply is d ifficult, as current
this new material ha,s generated immense interest methods of large-scale desalination by d istillation
and research rnvestment. or reverse osmosis are economieally expensive.
Graphene is essentially a single-layered material Discussion questions

made up of individual sheets of graphite. The first
1 How many different struetural forms of the
samples of graphene were isolated in experiments element carbon do you know of?
aimed at seeing how'thin a piece of graphite could
be made by polishing or by cleaning graphite with 2 Graphite is used to strengthen everyt hing from
'sticky tape'. The layers of graphite were peeled off tennis rackets to the chassis of Formula 1 cars,
for surface Science experiments. but do you t hink that it is equally strong in
all d irections?
>
48
3 Chemical bonding
3 .1 Non-metallic
substances and
Figure 3.1: A water molecule consists of two hyd rogen
covalent bonding atoms (white) bonded t6 an oxygen atom (red).
Elements, compounds KEY WORDS

and mixtures element: a substance that cannot be further
Elements are the building blocks of the universe and each d ivided into simpler substances by chemical
element has its own distinctive properties. Some elements methods; all t he atoms o f an e lement contain the
are very reactive. Other elements, particularly the noble same number of protons
gases (Group VIII of the Periodic Table) are very stable
metals: a class of chemical elements (and alloys)
and inert. We now know of over 100 elements, although
t hat all have a characteristic shiny appearance and
only 94 occu.r naturally, and they are essentially divided
are good conductors of heat and e lectricity
into metals and non-metals. The atoms of an element
are all the same in terms of their content of protons and non-metals: a class of chemical elements that are
electrons. T he atoms of any one element all have the typically poor conductors of heat and electricity
same atomic number and are distinct from those of any
other atom (Chapter 2). compound: a substance formed by the chemical
combination of two or more e lements in
Elements combine to make a ll the compounds around us. fixed proportions
The simplest compounds that we are all familiar with, to
the complex molecules that determine our biology, are
all made from these elements. Each compound is made When different elements react together to form a
of particular elements, always combined in the same compound their characteristic properties are lost, being
proportions. Simple compounds such as water, ammonia replaced by those of that compound. Importantly, the
and methane begin to show the variety that can be compound formed has properties that bear no direct
achieved when the atoms of elements combine together. relationship to those of the elements that make it up.
Water is formed from hydrogen and oxygen. Each water A clear example of this is sodium chloride (common
molecule contains two hydrogen atoms bonded,to an salt) (Figure 3.2). Sodium is a highly reactive metal. On
oxygen atom (Figure 3.1 ). contact with water, sodium fizzes violentl y and may even
.. cause a flame as the reaction takes place. The toxic gas
chlorine was once used as a chemical weapon, and is still
used to kill harmful microbes in water treatment. Yet
the compound of these two elements, sodium chloride,
is a crystalline solid that is not only harmless enough to
flavour food, but is in fact essential for life.
49 )
49
A mixture contains two or more elements or compounds

that are not chemically bonded together. The parts of
a mixture are not present in fixed amounts. Sodium
chloride can be mixed with water to form a type of
chlorine mixture known as a solution. However, the amount
of salt dissolved can be varied to give a dilute or
concentrated solution. Mixtures can be separated by one
white smoke
(sodium chloride)
or other of the physical separation methods described
in Chapter 21. Other mixtures include air, which is
a mixture of elements such as nitrogen, oxygen and
sodium burning --,::,-.....,,1
argon, together with compounds such as carbon dioxide
(Chapter 17), and alloys such as brass (Chapter 14).
A mixture of iron and sulfur powders can contain
various amounts of the two elements. The elements still
Figure 3.2: Burning sodium in chlorine gas produces
keep their characteristic properties and can be separated
sodium chloride (common or table salt).
using a magnet (Figure 3.4b). However, when a mixture
of iron and sulfur is heated, a black compound iron
The formulae of the compounds sodium chloride and sulfide is formed, which is not attracted to a magnet
water are NaCl and Hp, respectively. Here you begin (Figure 3.4a).
to see how formulae are constructed using the chemical
symbol of each element. Both formulae indicate the ratio
of the atoms involved in making the compound. We will KEYWORDS
look at chemical formulae in more detail in Chapter 4.
chemical formula: a shorthand method of
Chemical bonding involves the outer electrons of each representing chemical elements and compounds
atom (Chapter 2). As we examine a range of substances, using the symbols of the elements
we shall see that, whatever type of bonding holds the
structure together, it is the outer electrons that are chemical bonding: the strong forces that hold
atoms (or ions) together in the various structures
used. T he diversity of the material world is produced
that chemical substances can form - metallic
by the different ways in which atoms can join together.
bonding, covalent bonding and ionic bonding
Generally speaking, there are two types of compound
(Figure 3.3):
• molecular compounds where the atoms are bonde\'.i
together: water, ammonia and methane are examples
., of simple molecular compounds
• ionic compounds where many ions (charged atoms)
are held together in a regular structure: sodium
chloride is an example of a n ionic compound.
Cj ch loride ion
Q sodium ion
ammonia (NH) methane (CH,) sodium chloride (NaCl)
Figure 3.3: Ammonia and methane are examples of molecular compounds. Sodium chloride is an ionic compound.
.....
50 >
50
3 Chemical bonding
Figure 3.4 a: A mixture of iron and sulfur can be separated with a magnet. b: Iron powder and sulfur react together to form
the black compound, iron sulfide, which is not magnetic.
Table 3.1 summarises how compounds and mixtures compare.
Compounds Mixtures
A compound is a single substance. A mixture contains two or more substances.
The composition is always the same. The composition can be varied.
The formation involves a chemical reaction. No chemical change takes place when made.
The properties are very different from the elements The properties of the substances making the mixture
present in the compound. are still present.
The substances present can be separated by
Can only be broken down by chemical reactions.
physical met hods.
Table 3.1: A comparison of the nature of chemical compounds and mixtures of substances.
For non-metallic elements the type of bonding involved

Covalent bonding in is covalent bond1ng- Covalent bonding is also the bonding
used in compounds between one non-metal and another.
simple molecular elements
and compounds Simple mo lecular elements
In Chapter 2, we learnt that each element contains Hydrogen normally exists in the form of diatomic
a defined type of atom (with a defined number of molecules (Hi). Two atoms bond together by sharing
protons). However, elements are not simply made up of their electrons. The orbits overlap with each other and a
separate atoms individually arranged. Elements such molecule is formed (Figure 3.5).
as oxygen (02) and hydrogen (Hi) consist of diatomic
molecules- Indeed, the only elements that are made up KEY WORDS
of individual atoms moving almost independently of
each other are the noble gases (Group VIII). The noble d iatomic molecules: molecules containing two
gases are the elements whose electron arrangements are atoms, e.g. hydrogen, H2
most stable and so their atoms do not combine with
covalent bonding: chemical bonding formed
each other.
by the sharing of one or more pairs of electrons
All other elements do form structures; their atoms are between two atoms
linked by some type of bonding.
51 >
51
a shared pair of electrons a

makes a covalent bond
two chlorine atoms chlorine molecule

(2,8,7) (each chlorine is now 2,8,8)
two hydrogen atoms hydrogen molecule (HJ
C() H- H
Cl-Cl
displayed formula aGXu
2 1◄- --.J
0.19
nm
model displayed formu la b
Figure 3.5: The hydrogen molecule is formed by sharing the

electrons between the atoms. A space-filling model can be
used to show the atoms overlapping.
Through this sharing, each atom gains a share in two nm

electrons. This is the number of electrons in the outer nm
shell of helium, the nearest noble gas to hydrogen.
Figure 3.6 a: The formation of the covalent bond in chlorine
(Remember that the electron arrangement of helium is
molecules (Cl 2), b: Molecules of Br2 and 12 are formed in
very stable; helium atoms do not form He molecules.)
the same way. They are larger because the original atoms
Sharing electrons like this is known as co~alent bonding.
are bigger.
It has been shown that in a hydrogen molecule, the
electrons are more likely to be found between the two
nuclei. The forces of attraction between the shared
KEY WORDS
electrons and the nuclei are greater than any repulsive
forces. The molecule is held together by the bond. dot-and-cross diagram: a diagram drawn to
T he main features of covalent bonding are: represent the bonding in a molecule, or the
electrons in an ion; usually, only the outer
• the bond is formed by the sharing of a pair of
electrons are shown and they are represented by
.. electrons between two atoms, leading to noble gas
dots or crosses depending on which atom they
electronic configurations
are from
• each atom contributes one electron to each bond
• molecules are formed from atoms linked together by Molecules of hydrogen and the halogens are each held
covalent bonds. · together by a single covalent bond. Such a single bond
uses two electrons, one from each atom. The bond can be
Many non-metallic elements form diatomic molecules.
drawn as a single line between the two atoms. Note that,
However, elements other than hydrogen form bonds in
when we draw diagrams showing the overlap of the outer
order to gain a share of eight electrons in their outer
shells, we can show the outer electrons only because the
shells. This is the number of electrons in the outer
inner electrons are not involved in the bonding. Each
shell of all the noble gases apart from helium. Thus,
atom gains a share in eight electrons in its outer shell.
the halogens (Group VII) form covalent molecules
(Figure 3.6). In forming these molecules, each atom gains
a share in eight electrons in its outer shell. A dot-and-
cross diagram can be drawn showing the outer electrons
only (Figure 3.6a), because the inner electrons are not
involved in the bonding.
52 )
52
3 Chemical bonding
When molecules of oxygen (0 2) or nitrogen (N2) are

formed, more electrons have to be used in bonding if
the atoms are to gain a share of eight electrons. These
molecules are held together by a double bond (0 2) or a
triple bond (N2) (F igure 3.7). A hydrogen atom has
just one electron in its A chlorine atom has
first energy level. seven electrons in its
0=0 4ii third energy level.
If the two atoms share one pair of electrons:

oxygen, 0 2 displayed formula ... hydrogen can fill ... and chlorine can
its first energy fill its third energy
level... level.
This is a
molecule
nitrogen, N 2 displayed formula a shared pair of hydrogen
of electrons chloride.
Figure 3.7: Structures of oxygen (02) and nitrogen (N 2)
molecules involve multiple covalent bonding. An oxygen
We can also draw the molecule like this:
molecule contains a double bond; a nitrogen molecule
contains a triple bond.
~
Figure 3. 8: Hydrogen and chlorine atoms share a pair of
Simple covalent compounds electrons to form a molecule of hydrogen chloride.
In covalent compounds, bonds are again made by
sharing electrons between atoms. In simple molecules, the
Earlier we saw that multiple covalent bonds can exist in
atoms combine to achieve a more stable arrangement of
IQOlecules of the elements, oxygen and nitrogen. Multiple
electrons, m_ost often that of a noble gas. The formation
covalent bonds can also exist in compounds. The carbon
of hydrogen chloride (H CI) molecules involves the two
dioxide molecule is held together by double bonds
atoms sharing a pair of electrons (Figure 3.8).
between the atoms (Figure 3.10). Figure 3.10 also shows
The examples shown in Figure 3.9 illustrate dif(erent some other examples of bonding in organic compounds
ways of representing this sharing. They also show that you will meet again in Chapters 18-20.
how the formula of the compound corresponds to the
• numbers of each atom in a molecule.
In each case, the atoms achieve a share in the same
number of electrons as the noble gas nearest to that
element in the Periodic Table. In all but the case of
hydrogen, this means a share of eight electrons in their
outer shell.
53 )
53
methane (CH.)
H
I
·0·0 -
four hydrogen carbon atom
atoms (1) (2,4)
H- C-H
H
I
displayed formula
methane molecule
Each hydrogen now shares two electrons with carbon.
ammonia (NH3 )
N
,0·0-
three hydrogen nitrogen atom
H/ l' H
H
displayed formula
atoms (1) (2,5)
ammonia molecule
Hydrogen and nitrogen both fill their outer shells by sharing electrons.
,0·0 ~~
water (H 20 )
H- 0\
~
two hydrogen oxyge~ atom
atoms (1) (2,6)
H
displayed formula
water molecule
Hydrogen and oxygen both fill th eir outer shells by sharing electrons.
\
.. hydrogen chloride
(HCI)
0 + . H-CI
displayed formula
Cic1
one hydrogen ch lorine atom hydrogen chloride
atom (1) (2,8, 7) molecule
Figure 3.9: Examples of the formation of simple covalent molecules. Again, only the outer electrons of the atoms are shown.
54 )
54
3 Chemical bonding
carbon dioxide (CO2 )
displayed formula
four hydrogen two carbon atoms

atoms
,.
displayed formula
methanol (CH 30H)
. 00 +
00
four·hydrogen one carbon one oxygen methanol molecule (CHpH)
atoms atom atom
r
H
I
,.
H-C-0-H
I
H
r displayed formula
Figure 3.10: Formation of the carbon dioxide, ethene and methanol molecules, showing the outer electrons only.
r
\
Ball-and-stick models can be used to show the structure.
r
r
55 )
l'
J
55
Physical properties of simple Q uestions

covalent compounds 1 In a pure sample of any element, what is the most
Knowledge of bow atoms combine to make different important feat ure of all the atoms present?
types of structures helps us begin t o understand why 2 A gas is made up of simple molecules that have
substances have different physical properties. The the formula NOC I. Which of the diagrams A- D
properties of simple molecular compounds are: in Figure 3.11 correctly represents the molecules
• they have low melting points and boiling points and ofNOCI?
are often liquids or gases at room temperature
• they show poor electrical conductivity.
A B
0
When considering the properties of simple molecular
compounds, it is important to be aware of the two levels •0
0
0
• 0
of interactive force involved. T he covalent bonds.within
•
the molecule are strong and difficult to break. However,
the forces between the molecules, the intermolecular
forces, are only weak and are relatively easily broken.
• 0
0
0
If you think back to the discussion of changes of state
in Chap ter 1, you will understand that the presence of
weak intermolecular forces gives rise to low melting and
boiling points. Because the forces between the molecules ,. ,.
C D
are weak only a small amount of energy is needed to

enable the molecules to move away from each other.
Table 3.2 shows key physical properties of simple
covalent compounds.
,. ,. Key
•N
OCI
oo
Properties of simple Figure 3.11: Representations of various gases.
covalent com ounds
They are made of 3 Methane is the simplest hydrocarbon (a compound
simple covalent of carbon and hydrogen only) and has the formula
molecules. The forces CH 4 (Figure 3.12).
Often liquids or gases at
between the moleci les
room temperature and H
(intermolecular forces)
have low melting points
are only very weak. Not I
and boiling points H- C-H
much energy is needed
to move the molecules
I
H
further a art.
Figure 3.12: The structure of a methane molecule.
There are no free
Do not conduct electrons or ions
electricity present to carry the What is the total number of electrons involved in the
electrical current. bonding in methane?
A 10 B 2 C 8 D 4
Table 3.2: The physical p roperties of simple
molecular compounds. •
,,.
56 )
56
3 Chemical bonding
4 Covalent bonding involves electrons b~ing shared

KEYWORDS
between the atoms bonded together. Methane is
made up of covalently bonded molecules. Which ionic bonding : a strong electrb~tatic force of
of the diagrams A- D in Figure 3.13 represents the attraction between oppo.shely charged ions
bonding in methane? ~"-
: : .
ions: charged:particles ~'icle from an atom, or
A B groups of atom_s (c0..mpound ions), by the loss or
gain of electrons,
·,
electrostatic forces:·str-ong forces of attraction
between particles with opposite charges - such
forces are involved in ionic bonding
Key
• electron from carbon
x electron from hydrogen Formation
.
of ions
r -• . .
\
An ion is an electrica\ly cl;lafg~d particle. Ions are formed
when atoms lose hr gain electrons. We sa<v in Chapter 2
that atoms with a nqble' gas electn:>~ic configuration
are particularly stable·and unreac_tive. Noble gas atoms,
except helium, have eight electrons in their outer shells.
Most atoms do not have this arrangement of outer
electrons and so are more reactive. One way of gaining
this noble gas structure is to completely transfer electrons
from one atom to another.
The metals in Group I all have one electron in their
Figure 3.13: The possible bonding in methane. outer energy level. Figure 3.14 shows the loss of an
outer electron from a sodium atom. This results in the
formation of a positive sodium ion (Na•).
3.2 Ions and ionic an atom of sodium an ion of sodium, Na•
[2,8,1) (2,8]'
bonding
~ @
Two major types of bond hold compounds together.
The first is covalent bonding, which, as we have seen,
involves the sharing of electrons, usually between atoms When the sodium atom loses an
of non-metals. electron, it forms a sodium ion.
However, compounds between metals and non-metals Figure 3.14: A sodium atom loses an electron to become
involve a second type of bonding known as ionic a sodium ion.
bonding. Electrons are transferred from one atom to
another, forming ions. These ionic compounds are held The sodium ion has a single positive charge because
together by electrostatic forces of attraction between the it now has just 10 electrons in total, but there are still
oppositely charged ions. 11 protons in the nucleus of the atom.
Halogen atoms in Group VII of the Periodic Table have
seven outer electrons. They can achieve a stable noble gas
configuration by gaining an outer electron (Figure 3.15).
The chloride ion (CI·) formed has a negative charge
because it has one more electron (18) than there are
protons in the nucleus (17).
.....
57 >
57
Ionic compounds
Compounds formed between a metal and a non-metal
generally involve ionic bonding. This involves the
transfer of electrons from one atom to another. This
transfer of electrons results in the formation of positive
and negative ions. In the case of sodium chloride, the
ions formed are sodium (Na•) and chloride (CJ-) ions
(Figure 3. 16).
The chlorine atom [2,8,7] needs to gain
an electron to make it more stable.
sodium chloride (t:,JaCI)

Figure 3.1 6: Transfer of electrons 'from a sodium atom to a
chlorine atom to form ions.
The sodium ion then has the stable electron arrangement

This is an ion of chlorine 12,8,8]-. (2,8) of a neon atom -:- the element just before it in the
Periodic Table. The electron released is transferred
Figure 3.15: A chlorine atom gains an electron to become a to a chlorine atom (Figure 3.16). The chloride ion
chloride ion. formed (electron arrangement 2,8,8) has the electron
arrangement of an argon atom. The positive and
The ease with which the atoms of Group I and negative ions in sodium chloride are held together by the
Group VII can lose or gain outer electrons results in electrostatic attraction between opposite charges.
these elements being strongly reactive. The important features of ionic bonding are:
Note that positive ions are also known as cations and • The elections involved in the formation of ions are
negative ions are also known as anions. This naming those in the outer shell of the atoms.
relates to the movement of these ions in electrolysis,
(Chapter 6). • Metal atoms lose their outer electrons to become
positive ions (cations). In doing so, they achieve the
. KEY WORDS
more stable electron arrangement of the nearest
noble gas to them in the Periodic Table.
cation: a positive ion that would be attracted to • Generally, atoms of non-metals gain electrons to
the cathode in electrolysis become negative ions (anions). Again, in doing so,
anion: a negative ion that would be attracted to
they achieve the stable electron arrangement of the
the anode in electrolysis nearest noble gas to them in the Periodic Table.
The type of diagram we have used here is a dot-and-
cross diagram. When drawing such a diagram we usually
only show the outer electrons as these are the ones that
have taken part in the bonding. Similar diagrams can
be drawn for the ionic bonding in other compounds
between Group I metals and Group VII non-metals - the
alkali metals and the halogens. Try drawing diagrams like
the one in Figure 3.16 for compounds such as lithium
fluoride or potassium bromide. You will see that there is
a great similarity in the diagrams.
,.
58 )
58
3 Chemical bonding
More complex ionic compounds than those formed • the number of negative charges on a non-metal ion
between the alkali metals and the halogens involve the is equal to the number of electrons gained
transfer of a greater number of electrons. Diagrams • in both cases, the ions formed have a more stable
showing the bonding on such compounds require care electronic configuration, usually that of the nearest
when drawing. Figure 3.17 shows two examples of such noble gas to them in the Periodic Table
compounds. In the first case, of magnesium oxide (MgO),
two electrons are being transferred from a magnesium atom • ionic bonds result from the electrostatic attraction
to an oxygen atom. A magnesium atom has two electrons between oppositely charged ions.
in its outer shell. An oxygen atom has six outer electrons.
By transferring two electrons from magnesium to oxygen to
complete its outer shell, both the magnesium and oxide ions Physical properties of
formed have the configuration of a neon atom.
ionic compounds
The physical properties of ionic compounds are different
to those of covalent simple molecular compounds
(Topic 3.1) because the type of bonding involved is
different. The key general physical properties of ionic
magnesium oxide (MgO) compounds are:
• they have high melting points and boiling points,
and so are crystalline solids at room temperature
• they are often soluble in water
• they conduct electricity when molten or dissolved in
water (not when solid).
Ionic compounds (such as sodium chloride and
magnesium oxide) are solids at room temperature. The
ions arrange themselves into a regular lattice structure
calcium chloride (CaCl 2) (Figure 3.18). In this regular arrangement, each ion
is surrounded by ions of the opposite charge. The
Figure 3.17: Diagrams showing the formation of ionic bonds whole structure is held together by the electrostatic
in magnesium oxide and ca lcium chloride. Only the outer forces of attraction that occur between particles of
electrons are shown. ' opposite charge.
. The case of calcium chloride ts slightly more
complicated. The calcium atom (2,8,8,2) has two
electrons to transfer. So, two chlorine atoms are needed.
Each chlorine atom accepts one electron. In calcium
chloride there are two chloride ions (Cl'") formed for each
calcium ion (Ca2 •) produced.
In summary, the following features are common to the
formation of ionic bonds between metallic and non-
metallic elements:
Figure 3.1 8: An ionic lattice where each ion is surrounded
• metal atoms always lose their outer electrons to
b y ions of opposite charge.
form positive ions (cations)
• the number of positive charges on a metal ion is Table 3.3 outlines the relationship between the general
equal to the number of electrons lost physical properties of ionic compounds and their
• non-metal atoms, with the exception of hydrogen, structure and bonding. We will explore further the
always gain electrons to become negative ions (anions). structural features of ionic crystals in a later section of
this chapter.
59 >
59
Properties of typical ionic comcounds Reasons for these prooerties

Ions are attracted to each other by strong electrostatic
They have high melting points and boiling points. forces. Large amounts of energy are needed to
separate them.
There is a regular arrangement of the ions in a lattice.
They are crystalline solids at room temperature.
Ions with opposite charge are next to each other.
They are often soluble in water (not usually soluble in Water is attracted to charged ions and therefore many
organic solvents, e.g. ethanol, methylbenzene). ionic solids dissolve.
In the liquid or solution, the ions are free to move
They conduct electricity when molten or dissolved in
about. They can move towards the electrodes when a
water (not when solid).
Table 3.3: General physical properties of ionic compounds.

voltage is applied.
j
Questions 7 Figure 3.19 shows the structure of a molecule of
methanoic acid.
S The boiling point of a substance relates to the
type of bonding present in the substance. Two
elements X and Y combine to form a liquid with ~o
the relatively low boiling point of l20°C. Which of H-
the alternatives A-D in Table 3.4 correctly describes
this substance? ~ O-H
Figure 3.19: Methanoic acid.
X y
Table 3.5 lists four descriptions of the bonds formed
A metal metal covalent between the carbon and oxygen atoms in the shaded
B non-metal non-metal ionic region of tlie structure. Which of the descriptions
C non-metal non-metal covalent A-D is correct?
D metal non-metal ionic
Carbon Oxygen
.. Table 3.4 : Possible descriptions of the make-up of
a liquid. A
shares 1 electron
with hydrogen and 3
shares 1 electron
with hydrogen and 1
electrons with oxygen electron with carbon
6 Draw dot-and-cross diagrams of the ionic bonding shares 2 electrons shares 1 electron
in the following compounds and give their formula: with hydrogen and with hydrogen and
a lithium fluoride B
2 electrons with 2 electrons with
b sodium oxide oxygen carbon
c magnesium chloride. shares 1 electron shares 1 electron
with hydrogen and with hydrogen and
C
3 electrons with 2 electrons with
oxygen carbon
shares 2 electrons shares 1 electron
with hydrogen and with hydrogen and
D
2 electrons with 1 electron with
oxygen carbon
Table 3.5: Bonding in methanoic acid.
60 )
60
3 Chemical bonding
ACTIVITY 3.1
Part 1: Mind-mapping chemical bonding

Mind-mapping is a technique that allows you
to visually organise your thoughts and share
information on a complex topic. Figure 3.20 shows
part of a mind map on atoms, ions and molecules.
A section of the map has been drawn based on the
ideas behind atomic theory.
1 Copy the current map and complete the
'atomic theory' group by filling in the
missing words.
2 Draw new clouds on the unoccupied branches: Atoms are the
the upper branch labelled 'ionic bonding' and smallest particles
the middle branch labelled 'covalent bonding'.
0 Dalton's idea that take part
in a ............ .. .
3 Add boxes around each new cloud giving the reaction
key details of that type of bonding. Include as
m_any ideas as you can. Atoms of different
elements can The atoms of
4 Using another coloured pen, can you make a combine to make the different
new link between one of the lower boxes and the molecules elements differ
t he middle cloud? of a .. .-... .. ...... . in size
You could also try to treate your own mind map
using online tools and resources available on A pure elem;nt contains Atoms of an
t he internet. only atoms with the same element are
number of ... ........... . each given their
· in the nucleus own symbol
Figure 3.20: A mind map on atoms, ions and molecules.
61 )
61
Ionic crystals are hard but much more brittle than other
3.3 Giant structures types of crystal lattice. This is a result of the structure of
the layers. In an ionic crystal, pushing one layer against
another brings ions of the same charge next to each
Giant ionic lattice structures other. The repulsions force the layers apart (Figure 3.22).
Ionic compounds form lattices consisting of positive
and negative ions (giant ionic lattice). In an ionic Water can also disrupt an ionic lattice. Many ionic
lattice, the nearest neighbours of an ion are always of compounds dissolve in water. Water molecules are able
the opposite charge. Thus, in sodium chloride, each to interact with both positive and negative ions. When an
sodium (Na•) ion is surrounded by six chloride (Ci-) ionic crystal dissolves, each ion becomes surrounded by
ions (Figure 3.21), and each c1- ion is surrounded by six water molecules. This breaks up the lattice and keeps the
Na• ions. Overall, there are equal numbers of Na• and ions apart (Figure 3.23). For those ionic compounds that
c1- ions, so the charges balance. The actual arrangement do not dissolve in water, the forces between the ions must
of the ions in other compounds depends on the numbers be very strong.
of ions involved and on their sizes. However, it is Ions in solution are able to move, so the solution can
important to remember that all ionic compounds are carry an electric current. Ionic compounds can conduct
electrically neutral. electricity when dissolved in water. This is also true when
they are melted because here, again, the ions are able to
move through the liquid and carry the current.
chlorine atom
(Cl)
n
ectron (Na•)
sodium atom unit cell
(Na)
Figure 3.21: The arrangement of positive and negative ions in a sodium chloride crystal.
force applied here

,~HH,
•5 •e •5 •e •5 . Q •
••• ••
•••••
C
----► • • • -~ • •
• • Q • •
• •• •$ l •
...
••••• •
•
Figure 3.23: Water molecules (red and white) surround

Figure 3.22: In ionic crystals, when one layer is forced to metal (yellow) and non-metal (green) ions. This helps ionic
slide against another, repulsions cause the crystal to fracture. substances (e.g. sodium chloride, NaCl) to dissolve in water.
62 >
62
3 Chemical bonding
...
Ionic crystal lattices are called 'giant' structures because Diamond and graphite
the structure repeats itself in all directions. The forces
The properties of diamond are due to the fact that the
involved are the same in all directions holding the
strong covalent bonds extend in all directions through the
whole structure together. There are two other types
whole crystal. Each carbon atom is attached to four others
of giant structure: 1':ia_nt coY.aJent structures and ~fant
- the atoms are arranged tetrahedrally (Figure 3.24) and
metallic 1.atticcs.
all the atoms are bonded to each other.
KEYWORDS
giant ionic lattice (structure): a lattice held

together by the electrostatic forces of attraction
between positive and negative ions
giant strnctures: these-are lattices where the
structure repeats itself in all directions; the forces
involved are the same in all directions holding the diamond
whole structure together
Figure 3.24: The tetrahedral structure of diamond.
giant covalent structures: a substance where
large numbers of atoms are held together by Diamond has a very high melting point and, because
covalent bonds forming a strong lattice structure the bonding extends throughout the whole structure,
giant metallic lattice: a regu lar arrangement of it is very hard and is used in cutting tools. The bonds
are rigid, however, and these structures are much more
positive metal ions held together by the mobile
brittle than giant metallic lattices. All the outer electrons
'sea' of electrons moving between the ions
of the atoms in these structures are used to form covaient
bonds. There are no electrons free to move. Diamond
is therefore a typicaI non-metallic element. It does not
conduct electricity (Table 3.6).
Giant covalent structures
Giant molecular crystais are held together by strong
covaient bonds. This type of structure is shown by some
elements (e.g. carbon, in the form of diamond and
graphite) and also by some compounds (e.g. silica, SiO2).
Diamond Graphite
Properties Uses Properties Uses
Colourless,
In jewellery and
Appearance transparent crystals Dark grey, shiny solid
ornamental objects
that sparkle in light
Soft - the layers can
In drill bits, diamond
The hardest natural slide over each other In pencils, and as a
Hardness saws and glass-
substance - and solid has a lubricant
cutters
slippery feel
As electrodes and
Electrical Does not conduct
Conducts electricity for the brushes in
conductivity electricity
electric motors
Table 3.6: A comparison of the properties and uses of diamond and graphite.
63 )
63
Graphite is a different form of carbon that does conduct

electricity (fable 3.6). The carbon atoms are arranged
in a different way in the molecular structure of graphite.
They are arranged in fl.at layers of linked hexagons
(Figure 3.25).
I
I I I
I. 1 1 I
I I It I I: I
~
~ I
Figure 3.26: A kit for preparing graphene. Items donated

one layer how the layers fit together to the Nobel Museum in Stockholm (a piece of graphite, a
graphene transistor and a sticky tape dispenser).
Figure 3.25: Layered structure of graphite.
Each graphite layer is a two-dimensional giant molecule. Silicon(IV) oxide

Within these layers, each carbon atom is bonded to three
Sand and quartz are examples of silica (silicon(IV)
others by strong covalent bonds. Between the layers
oxide, SiO2). The silicon(IV) oxide found in quartz has
there are weaker forces of attraction. The layers are able
a structure similar to diamond (Figure 3.27). In this
to slide over each other easily. This means that graphite
structure, each silicon atom is bonded to four oxygen
feels slippery and can be used as a lubricant. Graphite is
atoms, but each oxygen is only bonded to two silicon
used in pencils. When we write with a pencil, thin layers
atoms. This means that the formula for the structure
of graphite are left stuck to the paper.
is SiOr
The most distinctive property, however, results from the
fact that there are free electrons not used for covalent
bonding by the atoms in the layers. These electrons
can move between the layers, carrying charge, so
that graphite can conduct electricity in a similar way
to metals.
$ The first samples of graphene (see the Science in Context
section) were isolated in experiments aimed at seeing
how thin a piece of graphite could be made by polishing
or by cleaning graphite with 'sticky tape' (Figure 3.26).
The layers of graphite were peeled off for surface diamond silicon(IV) oxide
science experiments.
Figure 3.27: Comparison of the structures of d iamond and
silicon(IV) oxide.
Both diamond and silicon(IV) oxide structures have

a rigid, tetrahedral arrangement of atoms. All the
atoms in these structures are held together throughout
by strong covalent bonds. As a result, both diamond
and silicon(IV) oxide show similar physical propert ies.
T hey are both very hard and have high melting points.
Silicon(JV) oxide, like diamond, does not conduct
electricity as there are no electrons free to move through
the structure.
64 )
64
3 Chemical bonding
Metallic bonding Physical properties of metals

T he key physical properties of metals can be explained
using the model of metallic structure and bonding:
Giant metallic lattices
Metal atoms have relatively few electrons in their outer • Most metals have high melting and boiling points.
shells. When they are packed together, each metal A large amount of energy is needed to overcome the
atom loses its outer electrons into a 'sea' of delocalised strong and extensive force of attraction between the
electrons. Having Jost electrons, the atoms present are positive metal ions and the 'sea' of delocalised electrons
no longer electrically neutral. They become positive moving within the lattice. These attractive forces can
ions because they have lost electrons but the number only be overcome when the temperature is high.
of protons in the nucleus has remained unchanged. • Metals are good conductors of electricity. In an
Therefore, the structure of a metal is made up of positive electrical circuit, metals can conduct electricity
ions packed together. These ions are surrounded by because the mobile electrons can move through the
electrons, which can move freely between the ions. These structure, carrying the current. This type of bonding
free electrons are delocalised (not restricted to orbiting is present in alloys as well. Alloys such as solder and
one positive ion) and form a kind of electrostatic 'glue' brass, for example, will conduct electricity.
holding the structure together in what is called metallic
bonding (Figure 3.28). • Metals are easily bent and shaped (malleable) or
stretched into wires (ductile). The positive ions
positive ~
in a metal are arranged in layers. When a force
I\. ii\, l'i I'\. is applied, the layers can slide over each other.
..,,\'II/I
metal ion
O ~ '9'
The attractive forces in metallic bonding act in all
electron ~ 0 directions to hold the structure together. This means
that when the layers slide over each other new bonds
G~Q!Q Q 0
0
are easily formed (Figure 3.29). This movement of
layers leaves the metal with a different shape.
Q~O
Q OQ O
~ force
0
Figure 3.28: In metallic bonding, the metal ions are

applie! ~
_cWWWW
YiJEJ ... ~t:~ds
surrounded by a 'sea' of delocalised electrons that are free Before After, form;d
to move about.
Figure 3.29: When a force'is applied to a metal, the layers can
.. slide over each other without the structure being broken.
KEYWORDS
'sea' of delocalised electrons: term used for the

free, mobile electrons between the positive ions KEY WORDS
in a metallic lattice malleable: a word used to describe the property
metallic bonding: an electrostatic force of that metals can be bent and beaten into sheets
attraction between the mobile 'sea' of electrons ductile: a word used to describe the property that
and the regular array of positive metal ions within metals can be drawn out and stretched into wires
a solid metal
This chapter involves drawing different diagrams and visual representations of molecules and
structures. Do you find drawing t hese diagrams useful? Do these visualisations help you to understand t he
topic? Could you use d iagrams in other topics in chemistry to help develop your understanding?
=
65 )
I'-.
I
65
) CAMSRIOGE IGCSETM CHEMISTRY~COURSEBOOK
giant
metals metallic
lattices
giant metal+
ionic
bonding non-metal(s)
ELEMENTS
COMPOUNDS
separate
atoms
(noble gases)
Figure 3.30: Summary of chemical bonding in elements and compounds.
Metallic bonding represents the final type of bonding present in chemical elements
and compounds. We have discussed the following different types of bonding:
• covalent bonding that occurs in elements and compounds
• ionic bonding that occurs in metallic compounds
• metallic bonding present in metallic elements.
These different types of bonding and the nature of the substances they bond
together are summarised in F igure 3.30.
Questions
8 Which of the following elements exists as a giant covalent structure?
., A carbon B iodine C helium D oxygen
9 Carbon and silicon are both in Group IV of the Periodic Table. Using Table 3.7,
which row (A- D) contains the text that best describes the bonding structure of
carbon dioxide and silicon(IV) oxide?
Carbon dioxide Silicon(IV) oxide

Molecules attracted to each other by strong
A Giant molecule with strong covalent bonds
covalent bonds
Molecules held together by weak Molecules attracted to each other by strong
B
intermolecular forces covalent bonds
Molecules held together by weak
C Giant molecwle with strong covalent bonds
intermolecular forces
Molecules attracted to each other by strong Molecules attracted to each other by strong
D
covalent bonds covalent bonds
Table 3.7: Bonding in ca rbon dioxide and silicon(IV) oxide.
66 )
66
3 Chemical bonding
10 Metals such as copper are bonded together by

the attraction between metal ions and a 'sea' of
delocalised electrons surrounding them. Which of
the properties of metals (A- O) is not explained by
this type of bonding?
A electrical conductivity
B malleability
C melting point
D reaction with acids
ACTIVITY 3.2
Part 2: Mind-mapping chemical bonding

The types of bonding and particles described in the mind map you devised in Activity 3.1 (Part 1) produce
several d ifferent giant structures present in solid substances. Look back at the mind map you created and
see how you can extend it to include these structures.
Peer assessment • Have they included the key ideas on

covalent bonding?
Swap your mind map with a partner and use the
following checklist to ask them questions: • Have they made links between the different
ideas in a different colour?
• Have they completed the ideas ab0ut
atomic theory? • Have they included ideas about
giant structures?
• Have they included the key information on
ionic bonding? • Were there ideas you could gain from looking
at your partner's mind map?
..
67 )
67
There are differences between chemical elements, compounds and mixtures.

A covalent bond is formed between two atoms by the sharing of a pair of outer electrons and this is
illustrated using dot-and-cross diagrams.
Covalent bonding involves sharing more electrons in more complex molecules including those containing
I multiple bonds.
Compounds formed between Group I metals and Group VII elements involve ionic bonding using the forces
of elect rostatic attraction between positive metal ions (cations) and negative non-meta l ions (anions), and dot-
and-cross d iagrams show electron t ra nsfer.
An ionic bond is a strong electrostatic attraction between oppositely charged ions.
> Dot-and-cross diagrams are used to describe the formation of ionic bonds between metals and non-metals.
T he physical properties of simple molecular compounds and ionic compounds can be related to their
str ucture and bonding.
T he physical properties of simple molecular compounds and ionic compounds can be explained in terms of
their structure and bonding.
Diamond and graphite have giant covalent structures and their very strong structures ma ke them useful
and versatile.
Silicon(IV) oxide has a giant covalent str ucture similar to that of diamond, and the two substances therefore
have similar physical properties.
Metallic bonding is the electrostatic attraction between positive metal ions in the metallic lattice and a 'sea' of
delocalised electrons between them.
Metallic bonding explains why metals are malleable and ductile, a nd good electrical conductors.
.. Choice materials
Being able to link t he type of bond ing to the
properties that a chemical has is important when
selecting which material to use for a specific rol e
(Figure 3.31). In the desig n of new electronic
components, you need excellent conductors, while
for sports equipment you might need high tensile
strengt h and in panels for spacecraft you would
need high melting points.
You have been asked to design a training tool
for new chemists so that t hey can learn how to
predict the properties of a given compound/ Figure 3.31 : An el ectric motor, showing the gold rotor
st ructure and link this to their understanding of (centre), the small graphite brushes on either side of the
dot-and-cross diagrams. rotor and the rotating copper coi l. The bonding present in
each of these components is suited t o its role in the motor.
68 >
68
3 Chemical bonding
CONTINUED
• Take a piece of A4 card and cut it into quarters. Take one of the quarters of paper (one of the four
c0mpounds) and cut it into fi~e segments, each
• Select four different chemicals: an ionic giving one of the properties. Repeat for the other
compound, a simple covalent compound, t hree compounds. Then, mix all of the properties
a giant molecular compound and a metal. and ask your partner to try to sort them out and
put them into the correct number sequence. When
• Draw diagrams of each material on one side
completed you can ask them to draw the structure
of each eard (for the ionic and simple covalent
this must include dot-and-cross diagrams, for diagrams for each comp<:>Und. These can be
the metal it should include the lattice of ions checked by flipping the card over.
surrounded by delocalised electrons and for
the giant molecular it should just be a part of.
-
l) Name: Calcium chloride
the lattice).
I
• Draw equally spaced lines on the reverstl! of
each card to make five spaces and add the •
2) Type of bonding: Ionic I
3) Melting point: High
following details:
1 name of compound 4) Electrical conductivity:
Conducts when molten or in
2 type of bonding
solution but not as a sol id
3 melting point: state whether it is high
or low 5) Other properties:
II
-- 4 electrical conductivity: state whether it

conducts as a solid, liquid, in solution or
no electrical conductivity
I
5 other properties: list any other properties

e.g. lubricant, malleable, etc. (if none just
leave as blank).
I
[0 ]
For example, a card on ionic bonding for calcium
chloride is shown in Figure 3.32. [0J
.. Important informat1on for designing the card:
You must have the numbers 1-5 on the cards for
[0 ]
each property.
Figure 3.32: Front and reverse side of a card for an

ionic compound.
69
) CAMBRIDGE IGCSE™ CHEMISf RY: COURSEBOOK
1 Some non-metallic elements form covalent simple molecular structures

involving a number of atoms. Phosphorus is one of these, forming the
molecule P4.
Which of A - D indicates the total number of electrons shared in the

bonds in this molecule?
A 12 B 8 C 4 D 2 11I
2 There are various different types of structure that compounds can form,
depending on the nature of their bo nding. A substance has a n ionic
structure that can be represented as shown in the figure below.
a What could this substance be?

A iodine COMMAND WORDS
B water give: produce
C potassium bromide an answer from a
D diamond 11I g iven source or
recall/memory
b Give reasons for your answer to a. (2)
[Total: 3) explain: set out
3 When potassium reacts with chlorine the ionic compo und po tassium purposes or
chloride is formed . The electronic structures of the two ions formed are reasons/make the
the same. relationships between
things evident/
[K 2,8,8j+ [Cl 2,8,&J- provide why and/or
a Explain what has happened during the reaction to form these two ions. (2) how and support with
b When two chlorine atoms react with each other ions are not formed. relevant evidence
Sketcha dot-and-cross diagram to show the bond between two sketch: make a
chlorine atoms. Show outer shell electrons only. (2)
simple freehand
c What name is given to this type of bond? (1] . drawing showing th e
d Give a difference in physical properties between the chlorine and key features, taking
potassium chloride. (1 I care over proportions
[Total: 6)
70 )
70
3 Chemical bonding
CONTINUED
>
COMMAND WORD
contrast: identify/
comment on
d ifferences
>
71
After studying this chapter, think about how confident you are with the different topics. This will help you see any
gaps in your knowledge and help you to learn more effectively.
- - - - - - -- - -- - - -- -- - ~- ~- - - - - - - -
Confident
See Needs Almost
I can to move
Topic ... more work there
on
describe the difference between elements,
3.1
compo unds a nd mixtures
describe how a covalent bond is formed when a
pair of outer electrons a re shared between two
3. 1
atoms. using do t-and-c ross diagra ms to illustrate the
sharing of electrons
describe the electronic configuration in more
> complex molecules, using dot-and-cross diagrams 3.1
outline some of the properties of simple

3. 1
molecular compounds
f explain some of the properties of simple molecular
> compounds (including reference to weak

intermolecular forces)
3.1
describe the formation of ionic bonds between the

ions of Gro up I metals and Group VII halogens by 3.2
electron transfer
o utline some of the physical properties of
3.2
ionic compounds
explain some of the physical properties of
> ionic compounds 3.2
describe the giant lattice structures of ionic

compounds as a regular arrangement of alternating 3.3
cations (positive) and anions (negative)
describe the giant molecular structures of diamond
3.3
and graphite and their key properties
describe the giant covalent structure of silicon(IV)
> oxide and the similarity of its properties to those

of diamond
3.3
describe the nature of metallic bonding as the
> electrostatic attraction between a giant metallic

lattice and a 'sea' of delocalised electrons
3.3
explain the key properties of metals in terms of their

> structure and metallic bonding 3.3
12 >
72
understand how to write the chemical formu lae of elements and compounds
• define the molecular formula as the number and type of different atoms in one molecule
• deduce the formula of simple covalent compounds
• explore how to write word and balanced symbol equations, including state symbols
• describe t he relative atomic mass (A) and understand how to use A, to calculate the relative molecular
(or formula) mass (M)
. . . .. . .. . . . .
73
GETTING STARTED
Knowledge of the symbols of the elements and • Based on this list, create five questions to ask
their use in chemical formulae is important in a partner.
building confidence in chemistry.
• Working in pairs, take it in turns to ask each
• Think about the symbols of elements and any other your questions.
formulae of compounds you have met when
How d id you do? Discuss with your partner how
learning science: write a list of as many as you
much you know about the elements and formulae
can think of.
included in your questions.
WHAT'S IN A NAME?
The 'language' of chemistry is intended to be above • element 115 - moscovium, (Mc): is named after
cultural, linguistic and national boundaries, and meant the Moscow region in Russia where the Joint
to be understood internationally. For this reason, a Institute for Nuclear Research is located
system of chemical symbols and formulae is used.
• element 117 - tennessine, {Ts): was named in
The system of symbols and formulae used today
recognition of the research work on new elements
was invented by the Swedish chemist, Jons Jacob
carried out at Vanderbilt University and the Oak
Berzelius (1779-1848). The agreed symbols are meant
Ridge National Laboratory, which are in the state
to be used by people of all languages. Each chemical
of Tennessee in the USA
element has a unique chemical symbol based on its
name, but not necessarily its name in English. For • element 118 - oganesson, {Og): is named after
example, tungsten has the chemical symbol 'W' after the Armenian nuclear physicist Yuri Oganessian
the German 'Wolfram'. {Figure 4.1 ), who has played a leading role in the
search for new elements.
The use of symbols has an advantage over simply
using the name of an element. The names of
elements can show a language dependency, Figure 4.1: An
particularly in the name ending. So, for example, Armenian stamp
magnesium changes to magnesium in French,
issued in 2017
magnesio in Spanish, magnesion in Greek and m 9gnij to celebrate Yuri
in Russian. In Japanese, katakana reproduces the
Oganessian after
sound of the English 'magnesium'. The use of symbols whom element 118
$ means that chemical formulae can be written that
is named.
are truly universal.
The last element to be discovered in a natural source
was francium (Fr) isolated by Marguerite Perey in
1939. The elements discovered after francium have 1 What are the names of the elements with the
all been synthesised in particle accelerators. Indeed, symbols Lv, Fl and Cn shown in the stamp
the recent authentication of four new elements has (Figure 4.1 )? Which places, or people, were these
led to some new names (and symbols) completing the elements named after? What is significant about
bottom row (or period) of the modern Periodic Table: the names of the elements Cm and Mt?
• element 11 3 - nihonium, {Nh): this element was 2 How many neutrons are there thought to be in an
first discovered at the RIKEN Nishima Centre for atom of oganesson? Why do you think there is
Accelerator Science in Japan, and the name for uncertainty about the number in brackets next to
the element comes from the Japanese name for the symbol for the element? What is the scientific
the country of its discovery purpose of studying the atoms of elements that
only exist for a very short time?
74 )
74
4 Chemical formulae and equations
4.1 Chemical names

Li Be B C IN 2 0 2
and formulae Na Mg
K Ca
Formulae of elements
When we were discussing the difference between
elements and compounds at the beginning of Chapter 3,
we briefly commented that each element has its own
Figure 4.2: Formulae of the elements reflect their structure
chemical symbol . The symbol for an element is one of the
and position in t he Periodic Table.
most important pieces of information presented in the
Periodic Table. You will rapidly become familiar with the
symbols that you most often use. All chemical symbols
are either a single capital letter, such as hydrogen (H), Naming chemical compounds
oxygen (0) and nitrogen (N), or made up of two letters,
such as aluminium (Al), argon (Ar) or magnesium (Mg). Chemical compounds consist of elements bonded
It is important to remember that the second letter of any together. However, many compounds are not simply made
symbol is always a small (lower case) letter. For some up of one element bonded to another. The naming system
elements the symbol is taken from the Latin name of the must take this into account. One important aspect of
element (Table 4.1). this is that there are some ions that are made up of more
than two elements. Some of these ions form part of some
very important substances (e.g. calcium carbonate and
Chemical
Element Latin name potassi~ nitrate).
symbol
silver argentum Ag
Simple and compound ions
gold aurum Au
The ionic compounds mentioned in earlier chapters are all
copper cuprum Cu composed of two simple ions bonded together (e.g. Na+,
sodium natrium Na K+, Mg2+, CJ-, 02-). However, in many important ionic
kalium K compounds the metal ion is combined with a negative ion
potassium
containing a group of atoms (e.g. SOt, N03- , CO/').
iron ferrum Fe \ These compound ions, or groups, are made up of atoms
lead plumbum Pb covalently bonded together. These groups have a negative
.. Table 4.1: Lat in names and chemical symbols for some
charge because they have gained electrons to make a stable
structure. Examples of such ions are shown in Figure 4.3.
important elements.
In addition to these negative compound ions, there is one
important compound ion that is positively charged, the
The use of symbols means that we can very quickly ammonium ion, NH4• (Figure 4.3).
represent an element and its structure. For the elements
whose structures are made up of individual atoms (the
noble gases), the formula of the element is simply its KEYWORDS
symbol (Figure 4.2). chemical symbol: a letter or group of letters
Where elements exist as giant structures, whether held representing an element in a chemical formula
together by metallic or covalent bonding, the formula is
compound ion: an ion made up of several
simply the symbol of the element (e.g. Cu, Mg, Fe, Na, K,
different atoms covalently bonded together
C, Si, Ge). For convenience, the same applies to elements
and with an overall charge {can also be called a
such as phosphorus (P) or sulfur (S) where the molecules
molecular ion; negatively charged compound ions
contain more than three atoms (strictly speaking they
containing oxygen can be called oxyanions)
should be P4 and S8) .
i
75 )
75
CO}- one carbon + three NO3- one nitrogen+ three

oxygens, with overall oxygens, with overall
2-
charge of 2- charge of 1-
one sulfur + four NH/ one nitrogen + four

oxygens, with overall hydrogens, with overall
2-
charge of 2- • charge of 1+
Figure 4.3: Three examples of negatively charged compound ions and a positively charged compound ion. The numbers of
atoms and the overall charge carried by each group of atoms are shown.
Rules for naming compounds • Compounds containing a compound ion (usually

Compounds are built from atoms and ions. Giving containing oxygen) have names that end with
a name to a compound is a way of classifying the -ate. For example, calcium carbonate (CaC03) ,
compound and it is useful to know there are some potassium nitrate (KNOJ, magnesium sulfate
rules to naming most compounds. As we commented (MgSOJ ,md sodium ethanoate (CH 3C00Na).
earlier, the name of a compound should then tell you • The names of some compounds use prefixes to
which atoms or ions are present. There are some basic tell you the number of that particular atom in the
generalisations that are useful: molecule. This is useful if two elements form more
., • If there is a metal in the compound, it is named first. than one compound. For example, carbon monoxide
(CO) and carbon dioxide (CO), nitrogen dioxide
• Where the metal can form more than one ion, (NO;) and dinitrogen tetroxide (Np4), and sulfur
then the name indicates which ion is present. For dioxide (S02) and sulfur trioxide (SOJ.
example, iron(Il) chloride contains the FeH ion,
while iron(III) chloride contains the FeH ion. The names for the important mineral acids follow a
logical system but are best simply learnt at this stage,
• Compounds containing only two elements have e.g. sulfuric acid (H2SOJ. Some common and important
names ending in -ide. For example, sodium chloride compounds have historical names that do not fit with
(NaCl), calcium bromide (CaBr2) and magnesium the above rules. Examples of these include water (Hp),
nitride (M!¾N/ The important exception to this is ammonia (NH 3) and methane (CHJ.
the hydroxides, which contain the
· hydroxide (OH-) ion.
76 >
76
• For elements in Groups V- VII

Formulae of covalent valency = 8-the group number
compounds • For elements in Group VIII
valency = 0
Atoms of each element have a combining power,
sometimes referred to as their valency. The combining This trend in valency with the group number can be seen
power of an atom in a covalent molecule is the number by looking at typical compounds of the elements of
of bonds that atom makes. This idea of an atom having Period 3 (Table 4.2). You can see that the valency rises
a valency can be used to work out the formulae of to a value of 4 and then decreases to O as we cross the
covalent compounds. Note that the term valency is not period (e.g. carbon is in Group IV, so its valency is 4, and
required knowledge. oxygen is in Group VI, so its valency is 8 - 6 = 2).
The valency of an element in the main groups of the The 'cross-over' method for working out chemical
Periodic Table can be deduced from the group number of formulae can be applied to simple covalent
the element. The relationship between valency and group compounds where the molecules have a central atom,
number is: e.g. water, methane, carbon dioxide and ammonia
(Worked example 4.1).
• For elements in Groups I- I V
valency = group number
Group I II Ill IV V VI VII VIII

Valency (combining power) 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 0
Typical compound NaCl MgCl 2 AICl 3 SiCl 4 PH 3 H 2S HCI -

Table 4 .2: Typical compounds of the elements of Period 3 showing the change in valency across the period.
WORKED EXAMPLE 4 .1
Work out the formula of carbon dioxide

A method involving the symbols and valencies of the elements can be used:
1 Write down the symbols of the elements.
\
2 Write the valencies of the elements beneath their symbols (Figure 4.4).
.. 3 If necessary, simplify the ratio .
Formula of carbon dioxide
Write down the symbols c~

Write down the valencies
€[ ~
cp,
r Formula
Can simplify:
co,
I Figure 4.4: A method for finding the formula of carbon dioxide.
r Now apply this 'cross-over' method to finding the formula of:

a methane (the simplest compound of carbon and hydrogen)
r b nitrogen chloride (a simple molecular compound)
f
f 77 )
r'
77
If we are given a diagram of a molecule showing all the numbers of covalent molecules, particularly those that
atoms and bonds, we can easily work out its molecular do not have a single central atom, e.g. 8i02, C2H 6, C3H 6,
for mula. We do this by simply counting the number of etc. (Figures 4.5 and 4.6):
each type of atom present. Figure 4.5 shows diagrams
The molecular formulae of compounds such as hydrogen
of molecules with the molecular formulae BrF3, NH3
and C 3H 6 • peroxide and ethane still obey the valency rules but it is
important to know the structure of the molecules. The
numbers in the formula represent the actual number
F F
"/
Br N
H
I I I
H H of atoms of each element present in a molecule of
the compound.
I /1'-
H H H H-C-C=C
F I \ When chemists were first working out the formulae
H H of compounds, they were calculating the formulae
Figure 4.5: Diagrams showing the structures of BrF3, NH 3 from data on the reacting masses of the elements that
and C3H6. formed a compound. These calculations from practical
experiments gave the ratio of the elements present in a
The molecular formula of a compound is the formula compound. We will consider this type of calculation in
Chapter 5. For the third compound (propene) in Figure
you should use in chemical equations because it shows the
4.5, such experiments and data would give a ratio for
actual number of each type of atom present in a molecule.
C:H of 1 : 2. This result indicates a formula of CH 2 for
this compound. Other evidence on the structure of the
KEY WORDS molecule tells us that the molecular formula of propene
is C 3H 6. This type of formula based on the simplest
molecular formula: a formula that shows the
ratio of the elements present is known as the empirical
actual number of atoms of each element present
formula. The empirical formula of a compound is the
in a molecule of the compound
simplest whole number ratio of the different atoms in
that compound. In the case of propene, the empirical
formula is not the same as the molecular formula.
Empirical and molecular formulae of
The two types of formula are numerically related; the
covalent compounds molecular formula must be a whole number multiple of
If you look closely at the third structure in Figure 4.5, the empirical formula for a compound. Compounds such
it has the molecular formula C 3H 6• We do not simplify as ethane (Figure 4.6) have two different formulae:
the formula of this compound down to CH 2 as that ,
• the molecular formula of ethane is C 2H 6
would not represent the actual molecule. The method for
working out the formulae of simple covalent molecules • the empirical formula of ethane is CH 3
.. by crossing over the valencies does not work for large
KEYWORDS
H Each oxygen atom
"o-o makes two bonds; empirical formula: a formula for a compound
'-H each hydrogen that shows the simplest ratio of atoms present
hydrogen peroxide makes one bond.
Some non-metallic compounds form giant covalent
structures. The most important example of this is
HH Each carbon atom
silicon(IV) oxide (Chapter 3). The formula for any
H-t-t-H makes four bonds;

giant covalent compound is always the simplest whole
number ratio of the atoms present in the structure. Such
~ ~ each hydrogen
makes one bond.
compounds are always represented by their empirical
ethane formula. The formula of silicon(IV) oxide is therefore
Si02 as the atoms are present in a I : 2 ratio in the crystal
Figure 4.6: Structures of hydrogen peroxide (Hp~ and
ethane (C2H6), showing the bonds made.
78 >
78
structure. The formula of any giant covalent compound The chemical formula is MgCl 2• The overall structure
can be worked out by the cross-over method using the must be neutral. The positive and negative charges
valencies of the elements. You could prove this for must balance each other. Because they are giant ionic
yourself for silicon(IV) ox_ide. structures, ionic compounds are always represented by
their empirical formulae and the cross-over method can
be used to work these formulae out.
Formulae of ionic compounds The size of the charge on an ion is a measure of its
Ionic compounds are solids at room temperature. Such valency (Table 4.3). Mg2•ions can combine with CJ- ions
,. compounds have giant ionic lattice structures (Chapter 3) in a ratio of I : 2, but Na• ions can only bond in a 1 : 1
and their formulae are simply the whole number ratio ratio with CJ- ions. Table 4.3 gives a summary of some
of the positive to negative ions in the structure. Thus, in simple and compound ions.
magnesium chloride, there are two chloride ions (Cl-) for
In ionic compounds the valency of each ion is equal
each magnesium ion (Mg2• ).
to its charge. This idea can be used to ensure that you
ions present Mgi+ CJ- always use the correct formula for an ionic compound.
Follow the examples of aluminium oxide and calcium
total charge 2+ 2-
oxide in Figure 4. 7 (Worked example 4.2), and make sure
you understand how this works.
Valency
(combining Simple metal ions Simple non-metallic ions Compound ions
power)
(+ve cation) (+ve cation) (-ve anion) (+ve cation) (-ve anion)
ammonium,
1 sodium, Na• hydrogen, H+ hydride, H- hydroxide, OH-
NH/
potassium, K-+ chloride, Cl- nitrate, NO;
hydrogen carbonate,
silver, Ag• bromide, Br
HCQ3-
\
copper(!), Cu• iodide, 1-
.,
2 magnesium, Mg2• oxide, 0 2- sulfate, SO/·
calcium, Ca2 • sulfide, s2- carbonate, CO/-
zinc, Zn 2•
..
iron(II), Fe2•
copper(II), Cu 2•
3 aluminium, AP• nitride, N3- phosphate, PO/·
iron(ll1), Fe3•
Table 4.3: Some common simple and compound ions.
79 )
79
) CAMBRIDGE IG.CSE™ CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
WORKED EXAMPLE 4.2
Working out t he formulae of aluminium oxide and calcium oxide
Formula for aluminium oxide
Write down the correct symbols Al 0
Write down the charges on the ions ~ -

Formula
Formula for calcium oxide
Writ e down the correct symbols Ca 0
Write down the charges on the ions ~ -

Cap2
1 Formula
Simplify the ratio:
eao
Figure 4.7: Working out the fo~ulae of alu~inium oxide and calcium oxide:
Now find the formulae of:

a magnesium iodide '
b aluminium bromide
The same rules apply when writing the formulae of For example, the formula of the carbonate ion is always
,.... compounds containing comp~und ions because each· ·cot. Worked example 4.3 shows how the formulae
of them has an overall charge (Ta61e 4J). It is useful ·for sodium carbonate and ammonium sulfate can
to put the formula of the compound ion in bifackets, . be determined.
showing that the formula of this ion cannot be-changed.
'
WORKED EXAMPLE 4.3
'I
Formula
-- of sodiu!ll
... - .... _ - ·- r---carbonate
..
t I
! I
Wri te down the correct symbols
l--···---
. .
,p.
i
-- .__ ., Na'----- ~
'' . W~te down the charges on the iotls'
- ··- ·+---·--·- -.·-·· -
~ -
I Fotmu/a Na2CO,
I
The brackets-are not needed
if there is ~nly one ion presen1
80 )
. I.
80
..
+
~ . ··~.
....
~ #, ;f : ~ ,~,..:I ., •<(• •
. ;, 1 . · -4'"' -~h~ tt:atfo~rr.:U1~·~-ana,eq1.1il'1.o'rfs;
~ •._ ••.;_ \, ,..: • /!,,. ',.~ •~:: f'°:tl' t : ~~~ =•
... ;. • • • .. • • •.,• l V : ' • • \., :•"
• • 1... , t
"''" .., .,_ •• ·.-:
CONTINUED
Formula o'f'am:i;~r\fu~ 'S~lfate ~: · ·. ,

-: ..... • • ~\ -~ .? •
.• . ·f
Wr!te do.;,.n the cor;~·ct sfmbols .
Write down the ~har'ges on the ions

e •
:. Formula
Figure 4.8: Working out tbe formulae of sodium carbonate and ammonium sulfate .. ,
Now find the formulae of:

a potassium phosphate
b ammonium nitrate
Ionic compounds can be represented by diagrams The diagram shows four positive ions and eight negative
of their structure. Figure 4.9 shows the structure of ions. So Ca 2• ions :::: 4 and CJ- ions = 8, If we divide
calcium chloride. · through by 4, we get the simplest ratio, whic)l is. Ca2• ions
== I and ci- ions = 2. So, the formula· of calcium chloride
is CaClr ·· ·
The formula of an ionic compound is always the simplest
whole number ratio of the ions present in.the compound
(the empirical formula), That is why we should always
simplify the ratio by cancelling down_, as we did for the
example of calcium chloride. Table 4.4 summarises the
formulae of some important ionic compounds.
Figure 4.9: Representing th e structure of calcium chloride

(CaCI) diagrammatically.
Name : · .:;_;;& ·, .•
Formula ' lons:present ,,_ Ratio
sodium chloride NaCl Na• Cl- 1:1
ammonium nitrate NH 4 N03 NH/ N03- 1:1
potassium sulfate K2S04 K• SO/- 2: 1
calcium hydrogencarbonate Ca{HC0} 2 Ca 2• HC03- 1:2
copper(II) sulfate CuS04 Cu 2• so,i- 1:1
magnesium nitrate Mg(N03) 2 Mg2• N03- 1:2
aluminium chloride AICl3 AP• Cl- '1 :3
Table 4.4: Formulae of some ionic compounds.
81 )
81
ACTIVITY 4.1
Jigsaw compounds Step 5: Cut out your cards to be used as a jigsaw.

Work in groups to make a set of jigsaw cards for the • Having made your set of cards, use them
common ions that form compounds (Figure 4.10). to work out the formu lae of the following
compounds: copper carbonate, iron(III) oxide
Step 1: Use the selection of ionic compounds
and ammonium sulfate.
and ions in Table 4.4.
• Then challenge each other in the group to
Step 2: In order for the jigsaw pieces to make a
make a compound you name.
compound, the shapes need to fit together to
make a rectangle. On a piece of paper, draw seven • Using some of your examples, compare this
rectang les to represent the seven compounds. method to the cross-over method described
earlier in this chapter.
Ste p 3: Divide each rectang le into cards
representing the ions needed for each
compound. For t he positive ions, create 'slots' in
the card. For the negative ions, create 'tabs'. The
'tabs' on the negative ions should fit into the 'slots'
in the positive ion cards. The number of slots or
tabs on each card represents the charge of the
ion. Use Figure 4.10 as a guide. More than one card
of t he same ion may be needed to complete the
compound. In addition to the cards based on the
ions in Table 4.4 you should make cards for CO/,
0 2• and Fe 3+ ions (see Figure 4.10).
Step 4: Make sure your cards are labelled with
the formula of the ion it represents. Then your Figure 4.10: Examples of jigsaw cards designed to help
rectang le of cards will give you the form ula of the with matching _ionic charge to form compounds.
ionic compound concerned.
Self-assessment
Think about the following questions, and give yourself a©@ or ®
How confident did you feel ...
• working out and writing the formulae of ionic compounds?

• working out the formula of copper carbonate?
• working out the fo rm1.1.la of iron(III) oxide?
• working 0 1:1t the formula of ammonium sulfate?
Do you find this method of fi nding tne formu la of an ionic compound more helpful than the
cross-over met hod?
82 )
82
The reaction between hydrogen and oxygen is another

4.2 Chemical equations highly exothermic reaction. The hydrogen-oxygen fuel
cell is based on this reaction (Chapter 6). The word
for reactions equation for this reaction is:
hydrogen + oxygen -+ water
Word equations Note that, although a large amount of energy is produced
The 'volcano reaction', in which ammonium dichromate in this reaction, it is not included in the equation. An
is decomposed, gives out a large amount of energy and equation includes only the chemical substances involved,
produces nitrogen gas (Figure 4.11 ). Other reactions and energy is not a chemical substance.
produce gases much Jess violently. The neutralisation of
an acid solution with an alkali produces no change that KEY WORDS
you can see. However, a reaction has happened.
word equation: a summary of a chemical reaction
using the chemical names of the reactants
and products
reactants: (in a chemical reaction) the
chemical substances that react together in a
chemical reaction
products: (in a chemical reaction) the substance(s)

produced by a chemical reaction
This type of equation gives us some information. But

equations can be made even more useful if we write them
using chemical formulae.
Constructing balanced
symbol equations
I
Figure 4.11: Decomposition of ammonium dichromate (the From investigations of a large number of different
'volcano experiment') produces heat, light and an apparently chemical reactions, a very important point about all
.. large amount of powder. reactions has been discovered. It is summed up in a law,
known as the law of conservation of mass. This law of
We can write out descriptions of chemical reactions, but conservation of mass states that the total mass of all the
these would be quite long. To understand and group products of a chemical reaction is always equal to the
similar reactions together, it is useful to have a shorter total mass of all the reactants.
way of describing them. The simplest way to do this is This important law becomes clear if we consider what
in the form of a word equ:1tion . This type of equation is happening to the atoms and molecules involved in a
links together the names of the substances that react reaction. During a chemical reaction, the atoms of one
(reactants) with those of the new substances formed element are not changed into those of another element.
(products). The word equation for burning magnesium in Nor do atoms disappear from the mixture or indeed
oxygen would be: appear from nowhere. A reaction involves the breaking
magnesium + oxygen -+ magnesium oxide of some bonds between atoms, and then the making
reactants . product of new bonds between atoms to give the new products.
During a chemical reaction, some of the atoms present
'change partners'. During the reaction, atoms separate
from those they were joined to and become bonded to
atoms from the other reactants.
83 )
83
Look more closely at the reaction between hydrogen and

oxygen mol~uJes shown·in Figure 4 .12. ·
hydrogen + oxygen -+ water
Ill
hydrogen + _oxygen water

2H 2 + 0 2 2Hp
Figure 4.12: A chemical reaction involves atoms 'changing Figure 4.1 3: Summary of the reaction between hydrogen
partners' and new substances being formed. and oxygen.
Each molecule of water (Hp) contains only one oxygen A balanced equation gives us more information about a
atom (0 ). It follows that one molecule of oxygen (0 :J has reaction than we can get from a simple word eqµation.
enough oxygen atoms to produce two molecules of water Worked example 4.4 shows a step-by-step approach to
(Hp). Therefore, two molecules of hydrogen (H:J will be working out the balanced equation for a reaction.
needed to provide enough hydrogen atoms (H) to react
with each oxygen molecule. The numbers of hydrogen KEYWORDS
and oxygen atoms are then the same on both sides of
the equation. balanced chemical (symbol) equation:
The symbol equation for the reaction between hydrogen a summary of a chemical reaction using chemical
and oxygen is therefore written: • formulae - the total number of any of the atoms
involved is the same on both the reactant and
2~+02 -+ 2Hp product sides of the equation
This is a balanced chcmiclll equation. The numbers of
each type of atom are the same on both the reactant
side and the product side of the equation: four hydrogen
atoms and two oxygen atoms on each side (Figure 4.13).
WORKED EXAMPLE 4.4
$ What is the balanced equation for the reaction between magnesium and oxygen?
Step 1. Make sure you know what the reactants and Step 4. Balance the equation:
products are. For example, magnesium bums in air
2Mg + 0 2 -+ 2Mg0
(oxygen) to form magnesium oxide.
Now work through the steps to find the balanced
Step 2. From this you can write out the word equation:
symbol equation for the reaction that takes place when
magnesium + oxygen -+ magnesium oxide burning sodium is lowered into a gas jar of chlorine
gas. Sodium chloride is produced in this reaction.
Step 3. Wri te out the equation using the formulae of
Remember that chlorine is a diatomic gas.
the elements and compounds:
Mg+ 0 2 -+ Mg0
Remember that oxygen exists as diatomic molecules.
This equation is not balanced: there are two oxygen
atoms on the left, but only one on the right.
84 >
84
4 Chemical formulc~e and equations
_,
We cannot alter the formulae of the substances involved This symbol equation needs to be balanced. An even
in the reaction. These are fixed by the bonding in the number of hydrogen atoms is needed on the product side,
substance itself. We can only put multiplying numbers in because on the reactant side the hydrogen occurs as Hp.
front of each formula where necessary. Therefore, the amount of KOH must be doubled. Then
Chemical reactions do not only involve elements reacting the number of potassium atoms and water molecules
must be doubled on the left:
together. ln most reactions, compounds are involved.
For example, potassium metal is very reactive and gives 2K + 2Hp-+ 2KOH + ~
hydrogen gas when it comes into contact with water.
This equation is now balanced. Check for yourself that
potassium reacts with water to produce potassium
the numbers of the three types of atom are the same on
hydroxide and hydrogen (Figure 4.14).
both sides. · ·~
Questions
1 Write word equations for the reactions described
in a-c.
a Iron rusts because it reacts with oxygen in the
air to form a compound called iron(III) oxide.
b Sodium hydroxide neutralises sulfuric acid to
form sodium sulfate and water.
c Sodium reacts strongly with water to give a
solution of sodium hydroxide; hydrogen gas is
also given off
2 Balance the following symbol equations:
a _Cu + 0 2-+ _euo
b N2+_Hl -+ _ NH)
c _Na + 0 2 -+ _Nap
d __NaOH + H2SO4 ...:. Na2SO4 + _ Hp
Figure 4.14: Potassium reacts strongly with water to
produce hydrogen. e _Al+ _ ell -+ _AICI)
f _Fe +_Hp-+ _ Fe3O4 + _H 2
All the alkali metals react with water in the same way. So, 3 Change these word equations into balanced symbol
if you know one of these reactions, you know them all. equations.
The general equation is: a hydrogen + chlorine -+ hydrogen chloride
alkali metal + water -+ metal hydroxide + hydrogen b copper + oxygen -+ copper oxide
Therefore: c magnesium + zinc chloride -+ magnesium
chloride + zinc
potassium + water -+ potassium hydroxide + hydrogen
Then:
i.
85 )
85
Using state symbols Ionic equations

So far, our equations have told us nothing about the
Equations B and C in the previous section involve
physical state of the reactants and products. Chemical
mixing solutions that contain ions. Only some of the ions
equations can be made more useful by including symbols
present actually change their status - by changing either
that give us this information. These are called state
their bonding or their physical state. The other ions
symbols They show clearly whether a gas is given off or
present are simply spectator ions to the change. These
a solid precipitate is formed during a reaction. The four
spectator ions are present during a chemical reaction but
symbols used are shown in Table 4.5.
do not take part in it. Note that use of this term is not
specifically required at this level.
Svmbol Meaning
Equation B involves the neutralising of hydrochloric acid
s solid with sodium hydroxide solution:
I liquid
HCl(aq) + NaOH(aq) - NaCl(aq) + Hp(l)
g gas
Writing out all the ions present, we get:
ao aqueous solution (dissolved in water)
[H+(aq) + e-~J +[Na•~+ OH·(aq)]
Table 4.5: State symbols used in chemical equations.
- [Na•-{aq} + €t"iaq}] + Hp(!)
The examples A-C show how state symbols can be used The use of state symbols clearly shows which ions
(the points of particular interest are shown in bold type). have not changed during the reaction. They have been
Note that when water itself is produced in a reaction, it crossed out (like-this) and can be left out of the equation.
has the symbol (I) for liquid, not (aq). This leaves us with the essential ionic equation for all
neutralisation reactions (Chapter 11 ):
A magnesium + nitric acid
- magnesium nitrate + hydrogen W(aq) + OH·(aq) .... Hp())
Mg(s) + 2HNOiaq) - Mg(NOJiaq) + 8i(g) Applying the same principles to a precipitation reaction
B hydrochloric acid + sodium hydroxide again gives us a clear picture of which ions are reacting
- sodium chloride + water (Figure 4. I 5).
HCl(aq) + NaOH(aq) .... NaCl(aq) + H 20(l)
C copper(II) sulfate + sodium hydroxide a
- copper(II) hydroxide + sodium sulfate
CuSO.(aq) + 2NaOH(aq)
- Cu(OH)z(s) + Na2SO.(aq)
KEY WORDS
0
state symbols: symbols used to show the 0 O
physical state of the reactants and products in
a chemical reaction
b
Figure 4.15: A precipitation reaction in which two solutions

containing ions are mixed: a: the overall reaction, and b: the
actual reaction with the spectator ions not shown.
86 )
86
The equation:
4 .3 Relative masses of
,. CuSO.(aq) + 2NaOH(aq) -+ Cu(OHMs) + Na2SO.(aq)
for the precipitation of copper(II) hydroxide becomes: atoms and molecules
Cu2•(aq) + 2OH·(aq) -+ Cu(OHMs)
This is the essential ionic equation for the precipitation Relative atomic mass
of copper(II) hydroxide; the spectator ions (sulfate and
sodium ions) have been left out. of elements
The mass of a single hydrogen atom is incredibly small
KEYWORDS when measured in grams (g):
mass of one hydrogen atom = 1.7x I0-24 g
ionic equation: the simplified equation for a
reaction involving ionic substances: only those = 0.0000000000000000000000017g
ions which actually take part in the reaction It is much more useful and convenient to measure the
are shown masses of atoms relative to each other. To do this, a
standard atom has been chosen, against which all others
are then compared.
Questions This standard atom is an atom of the carbon-12 isotope,

the 'mass' of which is given the value of exactly 12
4 Explain the meaning of the symbols (s), 0), (aq) and (Figure 4.16).
(g) in the following equation, with reference to each
reactant and p roduct:
Na2CO,(s) + 2HCl(aq)
-+ 2NaCl(aq) + HpO) + COiCg)
5 Write an ionic equation, including state symbols, for
each of the following reactions:
a silver nitrate solution + sodium chloride
solution -+ silver chloride + sodium nitrate
solution
b sodium sulfate solution + barium nitrate
solution - sodium nitrate solution + barium
sulfate 1 carbon atom 12 hydrogen atoms
6 Write full symbol equations for the following mass 12 units mass 1 unit each
reactions, followed by the ionic equation for the A,= 12 A,• 1
reaction (include state symbols in both types of
equation).
a dilute hydrochloric acid + potassium hydroxide
solution -+ potassium chloride solution + water
b dilute hydrochloric acid + copper carbonate
-+ copper chloride solution + water +
carbon dioxide
helium(He) hydrogen (H)
Figure 4.16: Relative mass of atoms. Twelve hydrogen

atoms have the same mass as one atom of carbon •12.
A helium atom has the same mass as four hydrogens.
,
I
87 >
87
The use of the mass spectrometer first showed the masses of the atoms or ions in the formula are added
existence of isotopes. Isotopes are atoms of the same · together. The mass of a simple covalent molecular
element that have different masses because they substance found in this way is called the relative
have different numbers of neutrons in the nucleus. molecular mass (M,). Here we illustrate the method
We discussed the existence and structure of isotopes by calculating the relative molecular masses of three
in Chapter 2. In that chapter we also discussed the simple substances.
calculation of the relative atomic mass (A,) of an element Hydrogen gas is made up of H 2 molecules (H-H).
that has isotopes. The majority of elements do in fact Each molecule contains two hydrogen atoms. So, its
have several isotopes (Figure 4.17). relative molecular mass is twice the relative atomic
T he relative atomic mass of an element is the average mass of hydrogen:
mass of an atom of the element, taking into account =
M ,(H2) 2 X 1 2 =
the different natural isotopes of that element. So most Water is a liquid made up of Hp molecules (H-0-H).
relative atomic masses are not whole numbers. But in this Each molecule contains two hydrogen atoms and one
book and the Periodic Table used, with the exception of oxygen atom. So, its relative molecular mass is twice the
chlorine, they are rounded to the nearest whole number relative atomic mass of hydrogen plus the relative atomic
to make our calculations easier. mass of oxygen:
It is important to note that the mass of an ion will be =
M,(Hp) (2 x I)+ 16 18 =
the same as that of the parent atom. The mass of the Sodium chloride is an ionic solid. It contains one
electron(s) gained or Jost in forming the ion can be chloride ion for each sodium ion present. In this case
ignored in comparison to the total mass of the atom. there are no molecules of sodium chloride. The formula
unit of sodium chloride is therefore Na+CJ-. So, its
relative formula mass is the relative atomic mass of
Fl L-- ~.:..,_
==-
_ ___,_~ -- --'I sodium plus the relative atomic mass of chlorine:
=
M,(NaCl) 23 + 35.5 58.5= ,....
7
I If the substance is ionic or a giant covalent compound
(such as silicon(IV) oxide) then we calculate the mass
of the formula unit. We call this the relative formula
mass (M,).
Kr The practical result of these definitions can be seen by
looking at further examples (Table 4.6).
Sn The percentage by mass of a particular element in a
compound can be found from calculations of relative
formula mass. Figure 4.18 shows how this works for the
Figure 4 .1 7: Many different elements have more than simple case of sulfur dioxide (SOJ, whose mass is made
one isotope. These bars show the proportions of different up of 50% each of the two elements.
isotopes for some elements. Fluorine is ra re in having just
one isotope. I
KEY WORDS
formula unit : this unit of an element or

compound is the molecule or group of ions
Relative molecular (formula) defined by the chemical formula of the substance
mass of compounds , relative molecular mass (M ): the sum of all the
Atoms combine~to form molecules or groups of ions. relative atomic masses of the atoms present in
The total masses of these molecules or groups of ions a molecule
provide useful information on the way the elements have relative formula mass (M,): t he sum of all the
combined with each other. The formula of an element relative atomic masses of the atoms present in a
or compound is taken as the basic uµit (the formula unit) 'formula unit' of a substance
that summarises the composi~ion.of the substance. The
88 )
88
hydrogen Hz 2H H = 1 2 X 1 = 2
1C C = 12 1 X 12 = 12
carbon dioxide CO2 20 0 = 16 2 X 16 = 32
44
1Ca Ca .. 40 1 X 40 = 40
calcium carbonate
CaCO3 (one Ca 2• ion, one 1C C = 12 1 X 12 = 12
COt ion) 30 0 = 16 3 X 16 = 48
100
2N N = 14 2 X 14 = 28
8H H = 1 8 X 1 = 8
(NH,)2 SO4 (two NH/ ions,
ammonium sulfate
one sO.2- ion)
1S s = 32 1 X 32 = 32
40 0 = 16 4 X 16 = 64
132
1Mg
1S
Mg
s
-= 24
32
1
1
X
X
24
32
=
=
24
32
MgSO4 .7Hp (one Mg 2 • 4 16
hydrated 40 0 = 16 X = 64
ion, one SO/- ion, seven
magnesium sulfate 14H H = 1 14 X 1 = 14
..., Hp molecules)
70 0 = 16 7 X 16 = 112
246
Table 4.6: Relative formu la masses of some elements and compounds.
Compound formation and

sulfur dioxide chemical formulae
formula S02 The idea that compounds are made up of elements
combined in fixed amounts can be shown experimentally.
Samples of the same compound made in different ways
always contain the same elements. Also, the masses of
the elements present are always in the same ratio.
Several different groups in a class can prepare
magnesium oxide by heating a coil of magnesium in a
crucible (Figure 4.19). The crucible must first be weighed
empty, and then re-weighed with the magnesium in it.
The crucible is then heated strongly. Air is allowed in
by occasionally lifting the lid very carefully but solid
Figure 4.18: Percentage composition by mass of must not be allowed to escape as a white smoke. The
sulfur dioxide. crucible and products are then allowed to cool before
re-weighing. The crucible may be heated and re-weighed
until there is no further change in mass (known as
We will look further at the percentage composition of
'heating to constant mass'). This process is a way of
more complex compounds in Chapter 5.
making sure the reaction has completely finished.
89 )
89
The results of the various experiments in the class can be

plotted on a graph. The mass of oxygen combined with
the magnesium (y-axis) is plotted against the mass of
magnesium used (x-axis). Figure 4.20 shows some results
obtained from this experiment.
magnesium
ribbon 0.3
.....Ol
C
pipe-clay
Q)
Ol
0.2
>.
triangle X
tripod
t
heat
0
0
V>
V> 0.1
"'
~
0
Figure 4.19: Heating magnesium in a crucible.
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4
The increase in mass is due to the oxygen that has now Mass of magnesium/ g
combined with the magnesium. The mass of magnesium
Figure 4.20: Graph of the results obtained from heating
used and the mass of magnesium oxide produced can be
found from the results (Worked example 4.5). magnesium in air. The graph shows the mass of oxygen
(from the air) that reacts with various masses of magnesium.
- - -
WORKED EXAMPLE 4.5
How much magnesium oxide is produced from a given mass of magnesium?
Here are some results obtained from this experiment: Now try the similar calculation on practical data from
the heati ng of hydrated magnesium sulfate crystals.
a mass of empty crucible+ lid= 8.52g
Find the mass of water chemically combined in the
b mass of crucible + lid + magnesium = 8.88 g sample of crystals.
\
c mass of crucible+ lid + magnesium oxide= 9. 12g mass of empty crucible + lid = I0.20 g
d mass of magnesium (b- a) = 0.36g ii mass of crucible + lid + crystals = 22.50 g
mass of magnesium oxide (c- a) = 0.60g iii mass of crucible + lid + dehydrated crystals=
16.20g
mass of oxygen combined with magnesium
Use this data to find the mass of water chemically
::; 0.60 - 0.36 = 0.24g
combined in the crystals of magnesium sulfate.
0.60 g of magnesium oxide is produced from
heating 0.36 g of magnesium
90 )
90
The results show that: Similar experiments can be done to show that the wat.er
of crystallisation present in a particular hydrated salt,
• The more magnesium used, the more oxygen
such as hydrated copper(II) sulfate (CuS04·5H p), is
combines with it from the air and the more
always the same fraction of the total mass of the salt.
magnesium oxide is produced. The graph is a
straight line, showing that the ratio of magnesium
to oxygen in magnesium oxide is fixed. A definite KEYWORDS
compound is formed by a·chemical reaction.
. ' . . water of cryst allisation: water included in the
• A particular compoun9 always contains the same structure of certain salts as they crystallise, e.g.
elements and these elements are always present in copper(II) sulfate pentahydrate (CuSO 4·5Hp)
the same proportions by mass. It does not matter contains five molecules of water of crystallisation
where the compound is found, or how it is made, per molecule of copper(II) sulfate
these proportions cannot be changed.
In this example, magnesium oxide always contains 60%
magnesium and 40% oxygen by mass. Experiments on
other compounds show the sam.e pa\tem. For example,
ammonium nitrate always contains 35% nitrogen, 60%
oxygen and 5% hydrogen by mass.
91
Calculating reacting masses WORKED EXAMPLE 4.6
from equations Calculating the amounts of compounds

Relative molecular or formula masses can also be used to
reacted together or produced in reactions
calculate the amounts of compounds reacted together or If 0.24 g of magnesium react with 0.16 g of oxygen
produced in reactions (Worked example 4.6). to produce 0.40 g of magnesium oxide (Figure 4. 19),
Calculations of quantities like these are a very important how much magnesium oxide (MgO) will be produced
part of chemistry. These calculations show how there is by burning 12g of magnesium?
a great deal of information 'stored' in chemical formulae We have:
and equations. The equation for the reaction between
magnesium and oxygen defines the proportions in which 0.24g Mg producing 0.40g MgO
the two elements always react (Figure 4.21). so I g Mg produces 0.40 g MgO
0.24
Magnesium reacts with oxygen to form magnesium = l.67gMgO
oxide. Work out the reacting masses and the so 12g Mg produces 12 x 1.67 g MgO
product mass.
= 20gMgO
2Mg + 02 - 2Mg0 Using this method based on simple proportions,
calculate the mass of calcium oxide formed if 8.0 g of
2 magnesium 2 magnesium
atoms
+
- atoms
+
calcium carbonate are decomposed completely by
heating. A previous experiment bad shown that
20.0 g of calcium carbonate produces 11 .2 g of
2 oxygen atoms 2 oxygen atoms calcium oxide when heated.
Mg•24 0• 16
(2 X 24) + (2 X 16) •
((2 X 24) + (2 X 16))
Questions
48 + 32 • (48 +32) 7 Figure 4.23 represents the structures of six different
48+32•80 compounds A- F.
For the product, work out the inner brackets first, a What type of bonding is present in compounds
A, C, D, E and F?
b What type of bonding is present in
• compound B?
c State the simplest formula for each compound
A-F.
Figure 4.21 : The proportions in which magnesium and
oxygen react are defined by tbe chemical equation for
the reaction.
'--'
92 >
92
8 Calculate the relative molecular or formula masses

(M,) of the following substances:
a oxygen, 0 2
H b ammonia, NHJ
I
/c, c sulfuric acid, ff,S04
H I H d potassium bromide, KBr
H
A B
e copper nitrate, Cu(NOJ2
H H H (A · H = I N =14 0 = 16 S =32 K =39 Cu= 64
I I I Br';,, 80) ' ' ' ' ' '
H-C=C-C-H
I 9 • Calcium carbonate has the formula CaC03•
H
a What is its relative formula mass (M,)?
C
F
(A,: Ca = 40, C 12, 0= 16) =
F-._ I b If I 00 g of calcium carbonate contain 40 g of
Br-F calcium, how much calcium is present in 15 g of
F....... I
F H-Br calcium carbonate?
E F
Figure 4.22: Diagrams representing the structures of

several d ifferent compounds.
REFLECTION •
Do you have a successful strategy to help you balance equations? What aspects do you find easy
or d ifficult?
Could you explain how to calculate relative molecular or formula ma sses to someone else?
..
93
SUMMARY _
Elements and compounds can be represented by chemical formulae using the symbols of the elements present
and showing the numbers of atoms present in the molecule.
The formula of a simple covalent compound can be deduced from a model or diagram of the structure.
> The formula of a more complex compound can be deduced from models or diagrams of the structure.
The formula of an ionic compound can be determined from the charges on the ions present or from diagrams
> representing the structure.
> The empirical formula of a compound is the simplest whole number ratio of the different atoms or
ions present.
Chemical reactions can be represented by word equations and balanced symbol equations, and state symbols
can be used to show the physical states of the reactants and products.
>
)
Ionic equations can be constructed for appropriate chemical reactions.
The symbol equation for a chemical reaction can be deduced from a description of the reaction involved.
Va lues for relative atomic mass (A,) can be used to calculate the relative molecular (formula) mass (M,) of
a compound, and this information can then be used to calculate the masses of substances involved in a
chemical reaction.
-
PROJECT
Chemical formula bingo What to do:

Bingo is a game where players try to match the 1 On a piece of paper write down the
numbers that someone calls out with the details on numbers 1-20.
a card that they have been given (Figure 4.23).
2 Alongside each number write down one
positively charged cation and one negatively
charged anion from Table 4.3.
3 Using these ions, deduce an ionic formula, e.g.
sodium carbonate is Na2CO3 and ammonium
chloride is NH4CI.
4 When you have written down your list of 20
ionic compounds, produce a set of three or
four different 3x3 grids.
5 In each, add any nine formulae from your list
(Figure 4.24). These must be selected in a
completely random order.
6 You are now ready to play.
Figure 4.23: Bingo players mark their cards as the

numbers are called out randomly.
94 )
94
CONTINUED
Rules:
• each player in the group has their own

FORM ULA game card
BINGO! • fold up the pieces of paper with t he numbers

1-20 on them
• then place these numbered pieces of paper in
a small box
KBr Na2CO3 Al2O3 • pull a number out at random and from y0ur list
of formulae read out t he two ions present in
the compound
• the players need to check their card for this

formula and if they have it, tick it off
MgSO4 NaCl NH 4CI
• repeat by drawing f urther numbers, continuing
until someone shouts bingo (or house!)
• bingo is won when someone ticks off all the
formulae on their card.
Ca(NO3) 2 AICl 3 CuO To play several rounds, you co1.:1ld either laminate
the bingo cards or play by placing a counter over
ar:1y formulae that have already been drawn.
The game can be extended by adding a set of 20
Figure 4.24: A p0ssible 3x3 grid for chemical different covalent compounds, giving the valence
formula bingo. and elements present and drawing up a further set
of 3x3 grids.
1 Every atom has its own atomic mass, A,. These are added together to
find the relative formula mass, M,, of a substance. The value for calcium
car bonate, CaC03, is 100.
What mass of carbon is present in 100g of calcium carbonate?

,, A 12g
B 60g
C 48g
D 36g (1)
95 )
,r
95
Aqueous phosphoric acid reacts with magnesium carbonate to form

magnesium phosphate, water and carbon diox.ide 835·
a Phospharic acid has the structure shown in the figure.
0
II
HO-P-OH
I
OH
What is its molecular formula? (1)

b Write the word equation for the reaction between magnesium COMMAND WORDS
carbonate and phesphoric acid, including state symbols. (2)
c Solid magnesium carbonate has the formula MgCO1• Calculate its calculat e: work out
relative formula mass. (2) from given facts,
(1) figures or information
d Define the term relative formula mass.
e 6g of magnesium reacts to form 21 g of magnesium car-bonate. define: give precise
Calculate the mass of magnesium carbenate formed from 1.2 g meaning
of magnesium. (2)
[Total: 8)
> '-
0
II
H'-.... / C '-.... / H
C 0
II
C 0
., H / "-c/ '-....H
II
0
96 >
96
CONTINUED
>
7 7 7 1?
H- C-C-C-C
I I I \
H H H 0-H
· O
97
After studying this chapter, think about how confident you are with the dilferent topics. This will help you see any
.
Confident
See Needs Almost
I can to move
on
-- -·•
write the chemical formulae of elements
4. 1
and compounds
deduce the formula of a simple covalent molecule
4. 1
from a model or diagram
deduce the formula of a complex covalent molecule
> from a model or diagram
4.1
understand that the empirical formula is the

l simplest ratio of the different atoms or ions in 4.1
the compound
write word equations and balanced symbol
equati ons for chemical reactions, including the use 4.2
o f state symbols
understand how to construct ionic equations for .
> appropriate reactions
4.2
deduce symbol equations for reactions form a

> relevant description of the reaction involved
4.2
use relative atomic masses to calculate the relative

molecular (formul a) mass for a compound and use
4.3
this information to calculate the masses involved
in reactions I
-
.......
98 )
98
r
.. • •
limiting reagents ... •
. . •
. .
calculating tne concentration
99
GETTING STARTED
Working in groups of three or four, review the You have four balloons filled to the same volume
scenario described here and discuss the questions and pressure. These balloons contain different
asked. To answer the questions, you will need to gases as indicated in Figure 5.1.
recall information covered in Chapters 1-3.
• From what you know of the nature of gases,
C what can you say about the number of gas
molecules in each of the balloons?
• Which of the four balloons will sink to the
ground fastest?
Discuss these questions in your group and the
reasons behind your answers.
Figure 5.1: These balloons all contain the same volume of
gas at the same pressure and temperature.
CHEMICAL ACCOUNTANCY AND ATOM ECONOMY
The rather unusual word stoichiometry is derived substance present in the reactants that finishes
from two Greek words - stoicheion (meaning up in the desired product. The concept of the
element), and metron (meaning measure). It mole is important here, as it is used to measure
describes the relative measures, or amounts, of the amount of substance present in the reactants
a reactant and a r,>roduct in a chemical reaction. and the useful products. A high level of atom
Chemists talk of stoichiometry when balancing economy is important for sustainable development
symbol equations (Chapter 4), and it is how they and the economic efficiency of an industrial
work out what quantities of different substanees process. Although atoms are neither created nor
will react to form partic1:1lar amounts of product. destroyed in a chemical reaction, not all the atoms
You can think of stoichiometry as the link between in the reactants will necessarily become part of
what happens at an atomic level and what can the desired product; some may end up forming
be measured practically in a reaction. Although by-products, or waste products. If all the atoms in
the pairing of elements may change in a chemical the reactants end up in the desired product - that
reaction, the amount of matter remains the same, is, if there is no by-product from the reaction - this
so stoichiometry is a type of chemical accountancy
that takes place at the atomic level. The standard
amount of substance that cor:itains a knowl'I number
• of particles at an atomic level is known as the mole.
The concept of the mole is important to new
developments in ir:idustrial chemistry where the
twelve principles of. Green Chemistry have been
,. proposed to guide more sustainable chemical
engineering. Green Chemistry emphasises that
industrial processes should reduee the use, or
prod1:.1ction, of hazardous or waste substances
(Figure 5.2). By reducing the involvement of
hazardous substances, the environmental safety of
any new process is more effective.
Figure 5.2: Modern chemical plants should be designed
Greer:i Chemistry also stresses the atom economy for safety and atom economy.
of a reaction as a measure of percentage of
100 )
100
5 Chemical calculations
CONTINUED
represents the maximum value of atom economy: Discussion questions
100%. These considerations show how important
1 What costs, other than those of the raw materials,
chemical formulae and equations are; they not
should be considered when considering the
only tell us what happens, but also put 'numbers'
economy of an industrial process?
to it. Consideration of the quantities involved in
reactions is vital to modern chemistry. Note that 2 In what way could the economic problem
the ideas behind Green Chemistry and atom of by-products be reduced by positive and
economy are important new developments, but are imaginative marketing?
not required knowledge currently.
2.5
KEY WORDS
sto ichiometry: the rat io of the reactants and 2.0
products in a balanced symbol equation en
.......
~
\ mole: the measure o f amount of substance in ~ 1.5

:i
chemistry; 1 mole of a substance has a mass "'
equal to its relative formula mass in grams - that 0
en
en
1.0
amo unt of substance contains 6.02 x 1023 (the "'
~
Avogadro constant) atoms, molecules o r formula
0.5
units d epending on the substance conside red
2 3 4
Mass of iron/ g
5.1 The mole and
Figure 5.3: Experiments on heating iron with sulfur show
Avogadro's constant that the two elem ents react in a fixed ratio by mass to
produce iron sulfide .
If you take any compound, e.g. iron sulfide (FeS). it
will always contain the same elements, in this case iron
(Fe) and sulfur (S). T he two elements in iron sulfide
.. are always present in the same ratio by mass. T he The mole - the chemical
relationship can be determined experimentally. When
increasing amounts of iron are heated with sulfur. the counting unit
mass of sulfur that combines also increases. When the
When carrying out an experiment, a chemist cannot
results are plotted on a graph you see a straight-line
weigh out a single atom or molecule and then react it
relationship (Figure 5.3) indicating that the elements
with another atom or molecule. Atoms and molecules are
combine in a fixed ratio by mass. How can we make the
simply too small. A 'counting unit' must be found that
link between the mass ratio and the chemical formula of
is useful in practical chemistry. This idea is not unusual
a compound? To do this we need to use the concept of
when dealing with large numbers of small objects. For
the mole.
example. banks weigh coins rather than count them -
they know that a fixed number of a particular coin will
always have the same mass (Figure 5.4 ).
101 )
101
Figure 5.4: Coins weighed using a balance.
Chemists have applied this idea of counting large One mole of each of these different substances contains
numbers of objects to the problem of relating a number the same number of atoms, molecules or formula units
of sub-microscopic particles to the amount of substance (Table 5.1 ). That number per mole has been worked
in a sample. Chemists count atoms and molecules by out by several different experimental methods. It is
weighing them. The standard 'unit' of the ·amount' named after the 19th century Italian chemist Amedeo
of a substance is taken as the relative molecular (or, Avogadro and is 6.02 x 1023 particles per mole (this is
formula) mass of the substance in grams. This 'unit' is called the ,\,ogadro con, tant and it is given the symbol L)
called I mole of the substance. The unit ' moles' is used (Figure 5.5). Knowing that 46g of ethanol is I mole of
• to measure amounts of elements and compounds (mo) that compound, we now also know that there are 6 x 1023
is the symbol or shortened form of mole or moles). The ethanol molecules in that amount of ethanol.
mass of I mole of a substance is called the molar ma,;,;
of that substance. To find the molar mass (mass of I KEY WORDS
mole) of any substance, you write down the formula of
the substance: for example, ethanol is C~H 50 H. Then mo lar mass: the mass, in grams, of 1 mole of
work out its relative formula mass (for ethanol this is a substance
46). For example, ethanol contains two carbon atoms
(A, = 12), six hydrogen atoms (A,= I) and one oxygen Avoga dro constant : the number (6 x 1023) of
atom (A , = 16). characteristic particles in 1 mole of a substance
So, for ethanol M, = (2 x 12) + (6 x I)+ 16 = 46.

T his value is expressed in grams per mole ( I mole of
ethanol = 46 g).
Table 5.1 shows some further examples of how this idea
is applied to other substances.
102)
102
carb0n C 12 12 g 6.02 x 10Z3 carbon atoms

iron Fe 56 56 g 6.02 x 1023 iron atoms
hydrogen - H2 2 X 1 =2 2g 6.02 x 10 23 H2 molecules
oxygen 02 2 X 16 = 32 32g 6 .02 x H)23 0 molecules
wate r Hp (2x1)+ 16=18 18 g 6 .02 x 10 23 H2O molecules
magnesium o xide MgO 24 + 16=40 40g 6.02 x 1023 MgO 'form ula units'
calcium ca rbonate CaCO3 40 + 12 + (3 X 16) = 1 OQ 100 g 6.02 x 1023 CaCO3 'formula units'
silicon(1v) oxide SiO2 28 + (2 X 16) = 60 60g 6.02 x 1023 SiO 'formula units'
2
Table 5.1: Calculating the mass of 1 mole of various substances.
6.02 X 1()23 6.02 X 1()23 6.02 X 1()2l 6.02 X 1()23 6.02 X 1()23 Calculat ions involving the mole
atoms molecules ions formula electrons For any given mass of a substance, you can find the
units number of moles of atoms, molecules or formula units
present using the following mathematical equation,
Figure 5.5: One-mole always contains the same number of where the mass is in grams and the molar mass is in
particles (Avogadro's constant). grams per mole:
mass
..,.;
One mole of a substance: number of moles = - - - - -
molar mass
• contains 6.02 x I 023 (the Avogadro constant) atoms, This mathematical equation can be rearranged so that
molecules or formula units, depend ing on the any one of the values can be calculated. provided the
substance considered other two v.alues are known. The 'calculation triangle' in
• has a mass equal to its relative molecular (or Figure 5. 7 is a useful check to make sure that you have
formula) mass (M,) in grams. rearranged the equation correctly: cover the quantity to
be found and you are left with how to work it out.
Figure 5.6 shows how to convert between these
important values.
divide by Avogadro's multiply by molar

constant mass, M,
~~ no. of molar
number of number of mass in moles x mass
particles moles, n grams
~ ~ Figure 5.7: Calculation triangle for relating number of moles

multiply by Avogadro's d ivide by molar of substance to mass.
constant mass, M,
This shows that if we need to calculate the mass of one
Figure 5.6: The number of moles of substances is related
mole of some substance, the straightforward way is to
to the mass of substance in a sample and the number of
work out the relative formula mass of the substance and
particles present.
write the word ·grams' after it. Using this mathematical
equation, it is possible to convert any mass of a
particular substance into moles, or vice versa. We shall
look at two examples.
103
Using cakulation triangles
h· n ,n, TT olc: rr hi.-,: 1 1 /'Jl•ll 11 :z \L II I I. I II I

o I 11111 Ii:,° II II.Jc o ~l•Jh;; .r I.:? ..
l,LI \,:- rm1Ja n a, uf •1tl11111J fr,tJ11u 1•lc -!:.m ' 1111 I , II I I ..... ~ I I'.•·· ! 11: ' I Ill I
,, I
1"-•• ,t : 1 + I {i + I : 4(1
1,'\;1 I 11111:-(,. . • I .. • II . ''
II
n nl• I ll I I • ''il \ • fI•: ~ ~I' ·1 I\I"'
609
no. of mass
moles x40g/mol
X
O.Smol 250g/mol
Calculation triangle for working out the
number of moles in 60g df sodium hydroxide.
Calculating the mass of O.Smol of
__f'r!!!. copper(II) sulfate crysta ls.
t. ::,I, I II ,,,. I,•
II 111111 I Ir ,.._,
- •~11!
91 i ~"Ii,: .I
. :, .. ~ ,,
Ill •11
I"
11111
II J .il~,1
,1
II
"I
\
'- °"I• I·,,• l.1 1: \I I' I'- l'"I rl •• ti·.:, lf'11 11,- . lh 1·11 ~ II II . I \I ... I ...... I 111 , II I I ,,,, .,.. ,.
1 I"' • I' 11 ~,II .:I." ti, •."~ U:l •1 •)11 I I I nll II , • , .. , ~,·I 1 1u :!•c111 1 ·•·••• 1 I ,I:. . l,11 .,,11 11. 111, , II , u .le
I •II: .111 lhl I .. ,. ,.u_u II),, \J luml1 I I II 111,
~ 1
\, I• lh-c• I r•.1111 ir:...tnpl~ I \a,11 1! l111•1u: 1 1 11 11 I 1 0
11 1 11
1
1 II•
• , •.• ~ II, II ,uolc ,UC I, •• , II •a: ',I Ill II, .... I I 1'1 I .t.•
Wc-irklng out ::r1et,,ic.aJ formulae l,1 • • I I • ,I l"I 1•1 Ill•·,-. ,I,

.!• I 1:1 I I tll I t !••• 1.- 1 11
O
P.-)1.pe.rirnent.3 l~v ti • 1llt
br1.,...--, I, IL.! 1•1 i.: :.111 o1,1 u •• 11111 11, 111111 I IU

111, , 1 n:!•1 ••I II: mol Jllt'J!l 111.11 \\t 11. """'
0
.... fl l•t•~I II l•I ,. Ultl I It,/ 1' 11 " r1 ,,I
,.,111 t•. II ·• 1l.1 1-,1 uni t! lri•m "'•, 1 10-11,t,1' 1l111, 11.. , 11~-••111 ,,._, 11, ·1,,•1( , In ,1 11: ,I, II I .,
111' 1 ""'" r 1n, I l-.-K f I, {Ult.:l Ctt .,zn\ (·~I f , •• ltlLl 1111:1 1 ' I II 11" .,.. '.\ I IJ fl JI• ii!
t•c•'J.:-:1, 'I -c.111; .,, 1 • ~ •11 1.:11 it1 t L''I ,,,,, r1P 11111 111c
11 11
•••• 1, I I. •' \\ • - II u,,.. I 1· Ir,
, 11 U Ir I II I I d 11 ( fll. ,ti
1
"'1•1 111.· II 11,111, I llh ,, I ti 1111 ,-,1d,· I ,1 I
... .
'-·
104
Find the number From the
Find the number Find the Find the number
of moles of simp lest percentage, find the
of grams of the mass of each of moles of each
elements that atoms of each whole element present.
element that element in 100g
combine, number ratio.
combine. of compound.
Mg 0
mass combined 0.24g 0.16g
molar mass 24g/mol 169/mol emplrlul Find the simplest

formula whole number
number of moles 0.01 moi 0.0,mol ratio.
simplest ratio
Formula MgO
- f _,-.,
c-:. ./~ { '- - · :,...._I f• • Si 0

Calculating t he formula of magnesium oxide 47% 100 - 47 = 53%
percentage by mass
from experiment al data on the masses of magnesium and
mass in 100g 47g 53g
oxygen that react together.
molar mass 28g/m61 169/mol
t,t II ol number of motei 1_.68mol 3.31 mol
1
•
0
1 I • • 1 1 I I ' simplest ratio 2
11 U I I •II
,, .. '
Formula SiOz
h 111p1 ·11 I I
•• I• •• Finding t he empirical formula of silicon(iv)

11
. ,I oxide from p ercentage mass dat a.
' 1• I' ' II I I I

' " p 0
I ' : :: I • •I
• lo I ■ • II. , .. , • ,I I • percentage by mass 44% 100 - 44 = 56%
• I I 44g 56 g
II mass in 100 g
•I ' II I I \ ,.
molar mass 31 g/mol 16g/mol
' I I
I, •I 11 11 I I' I II number of moles 1.4 mol 3.5 mol
simplest ratio 1 2.5
or 2 5
Empirical and molecular Formula PPs
formulae for simple covalent Calculating the empirical formula of
phosphorus oxide.
molecules
" I 'I
I '
I 'I I O
I
I I 111° 0
I I O
"Ill I I I
t• I ••• , ••• I I I
,,
I•. I ,1
•. 'I •I'
,, U I I
II ; I I •· I I I , • • I • I I II I • I ::: .I
I I I I
'I
"' I
105
However, it is found experimentally that its relative

CuSO, H20
molecular mass (M,) is 284. The sum of the relative
atomic masses in the empirical formula <PPs) is Mass 3.2 g 5.0 - 3.2 • 1.8 g
(2 x 31) + (5 x I 6) = 142. The actual relative molecular Molar mass 1609/mol 189/mol
mass is twice this value. Therefore, the molecular
Number of moles 0.02 mot 0.10 mol
formula of phosphorus oxide is (Pp5) 1 or Pp 10• The
empirical formula is nor the actual molecular formula Simplest ratio 1 5
of phosphorus oxide. A molecule of phosphorus oxide Formula CuSO 4 ·SHp
contains four P atoms and IO O atoms (Figure 5.12).
Table 5.3: Calculating the formul a of hydrated
coppe r(u) sulfate .
Questions
1 a Calculate the number of moles of
sodium hydroxide in 16.0 g of sodium
hydroxide (NaOH).
b Calculate how many formula units of sodium
hydroxide are present in 16.0g of NaOH. From
your answer. deduce how many sodium ions
(Na•) and hydroxide ions (OW) are present in
Figure 5.12: Phosphorus oxide, P,0, 0•
this mass of sodium hydroxide.
2 One of the ores or copper is the mineral
• The empirical formula of a compound is the chalcopyrite. A laboratory analysis of a sample
simplest whole number formula. showed that 15.15 g of chalcopyrite had the
• For simple molecular compounds, the empirical following composition by mass: copper 5.27 g and
formula may not be the actual molecular formula. iron 4.61 g. Sulfur is the only other element present.
The molecular formula must be calculated using the Use these·figures to calculate the empirical formula
relative molecular mass (M,) of the compound as of chalcopyrite.
found by experiment. (A,: S = 32, Fe:::: 56, Cu = 64)
3 A sample of antifreeze has the composition by
., Finding the formula of a hydrated salt mass: 38.7% carbon, 9.7% hydrogen. 51.6% oxygen.
The mass of water present in crystals of hydrated salts (A,: H:::: l,C:::: 12,0:::: 16)
is always a fixed proportion of the total mass. The a Calculate its empirical formula.
formula of such a salt can be worked out by a method
b The relative molecular mass of the compound
similar to that used to calculate the empirical formula of
is 62. What is its molecular formula?
a compound.
c This compound is a diol. The molecule contains
If 5.0 g of hydrated copper(II) sulfate crystals are heated two alcohol (-OH) groups attached to different
to drive off the water of crystallisation, the remaining carbon atoms. What is its displayed formula?
solid has a mass of 3.2g. The ratio of the salt and water
in the crystal can be calculated. This gives the formula of
the crystals (Table 5.3).
106
We could use just 10 g of calcium carbonate, which

5.2 The mole and would mean that we could not produce more than 5.6 g
of calcium oxide (lime).
chemical equations CaCOl -+ Ca◊ + col
I0g-+ 5.6g + 4.4g
Calculating reacting amounts fn industry, the reacting amounts given by an equation
We can now see that the chemical equation for a reaction can also be scaled up (that is, use larger amounts). In
is more than simply a record of what is produced. ln ind ustry, tonnes of chemical reactants may be used, but
addition to telling us what the reactants and products the ratios given by the equation still apply.
are, it tells us how much product we can expect from
particular amounts of reactants. The industrial manufacture of lime is important for
the cement industry and agriculture. Lime is made by
The equation for the thermal decomposition of calcium heating limestone in lime kilns.
carbonate (limestone) is:
CaCOl .... Cao +
calcium carbonate -+ calcium oxide + carbon dioxide
I mol -+ 1 mo! I mol
.... CaO +
100g -+ 56g 44g
We can see that I mole of calcium carbonate gives I mole
each of calcium oxide and carbon dioxide. This relati onship between the reacting masses is
fixed and can be scaled up to work in industrial
Imo! l mol Imo) proportions (tonnes):
40+ 12+(3 Xi6) 40 + 16 12+(2X]6) 100 tonnes 56 tonnes 44 tonnes
= 100g = 56g = 44g Similar!y,'if 10 tonnes of calcium carbonate were
The mass of the product is equal to the total mass of the heated, we should expect to produce 5.6 tonnes of lime
reactants. This is the law of conservation of mass, which (calcium oxide).
we met in Chapter 4 when discussing the balancing of
chemical equations. Although the atoms have rearranged Calculating reacting amounts - a
themselves, their total mass remains the same. A
chemical equation must be balanced. In practice, we may
chemical 'footbridge'
not want to react such large amounts. We coulq scale We can use the concept of the mole to find reactant
down the quantities (use smaller amounts). However, the or product masses from the equation for a reaction.
mass of calcium carbonate, calcium oxide and carbon There are various ways of doing these calculations.
.. dioxide will always be in the ratio I00 : 56: 44. The balanced equation itself can be used as a numerical
'footbridge' between the two sides of the reaction
(Figure 5.13).
moles of moles of
reactant product
(
mass of
1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
-=-- ..:=----
\ mass of
reactant p roduct
Figure 5.13: A chemical 'footbridge'. Following the sequence 'up-across-down' helps to relate the mass of product made to
the mass of reactant used. The 'bridge' can also be used in the reverse direction.
r
r
I
I
i
107
'> t>.MBRIDGE: IGCSE"" CHEMISTRY· ~n, RSE0 "'l•"Y
Calculating th& mi;i$$ of i1dum1mum oxide produi:fld when alummium reacts wtth oxygen
1111,
\ I
' .I ' \ .I
...... 1,1 Ill II I

II
• •••I II II •I
4AI + 302
-- 2Alp3
.. l '
t ratio ; 4 mol : 2mol !
9.2g mass;?
Using the chemical equation to calculate the

amount of product in a reaction. u. ,. I I
"
''
,, ,, t
I ••
t I
11,. I h'I I lltlll II -4 ,,,
I It
...,,, .'
I 11
.... II. .I
11
I o II'
,,: 'u ~
,I \I
I I
' ti d I
Il .\ I
,,
.. " I I ''
.
1+, ~►
,
- ·•t c;-
,.,
II I l11uitirt2 ru<1:anl
11 I ,, II 1111 '" I '
., I I' ,1 I
I
' I
' "
••h 1l I ' n ,
I •i." I
I
" I I II
' '
II I I
t the reactant that is not "
in excess
t~i:~
.......,: ;..
108)
108
· r :u;;tl(KI ~tops \\hl!n thc''' 1n 111113 n:1!~1.mr •i mtd up
2A + B
-- You i.111 liil,l ivlm.:h"'·'·
1,1
..
1
11 1\'111,: ,, , ,,11-, ""' 11 l•llll
" II~ r. I Ih
c1an1 • 11n1.111,I,( b~ oJun11
lt.llrl tta:; ...., n I •!t • I I \ I

the
2 +
- +
•
•c.:..: 1..1•1 :m1.•(\ ~d
1lic11 ,.! !L C C,11,; II II) ll J hHL II ,cini,r "1111,htl
u •rl111 11• 11 111 t L' h:1l11n.:l!,1 <.\'m~11.11 .:~u,111m1
Illustrating how.excess reactant B (in purple) • 1111.• ·-:-,,.:,:, 1 1• 1m her mm" ,1._- 1,,. I 11 ;.,111J rcJ"" 11\I.
remains unused after the reaction has t aken place.
1'1 II. rl'ni:t,,•n '-.!-...~n •hll'lllt°ll1111. ,.--,J ,>ll,,::111 1\11,, 11-,\•,1

t ~;· '"'r'I,.•._ , • -1, .! 11,•,•,.C••~ l11 111•r~f:' ,i.ri: 2~.11 1b. !lWI J!
r .•• 11 J.,.1mrlL•h•h w11ti .,~~g1m. \'J.., ,11 ,hi.,_ I,. ~mnr .-11
LXL;.: ~ ,,I' "\\f,!1. •<•mc-,-.r wl11~h ,, 11! f\nl tx- •1",! I II, I •u-
111~1 1,,11 , J ,I mmm 1111• '"'d~ Jm.,, h1:...:..! i~ ,h:L 1. ••;.i ,,~ 111 •
111,, •I l1111\1fllllllS \~• ,l,lfl V.~111 11.,1\ •~ I• I.' llm1l1•1~
rr ,i.. 1..1,I m 111" ,-:.~
,. 11 ;I, Pl .,; fHIII HI l;dYtln11mC! w,, 1, c\"itl.:L«l ',\ •I I• li hllll 1°1\ • .1 , • 1 n 1nh~r ,..\lr.n 11" ,11 "' , 111 , , p,: i11r
1 ••• JI , I"' l1v,J1 ,•,·hn 1.Jr m:J1! t.\ •••, 1Ju,::r. ,,I •hf U I ,,,, l•" tt•,
'h 1-•1 .!::• 'II '\I ll•.\I II. ~ ,t-,111111 • ,-•1 ,, ,,
.; 1· .1r ,,. ,1,;ll<'~•Um 1:. rllltl!ICd \• 1rlt •• It, ,1r "h!o~
II" l'\t.,("
11◄ I I • 11 t1,1 i \ ,IJl.1 11, .i)i ... ... • .... :U.:IL\
t '" •••• + ~Hlhnqi -',.<'1 I 1,1111•H0111 111111
... I! • II( ll,1•11 - \111( I.MLI' I 11 IL•
1 1 • -,,, • , • • I!. n · 1"'
~\ t,lo..t1 11 ~t1r fU~l.wl, I l I L 1, II 11 1111 ll,..Ul!l l '
~, Ill ...... ,; h l,llfk.lllUH' =
.c;9' • I: + 1 • .,, I = 1I•} 11f1r!lll
.. 1111ml•,, , ,I' mut~"'li If i; >b·dl UJNI mk ~
h d ' If lJ I •l'.1m1I
t I mr 1"" 1-.tLl.n~d c."llJU n

• i 1s141f ct>L•:.il I It I ..:i rfiuni1t l'l! cl~ \\llh
.., m I I ,·dmd1l,i1 •• •••·ul
• 11 1,~ , I .:, h11i14 I h ... :.trbonn IL' ..,,....i Id r1:,1,1 wi:t1
11 ,,1
n.. l l1) dt Jtlo~ ;i..,,IJ _
,. •
109
ACTIVITY 5.1
Getting to grips with the mole Work in a pair to write down an explanation
Whi ch is heavier, 10kg of feathers or 10kg of of moles and how t hey link to mass via M,.
bricks? This is a t rick question as they have t he Your explanati on should include:
sam e mass, t hey are both 10kg. But what happens • what th e mole is (you might want to include
when we change t he quest ion and ask which is a reference to Avogadro's const ant)
heavier - a dozen feathers o r a dozen bricks? Now
there is a definite answer, 12 bricks will have a much • how the b alanced equation shows t he
higher mass than 12 feathers. In chemistry, we mo le ratios
could ask which is heavier, 1 g of hydrogen or 1 g of
• how these ratios remain constant, e.g . wha t
carb on? The answer is t hat both have a mass of 1 g.
wo uld happen if you had 400 moles of Alp3
However, what if we were to ask the question which
in terms of t he moles of Al produced or if you
is heavier 1 mole of hydrogen or 1 mole of carbon?
only had 0.6 moles of Alp 3
The answer is 1 mole of carbon.
• how an understanding of the number of
The mole can be a t ricky concep t, but it is
moles allows masses to be ded uced
essent ial to chem ical success as it links the
(by use of the equation:
num b er of particles present to the relative mass
number of moles = mass (g) / molar mass}.
of t hat chemical. In simple terms, the mole is just
th e chemist's way of explaining the amoun t of You m ig ht want to explaln why t he number of
substance present. mo les in t he reactants and products does not
have to be the· same. In this case, for example,
You are going to prepare a five -minute lesson
there are two moles of reactants but seven moles
to explain the concept of the mole to your
of p roducts.
classmates. To do t his, you are going to use the
equat ion for the decomposition of aluminium oxide Having worked through this example, can you
by electrolysis: t hink of anot her balanced equation and produce
a couple of questions to test your classmates
understanding of moles?
Peer assessment
.. Having constru.c ted a brief lesson on the mole, discuss how successful you thought it was with other
members of your group. Use the following questions to help you:
• Were you able to link the ideas suggested in the activity convincingly?
• Did your group think your presentation was clear and understandable?
• What would you char-1ge if you were to repeat the activity?
• Could you extend your ideas to include reactions between gases, or in solution?
110)
110
Percentage yield and KEYWORDS
percentage purity percentage yield: a measure of the actual yield

of a reaction when carried out experimentally
A reaction may not always yield the total amount of
compared to the theoretical yield calculated from
product predicted by the equation. The loss may be due
the equation:
to several factors:
actual yield
percentage yield .. x 100
• the reaction may not be totally complete predicted yield
• errors may be made in weighing the reactants or percentage purity: a measure of the purity
the products of the product from a reaction carried
out experimentally:
• material may be lost in carrying out the reaction,
or in transferring and separating the product. percentage purity • mass o~ pure product x 100
The equation gives us an ideal figure for the yield of mass of impure product
a reaction; in reality a lower yield is often produced.
This can be expressed as the percentagl' ) ield for a
particular experiment.
In other more complex reactions, a particular product
may be contaminated by other products or unreacted
material. The 'crude' product may prove to contain less
than 100% of the required substance.
The pcrccnh,gc purity of a chemical product can be
calculated in a similar way to the percentage yield.
- -
W ORKED EXAMPLE 5 4
Calculating percentage yield

Heating 12.4g of copper(II) carbonate in a crucible produced only 7.0g of copper{JD oxide. What was the
percentage yield of copper(II) oxide?
CuCO, - CuO + col
.. lmol .... lmol + lmol
64+ 12+48 64+ 16
= 124g = 80g
Therefore, heating 12.4g of copper(II) carbonate should have produced 8.0g of copper(ll) oxide. So:
expected yield= 8.0g
actual yield= 7.0g
and percentage yield = ;:~ x 100 = 87.5%
Here is an example for you to try:

1 A student reacts 4,5g of aluminium powder with chlorine gas. 17.8g of aluminium chloride are produced.
Calculate the percentage yield of this reaction.
2Al(s) + 3Clig) .... 2AICl,(s)
(A,: Al = 27; Cl = 35.5)
.,.
111 )
111
The copper used for electrical circuits has to be

exceptionally pure (99.99'%). The following calculation
Percentage composition
uses the example of copper to show how percentage
purity is calculated. An initial crude sample of copper
by mass
is prepared industrially and then tested for purity. A The importance of the relative molecular (or formula)
sample of I0.15 g of the crude copper is analysed by mass of a compo und (M,) is central to calculations based
various methods and shown to contain 9 .95 g of copper, on the concept of the mole. However. even the M, value
with the remaining mass being made up of other metals. itself provides useful information about a compound.
The M, value enables us to calculate the prrcentagc
Generally, composition of a compound. Calculations of percentage
% purity= _ _mass
__ of ._
pure product
__ __._.____ _ _ x I 00 composition are useful, for instance, in estimating
mass of impure product the efficiency of one fertiliser compared with another
T herefore: (Chapter 9). Ammonium nitrate is a commonly used
fertiliser. It is an important source of nitrogen.
% purity of the copper sample
= mass of copper in sample KEYWORDS
X (00
mass of impure copper
significant figures: the number of digits in a
= ~ X I 00 number, not including any zeros at the beginning;
10.15 · for example the number of sig nificant figures in
= 98.03% (answer to four significant figures) 0.0682 is three
This result shows that this batch of copper would need to percentage composition: the percent age by
be purified before it could be used for electrical circuits mass of each element in a compound
such as those inside TVs. smartphones and computers.
WORKED EXAMPLE 5.5
What percentage of the mass of the compound is nitrogen?

The formula of ammonium nitrate is NH,N03 (it contains the ions NH; and NO,-). Using the A, values for N,
H and O we get:
M , = (2 x 14) + (4 x I) + (3 x 16) = 28 +4 +48 = 80
Then:
mass of nitrogen in the formula = 28
mass of nitrogen as a fraction of the total = ~~

. f 28
mass o f mtrogen as percentage o total mass x 100 = 35%
80
Carry out a similar calculation for yourself to work out the percentage by mass of nitrogen in another fertiliser,
ammonium sulfate, (NH 4) 2 S04 •
112
Similar calculations can be used to work o ut the

percentage by mass of water of crystallisation in crystals
of a hydrated salt (Worked example 5.6).
WORKED EXAMPLE 5.6
What is the percentage mass of water in crystals of hydrated magnesium sulfate?

The formula of hydrated magnesium sulfate is MgSO.·7Hp. Using the A, values for Mg, S, 0 and H we get:
M, = 24+32+(4x 16)+(7x 18) = 246
Then:
mass of water in formula = 126
mass of water as a fraction of the total = ~!:

percentage mass of water in the crystals = ~~: x I00 = 51.2%
Now carry out a similar calculation to work out the percentage mass of water in crystals of hydrated sodium
carbonate, NaFO,· I0Hp.
Questions Calculations involving gases

4 Calculate the percentage by mass of nitrogen
in the following fertilisers and nitrogen-containing Molar volume of a gas
compounds: Many reactions, including some of those we have just
a ammonium phosphate, (NH.),PO. considere<l, involve gases. Weighing solids or liquids is
b glycine, C H 2(NH 2)COOH (an amino acid) rel atively straightforward. In contrast, weighing a gas is
quite difficult. It is much easier to measure the volume of
(A,: H = l,C= 12, N = 14,0 = 16, P= 31, S = 32)
a gas. But how docs gas volume relate to the number of
5 Define the mole. atoms or molecules present?
6 Explain the difference between the percentage
yield of a product from a reaction and its
percentage purity.
Molar mass, Molar gas volume,

Substance Number of particles
g/mol dm3/ mol
hydrogen (H 2) 2 24 6.02 x 1023 hydrogen molecules
oxygen (0 2) 32 24 6.02 x 1023 oxygen molecules
carbon dioxide (COJ 44 24 6.02 x 1023 carbon d ioxide molecules
ethane (C 2H) 30 24 6.02 x 1023 ethane molecules
Table 5.4: Molar mass and molar volume o f various gases.
113
In a gas. the particles are relatively far apart. Indeed,

any gas can be rega rded as largely empty space. Equal
volumes of gases are found to contain the same number
of particles (Table 5.4); this is Al'Ogadro's law. This leads
to a simple rule about the volume of one mole of a gas.
• one mole of any gas occupies a volume of
approximately 24dm 3 (24 litres) at room temperature
and pressure (r.t. JI.)
• the molar gas rnlume of any gas therefore has the Figure 5.16: A calculation triangle for calculating the moles
value 24dm 3/mol at r.t.p. of gases.
• remember that I dm 3 (I litre) = 1000cm3•

This rule applies to all gases. This makes it easy to KEYWORDS
convert the volume of any gas into moles, or moles
into volume: Avogadro's law : equal volumes of any gas, under
the same conditions of temperature and pressure,
volume contain the same number of particles
number of moles
molar volume
r.t.p .: room temperature and pressure; the
In this equation, the volume is in cubic decimetres (dm 3) standard values are 25 °C/298K and 101.3 kPa/1
and the molar volume is 24dm 3/mol. The calculation atmosphere pressure
triangle shown in F igure 5.16 will help you remember
how to rearrange this mathematical equation to work out molar gas volume: 1 mole of any gas has the
the different values. same volume under the same conditions of
temperature and pressure (24dm 3 at r.t.p.)
WORKED EXAMPLE 5.7
If 8 g of sulfur are burnt, what volume of SO2 is produced?

First, consider the reaction of sulfur burning in Therefore:
oxygen.
., sulfur
S(s)
+
+
oxygen
Oig)
-- sulfur dioxide
SO2(g)
0.25mol of sulfur - 0.25mol of SO2
So, from the above rule:
volume
lmol lmol .... Imo! number of moles =
mo1ar vo1ume
32g 24dm 3 24dm3 volume
0.25mol
24dm3/mol
We have:
volume of sulfur dioxide= 0.25 x 24dm 3
number of moles of sulfur burnt=: 8g
32g/mol = 6dm 3 at r.t.p.
= 0.25mol Now, using the relationship between the volume of
From the equation: a gas and the number of moles it contains. work out
the following:
I mol of sulfur - I mo) of SO2
a the volume of gas present in 22g of carbon
dioxide at r.t.p.
b the mass of a sample of nitrogen gas with a
vol ume of 36 dm 3 at r.t.p.
114
Reactions involving gases Concentration of solutions

For reactions in which gases are produced, the
When a chemical substance (the solute) is dissolved in
calculation of product volume is similar to those we
a vol ume of solvent. we can measure the 'quantity' of
have seen already. The approach used is an adaptation
solute in two ways. We can measure either its mass (in
of the 'footbridge' method used earlier for calculations
grams) or its amount (in moles). The final volume of
involving solids. It is shown in Figure 5.1 7.
the solution is normally measured in cubic decimetres,
Some important reactions involve only gases. For dm 3 ( I dm 3 = I litre or I000cmJ). When we measure the
such reactions, the calculations of expected yield are mass of the solute in grams, it is the mass concentration
simplified by the fact that the value for molar volume that we obtain, in grams per cubic decimetre of solution
applies to any gas. (g/dm3). But it is more useful to measure the amount in
moles, in which case we get the molar concentration in
For example:
moles per cubic decimetre of solution (mol/dml):
hydrogen + chlorine - hydrogen chloride
H/g)
l mol
+ Cl 2(g)
Imo!
- 2HCl(g)
2mol •
. amount of solute
concentration = volume of solution
the mass concentration of a solution is measured in

24dm! 24dm' 48dm) grams per cubic decimetre (g/dm 3)
The volumes of the gases involved are in the same ratio • the molar concentration of a solution is measured in
as the number of moles given by the equation: moles per cubic decimetre (mol/dml)
+
- 2HCl(g)
2 volumes
• when I mol of a substance is dissolved in water
and the so lution is made up to 1 dmJ (1 000cm3),
a solution with a concentration of I mol/dm 3
So, if we react 20cm' of hydrogen with sufficient is prod uced.
chlorine, it will produce 40cmJ of hydrogen chloride gas.
KEYWORDS
5.3 Moles and solution mass concentration: the measure of the

concentrat ion of a solution in term s of the mass
chemistry of the solute, in grams, dissolved per cubic

decimetre of solution (g/dm 3)
We have seen how calculations based on the mole molar concentration: th e measure of the
can provide very useful information about chemical concentration of a solution in term s of the
reactions involving solids and gases. However, there are number of moles of the solute dissolved per cubic
many other reactions of importance. These reactions decimetre of solution (mol/dm3)
all take place in solution. The usual solvent is water.
When setting up such reactions, we normally measure
out the solutions by volume. To know how much of the
reactants we are actually mixing, we need to know the
concentrations of the solutions.
moles of
reactant
,. ,. moles of
product
( 1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
volume - - - mass or volume
of gas : of gaseous product
Figure 5.17: An outline of the 'footbridg e' method for calculations involving gases.
t
I
115
For example, a I mol/dm 1 solution of sodium chloride

contains 58.5 g of NaCl (I mole) dissolved in water
and made up to a final volume of I000cm1. Figure 5.18
shows how the units are expressed for solutions of
differing concentrations. It also shows how solutions
of the same_fma\ concentrat,on can be made up in
different ways. volume/
concentration/ X d 3
mol/dm' m
Figure 5.19: A calculation triangle for working with solution

concentrations in dm 3•
In practice, however, we are usually dealing with solution

volumes in cubic centimetres (cml). Therefore. the
equation is usefully adapted to:
number of moles in solution =
dissolve to dissolve to dissolve to dissolve to concentration
make 1 dm 3 make 2dm 3 make 1 dm' make 2dm3 - -- -1o_o_o_ _ _ x volume of solution (in cml)
of solution, of sol ution, of solution, of solution,
concentration concentration concentration concentration In this equation, concentration is in moles per cubic
= 1 mol/dm3 - 0.5 mol/dm 3 • 2 mol/dm 3 • 1 mol/dm 3 decimetre, but volume is in cubic centimetres (Figure 5.20).
Figure 5.18: Making copper(II) sulfate solutions of
different concentrations.
Calculations using solution

concentrations concent,at,on x volume/
The following equation is useful when working out the 1000 cm3
., number of moles present in a particular solution:
Figure 5.20: A calculation triangle for working with solution
number of moles in solution =
concentrations in cm3•
molar concentration x volume of solution (in dm 3)
This mathematical equation can be rearranged to work For example, how many moles of sugar are there in
out an unknown value provided the other two values 500cm1 of a 3.0mol/dm 1 sugar solution?
are known and can be represented by a calculation
triangle (Figure 5.19). We get:
3.0
number of moles = x 500 = 1.5 mol
1000
In practice, a chemist still has to weigh out a substance
in grams. So, questions and experiments may also involve
converting between moles and grams.
116
WORK ED EXAMPLE 5.8
Cak ulate the concentration of a solution of sodium hydroxide, NaOH, that contains 10g of
NaOH in a final volume of 250cm 3
S tep I. Find out how many moles of NaOH are present:
relative formula mass of NaOH =23 + 16 + I =40
IO
number of moles of Na O H =
40 = 0.25 mo!
Step 2. Find the concentration:
concentration
num be r o f moIes= x volume (in cm' )
1000
0 _25 = conc;:ation x 250
concentration = 0.25 x ~~
= I mol/dm'
Now find the molar concentration of a solution of 14.3 g of hydrated sodium carbonate, Na,CO1• IOH,O in
500cm' of distilled water. - -
Acid-base titration calculations KEYWORDS

The concentration of an unknown acid solution can
standard solution: a solution whose
be found if it is reacted with a standard solution of an
concentration is known precisely - this solution
alkali. A ~tandard soluti on is one that has been carefully
is then used to find the concentration of another
made up so that its concentration is known precisely.
solution by titration
The reaction is carried out in a carefully controlled way.
The volumes are measured accurately using a pipette
.. and a burette. Just sufficient acid is added to the alkali
t itrat ion: a method of quantitative analysis using
solutions: one solution is slowly added to a known
to neutralise the alkali. This end-point is found using volume of another solution using a burette until
an indicator. The method is known as titra tion and can an end-point is reached
be adapted to prepare a soluble salt. It is summarised
in Figure 5.21.
The practical method of titration will be described later
as a method of preparing a salt (Chapter 12) and as an
analytical technique (Chapter 22). In this chapter, we are
dealing with the application of the concept of the mole
to the type of calculation that can be carried out.
117 )
117
Make standard
alkali solution
accurately.
... Pipette 25 cm3 of
alkali into a
conical flask -
add indicator.
-.
Put acid in burette -
read starting
value.
... Run acid into flask
until indicator just
changes colour -
read burette again.
- - ---
Wash out apparatus -
repeat several
times, and take
average.
Figure 5.21: Summary ot the titration method.
WORKED EXAMPLE 5.9
Calculating the concentration of a hydrochloric acid solution

A solution of hydrochloric acid is titrated against a Step 3. Use the titration value. What is the
standard sodium hydroxide solution. It is found that concentration of the acid?
20.0cml of acid neutralise 25.0cm' of 0.lOmol/dm'
The acid solution contains 2.5 x JO•lmol in 20.0cmJ.
NaOH solution. What is the concentration of the
hydrochloric acid solution? concentration
number of moles = x volume (in cm 3)
1000
Step I . Use information about the standard solution.
How many moles of alka li are in the flask? _, = concentration
2, 5 X 10 l000 X 20, 0
number of moles of NaOH
concentration of acid = 2.5x 10-i x l000 / 20
concentration
= 1000
x volume (in cml)
= 0.125 mol/dm'
= 2.5 x 10-i mol Try working through the following question
for practice:
Step 2. Use the chemical equation. How many moles
of acid are used? Sulfuric acid can be neutralised using sodium
hydroxide solution.
The equation is:
HlSO.(aq) + 2NaOH(aq) .... Nalso.(aq) + 2Hp(l)
HCI + NaOH .... NaCl + Hp
25.0cm 3 of a sulfuric acid solution of concentration
Imo( Imo(
0.2moVdm' reacted with 10.0cm' of sodium
I mol of NaOH neutralises I mol of HCI and so: hydroxide. Calculate:
2.5 x 10 'mo( of NaOH neutralises 2.5 x 10 ' mol a the number of moles of sulfuric acid used
of H CI
b the number of moles of NaOH reacted
c the concentration of the NaOH solution in
mol/dm·'.
118 )
118
The calculation method uses a further variation of the •footbridge' approach to link the
reactants and products (Figure 5.22).
.
-
0
use ratio from
the equation J moles of product J D
Q
Figure 5.22: A summary of the different ways in which a balanced equation acts as a 'footbridge' in calcu lations.
Figure 5.23 is a visual reminder of the key relationships involved in discussing the meaning
and usefulness of the mole as a measure of amount of substance.
concentration (mol/dm3) x volume (dm3) mass

1 dm 3 = 1000cm3 M,(orA)
number of particles
volume + 24 dm3 (at r.t.p.)
6.023 X 1()23
Figure 5.23: The mole as a measure of amount of substance in different situations.
r Think about the following questions:

• Did you face any problems when learning about the concept of the mole in this chapter?
• Are there any maths skills that you feel it would be helpful to improve?
,
r
I
119
) CAMBRIDGE IGCSE™ CHEMtSTRY: COURSEBOOK
7 Calculate the number of moles of gas there are in: 9 Calculate the concentration (in mol/dm-') of the
a 480cm} of argon following solutions.
b 48dm-' of carbon dioxide a I.Omo! of sodium hyd roxide is dissolved in
distilled water to make 500cm3 of solution.
c 1689cm) of oxygen.
b 0.2 mol of sodium chloride is dissolved in
8 Calculate the volume (in cm-') of the following distilled water to make 1000cm3 of solution.
at r.t.p.
c 0.1 mol of sodium nitrate is dissolved in
a 1.5 moles of nitrogen distilled water to ma ke 100cm3 of solution.
b 0.06 moles of ammonia d 0.8g of solid sodium hyd roxide is dissolved in
c 0.5 moles of chlorine. distilled water to a final volume of l dm 3•
(A,: H = I. 0 = 16, Na= 23)
SUMMARY
The mole is the unit that contains Avogadro's number of constituent particles (atoms, ions or molecules) of a
) substance and is used to express the amount of a substance taking part in a reaction.
) The mole is equal to the relative molecular or formula mass of a substance in.grams.
> The empjrical formula of a compound can be calculated using the concept of t he mole.
The balanced chemical equation for a reaction can be used to calculate the reacting masses of substances
> involved and the amount of product formed.
> I mole of any gas has a volume of24dm 3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
The percentage yield and the percentage purity of a product from a chem ical reaction can be calculated from
) the theoretical yield from an equation.
The percentage by mass of an element in a compound can be fou nd from the relative molecular or
) formula mas s.
C
T he concentration of a solution ca n be expressed in moles per cubic deci met re (mol/dm3) and these values are
> useful in cafculating the results of titration experiments.
120 )
120
PROJECT
The mole and a green approach to You could also liAk your ideas to the industrial
industrial chemistry method for producing ammonia (the Haber process;
Chapter 9 Topic 3) and think about the following:
The concept of the mole
and its use in calculating • the economy of the swpp!y of the raw materials
the yield and purity
of the prod1:1ct of a • the use of a catalyst and the effect of that on
chemical reaction is very the c;:onditions used
important in discussing • the recycling of the major reactants.
the conditions used in key
industrial processes such Following your discussion, work in groups to
as the Haber and Contact prepare a podcast for the class to listen to
processes. These ideas explaining the importance of the green approach
have become part of the to industrial chemistry.
Green Chemistry approach Figure 5.24: The cover
of the science journal Im your podcast, inclwde ideas on t he following:
to industrial processes
(Figure 5.24). The ideas published by the Roya l
• percentage yield, how to calculate it, and why
of Green Chemistry are Society of Chemistry
it is important to industrial chemistry
eoncerned with the
proposed in a set of 12
principles (Figure 5.25). development of ideas • why it is important to eonsider limiting
of Green Chemistry. reactants and those in excess in an
These principles cover industrial reaction.
such ideas as:
• maximising the amount of the raw

1. Prevent waste 2. Maximise atom economy
materials that ends up in the
desired product; measurecl as 3. Less hazardous chemicals 4. Safer chemicals and products
atom ecor,iomy 5. Safer solvents and reaction conditions 6. Increase energy efficiency
7. Use renewable feedstocks 8. Reduce derivatives
• using renewable raw materials and
9. Use catalysts 10. Design degradable products
energy sources
, 11. Analyse for pollution control 12. Accident prevention
• using the least en-,iroAmentally
harmful substances and solvents
• using energy efficient processes
• aYoiding the production of waste.
In groups, discuss the id•ea of atom

economy and the other principles
of Green Chemistry. Focus on these
questions in your discussioA:
Why might a green approach

to chemistry be important for
industrial processes?
Which of the principles do you think

are the most important? Why?
How do these ideas link to what you
have learnt in this chapter? Figure 5.25: The 12 principles of Green Chemistry.
121 >
121
EXAM -STYLE QUESTIONS
> 1 Hydrogen peroxide solution is used as a bleach and to clean oil paintings.
A solution of hydrogen peroxide contains IO g of hydrogen peroxide in
every I 00cm' of solution. What is the concentration of the solution in g/dm)?
A IOg/dm)
B 20g/dm'
C 50g/dm'
D I0Og/dm' (1 l
> 2 An acid has the following composition by mass.

carbon 40% hydrogen 6.7% oxygen 53.3'1/.,
COMMAND WORD
a Calculate its empirical formula . [3] calculate: work out

b Its relative molecular mass is 60. Calculate its.molecular formula. [1) from give n facts,
figures or information
c 12 g of this acid is dissolved in' 250cm 3 of water. What is the
concentration of the solution formed? [3)
[Total: 7 )
> 3 25 cm' of a 0.25 molar solution of potassium carbonate (KFOJ

is mixed with 50cm' of a 0.1 molar solution of magnesium sulfate
(MgS04 ) to form insoluble magnesium carbonate.
K2CO,(aq) + MgSO,(aq) - K1SO.(aq) + MgCO,(s)
a Which solution is in excess? [1]
b The magnesium carbonate is separated by filtration, washed and
dried. What mass of magnesium carbonate should be obtained?
moles of magnesium sulfate in 50cm' = _ ____ mol
moles of magnesium carbonate produced in residue = _____ mol
mass of magnesium carbonate produced = _ _ _ _ _ g (3)
c The actual mass obtained was 0.35 g. What was the percentage yield
of the reaction? (2)
[Total: 6)
> 4 When propane. C ,Hs• burns completely in air, carbon dioxide and water
arc formed.
a Write a symbol equation for the reaction. [2)
b What volume of carbon dioxide, measured at r.t.p, will be formed
when 100cm' of propane is burned'? [2)
c 50cm' of methane is burned in 150cm' of oxygen;
CH,+ 202 - co!+ 2H2O
What is the total volume of the mixture after reaction measured at r.t.p'! (3)
[Total: 7)
122 >
122
CONTINUED
\.
5 An excess of h)dwchlo ric acid \\a s added to 1.23 g or impure hariurn
I
carbo11c1le. The rnlurnc of c,1rb<,n dio:-.ide collected al r.1.p. was
O. I 20drn·'. The impurities did not n:act with thl' acid. Calculate the
percentage purit y of the barium carbonate.
BaCO, + 2HCI-+ BaCI, +CO: + ttp
Molar volume of a gas at r.1.p. = 24 drn·' .
a The number or moles of CO , collected = _ _ _ __ 11 l
b The numher of moles of BaCO, reacted = _ __ _ _ (11
c Mass of one moh: of BaCO, = _ _ _ _ _ g (1 l
d :V1ass of hariurn carbonate= _ _ _ __ g 11 l
e Percentage purity of the barium carbona te = _ _ _ __ 11 l
[Total: 5]
gaps in your knowledge and help you to leam more effectively.
- -- - - -- -- - -- -- -- - -- -------------------------
- See Needs Almost ·
Confident
I can to move
Topic ... 1 more work there
l __ on
. -
-- - --
·- .
understand that the mole is a standard number
) (Avogadro's constant) of characteristic particles 5.1
(atoms, ions or molecules) of a substance
calculate the empirical formula (and molecular
) formula) of a compound using appropriate data
5.1
calculate the relationship between the number of

•
) moles of a substance and the mass or number of 5.1
particles present in a sample of a substance
use the information given in an equation to calculate .
) reacting masses, limiting reagents and amount of 5.2
product for a stated reaction
calculate the percentage composition by mass of a
> compound, and the percentage yield and purity of a

product of a given reaction
5.2
understand that the molar gas volume for any gas

.
is 24 dm l at room temperature and pressure, and be
) able to use this v11lue for calculations on reactions
5.2
involving gases
understand the different units for used to express .
the concentration of a solution and use them when
) calculating the concentration of a solution from
5.3
titration experiments
123
<describe metals as electrical conductors and non-metallic materials as non-conducting insulators
• define electrolysis and ident ify the components of an electrolytic cell
• describe and pre<dict the elect rolysis pto'ducts of b inary compounds in the molten state
• describe the electrolysis of concentrated sodium chloride solution and dilute sulfuric acid using
inert electrodes
• describe how to electroplate a metal 0bject

• state that a hydrogen-oxygen fuel cell generates electricity
124
6 Electrochemistry
GETTING STARTED
Arrange yourselves into groups within the class 2 Why is wiring usually covered with a
and discuss your background understanding plastic coating?
of electrical conductivity. Discuss the
3 Do liquid metals conduct electricity?
following questions:
What other kinds of liquid are able to
1 From your everyday experience, which metals conduct electricity?
have you seen most often used in electrical
Summarise the answers fro m your group and report
wiring, both domestically and in computer
back to the whole class.
circuit boards?
THE HYDROGEN ECONOMY
The chemical reaction between hydrogen The hope is that hydrogen can be produced on a
and oxygen is a simple reaction. The reacting large scale by the electrolysis of water. However,
substances are gaseous elements and are easy this is currently not very economical. It is possible
to mix. There is a single, simple non-polluting that cheap surplus electricity from nuclear, wind
product: water. The reaction gives out a great or solar power may make t he production of
amount of energy. This is what makes the prospect hydrogen ('green hydrogen') by electrolysis more
of using hydrogen as a fuel for transport very economical. Hydrogen could also be produced
attractive. The hydrogen- oxygen fuel cell uses an from waste plastics and paper that would otherwise
electrochemical process to convert the chemical go into landfill. The development of these
energy of the reaction into electricity and seems technologies form significant steps in generating
to be one of the better options to reduce the the hydrogen necessary to act as a pillar of a
dependence of our transport systems on fossil decarbonised economy.
fuels (Figure 6.1).
A future 'hydrogen economy' has been talked
about, with hydrogen being used as an energy 1 What is the word equation for the overall
source in a variety of situations, including bulk reaction in a hydrogen-oxygen fuel cell? Is the
transport, trains and public transport, shipping reaction exothermic or endothermic, and what
and aeroplanes. However, there are problems of type of energy is involved?
storage and transport of hydrogen because of its 2 The use of hydrogen fuel cells is regarded as
• low density, although companies are beginning to non-polluting for the environment, but what
invest in fuelling stations to improve its distribution factors need to be considered for it to be
as a transport fuel. Hydrogen is not cheap. The regarded as carbon-neutra l?
main method of obtaining hydrogen currently is by
the steam-reforming of natural gas
(see Chapter 9 for how hydrogen
is produced for ammonia production
··••1l
in the Haber process). This means that
this hydrogen (somet imes called
'grey hydrogen') is not independent
of fossil fuel production.
Figure 6.1: A hydrogen fuel ceU bus

operating in Perth, Australia.
125
6.1 Types of electrical

conductivity
Conductivity in solids
Electricity has had a great effect on our way of Jiving. Large
urban areas (Figure 6.2) could not function without an
electricity supply. The results of the large-scale supply of
electricity can be seen in the pylons and power lines that
mark our landscape. But electricity is also important on
the very small scale. T he silicon chip enables a vast range
of products to work, and many people now have access to
products containing advanced electronic circuits - from
smartphones to washing machines.
Conductors and insulators

The ability to conduct electricity is the major simple
difference between elements that are metals and elements
that are non-metals. All metals conduct electricity, but
carbon in the form of graphite is the only non-metallic
element that conducts electricity. A simple circuit can be used
to test if a solid conducts electricity (Figure 6.3). The circuit
is made up of a battery (a source of direct current), some
connecting copper wires fitted with clips, and a light bulb
to show when a current is flowing. The material to be tested
is clipped into the circuit. If the bulb lights up, then the
material is an clcctric11I conductor.
e lectrical conductor: a substance that conducts

., e lectricity but is not chemically changed in the process
electrons repelled into electrons attracted

wire from negative to positive terminal
terminal of battery G of battery
f battery
g raphite rod bulb
Figure 6.3: Testing a solid material (a graphite rod) to see if the

material conducts electricity. The bulb will light if the material is
an electrical conductor. Figure 6.2: Akihabara Electric Town, Tokyo.
,,...
J
126
6 Electroch e mistry
For a solid to conduct, it must have a structure that

contains 'free' electrons (e·) that are able to flow
Conductivity in liquids
through the structure. There is a flow of electrons in the Some liquids conduct electricity. The process in which
completed circuit. The battery acts as an 'electron pump'. an electric current flows through a liquid compound
Electrons are repelled (pushed) into the circuit from the or solution is called electrolysis. Unlike electrical
negative terminal of the battery. They are attracted to conductivity in metals, electrolysis in liquid compounds
the positive terminal. The battery 'pumps' all the free or solutions produces a chemical reaction. Electrolysis
electrons in one direction. Metals (and graphite) conduct has many uses in industry.
electricity because they have mobile free electrons in their
structure (see Chapter 3 on metallic bonding and the KEY WORDS
structure of graphite). Metallic alloys are held together
by the same type of bonding as the metal elements, so insulator: a substance that does not
they can also conduct electricity. conduct electricity
Solid covalent non-metals do not conduct electricity. electrolysis: the breakdown of an ionic
Whether they are giant molecular or simple molecular compound, molten or in aqueous solution, by t he
structures, there are no electrons that are not involved in use of electricity
bonding - there are no free electrons. Such substances
are called non-conductors or insulators (Table 6.1 ).
There is no chemical change when an electric current is Electrolysis and the movement of ions
passed through a metal or graphite. The copper wire is The conductivity of liquids can be tested in a similar
still copper when the current is switched off! way to solids, but the simple testing circuit is changed
(Figure 6.4). Instead of clipping the solid material to be
i .lr:isulatdt:sl(nen,,cQn(iuctor,s}! - :°r-: tested into the circuit, graphite rods are dipped into the test
Simple liquid. Liquid compounds, solutions and molten materials
Conducters· Giant molecular can all be tested in this way. Molten metals, and mercury,
molec1:1lar
structures which is liquid at room temperature, conduct electricity.
. structures
Electrons are still able to move through the liquid metal to
copper diamond sulfur
carry the charge. As in solid metals, no chemical change
silver poly(ethene) iodine takes place when liquid metals conduct electricity.
poly(chloroet hene), I>
I
aluminium commonly known as
polyvinyl chloride, PVC
poly(tetrafluoroethene),
steel
PTFE
brass bulb ammeter A
graphite
Table 6.1: Solid electrical conductors and insulators.
graphite rod graphite rod
liquid under test
+
heat if necessary
Figure 6.4: Apparatus for testing the conductivity of liquids

(an electrolytic cell).
127 )
127
If liquid compounds or solutions are tested using the For example, copper(! I) chromate(YI) (CuCrO4 )
apparatus in Figure 6.4, then the result will depend on d issolves in water to give a green solution. This solution
the type of bonding in the compound (Chapter 3). If is placed in the lower part of a U-tube. A colourless
the compound is bonded covalently, then the compound solution of dilute hydrochloric acid is then layered on
will not conduct electricity as a liquid or as a solution. top of the salt solution in each arm of the tube and
Examples of such liquids are ethanol, petrol (gasoline), graphite rods are filled (Figure 6.5). These rods carry the
pure water and sugar solution. Ionic compounds will current into and o ut of the solution. They are known as
conduct electricity if they are either molten or dissolved electrode,;. In electrolysis, the negative electrode is called
in water. Examples of these ionic compounds are molten the cathode and the positive electrode is called the anode.
lead bromide, sodium chloride solution and copper(II)
sulfate solution. KEYWORDS
When these ionically bonded liquids conduct electricity,
petrol (or gasoline): a clear flammable liquid
they do so in a different way from metals. In this case,
they conduct electricity because the ions present can derived from petroleum used primarily as a fuel
move through the liquid; when metals conduct electricity, in most combustion engines; it is obtained by the
electrons move through the metal. fractional distillation of petroleum
Ionic compounds will not conduct electricity when they electrolyte: an ionic compound that will conduct
are solid because their ions are fixed in position and electricity when it is molten or dissolved in water;
cannot move. Remember that in Chapter I we discussed electrolytes will not conduct electricity when solid
the fact that in solids the particles present can only non-electrolytes: liquids or solutions that do not
vibrate about a fixed position. Liquids that conduct take part in electrolysis: they do not contain ions
electricity by the movement of ions are called electrolytes
and liquids that do not conduct in this way are called electrodes:.the points where the electric current
non-electrolytes (Table 6.2). enters or leaves a battery or electrolytic cell
cathode: the electrode in any type of cell at

Electrelytes Non-electrolytes which reduction (th e gain of electrons) takes
sulfuric acid distilled water place; in electrolysis it is the negative electrode
molten lead bromide ethanol anode: the electrode in any type of cell at which
sodium chloride solut ion petrol oxidation (the loss of electrons) takes place - in
electrolysis it is the positive electrode
hydrochlori c acid paraffin \
copper(II) chloride solution molten sulfur

.. sodium hydroxide solution sugar solution
After passing the current for a short time, the solution
around the cathode becomes blue. Around the anode the
Table 6.2: Some electrolytes and non-electrolytes. sol ution becomes yellow. These colours are produced by
the movement (migration) of the ions in the salt. The
When electrolytes conduct electricity during electrolysis, positive copper ions (Cui+) are blue in solution. They
a chemical change takes place and the ionic compound are attracted to the cathode (the negative electrode). The
is broken down (it is decomposed). For example, lead(II) negative chromate ions (CrO,2") are yellow in solution.
bromide is changed 10 lead and bromine: They are attracted to the anode (the positive electrode).
The use of coloured ions in solution has shown the
lead(II) bromide-+ lead + bromine direction that positive and negative ions move in an
PbBriCl) -+ Pb(!)+ Brig) electric field .
The conductivity of ionic compounds is explained by
the fact that ions move in a particular direction in an
electric field. This can be shown in experiments using
coloured salts.
128 >
128
6 Electrochemistry
I e
- -- --~ -----~1-------
battery ® Difference between
conductivity in solids
and electrolytes
It is important to remember that it is the electrons that
move through the wire when a metal conducts electricity.
However, when a salt solution conducts electricity, it is
graphite graphite the ions in the solution that move to the electrodes where
cathode anode they lose their charge (they are discharged). A solid ionic
compound will not conduct electricity; because the ions
U-tube
are in fixed positions in a solid, they cannot move. The
.J-+--::::::t"'- d ilute electrolyte must be melted or dissolved in water for it
hydrochloric acid to conduct.
copper(II) chrom ate(VI) The two distinct types of electrical conductivity are
called metallic and electrolytic conductivity. They differ
from each other in important ways.
Conductivity in metals:
Figure 6.5: An experiment to show ionic movement by
using a salt solution containing coloured ions. The acid • electrons flow
solution was colourless at the start of the experiment.
• a property of elements (metals, and carbon as
graphite) and alloys
Electrolytic cells • takes place in solids and liquids

The apparatus in which electrolysis is carried out • no chemical change takes place.
is known as an electrolytic cell (Figure 6.4). The
Electrolytic conductivity:
direct current is supplied by a battery or power pack.
Graphite electrodes carry the current into and out of • ions flow
the electrolyte. Graphite is chosen because it is quite • a property of ionic compounds
unreactive (inert). It will not react with the electrolyte or
with the products of electrolysis. Platinum electrodes are • takes place in liquids and solutions (not solids)
sometimes used in some cells instead of graphite. In the • chemical decomposition takes place.
.. external circuit, electrons flow from the negative terminal
of the battery to the cathode, and then from the anode
back to the positive terminal. In the electrolyte it is the KEYWORDS
ions that move to carry the current.
e le ctro lytic cell: a cell consisting of an electrolyte
During electrolysis: and two electrodes (anode and cathode)
connected to an externa l DC power source where
• positive ions (metal ions or H+ions) move towards
positive and negative ions in the e lectrolyte are
the cathode; they are known as cations
separated and discharged
• negative ions (non-metal ions) move towards the
anode; they are known as anions . cation: a positive ion that would be attracted to
the cathode in electrolysis
a nion: ·a negative ion that would be attracted to
the anode in electrolysis
decomposit io n: a type of chemical reaction
where a compound breaks down into
simpler substances
.._
129
Questions 6.2 Products of

1 a Which of the following will conduct electricity?
a strip of copper metal electrolysis
ii a solution of sugar in water
iii aqueous sodium chloride solution Electrolysis of molten
iv mercury
V dilute hydrochloric acid
ionic compounds
An electrolytic cell can be used to electrolyse molten
vi melted sugar
compounds. Heat must be supplied to keep the salt
b Which of i- vi are electrolytes? molten. Figure 6.6 shows the electrolysis of molten
2 a Why is solid potassium bromide a lead(II) bromide.
non-conductor of electricity?
b Suggest two things that could be done to switch battery or power pack
potassium bromide that would make it
conduct electricity.
~1-----~-e-~
r ;ctron elect~
3 Explain the major difference between electrical flow flow tro'l
conductivity in metals and solutions in terms of the
particles that are carrying the current.
ACTIVITY 6.1
Key words i n electrical conductivity

molten lead
and electrolysis
chloride (Pb Br~
The topics of electrical conductivity and
electrolysis include a number of key words that
cover the nature of different substances and
the features of an electrolytic cell. Work in pairs
to create a list of t he key words for this topic.
...
heat
You can include the key words identified in t his
Figure 6.6: Movement of ions in the electrolysis of a molten
chapter to help you. '
__ .
,_ Once you have completed your list, follow the steps:
salt, lead(II) bromide.
When the switch is closed and the circuit is complete,

1 Label yourselves Partner A and Partner B.
the current flows and bromine vapour (which is red-
2 Partner A chooses a key word and describes brown) begins to bubble off at the anode. After a short
it to Partner B. In your descript ion, you are time, a bead of liquid lead collects at the cathode. The
not allowed to include the key word. electrical energy from the cell has caused a chemical
change (decomposition). The cell decomposes the molten
3 Partner B then tries to guess the word that
lead(ll) bromide because the Pb2+ and Br· ions present
Partner A is explaining.
move to opposite elect rodes where they arc discharged.
4 Swap over and take it in turns until you have Figure 6.6 shows this movement. This move ment of
discussed all of your key words. the ions means that when a molten ionic compound
is electrolysed:
After you have finished, create a word cloud of
the terms you think are the most important to • the metal is always formed at the cathode (the
learn for this topic; using different sizes and negative electrode)
colours to ind icate the most straightforward and • the non-metal is always formed at the anode (the
most difficult terms. positive electrode).
130 >
130
6 Electrochemistry
T his means we can easily predict the products of The lead ions {Pb2•) move to the cathode. There, each
electrolysis of a molten, binary ionic compound. lead ion picks up (accepts) two electrons and becomes a
Table 6.3 shows some further examples of this type of lead atom:
electrolys is. The electrolys is of molten salts is easier
At the cathode Pb 2• + 2e- -+ Pb
if the melting point of the salt is not too high. The
electrolysis of molten ionic salts is important for the
industrial extraction of reactive metals such as sodium
and magnesium. The extraction of aluminium by
the electrolysis of molten aluminium oxide is a very
im portant process and is covered in detail in Chapter 16.
..
Produtt at :' . .•
Electrolyte ·· catfiode Procfuct at

(compound anode (positive
(negative
electrolysed) e'.l~rode)
electf'ode)
Figure 6.7: At the cathode, metal ions gain electrons. At the
lead bromide, anode. non-metal ions lose electrons.
lead (Pb) bromine (Br)
PbBr 2
sodium During electrolysis, the flow of electrons continues
sodium (Na) chlorine (Cl 2}
chloride, NaCl through the circuit. For every two electrons taken from
the cathode by a lead ion, two electrons are set free at
potassium
potassium (K) iodine (1 2) the anode by two bromide ions. So. overall, the electrons
iodide, Kl
released at the anode flow through the circuit towards
copper(II) the cathode. During the electrolysis of molten salts, the
copper (Cu) bromine (Br2)
bromide, CuBr2 metal ions. which are always positive (cations). move to
zinc chloride, the cathode and arc discharged. Non-metal ions (except
zinc (Zn) chlorine (Cl 2) hydrogen), however. arc always negative (a nions) and
ZnCl2
move to the anode to be discharged. Table 6.4 shows the
aluminium cathode and anode reactions (half-equation.,) for some
aluminium (Al) oxygen (02)
oxide (A1p 3) examples of electrolysis of molten binary compounds,
Tabl e 6.3: Some examples of the electrolysis of molten salts.
These electrode reactions are represented by half-
equations; if the two half-equations are added together,
they give the overall equation for the reaction taking
) The movement o f ions to the different electrodes during
place in the electrolytic cell.
electrolysis results in the decomposition of the ionic
compound. Different reactions take place at the two
electrodes. Look at the electrolysis of molten lead(ll) KEYWORD
bromide in more detail (Figure 6.7). During electrolysis,
half-equations: ionic equations showing the
the bromide ions (Br-) move to the anode. Each
separate oxidation and reduction steps in
bromide ion gives up {donates) one electron to become a
redox reactions, including the reactions at the
bromine atom:
anode (oxidation) and cathode (reduction) in an
At t he anode Br - - Br+ e- electro lytic cell
Then two bromine atoms bond together to make a
bromine molecule:
Br+ Br- Br2
131 )
131
Electrolysis of dilute sulfuric acid

Although water is a very poor conductor of electricity, it
can be made to decompose if the water is acidified with a
few drops of sulfuric acid. An electrolytic cell such as the
one shown in Figu re 6.8, sometimes called a Hofmann
voltameter, can be for the electrolysis of the dilute
sulfuric acid as it keeps the gases produced separate.
copper(fl)
bro~ ~e, CuBrz, oxygen hydrogen
Table 6.4: Electrode half-equations for some examples o f

the electrolysis o f molten salt s.
The anode reactions shown in Table 6.4 are the sum of

the two stages written in the text: the loss of electrons
from the ions followed by the joining together of two
plati num
atoms to make a molecule of the element The loss of an
electrodes
electron from a negative ion like c1- can also be written
2C1- - 2e- - Cl2•
Electrolysis of solutions
anode
Many ionic compounds dissolve in water. In such
solutions the ions are free to move and therefore these
solutions will conduct electricity. The electrolysis of ionic
solutions also produces chemical change. However, the
products from electrolysis of a solution of a salt may Figure 6.8: A Hofmann voltameter for the electrolysis of
be different from those obtained by electrolysis of tlie dilute sulfuric acid.
molten salt. This is because water itself produces ions.
After a short time, the volume of gas in each arm of the
~ Although water is a simple molecular substance, a very
apparatus can be measured and tested. The gas collected
small fraction of its molecules split into hydrogen ions
above the cathode is hydrogen. Oxygen collects above the
(W) and hydroxide ions (OH-):
anode. T he ratio of the volumes is approximately 2: 1.
HzO .= W +OH The ions present in the solution are H+, OH- and so,2-.
But at each electrode just one type of ion gets di scharged.
most molecules intact.= only a very few molecules split
in to ions Only hydrogen ions move to the cathode so it is clear
why hydrogen gas is produced there. However, both OH-
Not enough ions are produced to make pure water a and SO/ - move to the anode, but only the hydroxide
good conductor of electricity. Water is a weak electrolyte. ions are discharged to give oxygen gas. Effectively, this
During electrolysis, however, these hydrogen and experiment is the e·lectrolysis of water.
hydroxide ions are also able to move to the electrodes.
T he hydrogen and hydroxide ions compete with the ions +
from t he acid or salt to be discharged at the electrodes. at the cathode at the anode
This electrolysis begins to show that some ions
are preferentially discharged ahead of others
during electrolysis.
132
6 Electrochemistry
It is possible to write half-equations for the reactions that It is important to understand that different products
have taken place at the two electrodes. arc fo rmed when concentrated sodium chloride solution
r
is electrolysed rather th an molten sodium chloride
At the cathode 2W + 2e- - H 1
(Table 6.5).
At the anode 40W - 2Hp + 0 1 + 4e-
Product at Product at
Electrolyte
Electrolysis of salt solutions cathode anode
The electrolysis of salt solutions is more complicated Molten sodium
Sodium (Na) Chlorine (Cl 2)
than fo r acids. Positi ve metal ions arc also present in chloride, NaCl(!)
these solutions. These metal io ns will compete with Concentrated
the hydrogen ions from waler lo be discharged at sodium chloride
the cathode. Hydrogen (H 2) Chlorine (Cl)
solution,
A concentrated solu tion of sodium chl oride can be NaCl(aq)
electrolysed in the laboratory (Figure 6.9). There a re fo ur Table 6.5: Products of electrolysis of sodium chloride under
different ions present in the solution. The positive ions different conditions.
(cations), Na- and H ♦, flow to the cathode, attracted by
its negative charge. T he negative ions (anions), c1- and
A co nsideration of all th e examples of electrolysis
OH- . travel to the anode.
discussed so far gives us the following rules regarding t he
products obtained at the electrodes:
- + -- - hydrogen • a meta l or hydrogen is always formed at the cathode
• a non-metal (other than hydrogen) is formed at
the anode.
electrolysis
cell fitted We can write half-equations for the electrode reactions
sodium with tak ing place duri ng the electrolysis of a concentrated
cnloride graphite sodium chloride solution.
electrodes
At the cathode, it is the tt• ions that accept electrons
OH (Figure 6. 10), as sodium is more reactive than hydrogen:
CJ· H• + e- - H
Then two hydrogen atoms combine to form a
.. /4iectron hydrogen molecule:
ele~
T flow flow H + H-Hl
So. overall. hydrogen gas bubbles off at the cathode:
DC power supply
2H• + 2e- - H 2
Figure 6 .9 : Movement and discharge of ions in the
electrolysis of concentrated sodium chloride solution.
When this experiment is carried out, hydrogen is

produced at the cathode, not sodium. Chlorine, a green
gas, is collected at the anode. T his chlorine is produced
by the discharge of chloride ions at the a node. In this
case, the hydroxide ions are not discharged and so no
oxygen gas is produced.
133
Na· Ions stay than chlorine. When the concentration of chloride

in solution
ions is low, it is the hydroxide (OH") ions that are
discharged instead.
~~ 40W -+ 2Hp + 0 2 + 4e·
~ ~
Hydrogen is still produced at the cathode. These results
indicate that the preferential discharge of er- ions ahead
of OH- ions only applies if the concentration of CJ· is
C2\ W Ions from Hp sufficiently high. Table 6.6 summarises these differences
~ are discharged at the in the products formed for concentrated and dilute
O negative solutions of metal halides.
• ',w electrode as
~,9"
concentrated NaCl(aq) hydrogen chlorine
) hydrogen bromine
Figure 6.10: Hydrogen ions, rather than sodium ions, are
discharged at the cathode. The atoms combine to form hydrogen oxygen
hydrogen molecules (HJ. hydrogen oxygen
Table 6.6: Electrolysis of dilute and concentrated solutions
At the anode, the Cl io ns are discharged more readily
of metal halides.
than the O H ions:
cI- -+ Cl+ e- Further information on the nature of electrode reactions
Then two chlorine atoms combine to make a can be found from experiments using different salt
chlorine molecule: solutions. The electrolysis of a blue copper(II ) sulfate
solution using inert graphite electrodes (Figure 6.1 1)
Cl+ Cl -+ Cl 2 produces a deposit of red- brown copper metal on the
So, overall, pale-green chlorine gas bubbles off at cathode. Copper is Jess reactive than hydrogen and
the anode: therefore it is the copper ions (Cu 2•) that are discharged
at the cathode.
\ Al the cathode Cu2•(aq) + 2e- -+ Cu(s)
The Na• and OH · ions are left behind in solution; this
is sodium hydroxide solution. T he solution therefore
~ becomes alkaline. This can be shown by adding indicator
to the sol ution. Universal indicator will turn purple as
the electrolysis takes place. The overall reaction taking
place in the electrolytic cell is:
2NaCl(aq) + 2Hp(I) -+ 2Na0H(aq) + Hig) + Cli g)
The products of the reaction (hydrogen. chlorine and
sodium hydroxide) arc very important industrially as
the basis for the chlor-alkali industry. So. the electrolysis
of concentrated brine (salt water) is a very important
manufacturing process. Similar results are obtained
if concentrated solutions of other metal halides are
elect rolysed. Hydrogen gas is produced at the cathode
and the halogen at the anode.
However, the elTect of concentration is important. Figure 6.11: Copper is quite unreactive so it can be seen
Electrolysis of a dilute solution of sodium chloride deposited on the cathode when copper(II) sulfate solution
results in the formation of oxygen at the anode rather is electrolysed.
134
6 Electrochemistry
Oxygen gas is produced at the anode as the hyd roxide Electrode half-equations in electrolysis
ions from water are discharged rather than the
The reactions th at take place at the electrodes during
sulfate ions.
el'ectrolysis involve the loss and gain of electrons. These
At the anode 40H- -+ 2Hp + 0 2 + 4e- electrode reactions can be written as half-equations.
Negative ions a lways travel to the anode, where they lose
As the electrolysi-s proceeds, the blue colour of the
electrons. In contrast, positive ions always flow to the
solution will fade as the copper ions causing the colour
cathode, where they gain electrons. As we will discuss in
are discharged. The electrolyte solution will also become
more detail in Chapter I 0, oxidation can be defined as
more acidic as OH- ions are discharged.
the loss of electrons and reduction can be defined as the
Consideration of the results of electrolysis experiments gain of electrons. Therefore, electrolysis can be seen as a
on salt solutions leads to some rules for ion discharge at process in which oxidation and reduct ion are physically
the electrodes: separated. During electrolysis:
At the cathode: • the oxidation of non-metal ions always takes place
at the anode
• The more reactive a metal. the mo re it tends to stay
as ions and not be discharged. The tt• ions will • the reduction of metal or hydrogen ions a lways takes
accept electrons instead. Hydrogen molecules will be place at the cathode.
formed, leaving the ions of the reactive metal (e.g.
The equation for the overall reaction taking p lace during
Na• ions) in solution.
a particular electrolysis can be found by add ing the
• In contrast, the ions of less reactive metals (e.g. Cu 2• two half-equations together. Using the example of the
ions) will accept electrons readily and form metal electrolysis of copper(ll) sulfate solution with graphite
atoms. In this case, the metal will be discharged, electrodes, we have:
leaving the H• ions in solution (Figure 6.11 ).
At the cathode
• For positive ions: Cu 2•(aq) + 2e- -+ Cu(s)
Na• Mg2• AP• Zn 2• tt• Cu 2• Ag multiply by 2 to balance the electrons
more likely to be discharged At the anode
At the anode: 40W(aq) ~ 2Hp(l) + Oig) + 4e-
• If the ions of a halogen (Cl-, Br- or 1-) are present Overall reaction
2Cu1•(aq) + 40W(aq) -+ 2Cu(s) + 2Hp(I) + 0 2(g)
in a high enough concentration, they will giye
up electrons more readily than OH - ions will. The exchange of electrons at the anode and cathode
Molecules of chlorine, bromine or iodine are is important in the transfer of charge around the
formed. The OH- ions remain in solution. electrolysis circuit as it is the bridge that continues the
flow of electrons through the system. The transfer of
• If no halogen ions are present, or the halide solution
is too dilute, the OH- ions will give up electrons. charge during elect rolysis consists of three distinct stages,
which are illustrated in Figure 6.12:
When OW ions are discharged, oxygen is formed .
Sulfate and nitrate ions are not discharged in • electrons move through the wires of the external
preference to OH- ions. circuit under the influence of the battery or DC
power source (see Figure 6.9)
• For negative ions:
SO 2 NO - OW c1- Br- 1- • the cations (positive ions) in the electrolyte move
•- )
to the cathode where they gain electrons from the
more likely to be discharged
external circuit, and
• the anions (negative ions) move to the anode where
they lose electrons, and these electrons complete
the flow of charge by moving through the external
wiring to the positive pole of the battery.
ns)
135
) CAMBRIDGE lGCSETMJ CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
Electrons move around the circuit

from one electrode to the other.
+
anode
At the anode, bromide At the cathode, lead ions
ions lose their charge lose their cha rge
because they lose because they gain
electrons. Br electrons.
Br
Pb2• + 2e- -+ Pb
Overall reaction: PbBril)-+ Pb(I) + Br2

lead bromide -+ lead + bromine
Figure 6 .12: Movement of charge during the electrolysis of molten lead bromide.
Electrolysis of copper(II) sulfate with cathode G anode©

copper electrodes
copper copper
Our discussion so far has been about the influence
of the electrolyte on the products formed. However,
it is possible to use electrodes other than graphite or
platinum; electrodes that are not inert. A cell can be set
up to electrolyse copper(II) sulfate solution using copper
electrodes (not graphite electrodes). As electrolysis takes
place, the cathode gains mass as copper is deposited on
the electrode (Figure 6.13):
At the cathode Cu 2•(aq) + 2e- - Cu(s)
"' The anode, however, loses mass as copper dissolves from
the electrode:
At the anode Cu{s)--+ Cu 2•(aq) + 2e- copper(II) sulfate
solution (electrolyte)
So. overall. t here is a transfer of copper from the anode
to the cathode. The colour of the copper(II) sulfate Figure 6.13: The electrolysis of copper(II) sulfate using
solution does not change because the concentration copper electrodes. The movement of ions effectively
of the Cui• ions in the solution remains the same. T he transfers copper from one electrode to the other.
idea of dissolving anodes is useful in the process of
dNtrnpJatiOJ! and in the purification of copper.
. KEYWORD 1
electroplating: a process of electrolysis in which

a metal object is coated (plated) with a layer of
another metal
136)
136
6 Electrochemistry
REFLECTION
An understanding of electrolysis involves considering several different physical situations: molten

elect roly tes, solutions of d ilute acids or salt solutions. How have you organised the information that deals
with these different situations? Do you have a clear strategy for predicting the different products formed in
these varied examples? How would you explain the key features of electrolysis to someone else?
Electrolysis of copper(II) sulfate solution Method

This experiment is designed to demonstrate the
6volt DC
different products obtained when the electrolysis
power supply
of copper(II) sulfate solution is carried out first with
inert graphite electrodes and then with copper e 0
electrodes. The use of copper electrodes illustrates
how copper is refined industrial ly.
light
bulb
You will need:
• copper(II) sulfate solution (0.5 mol/dm3)
• 200cm 3 beaker
• graphite rods
• stand and clamp(s) for electrodes copper(II) sulfate solution
• DC power supply
• small light bulb
• connecting leads and crocodile dips
• copper strips (cleaned with sandpaper}. Figure 6.14: Electrolysis of copper(II) sulfate solution with
gra phite electrodes.
Safety
Wear eye protection throughout. Be careful with 1 The electrolytic cell should be set up as shown
in Figure 6.14 using graphite rods as electrodes
chemicals. Never ingest them and always wash your
(see also Figure 6.11 ).
hands after handling them.
A dep osit of copper forms on the cathode; this
Getting started will often be powdery and uneven. Bubbles of
Consider what you have learnt about electrolytic gas (oxygen) are formed at the anode.
cells and the process of el~ctrolysis.
cathode reaction:
• Predict at which electrode you would expect a Cu 2•(aq) + 2e- .... Cu(s}
metal to be deposited.
anode reaction:
• Predict at which electrode you would expect a 4OH- (aq)-+ 2Hp(I) + O 2(g) + 4e-
non-metallic gas to be given off.
Finally, check that you can assemble t he equipment

for the cell for a test run.
137 >
137
CONTINUED
2 Repeat the experi ment, replacing the graphite During this electrolysis, the mass gained at the
rods with clean copper stri ps as electrodes. cathode is equal to th e mass lost at the anode.
This produces a different anode reaction. No Questions

oxygen is produced, rather th e copper anode
dissolves. Copper can be seen disappearing 1 Were there ways in which the apparatus you
from the surface of the copper-coated anode: had could be improved?
Anode reaction: Cu(s) -+ Cu 2•(aq) + 2e- 2 Comment on the steps you would need to take
to make the electrolysis with copper electrodes
The reaction is the reverse of the quantitative.
cathode react ion.
Self-assessment
Setting up t he apparatus for a functioning electrolytic cell requires organisation and practica! skill. Would
you be able to agree with the following statements as to how you carried out the experiment?
• I was confident wheA setting up t he apparatus for this experi ment and I set up everything correctly.
• My eleetrolytic cell worked and I could see the formation of copper on the cathode.
• I had time to repeat the experiment with copper electrodes.
Fo r electroplating. the electrolytic cell is adapted from

KEY WORD 1i the type usua lly used. The cathode is the object to be
plated and the anode is made fro m the metal being used
quantitative: the ability to put numerical values
to p late the o bject. The electrolyte is a sail of the same
to the properties being studied
metal as used fo r the anode. As the process proceeds,
the anode dissol ves away into the solution. replacing the
metal plated on to the object. As a result of meta l ions
Electroplating moving into solution at the anode the concentration. and
The fact that an unreactive meta l can be coated on to the a ny colour. of the solution remains the same throughout
"' surface of the cathode by elect ro lysis (Figu re 6.11 ) means the electrolysis.
that useful metal objects can be ' plated' with a chosen
meta l. Elect roplating can be used to coat one metal with
ano ther (Figure 6.15a).
silve, - ~
anode (+) '
1
11
"'
,,___ _ metal spoon
cathode (-)
- - -- -+-- silver nitrate

solution
(electrolyte}
Figure 6.15 a: Cell for elect rop lating with silver. b: Industrial electrop lating of metal objects.
138)
138
6 Electrochemistry
The most commonly used metals for electroplating

are copper, chromium, silver and tin. One purpose of 6.3 Hydrogen as a fuel
electroplating is to give a protective coating to the metal
underneath; an example is the tin plating of steel cans Hydrogen-oxygen fuel cells
to prevent them rusting (Chapter 16). This is also the
idea behind the chromium plating of articles such as In electrolysis, we put in electrical energy to make a
motorcycle parts, door knobs, bath taps, etc. Chromium chemical reaction happen. The reaction that takes
does not corrode; it is a hard meta l that resists scratching place is a lways a decomposition reaction. The change is
and wear. and it can also be polished to give an endothermic; electrical energy is put in to bring about
the change (endothermic and exothermic processes were
attractive finish .
introduced in Chapter I, and will be discussed further
The attractive appearance of silver can be achieved in Chapter 7).
by electroplating silver on to an article made from a
cheaper metal such as nickel silver (Figure 6.1 Sb). The It is possible to reverse this process and use chemical
'EPNS' seen on cutlery and other objects stands for reactions to prod uce electrical energy. This is what takes
place in the electrochemical cells and batteries that we
'electroplated nickel silver' . ' Nickel silver' is an alloy of
copper, zi nc and nickel - it contains no silver at all! It is use so often in everyday situations (Figure 6.16). Simple
often used as the base metal for silver-plated articles. electrochemical cells lose their power and need to be
recharged from time to time. Many of the substances
The basic rules for electroplating an object with a metal found in electrochemical cells are harmful and difficult to
(Figure 6.1 Sa) are: dispose of.
• The object to be plated must be made the cathode.
• The electrolyte must be a solution of a salt of metal
to be plated on the object.
• The anode is made of a strip of metal to be plated
on the object.
Questions
4 What products will you get when you pass an
electric current through:
a molten potassium chloride
b a concentrated solution of potassium chloride?
5 Give a general rule for predicting the electrode
products when a molten binary ionic compound Figure 6.16: A collection of some different types and sizes
is electrolysed. of battery.
6 A metal object is to be copper plated.
a Which electrode should the object be made? A much more efficient way of changing chemical energy
into electrical energy is by using a fuel cell- Such a cell
b Name a solution that could be used as
operates continuously, with no need for recharging. The
the electrolyte.
cell supplies energy as long as the reactants are fed into
In the electrolysis of molten lead(II) bromide, the the electrodes. A hydrogen-oxygen fuel cell (Figure 6.17)
reaction occurring at the negative electrode was: uses the reaction between hydrogen and oxygen:
Pb 2 ' + 2e· -+ Pb
2Hig) + Ol(g) -+ 2Hp(l)
a Write the equation for the reaction taking place
at the positive electrode. This reaction releases a large amount of energy. Water
is _the only product. Hydrogen can be regarded as a
b Why is the react ion taking place at the negative
electrode viewed as a reduction reaction? non-polluting ruel,
....,.
139
\
KEYWORDS Hydrogen-powered vehicles
fuel cell: a device for continuously converting Hydrogen gas has a11ractions as a fuel. All it produces on
chemical energy into electrical energy using a burning is water. When hydrogen burns. it produces more
combustion reaction; a hydrogen fuel cell uses energy per gram than any other fuel ( Figure 6.18).
the reaction between hydrogen and oxygen
160
fuel: a substance that can be used as a source of
energy, usually by burning (combustion)
140
.....01
~
o·
.....
fuel hydrogen 01
120
i' I-
., c-
'i (HJ
C
·c
;; 100
u u"'
a;
ai
"'0
'l
~
..0
>-
..0
80
C
ro
u u I I
u
:,
OJ
0
u
.,;
"O
(I)
u ..9. c 0
I
o_ di
cii
ro
en
:, 0 I (I)
"O ..0
;. v' u "O
e
Q.
60
~
x
0
C
~ 40
0
E
Qi
C
w
20
0
oxygen
Figure 6.18: Energy produced b y burning various fuels
(OJ
Hydrogen produces more energy per gram than any
other fuel.
electric motor in car
Despite difficulties of production. safe storage and
transport, several manufacturers have developed
prototype hydrogen-powered cars. Some prototypes
burn the hydrogen in a modified combustion engine.
However, the majority use the hydrogen in a fuel cell.
Electricity from this cell then powers an electric motor
(Figure 6.17). Using a fuel cell operating an electric
motor, hydrogen has an efficiency of 60'% compared
hydrogen pumped in --. +- O/g) from air
with 35'1/o, for a petrol engine. The advantages and
from tank H,(g) the carbon electrodes disadvantages are summarised in Table 6. 7.
A hydrogen fuel cell can be used to power a car and in
the electrolyte the carbon electrolyte recent years there have been prototypes developed by
several motor manufacturers worldwide. The fuel cell
operates continuously, with no need for recharging. The
water vapour out cell supplies energy so long as the reactants are fed to
the electrodes.
Figure 6.17: Sketches of a hydrogen-oxygen fuel cell . A move to use hydrogen-powered vehicles more
a: Hydrogen entering the cell at t he negative electrode and extensively would require a greater distribution of
oxygen at the p ositive ele~rode. b : Electrons flowing to hydrogen filling stations. Indeed, fuel cells may be
a car. more suited for heavier vehicles and longer distances.
suggesting they may be more use for public service
vehicles and freight transport vehicles.
140)
140
6 Electrochemistry
Q uestions
• renewable if • non-renewable if 8 What is currently the main source of hydrogen for
produced using generated using hydrogen-powered vehicles?
solar or wind nuclear energy
9 For a future carbon-neutral approach, what is the
energy or energy from
preferred method of generating hydrogen? What
fossil fuels
• lower flammability sources of energy could be used in this approach?
than petrol • large fuel tank 10 In one type of hydrogen-oxygen fuel cell the
required electrode reactions are:
• virtually emission-
free • as yet there are very _ HiCg) ... _ W(aq) + _ e·
few 'filling stations', 0 2(g) + 4W(aq) + 4e- ... 2Hp(1)
• zero emissions of where a car could Balance the first of these half-equations so that
CO2 be topped up together they add up to the overall equation:
• non-toxic with hydrogen
2Hi(g) + Oz<g) ... 2Hp(l)
• engine redesign
needed or a fuel
cell system
• currently expensive
Table 6 .7: Advantages and disadvantages of hydrogen as a

fuel for motor vehicles.
141
~i•iiil4id
Metals can act as electricaJ conductors and non-metallic materials (e.g. plastics and ceramics) as
non-conducting insulators.
Electrolysis is the decomposition of an ionic compound by the passage of an electric current when molten or
dissolved is aqueous solution.
A simple electrolytic cell has different components, such as the cathode, anode, liquid electrolyte and a
power supply.
The electrode products of molten lead(II} bromide during electrolysis using inert graphite electrodes
are lead and bromine, and it is possible to predict the products of electrolysis of other molten binary
ionic compounds.
The products of the electrolysis of concentrated sodium chloride solution a re hydrogen and chlorine, and of
dilute sulfuric acid solution are hydrogen and oxygen.
During electrolysis, metals or hydrogen are formed at the negative electrode (cathode), and non-metals are
formed at the positive electrode (anode).
Ionic half-equations can be constructed to show the reactions taking place at the anode and cathode during
different examples of electrolysis.
To the electrolysis products of dilute and concentrated solutions of metal halides can be predicted provided
the concentration of the solution is known.
The transfer of charge around the circuit during electrolysis consists of three distinct stages, including the
movement of electrons in the external wires, the transfer of electrons at the electrodes and the movement of
ions in the electrolyte.
Different electrolysis products are formed when copper(Il) sulfate solution is electrolysed using
graphite or copper electrodes, and these differences are shown in the electrolyte solution as well as the
electrode reactions.
Electrolysis can be used to electroplate metal objects with another metal to improve their appearance and
protect against corrosion.
.. A hydrogen-oxygen fuel cell can be used to generate electricity from the reaction between hydrogen and
oxygen, with water as the only product.
The hydrogen fuel cell has advantages and disadvantages as an alternative to petrol engines in vehicles.
...,
, .f
142
6 EJectrochemistry
PROJECT
Generating 'green' hydrogen for modern transport systems

You work for a scientific consultancy and have been asked to explain the process of electrolysis to
members of the government to help inform their decisions to establish hydrogen-generating plants in
several regions of your country.
Work in groups to prepare a presentation on the process of electrolysis and its environmental impacts.
In your presentation, include the following:

• An explanation of the process of electrolysing water to produce hydrogen. Use the structure pro.v ided
by the explanatory triangle shpwn in Figure 6.19. This helps to explain the meaning of the word
electrolysis and the process involved. lJse the example of the electrolysis of dilute sulfuric acid ir:i
your explanation.
ELECTRO LYSI S
'electro-' '-lysis'
uses elect ricity to split
- ELECTRO DE {4H ' + 4e- -+ 2H2}

EQUATIONS 202- -+ 0 2 + 4e-
CONDITIONS O BSERVATIONS
- ions must b e ~ - two gases formed
able t o move in ratio 2 : 1
Figure 6.19: The electrolysis of water.
• Identify the sources of clean energy needed to carry out the electrolysis.
• Suggest how t he hydrogen is used to power different types of transport system, and their
environmental advantage.
Share your presentations with t he whole class.
143
1 There are certain requirements for electrolysis to take place. One of these
is the nature of the substance between the electrodes. Which of the diagrams
A- D in the figure shows a beaker in which electrolysis takes place?
A B
~~ ~~
.,.::::.~ .,.::::.:,~
ethanol distilled
water
C D
carbo~
~~r carbo~
~~f
electrodes ~ electrodes ~
aqueous mercury
sodium chloride
(1)
144
6 Electrochem istry
CONTINUED
2 Electroplating is a common industrial process. In which set of apparatus

A- D in the figure would the metal key be electroplated with copper?
A B
fl cJ
aqueous aqueous
copper(II) copper(II)
sulfate s-ulfate
C D
c:r-0
aqueous aqueous
copper(II) copper(II)
sulfate sulfate
■ • piece of copper c:r-() • key

(1)
3 Eight substances A- G that all conduct electricity are listed here.
A aluminium
B chromium
C copper
D dilute sulfuric acid
E platinum
F molten sodium bromide
G sodium chloride solution
Name the substance in A-G that:

a is used to plate steel cutlery (1I
b is used for inert electrodes in some electrolytic cells (1)
c produces a metal at the cathode when electrolysed (1)
d produces oxygen at the anode when electrolysed (1)
e is used in household electrical wiring (1 I
[Total: SJ
145
CONTIN UED
4 The figure shows an electrolytic cell.

power supply
a Complete the labels for the following:

the electrode indicated (1]
ii the contents of the beaker. (1]
b Draw arrows on the connecting wires to show the direction of the
movement of electrons in the circuit. (1 I
c Which of these solutions would give a colourless gas at both
electrodes during electrolysis?
dilute sulfuric acid
copper sulfate solution
COMMAND WORD
sodium chloride solution (1 I
d The electrodes shown are inert. S uggest a suitable substance that they s uggest: apply
could be made from. (1] knowledge and
[Total: SJ understanding t o
situations where
there is a range
of valid ·responses
in order to make
proposals/
put forward
considerations
146
6 Electrochemistry
CONTINUED COMMAND WORDS
c Write an ionic half-equation for the reaction at the positive electrode. (2) explain: set o ut
The electrolysis is repeated using copper electrodes. purposes or reasons/
make the relationships
d What difference would be observed in:
between thi ngs evident/
the changes in the masses of the electrodes? (4) p rovide why and/or
ii the change in colour of the solution? (2) how and support with
Explain your answer in each case. re levant evid ence
e Describe how the charge is transferred between the electrodes. [2] describe: state the
[Total: 13) po ints of a topic / g ive
characte ristics and
main features
SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST .
I can
-'
-
I
See I
Needs ! Almost
Topic ... _ more work there
-- -
J~
describe metals as electrical c0nductors and non-metallic
6.1
materials as non-cond acting insulators
define electrolysis and identify the components of a
6.1
simple electrolytic cell
describe the electrolysis products of molten lead(ll)
bromide using graphite electrodes and predict the 6.1
electrolysis products of other molten binary compounds
describe the electrolysis of concentrated sodium ehloride
6.2
solution and dilute sulfuric acid using inert electrodes
. >
predict the products of electrolysis of dilute and
6.2
concentrated halide solutions
identify the products of the electrolysis of copper(ll) -
> 6.2
sulfate solution using carbon or copper electrodes
describe how charge is transferred around the circuit
involved in electrolysis and construct ionic half-equations
> for the ionic reactions taking place at the anode
6.2
and cathode
describe how electrolysis can be used to electroplate a
6.2
metal object
consider how a hydrogen--0xygen fuel cell
6.3
generates electricity
describe the advantages and disadvantages of hydrogen-
> oxygen fuel cells as a means of powering road vehicles
6.3
147
• identify and understand the differences between physical and chemical changes
• see how some chemical react ions and physical changes are exothermic while others are endothermic
• define exothermic and endothermic reactions in terms of thermal energy transfer
• interpret reaction pathway diagrams for exothermic and endothermic reac tions
148
7 Chemical energetics
GETTING STARTED
Think back to the work that you have done on the

d iffe rent states of matter. How easy is it for matter
to chang e from one state to anot her? Changing
temperature has an obvious effect, but skiers and
skaters will also know that pressure may turn solid
ice into a film of liquid {Figure 7.1). Think about
which of these changes of state require energy, and
the reason for t hat energy being needed. Will t he
reverse changes give out energy?
Can you recall any other physical or chemical

changes t hat give out heat? Briefly make a list of
the most obvious ones and share ideas with the
whole class. Figure 7.1: Skiing in powder snow.
KEEPING COOLI
It is difficult to overestimate the importance of Discussion questions

the invention of the modern refrigerator. The
1 Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) were used as the
refrigerated transport and storage of food has
coolant in refrigerat ors and air conditioners, but
led to important benefits in the home. Not only
their use has gradually been phase_9 out. What
that, reliable refrigeration led to the globalisation
environmental problems did they cause?
of markets and the availability of important
commodities across, and between, continents. 2 What were the benefits that refrigeration using
coolants brought?
A refrigerator (Figure 7.2) takes advantage of the
heat energy changes linked to evaporation and t he cool.ant takes in
condensation. The liquid coolant in the system heat ene,gy from
is volatile and has a low boiling point. When it tne a11 in the cabinet
and vapo11ses in
evaporates it absorbs heat from the surrou~dings the coils around
{the inside of the fridge). The inside of the fridge the ,ce box
and its contents are cooled down.
The coolant is pumped round the system. The
vapour is compressed by the pump and condenses
back to a liquid again. This gives out heat to the air
behind the fridge. In this way, heat is transferred
from the inside of the fridge out into the room and
the contents are kept cold.
A similar evaporation-condensation cycle is used
in modern air conditioners. The technology is now
the coolant condenses in these
being applied in reverse to heat exchangers for pipes. gllling out heat ene,gy
domestic central heating and hot water systems. to the air outsJde
The use of such technology is aimed at reducing
the energy demands and costs of modern homes Figure 7.2: The evaporation-condensation cycle that
to make them more environmentally sustainable. works a refrigerator.
/ \
I '-"
149
Chemical changes
7 .1 Physical and chemical Ch('lnical ~hllllJ!<'' arc the result of chemical reactions.
changes When magnesium burns in oxygen (Figure 7.4). the
white ash produced is a new substance - the compound.
The Chinese characters for 'chemistry' literally mean magnesium oxide. Burning magnesium produces a
'change study' (Figure 7.3). Chemistry deals with brilliant white flame. Energy is given out in the form of
how substances react with each other. Chemical heat and light. The reaction is an exothermic change.
reactions range from the very simple through to the The combination of the two elements. magnesium and
interconnecting reactions that keep our bodies a li ve. oxygen, to form the new compound is difficult to reverse.
But what is a chemical reaction? How does it differ from

a simple physical change?
hua xue
Figure 7.3: Chinese characters for Chemistry.
Physical changes
Ice, snow and water may look different, but they are
all made of water molecules (Hp). They are different
physical forms of the same substance - water - existing
under different conditions of te mperature and pressure.
One form can change into another if those conditions
change (Chapter I). In such physical changes, no new
chemical substances are formed. Dissolving sugar in
ethanol or water is anot her example of a physical change.
It produces a solution, but the substances can easily be
separated again by distillation (Chapter 22). Figure 7 .4: Magnesium burns strongly in a,r or oxygen
producing brilliant white light. As a result of this reaction,
This is what we know about ph~~ical chanj!l.'S: white magnesium oxide is formed.
In a physical change, the substances present remain
chemically the same: no new substances are formed.
KEYWORDS
• Physical changes are often easy to reverse. Any
mixtures produced are usually easy to separate. physical change: a change in the physical state of
Physical changes can involve heat energy. We saw in a substance or the physical na ture of a situation
Chapter I that changing physical state involves heat that does not involve a change in the chemical
substance(s) present
being taken in or given out. Melting a solid takes in heat;
it is an endothermic change. The heartaken in overcomes chemical reaction (change): a change in which
the forces holding the structure together. Evaporation is a new substance is formed
a lso endothermic. The reverse changes of condensation
and freezing are exothermic changes, as shown by the
stages in a cooling curve. Some other chemical reactions, such as those in
fluorescent 'glow bracelets' (Figure 7.5). produce
chemiluminescence. They give out energy in the fo rm
of light.
150 >
150
7 Chemical energet ics
T he reaction between nitrogen and oxygen to make 2 State whether the following changes are exothermic
nitrogen monoxide is an example of another type of or endot hermic:
reaction. During this reaction, heat energy is taken in from a condensation of steam to water
the surroundings. The reaction between these gases in
b burning of magnesium
the atmosphere takes place during lightning strikes. The
reaction is an endothermic change. Endothermic reactions c addition of concentrated sulfuric acid to water
are much less common thiirt exothermic reactions. d evaporation of a volatile liquid.
3 What is the most important thing that shows us that
a chemical reaction has taken place? •·
J
7 .2 Exothermic and
endothermic reactions
Energy comes in many forms such as heat, light, sound,
electricity and, most importantly in this context,
chemical energy. Chemical energy is the energy released
or absorbed during chemical reactions.
Some chemical reactions are capable of releasing vast
amounts of energy. Forest fires can rage impressively,
producing overpowering and devastating waves of heat
(Chapter 17). Yet we use similar reactions, under control,
to provide heat for the home and for ind ustry. Natural
Figure 7 .5: Glow-in-the-dark bracelets produce gas, which is mainly methane, is burnt under controlled
chem iluminescence. conditions to produce heat in homes and industry
(Figure 7.6).
This is what we know about chemical changes:
• the major feature of a ch~mical change, or
reaction, is that new substance(s) are made during
the reaction
I
• many reactions, but not all of them, are difficult
to reverse
• during a chemical reaction, energy can be
given out (exothermic change) or taken in
(endothermic changes)
• there are many more exothermic reactions than
endothermic reactions.
Questions Figure 7.6: Methane burning on a domestic cooker.

1 State whether the following changes are physical
or chemical: In some reactions, energy is absorbed. In one of the
a melting of ice most impo rtant chemical reactions on the planet,
- plants use the energy in sunlight to convert carbon
b burning of magnesium dioxide and water into carbohydrates by the process of
c evaporation of ethanol photosynthesis (Chapter 17) (Figure 7.7).
d dissolving of sugar in water.
151 >
151
Exothe " This warms the reaction

a react,or mixture and heat is g iven
give out neat
- out to the surroundings
f\1\<>'(
\.il"np
~<)t'<"<>
\~ WI \\
r,<:>n,•,n \1\ ~ i o
....- Hot -
the ,, m l~mp-
r o.\url!
- -
b Endotnermic This cools the
reactions reaction mixture
Figure 7.7: Photosynthesis takes place in the green leaves take in heat ar.d heat is taken
of plants. - in from the
surroundings
Processes that release heat energy (thermal energy)

to the surroundings are called exothermic processes
(Figure 7.8a). Dissolving magnesium chloride in water
is an exothermic physical process. Adding zinc to
copper(II) sulfate solution is an exothermic chemical
reaction (see Experimental Skills 15. 1). The thermal
energy released in these exothermic reactions leads to
an increase in the temperature of the surroundings. The t
surroundings include: Figure 7.8 a: An exothermic reaction gives out heat energy
• the reaction mixture in the test-tube to the surroundings. b: An endothermic reaction takes in
thermal energy from the surroundings.
• the air around the test-tube
• the test-tube itself
• the thermometer or anything dipping into the , Reaction pathway diagrams
test-tube. Exothermic and endothermic changes for reactions can
be shown using reaction pathway diagram~ (energy level
., This final point is important: it is the thermal energy diagrams). Such diagrams show:
(heat) transferred to the thermometer that causes the rise
in temperature shown on the thermometer • the energy of the reactants and products on the
vertical axis (y-axis)
Processes that take in heat energy from the surroundings
are endothermic processes (Figure 7.8b). Endothermic • the 'reaction pathway' (progress of reaction) on the
reactions absorb heat. The heat energy is taken in by horizontal axis (x-axis), with reactants on the left
the reacting substances (the system) and so leads to a and p roducts on the right
decrease in the temperature of the surroundings. When • the energy change indicated by an arrow (upward or
you try to remember these particular terms, concentrate downward) between the reactants and products.
on the first letters of the words involved:
• EXothermic means that heat EXits t he reaction. KEYWORDS
• ENdothermic means that heat ENters the reaction. reaction pathway diagram (energy level
diagra m): a diagram that shows the energy
levels of t he reactants and products in a chemical
reaction and shows whether the reaction is
exothermic or endothermic
152 >
152
-
Methane is the simplest hydrocarbon molecule and Figure 7. 10 shows a reaction pathway diagram for
the mai n component o f natural gas. When it burns, it this reaction.
reacts with oxygen. The products are carbon dioxide and
water vapour:
methane + oxygen -+ carbon dioxide + water
CH.(g) + 202(g) -+ CO/g) + 2Hp(g) 2NO(g)
Figure 7.9 shows a reaction pathway diagram for the ~

reaction of methane and oxygen. --i,, heat
ai taken
C
UJ
in
~ heat Pro!=jress of reaction

·~ given
Figure 7.10: A reaction pathway d iagram for the reaction
out
between nitrogen and oxygen.
COig) + 2Hp(g)
For a n endothermic reaction you can see
• that the energy of the reactants is lower than the
Progress of reaction energy of the products
Figure 7.9: Reaction pathway diagram for the exothermic • the black arrow points upwards to show that energy
reaction between methane and oxygen. is absorbed (taken in).
For an exothermic reaction you can see

Questions
• that the energy of the reactants is higher than the
4 Which type of reaction takes in heat from
energy of the products
its surroundings?
• the black arrow points downwards to show that 5 Draw a reaction pathway diagram for the following
r
energy is given out (released). reaction, which is exothermic.
The reaction between nitrogen and oxygen is Zn(s) + CuSO.(aq) -+ ZnSO.(aq) + Cu(s)
endothermic. It is one of the reactions that take place in 6 What key features of a reaction pathway diagram
the hot engine when fuel is burnt in car engines. would indicate an endothermic reaction?
The equation for .this reaction is:
,. nitrogen + oxygen -+ nitrogen monoxide

NiCg) + OiCg) -+ 2NO(g)
.....
153
Enthalpy and enthalpy Bond breaking and

change (l),,H) bond making
The thermal energy (heat) content of a system is called Most substances, apart from the noble gases (Group
the enthalpy (H) of the system. The transfer of thermal VIII), are involved in chemical bonding of some type
energy during a reaction is called the enthal py change (Chapter 3). During the reaction between methane
(Ml) (the symbol tJ. (delta) means 'change in') of and oxygen, as with all other reactions, bonds are first
the reaction. broken and then new bonds are made (Figure 7.12). In
• when heat is released from the system to the methane molecules, carbon atoms are covalently bonded
surroundings in an exothermic reaction, the to hydrogen atoms. In oxygen gas, the atoms are held
enthalpy of the system decreases and tJ.H is negative together in diatomic molecules. During the reaction,
aU these bonds must be broken. Chemical bonds are
• when heat is taken in (absorbed) by the system.from forces of attraction between atoms or ions. Breaking
the surroundings in an endothermic reaction, the these bonds requires energy; energy must be taken in
enthalpy of the system increases and tJ.H is positive. to pull the atoms apart. Breaking chemical bonds takes
These ideas fit with the direction of the black arrows in energy from the surroundings. Bond breaking is an
shown in the energy diagrams (Figures 7.9 and 7.10). The endothermic process.
energy given out or taken in is measured in kilojoules
(kJ); I kilojoule (1 kJ) = 1000 joules (1000 J). It is usually
calculated per mole of a specific reactant or product
(kJ/mol). The enthalpy change (Ml) for the burning of
methane is high (Figure 7.11). This high value explains bond making
why methane is such a useful fuel. gives out energy
CH/g) + 20/g) - COi(g) + 2Hp(g)
•••
tJ.H = -728 kJ/mol
-
KEYWORDS
enthalp y (H): the thermal (heat} content of Progress of reaction
a system -
_, \ Figure 7 .12: Burning of methane first involves the breaking
enthalpy change (flH): the heat cha~ge during of bonds in the reactants. This is followed by the formation
the course· of a reaction (also known as heat of of the new bonds of the products.
reaction}; can be either exothermic {a negative
value) or endothermk {a positive value)
New bonds are then formed: between carbon and
oxygen to make carbon dioxide (COJ, and between
hydrogen and oxygen to form water (Hp). Making these
chemical bonds gives ou t energy to the surroundings.
::.1 Reactants Bond making is an exothermic process. Some bonds
---e>
>, are stronger than others. They require more energy to
Cl>
-t.H = -728 kJ/mol break them, but they give out more energy when they are
C
w formed. Here the bonds in the products are stronger than
those in the reactants. So, overall, this reaction gives out
Products thermal energy (heat)- it is an exothermic reaction.
Progress of reaction
Figure 7 .11 : Detailed reaction pathway diagram for the

exothermic reaction between methane and oxygen, showing
the enthalpy change (M·{).
154
7 Chemical e nergetics
Experiments have been carried out to find out how much We can use bond energy values to find the enthalpy
energy is needed to break various covalent bonds in change, /J.H, for the burning of methane. The equation is:
compounds. The average value obtained for a particular
CH,(g) + 202(g) - C02(g) + 2Hp(g)
bond is known as the hond l·nrrg~· (Table 7. I). It is a
measure of the strength of the bond. The left-hand side involves bond breaking and needs
energy:
• 4 x 435 = 1740 kJ/mol
four C-H bonds
two O=O bonds 2 x 498 = 996 kJ/mol
H-H 436 in hydrogen
total energy needed = 2736 kJ/mol
average of four bonds
C-H 435 in methane The right-hand side involves bond making and gives out
energy:
0-H 464 in water
two C=O bonds 2 x 803 = 1606 kJ/mol
average of many
C-C 347 4 x 464 = 1856 kJ/mol
compournds four 0-H bonds
O=O 498 in oxygen total energy given out = 3462 kJ/mol
C=O 803 in carbon dioxide The enthalpy of reaction, /J.H, is the energy change on
N=N 945 in nitrogen going from reactants to products. So, for the burning of
methane: '
Table 7.1: Bond energies for some covalent bonds.
enthalpy of reaction = energy difference
The relationship between making and breaking bonds /J.H = (total energy needed) - (total energy given out)
and the energy involved is summarised in the memory
aid 'MEXOBENDO': Ma king bonds= EXOthermic and /J.H = 2736 - 3462
Breaking bonds = ENDOthermic (Figure 7.13).
., 11H = -726 kJ/mol
It is useful to remember that combustion reactions are
· Energy always exothermic; so, you have an indication that you
_!........
have calculated the value correctly.
1 The important equation to remember when completing

M aking bonds - EXOthermic
these calculations of the enthalpy of reaction (Ml) is:
/J.H = (energy needed to break bonds) - (energy given out
.. Energy ....... when bonds form)
Breaking bonds - ENDOthermic

KEYWORDS
bond energy: t he e nergy req uired to b reak a
Figure 7.13: Memory aid for calculating the enthalpy particular type of covale nt bond
change of reaction: MEXOBENDO.
REFLECTION
How he lpfu l do yol.l. find t he me mo ry aids such as ' EXothermic means that heat EXit s the re action;
ENdothe rmic means that heat ENters the reaction' a nd ' MEXOBENDO '? Do you find t hem he lpful? Do you
have a specifi c way t o remembe r how to draw a reaction pathway diag ram?
What strategies could you use to help you learn the ideas about chemical e nergetics covered in this chapter?
155
Activation energy KEYWORDS

Although the vast majority of reactions are exothermic,
activation energy (E): the minimum energy
only a few are totally spontaneous and begin without
required to start a chemical reaction - for a
help at normal temperatures (e.g. sodium or potassium
reacting with water). More usually, additional energy is reaction to take place the colliding particles must
possess at least this amount of energy
required to start the reaction. When fuels are burnt, for
example, energy is needed to ignite them (Figure 7.14).
This energy may come from a spark, a match or sunlight. For a chemical reaction to happen, some bonds in the
It is called the activation crll'r)!y (l:"J It is required reactants must first break before any new bonds can be
because initially some bonds must be broken before any formed. That is why all reactions require some activation
reaction can take place. Sufficient atoms or fragments energy. For the reaction of sodium or potassium
of molecules must be freed for the new bonds to begin with water, the activation energy is low, and there is
forming. Once started, the energy released as new bonds enough energy available from the surroundings at room
are formed causes the reaction to continue. temperature for the reaction to begin spontaneously. Other
exothermic reactions have a higher activation energy (e.g.
the burning of magnesium can be started with heat from
a Bunsen burner). Reactions can be thought of as the
result of collisions between atoms, molecules or-ions. (n
...... many of these collisions, the colliding particles do not
~ have enough energy to react and they just bounce apart. A
;;; chemical reaction will only happen if the total energy of
~
w the colliding particles is greater than the required activation
energy of the r~action (Chapter 8).
A consideration of activation energy(£.) and the
Progress of reaction enthalpy of reaction (lllf) means that we can develop
the idea of a reaction pathway diagram further than we
Figure 7 .14: A reaction pathway diagram for the burning saw in the earlier part of this chapter. Figure 7.15 shows
of methane, showing the need for activation energy to st art how the values_of tiH and £. can be represented on the
the reaction. reaction pathway diagrams for an exothermic and an
endothermic reaction. The data for a particular reaction
will determine which profile to use. .
EXOTHERMIC ENDOTHERMIC
::;i products
......
~
products
i i----....
iii reactants
Progress of reaction Progress of reaction
Fig ure 7 -15: Reaction pathway diagrams for exothermic and endothermic reactions showing the activation energies (EJ and
ent halp ies of react ion (t:.H) in each case.
156
Questions
7 Is bond breaking an endothermic or an 9 Explain why every chemical reaction must have an
exothermic process? activation energy, even though for some reactions it
8 Hydrogen peroxide decomposes to produce water may have a low value.
and oxygen. The equation is:
2Hp2(g)-+ 2Hp(g) + Oz<g)
Using the following values, calculate the heat change
for the reaction and say whether it is exothermic or
endothermic. Bond energies:
0--0 = 144kJ/mol 0-H = 464 kJ/mol
O=O =498 kJ/mol
ACTIVITY 71
The chemical roller coaster • at least f ive diagrams - st art with just the
reactant s, then show t he process of bond
Have you noticed that reaction pathway diagrams
breaking, the activation energy (peak),
(rea ction profiles) look a little bit like a roller-coaster
the process of bond making and end with
ride? They go steepl y up (taking in energy from t he
th e products
surroundings) and then t here is peak before they
come racing down (releasing energy back into t he You might want to see the reaction from the view of
surroundings as they do). one of t he atoms involved, giving them the stage to
explain what is happening.
Using the exotherm ic reaction fo r the reaction
between hydrogen and oxygen create a cartoon
strip that explains the main stages in the
l
reaction pathway diagram (Figure 7.16). H H H H
broken 0 0
Think of t he hydrogen and
bonds made
oxygen molecules b eing split
(endoth:~~~~ (exothermic)
into atoms before re-combining
to form water molecules.
H- H 0 - 0
.. H-H
Your cartoon strip should include: :;;!
......
>.
i-----"'·
reactants
• t he key scient ific words: a.
-;ij
activat ion energy, enthalpy ,£
C
change, exothermic, b ond w
breaking, bond making
products
Progress of reaction
Figure 7.16: Reaction pathway diagram for the reaction between hydrogen and oxygen.
157
CONTINUED
Peer assessment
With a partner, or in a small gr0up, discuss your cartoon strips. Do they clearly show the progress of the
reaction and the differeAt processes involved? Assess the ideas in each other's cartoon strips to determine
which individual diagrams best illustrate the different stages.
SUMMARY _ ' - ·_
Physical changes are changes in the physical properties, state or situation of a substance that do not involve
a change in the chemical substance(s) present; chemical changes are changes in which a new substance
is f9rmed. -
Some chemical and physical changes are exothermic, while others are endothermic.
An exothermic reaction transfers thermal energy to the surroundings leading to an increase in the I'
temperature of the surroundings.
An endothermic reaction takes in thermal energy from the surroundings leading to a decrease in the
temperature of the surroundings.
Reaction pathway diagrams can be used to show the energy changes for both exothermic and
endothermic reactions. II
) The transfer of thermal energy during a reaction is called the enthalpy change (t.H) for the reaction.
t.H for an exothermic reaction is negative (thermal energy is given out) and t.H for an endothermic reaction is
) positive (thermal energy is taken in).
> Bond breaking is endothermic and 9ond making is exothermic.

To calculate the dH for a reaction using bond energies, you use the equation:
> AH= (energy needed to break bonds)- (energy given out when bonds form).
)., Activation energy (E,) is defined as the minimum energy required for a reaction to take place.
Reaction pathway diagrams showing AH and E. can be drawn for both exothermic and
> endothermic reactions.
I
158
PROJECT
Mastermind All q uestions need to be based on materials

covered in this chapter, but you must not repeat
Writing and answering questions is useful to help
any questions in this coursebook. Plan your
embed deeper levels of understanding of a given
questions carefully, ideally there should be an
topic. You are therefore going to write a q uiz for
increasing level of difficulty. You will need to write
ot her members of your class. Can you write four
out the answers to accompany your questions on a
rounds of different types of question?
separate page.
Round 1: The warm-up. Write four simple
In a group of up to four people, one person needs
questions worth one point. These should be either
to be the quiz master and set their test for the
true/false, multiple choice or fill in the gap.
other group members. You then need to award
Round 2: What is that word? Look back through points. Once completed, you can swap the quiz
t his chapter and identify four key words t hat you master role and allow a different student to test
need to know the definition for. Look carefully at people on the questions they wrote.
each definition to see whether the answer should
If you have time, why not, within your team, look
be worth one or two points.
at the sets of questions you have written and
Round 3: Picture this. Provide a diagram with produce a master q uiz with t he questions you
missing labels and ask for the labels to be think test understanding of this chapter in the best
completed, one point should be given for way? You could even set this quiz for your teacher
each label. to complete!
Round 4: Summing up. Set one or two maths-

based questions, think carefully about how to
award the points.
159
1 Which of the following statements best describes an endothermic reaction?

A The surroundings of the reaction get warmer.
B The reaction absorbs thermal energy.
C The reaction releases heat energy.
D The temperature of the reaction mixture increases. (1)
2 80th physical and chemical changes involve changes of energy.

Complete the information in the table. (SJ
water vapour changing to water a physical

salt solution to salt and water increase b
magnesium plus hydrochloric acid C chemical
burning hydrogen to form water increase d
iron rusting increase e
3 The equation shows the reaction between sodium hydrogen carbonate

and hydrochloric acid.
NaH;C03 + HCI--+ NaCl+ CO2 + Hp
a What observation is made as the reaction proceeds? 11 I
At the beginning of the reactien the temperature of the acid is
21 °C, when the reaction is complete the temperature is l6°C.
b }low do you know when the reaction has finished? [1) COMMAND WORD
c Is the reaction exothetmie or endothermic? Explain your answer. (2) explain: set out
purposes or
A different carbonate is reacted with hydrochloric acid. The reaction reasons/m ake
pathway diagram for this second reaction is sliown in the figure.
the relationships
between things
evident/provide
why and/or how and
reactants support with re levant
~ ·-"'"-'P~-~..-.-...-~
>, evidence
Q,
iii
.i=
c
w
d
------ Progress of reaction
ls this reaction endothermic or exothermic? Explain your answer

using ideas about energy. (2)
[Total: 6)
.,....._
v
160 >
160
7 Che,nical energetics
CONTINUED
> 4 Nitrogen reacts wi th hydrogen to form ammonia.

N? + 3H) --+ 2NH,
The bond energies involved:
H H 436 kJ/mol
N N 945 kJ/mol
COMMAND WORD
N H WI kJ/mol
a Calculate the enthalpy change, Mf. for the reaction. [4] calculete· work out
This reaction can be reversed . from given facts,
2NH , --+ N1 + 3H 1
b What would be the enthalpy change. Ml, for this reactio11·1 [2]
c The figure shows the energy pathway diagrams for the reaction
between hydrogen and nitrogen. On the energy profile in part a. label
'overall enthalpy change MI' and ·activation energy E:. [2]
N2 + 3H 2 .,•···\
'
·-
\ 2NH 3
161
[ see I Needs I Almost

I Coofideet
I
I can to move
T~pic ... _more work there
on
--
identify physical and chemical changes and

7.1
understand the difTerences between them
explain how some chemical reactions and
physical changes are exothermic, while others 7.2
are endothermic
state that an exothermic reaction transfers thermal
energy to the surroundings leading to an increase in 7.2
the temperature of the surroundings
state that an endothermic reaction takes in thermal
energy from the surroundings leading to a decrease 7.2
in the temperature of the surroundings
interpret reaction pathway diagrams for exothermic
7.2
and endothermic reactions
understand that the enthalpy change (M{) for an
exot hermic reaction is negative as heat is given out
to the surroundings and that AH for an endothermic 7.2
reaction is positive as heat is taken in from
the surroundings
state that bond breaking is endothermic and bond
:,
making is exothermic, and be able to use data for 7.2
bond energies to calculate 11H for a reaction '
., define activat ion energy (£,) as the minimum energy

7.2
required for a reaction to take place
draw and label detailed reaction pathway diagrams
for reactions involving 11H and E. for both 7.2
exothermic and endothermic reactions II
162 >
162
I
\
.,
' \
I
,, ',
I I
..-,.,
I. ,: I
I
I
.. , - ·'~- .
' ,, ' .,, '. '°':'- ~,.
it/ , l1 ...>:~ .
I
16
•J J,,•-. ,;.r(~
~ ... , ,
)
'r . ,, ..
I
·: •.I .
. :....
.. ')
.
.
.
,
• describe the effects of various fa~tors on the rate of a chemical reaction

• learn how a catalyst increases the rate of a reaction and is unchanged at the end of that reaction
• learn how to investigate t he rates of various different reactions
163
Some chemical reactions are very fast indeed and Working in groups of two or three, discuss the
other reactions are rather slow (Figure 8.1). following questions:
1 What reactions can you think of that are
particularly slow?
2 What reactions can you think of that are
part icularly fast?
3 Think about reactions in the body, for instance,
and occurrences such as the browning of sliced
fruit open to the air. What is the most obvious
thing that speeds up, or slows down, reactions?
Having made notes, join with the whole class to

compare ideas.
Figure 8.1: Rusting is a slow chemical reaction.
"
STUDYING INCREDIBLY FAST REACTIONS ;
'-
Ahmed Zewail, Linus kinetics came to be known as femtochemistry.
Pauling Professor It allows scientist s to observe and describe the
of Chemistry at the changes taking place in reactions, and to analyse
California Institute of the short-lived transition states that occur as bonds
Technology (Caltech), in the reactants are broken and new bonds made.
was the first Egyptian Zewail's research paved the way for greater control
to win a Nobel Prize over the result of chemical reactions, for new
for science. He approaches to analysing chemical and biological
.. was awarded the reactions, as well as for faster electronics and
1999 Nobel Prize ultra-precise machinery. Professor Zewail died in
in Chemistry for his Figure 8.2: Professor Ahmed 2016, aged 70.
pioneering laser Zewail, in 1986, sometimes
techniques that known as 'the father of Discussion questions
allow scientists to femtochemistry'. 1 Photosynthesis is a very fast series of
observe atoms while biochemical reactions and has been described
chemical reactions are as the most significant reaction on Earth.
taking place. Why do you think it is described as such? Can
Zewail worked at Caltech for almost 40 years. you suggest other possible reactions that could
During this time, he developed a way of observing be described in this way?
chemical reactions despite the speed at which 2 Why do you think achieving the best possible
occur - over a t ime scale of a millionth of a billi0nth rate of reaction is important in industry?
of a second (a femtosecond = 10-12 seconds) - What factors should be thought of when
using ultrashort laser flashes. This field of reaction considering this?
,_,
164
8 Rates of reaction
8.1 Factors affecting the

rate of reaction
The possibility of a dust explosion is a major industrial
hazard where fine dusts are present. An accidental spark
from machinery or another source of ignition can be
disastrous. Any solid material that can burn in air will
do so with a violence and speed that increases with
a high degree of subdivision of the material. Under
carefully controlled conditions such explosions are often
used to create the spectacular special effects we see in
action movies.
Figure 8.4 a: Fireball produced by dropping powdered flour
Coal dust in the atmosphere of mines has always been
into a flame. b: Iron dust ignited in a Bunsen flame.
a great concern. Figure 8.3 shows a demonstration of
the extent of the fireball that can be produced by a coal
dust explosio n. Some reactions, such as neutralisation and preci pitation
reactions (Chapters 11 and 12), are very fast. Other
reactions, such as the enzymatic browning of fruits and
the fermentation of sugars to form ethanol (Chapter 19).
are slow.
What factors influence the speed of a reaction'!
Expe riments have been carried o ut to study a wide
range of reactions, and here we will consider the
following major influences on the speed of a reaction
(m1c1ion ratl' ):
• concen tratio n effects that bring more of the reacting
molecules closer together, including:
• surface area of any solid reactants
Figure 8.3: Demonstration of a coal dust explosiQn showing • concentration of the reactant solutions
the size of the fireball that can be generated.
.. • pressu re of reacting gases
This type of explosion can also occur with fine powders • temperature at which the reaction is carried out
in flour mills (Figure 8.4a), sugar factories and wood
• use of a ca1:1ly,t.
mills. Dust particles have a large surface area relative
to their volume in contact with the air. A si mple spark
can set off an explosive reaction; for example, powdered KEYWORDS
Lycopodium moss piled in a dish does not burn easily -
but if the powder is sprayed across a Bunsen flame, reaction rate: a measure of how fast a reaction
it produces a spectacular reaction. Even metal powders ta kes place
can produce quite spectacular effects (Figure 8.4b). catalyst : a substance that increases the rate of a
A massi ve explosion at the Kunsh an car parts factory in chemical reaction but itself remains unchanged at
China in 201 4 is thought to have been caused by flames the end of the reaction
igniting dust from metal polishing. The explosion killed
146 workers and injured 11 4 others.
165
Effect of reactant 2cm
concentration
Surface area of reacting solids
Where one or more of the reactants is a solid, the more
finely powdered (or finely pivided) the solid(s) are, the
large piece of marble
greater the rate of reaction. This is because reactions
surface area 24 cm 3
involving solids take place on the surface of the solids. A
solid has a much larger surface area when it is powdered
than when it is in larger pieces (Figure 8.5). Effectively,
we have increased the 'concentration' of the solid. For
reactions involving two solids, grinding the reactants more surface exposed
means that they can be better mixed. The mixed powders
are then in greater contact with each other and are more
likely to react.
If a solid is being reacted with a liquid (or a solution),
the greater the surface area and the more the solid
is exposed to the liquid. A good demonstration of
this is the reaction between limestone or marble
chips (two forms of calcium carbonate) and dilute
eight smaller pieces
hydrochloric acid: surface area 48cm 3
calcium carbonate+ hydrochloric acid - calcium
chloride + water + carbon dioxide Figure 8.5: Breaking a cube into smaller pieces increases
the su rface area.
CaCOis) + 2HCl(aq) - CaCl/aq) + Hp(!) + COig)
- -- -- -cotton wool
to stop acid
.. 'spray'
escaping
dilute
hydrochloric
acid
marble
chips
- - , , c __ _ _ balance
Figure 8.6: Apparatus for experiments A and B: the reaction of marble chips with dilute hydrochloric acid. The loss of carbon
d ioxide from the flask produces a loss in mass. This is detected by the balance.
166
8 Rates of reaction
- T he experiment can be done as shown in Figure 8.6. There are several important points about the graph.
Using this arrangement, we can compare two samples
1 The reaction is fastest at the start. This is shown by
of marble chips•.p_ne..s.ample (8 ) being in smaller pieces
the steepness of the curves over the first few minutes.
than the other sample (A). The experiment is carried out
twice. once with sample A and once with sample 8. In Curve 8 is steeper than curve A. This means that gas
(C01) is being produced faster with sample 8. The
each experiment the mass of sample used is the same.
sample with smaller chips, with a greater surface
The same volume and concentration of hydrochloric acid
area. reacts faster. Beyond this part of the graph,
is used in both experiments. The flask is placei:I on the
balance during the reaction. A loose cotton wool plug both reactions slow down as the reactants are used
up (Figure 8.8).
prevents liquid spraying out of the flask but allows the
carbon dioxide gas to escape into the air. This means 2 The total volume of gas released is the same in both
that the flask will lose mass during the reaction. The experiments. T he mass of CaCO, and the arrioimt of
balance is set to zero (tared) as the stopclock is started. acid are the same in both cases. Both curves flatten
Mass readings are taken at regular time intervals and the out at the same final volume. Sample 8 reaches the
loss in mass can be calculated. When the loss in mass is horizontal part of the curve (the plateau) first.
plotted against time. curves such as those in Figure 8.7 3 A numerical value for the rate of reaction at any
are obtained. given time can be found by drawing a tangent to
the curve at that time. The slope of that tangent
gives a value for'the rate of reaction a:t that point.
A tangent drawn at the start of the curve will give .
the initial rate of reaction.
These results show that the rate (speed) of a reaction
increases when the surface area of a solid reactant
is increased.
reaction
. ·v 0-e-
r~act,on ,s
slowing down
has finished
""-...
no more product
is formed
~ small change in
\ ~ amount of product
Figure 8.7: The graph shows the loss in mass against time t, in a large time
J
:,
1)
for experim ents A and B. The reaction is faster if the marble
e
a.
ch ips are broken into smaller pieces (curve B). 1
0 • sma ller change in
c:, amount of product
0 in a larger t ime
E
<t
~
large change in
amount of p roduct
in a small t ime
Ti me
Figure 8.8: A chemical reaction is fastest at the start. It slows

down as the reactants are used up.
167
Concentration of reacting solutions

Reactions that produce gases are also very useful in ~E 60
studying the effect of solution concentrati on on the ....u
~ so
.
reaction rate. The reaction between marble chips and a,
acid can be adapted for this (Figure 8.9). -5 40

~
;;: 30
0 • 1·
gas syringe ~ 20 t
.a •
g 10 0
0
0 10 20 30 40 SO 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140
Time/s
Figure 8.10: Graph showing the volume of carbon dioxide

collected in experiments C and D.
K-"'~ - -4--- small test-tube
marble chips Again, the graph shows some important points.
1 The curve for experiment C is steeper than for D.
dilute hydroch loric acid
T his shows clearly that reaction C, using more
concentrated acid, is faster than reaction D.
Figure 8.9: Recording the production of a gas using 2 The curve for experiment C starts off twice as
a gas syringe. steeply as for D. This means that the reaction in
C is twice as fast as in experiment D initially. So,
As in the previous experiment, we will compare two doubling the concentration of the acid doubles the
different situations, which we will call C and D. Apart rate of react ion.
from changing the concentration of the acid, everything 3 The total volume of carbon dioxide produced is the
else must stay the same, making the experiments a 'fair same in both experiments. Both reactions produce
test'. So, the volume of acid, the temperature and the the same volume of gas, although experiment C
mass of marble chips used must be the same in both produces it faster.
experiments. T he two reactants are kept separate while
the apparatus is set up. To time the start as accurately These results show that the rate of a reaction increases
as possible the stopper is released just long enough tQ when the concentration of a reactant in solution
loosen the thread and let the tube drop into the acid. is increased.
The stopper is then replaced and the flask gently shaken.
.. Note that here we have stated the concentration of the
The acid in experiment C is twice as concentrated acid in moVdm 3• These units are one of the two ways
( I moVdm 3) as in experiment D (0.5 moVdm 3). The carbon to give the concentration of a solution; the other units
dioxide gas produced is collected in a gas syringe. The are g/dm 3•
volume of gas produced is measured at frequent time
This apparatus could be used to study the rates of other
intervals. We can then plot a graph of volume of gas
reactions that produce a gas. The reaction between
collected against time, like that in Figure 8.10.
magnesium and excess dilute hydrochloric acid to give
hydrogen would be one example.
magnesium + hydrochloric acid -+
magnesium chloride + hydrogen
Mg(s) + 2HCl(aq) -+ MgCli(aq) + Hz(g)
168 >
168
8 Rates of reaction
Pressure of reacting gases

Another type of reaction that shows a concentration
effect on reaction rate is reactions involving gases. In a
reaction involving gases, focreasing the pressure has a
similar effect to increasing the concentration in a liquid.
Increasing the pressure pushes the gas particles closer
together so that they collide and react more readily,
so that the rate of reaction is increased. Changing the
pressure on a reaction that involves only solids or liquids
does not affect the reaction rate. One reaction that shows
this effect of increasing the pressure is the combustion of
fuel in a car engine. Such a reaction explosively generates
energy. The reaction is that of the hydrocarbons in petrol
(gasoline) burning with the oxygen in the air as they are
compressed by the movement of the piston (Figure 8.11).
The gases are ignited by the spark plug. The resulting
explosion drives the piston down and that movement is
transmitted to the wheels of the car. The exhaust gases
are ejected through the exhaust valve.
The effect of pressure on reactions taking place
between gases is discussed in more detail in Chapter 9
in connection with two important industrial processes.
The lhl11.· r 1>rncc~s is important for the production of
ammonia, while the Contact ,,roct'S<; is used for the
making of sulfuric acid.
KEY WORDS
Haber process: the industrial manufacture

Figure 8.11: Comput er graphic of the explosion within
of ammonia by t he reaction of nitrogen witr
the cylinder of a petrol engine as the piston compresses
hydrogen in the presence of an iron catalyst
the gases.
Contact process: the industrial manufacture of
sulfuric acid using the raw materials sulfur and air
REFLECTION ...,./le.:~~
The effects of solution concentration, solid surface area and gas pressure on reaction rate have been
grouped together here because t hey are all 'concentration' related. Does emphasising relationships
between ideas help you understand different concepts in chemistry? Could you explain the effect of
concentration on t he rate of reaction to someone else using these relationships? Why or why not?
169
Experiment Eis carried out several times with solutions

Effect of temperature pre-warmed to different temperatures. The solutions and
A reaction can be made to go faster or slower by conditions of the experiment must remain the same; only
changing the temperat1Jre of the reactants. Some food is the temperature is altered. A graph can then be plotted
stored in a refrigerator because the food will stay fresher of the time taken for the cross to disappear against
for longer. The rate of decay and oxidation by the air is temperature, like that shown in Figure 8.13.
slower at lower temperatures.
The graph shows two important points.
The previously described experiments could be altered to
1 The cross disappears more quickly at higher
study the effect of temperature on the rate of production
temperatures. The shorter the time needed for the
of gas. An alternative approach is to use the reaction
cross to disappear, the faster the reaction.
between sodium thiosulfate and hydrochloric acid.
In this case, the formation of a precipitate is used to 2 The curve is not a straight line.
measure the rate of reaction (experiment E). These results show that the rate of a reaction
increases when the temperature of the reaction mixture
sodium thiosulfate + hydrochloric acid -+
is increased.
sod ium chloride + sulfur + sulfur dioxide + water
To be more precise, the rate of the reaction is faster when
Na,SPlaq) + 2HCl(aq) -+
the time taken for the reaction to finish is shorter:
2NaCl(aq) + S(s) + SO2(g) + H p(l)
rate of reaction = I/time
The experiment is shown in F igure 8.12. A cross
is marked on a piece of paper. A flask containing A graph of I/time against temperature would show how
sodium thiosulfate solution is placed on top of the the rate increases with a rise in temperature.
paper. H ydrochloric acid is added quickly. The yellow
precipitate of sulfur produced is very fine and stays
suspended in the liquid. With time, as more and more
sulfur is formed , the liquid becomes cloudier and more
difficult to see through. The time taken for the cross
to 'disappear' is measured. The faster the reaction,
the shorter the length of time during which the cross
is visible.
.. add dilute acid

and start timing
view from
sodium
thiosulfate
solution
cross drawn-_,..._ _........_
on paper
Figure 8.12: Apparatus for the reaction between hydrochloric acid and sodium thiosulfate (experiment E).
170)
170
8 Rates of reaction
140 The black powder does not disappear during the

reaction. Indeed, if the solid is filtered a nd dried at the
120
~ end of the reaction, the same mass of powder rema ins
(Figure 8. 14b).
II)
......
)5 100
\
'\
Cl)
a.
a.
<O
II)
'5 80
B hydrogen peroxide solution
::?
rr-
0 manganese(IV) oxide
60
b
-2 \
Cl)
E 0
\. b black powder
''
i=
20
0
10 20 30 40 so
-
Q_w,. ,
Temperaturel°C Fi gure 8.14 a: Apparatus for the experiments on the
decomposition of hydrogen peroxide to water and oxygen.
Figure 8.13: Graph for experiment E on the reaction
b: The black powder does not disappear during the reaction.
between hydrochloric acid and sodium thiosulfate.
If the amount of MnO, powder added is doubled

Questions (experimen t G), the rate of reaction increases
(Figure 8.15). If the powder is more fi nely divided
1 What will we observe happening to the rate of a (powdered). the reaction also speeds up. Both these
chemical reaction in response to the following? results suggest that it is the surface of the manganese(IV)
a an increase in temperature oxide powder that is important here. By increasing the
b an increase in the surface area of a surface area, the rate of reaction is increased . We say that
solid reactant manganese(IV) oxide is a catalyst for this reaction.
.. c an increased concentration of a
reacting solution.
2 Why is perishable food kept in a refrigerator?
3 When is a chemical reaction at its fastest?
Presence of a catalyst
Hyd rogen peroxide is a colo urless liquid with the formula
H,O,. It is a very reactive oxidising agen t. Hydrogen
peroxide decomposes to form water and oxygen:
hydrogen peroxide -+ water + oxygen 10
0 ..,.......-+-t---+-----t~+--'-+..........t---+-----t~+--'-f
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220
We can follow the rate of this reaction by collecting the
Time / s
oxygen in a gas syringe (Figure 8.14a). The formation
of oxygen is very slow at room temperature. However.
Figure 8.15: Increasing the amount of catalyst increases the
the addition of 0.Sg of powdered manganese(IV) oxide
rate of reaction.
(MnO1) makes the reaction go much faster (experiment F).
171)
171
A catalyst is a substance that increases the rate of a

chemical reaction. The catalyst remains chemically
KEYWORD
unchanged at the end of the reaction. Catalysts have enzymes: protein molecules that act as
been found for a wide range of reactions. They are useful biological catalysts
because a small amount of catalyst can produce a large
change in the rate of a reaction. Also, since they are
unchanged at the end of a reaction, they can be re-used. The general features of enzymes:
Industrially, they are very important. Industrial chemists
use catalysts to make everything from polythene and
• enzymes are proteins
painkillers, to fertilisers and fabrics. If catalysts did not • they are very specific: each enzyme controls one
exist, many chemical processes would go very slowly and reaction or reaction type
some reactions would need much higher temperatures and • they are generally sensitive to temperature: enzymes
pressures to proceed at a reasonable rate. All these factors are inactivated (denatured) by heat (most stop
would make these processes more expensive, so that they working above 45 °C)
may be uneconomic. Transition elements (see Chapter I 3)
or their compounds make particularly good catalysts and • they are sensitive to pH: most enzymes work best in
are used in catalytic converters (Chapter 17). neutral conditions around pH 7.
Living cells also produce catalysts. They are protein Enzymes are being used increasingly as catalysts in
molecules called l'IIZ~ ml', (Figure 8.16). Many thousands industry. Biological washing powders use enzymes to
of reactions happen in every kind of organism. Enzymes remove biological stains such as sweat, blood and food.
speed up these reactions. Each enzyme works only for a The enzymes in these powders are those that break down
particular reaction, or a reaction type. We say that the proteins and fats. Because the enzymes are temperature-
enzyme is specific for that reaction. sensitive, these powders are used at a wash temperature
of around 30-40 °C.
Questions
4 What is a catalyst?
5 What is an enzyme?
6 Which solid catalyst will speed up the decomposition
of hydrogen peroxide?
Figure 8.16: A computer image of an enzyme and the

smaller molecule it is about to carry out a reaction with
(the substrate).
t72)
172
8 Rates of reaction
-- ACTIVITY 8.1
Planning and design of an experiment Hydrogen peroxide decomposes to form water

and oxygen.
Working in your practical group, plan and desig'n
an experiment to fin d which of t hree possible hydrogen peroxide - water + oxygen
solid catalysts, A , B or C, works best to catalyse
the formation of oxygen from a dilute solution 2H 20 2 - 2H 20 + 02
of hydrogen peroxide. You may find t hat t he This reaction is very slow at room temperature
information in Chapter 21 is useful for this but can be speeded up by using a catalyst. You
activity. Also, think about other practicals you have access to the three possible catalysts, a
have performed. dilute solution of hydrogen peroxide, and normal
Your plan should include a safety note, the laboratory apparatus. The comparison must be a
equipment and chemicals required, th e method to ' fair test' (only one variable should be changed,
be followed, and how t he result s will be analysed the others kept constant) and consider the relevant
{see experiments F and G). factors that influence t he rate of a reaction.
When you have planned your method, come back
together as a class and compare notes, d iscussing
the merits of t he different approaches taken.
Peer assessment
Swap your plan with another group. Have they ...
• included a safety not e?
• included t he equipment and chemicals required?
• included a clear method that is easy to follow?
• said how the results will be analysed?
Write d own one thing the group d id really well and one thing they could improve on next t ime they design
an experiment .
Evaluating different practical methods formation of a gas, it may be possible to follow the
formation or disappearance of a substance in a reacting
Practical methods of studying the effects of various
,. factors on reaction rate depend on reliably measuring
mixture by one of the following:
something that changes with time (Chapter 21). T he rate • a change in colour
can be measured in terms of either:
• a change in the electrical conductivity
,. • how quickly a reactant is used up
• a change in the pH.
• how q uickly a product is formed.
Reactions involving the formation of a gas can be
The examples we have used in this chapter have all used followed by either measuring the gas volume produced
the second of these approaches. It is possible to use with time (e.g. using a gas syringe) or by tracking the loss
the first approach but the methods are usually more of mass (e.g. using a balance). However, care is needed
complex, with samples being removed for testing at with the use of this second method. Following the '
set time intervals. For experiments not involving the change in mass is not suitable for investigating a reaction
where hydrogen is given off. Hydrogen has a very low
density and the change in the balance reading will be too
small to measure.
,.
173
When choosing how to measure the ·volume of a gas The catalytic converter therefore 'removes' polluting
forined in a reaction it is important to consider the ease oxides and completes the oxidation of unburnt
of reading the volume. The use of a gas syringe offers hydrocarbon fuel. It speeds up these reactions
advantages in terms of ease of setting up and of reliably . considerably by providing a 'honeycombed' surface on
obtaining measurements. Alternatives such as using an which the gases can react. The converter contains a thin
inverted measuring cylinder mean collecting the gas over coating of rhodium and platinum catalysts on the solid
water and are less easy to set up. honeycomb surface. These catalysts have many tiny pores
that provide a large surface area for the reactions.
When evaluating an experiment, you need to
think about:
• the accuracy of the measuring apparatus used, as Collision frequency
the accuracy of the whole experiment depends on
The importance of surface area in reactions involving
the least accurate measuring instrument
solids helps us understand how reactions take place.
• the number of times an experiment can be repeated, In these cases, reactions can only occur when particles
to make sure results obtained are consistent collide with the surface of a solid. If a solid is broken
into smaller pieces, there is more surface exposed. This
• how easy it is to control the variables, as difficulties
means there are more places where collisions can take
doing this would invalidate the experiment as
place and so there is more chance of a reaction taking
a 'fair test'; for example, trying to maintain the
place. Iron reacts more readily with oxygen if it is
temperature of a water-bath with a Bunsen burner is
powdered (Figures 8.4b and 8.1·8).
difficult; an electric water-bath should be used.
8.2 Collision theory of

reaction rat e
One way to reduce the polluting effects of car exhaust
fumes is to use a catalytic converter (Figure 8.17). Car
exhaust fumes contain pollutant gases such as carbon In a lump of iron, If the iron is in small bits,
monoxide, oxides of nitrogen and unburnt hydrocarbons. oxygen can't get the oxygen molecules can
The catalytic converter converts these gases to less , to most of the atoms. collide with many more
harmful products such as carbon dioxide, nitrogen iron at oms. The iron now
(l) oxygen molecule
and water. has a much bigger
Q iron atom surface area.
Figure 8.18: The reaction between iron and oxygen

is speeded up if the iron is in small pieces.
We can see how t hese ideas (collision them·~) apply in

other situations. When solutions are more concentrated,
the speed of a reaction is faster. A more concentrated
solution means that there are more reactant particles in a
given volume (a unit volume). Collisions will occur more
KEYWORDS
collision theory: a theory that stat es that a
chemical reaction takes place when particles of
Figure 8.17: A catalytic converter can be fitted to a car the reactants collide with sufficient energy to
exhaust system. initiate th e reaction
174
8 Rates of reaction
often. The more often they collide, the more chances low pressure high pressure
the particles have to react. This means that the rate of
a chemical reaction will increase if the concentration
of the reactants is increased. A more concentrated
acid reacts more vigorously with a piece of magnesium
; ribbon than a dilute acid (Figure 8.19). The increased
acid concentration means that the frequency of collision
between the H• ions and the metal creates a greater
chance of the reaction occurring.
Collisions between Collisions between

d ifferent molecu les d ifferent molecules
hydrogen do not happen very are much m ore
ions often. frequent.
Figure 8.20: Increasing the pressure of gases effectively

Ir
increases the concentration of the gas.
When the temperature is raised. a reaction takes place

faster. At higher temperatu res, the particles have more .
kinetic energy and are moving faster. Again, this means
that collisions will occur more often, giving more chance
dilute concentrated
of reaction. Also, the particles have more energy at the
hydrochloric acid hydrochloric acid
higher temperature. This increases the chances that a
Figure 8.19: The more concentrated the acid solution, the collision will result in bonds in the reactants breaking
faster the reaction with the magnesium. and new bonds forming to make the products. If we look
at the reaction between zinc and hydroch loric acid, we
can see how the rate of reaction is affected by changes in
For reactions involving gases, increasing the pressure has
collision frequency (Figure 8.21).
the same effect as increasing the concentration, so the
rate of a reaction between gases increases with pressure
(Figure 8.20).
a Surface area of zinc b Concentration of acid C Temperature
Q I (9
0 Q
► ~
0
0 0
(9
°' ~ &)
0
i :0oi
0
Q A o o
,--~
()
()
QO 0
Q
Q
()
0
~ to
more zi nc expos·ed more chance of more collisions and particles
to collisions particles colliding collide with more energy
Figure 8.21: Collision theory can be used to explain how various factors affect the rate of reaction. Here we use the reaction
between zinc and hydrochloric acid as an example.
r'.
\_ 175)
175
When solutions are more concentrated, the speed of a Action of a catalyst

reaction is faster. A more concentrated solution means
that there are more reactant particles in a given volume. A catalyst increases the rate of reaction by reducing the
Collisions will occur more often. The more often they amount of energy that is needed to break the bonds.
collide, the more chance the particles have of reacting. This reduces the activation energy of the reaction and
T his means that the rate of a chemical reaction will makes sure that more collisions are likely to produce
increase if the concentration of the reactants is increased products. The rate of the reaction is therefore increased.
(Figure 8.21b). When the temperature is raised, a The catalyst remains chemically unchanged at the end
reaction takes place faster. At higher temperatures, of the reaction. Because it is unchanged, a catalyst can
the particles are moving faster. Again, this means that be re-used.
collisions will occur more often, giving more chance We can think of an 'analogy' for this. Suppose we are
of reaction. Also, the particles have more energy at hiking in the mountains (Figure 8.22). We start on one
the higher temperature. This increases the chances side of a mountain and want to get to the other side.
that a collision will result in bonds in the reactants We could go right over the summit of the mountain.
breaking and new bonds forming to make the products This would require us to be very energetic. What we
(Figure 8.21c). might prefer to do would be to find an alternative route
along a pass through the mountains. This would be less
energetic. In our analogy, the starting point corresponds
Activation energy to the reactants and the finishing point to the products.
Not every collision between particles in a reaction The route over the top of the mountain would be the
mixture produces a reaction. We have seen in Chapter uncatalysed path. The easier route through the pass
7 that a certain amount of energy is needed to begin to would be a catalysed path.
break bonds in the reactant molecules. This minimum Different chemical reactions need different catalysts. One
amount of energy is known as the activation energy (E.) broad group of catalysts works by adsorbing molecules
of the reaction. onto a solid surface. This process of adsorption brings
• Each reaction has its own different value of the molecules of reactants closer together. The process
activation energy. of adsorption is also thought to weaken the bonds in
the reactant molecules. This makes them more likely
• When particles collide, they must have a combined to react. Some of the most important examples of
energy greater than this activation energy, otherwise industrial catalysts work in this way, for example iron in
they will not react. the Haber process and vanadium(V) oxide in the Contact
• Chemical reactions occur when the reactant process (Chapter 9). The efficiency of the solid catalysts
particles collide with each other. in the Haber and Contact processes is improved by
increasing the surface area available to interact with the
~ There are two factors that expla_in why an increase in gaseous reactants.
temperature increases the ~ate of a reaction.
1 The increased temperature means that the molecules KEYWORD
are moving faster and therefore they collide more
often. The frequency of collision is increased and so adsorption: the attachment of molecules to a
the rate of reaction is faster. solid surface
2 At the higher temperature, the particles have higher
kinetic energy. This means.that when they collide more
particles will have the minimum amount of energy
needed to react. At the h1gher temperature more of
the collision will produce a reaction; there will be
more successful collisions. The number of effective
collisions increases with increasing temperature.
This second factor is the more important of the two in
explaining the level of increased rate produced by raising
the temperature of a reaction.
176
8 Rates of reaction
a
without catalyst
E.,
--, activation
~
energy
---
>,.
_g.. reactants
"'
..c 6H,
t:
w enthalpy of
products reaction
Reaction pathway
~
Q)
C:
w
Reaction path
Figure 8.22 a: The reaction pathway diagram for an exothermic reaction showing how a catalyst lowers the activation energy
of the reaction. b: The barrier between reactant{s} and product{s} may be so high that it defeats all but the most energetic;
the catalysed route is an easy pass through the mountains.
Questions
7 What changes in physical conditions are enzymes
particularly sensitive to?
8 Does the presence of a catalyst increase or decrease
the activation energy for a reaction'?
9 In terms of the collision theory, explain why the rate
of a react ion increases with:
a an increase in temperature
b an increase in the surface area of a solid reactant
c an increased concentration of a reacting solution.
177)
177
SUMMARY
Factors such as reactant concentration, gas pressure, the surface area of solids, temperature and the presence
of a catalyst will affect the rate of a reaction.
A catalyst increases the rate of a reaction and is unchanged at the end of that reaction.
The rates of various different reactions can be investigated by suitable practical methods and the results and
graphs plotted after using show particular patterns and give information about rate of reaction.
Different practical methods of investigating rates of reaction, including reactions involving changes in mass
and the formation of gases, can be evaluated by assessing the accuracy of the measuring apparatus, the
> number of times an experiment can be repeated and the ease with which the variables can be controlled to
make the experiments a 'fair test'.
Collision theory states that a chemical reaction takes place when particles of the reactants collide with
> sufficient energy to initiate the reaction increasing the concentration of the reactants increases the number of
particles per unit volume and therefore the collision frequency, producing an increased rate of reaction.
An increase in temperature produces an increase in reaction rate resulting from an increased collision
> frequency and an increase in the kinetic energy of the particles present, which means that more collisions
exceed the required activation energy (£.).
> A catalyst increases reaction rate by lowering the activation energy of a reaction.
PROJECT
Modelling concentration and pressure Think about t he following:

This chapter looks at the factors that affect the rates • how to use one type of sphere to represent
of reaction (Figur.e 8.23). Working iA small grouJE>S, different concentrations
create a visual tool or model that would help to
teach someone else how concentrat ion and pressure • how you would produce movement of
can affect the rate of reaction. You cowld use a , the spheres
cardboard box or some type of carton (possibly • how you would represent different reactant
* transparent), and some polystyrene spheres (or molecules and the process of reacting
other similar materials) to help yow make this.
• how you could use a piece of card to show the
effect of changing pressure on gas molecules.
Present your visual tool/model to the class and
explain your ideas.
Figure 8. 23: Marbles can be used to model how the

concentration of the particles in a reacting mixture will
affect the rate of reaction.
178
8 Rates of reaction
1 Various factors affect the rate of a chemical reaction. One of these is the
surface area of a solid that is available to react when in contact with a
liquid. A chemical reactil'.>n between pieces of a solid and an acid is very fast.
Which of the changes in the table would make the reaction slower?
larger
less concentrated smaller
more concentrated smaller (1 I
2 The rate of the reaction between lumps of calcium carbonate and dilute
hydrochloric acid was investigated by collecting the gas produced as
shown in the figure.
delivery
tube
I
F'="
l~
1-- - clamp
- -- measuring
cylinder
basin
water
, COMMAND WORDS
lumps of calcium calculate: work out
carbonate from given facts,
The results obtained are given in the table.
suggest : apply
knowledge and
understanding
to situations
a Why are the volumes at 120 and I 50 seconds the same? [1I where there are
a range of valid
b The rate for the first 30 seconds is 40/30 = 1.33 cm3/s. Calculate the responses in order
rate for the second 30 seconds. [2) to make proposals
c Suggest an alternative piece of apparatus that could be used to / put forward
measure the volume of gas. [1) considerations
d Give two changes that could be made to the conditions that would
glve: produce an
speed up the reaction. [21
answer from a g iven
[Total: 6) source or recall/
memory
179
CONTINUED
3 The reaction between sodium thiosulfate and hydrochloric acid

produces a finely divided precipitate of sulfui:. T his precipitate remains
in suspension and eventually masks a cross written on a piece of paper
placed below the reaction (as shown in the figure).
Na2Sp/aq) + 2HCl(aq) - 2Na0(aq) + S(s) + SOiCg) + Hp(I)
The rate of this reaction was investigated using the following experiment.
A beaker containing 50cm3 of sodium thiosulfate solution was placed on
a black cross. 5.0cm 3 of dilute hydrochloric acid was added and the clock
was started. Initially the cross was clearly visible. When the solution
became cloudy and the cross could no longer be seen, the clock was
stopped and the time recorded.
~ look down at
! cross on paper
!
solution turns i sodium thiosulfate
from colourless
to cloudy and hydrochloric acid
' '
paper ! ! cross on paper
0 - - view looking down
The experiment was repeated several times at different temperatures and

the results are given in the table.
r ·1. . , - " , . ~~
~ ;_ ~ - -~·,_._ ' - ~~-'--•--'"'!.:..:..
20 47 0.021
30 23 0,043
40 12 0.083
so 6 0.167 COMMAND WORD
a Explain why the value in the third column of the table is proportional explain: set out
to the reaction rate. (1 ] purposes or
b Use the information in the table to describe how the reaction rate reasons/make
varies with temperature. (2) the relationships
c Use 1tka, about reac ting part1cks 10 explain \I h) reaction rate between things
change, ,,ith tcmperatutc. (3) evident/provide
why and/ or how and
[Total: 6) support with relevant
evidence
,...
----
180 )
180
a Rates of reaction
CONTINUED
) 4 Zinc reach with dilute sulfuric acid to form hydrogen.

Zn+ H:SO, ..... ZnSO, + ti :
If lumps of ;,inc an: used the n:action is quite slow. but small pieces of
zinc react more rapidly.
a Explain why smaller pieces of zinc react more rapidly. Use ideas
about particles and collisions. (2)
b If the acid is heated. the reaction takes place more rapi<lly. Explain .
why the re<1ction speeds up when the acid is heate<l. Use i<lcas about
collisions an<l energy. (2)
c When small pieces of copper metal arc a<ldcd, the fizzing becomes
much faster. Copper docs not react with dilute sulfuric acid and is
still there when clfcrveseence stops. Explain 1l1~c observations:· (2)
d The rate of some reactions that produce gases can be followed by
recording loss of mass on a chemical'balancc. Explain why this
method is not suitable for the reaction between zinc and dilute .
suifuric ac.:id: (2)
,J<:;ff<>tal: 8)
rf
181
After studying this chapter, think about how confident you arc with the different topics. This will help you see any
- - - - - - - - - - - --------- --- --~ - - ~- -- - -
Confident
See Needs Almost
I can to move
, Topic .. .
1
1
more work there
on
describe the effects of factors such as reactant
concentration, gas pressure, the surface area of
8.1
solids, tem perature and the presence of a catalyst on
the rate of a reaction
understand that a catalyst (e.g. an enzyme) increases
the rate of a reaction but remai ns unchanged at the 8.1
end of the reaction
investigate the rates of various different reactions
and interpret the results and graphs obtained from 8.1
such methods
evaluate different practical methods of investigating
rates of reaction including reactions involving 81
changes in mass and formation of gases
describe collision theory 8.2
explain the effects of concentration on reaction
rates in terms of particles per unit volume and 8.2
collision frequency
explain how increased temperature produces an
increase in reaction rate in terms of collision 8.2 .,
I
frequency, kinetic energy and activation energy
explain that a catalyst increases the reaction rate by
8.2
lowering the activation energy of a reaction
-
(j
182
understand that some, chemical reactions are reversible
• describe how changing conditions can alter the direction of a reversible reaction
• describe the use of reversible reactions as a chemical test for the presence of water
• state that ammoriium salts and nitrates can be used as fertil isers
• describe the use of NPK ferti lisers for improved plant growth
183
GETTING STARTED
A major topic in this chapter centres on an industrial 3 What do crops need to grow?
process that revolutionised agricultural food
production worldwide. Work with a partner to draw a 4 What is a fert iliser?
mind map that includes the following questions: 5 What do the words 'artificial' and 'organic'
1 What is a crop? mean, and how could these words be linked
to fertiliser?
2 What crops are grown in your local area?
REVOLUTI ON ISING FOOD PRODUCTION
Ammonia is one of the to an industrial scale by the chemical engineer Karl

major products of Bosch. The Haber-Bosch process became of major
industrial chemistry. importance in the production of fertilisers and is
A key ingredient of perhaps the most recognised chemical process in
synthetic fertilisers, the world. In 1918, Haber received the Nobel Prize
approximately in Chemistry for his part in the invention of t he
175 million tonnes of ammonia production process.
ammonia are produced
Figure 9 .1: Fritz Haber (1868- Although the Haber process represer;its a huge
annually around the
1934) at work iri his laboratory technological advancement, it has always been an
world. About 50% of
in Karlsruhe, Germany. energy-demanding one. The high carbon footprint
the world's food
production is dependent on ammonia-based of the process is added to by the fact that most
fertilisers. The figure for worldwide ammonia of the hydrogen used is obtained from the 'steam
production is predicted to rise to well over reforming' of natural gas and generates carbon
250 million torines by the year 2050. Ammonia dioxide. It is estimated that every ammonia molecule
is produced globally by the Haber process, in produced releases one molecule of carbon d ioxide.
which nitroger;i is reac;:ted directly with hydrogen Consequently, current research and development is
in a reversible reaction that needs carefully focused on making 'green ammonia' using hydrogen
controlled conditions. from water electrolysis and electricity generated by
solar or wind power. Trial plants aimed at sustainable
Nz{g) + 3Hz(g) ~ 2NH/g)
use of the Haber process are being developed in
Fritz Haber (Figure 9.1) was born in Breslau several countr.ies, with some exploring the use of
(now Wrodaw, Poland) in 1868. Many important more efficient catalysts such as ruthenium.
developments in chemistry were taking place in
Germany at that time and Haber became heavily Discussion questions
involved in t his progress. During the 1890s, there 1 Haber originally used osmium as the catalyst
were predictions that the world's population in his experiments. However, when adapting
would soon overtake food production unless the process for industrial production this was
crop yields could be increased LJsing nitrogen replaced by iron. Why was this advantageous?
ferti lisers. Atmospheric nitrogeri is unavailable to
most plants unless it is first converted into water- 2 What issues are involved in using rare metals
soluble compounds suc;:h as ammonia or nitrates. such as osmium or ruthen ium as catalysts for
Haber used high pressure and temperature industrial scale processes? \>
together with an osmium catalyst to achieve the
reaction (Figure 9.8). The process was developed
184
9 Reversible reactions and equilibrium
9 .1 Reversible reactions hydrated copper(! I) suIfate
The physical and biological world is the product of a

I
complex set of chemical interactions and reactions.
Some reactions can even be reversed if we change
the conditions.
......
heat
Our life depends on the reversible attachment of oxygen

to a protein called haemoglobin found in our red blood
cells. Oxygen is picked up as these cells pass through the
blood vessels of the lungs. It is then carried to tissues
in other parts of the body. As the conditions change
in other regions of our body (e.g. the muscles and
brain), the oxygen is detached and used by the cells of
these organs.
Simpler reactions that can-be reversed by changing the
conditions include the re-formation of hydrated salts
by adding back the water to the dehydrated powder. Figure 9.2: Apparatus for condensing the water vapour
However, there are l'cvcr.siblc rrac tions that are more driven off from blue crystals of hydrated copper(II) sulfate
complex. In these reactions the products can interact by heating.
to reverse the reaction. No sooner are the products
formed than some molecules of tbe,product react to give The white :inh}drous copper(II) sulfate and the water
back the original reactants. One industrially important are cooled down. Then the dehydration reaction can be
example of this is the reaction between nitrogen and reversed by slowly adding the water back to the white
hydrogen to produce ammonia: anhydrous powder (Figure 9.3). This reaction is strongly
. Ni(g) + 3H/g) .= 2NH/g) exothermic and the colour of the powder returns to blue.
The double arrow symbol (.=) indicates that the reaction

is reversible; in the forward reaction, nitrogen and
hydrogen combine to form ammonia. In the reverse
reaction, ammonia decomposes back into nitrogen
and hydrogen.
I
The German chemist, Fritz Haber (see the Science in
Context feature), was the first to show how this reaction
could be controlled to make useful amounts of ammonia
by the Haber process (Topic 9.2).
Reversible hydration of salts

Figure 9.3: Adding water back to dehydrated
Thermal decomposition of salts such as hydrated copper(II) sulfate.
copper(II) sulfate (CuSO4·5Hp) results in the
dehydration of the salt:
CuS 0 ·5Hp(s) - heat
4
-+ CuSOis)+ 5H O(g) 2 KEYWORDS
light blue crystals ~ white powder reversible reaction: a chemical reaction that can
In this case, the reaction results in a colour change from go either forwards or backwards, depending on
blue to white. The physical structure of the crystals is the conditions
also destroyed. The water driven off can be condensed anhydrous: an adjective to describe a substance
separately (Figure 9.2). without water combine d with it
185
Other h~drakd <;a lts can be dehydrated in a similar

KEYWORDS
way to copper(II) sulfate. Examples of such salts are
cobalt(II) chloride and iron(II) sulfate. These salts hydrated salts: salts whose crystals contain
crystallise wi th a defined amount of water chemically combined water (water of crystallisation) as part
combined in their crystals (Chapter 12). Hydrated of the structure
cobalt(II) chloride is a pink crystalline salt. When heated
it is dehydrated to a form that is blue. The reaction
is endothermic.
CoC1 2·6Hp ~ CoCl 2 + 6Hp Questions
pink blue 1 a What colour change do we see when water is
added to anhydrous copper(Il) sulfate powder?
Adding water to blue anhydrous cobalt(Il) chloride
turns the solid pink. The dehydration of cobalt(Il) b What can the colour change seen in part a be
chloride can be easily reversed. The two reactions can be used as a test for?
combined into one equation using the.= sign. c Write a balanced symbol equation for the
....
...- CoC1 2 +6Hp
reaction in part a.
2 Which test would you carry out to show that a
blue colourless liquid was pure water?
These dehydration reactions are useful as they involve a 3 How do we know that the reaction to form pink
colour change and can be used as a test for the presence hydrated cobalt(II) chloride from blue anhydrous
of water (Chapter 17). cobalt(Il) chloride is exothermic?
,-
Chemical test for the presence of water Ch em ica I equilibria
Not all neutral colourless liquids are water. The presence
of water can be detected using anhydrous copper(II) When we change between blue copper(Il) sulfate crystals
sulfate or cobalt(ll) chloride. Water will turn anhydrous and the white an hydrous powder the two reactions
copper(II) sulfate (rom white to,bfue ai:id anhydrous are separate. We don't heat and add water at the
cobalt(Il) chloride from blue to pink. Cobalt chloride same time. The two reactions, although reversible, are
paper contains blue anhydrous cobalt chloride. It turns clearly separate.
pink if water is present (Figure 9.4). A simple reversible reaction where we can see both
reactions taking place at the same time is the sublimation
of ammonium chloride. The thermal decomposition of
ammonium chloride is an example of a reversible change
taking place in different parts of the same test-tube
(Figure 9.5). When warmed in a test-tube. the white solid
decomposes to ammonia and hydrogen chloride:
NH,Cl(s) - NH,(g) + HCl(g)
However, on the cooler surface of the upper part of the
Figure 9.4: The test for the p resence of water using cob alt
tube, the white solid is re-formed:
chloride paper. The paper turns from·bl ue to p ink. NH/g) + HCl(g)- NHFl(s)
However, the cobalt chloride test will only tell you that
water is present, not that it is pure water. To decide
whether a liquid is pure water, you would need to test to
show that its boiling point is exactly 100°C (Chapter 1).
186
It is not always necessary to study chemical equilibria

in closed containers. If no gas is produced as a result
of the reaction (i.e. it takes place entirely in solution),
equilibrium may be established in an open container such
as a flask.
At equilibrium, the reactants are continuously
combining to make a product. At the same time and,
importantly, at the same rate. the product is continuously
breaking apart and turning back into its reactants.
This is a d~n~mi c equWbrium. At equilibrium, the rate
of the forward reaction equals the rate of the reverse
(backward} reaction. For reactions where the reaction
mixture is all m the same phase the equilibrium can be
approached from either direction. One example of such a
reaction is heating a mixture of hydrogen and iodine in a
sealed tube:
H:(g) + li(g} ~ 2Hl(g)
At a particular temperature. we get the same fixed
concentration of hydrogen, iodine and hydrogen iodide
whether we start from hydrogen iodide or the hydrogen/
iodine mixture.
KEYWORDS
Figure 9.5: The reversible reaction involving
ammonium chloride. closed syc;tem: a system -,yhere none of the
reactants or products can escape the reaction
The ideas about reversible reactions can be extended mixture or the container where the reaction is
to reactions taking place in a closed system. A closed taking place
system is one in which no reactants or products can dynamic (chemical) equilibrium: two chemical
escape from the reaction mixture. Figure 9.6 shows the reactions, one the reverse of the other, taking
difference between a closed system and an open'system place at the same time, where the concentrations
when calcium carbonate is heated at a high temperature. of the reactants and products remain constant
In the closed system. the carbon dioxide gas produced because the rate at which the forward reaction
cannot escape. Eventually, an equilibrium is set up in occurs is the same as that of the reverse reaction
the container.
a b
• •• •
CaO(s)
Figure 9.6: Comparison of a closed and open system for the decomposition of ca lcium carbonate.
187
The po-,ition of equilibrium tells us how far a reaction Analogies that have been used to illustrate this idea of
has gone in favour of reactants or products. If the a dynamic equilibrium are either the person running up
concentration of products is greater, then we say the a down escalator or a fish swimming upstream against
position of equilibrium is to the right - it favours the the water current (Figure 9.7a and b). If the speed of
products. If the concentration of reactants is greater the person, or the fish, in their direction is equal to the
than the products, then the equilibrium position favours flow in the opposite direction, then they will appear to
the reactants - the position of equilibrium is to the lefL be stationary.
An equilibrium reaction has four particular features
under constant conditions: KEY WORDS
• it is dynamic: reactants are continuously being position of equilibrium: the mixture of reactants
changed to products and products are continuously and products at which a reversible reaction is
being changed back to reactants in equilibrium under a particular set of physical
conditions of temperature and pressure
• the forward and reverse (backward) reactions occur
at the same rate
• the concentrations of reactants and products (the
position of equilibrium) remain constant
• it requires a closed system.
a b
person running
up escalator
escalator
moving down
Figure 9.7: Dynamic equilibrium: a: the person and b: the fish appear to be stationary.
~- - - -------- --- - ----- --- -------------- - ---
REFLECTION
The idea of an equilibrium set up by two competing reacti ons is difficult to imagine. Various different
analogies have been suggested to help understand what is taking p lace in the reaction mixture (Figure 9.7).
An analogy is a comparison of two things to show their similarities. Consider the following questions: .
• How do you picture what is happening as the forward and reverse reactions compete but keep the
concentrations of all the chemicals present constant?
• Do you find analogies helpful?
• Could you use an analogy to teach a difficult idea to someone else?
188
.,.
For an endothermic reaction the opposite is true.

Chemical equilibria and lncreasing the temperature moves the reaction to the
right, favouring the products. Raising the temperature
reaction conditions in this case favours the exothermic change where heat is
The position of equilibrium set up for a particular given out.
reaction depends on the conditions used. Changing
the temperature alters the equilibrium position. For
some reactions involving gases, changing the pressure
Effect of pressure on the posit ion of
can also alter the equilibrium position. The addition an equilibrium
or removal of one of the reactants or products alters Changes of p ressure can only affect reactions that
their concentration and this can change the position involve a gas in the equation. Increasing the pressure
of equilibrium. moves the equilibrium to the side which occupies the
For all these possible effects can we predict what the smaller volume (the side with less gas).
change will be? There is one rule that helps us predict the 2SOiCg) + Ol(g) 2S0l(g)
results of a change in conditions (it is sometimes called
Le Chatelier's principle, named after the French chemist
3 moles of gas 2 moles of gas
Henry-Louis Le Chatelier). The rule is based on practical = 3 volumes = 2 volumes
observation of many reversible reaction and states that:
There are fewer gas molecules on the right of the
• when a change is made to the conditions of a system equation. Therefore, increasing the pressure would
in dynamic equilibrium, the system moves so as to favour the production of sulfur trioxide. This happens
oppose that change. because increased pressure compresses the gas, pushing
the gas molecules into a smaller space (increasing the
Let us consider some reversible reactions and the effect
concentration). The system responds to counteract that
of changing conditions when they are at equilibrium.
.... and shifts to the side that involves fewer gas molecules.
A decrease in pressure would produce the opposite shift
Effect of t emperat ure on the position of in equilibrium position, favouring the decomposition of
an equilibrium sulfur trioxide.
The Contact process is used for the manufacture of A gas phase reaction such as that between hydrogen
sulfuric acid. The main reaction that converts sulfur and iodine vapour would not be affected by a change in
dioxide (S02) to sulfur trioxide (S03) in the Contact pressure as there are equal volumes of gas on both sides
1
process is reversible: of the equation.
., 2S02(g) + 0 2(g) .= 2S0iCg) t.H = - 197 kJ/mol ~ (g) + ll(g) 2HI(g)
The reaction to produce sulfur trioxide is exothermic. So, 2 moles of gas 2 moles of gas
if this reaction were at equilibrium and the temperature
raised, the system would try to absorb the heat. The
Effect of concentrat ion on the position
endothermic reaction would be favoured and the
equilibrium position would move to the left. Less sulfur of an equilibrium
trioxide would be produced. For an exothermic reaction, An organic carboxylic acid reacts with an alcohol to
when temperature increases the equilibrium shifts in produce an ester (Chapter 19).
favour of the reverse reaction. Raising the temperature
favours the endothermic change where heat is taken in.
CHlCOOH + C2HPH ,= CHlCOOClH S + HP
ethanoic acid ethanol .= ethyl ethanoate water
KEYWORDS The reaction is catalysed by the presence of H ' ions
provided by the addition of a few drops of> concentrated
Contact process: the industrial manufacture of sulfuric acid. Concentrated sulfuric acid is also a
sulfuric acid using the raw materials sulfur and air dehydrating agent and removes some of the water from
the reaction mixture. The removal of water shifts the
equilibrium position to the right as the reaction tries to
restore the concentration of water.
189
Predicting how the position of 9 .2 Haber process and

equilibrium is affected by
changing conditions Contact process
The addition or removal of a reactant or product will
affect the position of equilibrium in any reversible
reaction. T he overall effects of these different changes in
Haber process
the conditions on the equilibrium set up by a reversible The Haber process for the synthesis of ammonia was one
reaction are summarised in Table 9. l. We will see the of the most significant new ideas of the 20th century.
effect of these factors as we consider the industrial Ammonia was first manufactured using the Haber
production of ammonia in the Haber process. Remember process on an industrial scale in 1913 following Fritz
that, when the equilibrium conditions are changed, the Haber's earlier laboratory experiments (Figure 9.8), and
reaction always tends to oppose the change and act in it allowed industrial chemists to make ammonia cheaply
the opposite direction. and in large quantities. Now, over 150 million tonnes of
ammonia are produced each year by this process.
Increasing the temperature makes

the reaction move in the direction
that takes in heat (the endothermic
direction).
temperature
Decreasing the temperature makes
the reaction move in the direction
that gives out heat (the exothermic
direction).
This only affects reactions involving
gases. Figure 9.8: Haber's original experimental apparatus,
Increasing the pressure shifts the designed for adjusting the pressure of the reacting mixture.
equilibrium in the direction that
pressure
produces fewer gas molecules. Ammonia is a colourless gas with a distinctive smell, is
\
Jess dense than air, and is very soluble in water to give an
Decreasing the pressure shifts the alkaline solution. As a raw material for both fertilisers
equilibrium in the direction that and explosives, ammonia has played a large part in
roduces more gas molecules. human history. It helped to feed a growing population in
Increasing the concentration of peacetime and it was used to manufacture explosives in
one substance in the mixture wartime (see the Science in Context feature).
makes the equilibrium move in the
Nitrogen is an unreactive gas and changing it into
direction that produces less of that
compounds useful for plant growth (nitrogen fixation)
substance.
concentration is important for agriculture. Most plants cannot directly
Decreasing the concentration use (or fix) nitrogen from the air. ·The main purpose
of one substance in the mixture of the industrial manufacture of ammonia is to make
makes the equilibrium move in the agricultural fertiliser, .
direction that produces more of that
substance. KEYWORD
Using a catalyst does not affect
catalyst the position of equilibrium, but the fertiliser: a substance added to the soil to replace
reaction reaches equilibrium faster. esse nt ial e lements lost when crops are ha rve sted,
which enables crops to grow faster and increases
Table 9 .1 : Predicting the effect of changing conditions on a the yield
chemical equilibrium.
190
Conditions for the Haber process

T he reaction to produce ammonia from nitrogen and low pressure
hydrogen is a reversible reaction. high temperature
N/g) + 3HiCg) ~ 2NHig)

Because of its importance, the Haber process for making
ammonia has been studied under a wide range of Wh ich changes
c-0nditions of temperature and pressure (Figure 9.9). improve the
The percentage amount of ammonia in the equilibrium yield of NH/ high pressure
mixture depends on both the temperature and the low temperature
pressure. Under the conditions Haber first used, only 8%
of the equilibrium mixture was ammonia.
3so c 0
so Figure 9.10: For the Haber process, increasing the pressure

*......E and lowering the temperature both move the equilibrium to
.2 the right to give more ammonia in the mixture.
g 40
':i 4so·c
er
QI
Changing the pressure: How will increasing the pressure ·
..., 30 affect the amount of ammonia produced? The pressure
"'
·2"' of a gas is caused by collisions of the gas particles with
0
E 20 sso·c the walls of the container - the fewer molecules present,
E the lower tli.e pressure. If we apply more pressure to the
ro
'- 0 equilibrium, the system will shift to favour the side of the
<J 10 equation that has fewer molecules:
ai
>= N 2(g) + 3H2(g) ~ 2NH 3(g)
10 000 20000 30 000 40000 4moles ~ 2 moles

Pressure/ kPa With increased pressure, there will be a shift to the
\ right. More ammonia will form to reduce the number
Figure 9.9: A wide range of conditions of temperature of molecules in the mixture. High pressures will increase
and pressure have been tried for the Haber process. The the yield of ammonia (Figures 9.9 and 9.10). Modern
curves show the yields that would be obtained for some of industrial plants use a pressure of 20000kPa.
the cond itions.
The use of a high pressure in the process also increases
the rate of the reaction (Chapter 6).
How could conditions be changed to improve this yield?
Le Chatelier's principle gives clues as to how this can The high pressure used means that there are more
be done. When a change is made to the conditions of gas molecules in a unit volume; the concentration of
a system in dynamic equilibrium, the system moves to the reactants has been increased, increasing the rate
oppose that change. So how can tJ:\is reaction system at which the equilibrium position is reached. Higher
be changed to produce more ammonia at equilibrium - pressures could be used, but high-pressure reaction
to shift the equilibrium to the right (Figure 9.10)? vessels are expensive to build and there is a greater risk
of explosion.
f
;
iI
I
['
191 )
r,.
191
Changing the temperature: The forward reaction

KEY WORDS
producing ammonia is exothermic, and the reverse
reaction is therefore endo thermic: compromise temperature: a temperature that
N 2(g) + 3HiCg) - 2NH3(g) gives sufficie nt product and a reasonable and
exothermic - heat given out economic rate of reaction
2NHig) - Ni(g) + 3H 2(g)

endothermic - heat ta ken in
Ind ust rial plant for the Haber process
If we raise the temperature of the system, more
In the Haber process (Figure 9.11), nitrogen and
ammonia will break down to take in the heat supplied.
hydrogen are directly combined to form ammonia:
Less ammonia wilJ be produced at high tell\peratures.
Lowering the temperature will favour ammonia nitrogen + hydrogen ..... ...... ammonia
production (Figures 9.9 and 9.1 0). However, the rate at ......
Ni(g) + 3H2(g) ..... 2NH/g)
which the ammonia is produced will be so slow as lo be
uneconon;ucal. In practice, a compromise {or optimum) Nitrogen is obtained from air by fractional distillation
,~mpt'raturc is used to produce enough ammonia at an or by reacting the oxygen with hydrogen. Hydrogen is
acceptable rate. M odem plants use temperatures of obtained from the ' steam-reforming' of natural gas, o r
about 450 °C. from the breakdown (catalytic cracking) of hydrocarbons
such as ethane.
Reducing the concentration of ammonia: If the system
was at equilibrium and then some of the ammonia The reaction of natural gas with steam in the presence of
was removed, more ammonia would be produced to a nickel catalyst forms hydrog_en and carbon monoxide.
replace what had been taken away. Industrially, it is
CH4(g) + HzO(g) - CO(g) + 3Hig)
easy to remove ammonia. Ammonia has a much higher
boiling point than nitrogen or hydrogen (Table 9.2) and methane + steam - carbon monoxide+ hydrogen
condenses easily, leaving the nitrogen and hydrogen still
The carbon monoxide formed could poison the catalyst
as gases. In modern plants, the gas mixture is removed
and is therefore removed by reacting with more steam.
from the reaction chamber when the percentage of
ammonia is about 15%. The ammonia is condensed CO(g) + H p(g) - COiCg) + H2(g)
by cool'Lng, and tbe remaining ni\rogcn and 'nyo1ogcn Alternatively, the hydrogen can be obtained from tne
are recycled.
cracking of ethane using a high temperature and a
catalyst (Chapter 20).
ClH6(g) - C2H.(g) + HiCg)
n itrogen (N ) - 196
ethane - ethene + hydrogen
hydrogen (H ) - 253
ammon ia (NH ) -33 The reactant gases are cleaned of contaminants
('scrubbed') before entering the reactor. T he two gases,
Table 9.2: Boiling points of nitrogen, hydrogen nitrogen and hydrogen, are mixed in a I : 3 ratio and
and ammonia. compressed to 20 000 kPa. The gases are then passed over
a series of catalyst beds containing finely divided iron
Use of a catalyst: This reaction is a difficult reaction (F igure 9. 11). The temperature of the converter is about
to get to work at a reasonable rate. A catalyst can be 450 °C. The reaction is reversible and does not go to
added. Chemists have tried more than 2500 different completion. The proportion of ammonia in the mixture
combinations of metals and metal oxides as catalysts for is about 15%. Ammonia has a much higher boiling point
this react ion. Finely divided iron has been used as the than nitrogen or hydrogen, so it condenses easily on
chosen catalyst industrially. However, as we have seen, cooling. T he unchanged nitrogen and hydroien gases
the presence of a catalyst does not alter the equilibrium are re-circulated over the catalyst. By re-circulating in
concentrations of the reactants and product (N 2, H 2 this way, an eventual yield of 98% can be achieved. The
and NH 3). The catalyst shortens the time taken to reach ammonia produced is stored as a liquid under pressure.
equilibrium by increasing the rates of both the forward
and reverse reactions.
192)
192
.....
t
gases mixed
and scrubbed
t pump
t
88
Figure 9.11 : A schematic d rawi~g of the d iffer~nt stages of the Haber process.
..
The essential conditions used in the Haber process are:
• N2 and H 1 are mixed in a _ratio of l : 3
• an optimum (or compromise) temperature of 450°C
• a pressure of 20000kPa (200 atmospheres)
• a catalyst of finely divided iron.
The ammonia is condensed out of the reaction mixture
and the remaining N2 and H2 recycled.
Most of the ammonia produced is used to manufacture
fertilisers. Liquid ammonia itself can be used directly as
a fertiliser, but it is an unpleasant liquid to handle and nylon
transport. The majority of th'e ammonia is converted 5%
into a variety of solid fertilisers. A substantial amount
of ammonia is converted into nitric acid by oxidation
(Figure 9.12). Much of the nitric acid produced is also Figure 9.12: Uses of ammonia produced by the
Haber process.
used in the fertiliser industry.
""'
193
is run at about twice atmospheric pressure (200 kPa)

Contact process because the conversion of sulfur dioxide to sulfur
Sulfuric acid is a major product of the chemical industry. trioxide is about 98% complete under these conditions.
IndustriaUy, sulfuric acid is made from sulfur dioxide in The minor increase in yield that could be obtained by
the Contact process. The main reaction in the Contact increasing the pressure further is not considered to
process is the reversible reaction in which sulfur dioxide be economical.
and oxygen combine to form sulfur trioxide. The essential conditions used in the Contact process are:
• a compromise (optimum) temperature of
Conditions for the Contact process about450°C
In the manufacture of sulfuric acid, the main reaction
that converts sulfur dioxide (SO) to sulfur trioxide (SO3) • a catalyst of vanadium(V) oxide (V p 5)
is reversible: • an operating pressure of 200 kPa.
2SO2(g) + O/g) ~ 2SOi(g)
exothermic (t:.H = -197 kJ/mol) Industrial plant for the Contact process
The ideas of Le Chatelier can also be applied to The raw materials needed for the Contact process are
this equilibrium. The reaction to produce sulfur sulfur, air and water. Sulfur can be mined in various
trioxide is exothermic. This means that sulfur trioxide parts of the world , but large quantities are now obtained
production would be favoured by low temperatures. by removing the impurities from fossil fuels (see
The reaction would be too slow to be economic if the desulfurisation in Chapter I 7) (Figure 9.13).
temperature were too low. A compromise temperature of
450°C is used. This gives sufficient sulfur trioxide at an
economical rate. A catalyst of vanadium(V) oxide is also
used to increase the rate and ensure that the reaction is desulfu risation: an industrial process for
fast enough for a dynamic equilibrium to be established. removing contaminating sulfur from fossi l fuels
There are fewer gas molecules on the right of the such as petrol (gasoline) or diesel
equation. Therefore, increasing the pressure would favour
the production of sulfur trioxide. In fact, the.process
194
· The sulfur.dioxide required for the Contact process means·that the acid can be transported io concentrated
.is obtained industrially by burning-sulfur or roasting form (98.5% acjd, sometimes known as oleum) and then
sulfide ores such as zinc blende (ZnS). diluted on site.
S(s) + 0 2(g) -+ S02(g) Sulfuric acid is important for the fertiliser industry
because it is needed to make ammonium sulfate and
metal sulfide + oxygen ~ metal oxide + sulfur dioxide
phosphoric acid.
2ZnS(s) + 30 iCg) ~ 2Zn0(s) + 2S0/ g)
The sulfur dioxide is then mixed with air and cleaned
before passing into the reactor tower containing the Questions
trays of catalyst pellets (vanadium(V) oxide, vp5) 4 Oxygen will react with both nitrogen (N2) and
(Figure 9. 14). nitrogen(Il) oxide (NO) in reversible reactions.
Ni(g) + 0 2(g) .= 2NO(g)
2NO(g) + 0 2(g) .= 2N0i g)
a Describe how an increase in pressure will affect
the position of equilibrium of
sulfur burnt to form sulfur d ioxide the reaction between nitrogen and oxygen
S(s) + 02'9) - S02'9) ii the reaction between oxygen and
nitrogen(II) oxide.
b The reaction between nitrogen and oxygen
is endothermic. Describe how an increase in
temperature will affect the reaction. Explain
your answer.
5 The availability of raw materials is essential for an
mixture of gases reacted industrial process.
2S02'g) + Oigl - 2S03(g) a How is hydrogen obtained for use in the
conditions: 450°C, 200 kPa, Haber process?
vanadiumM oxide catalyst b Describe two sources of sulfur dioxide for the
yield: 98% S03 Contact process.
c What is the common source of the nitrogen
r
r
S0 3 dissolved in 98% HzSO,
+
unreacted
6
and oxygen required for the Haber and
Contact processes?
a What are the conditions used for the
s03 + H2s0. - H2sp1 gases recycled
Haber process?
(or S03 + Hp - H2SOJ b Will increasing the pressure in the Haber
process produce more or less ammonia?
concentrated sulfuric acid c What would be the effect of increasing the
diluted when needed temperature in the Haber process on the level
of ammonia produced?
d Why are the unreacted gases re-circulated?
Figure 9.14: Flow chart for making sulfuric acid by the
Contact process.
The sulfur trioxide produced is dissolved in 98% sulfuric

acid, and not water, to prevent environmental problems
of an acid mist that is formed if sulfur trioxide is reacted
directly with water. The reaction between sulfur trioxide
and water is extremely exothermic. The solution formed
195
ACTIVITY 9.1
A game of 'Higher or Lower?' Select a chairperson. This person will not play but
needs to:
The Haber process produces ammonia for use in
fertilisers. It is without a doubt one of, if not the, • check that t urns move fairly between the rest
most important industrial scale reactions. Changes of the players
in pressure, concentration and temperature are all
important in determining the prodl,lc.t yield., · • make decisions on whether challenges are fa ir.
.Reaction: To play the game:

Nig) + 3Hz(g) ~ 2NHig) [).H = -92 kJ/mol 1 The person on the left of the chairperson
Working in a group of three to five people: takes one card from the first pile and one from
the second p ile. They then need to explain
1 Write the equation nice and big on a large what will happen to the yield of ammonia
piece of cardboard. This is the game board under these conditions without hesitation or
and needs to be in the centre of the players. error. The answer must refer to the position of
2 Cut out eight pieces of card, all to the same equilibrium and Le Chatelier's principle. If they
size, and write on them 'pressure' (x2), make a mistake or do not respond quid ., 1 (they
'concentration of N/ (x2), 'concentration of Hz', hesitate), another player can say 'Challenge'
concentration of 'NH 3 ' , and 'temperature' (x2). and take the cards from them and be offered
Shuffle these cards and place them in a pile (to the chance to explain.
3
~-
the left of the board).
Cut out a further eight pieces of card, all the

2 The game should continue around the other
players (always going back to the person on
same size, and write on them 'increase' (x4) the left of the player who started to give the
previous explanation).
and 'decrease' (x4). Shuffle these cards and
place them in a second pile (to the right of 3 The game ends when all the cards have been
the board). used and the winner will be the person with
4 You are now ready to play the game! the most cards.
Self-assessment
., How confident were you in explaining what would happen to the yield of ammonia under- th ese conditions
without hesitation or error? Complete t he table in your notebooks.
Green very confident Conditions Colour

Amber ~uite confident Changes in pressure
Red not very conf id ent Changes in concentration of Nz

Changes in concentration of Hz
Changes in concentration of NH3
Changes in temperature
.
Look at your colours in the table you have created. Is t here anything you could learn more about to \,
improve your understanding of reversible r:eactions and eqi:Jilibrium?
196
Different plants need different combinations of these

9.3 Fertilisers elements, which is why ~PK fertilisers are produced..
The NPK value (Figure 9.1 5) informs the farmer how
We rely on many crop plants for our food. Plants make
much of each element is present. Fruits such as apples
their own food by photosynthesis from carbon dioxide
and tomatoes need a lot of potassium, whereas leafy
and water, but they also need other ch~mical nutrients
vegetables such as cabbage need a lot of ni trogen and
for producing healthy leaves, roots, flowers and fruit.
root crops such as carrots need a lot of phosphorus.
They get these chemicals from minerals in the soil.
When many crops are grown on the same piece of land,
these minerals get used up and have to be replaced by
artificial fertilisers. Fertilisers enable plants to grow
faster and provide larger yields to feed the world's
growing population.
Ammonium salts (which contain the NH/ ion, e.g.
ammonium phosphate, (NHJlOJ and nitrates (which
contain the NO3- ion, e.g. potassium nitrate, KNO3) can
be used as ferti lisers.
Ammonium nitrate is the most important of the Figure 9.15: Bags of NPK (21 :8: 11) and potassium
nitrogenous fertilisers, and provides both NH/ and phosphate fertiliser.
NO3- ions. Ammonium nitrate contains 35% by mass of
nitrogen a nd is produced when ammonia solution reacts A modern fertiliser factory will produce two main t ypes
with nitric acid: of product:
ammonia+ nitric acid -+ ammonium nitrate • Straight N fertilisers are solid nitrogen-containing
fertilisers sold in pellet form, for example,
N H 3(aq) + HNO,(aq) -+ NH,NOi(aq)
ammonium nitrate (NH4NO), ammonium sulfate
The ammonium nitrate can be crystallised into pellet ((NH4) 2SO4) and urea (CO(NH 2) 2)
form suitable for spreading on the land.
• NPK compound fertilisers (Figure 9.15) are mixtures
Ammonium nitrate is soluble in water, as are all other that supply the three most essential elements lost from
,. ammonium salts, for example ammonium sulfate, the soil by extensive use: nitrogen (N), phosphorus
(N HJ 2SO,. This solubility is important because plants (P) and potassium (K) . They are usually a mixture
need soluble nitrogen compounds that they can take up of ammonium nitrate, ammonium phosphate and
1
through their roots. potassium chloride, in different proportions to suit
.. Ammonium salts tend to make the soil slightly acidic .
different conditions. The numbers on a bag of NPK
fertiliser correspond to the percentage of that nutrient
To overcome this, they can be mixed with chalk (calcium
carbonate), which will neutralise this effect. Calcium
in the make-up of the fertiliser, e.g. 21: 8: 11 indicates
21% nitrogen, 8% phosphorus and 11% nitrogen, with
ammonium nitrate (CAN), also known as nitrochalk, is
the remaining 60% being filler ingredients that help
an example of a compound fertiliser.
disperse the chemicals. Nitrogen is sometimes omitted
Nitrogen (N) is important for producing the proteins from these fertilisers because it washes into streams
needed for plant growth and also for the development of and rivers causing algal growth (Chapter 17).
healthy leaves, but other additional elements that plants
need are:
KEYWORDS
• phosphorus (P), especially important for
healthy roots compound fertiliser: a fertiliser such as an NPK
ferti liser or nitrochalk that contains more than one
• potassium (K), which is important for the compound to provide elements to V1e soil
production o~ flowers and fruit.
NPK fertiliser: fertilisers to provide the elements
nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium for
improved plant growth
~
r
197
Q uestions
7 a Why do farmers use fertilisers? 9 Fertilisers are used by farmers for beneficial effects,
b Why do many fertilisers contain the elements N, but how can excessive or inappropriate use of
Pand K? fertilisers cause pollution (Chapter 17)?
8 State the names of an acid and alkali that could be
used to make the following fe~ilisers.
a ammonium nitrate
...., ·,
b ampionium P.hosphate
' ""- · .....
c am.moniux;n sulfate
--:.-
SUMMARY
..
Some chemical reactions are reversible and this is indicated by the use of the symbol ;=.
Changing conditions can alter the direction of a reversible reaction as shown by the effect of heat on hydrated
salts and the addition of water to the dehydrated product, e.g. copper(II) sulfate or cobalt(II) chloride.
These reactions can be used as a chemical test for the presence of water, and the melting point and boiling
point can be used as tests for pure water.
In a closed system, a reversible reaction can reach an equilibrium where the rate of the forward reaction
> is equal to the rate of the reverse reaction, and the concentrations of reactants and products are no
longer changing.
The position and achievemen,t of an equilibrium is affected by various changes in the conditions, such as
) temperature, pressure, concentration and the addition of a catalyst, and these factors enable you to predict
and explain what is happening.
T he symbol equations for the reversible reactions in the Haber process and the Contact process are
Nig) + 3Hig) .= 2NHig) and 2SOig) + O2(g) ;=,2SO/g), respectively.
The raw materials for the Haber process are hydrogen and nitrogen and for the Contact process they are
sulfur dioxide and oxygen.
Typical conditions for the Haber process (450°C, 20000 kPa pressure and an iron catalyst) and the Contact
> process (450 °C, 200 kPa and a vanad ium(V) oxide catalyst) a re chosen to maintain the rate of reaction and
equilibrium position to safely give an optimal yield at an economic rate.
Ammonium salts and nitrates can be used as fertilisers.
NPK fertilisers are used to provide the elements nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium for improved
plant growth.
198)
198
PROJECT
Maximising yield You should have a main borne page with links to
Increasing product yield obviously means two further pages:
producing more product from a given mass of • one page should explain the importance of
starting material and more product means more reaction rate (concerns about reactions being
profit! More product may also mean less waste or too fast or too slow) and the science behind
l~ss energy ne?ded to recycle unreacted materials. reaction rates
Imagine you have been offered a significant loan • one page should explain the importance of
to set up a new Chemical Consultancy business chemical equilibria (reversible reactions).
that will specialise in maximising profits, red ucing
costs and improving sustainability of your country's From each of these pages, you could add links to
chemical industry. Your business is based on two the different factors affecting them. For example,
key ideas: an understanding of reaction rates and for equilibrium you would need to include
an understanding of reaction yield. concent ration, pressure and temperature.
The fi rst challenge is to come up with a company If you have time., you m ight also want to have a fina l
name, logo and advertising slogan. page that explains how there may be a need to find
compromise conditions.
You then need to set about designing your
company's online presence. The website pages can
be produced on paper, on computer slides o·r even
using a web design program.
199
1 When hydrated iron(ll) sulfate is heated the followini reaction takes place.
FeS04 ·71\p .= FeS04 + 7Hp

The colour changes from green to white.
a What is the meaning of the symbol ~? [1J
b What two observations are made when water is ~dded t0 anhydrous
iron(II) sulfate? [2J COMMAND WORD
c Describe how cobalt chloride can be used to test for the presence describe: state t he
of water. [21 points of a topic/
ITotal: 51 give characteristics
and main features
2 Which of these compounds contains all the elements needed for a
balanced oompound fertiliser?
A {NHJ 2S04
8 K.(NHJl04
C Ki804
D (NHJ 2CO (1)
3 This equation represents an e.xothermie n:,crsiblc reaction:
2A(g) + B(g);::: 2C(gl
Wh ich change \\'Ould move the equilibrium to the left'.'
A an increase in the concentration of substance A
B an increase in pressure
C an increase in thc temperat ure
D removal of substance C from the reaction ,·essel 11I
4 Ethanol. CH ,OH. is man ufactured from ethenc. C,H ,· and steam. H ,O.
CJl,(g) + ILO(g);::: CJ-lPH(g)
This rem:tion is re,ersible and exothermic It is usually carried out at
~00 °C and 60 atmospheres pressure ((,000 k Pa).
COMMAND WORDS
a Ghe an advantage and a disadvantage of using a high temperature give: produce an
for this reaction . (2) answer from a given
b Using a high press ure make, the process more costly. Use ideas about source or recall/
equilibrium to explain why a high pressure is used . [2) memory
c Why is a catalyst used for this reaction•> (1) predict: suggest _
d Predict the effect of a catalyst on the position of equilibrium. (1) what may happen
In the industrial process. the gases arc passed continuou,ly over the based on available
catalyst in a reaction vessel. information
e Explain why the reaction never reaches equilibrium. (2)

[Total: 8)
200
CONTINUED
> S Ammonia is an important chemical manufactured in the Haber process.

Nitrogen and hydrogen are reacted in an exothermic reversible reaction.
Nlg) + 3H )(g) ~ 2NH,(g)
The process uses an iron catalyst and is carried out at 450°C and
20000kPa pressure.
a How are the nit rogen and hydrogen needed for the process obtained? (2)
b The temperature of 450°C is a compromise temperature. What is
meant by the expression ·compromise temperature"? (2]
c The 20000 kPa pressure used is a lso a compromise. A higher pressure
would give a higher yield. What is the disadvantage of using a
higher pressure? (1 I
d Catalysts are not consumed by a reaction. Why is the iron catalyst in
the Haber process changed regularly? (1)
e The catalysts in the Haber process and the Contact process are used
either in finely divided or pellet form. Explain the advantage of their
use in these forms. [1]
[Total: 7)
r
201
SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST .
After studying this chapter, think about how confident you are with the different topics. this will help you see any
I
-
Confident I
, I can See Needs Almost
Topic .. . to move I
more vJork there
I i on .
I - -~ ~ - - r
----
- - - - - - ~. . -
understand that some chemical reactions are
reversible, and their equation includes the symbol~ 9.1
describe how changing conditions alter the direction

of the reaction using the dehydration of hydrated 9.1
salts as examples
describe the use of these reactions as a chemical test
9.1
for the presence of water
state that in a closed system a reversible reaction can
reach an equilibrium where the concentrations of 9.1 ..
reactants and products are no longer changing
predict and explain how the position of an
> equilibrium is affected by various changes in
the conditions
9.1
state the sources for the reactants and the factors

affecting the reversible reactions used to produce
> ammonia in the Haber process and sulfuric acid in
the Contact process
9.2
outline the essential conditions used in the Haber

process (450°C, 20 000kPa pressure and an
> iron catalyst) and the Contact process (450°C,
9.2
200 kPa and a vanadium(V) oxide catalyst) '
explain how the conditions used for the Haber
process and the Contact process are used to safely 9.2
obtain an optimal yield at an economic rate
state that ammonium salts and nitrates can be used
as fertilisers 9.3
describe the use of NPK fertilisers to provide the

elements nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium for 9.3
improved plant growth
202)
202
involve oxidation and reduction (redox) reactions
xygen and reduction as t he loss of oxygen
•
.. . .... . .
.. ..
- ..
203
GETTI N G STARTED '
Oxidation is one of the most important types of Discuss in groups any other reactions that you have
reaction in che!'Tlistry. You have most likely seen st udied that could be classified as oxiaation. Write
magnesium burn or a sample of hydrogen 'pop' these down in your notes.
when ignited. What gas in the air is invofved i;i
these react ions? Reduction is the opposite of oxidation How would
you defi0e red uction from t he experiments you
have seen so far in your studies?
FUELLING THE INTERNATIONAL SPACE PROGRAMME
The new generation of space missions is truly (N 2 H4) . Mixing hydrazine with oxidishg agent
international. Many couAtries, including the 22 dinitrogen tetroxide creates a m,xtu•e l'-O exo!osiv$
member states of the European Space Agency that no ignition is requ ired. Alternatlvely, hydrazine
and Russia, have collaborated on the lnternatior,1al car oe used by itself in the presence o · an 1rro1ur·
Space Station. China, Japan and India have catalyst. Tne Curiosity Rover, which has been
ongoing projects related to the Moon and Mars. working on Mars since 2012, used hydrazine t o
NASA has re-focused on the potent ial of reaching land 0n the red planet. The basis of ali t he differe
Mars, collaborating with private companies areas of space exploratioA is dep endent o.n the
such, as SpaceX to achieve its aims (Figure 10.1), energy and explosive thrust produced by a group
while countries in Africa and the Middle East are of powerful oxidat ion-reduction reactions.
developing small-scale satellite programmes. But
what is the cMemistry that powers this exploration? Discussion questions
Space exploration is dependent on the energy 1 What type of chemical
and explosive thnist produced by a group of reaction is useful to drive
powerful 0xidation-reduction reactions. The redox an engine O f ,aunch
reaction between hydrogen and oxygen is highly a rocket? What else,
exothermic and has been used to fuel rockets, mos besides energy, would be
notably the now-retired Space Shuttle. Large tanks useful from the reaction
beneath the Shuttle contained liquid hydroge111 ro generate explosive
and oxygen. In 1986, cracked rubber seals on oowe,? What ohysical
the fuel tanks of the shuttle Challenger caused state do yot..: think the
a catastrophic explosion and loss of life. Despite products of an explosive
t hat accident, the hydrogen/oxygen combination reaction are likely to
continues to be used for many of the most bein?
powerful rockets. 2 Hydrazine, Nzl'·.41 is
Another fuel used extensively for powerful rocket often used as a r.ocket
launches is known as 'rocket propellant-1" (RP-1). propeliar,it. When it
This is a form of highly purified paraffin (kerosene) burns explosively in
obtained from petroleum (Chapter 20). Petroleum oxygen it pr0auces
rocket fuels are usually used in c0mbination with nitrogen and water as
liquid oxygen as the oxidiser. t he only products. Can
you write a balanced
On a smaller scale, the firing of rockets is needed symbol equation for
to reposition satellites and landing modules. For this reaction, including
t his type of use the fuel used is 0fteF1 hydrazine state symbols?
Figure 10.1: The SpaceX Fa/con 9 r.ocket lifts off from Kennedy Space Center carrying
two astronauts to t he International Space Station,
204
10 Redox reactions
This reaction is exothermic and is the overall reaction of

10.1 Combustion, the process known as respiration .
oxidation and reduction In combustion reactions, the substance involved is

oxidised. Oxygen is added and oxides are formed. Not all
Combustion reactions are of great importance and can reactions with oxygen produce a great amount of energy.
be very useful or destructive. The combustion of natural For example, when air is passed over heated copper, the
gas is an important source of energy for homes and surface becomes coated with black copper(II) OXJde.
industry. Natural gas is mainly methane. The complete There is no flame, nor is the reaction very exothermic.
combustion of methane produces carbon dioxide and But it is still an oxidation reaction (Figure 10.2a):
water vapour: copper + oxygen ~ copper(II) oxide
methane + oxygen -+ carbon dioxide + water 2Cu + 0 2 ~ 2Cu0
CH.(g) + 20i(g) -+ COi(g) + 2~0(g) This process can be reversed, and the copper ~,,rfJce
Substances such as methane, which undergo combustion regenerated, if hydrogen gas is passed over the !:..eated
readily and give out a large amount of energy, are known material. The black coating on the surface turns pink as
as fuels. the reaction takes place (Figure 10.2b):
Our bodies need energy to make the reactions that take copper(II) oxide + hydrogen~ copper + water
place in our cells possible. These reactions allow us to
carry out our everyday activities. We get this energy from KEYWORDS
food. During digestion, food is broken down into simpler
substances. For example, the carbohydrates in rice, combustion: a chemical reaction in which a
potatoes and bread are broken down to form glucose. substance reacts with oxygen - the reaction
The combustion of glucose with oxygen in the cells of is exothermic
our body provides energy:
respiration: the chemical reaction (a combustion
glucose + oxygen -+ carbon dioxide + water reaction) by which biological cells release the energy
stored in glucose for use by the cell or the body; the
C6Hlp6 + 602-+ 6C02 + 6Hp
reaction is exothermic and produces carbon dioxide
and water as the chemical by-products
excess
hydrogen
burning
heat
Figure 10.2 a: Oxidation of copper to copper(II) oxide. b: Reduction of copper(II) oxide back to copper using hydrogen.
' ......,
205)
205
> CAMBRIDGE IGCSETli CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
During this reaction, the copper(II) oxide is losing Reduction is very important in industry as it provides
oxygen. The copper(II) oxide is undergoing reduction - a way of extracting metals from the metal oxide ores
it is losing oxygen and being reduced (Figure 10.3). The that occur in the Earth's crust. A good example is the
hydrogen is gaining oxygen; hydrogen is being oxidised. blast furnace for extracting iron from hematite (Fep 3)
(see Chapter 16). There are two reduction reactions
I. oxidation
taking place in the blast furnace extraction of iron.
CuO + H2 - --
heat 7
Cu + H2O
First, carbon dioxide formed in the furnace is reduced to
carbon monoxide by reaction with carbon:
carbon dioxide + carbon -+ carbon monoxide
L reduction __J The carbon monoxide formed then reduces the iron(I.Tl)
oxide to iron in the reaction that is central to the process.
Figure 10.3: Reduction of copper(II) oxide with hydrogen.
iron(III) oxide + carbon monoxide
-+ iron + carbon dioxide
It is important that you notice the words we use in
describing these reactions: Other moderately reactive metals, such as zinc, lead and
copper, can be extracted from their ores by reduction
• if a substance gains oxygen during a reaction, with carbon.
it is oxidised
There are two common examples of oxidation reaction
• if a substance loses oxygen during a reaction, that we might meet in our everyday lives.
it is reduced.
• Corrosion. If a metal is reactive, its surface may
Notice that the two processes of oxidation and reduction be attacked by air, water or other substances. The
take place together during the same reaction. This is effect is called corrosion. When iron or steel slowly
true for a whole range of similar reactions. Consider the corrodes io damp air, the product is a brown, flaky
following reaction (Figure 10.4): substance we call rust. Rust is a form of iron(lll)
zinc oxide + carbon -+ zinc + carbon monoxide oxide. Rusting weakens structures such as car
bodies, iron railings, ships' bulls and bridges. The
I oxidation
corrosion of iron and its prevention are discussed in
ZnO+C - - Zn+CO
7 •
detail in Chapter 16.
Rancid . Oxidation also has damaging effects on
food. When the fats and oils in butter and margarine
L reduction __J are oxidised, they become rancid. Their taste
and smell change and become very unpleasant.
Manufacturers sometimes add antioxidants to fatty
.. Figure 10.4: Reduction of zinc oxide by carbon.
foods and oils to prevent oxidation. Keeping food
in a refrigerator or an airtight containers can slow
Again, in this reaction, the two processes occur together. down the oxidation process.
The zinc oxide bas been reduced by the carbon. In
carrying out this reaction the carbon has itself been
oxidised to carbon monoxide. KEYWORDS
You will notice from these reactions that oxidation never redox r.eaction: a reaction involving both
takes p lace without simultaneous reduction. It is better reduction and oxidation
to call these reactions oxidation- reduction reactions or
red.ox reactions. During redox reactions there is both corrosion: the name given to the process that
gain and loss of oxygen. Even in combustion reactions, takes place when metals and alloys are chemically
the oxygen can be thought of as being reduced as it is no attacked by oxygen, water or any other
longer present as the free element. substances found in t heir immediate envir6nment
ra~id: a term used to describe oxidised organic

material (food) - usually involving a bad smell
206
10 Redox reactions
-- Questions 10.2 Redox reactions

Some chemical reactions are listed below.
A hexane + oxygen - carbon dioxide+ water Electron loss and gain in
B magnesium + oxygen - magnesium oxide
C calcium carbonate - calcium oxide +
redox reactions
carbon dioxide Chemists' ideas about oxidation and reduction have
D magnesium + copper(II) oxide - magnesium expanded as a wider range of reactions have been
oxide + copper studied. Look again at the reaction between copper
E hydrochloric acid + sodium hydroxide - sodium and oxygen:
chloride + water copper + oxygen ~ copper(II) oxide
1 Which of these reactions involve oxidation 2Cu + 0 2 ~ 2CuO
and reduction?
It is clear that copper has been oxidised, but what has
2 Which of these reactions usually involve burning?
been reduced? We can apply the ideas behind ionic
3 What type of reaction has happened to the equations to analyse the changes taking place during this
copper(II) oxide in equation D? reaction. It then becomes clear that:
In the main reaction in the extraction of iron in the blast
furnace (Chapter 15), carbon monoxide removes oxygen
• the copper atoms in the metal have become copper
ions (Cu2•) in copper(ll) oxide
from iron(III) oxide. Carbon monoxide is an example
of a reducing agent. The commonest reducing agents are • the oxygen molecules in the gas have split and
hydrogen, carbon and carbon monoxide. become oxide ions (O2-) in the black solid
copper(ll) oxide.
Some substances are capable of giving oxygen to others.
These substances are known as oxidising agents (or The copper atoms were clearly oxidised during the
sometimes as oxidants). The commonest oxidising reaction as they have gained oxygen. However, in the
agents are oxygen (or air), hydrogen peroxide, potassium process these copper atoms have lost electrons. Note that
manganate(VII) and potassium dichromate(Vl). the oxygen atoms have gained electrons in the process.
Remember that, in the process of acting as a reducing A new, broader definition of oxidation and reduction can
agent, the substance will itself be oxidised. The reducing now be put forward.
agent will gain the oxygen it is removing from tb,e other • oxidation is the loss of electrons
compound. The reverse is true for an oxidising agent; the
oxidising agent will itself be reduced during the reaction. • reduction is the gain of electrons.
We can remember this by using the memory aid
KEYWORDS 'OIL RIG' (Figure 10.5).
reducing agent: a substance that reduces

another substance during a redox reaction and is
itself oxidised during the reaction OILRIG
oxidising agent: a substance that oxidises Oxidation Is the Loss.of electrons

another substance during a redox reaction and is Reduction Is the Gain of electrons
itself reduced during the reaction
Figure 10.5: A memory aid for remembering one definition

of oxidation and reduction.
207
This new definition of redox increases the number of It is on the basis of this definition that chlorine, for
reactions that can be called redox reactions. For instance, instance, is a good oxidising agent. It displaces iodine
metal displacement reactions where there is no transfer of from potassium iodide solution {Figure 10.7b). Is this
oxygen are now included (Figure 10.7a). This is best seen reaction a redox reaction?
by looking at an ionic equation. For example: Cli(aq) + 21-(aq) -+ 2c1-(aq) + l1(aq)
Zn(s) + CuSO.(aq) -+ ZnSO,(aq) + Cu(s)
From the ionic equation we can see that the chlorine
As an ionic equation this becomes (Figure 10.6): atoms of the molecule have gained electrons to become
chloride ions; they have been reduced.
.-,- - - reduction - -----. a reduction
Zn(s) + Cu 2+(aq) - --+ Zn 2•(aq)
1
+ Cu(s) The iodide ions have lost electrons to form iodine; they
have been oxidised.
L oxidation f an oxidation
As can be seen from this example, equations for
Figure 10.6: Ionic equation for the reaction between zinc
redox reactions can be separated into half-equations
and copper(II) sulfate solution is a redox reaction.
representing the gain and loss of electrons.
Zinc has lost two electrons and copper has gained two
electrons. This reaction is a redox reaction as there Oxidation and reduction during
has been both loss and gain of electrons by different electrolysis and in fuel cells
elements during the reaction. The reactions that take place at the electrodes during
electrolysis involve the loss and gain of electrons.
Negative ions always travel to the anode, where they lose
electrons. In contrast, positive ions always flow to the
cathode, where they gain electrons. As we saw earlier,
oxidation can be defined as the loss of electrons and
reduction as the gain of electrons. Therefore, electrolysis
(Chapter 6) can be seen as a process in which oxidation
and reduction are physically separated.
KEYWORDS
. displac:ement reaction: a reaction in w hich a

more reactive element displaces a less reactive
element from a solut ion of its salt
For example, in the electrolysis of concentrated sodium

chloride solution, hydrogen is formed at the cathode
(negative electrode) and chlorine is formed at the anode
(positive electrode).
At the cathode: 2H+(aq) + 2e- -+ Hz(g) a reduction
At the anode: 2CJ-(aq) -+ Cl2(g) + 2e- an oxidation
Figure 10.7: Displacement reactions. a: reaction between

zinc and copper(II) sulfate solution. b: chlorine displaces
iodine from potassium iodide solution.
20s)
208
10 Redox reactions
-,._
During electrolysis: 6 Redox means reduction and oxidation. It can be
defined by loss and gain of oxygen or b;y loss and .
• the oxidation of non-metal ions always takes place gain'"of electrons. . ..
at the anode
a Which definition is more useful?
• the reduction of metal or hydrogen ions always
b Is it possible to have oxidation without
takes place at the cathode.
reduction in a chemical reaction?
This general rule for electrolysis can be remembered Explain your answer.
by extending the 'OIL RIG' i:;nemory aid to 'AN OIL
RIG CAT; reminding you of the electrode where each
change takes place. Just as in redox reactions, where both Oxidation numbers
oxidation and reduction occur at the same time, the two Throughout this book, you will have noticed that the
processes must take place together to produce electrolytic names of several compounds are written with Roman
decomposition of an electrolyte. numerals in them, most often after the names of
A redox reaction also takes place in a hydrogen-oxygen transition metals. Examples of such compounds include
fuel cell. This fuel cell generates energy by controlling copper(II) sulfate, iron(III) oxide and cobalt(II) chloride.
the highly exothermic oxidation reaction of hydrogen to The reason for these numbers is that transition metal
produce water (Figure 10.8). elements show variable valency. Iron in iron(III) oxide
is present as the Fe)•ion, copper in copper(II) sulfate
2H 2(g) + 0 2(g)-+ 2~0(g) is present as the Cu2+ ion and so on. These metals can
form other ions in different compounds. Iron can be
found as Fe2• ions; copper as Cu• ions (see Table IO.I for·
examples of compounds). This number is known as the
oxidation number (or oxidation state) of the element in
a compound.
KEY WORDS
transition metals.(transition elements): elements

from the central region of the Periodic Table -
they are hard, strong, dense metals t hat form
Figure 10.8 a: Balloon filled with hydrogen. b: Hydrogen
compounds that are often coloured
reacts explosively when ignited.
oxidation number: a number given to show
The hydrogen-oxygen fuel cell is discussed further in whether an element has been oxidised or
Chapter 6. reduced; the oxidation number of a simple ion is
simply the charge on t he ion
Questions
4 Define the following terms, giving one example
of each.
a an oxidising agent
b a reducing agent
5 Complete the following statement:
_ _ _ __ is the gain of electrons; _ _ __ _
is the loss of electrons. During a redox reaction the
oxidising agent _ __ __ electrons; the oxidising
agent is itself _ __ _ _ during the reaction.
209
r~ . ,, " ' ~
Figure 10.9 shows the range of oxidation numbers that
;-..1,
.
..
.......:--~ •
.
'.,J...'...!!.. • ~ ,!, __ , _ I .l
'-
; ., l.,.,, ,
~-'----=-'.<~~~
'
C •
-JI ~
various elements can have in their compounds, and also
some simple rules for deciding the usual value for certain
elements. Table 10.2 gives more detail of the rules we
+1 copper(!) oxide, can use to find the value of the oxidation number if an
CuO 2 element in a particular compound .
copper
+2 copper(II) oxide,
;'f :·-:,r-.·,-m._ :~-~
':i'i-'1ii~)F • -~,.;:I
CuO [· --· ...... - -· Li. - - ~-
+2 iron(II) chloride, In H2 the oxidation
FeCl2 The oxidation number of number of H is 0
iron the uncombined element
+3 iron(III) chloride, is zero (0) In Cl 2 the oxidation
FeCl3 number of Cl is 0
+2 manganese(II) The oxidation number of In Zn 2• the oxidation
oxide, MnO the element in a simple number of Zn is +2
monoatomic ion is the In 0 2- the oxidation
+4 manganese(IV)
manganese ch arge in the ion number of O is - 2
oxide, MnO 2
In HCI, the oxidation
+7 manganese(VII)
r oxide, Mn2O7
The oxidation number of number of H is + 1 and
the oxidation number of
hydrogen is usually +1
Table 10 .1: Some examples of the variable oxidation Cl is - 1
numbers of transition metals. In water, the oxidation
The oxidation number of number of H is + 1 and
T he oxidation number is a number given to each atom oxygen is usually - 2 the oxidation number of
in a compound to show how oxidised or reduced an 0 is - 2
element is in a compound. As we have seen, some In water (Hp), the
elements can have more than one oxidation number in oxidation number of H
thei r compounds (Table IO. I and Figure 10.9). The sum of the oxidation
numbers in a compound is + 1 and the oxidation
is zero (0) number of O is -2
MnO;
(2 X (+1)] + (1 X (-2)] =0
SO3, SO/ ·, Cr2O/ · In the manganate(VII) ion
The sum of the oxidation
numbers in a compound (MnO; ), t he oxidation
ion (molecular ion) is the number of Mn is + 7
charge on the ion (1 X (+7)) + (4 X (-2)] =- 1
Table 10.2: Rules for working out the oxidation number of
an eleme nt.
Figure 10.9: The range of oxidation numbers shown by

various e le ments. Note how oxidation numbers are written,
with the sign first followed by the number.
210 >
210
10 Redox reactions
.....
Oxid at ion numbers and redox reactions
reduction l
Oxidation numbers are not only important in naming
certain compounds. They can also be very useful in
1
Clz(g) + 2Kl(aq) - - - 2KCl(aq) + lz(aq)
deciding whether oxidation or reduction has taken 0 +1 -1 ., -1 0 oxidation
place during a particular reaction. This is because if number
the oxidation number of an element increases during
a reaction, then that element is oxidised during that
L_ oxidation l
reaction. However, if the oxidation number decreases
Figure 10.11: Changes in oxidation number during halogen
then the element is reduced. displacement reaction.
If we look closely at the reactions we have considered
earlier we can see that a further definition of oxidation This discussion leads to a further definition of oxidation
is possible. In the metal displacement reaction, each zinc and reduction:
atom has lost two electrons and the copper ions have
gained two electrons. The loss or gain of electrons in the
• oxidation is an increase in oxidation number of an
atom or ion during a reaction
reaction means that changes in the oxidation number
have taken place, as shown in Figure 10.10. • reduction is a decrease in oxidation number of an
atom or ion during a reaction.
- - -- reduction - - - - !
1
REFLECTION
Zn(s) + Cu 2+(aq) - - - + Zn 2+(aq) + Cu(s)
0 +2 +2 0 oxidation Think about what you have fou nd easy or difficult
when learning about the different definitions
L oxidation _ _ _ _,f
number
of redox reactions. Are you clear about the
progression from one definition to t he next?
Figure 10.10: Changes in oxidation number during metal

displacement reaction.
KEY WORDS
During the reaction, the oxidation number of zinc bas oxidation: there are three defi nitions of oxidation:
increased by 2, from Oto +2. Meanwhile the oxidation a reaction in which oxygen is added to an
number of copper has decreased by 2, from +2 to 0. Zinc element or compound
I
has acted as a reducing agent as it has decreased the ii a reaction involving the loss of eledrons from
oxidation number of the copper ions. Copper ions (Cu2•) an atom, molecule or ion
have oxidised the zinc atoms to Zn2+ ions. iii a reaction in which the oxidation state of an
In the halogen displacement reaction, chlorine displaces element is increased
iodine from potassium iodide solution. Consider the re duction: there are three definitions of
changes in oxidation number during the reaction reduction:
(Figure 10.11 ): a reaction in which oxygen is removed from a
• The oxidation number of iodine changes from compound
I
-1 to 0. It has increased. Iodide ions are oxidised ii a reaction involving th e gain of elec;trons by
to iodine. an atom, molecule or ion
iii a reaction in which the oxidation state of an
• The oxidation number of chlorine changes from element is decreased
0 to - 1. It has decreased. Chlorine is reduced to
chloride ions.
211
Colour tests for oxidising and Questions

reducing agents
7 What is the oxidation number of the element
Reactions involving potassium iodide can be very useful underlined in the following elements, compounds
as a test for any oxidising agent, because a colour change and ions?
is produced. The iodide ion (i-) is oxidised to iodine (Ii).
a A13•
The colour of the solution changes from colourless to
yellow- brown (see Figure 10.6b). If starch indicator is b c10 3-
added, then a dark blue colour is produced because of c Ql
the presence of the iodine. d fCll
Reactions involving acidified potassium manganate(VII) e Cr.p/-
are useful for detecting a reducing agent. The manganese 8 Which is the oxidising agent in each of the
is in a very high oxidation state (oxidation number +7) in following reactions?
the manganate(VII) ion (MnO4 - ). A solution containing
a Mg(s) + ZnSOiaq) - MgSO/aq) + Zn(s)
the manganate(VII) ion has a purple colour. When it is
reduced, the manganate(VII) iqn loses its purple colour b Bri(aq) + 2K.I(aq) - 2KBr(aq) + Ii(aq)
and the solution appears colourless because of the c 5Fe2•(aq) + MnO4-(aq) + 8W(aq)- 5Fe3•(aq)
formation of the pale pink Mn2+ ion (Figure 10.12). In + Mn2•(aq) + 4Hz0(1)
the test the oxidation number of manganese-is reduced 9 Describe the colour change you would see in
from +7 to +2. reactions b and c in Question 8.
Figure 10.12: Testing for a reducing agent using acidified

p otassium manganate(VII) solution.
i12 ·)
212
10 Redox reactions
ACTIVITY 10.1
Never a Cross Word

'Criss-cross' puzzles are a popular puzzle format where words Create a 'criss-cross' puzzle based on
are fitted together in a unique way to create a grid. A simple the redox reactions.
example is shown in Figure 10.13.
1 Find a minimum of 10 important
words or short phrases in this
Chemical Elements
chapter. You should be creative,
e.g. 'reducing agent' could be as
a single line of 13 boxes with the
.clue stating '(8,5 letters)' or could
be split across two areas of t he
3 crossword as '1 down (8 letters)'
and '4 across (5 letters)'.
2 Write down the clues. These
could be definitions or sentences
that include a blank space
for each word/phrase you
have chosen.
3 Assemble a 'criss-cross' grid to fit
your words/phrases (similar to the
4 example shown in Figure 10.13).
You could use various online
puzzle maker apps to help you
: do this.
. . When you have completed your
Across puzzle, challenge.your partner to
3 This element has the symbol C (6 letters) a race. The winner is the person to
4 Th is is the first element on the periodic tabl~ (8 letters) complete the other pers<;>n's puzzle
the quickest.
Down
1 Th is element makes up almost 88% of the atmosphere (8 letters)
2 Has the symbol Na (6 letters)
3 A toxic green gas found in Group VII (8 letters)
Figure 10.13: An example of a 'criss-cross' puzzle.
Peer assessment
When completing your partner's criss-cross puzzle, did you know all the definitions or clues? Which words
did you find the easiest? Which words or clues d id you find the most d ifficult?
,.
213
Combustion reactions such as the burning of natural gas involve oxidation and reduction react ions.
Oxidation can be defined as the gain of oxygen by and element or compound, and reduction the loss of
oxygen, during a chemical reaction.
Redox reactions involve simultaneous oxidation and reduction, and can identify the gain an d loss of oxygen
during a reaction.
Oxidation can be defined as the loss of electrons during a reaction and reduction as the gain of electrons
> during a reaction.
> An oxidising agent is a substance that oxidises another substance and is itself reduced during the
redox reaction.
> A reducing agent is a substance that reduces another and is itself oxidised during the reaction.
A reducing agent will gain the oxygen it is removing from the other compound, or lose electrons during
> the reaction.
> An oxidising agent will lose the oxygen, or gain electrons, during the redox reaction.
Roman numerals are used to indicate the oxidation number of an element in the formula of a compou nd.
> Oxidation numbers are given to atoms of elements in a compound or ion.

Oxidation can be defined as the increase in oxidation number of an element in a compound, and reduction a
> decrease in oxidation number, during a react ion.
Oxidation numbers can be used to identify oxidation and oxidising agents, and reduction and reducing
) agents, in the equations of redox reactions.
Colour tests involving potassium iodide or acidified potassium manganate(VII) solutions can be used to
> identify oxidising or Feducing agents and redox reactions.
(__
214
10 Redox reactions
PROJECT
I'd like to teach the world to ... You can choose to produce:
An educatioAal broadcaster wants to expand 1 A podcast. To d0 this you must initially
their seleetion of chemistry-based materials and produce an interview between a 'reporter'
needs y0ur help to produce either a pocicast or a and a 'chemist'. The reporter needs to ask
simple vide0. questions to the chemist on the topic of
redox chemistry. The questi0ns need to be
In this chapter, you have learnt about redox
designed so that the listener develops their
reactions. In particular, you hal7e c0vered what is
understanding of redox reactions during the
meant by oxidation in terms of t he gain of oxygen,
report. Having written the script, rehearse it
e.g. magnesium is oxidised to form magnesium
and then record it in the form of a podcast.
oxide, or the loss of electrons, e.g. aluminium
atoms are oxidised by the loss 0f three electrons 2 A video. To do this, you will need to produce
to form aluminium ions (Al3~). You have also a set of slides that give an overview of what is
learnt what is meant by reduction and seen how meant by reduction, oxidation and redox. You
reduction and oxidation occur in parallel through should then record yourself presentirig your
redox reactions. slides and perhaps share it with yo~r teacher.
_.,
215
> CAMBRIDGE IGCSETr.t CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
1 The equations for four different chemical reactions are listed here:
A ~ l - CaO + CQ2
B El:~3 + 3CO - 2Fe + 3C0 2
C ~+202 ➔ C02 +2Hp
COMMAND WORD
D Ca(OH}. + HiS04 - easo4+ 2Hz0
a State the reaction in which the underlined substanee is oxidised. [1) state: express in
b In which r;eaction is the underlined substance reduced? [1) clear terms
[Total: 2)
> 2 The reaction shown occurs in catalytic converters.

2N02(g) + 4CO(g) - 4C02(g) + Nig)
Which statement about this reaction is true?
A Carbon monoxide is an oxidising agent and is oxidised to carbon dioxide.
B Carbon monoxide is a reducing agent and is oxidised.
C Nitrogen dioxide is an oxidising agent and oxidises nitrogen.
D Nitrogen dioxide is a reducing agent and reduces carbon monoxide. (1)
) 3 The equations for six different chemical reactions are listed here:
A 2Ca0 + C - Ca + CO2
B 2KBr + Cl 2 - 2KCI + Br2
C 2Cul - Cu + Cul 2
D 2NaOH + H 2S04 - Na 2S04 +2H p
E Mn02 + 4HCI ➔ MnCl2 + 2Hp
F 2Mg+0 2 - 2Mg0
Use these reactions to answer the questions that follow. Each alternative ·
may be used once. more than once, or not al all.
Which reaction:
a shows a metal being oxidised? (1 ]
b shows a non-metal acting as a reducing agent? (1)
c shows a substance being both reduced and oxidised'? (1)
d shows a non-metal acting as an oxidising agent? (1)
e shows a reaction that is not a redox reaction? (1)
f shows a substance changing its oxidation number from (+4) to (+2)? [1)
g shows a metal acting as a reducing agent? [1)
[Total: 7)
216
10 Redox reactions
CONTINUED
>
COMMAND WORD
> give: produce an

answer from a given
source or recal l/
memory
gaP,s in your knowledge and help you to learn more effectively.
. state that combustion reactions such as the burning

of natural gas involve oxidation and 10.l
reduction reactions
define oxidation as the gain of oxygen by an element
or compound and reduction as the loss if oxygen by 10. J
a compound ·
define redox reactions as involving simultaneous
oxidation and reduction, and identify the gain or 10.1
loss of oxygen during a reaction
understand that oxidation is the loss of electrons in
> a reaction and reduction is the gain of electrons in
a reaction
10.2
217)
217
CONTINUED
-
r I}., . .1 • - - :. ,:1.-.:·;:--..,;...,~~--- , ; 1
~~r, I- See
;, ,. c'
Needs,'
· "'""'.' ~ oOfide Ot
Almost ,..-~,lj ""-1<•""'"'-'m!~
·,
, . ~~c~n· . · .,.-,,. ·-· ... ,,,. o ,move
Topic ... more.work there,1•:;(~] J1,;: ~
~,:;;.i:_,if:. :l ~~--- - -• - - - --- · - - - - • • ' - - - ---
1
~! .11~.~_..__ ..:.i.. _ _ __ ,.:i}: on ~1
understand that an oxidising agent is a substance
> that oxidises another substance and is itself reduced
during the reaction
10.2
define a reducing agent is a substance that reduces
> another substance and is itself oxidised during

the reaction
10.2
identify oxidation and oxidising agents, and

> reduction and reducing agents, in the equations of
redox reactions
10.2
understand how oxidation numbers are given to the

> atom~ of elements in compounds and ions 10.2
define oxidation as the increase in oxidation number
> of an element in a compound, and reduction as the

decrease in oxidation number during a reaction
10.2
use Roman numerals to indicate the oxidation

number of an element in the formula of 10.2
a compound
use oxidation numbers to identify oxidation and
> oxidising agents, and reduction and reducing agents,
in the equations for redox reactions
10.2 -
describe the use of colour tests involving potassium
iodide or acidified potassium manganate(VII)
> solutions to identify oxidising or reducing agentS'
and redox reactions
10.2
218 )
218
• describe acids and alkalis in terms of tl'ieir effect on indicators
• learn that bases are the oxides and hydr9xides of metals; those bases that are soluble are referred to
as alkalis -
• learn that aqueous s0lutions of acids contain an excess of hydrogen ions, while alkaline solutions contain
an excess of hydroxide ions
• <:ompare the r:elative acidity or alkalinity, hydrogen ion concentration or pH of a solution using
universal indicator
• describe how acids and alkalis react together in neutralisation reactions, and that bases displace
ammonia from ammonium salts
• learn that all metal oxides and hydroxides can act as bases, while many oxides of non-metals can be
classified as acidic oxides
• describe tbe characteristic reactions of acids
219
'-
GETTING STARTED
,
On a visit to a local grocery store or supermarket Create a table of the two categories and discuss
you can find numerous examples of everyday the following questions:
items that involve acids or alkalis. Get together in
groups and draw up a list of such items and divid e 1 What are the different items in your table
used for?
them into the two categories: acids and alkalis.
2 How safe do you think these items are?
THE SIGNIFICANCE OF LANGUAGE

Chemistry was a field of study in ancient Egypt
and classical Greece. The name kimia came
into use in these cultures and Arabic-speaking
scientists modified this to al-Kimya. The first
ideas on acidity were put forward by the Ancient
Greeks and Egyptians when they defined sour-
tasting substances as acids. The G~eeks and the
Egyptians had both discovered that one substance
particularly was very sour. This sour substance
was produced following the fermentation of fruits
and the subsequent air oxidation of the product
formed. This substance became known as vinegar
(a solution of ethanoic acid). Consequently, .....
there developed a new category of substances,
termed acids, that included all things that were Figure 11.1: Making black soap in a Nigerian village.
sour, or sharp tasting, including lemon juice (see
Figure 11.2). The Latin word acidus means sour. The has been used for centuries throughout Western
eighth century Islamic scholar, Jabir ibn-Hayyan, is Africa (Figure 11.1).
of.ten described as the 'father of chemistry' and he
is credited with the discovery of the three strong The soap making process uses unrefined shea
acids: sulfuric, hydrochloric and nitric acids. ' butter, local coconut oil or palm oil. These oils and
fats are heated with the ashes of native African
The Greeks developed things further by identifying plant materials (e.g. plantain leaves and cocoa
• three slippery substances left behind as residue pods). The ashes are alkaline and act as a source
after certain materials were burnt. Potash, from of potassium hydroxide. Acid-base theory has a
burning wood, and lime, from burning seashells, long and multicultural history, and its vocabulary
were among these substances. A new terminology has been influenced by the languages used by the
grew up based on these physical observations scientists involved.
about substances. The term alkali was derived from
the Arabic word al-qali, meaning 'the ashes', and Discussion questions
was used to talk about substances that fe lt slippery,
or soapy, to the touch. A major industry of soap-
1 Can you think of other words in science and
making grew out of some of the substances made mathematics that have an Arabic origin? Was
using alkalis. there a 'golden era' of Arabic and Islamic
science when such words were introduced?
,,
Indeed soap making has a long pre-industrial
history and the processes involved have been 2 Making soap involves using strong alkali. Why
is it important that excess alkali is removed
exploited in different parts of the world. Black soap
is a handmade soap from natural raw materials that before the soap is used? What pH are most
soaps you can buy?
220 )
220
11 Acids and bases
....
11.1 The nature of acids
and bases
What is an acid?
Vinegar, lemon juice, grapefruit juice and spoilt milk
are all sour tasting because of the presence of acids
(Figure 11.2). These acids are present in animal and plant
material and are known as organic acids (Table 11.1 ).
Carbonic acid from carbon dioxide dissolved in water
is present in soft fizzy drinks. The acids present in these
circumstances are weak and dilute. But taste is not a test Figure 11.2: Citrus fruits have an 'acidic' sharp taste.
that should be tried - some acids would be dangerous,
even deadly, to taste!
A number of acids are also corrosive. They can eat their KEYWORDS
way through clothing, are dangerous on the skin, and acid: a substance that dissolves in water,
some are able to attack stonework and metals. These producing H+(aq) ions - a solut ion of an acid turns
powerful acids are often called mineral acids (Table 11.1). litmus red and has a pH below 7.
Table 11.l shows how commonly acids occur. ) Acids act as proton donors.
corrosive: a corrosive substance (e.g. an acid)
is one that can dissolve or 'eat away' at other
materials (e.g. wood, metals or human skin)
ethanoic acid CH 3COOH weak in vinegar

in ant and nettle stings; used in
methanoic acid HCOOH weak
Organic kettle descaler
acids lactic acid CH 3 CH(OH)C0 2 H weak in sour milk
in lemons, oranges and other
citric acid C6 H8 07 weak
citrus fruits
carbonic acid H2C0 3 weak in f izzy soft drinks

used in cleaning metal surfaces;
hydrochloric found as the dilute acid in ·
HCI strong
acid the stomach
Mineral used in making fertil isers
nitric acid HN03 strong
acids and ex losives
in car batteries; used in. making
sulfuric acid H2S04 strong
ferti lisers, aints and detergents
in anti-rust paint; used in
phosphoric acid H/04 strong
making fertilisers
Table 11.1: Some common acids.
221 )
221
Indicators
The easiest way to detect whether a solution is acidic or
not is to use an indicator. Indicators are substances that
change colour if they are put into an acid or alkaline
solution. Three commonly used indicators are litmus, thymolphthalein colourless colourless blue
thymolphthalein and methyl orange. methyl orange red orange yellow
Litmus is extracted from lichens and is purple in neutral Table 11.2: Some common indicator colour changes.
solution. When added to an acidic solution, it turns red.
This colour change of litmus is the result of a chemical
reaction. Substances with the opposite chemical effect Universal indicator
to acids are needed to reverse the change, and these are Another commonly used indicator, unh·ersal indic:, tor
called bases. Bases turn litmus solution blue. (or full-range indicator), is a mixture of indicator dyes.
You can also use litmus paper. This is paper that has Such an indicator is useful because it gives a range of
been soaked in litmus solution. It is available in blue and colours (a 'spectrum') depending on the relative strength
red forms. The blue form of litmus paper changes colour of the acid or alkali added (Figure 11.4). When you
to red when dipped into acid solutions. Red litmus paper use universal indicator paper, you see that solutions of
turns blue in alkaline solutions. Alkalis are soluble bases. different acids produce different colours depending on
Note that litmus only gives a single colour change. their relative acidity. Solutions of the same acid with
different concentrations will also give different colours.
Figure 11.3 shows a simple visual memory aid to help
you to remember the colour change that litmus shows for The more acidic solutions (e.g. battery acid) turn
acids and bases. universal indicator bright red. A less acidic solution (e.g.
vinegar) will only turn universal indicator orange- yellow.
There are also colour differences produced with different
r alkali solutions. The most alkal ine solutions give a
e violet colour.
aci d / b ase KEYWORDS

I indicator: a substance that changes colour when
u added to acidic or alkaline solutions, e.g. litmus
or phenolphthalein
e litmus: the most common indicator; turns red in
acid and blue in alkali
'Figure 11.3: The colour change of litmus in acid (red) and
base (blue). t hymolphthalein: an acid-base indicator
that is colourless in acidic solutions and blue
The presence of water is very important in the action in alkaline solutions
of acids and alkalis. One practical consequence of met hyl orange; an acid-base indicator that is red
this is that, when we use litmus paper to test gases, in acidic and yellow in alkaline solutions
it must always be damp. The gas needs to dissolve in
the moisture to bri ng about the colour change. This base: a substance that neutralises an acid,
is important in your practical work (see the tests for producing a salt and water as the only products.
different gases in Chapter 22). ) Bases act as proton acceptors.
Other frequently used indicators include thymolphtbalein alkalis: soluble bases that produce OH-(aq) ions
and methyl orange. These substances give different in water - a solution of an alkali turns litmushlue
colour changes from litmus (Table I 1:2) and the colour and has a pH above 7
changes are sometimes easier to detect than for litmus. universal indicator a mixture of indicators that
has different colours in solutions of different pH
222)
222
11 Acids and bases
strongly acidic weakly acidic neutral weakly alkaline strongly alkaline

pH 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
red orange yellow
Figure 11.4: How the colour of universal indicator changes in solutions of different pH values.
The pH scale
The most useful measure of the relative strength of an
acid or alkaline solution is the pH scale. The scale runs
from 1 to 14 (Figure 11.4), and the following general
rules apply:
• acids have a pH less than 7
• the more acidic a solution, the lower the pH
• neutral substances, such as pure water, have a
pHof7
• alkalis have a pH greater than 7.
The pH of a solution can be measured in several ways.
Universal indicator papers that are sensitive over the
full range of values can be used. Alternatively, if the
Figure 11.5: pH meter for in use in the laboratory.
approximate pH value is known, then we can use a
more accurate test paper that is sensitive over a narrow
range. The most accurate method is to use a pH meter It is very important to remember that the ' reference
(Figure 11. 5), which uses an electrode to measure pH. point' when measuring pH is neutrality, pH 7 - the
The pH values of some common solutions are shown in mid-point of the scale. Therefore:
Table 11.3. • As we m ove down from pH 7, the solution is getting
more acidic.
KEYWORDS • M oving up from pH 7, the solution is getting
more alkaline.
pH scale: a scale runn ing from below Oto 14,
used for expressing the acidity or alkalinity of a
solution; a neutral solution has a pH of 7
223
Acid and alkali solutions: the

highly acidic hydrochloric acid (HCI) 0.0 importance of hydrogen and
gastric juices 1.0
lemon juice 2.5 hydroxide ions
vinegar 3.0 If we look again at the chemical formulae of some of the
4.4 best-known acids (fable 11. l ), we see that one element
acid rain
is common to them all. All acids contain hydrogen.
rainwater 5.6 If solutions of these acids are checked to see if they
urine 6.0 conduct electricity, we find that they are all electrical
oorly acidic milk 6.5 conductors. Also, they conduct electricity much better
than distilled water. This shows that the solutions
NEUTRAL pure wate r, sugar solution 7.0 contain ions. Water itself contains very few ions. In pure
poorly alkaline blood 7.4 water, the concentrations of hydrogen ions (H+) and
8.5 hydroxide ions (OH -) are equal. All acids dissolve in
I
baking soda solution
water to produce H • ions. Therefore, all acid solutions
toothpaste 9.0
contain more H • ions than OH- ions. The pH scale is
limewater 11.0 designed around the fact that acid solutions have this
household ammonia 12.0 excess of hydrogen ions
highly alkaline sodium hydroxide (NaOH) 14.0 Alkali solutions also conduct electricity better than
Table 11 .3: The pH values of some common solutions.
distilled water. All alkalis dissolve in water to produce
OH- ions. Therefore, all a lkali solutions contain an
excess of OH- ions. An indicator such as litmus, is
It is important to realise that the pH scale is a affected by the presence of H • or OH- ions (Figure 11.6):
logarithmic scale in which two adjacent values change by
a factor of 10. Each pH unit means a 10-fold difference • the hydrogen ions (H•) in acid solutions tum
in H+ ion concentration. An acid of pH 1.0 has 10 times litmus red
the H+ ion concentration of an acid of pH 2.0. • the hydroxide ions (OH-) in alkali solutions turn
litmus blue. •
Questions Pure water: H• = OH
■
1 a What do you understand by the word corrosive?
. b
c
Which acid is present in orange or lemon juice?
What acid is present in vinegar?
~Fl A
2 a Methyl orange is an indicator. What does Acid solution: H• > OH-
this mean?
b Is a solution acidic, alkaline or neutral if its p H lower
pH is: than 7, litmus
11 ii 7 iii 8 iv 3? turns red
3 Which solution is more acidic: an acid with a pH of pH higher
4 or an acid with a pH of l?
than 7, litmus
turns blue
Figure 11.6: pH and the balance of hydrogen ions and

hydroxide ions in solution.
224 )
224
11 Acids and bases
The ions present in some important acid and alkali Most bases are insoluble in water. This makes the few
solutions are given in Table 11.4. bases that do dissolve in water more significant. They are
given a special name - alkalis. Alkalis are generally used
in the laboratory as aqueous solutions. The common
alkalis are shown in Table 11.4.
H+(aq), HSO4-(aq) and

SO/-(aq)
sodium hyd roxide
(caustic soda)
potassium
hydroxide (caustic
potash)
calcium hydroxide
(limewater)
ammonia solution
NH/(aq) and O H-(aq)
Table 11.4: Ions present in solutions of some acids

and alkalis.
Alkalis and bases Figure 11. 7: This Venn diagram shows the relationship
between bases and alkalis. All alkalis are bases, but not all
W hat types of substance are alkalis bases are alkalis.
and bases?
Alkalis are substances that dissolve in ~ater to give Our stomachs contain dilute hydrochloric acid to help
solutions with a pH greater than 7 and turn litmus blue. digest our food. However, excess acid causes indigestion,
The solutions contain an excess of hydroxide, OH- , ions. which can be painful and eventuaUy give rise to ulcers.
., If an alkali is added to an acid then the effect of the To ease this, we can take an antacid treatment. Antacids
hydroxide ions will neutralise the acid's excess H+ ions. (or 'anti-acids') are a group of bases such as magnesium
This neutralisation reaction between an acid and an hydroxide, or carbonates, with no toxic effects on
alkali can be represented by the equation: the body. They are used to neutralise the effects of
acid indigestion.
W(aq) + OW(aq) - Hp(l)
When investigated further, it was found that all metal KEY WORDS
oxides and hydroxides would neutralise acids, whether
they dissolve in water or not. Therefore, the soluble alkalis neutralisation: a chemical reaction between an
are just a small part of a group of substances - the oxides acid and a base to produce a salt and water only;
and hydroxides of metals - that neutralise acids. These summarised by the ionic equation H'(aq) +
substances are known as bases (Figure 11.7). These bases oH-(aq) - Hp(I)
all react in the same way with acids. A base will neutralise
antacids: compounds used medically 1:·o t reat
an acid, and in the process a salt is formed. This type of
reaction is known as a neutralisation reaction. It can be ind igestion by neutralising excess stomach acid
summed up in a general equation:
acid + base - salt + water
225) .
225
Pr9 perties and uses of alkalis and bases

Alkalis feel soapy to the skin. Alkalis react with the oils in your skin into soap. They
are used as degreasing agents because they convert oil and grease into soluble soaps,
which can be washed away easily. The common uses of some alkalis and bases are shown
in Table 11.5.
In addition to their neutralisation reactions with acids, bases will also react with
ammonium salts to produce ammonia gas. The production of ammonia can be detected
as the gas turns damp red litmus paper blue.
ammonium nitrate + sodium hydroxide -+ sodium nitrate + water + ammonia
+ NaOH(aq)
This reaction occurs because ammonia is a more volatile base than sodium hydroxide.
Ammonia is therefore easily displaced from its salts by sodium hydroxide. The reaction
can be used to test an unknow_n substance for ammonium ions.
A base such as calcium oxide, or calcium hydroxide, can be used to prepare ammonia in
the laboratory by this type of reaction (Figure 11.8). The two solids are mixed together
and heated.
ammonium nitrate + calcium oxide -+ calcium nitrate + water + ammonia
+ CaO(s)
- ~rTP--· - ----- - - I
l ~ - -- - - - _ - _ : ~ ,~ ! -~ : . -
in oven cleaners (degreasing agent);

sodium hydroxide in making soap and paper; other
NaOH strong
(caustic soda) industrial uses
potassium hydroxide in making soft soaps and biodiesel
KOH strong
(caustic potash)
Alkalis to neutralise soil acidity and acidic
calcium hydroxide gases produced by power stations; has
Ca(OH)2 strong
(limewater) I
limited solubility
ammonia solution in cleaning fluids in th e home (degreasing
., N H3 (aq)
(ammonium weak
or NH 40H agent); in making fertilisers
hydroxide)
for neutralising soil acidity and industrial
calcium oxide CaO waste; in making cement and concrete
Bases
magnesium oxide MgO in antacid indigestion tablet s
Table 11.5: Some common alkalis and bases.
...
.,_
226 )
226
11 Acids and bases
Alkalis:
• are bases that dissolve in water, and feel soapy to
the skin
• give solutions that contain an excess of OH- ions
• give solutions with a pH greater than 7.0 and turn
red litmus blue.
Questions
4 What is the formula for:
a sulfuric acid
b hydrochloric acid?
5 a What statement can we make about the
concentrations of hydrogen ions and hydroxide
ions in water?
b Which ion is in excess in the solution of
an alkali?
c Which ions are present in:
nitric acid solution
ii calcium hydroxide solution
iii ammonia solution?
6 Which of the following compounds are alkalis?
zinc oxide; magnesium oxide; potassium hydroxide;
Figure 11.8: Preparation of ammonia. The gas is d ried aluminium hydroxide; ammonium hydroxide
by passing it through a tower containing quicklime (CaO).
Note that ammonia turns red litmus blue.
Metal oxides and non-metal
The properties of acids, bases and alkalis can be
summarised as follows: ' oxides
Acids:
Acidic and basic oxides
• solutions contain an excess of H + ions and have a Venus, our nearest neighbour in the solar system, is
pH lower than 7.0 identical in size and density to the Earth. But Venus
• turn blue litmus red bas yielded its secrets reluctantly because it is veiled in
clouds and has an atmosphere that is very damaging to
• are neutralised by a base to give a salt and space probes. The Venus Express spacecraft (Figure 11.9)
water only. launched by the European Space Agency conducted
Bases: the most comprehensive study of the thick atmosphere
responsible for the intense greenhouse effect on the planet.
• are the oxides and hydroxides of metals
• neutralise acids to give a salt and water only
• are mainly insoluble in water.
227
Burning metals produces oxides that, if they dissolve, give

solutions that turn litmus paper blue. The metal oxides
produced in these reactions react with acids to neutralise
them - they are said to be basic oxides (Table I I .6).
Effect of
adding
water and
testing with
litmus
Non-metals
burns with colourless gas dissolves,
sulfur bright blue (sulfur dioxide, turns litmus
flame S0 2) red
Figure 11 . 9: Image of the Venus Express probe orbiting burns with white solid dissolves,
above the clouds of Venus' atmosphere. phosphorus yellow (phosphorusM turns litmus
flame oxide, PPJ red
The sulfuric acid clouds of Venus are the product
dissolves
of great volcanic activity. This has thrown out huge colourless
slightly,
amounts of water vapour and the oxides of sulfur carbon glows red gas (carbon
slowly turns
into the planet's atmosphere. Similar acidic clouds can dioxide, COJ
litmus red
be made in a gas jar by lowering burning sulfur into
oxygen (Figure 11.10): Metals
burns with white solid dissolves,
S(s) + OiCg) - ~Oz(g)
sodium yellow (sodium oxide, turns litmus
Other burning non-metals (e.g. carbon) react in the flame Nap) blue
same way to produce acidic gases:
burns with white solid dissolves
C(s) + 0 2(g) - COlg) magnesium bright white (magnesium slightly, turns
flame oxide, MgO) litmus blue
white solid dissolves,
burns with
combustion calcium (calcium oxide, turns litmus
red flame
spoon CaO) blue
bums with blue-black
-#--+-- sulfur iron yellow solid (iron insoluble
dioxide sparks oxide, FeO)
- ~--sulfur
does not black solid
oxygen copper burn, turns (copper oxide, insoluble
i..-- --L-gas jar black CuO)
Table 11.6: Reactions of certain elements with oxygen.
Figure 11 .10: Burning sulfur in a gas jar of oxygen.
When water is added to the gas jars, it dissolves

the gases and gives solutions that turn blue litmus
paper red. Turning litmus paper red shows that ai;,idic: oxides: oxides of non-metals that will
these solutions contain acidi,, These solutions are react with bases and dissolve in water to produce
acid solutions
the product of burning non-metals to produce
acidi~ oxide,; . basic oxide oxide of a metal that will react with
acids to neutralise the acid
228 >
228
11 Acids and bases
Neutral and amphoteric oxides The salts formed in the reactions with sodium hydt:o,xide
are soluble and contain compound ions ~ th names:
,; Water can be thought of as hydrogen oxide. It has a pH
ending -ate because they contain oxygen (this type of ion
of 7 and is therefore a neutral oxide. It is an exception to
is discussed in Chapter 4).
the broad 'rule' that the oxides of non-metals are acidic
oxides. Neutral oxides do not react with either acids or The £act that zinc hydroxide and aluminium hydroxide
alkalis. There are a few other exceptions to this 'rule' are also amphoteric helps in the identification of salts of
(Figure 11 .11 ). The most important is the poisonous gas these metals using sodium hydroxide (Chapter 22).
carbon monoxide (CO). The 'rule' that most non-metal
oxides are acidic remains useful and important, however. KEYWORDS
Nori-metal I Metal oxides I amphoteric compound: a compound (hydroxide

or metal oxide) that reacts with both an acid and
oxides I
an alkali to give a salt and water
-, ~ ...
- :' l~;_;[, Questions
. '•
" I 7 a What colour is the flame when sulfur bums?
I
b Write the symbol equation for the reaction
when sulfur burns in oxygen.
c Write the word equation for magnesium
burning in air.
Figure 11.11: The classification of non-metal and
8 Define the term amphoteric oxide. Write the
metal oxides.
...... balanced symbol equations for the reaction of
aluminium oxide with hydrochloric acid and
Of more importance is the unusual behaviour of some
sodium hydroxide.
metal oxides). These metal oxides react and neutralise
acids; they react as bases which would be expected. 9 Name one amphoteric metal hydroxide and write
However, they can also neutralise alkalis, reacting as the word and symbol equations for its reaction with
acids which is unusual. Metal oxides that can react as sodium hydroxide solution.
either an acid or a base to produce a salt and water are
called amphoteric compounds. • ACTIVITY 11.1
The most important examples of metals that have
• amphoteric compounds are zinc and aluminium. Zinc
The enviro nmental impact of acidic oxides
oxide and aluminium oxide both react with acids to The image on page 230 shows the devastating
produce the expected salt and water. For example: effect of acid rain on trees in a national park in
Poland. As we saw in Table 11 .3, rain is normally
ZnO(s) + 2HCl(aq) ◄ ZnCli(aq) + HzO(l)
slightly acidic, with a pH of 5.6, while acid ra in
However, they also react with an alkali to produce a salt generally has a pH between 4.2 and 4.4. Fossil
and water. fuels are contaminated with the non-metal,
sulfur. When the fuels are burnt, the suffur is
acid + alkali ◄ salt + water
converted into the gaseous acidic oxide, sulfur
ZnO(s) + 2NaOH(aq) ◄ NazZnOiCaq) + HzO(l) dioxide (SOJ Fossil-fuel powered vehicles also
zinc sodium sodium produce acidic oxides of nitrogen (NO and
+ ◄ + water N02 , sometimes referred to as NO.), which are
oxide hydroxide zincate
released into the atmosphere.
AlzOls) + 2NaOH (aq) ◄ 2NaAlO2(aq) + H 2O0)
aluminium + sodium sodium
oxide hydroxide
◄
aluminate
+ water
-- '
229
) CAMBRIDGE IGCSE'l'.M CHEMISTRY~ COURSEBOOK
CONTINUED
11.2 Characteristic
Once released, the pollutant gases react with
water, oxygen and other chemicals in the reactions of acids
atmosphere to form acidic compounds such as
sulfuric and nitric acids. The problem of acid
rain is not confined to t he geographical location
Reactions of acids
in which it forms, however. This pollution can There are three major chemical reactions in which all acids
be carried by prevailing winds t hrough the will take part. These reactions are best seen using dilute
atmosphere for hundreds of kilometres. O nce acid solutions. In these reactions, the acid reacts with:
acid rain fa lls, it sinks into the soil and also enters
• a reactive metal (e.g. magnesium or zinc -
t he water system through surface runoff. (For Figure l l.12)
further discussion of acid ra in see Chapter 17.)
• a base (or alkali) - a neutralisation reaction
In groups, create an educational flyer for
distribution at a student environmental • a metal carbonate or hydrogen carbonate
conference on t he origins and consequences (Figure 11.13).
of acid rain. Your flyer should include text and
artwork and could cover some of the following
topics (though not necessarily all):
• the origins of acid ra in (acid deposition)

including an equation for t he production of
one of the acids mentioned
• the nature of t he pH scale - its d irection and

t he meaning of one division on the scale
• the effects of acid ra in on trees, lakes (and

the life in t hem), and on buildings (include
an equation for the effect of, say, nitric acid
on limestone)
• . prevent ion and remedy of the effects;

addition of lime to acidified lakes (a Figure 11 .12 a: Magnesium ribbon. b: Zinc granules,
neutralisation reaction), for instance. reacting with hydrochloric acid and giving off hydrogen.
230
11 Acids and bases
Reaction of acids with metals

Metals that are quite reactive can be used to displace the
hydrogen from an acid safely. Hydrogen gas is given off.
The salt made depends on the combination of metal and
acid used:
metal + acid -+ salt + hydrogen
It is unsafe to try this reaction with very reactive metals
such as sodium or calcium. The reaction is too violent.
No reaction occurs with metals such as copper that are
less reactive than lead. Even with lead, it is difficult to
see any reaction in a short time. The reactivity of metals
with acids is considered in more detail in Chapter 15.
The salt made depends on the acid reacted with
the metal:
• hydrochloric acid always gives a chloride
• nitric acid always gives a nitrate
• sulfuric acid always gives a sulfate.
For example:
magnesium
magnesium + nitric acid -+ + hydrogen
nitrate
Mg(s) + 2HNO;(aq) -+ Mg(N03Maq) + H,(g)
+ hydrochloric -+
zinc zinc chloride +hydrogen
Figure 11 .13: Some antacid tab lets are designed to fizz - acid
they contain sodium hydrogen carbonate and citric acid, Zn(s) + 2HCl(aq) -+ ZnC12(aq) + H2(g)
which react togethe r in water.
One type of product is common to all these reactions. Reaction of acids with bases and alkalis
They all produce a metal compound called a salt. This is the neutralisation reaction that we.saw earlier:
Normally, we use the word 'salt' to mean 'common salt', acid + base -+ salt + water
which is sodium chloride. This is the salt we put on our
T he salt produced by this reaction will depend on the
food , the main salt found in seawater, and the salt used
combination of reactants used. To make a particular salt,
over centuries to preserve food . However, in chemistry,
you choose a suitable acid and base to give a solution of
the word has a more general meaning. A salt is a
the salt you want. For example:
compound made from an acid when a metal takes the
place of the hydrogen in the acid (Chapter 12). The acid hydrochloric + sodium d' hi 'd + water
from which the salt is made is often called the parent ac1'd hydrox1.de -+ so mm c on e
acid of the salt. HCl(aq) + NaOH(aq) -+ NaCl(aq) + Hp(!)
In this reaction we can see that the hydrogen ions of the

acid are matched by the hydroxide ions from the alkali to
produce water:
W(aq) + OW(aq) -+ H,0(1)
231
If mixed in the correct amounts then the alkali exactly

neutralises the acid.
A neutralisation reaction can also occur by reacting an
insoluble base with the acid.
magnesium + nitric acid -+
magnesium + water
oxide nitrate
Other examples of salts made from different combinations

of acid and base are shown in Table 11.7.
Sodium chloride
Salt macfe-"With ,~. NaCl

Sulfuric
Hydrochlorie Nitric acid
Base
acid (HCI) (HN0 3)
acid
(H 2S04) /""
the metal comes from the non-metallic part
the base or alkali comes from the acid
sodium sodium sodium sodium
hydroxide chlo rid e, nitrate, sulfate, sodium hydroxide hydrochloric acid
(NaOH) NaCl NaNO3 Na2SO 4 in this case in this case
potassium potassium potassium
potassium Figure 11.1 4: Sodium chloride is the product of a reaction
hydroxide nit rat e, sulfate,
chloride, KCI between hydrochloric acid and sodium hydroxide.
(KOH) KNO3 K2sO.
magnesium magnesium magnesium magnesium
oxide chloride, nitrate, sulfate,
(MgO) MgCl2 Mg(NO) 2 Mg SO4
copper copper copper
copper
chloride, nitrate, sulfate,
oxide (CuO)
CuCl 2 Cu(NO)2 CuSO4
Table 11.7: Some examples of making salts using alkalis or
insoluble bases. '
., It is useful to realise the origins of a salt because it

helps you predict which salt you get from a particular
combination of acid and base (Chapter 12). T he cubic
crystals of sodium chloride come from the neutralisation
of hydrochloric acid with sodium hydroxide solution
(Figure 11.14).
Reaction of acids with carbonates

All carbonates give off carbon dioxide when they react
with acids (Figure I l.l 5). We have seen that this reaction
occurs with effervescent antacid tablets. The result is to
neutralise the acid and produce a salt solution:
acid + metal carbonate -+ salt + water + carbon d ioxide
Figure 11.15: Limestone (calcium carbonate) reacting
with acid.
232)
232
11 Acids and bases
The normal method of preparing carbon dioxide in the laboratory is based on this
·Teaction. Dilute hydrochloric acid is reacted with marble chips (calcium carbonate):
hydrochloric
+
calcium
carbonate
.... calcium
chloride
+ water +
carbon
dioxide
acid
2HCl(aq) + CaCOis) .... CaCli(aq) + HzO(i) + COi(g)
The test for a carbonate is also based on this type of reaction. Dilute hydrochloric
acid is added to the unknown salt and if carbon dioxide is given off then the salt is a
carbonate (Chapter 22).
zinc carbon
+ hydrochloric acid --+ zinc chloride + water +
carbonate dioxide
ZnCO,(s) + 2HCl(aq) --+ ZnCliCaq) + COig)
Comparing the effectiveness of different Getting started

antacid tablets Familiarise yourself with t he apparatus you are
Antacid tablets relieve the symptoms of acid about to use. While washing out the burette and
indigestion by neutralising the excess acid. Many fil ling with acid make sure that you can comfortably ·
of these indigestion tablets contain insoluble read the burette scale. Make sure you are clear
carbonates or bases such as calcium carbonate, about the colour change you will observe with
magnesium carbonate or magnesium hydroxide. methyl orange indicator. It can be useful for you
This activity involves titrat ing powdered samples to set up two small beakers showing the indicator
of antacid tablets with d ilute hydrochloric acid in some acid and alkali and then keep t hese as a
(0.5 mol/dm 3). rem inder to you as you carry out the experiment.
Method
You will need:
1 Set up a burette and use a small filter funnel
• a selection of antacid tablets to fill the burette with the dilute hydrochloric
acid solution.
• d ilute hydrochloric acid (0.5 mol/dmi )
• methyl orange indicator 2 Choose an antacid tablet and note its brand
. name. Weigh this tablet.on the balance and
• burette record the mass of the tablet.
• burette stand 3 Draw up a resu lts table in which to record your

burette readings.
• conical flask (100 cm3)
.~ 4 Grind up the tablet into a powder using the
• spatula
mortar and pestle. Transfer all the powder to
• small filter funne l the conical flask and add a little water.
• balance 5 Add about 10 drops of methyl orange indicator

and swirl the flask.
• mortar and pestle .
6 In your results table, record the initial reading
of the burette.
Safety
Wear eye protection throughout. Be careful with
chemicals. Never ingest them and always wash your
hands after handling t hem.
233
CONTINUED _
7 Perform the titration by adding the acid from Questions

the burette and keep swirling the flask as you
1 Which brand of tablet did you judge to be th e
do so. Allow time for the acid to react with the
most effective in neutralising acid indigestion?
powder. The colour of the solution will flash
Comment on the criteria you used to make
red and will get stronger as you add more acid.
this judgement.
When you are close to the end-point, add the
acid one drop at a t ime. When the solution 2 Examine the packaging of the tablets. Write
stays permanently red after swirling, stop word equations for the reaction between
adding any more acid. the active ingredient in each case and the
hydrochloric acid. Write the balanced chemical
8 In your results table, record the final reading of
equation for the react ion of at least one of
the burette.
the tablets.
3 Why were the tablets crushed before carrying
out the reaction?
Peer assessment
Titrations require precise and aecurate use of specific equipment and careful reading of the values
obtained. Do you understand how to construct a results table to record your data? Discuss with your
partner the reliability of the readings you took and your organisation of the work involved. What areas do
you think' you could improve?
Strong and weak acids When hydrochloric acid is formed in water, the hydrogen
chloride molecules separate (dissociate) completely
and alkalis into ions:
HO
HCl(g) ~ H•(aq) + Cl-(aq)
St rong and weak acids In a similar way, sulfuric acid and nitric acid molecules
Not all acids are equally strong. The vinegar used in • dissociate completely into ions when dissolved in water:
salad dressing and to pickle vegetables is significantly H2 SO/l) H,O W(aq) + HSQ4·(aq)
* less acidic than a hydrochloric acid solution of the same
concentration. If differences in concentration are not the HNOi(l) ~ H•(aq) + NO3"(aq)
reason for this, then what does cause the difference? Complete dissociation into ions (complete ionisation)
The difference lies in the ionic nature of acid solutions; produces the maximum possible concentration of H+
more precisely, in the concentration of hydrogen ions (H• ions, and so the lowest possible pH for that solution.
ions) in a solution. Earlier we stressed the importance of When pure ethanoic acid (CH 3COOH) is dissolved in
water as the necessary solvent for acid solutions. There is water, only a small fraction of the covalently bonded
a relationship between H• ion concentration, acidity and molecules is dissociated into hydrogen ions and
pH: the higher the H• ion concentration, the higher the ethanoate ions:
acidity and the lower the pH. The pH scale ranges from I
to 14. Each pH unit means a ten-fold difference in H • ion CH)COOH(I) ~ H+(aq) + CH)coo· (aq)
concentration. An acid of pH 1.0 has 10 times the tt• ion only a small numb~r of
concentration of an acid of pH 2.0. most molecules
molecules are dissociated
intact
into ions at any one time
234
11 Acids and bases
.....
Thus, an ethanoic acid solution will have far fewer
hydrogen ions present in it than a hydrochloric acid
solution of the same concentration. The ethanoic acid
solution will have a higher pH. Carbonic acid (H2CO 1)
is an example of a weak mineral acid. The other organic
acids, such as methanoic acid, citric acid and so on
(Table 11 .1), also only partially dissociate into ions when
dissolved in water.
Because of their high concentration of ions, solutions of
\ lrong acid" conduct electricity well. Compounds such
as nitric acid and sulfuric acid are strong electrolytes in
solution (Chapter 6). Ethanoic acid and other -.,cak acid
solutions are only weak electrolytes. The large difference
in conductivity between weak and strong acids shows
clearly the differences in ionisation in these solutions. Figu ·e 11.16: Reaction of chalk with solutions of a strong
acid (hydrochloric acid) on the left and a weak acid (ethanoic
In solutions of weak acids, the process of dissociation
acid) of the same concentration on the right.
is reversible: it can go in either direction. Once the weak
acid or alkali has dissolved the solution reaches an
equilibrium position (Chapter 9) hence the use of the
reversible arrows in the equations above.
When comparing two acids and trying to decide On the pH scale, a change of 1 unit means
whether they are weak or strong, it is very important to a 10-fold increase or decrease. A solution
compare two solutions of the same concentration. If of pH 4 is 10 times more acidic than a solution
the concentrations are the same, then you can use the of pH 5. How confident are you in dealing with
pH, the conductivity or the rate of a particular reaction ratios and proportion? Can you think of a way to
(Figure 11 . I 6) to help you make a judgement as to the remember this?
extent of ionisation. Figure 1l.16 shows the reaction of L
chalk (calcium carbonate, CaCO) with hydrochloric acid
and ethanoic acid solutions of the same concentration What happens to the ions in
(0.5mol/dm1) .
neutralisation?
An acid can be neutralised by an alkali t6 produce a salt
KEY WORDS
and water only. according to the general equation:
dissociation: the separation of a covalent acid + alkali -+ salt + water
molecule into ions when d issolved in water
For example:
strong acid: an acid that is completely ionised
when dissolved in water - this produces the hydrochloric + sodium sodium
+ water
highest possible concentration of W(aq) ions in acid hydroxide chloride
solution, e.g. hydrochloric acid J-ICl(aq) + NaOH(aq) -+ NaCl(aq) + Hp(I)
weak acid: an acid that is only partially All these compounds are completely ionised, except for
dissociated into ions in water - usually this the water produced. The hydrogen ions from the acid
produces a low concentration of H+(aq) in the and the hydroxide ions from the alkali have combined
solution, e.g. ethanoic acid to form water molecules. We can show this in the
following equation:
W(aq) + OW(aq) Hp(!)
hydrogen ions hydroxide ions water
235
This is the ionic equation for this neutralisation reaction. This leads to a further definition of an acid and a base in
The spectator ions (chloride and sodium ions) remain in terms of hydrogen ion (proton) transfer:
solution, which becomes a solution of sodium chloride
(Figure 11 .17). • an acid is a proton donor (it gives a proton, H• ion,
to a base)
• a base is a proton acceptor (it accepts a proton,
( Na•\ ~ H• ion, from an acid).
ions in sodium ~ , ~ i o n s in
/ hydrochloric
hyd,o,id, ~ ' ·
~ acid Questions
\::_j 10 Define an acid and a base using the ideas of proton
(H• ion) transfer.
11 a Write the balanced symbol equations for the
reaction between:
copper oxide and nitric acid
Na+ l ii zinc and hydrochloric acid
b The io nic equation for the reaction in ii is:
'spectator ions ' < +. Zn(s) + 2W(aq) -+ Zn2•(aq) + HiCg)
@ water
Explain why this can be regarded as a
redox reaction. State which reactant has
been oxid ised.
Figure 11.17: Reactions of ions when hydrochloric acid is 12 a Write an equation to show what happens when
mixed with sodium hydroxide. hydrogen chloride dissolves in water.
b ' Explain why an ethanoic acid solution has a
By evaporating some of the water, the salt can be lower conductivity than hydrochloric acid of
crystallised out. In fact, the same ionic equation can be the same concentration.
used for any reaction between an acid and an alkali.
In these reactions, the acid is providing hydrogen ions
to react with the hydroxide ions. In turn, the base is
supplying hydroxide ions to accept the tt• ions and torm
water. It is important to realise that a hydrogen ion (W')
* is simply a proton (Chapter 2). If the single electron of
a hydrogen atom is removed to form the positive ion, all
that remains is the proton of the nucleus (Figure 11.18).
.,,,,---- ' .....

I/ \
I \
I \
----+ I O• I
\ I
' ' ..... ___ .,,,,
\ I
/
/
a hydrogen atom a hydrogen ion (W)

(the electron has been lost,
leaving_just the proton
of the nucleus)
Figure , 1.18: A hydrogen ion (H+) is simply a proton.
........
236
11 Acids and bases
SUMMARY
Acids turn litmus and thymolphthalein red, and leave thymolpbthalein colourless.
Alkalis turn red litmus paper and thymolphthalein blue, and methyl orange yellow.
Bases are the oxides and hydroxides of metals, and that soluble bases are also referred to as alkalis.
Aqueous solutions of acids contain an excess of hydrogen ions (HJ, while alkaline solutions contain an excess
of OH- ions (hydroxide ions).
The relative acidity or alkalinity, hydrogen ion concentration or pH of a solution can be assessed using the
colour observed using universal indicator.
Acids and bases react together in a neutralisation reaction to produce a salt and water only, and bases also
displace ammonia from ammonium salts.
Most metal oxides and hydroxides are basic (e.g. CuO and CaO), while many ox_ides of non-metals can be
classified as acidjc oxides (e.g. CO2 and S02). Acidic oxides, such as the oxides of nitrogen and sulfur dioxide,
produced by human activity contribute to the pollution problem acid rain (see Chapter 17).
Some metal ox_ides, such as aluminium oxide and zinc oxide, can react with both acids and alkalis, and are
therefore classified as amphoteric oxides.
Acids take part in certain characteristic reactions such as those with bases (neutralisation), with metals to
produce hydrogen and with metal carbonates to form carbon dioxide.
Acids can be described as strong or weak depending on whether they are totally or only partially dissociated
> into ions in aqueous solution.
> An acid can be defined as a proton donor and a base can be defined as a proton acceptor.
237
PROJECT • ..
Ion balance and solution pH

p H= 14
Yo1:1 and a p~rtner are consultants who have been
asked to give a presentation to people working
in the cosmetics industry on the meaning of the
pH scale. As part of that presentation, you need
to draw up a series of illustrations that show how Pure water: W = O H·
t he colour of Universal Indicator paper shows the
pH of a solution and the balance of hydrogen and
hydroxide ions in the solution tested. pH = 7 1
Base your illustrations on those shown for litmus

(Figure 11 .6) adapted to show t he range of
Universal Indicator colours· and pH number on the
left of your illustrations. An example, for water, is
shown in Figure 11.19.
Your series of illustrat ions should show t he balance pH = O

at several different p H values (and indicator
colours); pHs of 2.0, 4.0, 6.0 and 12.0, for instance. Figure 11 .19: The balance of H' and OH· ions and
Universal Indicator colours.
When discussing the illustrations with your partner,
you should cover t he following ideas:
• t he range of values involved in the pH scale
• t he meaning of the values in terms of acidity

and alkalinity
how the colours of t he indicator show the pH

values of different solutions.
238
11 Acids and bases
1 Which of the following elements reacts with dilute hydrochloric acid to
produce hydrogen gas?
A copper
B zinc
C carbon
D chlorine (1 I
2 Metals and non-metals generally produce different types of oxides when

reacted with air or oxygen. Which row in the table correctly defines the
nature of the oxides of the elements listed? [1]
Forms an acidic oxide Forms a basic oxidii

A phosphorus sulfur
B magnesium sulfur
C sulfur i phosphorus
D sulfur magnesium
r
3 A student tested 5Ocm3 of hydrochloric acid with methyl orange
indicator. She then added the hydrochloric acid t0 powdered calcium
~ carbonate to make carbon dioX:ide.

a What colour did the indicator turn? [1]
. :"
-4..J
b Write a word equation for the reaction of hydrochloric acid with
calcium carbonate, and include state symbols. [2]
f
I
c Carbon dioxide is a colourless gas which reacts with limewater. What
observation is made when carbon dioxide is bubbled through limewater? [1]
L
,, d When carbon dioxide is tested with moist universal indicator paper,
r the paper turns orange. What does this show about carbon dioxide? (1 I
e Limewater is a solution of calcium hyclroxide. It changes COMMAND WORDS
'I thymolphthalein indicator blue.
("' Give the general rule about the characteristics of metal and give: produce an
non-metal oxides shown by these observations. (2) answer from a given
somce or reca ll/
f pH is a measure of how acidic or alkaline a substance is. Describe
/
how you could use an indicator to find the pH of a solution of memory
calcium hydroxide. (3) describe: state the
[Total: 10] points of a topic /
give characteristics
and main featu res
239
CONTINUED
COMMAND WORD
explain: set out
purposes or ·
reasons/make the
relationships between
things evident/
provide why and/or
how and support with
relevant evidence
240 >
240
11 Acids and bases
--
..
-
.. .. .......-•.,..1: .... • •
=--a.. - • • .
••- ... ~
~ e:a
describe acids and alkalis in terms of their effect
on indicators such as litmus, thymolphthalein and 11.l
methyl orange
state that bases are the oxides and hydroxides
of metals, and that soluble bases are referred to 11.1
as alkalis
describe how acidic solutions contain an excess of
hydrogen ions, while alkaline solutions contain an II.I
excess of hydroxide ions
compare the relative acidity or alkalinity, H+ ion
concentration or pH of solutions using the colour II.I
observed using universal indicator
describe how acids and bases react together in a
neutralisation reaction, and that bases displace II. I
ammonia from ammonium salts .
classify metal oxides and hydroxides as basic while
11.2
many non-metal oxides are acidic o~ides
classify some metal oxides such as ZnO and A1p3 ,
> as amphoteric as they can react with both acids

and alkalis
11.2
describe the characteristic reactions of acids with

bases, and with metals to produce hydrogen, and 11.2
metal carbonates to form carbon dioxide
define a strong acid as being completely dissociated
> into ions in solution, while weak acids are only

partly dissociated into ions
11.2
define an acid as able to donate a proton to a base
> and a base as being able to accept a proton from

an acid
11.2
241
• understand that salts are an important group of ionic compounds
• learn that some salts are soluble in water, while others are insoluble
• describe the general solubility rules for various different types of salt
• define hydrated and anhydrous substances in terms of water content
• describe the preparation, separation and purification of soluble salts by reaction of the parent a'cid with
either excess metal, excess insoluble base or excess insoluble carbonate
• describe the preparation, separation and purification of a soluble salt by titration of an acid with an alkali
define the term wate~ of crystallisation
. .. .
242
12 Preparation of salts
You will have some previous knowledge of salts You could discuss the following questions when
from earlier parts of your science studies. 'Salt' is a drawing up your list :
word used in everyday conversation, but usually to
• Why is it sometimes called table salt? What use
mean one part icular salt, sodium chloride (NaCl).
does this refer to?
Get together in a small group and make a list of
where, in everyday situations, you have come • What do you know about salt in relation to t he
across this salt. human body?
,..
• Where do we find this salt in t he environment?
THE SIGNIFICANCE OF SALT ·

Saltiness is one aspect of t he basic human sense
of t aste and salt is essential to life. Salt has long
been a crucial trading commodity. Thousands of
years ago, people harvest ed salt by evaporating
seawater (brine), or water from salt lakes, in the sun.
There is evidence of this type of salt processing
site in central Europe and China dating back some
8000 years. This method is still used in many
parts of t he world, especially in hot, dry areas
located near seas or large salt lakes (Figure 12.1).
Evaporated seawat er also leaves exposed deposits
of rock salt, which people began to quarry. They
also developed methods of undergrour.id mining,
to access salt deposits below ground.
Figure 12.1: Salt collection on the Sambhar salt lake.
Historically, salt was of such great importance that The lake is India's largest inland salt lake and is located
people were paid with salt. This is t he origin of the
southwest of the city of Jaipur in Rajasthan.
word 'salary'. The importance of salt lay in ~ts use in
preserving food, which was particularly vital before
t here was access to refrigeration. Salt became an Discussion questions
.,
important article of trade. Tracking the movement 1 What are the reasons for adding salt to food?
of salt shows us t he historical routes of commerce. What are the alternatives used in different
One of the ancient roads in Italy, the Via Salaria, cultures to replace salt in one of t hese functions?
was used to carry salt from Rome to other areas
of the country. Salt was shipped across the 2 Under certain conditi ons athletes can sweat so
Mediterranean and transported by caravan route mu'ch that a fine layer of salt covers their skin.
across the deserts of northern Africa. What does this tell you about salt? What physical
effect can result from this loss of salt from the
body and how can the salt be replaced?
243
Common salt (sodium chloride) is mined from

1_
2.1 The importance of underground deposits of 'rock salt' in many parts of the
world (Figure 12.3). Salt can also be found where salt lakes
salts - an introduction dry up through evaporation. In other cases, the sea forms
shallow inland pools where the water slowly evaporates
In chemistry, a salt is defined as a compound formed from and crystals of 'sea salt' are formed. 'Sea salt' is not just
an acid by the replacement of the '3ydrogen in the acid by sodium chloride; it also contains magnesium chloride,
a metal or by ammonium ions. Salts are ionic compounds. calcium sulfate, potassium bromide and other salts.
There is a wide range of types of salt. Many of them play
an important part in our everyday life (Table 12.1).
KEYWORD
salts: ionic compounds made by the

neut ra lisation of an acid with a base (or alkali),
e.g. copper(II) sulfate and p otassium nitrate
Many important minerals are single salts. For example,

fluorite (calcium fluoride, Figure 12.2) is used in a variety
of chemical, metallurgical and ceramic processes, and
gypsum (calcium sulfate) is used in the manufacture of Figure 12.3: View of a boat quay on the lake at the bottom
wallboard, cement, plaster of Paris and soil treatment. ofTurda salt mine, Transylva nia, Romania; the mine has been
known since ancient times and is a tourist site.
Sodium chloride is essential for life and is an important

raw material for industries. Biologically, it has a number
of fun~tions: it is involved in muscle contraction; it
enables the conduction of nerve impulses in the nervous
system; it regulates osmosis (the passage of solvent
molecules through membranes) and it is converted into
Figure 12.2: A crystal of fl uorite. Pure crystals of fluorite are the hydrochloric acid that aids digestion in the stomach.
transparent, the colour is due to impurities. When we sweat, we lose both water and sodium chloride.
Salt Parent acid Colour and other characteristics Uses

ammonium chloride hydrochloric acid white crystals fertilisers; dry cells (batteries)
ammonium nit rate nitric acid white crystals fertilisers; expl osives
ammonium sulfate sulfu ric acid white crystals fertilisers
calcium carbonate decorative stonework; making
(marble, limestone, carbonic acid white lime and cement; extra cting
chalk) iron in the blast furnace-
sodium carbonate in cl eaning; water softening;
carbonic acid white crystals or powder
(washing soda) making glass
magnesium sulfate
sulfuric acid white crystals health salts (laxatives)
(Epsom salts)
copper(II) sulfate sulfuric acid fungicides used to kill parasit ic

blue crystals
fungi or their spores
calcium phosphate phosphoric acid white making fertilisers
Table 12.1: Salts in common use.
244
Loss of too much salt during sport and exercise can give • most chlorides and sulfates are soluble: the most
us muscle cramp. Isotonic drinks are designed to replace important exceptions are silver chloride and
this loss of water and to restore energy and the balance barium sulfate, which are important precipitates in
of mineral ions in our body. chemical analysis
• almost all carbonates are insoluble.
Solubility of salts Figure 12.4 provides a pictorial image of the solubility

of various types of salt and also the bases (oxides and
While a number of salts can be obtained by mining, hydroxides) that are essential for making salts in the
others must be made by industry. Therefore, it is worth laboratory. All the substances within the large cent ral
considering the methods available to make salts. Some of circle have a solubility greater than I g/dm>, and so
these can be investigated in the laboratory. are considered to be 'soluble'. Calcium hydroxide and
Two things are important in working out a method calcium sulfate have only limited solubility (about
of preparation: 1 g/dm3). This is the reason why it is not possible to
make an alkaline solution of limewater similar to dilute
• ls the salt soluble or insoluble in water? sodium hydroxide. T he limited solubility of calcium
• D o crystals of the salt contain chemically combined sulfate is why the reaction between calcium carbonate
water as part of the crystal structure? and sulfuric acid stops after just a few seconds. The bold
letters show those insoluble compounds (barium and
The first point influences the preparation method chosen.
silver) that are the. basis of the analytical tests covered
The second point affects bow the crystals are handled at
in Chapter 22.
the end of the experiment.
Soluble salts are made by neutralising an acid. Insoluble Pb (Ca) Ba
salts are made by other methods. Table 12.2 outlines the
general patterns of solubility for the more usual salts. Na
Na
K
K
Salts Soluble Insoluble
sodium salts all are soluble none
8
p otassium salts all are soluble none
ammonium salts all are soluble none
nitrates all are soluble none . SOLUBLE ·
silver chloride,
chlorides most are soluble
lead(II} chloride
b arium sulfate,
sulfates most are soluble lead(II} su Ifate,
calcium sulfate
sodium,
Pb Ag
potassium and most are
carb onates
ammonium insoluble Figure 12.4: Venn diagram of the solubility of
carbonates inorganic compou nds.
Table 12.2: The patterns of solubiiity for various types of salts.
Table 12.2 is organised to help you to remember the

following points:
• all the common sodium, potassium and ammonium
salts are soluble
• all nitrates are soluble
245
We shall look at the preparation of both soluble salts

an,,d insoluble salts. But first we must consider the second
point mentioned before. When crystallised, many5alts
contain water that is chemically combined in the crystal
structure. Such salts are an important group of h)•drated
substances. They are known as hydrated salts. When
preparing crystals of a hydrated salt, we must be careful
not to heat them too strongly when drying them. If we
do heat too strongly then the product is an anhydrous
(dehydrated) powder, not crystals.
KEY WORDS
soluble: a solute that dissolves in a

particular solvent
insoluble: a substance that does not dissolve in Figure 12.5: Crystals of hydrated copper(II) sulfate are
a particular solvent blue. They contain water of crystall isation in their structure
hydrated substance: a substance that is (CuS04·5Hp).
chemically combined with water; hydrated salts
are an important group of such substances
H~ edsalt Fbrmula Colour
anhydrous: an adjective to describe a substance
without water combined with it copper(ll) sulfate Cuso.-sHp blue
cobalt(II) chl9ride CoG1 2·6Hp pink
iron(ll) sulfate FeS0 4 ·6Hp green
Questions magnesium sulfate MgS04 ·7Hp white
1 What are the parent acids of the following salts? sodium carbonate Na 2C0 3·10Hp white
a potassium sulfate
calcium sulfate CaSQ4 •2Hp white
b silver nitrate
c calcium carbonate Table 12.3: Some hydrated salts.
2 Which acid and alkali would react to form the

following salts?
KEYWORDS
a sodium chloride
b calcium nitrate water of crystallisation: water included in the
structure of certain salts as they crystallise, e.g.
c ammonium sulfate
copper(ll) sulfate pentahydrate (CuSO4 ·5Hp)
3 a The salts of which acid are all soluble in water? contains five molecules of water of crystallisation
b Which two of the following salts are soluble per molecule of copper(II) sulfate
in water?
lead chloride; potassium sulfate; barium sulfate; When these hydrated salts are heated, their water of
silver chloride; ammonium nitrate crystallisation is driven off as steam. The crystals lose
The water chemically combined in the hydrated crystals their shape and become a powder. Copper(Il) sulfate
of some salts is known as water of crystallisation. This crystals are blue, but, when they are heated, they are
water of crystallisation is represented in the formulae of dehydrated to form a white powder:
hydrated salts, e.g. CoCJ2 ·6Hp (Table 12.3). This water
gives the crystals their shape. Note that in some cases it hydrated
copper(Il) sulfate -
anhydrous + water
also gives them their colour, for example copper sulfate copper(II) sulfate vapour
crystals (Figure 12.5). These coloured salts are those of crystals
transition metals (Chapter 13). CuSO4 •5Hp(s) -
246 )
246
Crystals that have lost their water of crystallisation are

·said to be anhydrous. If water is added back to the white
anhydrous copper(II) sulfate powder, the powder turns
blue again and heat is given out. This can be used as a
test for the presence of water (see Chapters 9 and 22).
Blue anhydrous cobalt(Il) chloride can also be used for
this test. The colour change with cobalt(Il) chloride is
from blue to pink.
ACTIVITY 12.1
Oceans of seaw ater Use the data in Figure 12.6 to suggest some of the
major salts present in seawater. On your poster,
The Earth has been referred to as the blue planet
make a table of these salts and suggest which
because so much of its surface is covered by water.
acid and base or carbonate could have reacted to
Only about 3% of this water is freshwater, with most
produce them. Relate your list to the solubilities of
of it being saltwater. Saltwater is the water that is
d ifferent types of salt (Figure 12.4).
present in t he seas and oceans that cover some
71% of the surface of the Earth. The distribution of salts in the oceans is not
Working in small groups, create a colourful poster
a
uniform. For example, the Red Sea has salinity of
40%, the Mediterranean 38%, while the Black Sea
on the salt composition (salinity) of the water on the
(18%) and the Baltic Sea (8%) are much lower.
surface of the Earth. Use the following information
to help you. • Research and comment on the factors that
produce this variation in salt concentration
Figure 12.6 shows data on the overall concentration
• in different regions on your poster. Does
of various ions in seawater.
temperature influence the composition? Is the
outflow from major rivers an influence?
Sea salts Sea water
• How would you prepare a sample of salt from
Chleride a known volume of seawater to find a value for
Sulfate 55% (19.25g) the total salt concentration in gram/dm3 ?
7.7% Water
(2.7 g) 96.5% ~65g) • Include this, alongside a photograph or
Sodium drawing of the apparatus, on your poster.
Calcium 30.6% (1-0.7 g)
1.2% Prepare your poster and then present and discuss it
(0.42g) Magnesium with the whole class.
Salt
3.7% (1.39)
Potassium 3.5%(359)
1.1% Minor const ituents
(0.39g) 0.7%(0.259)
Quantities in relation to
1 dm 3 (or 1000 cm 3) of seawater
Figure 12.6: Data on the overall salt concent ration •

of seawater.
247
12.2 Preparation of salts Method A - acid plus solid metal, base

or carbonate
Method A is essentially the same whether you are
Preparing soluble salts starting with a solid metal, a solid base or a solid
Soluble salts can be made from their parent acid using carbonate (Figure 12.8):
any of the three characteristic reactions of acids outlined
• Stage 1: An excess of the solid is added ro the acid and
in Chapter 11. •
allowed to react. Usin g an excess of the solid makes
sure that all the acid is used up. If it is not used up at
Choosing a method of salt preparation this stage, the acid would become more concentrated
The choice of method for preparing a soluble salt when the water is evaporated later (stage 3).
depends on two things: • Stage 2: The excess solid is filtered out.
1 Is the metal reactive enough to displace the • Stage 3: The filtrate is gently evaporated to
hydrogen in the acid? If it is, is it too reactive and concentrate the salt solution. This can be done
therefore unsafe? on a heated water-bath (Figure 12.8) or sand tray
2 Is the base or carbonate soluble or insoluble? (Figure 12.9).
Figure 12.7 shows a flow chart summaris.i ng the choices • Stage 4: When crystals can be seen forming
to be made when preparing a soluble salt. (crystallisation point), heating is stopped and the
solution is left to crystallise.
• Stage 5: The concentrated solution is cooled to let the
crystals form . The crystals are filtered off and washed
with a little distilled water. Then the crystals are dried
carefully between filter papers (Figure 12. 10).
.....,
Yes
. No
No~ - - - - - - - - -
Method:A:
•
am pref"i --------""!
lsfhebaseor No salt by reacting ~cicfwfth e cess Salt qystals prepared
carbonate. soluble? solid, followed by filtrat~ n, by evaporation
e.g. CuSO4·5Hp ! and crystallisation
Yes
248
dilute acid
~::~~T
_.....__.nydrogen
metal
m.., ,
carbonate
i ii iii
Warm the acid. Switch off Add an excess of the metal oxide Add an excess of the metal
the Bunsen burner. Add an excess to the acid. Wait until the solution carbonate to the acid. Wait until
of the metal to the acid. Wait until no longer turns b lue litmus paper red. no more carbon dioxide is given off.
no more hydrogen is given off.
A glass rod is
b C d
evaporating ~ dipped into
mixture basin :...
~. - -- the solution and
~ then taken out
residue left in ~ ~'.> tocool;when
filter paper smal I crystals
{the excess o f form on the rod, Crystals form as
t he solid reactant) the solution is solution cools;
ready to remove fi lter, wash and
fi ltrate from the bath. then dry them.
filtrate
evaporating {a solution
dish of the salt)
Figure 12.8: Method A for preparing a soluble salt. a: Stage 1: the acid is reacted with either {i) a metal, {ii) a base or
(iii) a carbonate. b: Stage 2: the excess sol id is fi ltered out. c: Stage 3: the solution is carefully evaporated. d: Stage 4: the
crystals are aIlowed to form.
Figure 12.9: Evaporating off the water to obtain

salt crystals. Here a sand tray is being used to heat Figure 12.10: Crystals of zinc nitrate after d rying between
the solution carefully. filter papers.
249 )
249
> CAMBRIDGE IGCSETM CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
EXPERIMENTAL SKILLS 12. 1
Quick and easy copper(II) sulfate crystals crystallisation (Topic 21.2). You may find it helpful to
set up the filtration apparatus before starting.
This activity is an adaptation of the larger-scale
method of preparing a solub le salt (see Figure 12.8). Method
The essential feature of this method is that it is easier
to carry out than the method involving multiple 1 Pour 15 cm 3 of 2 mol/dm3 sulfuric acid into a
stages. The method uses a reaction between a boiling tube.
dilute solution of the parent acid (sulfuric acid in this 2 Place the tube in a beaker half-filled with boiling
case) and an excess of an insoluble b ase. water from a kettle.
3 Weigh out between 1.8 g and 2.0g of
You will need:
copper(II) oxide.
• measuring cylinder (25 cm 3)
4 Add half the copper(II) oxide to the acid in the
• boiling tube boiling tube. Agitate the boiling tube and return
• sulfuric acid (2mol/dm3) it to the hot water.
• beaker (250cm3)
5 When t he solid has dissolved, add t he remaining
• copper(II) oxide portion of copper(II) oxide.
• filter funnel and filter paper
6 Keep the tube in the hot water for five more
• conical flask (100cm 3) minutes, taking it out occasionally to agitate
• crystallising dish t he t ube.
• Bunsen burner 7 Filter off the unreacted solid, collecting the
• tripod and gauze clear blue solution in a 100cm3 conical flask.
• heat-resistant mat A fluted filter paper can be used to speed up
the filtration.
• kettle
• balance. 8 Set up the Bunsen burner and boil the solution
for two to three minutes.
Sa~fy 9 Pour the hot solution into a clean, dry

crystallising dish and watch the crystals grow!
Wear eye protection throughout. Be careful with•
--+remicals. Never ingest them and always wash your Questions
t:iand.9 after handfin-g them, Note that sulfuric acid is
• corrosive and an irritant at the concentration used. 1 Write word and balanced chemical equations for
the reaction taking place.
Getting starte d 2 What does the fact that there is some unreacted
It is important that you are well organised and solid left after the reaction tell you about
have all t he apparatus and chemicals that you the proportions of reactants used? Why is
need before starting the experiment. You should it useful that the reaction is carried out with
be familiar wit h the techniques of filtration and these proportions?
Peer assessment • Were you able to handle the manipulation

The practical work to prepare copper(II) sulfate of the reaction, filtration and crystallisation
crystal requires carefu l and coord inated work stages confidently?
\•
w ith your partner. When you have completed • D id you share the work equally between you?
the experiment, discuss with your partner how
• Did carrying out the experiment help you to
efficiently you worked together. Think about the
understand the importance of the different
following questions: steps involved in preparing a soluble salt?
250
alkali acid
• a
Do you find carrying out practical work a useful

methyl orange II yellow If I red
way of learning aspects of chemistry?

Is there a way in which you could gain more from
performing experiments?
thymolphthalein blue colourless
Method B - acid plus alkali by titration Add acid until the colour just changes.
a
colourless'- .
pipette
'\,. i
J b
~ L'
acid
I r-1 alkali
L:: ,;:i
burette -;:. /4 end-point ~
E '/ conical
tap-- t
! ) \ ''~
l':J Figure 12.12 a: Colour changes for the indicators methyl
orange and thymolphthalein during the titration. b: Actual
indicator afti dding colours of niethyl orange in acid and alkali.
the indicator
C \:_______;)
evaporation of the
solution and
crystallisation as
in method A ti ration• a method of quantitative analysis using
Figure 12.11: Method B (the titration method) for preparing volume of another solution using a burette until
a soluble salt. a: Stage 1: the burette is fi lled with acid and an end-point is reached
a known volume of alkali is added to the conical flask.
b: Stage 2: the acid is added to the alkali until the b.it"1tH' a piece of glass apparatus used for
delivering a variable volume of liquid accurately
end-point is reached. c: Stage 3: the solution is evaporated
and crystallised as for method A. , i:-fumlt'l(I plpc:tte. a pipette used to measure
out a volume of solution accurately
Method B (the lilTa.t"on method) involves the
I' pojr, the point in a titration when the
neutralisation of an acid with an alkali (e.g. sodium
indicator just changes colour showing that the
hydroxide) or a soluble carbonate (e.g. sodium
carbonate) (Figure 12.11). Since both the reactants and reaction is complete
the products are colourless, an indicator is used to find
the neutralisation point or end-~oint. • Stage 2: The acid solution is run into the flask a few
• Stage 1: The acid solution is poured into a u ~- drops at a time from the burette until the indicator
just changes colour (Figure 12.12). The conical
The burette is used to accurately measure the
volume of solution added. A known volume of fl.ask must also be swirled after each portion of
alkali solution is placed in a conical flask using acid to ensure everything is mixed and the reaction
a , ll.lJ111t , ,,.µ, IJt . The pipette delivers a fixed is complete. Having found the I for the
reaction, the volume of acid (titre volume) added
volume accurately. A few drops of an indicator
is noted. The experiment is then repeated without
(e.g. thymolphthalein or methyl orange) are added
using the indicator. The same known volume of
to the flask.
251
alkali is used in the flask. The same volume of acid

' as noted in the first part is then run into the flask. Preparing insoluble salts
Alternatively, activated cha rcoal can be added to
remove the coloured indicator. The charcoal can
by precipitat ion
then be filtered off. The reaction between marble chips (calcium carbonate)
• Stage 3: The salt solution is evaporated and cooled and sulfuric acid would be expected to produce a strong
to form crystals as described in method A. reaction, with large amounts of carbon dioxide being
gjven off However. the reaction quickly stops a fter a very
This titration method is very useful not only for short time. Th is is caused by the fact that calcium sulfate
preparing salts but also for finding the concentration of a is insoluble. This insoluble calcium sulfate soon forms
particular acid or alkali solution (Chapters 5, 11 and 22). a layer on the surface of the marble chips. stopping any
further reaction (Figure 12.13).
Questions 0 0
0
o
0
O 0 0
0
0 0
0
0
layer of insoluble ~ 0
4 Name the salts formed when : calcium sulfate 0
0 O
a dilute hydrochloric acid reacts with magnesium 0
marble 00
H'ions chip 0
b calcium oxide reacts with dilute nitric acid can't get at
0 0
0 0
C zinc carbonate reacts with dilute sulfuric acid. the calcium 0 k
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 a carbonate
In the methods of preparing a salt using a solid 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
metal, base or car bonate, why is the solid used

in excess? Figure 12.13: Format ion of a layer o f insolub le calcium
b In such methods, how is the excess solid sulfate stop s t he reaction of m arble chip s wit h sulfuric acid
removed once the reaction has finished? by forming a p rotective layer over the surface of the solid.
C Name the two important pieces of graduated

glassware used in the titration method of This reaction emphasises that some salts are insoluble in
preparing a salt. water, e.g. silver chloride and barium sulfate (Table 12.2).
Such salts cannot be made by the crystallisation methods
d \Vhat colour is the indicator methyl orange
we have described earlier. They are generally made by
in alkali?
ionic preci pitation.
e Why should the crystals p repared at the end of
experiments to prepare salts not be heated too For example, barium sulfate can be made by taking a
strongly when drying them? solution of a soluble sulfate (e.g. sodium sulfate). This.:::-
added to a solution of a soluble barium salt (e.g. barium
.. 6 There are two methods of preparing soluble salts
chloride). The insoluble white solid. barium sulfate, is
depending on the solubility of the ~ t reacted
formed immediately. This solid 'falls' to the bottom of
with the acid: method A (titration using a burette
the tube or beaker as a precipitate (Figure 12.14). The
and an indicator) and method B (addition of an
prectpitate can be filtered off. It is then washed with
excess of a base or a meta.I to a dilute acid and distilled water and dried in a warm oven.
removal of the e~cess solid). Which method would
you use to prepare the soluble salt. me sulfute, from
the insoluble base_ nnc
o.nde? KEYWORD
Write down the method. precipitation: the sudden format ion of a solid
ii Write down the ~ t to us~ when either two solut ions are m ixed or a gas is
iii \Vrite the word equation. bubbled into a solution
252)
252
The different forms of equations for this precipitation of

silver nitrate are:
silver
nitrate
.1.
AgNO_(aq) +
sodium
chloride
NaCl(aq)
-- silver
chloride
+
sodium
nitrate
AgCl(s) + Na NOi(aq)
barium
chloride
Na•
Cl- Na•
Cl-
sodium
sulfate
Ag•(aq) + Cl (aq)
- AgCl(s)
Precipitation reactions are often used in analysis to

solution BaSO.(s} solution identify salts such as chlorides, iodides and sulfates
(Chapter 22). Figure 12.16 shows the precipitation of
Ba2• and SO/- ions combine to form yellow lead iodide by mixing lead nitrate and potassium
a precipitate of BaS04; the Na• and Cr iodide solutions.
ions stay in solution.
Figure 12.14: Precipitation of barium sulfate. The solid can

be col lected by filtration or centrifugation.
The equation for this reaction is:

barium sodium barium + sodium
chloride + sulfate - sulfate chloride
BaCii<aq) + Nalso.(aq) - BaSO.(s) + 2NaCJ(aq) Figure 12.16: Precipitation of lead(II} iodide by mixing two
This equation shows the importance of state symbols - colourless solutions.
it is the only way we can tell that this equation shows a
precipitation.
.
The lead(II) nitrate and potassium iodide solutions
react to produce solid lead(II) iodide, leaving soluble
The equation can be simplified to show only those ions
potassium nitrate in solution. The yellow precipitate
that take part in the reaction and their products:
of tead(II) iodide (Figure 12.16) can be recovered by
Bai+(aq) + SO,Z-(aq) - BaSO,(s) filtration. If the precipitate is washed, dissolved in hot
water and re-crystallised, some quite spectacular crystals
This type of equation is known as an ionic equat ion
(Chapter 4). The ions that remain in solution left out are can be obtained.
of the equation. Toe ions that do not take part in the Pb2+(aq) + 2J-(aq) - Pbl?(s)
reaction are known as spectator ions.
You will note that one easy way to write the ionic
Figure 12.15. shows the formation of a precipitate of equations of these precipitations correctly is to work
silver chloride when solutions of silvet" nit1ate and backwards. First write down the formula for the solid
sodium chloride are mixed. product on the right-.hand side. Then, on the left-hand
side, write down the ions that combine together to form
l
silver ion
rrate ion
silver ions and chloride ions sticking
together to mak~ olid silver chloride
the precipitate. Finally, write in the state symbols.
, KEYWORDS
••0 •
0
0
•1·
0•
0 0
0
0 e o~(l)(l) Q> • 0 • -sodium ionsand ionic equation: the simplified equation for a
9 0 04t o
O ° (i) O
"
i o
o.~o·
o + 0 _. o • -nitrate ions are reaction involving ionic substances: only those
e 0•0• (})q, Q) QJ e ) 0
spectator ions ions which actually take part in the reaction
0 / '\ are shown ··
chloride ion sodium ion .
Fig_ure 12.15: Illustration of which ions take part in the

precipitation of silver chloride.
253
Questions
7 What do the following terms mean in connection 9 The insoluble salt, barium sulfate, can be prepared
with chemical reactions to produce salts? from a solution of barium nitrate by precipitation.
a precipitation a Name a soluble salt that could be added to the
b titration barium nitrate solution to give a precipitate of
barium sulfate.
c an ionic equation
b What colour is the precipitate of
8 Which of these salts can be prepared by
barium sulfate?
precipitation?
c Write the ionic equation (with state symbols)
A silver iodide
for t 1e reaction.
B magnesium nitrate
C lead(II) chloride
Sa lts are au important group of ionic compounds.

Some salts are soluble in water while other salts are insoluble.
There are general solubility rules t hat apply to the various different ty pes of salt.
A hydrated substance is a substance that is chemically combin'ed with water and an anhydrous substance is a
substance containing no water.
T he term water of crystallisation indica tes the water molecules chemically combined in salt crystals.
Methods are available for the preparation, separation a nd purification of soluble salts by t he reac tion of the
parent acid with either excess metal, excess insoluble base or excess insoluble carbonate.
A soluble salt can be prepared by titration of an acid with an alkali followed by separation and purification.
An insoluble salt can be prepared by precipitation followed by filtration.
254
PROJECT
Stop-Start Go - when ions collide! You need to produce a storyboard to help you
'Stop-motion' animations are a popular tool for visualise the final animation. Thi s should explain t he
helping to explain concepts that involve movement. movement of the ions during the mixing of the two
The animations are created by linking a series of solutions. Your storyboard must include:
individually photographed images. In this project, 1 an image of the two separate solutions
you are going to create a stop-motion animation of before mixing
a precipitation reaction.
2 some images of one solution being poured
In a precipitation reaction, solutions containing ions into the other
are mixed. The ions are moving in t he solutions
but when certain ions meet, they combine and fa ll 3 images of the precipitate settling; possibly of it
together out of solution (Figures 12.14 and 12.15). being stirred up and allowed to settle again.
The reaction lends itself to animation as we cannot
Having produced your storyboard, you should
see the individual ions in solution and how t hey
then produce your animation. This can be done in
come together.
various ways. For example, you could draw some
In a pair or small group, choose a precipitation illustrations similar to Figures 12.15 and 12.16 to
reaction to focus on. Figure 12.17 shows t he show diagrammatically how the precipitate forms.
precipitation of silver chloride but you can choose Include some pictures of how an ionic equation for
one of several different reactions (think about t he the reaction is constructed. Then take a series of
analysis tests in Chapter 22). photographs, perhaps adding callouts which you
can assemble together as a set of slides. You could
use, a stop-start animation app that will allow you
to put together a series of photographs and add a
voiceover to describe the process. In both cases,
the more photographs you take and the less the
movement·between t hem, the better it will look.
If you do not have access to a camera/laptop then

you could produce a flipbook with lots of little
images showing a precipitation reaction.
Figure 12.17: Precipitation of silver chloride.
-
'
255
f EXAM-STYLE QUESTIONS
1 The method of preparing a soluble salt in the laboratory has certain

clear stages. Which three steps shown in the table are needed to make
sodium sulfate crystals from sodium hydroxide solution and dilute
sulfuric acid?
A evaporation crystallisation neutralisation

B neutralisation evaporation crystallisation
C neutralisation crystallisation eva oration
D evaporation neut ra lisat ion crystallisation [1 l
2 A list of salts is shown below:

barium sulfate copper sulfate p ot assium carbonate
sodium chloride zinc nitrate
Which of these salts:

a cannot safely be made by reacting acid with a metal? [1]
b is made by titr:ation? 11l
c is insoluble? 11l
d reacts with acid to produce a gas? 11l
[Total: 4)
3 Excess magnesium carbonate was added to dilute sulfuric acid to make a

sample of magnesium sulfate.
a What observation would be made as the reaction took place? 11l
b Why was excess magnesium carbonate used? 11 l COMMAND WORD
c How would you know when the reaction Wi\S complete? [1 ] explain: set out
d Explain how you would separate a pure sample of magnesium sulfate purposes or
., from the mixture. (3) rec1sons/ make
[Total: 6] t he relat ionships
between t hings
evident/ provide
why and/or how and
support with relevant
evidence
256 >
256
CONTINUED
5 A student wanted to make a sample of the insoluble sail lt:<1d(II ) chloride.

I
a N:,,1me two substances which could be used to form this salt. [2]
b List the steps the student should use to produce a pure dry sample of
lead(II) chloride from these substances. (4)
[Tot al: 6)
6 A student attempted to make carbon dioxide by reacting lumps of

calcium carbonate with dilute sulfuric acid . The reaction prod uced a
small amount of ca rbon dioxide but then stopped.
a Using your knowledge of the solubility of salts, explain why this
reaction did not work. (2]
b What simple change could be made to t he method to make carbon
d ioxide from calcium carbonate? [1]
c Name a carbonate that would react with sulfuric acid to form carbon
dioxide successfully. (1 I
[Tot al: 4)
.,_,
...
257
After studying this chapter, think about how c0:nfi.dent y0u are with the different topics. This will help you see any
gaps in your knowledge and help, you to leammoreeffec'tively, -
--- -- -
,- - - - -- - - - - - - - -- - --
I See Confident
I can Needs Almost
Topic ... , to move
more work there I
L.:.........:._ ___ - -- -
-- ],_ --- - - - - ~- , -- - ~l?':_- -
understand that some salts are soluble in water while
others are insoluble 12.l
describe the general rules concerning the solubility

12.1
of different types of salt in water
define a hydrated substance as a substance that is
chemically combined with water and an anhydrous 12.1
substance as a substance containing no water
define the term water of crystallisation as the water
molecules present in crystals 12.1
describe the preparation, separation and purification

of a soluble salt by reaction of an acid with either
excess metal, excess insoluble base or excess 12.2
insoluble carbonate
describe the preparation, separation and purification .
of a soluble salt by titration of an acid with 12.2
an alkali
describe the preparation and separation of an
insoluble salt by precipitation 12.2-
258
.
• learn how the elements are organised into a table of periods and groups based on the order of
increasing atomic (preton) number
• describe the relationship between the group number and ionic charge of the elements
explain the similarities in chemical properties of the elements in a group

describe the trends in properties of the Group I alkali metals
describe the trends in properties of the halogens (Group VII)
• describe the noble gases (Group VIII) as unreactive, monatomic gases
• describe the change from metallic to non-metallic character a<=:ross a period
• describe the key characteristics of the transition elements
) identify trends in groups given information on the elements
) describe the ability of the t ransition elements to form ions with variable oxidation numbers.
259
GETTING STARTED
Work in groups of three or fou r and use a copy of the 3 Discuss the question 'Are all metals magnetic?'.
Periodic Table. What do you think?
1 Make an estimate of how many more metals 4 If you have a magnet, try to use it on samples
there are than non-metals, and where they are of aluminium, copper and magnesium. Can
placed in the Periodic Table. you name the three most important magnetic,
metallic elements?
2 What are the properties you most obviously
associate with a metal? Make a list in your group.
_THE WOMEN BEHIND THE PERIODIC TABLE

The modern Periodic Table has been a major Francium was the last
scientific achievement involving both men and element to be d iscovered
women. The breakthrough in the organisation of the in nature and the search
elements came in 1869 when the Russian chemist for new elements now
Dmitri lvanovich Mendeleev put forward his ideas requires large teams with
of a Periodic Table. In his first attempt he used 32 of particle accelerators and
the 61 elements known at that time and stressed the big budgets. The work
idea t here was a periodic pattern to the properties by American chemists
of the elements. Mendeleev drew up his table based Darleane Hoffman and
on atomic masses, but elements of similar mass and Dawn Shaughnessy
character are difficult to distinguish. Mendeleev helpe<;l to discover the
was in correspondence with Julia Lermontova, a most recent six new
Russian scientist working in Heidelberg and the 'superheavy' elements
first woman to obtain a doctorate in chemistry. Her (elements 113-118} that Figure 13.1: Clarice Phelps,
work on separation methods for the platinum group were officially· one of the co-d iscoverers
of elements meant that tl'\e elements could be recognised in 2015. of tennessi ne.
properly.placed in the Periodic Table. The success Clarice Phelps,
of Mendeleev's Periodic Table was mainly due to one of the co-discoverers
him leaving gaps in the table for further possible of tennessine (element 117}, is the first African-
elements and in predicting the properties of American woman to discover-a new chemical
elements that had not yet been discovered. element (Figure 13.1}.
Many women have been involved in the search for The critical role of women in science has been
new elements. Marie Curie discovered radium and recognised by UNESCO. In 2015 UNESCO
polonium in the 1890s and was the first woman to e~tablished the International Day of Women and Girls
be awarded a Nobel Prize. Other notable women in Science, celebrated annually on 11 February, as an
in_volved in t he discovery of the elements in the last opportunity to promote access to and participation
century include Lise Meitner (protactinium in 1917), in science for women and girls.
Ida Noddack (rhenium in 1929),and Marguerite Perey
(francium in 1939}. Most of these women worked with Discussion questions
male collaborators and their contributions were not 1 Why do you think that much of the early
always fully acknowledged at the time. pioneering work by women scientists was not
acknowledged at the time? '.·
2 Do you think the situation has changed? Do you

think there are obstacles to women and girls
participating in science?
260)
260
13 The Periodic Table
13.1 Classifying the elements

Groups and the Periodic Table
KEYWORDS
A ll modern versions of the l'l•rindk l'nhk- are based
on the table proposed by Mendeleev in 1869. We have Pe ·iodic Table a table of elements arranged
discussed some aspects of the Periodic Table when in order of increasing proton number (atomic
describing atomic structure in Chapter 2. An exam ple of number) to show the similarities of the chemical
the Periodic Table is given in F igure 13.2. elements with related electronic configurations
In the Periodic Table: groups: vertical columns of the Period ic Table
• elements are arranged in order of increasing p roton containing elements with similar chemical
(atomic) number properties; atoms of elements in the same group
have the same number of electrons in their outer
• vertical columns of elements with similar properties energy levels
are called ~ruup,
period: a horizontal row of the Periodic Table
• horizontal rows are called pcrimh.
e
a.
(.? 0
=a.
:>
0
•
•
Key:
rn atomic number
X = symbol
b s relative atomic mass
-a.
2
:>
(.?
.::
a.
:>
e
(.?
>
a.
:>
2
(.?
5
a.
0
:>
0
5
a.
:>
2
(.?
5
a.
0
:>
0
- ,-
Period 1
l~~I . -
He
-
4
u• • 5 10
6
' 8
;-J....
Period2 ,_ Be
. .....B C
<--
N
·-.... 0
.,.,....
.s..
F
,..,_
·-..
Ne
. -
11 '2 I..
' 9
"" II.)
Period3
II
Na
......
,. ,.
Mg
12
,. ,. - - -,.
.....
,.
u
Al
••
Si
,.
p
.,"
..... Cl
°""'"
U>
Ar
·-.. ......... - -.. --.. .. -.. -.. - ...... ....... .

21 32 40
.,
Period4
- K
,.
Ca
20
c-..
Sc
-.-
Z2
Ti
..
2l
V Cr
,.,
25
Mn
...,_ Fe
.... Co
~
V 18
Ni Cu
30
Zn
,~ Ga
l>
Ge As
:><
Se
..,._.,
,.
u
Br
36
Kr
.,,,...
- -.. -,. - -.... - - - ... - -..

,.
40
,.
45
" 55 59 59 65 10 >l
"' 10 84
.. -.... -·..
so
PeriodS
31
.......
Rb Sr y
40
Zr
,.._ Nb
41
Mo
4l
,_
Tc Ru
45
Rh Pd
,........
"
Ag Cd In Sn £
52
, Te "I SI
Xe
•• - ,,. ,,,
... ·-..... -... - -...

93 ,01 I 11 I IS 119 112 131
'°'nIr 106
""
Period 6
55
Cs
0-....
Ba
....,,,
..
La
to
Lu
72
Hf
.......
7l
Ta
,...,_
,
"
w
-,,
Re
...
Os
-... ,-_ ·-
.......
71
Pt
)9
Au
10
Hg
_...,
81
Tl
""""
82
Pb
'""
B3
Bi
.......
_
Po
65
At
-
Rn
-
- -
·- -- --- - - -., - - - - - --
"'.,
I ll 190 191 197 201 204 20) 1111
Ac ""Rf '"
""
Db
107
Bh
IOI 109
Mt
110 111
Rg
m
Cn Nh
113 115
Mc ,Lv "' 118
Period? Fr Ra to .._,_
Sg Hs Os Fl _ Ts Og
C.0--
- - Lr - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
.. - ~ -.. -.._.. - .. .. -.. --.. - .. -- --

$/
,la
_ Ce
,.
"
Pr
.. 60
Nd
.. 61
Pm
.. ........
Sm
,__
6)
,_Eu Gd
65
Tb
,...,. Dy
.,
Ho
......... Er Tm
70
Yb
71
Lu
,,. ,., - ,so , m
- - - - - -- - - -- -
''° 141 152 15'
.,
159 16) 165 16) 115
Ac
90
Th
,,.._ Pa u
9'l
Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf
99
Es
HD
Fm
IOI
Md ""
No
IOJ
Lr
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
Elem ents in Groups I to VIII are somet imes known as the main-group elements.
D The reactive metals: Group 1- the alkali D Less reactive metals D The non-metals: includes
metals; Group II - the alkaline earth metals Group Vll - the halogens
D The transition elements: hard, D The metalloids: includes D The no ble g ases (Gro up VIII):
strong and dense metals semiconductors, e.g. very unreactive
silicon and germanium
Figure 1 3. 2: Periodic Tab le showing the major regions.
261 >
261
Metals and non-metals The Periodic Table allows us to make even more useful
The main distinction in the Periodic Table is between subdivisions of elements than simply deciding which are
metals and non-metals. Metals are clearly separated metals and which are non-metals. The elements present
from non-metals. The non-metals are grouped into the in Groups I to VIII of the Periodic Table are sometimes
top right-hand region of the Periodic Table, above the known as the main-group elements. These vertical groups
thick stepped line in Figure 13.2. One of the first uses show most clearly how elements within the same group
of the Periodic Table now becomes clear. Although we have similar chemical and physical properties. Some of
may never have seen a sample of the element hafnium these groups have particular names as well as numbers,
(Hf), we know from looking at the Periodic Table that and we will refer to these names later in the chapter.
it is a metal. We may also be able to predict some of its Between Groups II and III of these main groups of
properties. The change from metallic to non-metallic elements is a block of metals known as the transition
properties in the elements across a period is not as clear- elements (or transition metals). The first row of these
cut as suggested by drawing the line between the two elements occurs in Period 4. This row includes such
regions of the Periodic Table. The elements close to the important metals as iron, copper and zinc.
line show properties that lie between these extremes (we The noble gases, in Group VIII on the right-hand side of
will consider the properties of metals and non-metals the Periodic Table, are the least reactive elements in the
in more detail in Chapter 14). These elements are now Periodic Table. However, the group next to them, Group
often referred to as metalloids (or semi-metals). Such VII, which are also known as the halogens, and the
elements have some of the properties of metals and group on the left-hand side of the Periodic Table, Group
others that are more characteristic of non-metals. There I or the alkali metals, are the most reactive elements. The
are eight elements that are called metalloids. They often more unreactive elements, whether metals or non-metals,
look like metals but are brittle like non-metals. They a.re are in the centre of the Periodic Table.
neither conductors nor insulators, but make excellent
semiconductors. The prime example of this type of
element is silicon (Figure 13.3).
Position of hydrogen in the
Periodic Tab le ...,..
Hydrogen is difficult to place in the Periodic Table.
Different versions place it above Group I or Group VII.
More often, in modern tables, it is left by itself (Figure
13.4). This is because, as the smallest atom of all, its
properties are distinctive and unique. It does not fit easily
into the trends shown in any one group (Table 13.1).
Hydrogen doesn't
., belong to any group.
..,
<og
Group ~
I II Ill IV V VI VII
He
he ivm
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Li Be B C N 0 F Ne
lithium ~ryUium tx,,o,, C:3rbon nitrogen oxygen fl:'uorine neon
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Na Mg Al Si p s Cl Ar
sodium ma9nesiutr aluminium silicon pho$phofus sulfur chlo,ine argon
19 20
K Ca
potau ium calcium
Figure 13.3: A sample of the element silicon, the basis of Figure 13.4: Position of hydrogen in the Periodic Table.
the semiconductor industry.
262)
262
their increasing atomic masses. However, it was later

, Lit hium Hydrogen Fluorine
found that atomic number provides a better basis for ·
solid at room gas gas putting the elements in order. Atomic number provides
temperature a linear, continuous sequence to listing the elements. But
metal non-metal; non-metal; the Periodic Table is a two-dimensional representation
forms diatomic forms diatomic obtained by breaking the continuous list at certain
molecules (H 2) molecules (FJ points. The resulting fragments of the sequence of
elements are then placed underneath each other. We
atom has one atom has one atom has seven
split the sequence of elements according to the structure
electron in electron in outer electrons in
of the energy levels (shells) of electrons in the atom. A
outer shell shell outer shell
periodic propert) is one that shows a repeating pattern in
atom can lose atom can form atom can gain the Periodic Table.
one electron either a positive or one electron
We can now directly link the properties of an element
r to achieve a negative ion; can to achieve
a noble-gas with its position in the Periodic Table and its electronic
a noble-gas gain one electron
to achieve a noble- arrangement configuration (Figure 13.5). The number of outer
arrangement
(forms a electrons in th1atoms of each element has been found.
(forms a gas arrangement,
negative ion) Elements in the same group of the Periodic Table have
positive ion) or lose its only
the same number of outer electrons. We also know that,
electron
as you move across a period in the Periodic Table, a shell
Table 13.1: A comparison of the properties of hydrogen of electrons is being filled. Each period in the Periodic .
with lithium (Group I) and fluorine (Group VII). Table represents the filling of an electron shell.
There is a clear relationship between electron
arrangem(?nt and position in the Periodic Table for the
KEY WORDS
metalloid (semi-metal): element that shows some •
. Elements in the same group have the same number
main-group elements.
of the properties of metals and some of of electrons in their outer shell. For the main-group
non-metals, e.g . boron and silicon elements, the number of the group is the number of
mai_n,group element s: the elements in the outer electrons in the outer shell
groups of the Periodic Table, excluding the • Periods of the Periodic Table also have numbers.
transition elements (Groups I-VIII) This number shows·us how many shells of electrons
the atom has. ·
transition elements (transition metals): elements
from the central region of the Periodic Table - A magnesium atom, for example, has two electrons in
t hey are hard, strong, dense metals, which form its third, outer, shell, and is in Group II and Period 3
compounds that are often coloured (Figure 13 .5). ;
alkali metals: elements in Group I of the Periodic ~
GROUPS
Table; t hey are the most reactive group of metals Ill IV V VI VII
periodic property: a property of t he elements
11
-VIII
2
He
that shows a repeating pattern when plotted
2, I 2,2 2,3 2,4 2,5 2,6 2.7 2,8
against proton number (Z) V) 2
0 Li Be B C N 0 F Ne
0 2,8,3 2,8.4 2,8,S 2,8,6 2,8,7 2,8,B
2,8, 1 2,8,2
ffi
0...
3 Na Mg Al Si p s Cl Ar
4 2,8,8,1 2,8,8,2
Organisation of the K Ca
Periodic Table Figure 13.5: Relationship between an element's position

in the Periodic Table and the electronic configuration of
When the first attempts were made to construct a
Periodic Table, the structure of the atom was unknown. its atoms.
The order of the elements was originally provided by
263
It is the outer electrons of an atom that are mainly Relationship between group number and
responsible for the chemical properties of any element.
ionic charge
Therefore, elements in the same group will have similar
properties. Certain electron arrangements are found to be The relationship between position in the Periodic Table
more stable than others. This makes them more difficult and electronic configuration means that there is a l,nk
to break up. The most stable arrangements are those of between group number and the charge on the ions that
the noble ga,es, and this fits in with the fact that they are atoms form (Figure 13.7).
so unreactive.
There are links between the organisation of particles VIII
--
in the atom and the regular variation in properties of Group
the elements in the Periodic Table. This means that I II Ill IV V VI VII None
we can see certain broad trends in the Periodic Table
u• Be 2• 0 2- F- Nohe
(Figure 13.6). These trends become most obvious if we
leave aside the noble gases in Group VIII. Individual Na• Mg2• AP• 52- Cl0 N0rae
groups show certain ' group characteristics'. These
properties follow a trend in particular groups. Transition
K• Ca2•
metals
KEYWORDS Figure 13.7: Ions formed by the main-group elements of the

Periodic Table.
noble gases: elements in Group VIII - a group of
stable, very unreactive gases
You can see that for the metal ions the positive charge
is the same as the group number. These atoms have lost
their outer electrons to form the ion. For non-metals the
negative charge on the ion is 8 minus the group number.
These atoks have gained electrons to form the negative
ion. The atoms of elements in the middle of a period
usually form covalent rather than ionic compounds. We
have discussed this relationship earlier in Chapter 4 when
talking about valency and writing formulae.
.
atoms getting smaller, less metallic
fluorine - the most
reactive non-metal
transition elements
caesium - the most

reactive metal
available in useful
amounts
Figure 13.6: General trends in the Periodic Table, leaving aside the noble gases in Group VIII.
264
ACTIVITY 13.1 .
Discovering elementary patterns! involved in the recent discoveries of new elements

(e.g. Glenn Seaborg, Dawn Shaughnessy or
In groups, organise yourselves as a team of news
Clarice Phelps).
reporters working on a breakthrough in organising
a table of the elements, or the discovery of new Research the scientist of your choice and the
elements. You are putting together a blog post context of their work. Remember that this is a news
celebrating this scientific progress. report, so does not need to be too technical.
Write a post celebrating t he achievement of a Once you have written your blog post, get together
scientist of your choice. You could choose a person with another group, swap reports and complete the
from the history of chemistry (e.g. Mendeleev, following peer assessment.
Marie Curie or William Ramsay) or someone
. Peer assessment Now, write down the answers to the fol lowing
questions to give some feedback to t he
Having swapped blog reports wit h another group,
other group:
discuss the fo llowing questions:
• What do you think they d id well? .
Does t heir blog post include?
• Next t ime they write a news b log, what could
1 A catchy/engaging heading.
they do to improve?
2 A concise and clear introduction .
3 Specific facts and information about their

chosen scientist and their achievement.
4 The group's own opinion on t he achievement.
Having worked wit h others on Activity 13.1, consider whether you found group work helped you in your
learning. Were you able to contribute confidently to the group discussion and appreciate the input of
others to it? What would you do differently to gain more from this t ype of activity in future?
13.2 Trends in groups

Group I - the alkali metals
The metals in Group I are often called the alkali metals.
They are soft sobds with relatively low melting points
and low densities (Figure 13.8). They are highly reactive
and are stored in oil to prevent them reacting with the
oxygen and water vapour in the air. When freshly cut
with a knife, all these metals have a light-grey, silvery
surface, which quickly tarnishes an·d becomes dull.
Figure 13.8: All alkali met als are soft solids and can be cut
with a knife. This is a sample of lithium.
265
Metal Electronic configuration Density/ g/ cm3 Melting point / 0

c Boiling point / °C Hardness
lithium 2, 1 0.53 181 1342 fairly soft
sodium 2,8,1 0.97 98 883 soft
potassium 2,8,8,1 0.86* 63 760 very soft
* the densities of rubidium and caesium are 1.53 and 1.88, respectively
Table 13.2: Physical properties of some alkali metals.
Heat produced by Production of alkaline

Alkali metal Gas production Production of flame
reaction solution
metal disappears
fizzes slowly, a moves slowly on the
lithium slowly, solution no fl ame
few bubbles surface, does not melt
turns purple
melts into a ball metal d isappears
fizzes strongly, no fl ame unless held
sodium on surface and quickly, solution
many bubbles in place
moves about turns purple
fizzes violently, very melts and moves very disappears very quickly, hydrogen ignites, a
potassium lilac flame produced
many bubbles quickly on surface solut ion turns purple
Table 13.3: Observations on the reactions of the alkali metals with water (with universal indicator added}.
The physical properties of the alkali metals change as Chemical reactivity increases as we go down the
we go down the group in Table 13.2. The melting points group. All Group I metals react with cold water to
become lower and the density of the metals increases. form hydrogen and an alkaline solution of the metal
hydroxide. The production of an alkaline solution can
There are several different trends down this group
be shown by adding a few drops of universal indicator to
of elements:
the water. The solution will turn the water purple if an
• melting points and boiling points decrease down alkali is produced. The reactions range from vigoro us in
the group the case of lithium to explosive in the case of caesium.
The strength of the reaction of each metal can be judged
• metals get softer as we go down the group
by several observations (Table 13.3). Observations such
., • densities increase as we go down the group as the production of a gas, whether the metal melts on
(although this trend is obscured in Table 13.2 contact with the water and whether the gas produced
because the value for sodium is higher than would is ignited all give an indication of how vigorous the
be expected; see footnote to table). reaction is.
Observing the trends in these values for physical You might predict that francium , at the bottom of
properties means we can predict values for other alkali Group I, would be the most reactive of all the metals.
metals. For instance, we would predict the melting point However, it is highly radioactive and very rare because
of rubidium to be lower than that of potassium by about it decays with a ha.If-life of five minutes. This means
20-30°C as the gap between melting points is getting that the amount of francium in any sample is halved
smaller at each step. This would suggest a value of in just five minutes. lt has been estimated that there are
between 33-43 °C. The actual value is 39°C. only 30g of francium in existence on Earth at any o ne
' moment in time.
266)
266
The alkali metals (Group I) are the most reactive metals

that occur. They are known as the alkali metals because
they react vigorously with water to produce hydrogen
• dense pale-green gas
and an alkaline solution, The equation for the reaction
• smelly and poisonous
between sodium and water is:
• occurs as chlorides, especially
sodium sodium chloride in the sea
sodium + water -+
hydroxide
+ hydrogen • relative atomic mass 35.5
2Na + 2Hz0 -+ 2NaOH
We will discuss the reactivity of the alkali metals further

in Chapter 14.
• deep-red liquid with
red-brown vapour
Questions • smelly and poisonous
1 What is the name of the alkali formed when • occurs as bromides, especially
potassium reacts with water? magnesium bromide in the sea
• relative atomic mass 80
2 Write a word equation for the reaction between
lithium and water.
3 Using the information in Tables 13.2 and 13.3:
a suggest a value for the melting point
of rubidium
b suggest how the reactivity of rubidium with
water compares with potassium.
if • grey solid with purple vapou r
• smelly and poisonous
• occurs as iodides and iodates in
some rocks and in seaweed
• relative atomic mass 127
Group VII - the halogens Figure 13. 9: General properties of some of the halogens
The most reactive non-metals are the h:IIO!!l' lls in Group (Group VII).
VII of the Periodic Table (Figure 13.9). In contrast with
Group I, in Group VII reactivity decreases down the The halogen family found in Group Vll of the Periodic
group. For example, fluorine is a dangerously reactive, Table shows clear similarities between the elements of
pale-yellow gas at room temperature. There is a steady the group. The common properties of the halogens are:
increase in melting points and boiling points as we go
down the group, and the elements change from gases to • They are all poisonous and have a similar
solids as the atomic number increases. Interestingly, the strong smell.
lowest element in this group is also a highly radioactive • They are all non-metals.
and rare element, astatine. The actual properties of
astatine remain a mystery to us, but we could make a • They all form diatomic molecules (e.g. Cl2 , Br2 and½)-
good guess at some of them. • They all have a valency of I and form compounds
with similar formulae, e.g. hydrogen chloride (HCI),
hydrogen bromide (HBr) and hydrogen iodide (HI).
' KEY WORDS , . .
• Their compounds with hydrogen are usualJy strong
halogeng: elements in Group VII of the Periodic
acids when dissolved in water, e.g. hydrochloric
Table - generally the most reactive group of acid (HCI), hydrobromic acid (HBr) and
non-metals hydriodic acid (HT).
halldtrs: compounds formed between an element • They each produce a series of compounds with
and a halogen, e.g. sodium iodide other elements, e.g. chlorides, bromides and iodides.
Together these are known as 1,nlhlr, .
267)
267
Electronic
Halogen Melting point / °C Boiling point / °C State at r.t.p Colour
c~nfiguration
chlorine 2,8, 7 - 101 -35 gas pale-green
bromine 2, 8, 18, 7 -7 +59 liquid reddish-brown
iodine 2, 8, 18, 18, 7 +114 +184 solid g reyish- black
Table 13.4: Physical properties of some halogens.
• The halogens themselves can react directly with Chlorine water acts as an oxidising agent - hypochlorous
metals to form metal halides (or salts). acid can give up its oxygen to other substances. It also
acts as a bleach because so me coloured substances Jose
• T hey all form negative ions carrying a single charge,
their colour when they are oxidised. This reaction is used
e.g. chloride ions (CJ-), bromide ions (Br-) and
iodide ions (I-). as the chemical test for chlorine gas (Chapter 22). Damp
litmus or universal indicator paper is bleached when held
There are gradual changes in properties between the in the gas. The halogens become steadily less reactive as
halogens (Figure 13.9). As you go down the group, the you go down the group. Table I 3.5 gives some examples
boiling points increase (Table 13.4). The physical state of the reactivity of the halogens.
of the halogens changes from gas to liquid to solid
The halogen displacement reaction~ shown in the lower
going down the group. The intensity of the colour of
part of Table I 3.5 demonstrate the order of reactivity
the element also increases, from pale to dark. Following
of the three major halogens. For example, if you add
these trends, it should not surprise you to know that
chlorine to a solution of potassium bromide, the
fluorine is a pale-yellow gas at room temperature.
chlorine displ1_1ces bromine (Figure 13. 10). Chlorine
is more reactive than bromine, so it replaces bromine
Chemical reactivity of the halogens and potassium chloride is formed. Potassium bromide
Fluorine and chlorine are very reactive. They combine solution is colourless. It turns orange when chlorine is
strongly with both metals and non-metals. A piece of bubbled through it:
Dutch metal foil (an a lloy of copper and zinc) will burst
into flames when placed in a gas jar full of chlorine. Cl2 + 2KBr -+ 2KC1 + Br2
When chlorine is passed over heated aluminium, the
colourless orange
metal glows white and forms aluminium chloride: ,
2AI + 3Cl2 heat Chlo rine will also displace iodine from potassium iodide:
~ Aluminium also reacts strongly with bromine and Cl2 + 2Kl -+ 2KCI + T2
iodine. The reaction between a dry mixture of powdered
aluminium and ioiline can be triggered by addingjust colourless yellow- brown
a few drops of water. The reaction is highly exothermic
and some of the iodine is given off as purple fumes I KEYWORDS
before it has a chance to react.
halogen displacement reactions: reactions in
Hydrogen will burn in chlorine to form hydrogen which a more react ive halogen displaces a less
chloride. Carried out a different way, the reaction can reactive halogen from a solution of its salt
be explosive:
H 2 + Cl 2 -+ 2HC1
Chlorine dissolves in water to give an aciilic solution. This

mixture is called chlorine water and contains two acids:
HCI + HCIO
hydrochloric hypochlorous
acid acid
268
ETu· ·;- --,~ --

,_
••
I ?.)-
1111\~l i 1' i
---~.---~ Group VIII - the noble gases
, .. J 1 : /I
,, ~,-·_ - --~L-J~ When Mendeleev first constructed his table, part of his
coloured bleaches bleaches bleaches triumph was to predict tJ1e existence and properties of
dyes easily slowly very slowly some undiscovered elements. However, there was no
iron wool iron reacts iron reacts indication that a whole group of elements (Group VUJ)
reacts steadily to slowly, remai ned to be discovered! Because of their lack of
strongly to form iron(m) even with reactivity, there was no clear sign of their existence.
iron wool form iron(rn) bromide; continuous However, analysis of the gases in air (Chapter 17) by John
chloride; needs heating, to William Strutt (Lord Rayleigh) led to the discovery of
needs heat continuous form iron(m) argon in 1894. There was no suitable place in the Periodic
t o start heating iodide Table for an individual element with argon's properties.
chlorides no reaction no reaction This pointed to the existence of an entirely new group.
Helium, which had first been detected by spectroscopy of
d isplaces light from the Sun during an eclipse, and other noble gases
bromine, in the group (Group VIII) were isolated by Sir William
bromides e.g. Cl2 + no reaction Ramsay in the 1890s. The radioactive gas, radon, was the
2KBr -+ last to be purified, in 1909.
2KCI + Br2
All of the noble gases are present in the Earth's atmosphere.
displaces displaces Together they make up about 1% of the total, though
iodine, e.g. iodine, e.g. argon is the most common. These gases are particularly
iodides
Cl 2 + 2KI -+ Br2 + 2KI -+ unreactive. They were sometimes referred to as t11e inert
2KCI + 12 2KBr + 12 gases, meaning they did not react at all. However, since the
1960s, some compounds of xenon and krypton have been
Table 13.5: Some reactions of the halogens.
.
made and their name was changed to the noble gases.
The uses of the noble gases depend on their umeactivity.
Helium is used in airships and balloons because it is both
light and un reactivc. Argon is used to fill incandescent
light bulbs because it will not react with the filament even
at high temperatures. The best-known use of the noble
gases is, perhaps, its use in 'neon' lights (Figure 13. 11 ). The
brightly coloured advertising lights wor~ when an electric
discharge takes place in a tube containing small amount of
.. a noble gas. Different gases give different colours.
Figure 13.11: 'Neon' lights give colour to Shanghai city

Figure 13.10: Bromine is displaced by chlorine from centre by their use in advertising displays. The different
a colourless solution of potassium bromide. colours are caused by different gases.
...,.
269
) CAMBRIDGE IGCSETr.t CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
The atoms of the noble gases do not combine with each

otlier to form molecules or any other form of structure. Quest ions
Their melting points and boiling points are extremely 4 Which halogen(s) will displace bromine from a
low (Figure 13.12). Helium has the lowest melting point solution of potassium bromide?
of any element and cannot be solidified by cooling alone 5 What is the similarity in the electron arrangement of
(pressure is also needed). the noble gases?
6 Arsenic is in the same group of the Periodic Table as
nitrogen. A rsenic forms a compound with hydrogen
just as nitrogen does. A molecule of this compound
contains one atom of arsenic and three atoms
of hydrogen.
a What is the formula of this molecule?
A 3AsH B As 3H
C AsHl O (AsH)3
b What would you predict to be the formula
of phosphine, the compound of phosphorus
and hydrogen?
13.3 Trends across

a period
Figure 13.12: A small piece of rapidly melting 'argon ice'; Changes across a period
the melting point is - 189°C. The elements of the vertical groups at either side of
the Periodic Table show similar properties within
All these properties point to the atoms of the noble gases the groups. However, following a period across the
being particularly stable: Periodic Table highlights the trend from metallic to
non-metallic properties within the Periodic Table.
• the electron electronic configurations of the atoms
of the noble gases are energetically very stable This change from metal to non-metal can be explored
by looking more closely across each period. The first
• this means that they do not react readily with period of the Periodic Table contains just two elements,
other atoms hydrogen and helium, both of which are distinctive
• in many situations where atoms of other elements in different ways. The .final period in the Periodic
bond or react chemically, they are trying to achieve Table is now recently complete with the discovery of
the energetically stable arrangement of electrons elements such as oganesson (Og) (see Chapter 4). Each
found in the noble gases. of the five remaining periods of elements starts with
a reactive alkali metal and .finishes with an unreactive,
The elements of Group VIII lie between the two most non-metallic, noble gas. In Period 3, for example, from
reactive groups of elements (Groups I and VII) in the sodium to argon, there appears to be a gradual change
Periodic Table. Indeed, it is their closeness to this group in physical properties across the period. The change
with stable electron arrangements that makes the alkali in properties seems to centre around silicon; elements
metals and the halogens so reactive. They can fairly before this behave as metals and those after it as
easily achieve a noble-gas electron structure. The Group non-metals (Figures 13.13 and 13.14).
Vll elements gain or share electrons and the Group I
elements lose electrons to reach a noble gas electronic
configuration (see earlier discussion in Chapter 3).
270)
270
As you move across a period there are also differences in

atomic size decreasing ) some chemical properties linked to the metal to non-'
IV metal transition. Metal oxides (e.g. magnesium oxide)
C gases
are usually basic, while those of non-metals (e.g. sulfur
<,) dioxide) are acidic. Therefore, there is a change from
ICC
·;;; basic oxides to acidic oxides as we move across a period
"'~ 3 Na Mg Al Si p s Cl Ar
(see also Chapter 11).
u
Q)
Ge The change from metal to non-metal across a period
-0
Q) D metals Al l elements except
N shows itself in changes in bonding type from metallic
·;;;
u
D metalloids Sn
Cl and Ar are solids
bonding to covalent bonding. To be more precise, in
.E D non-metals at room temperature .
0 Periods 2 and 3 there is a shift from metallic lattice to
~ Pb giant covalent structure and then to simple molecular
r
structure as we move across the Periodic Table. We
Figure 13.1 3: Changes in properties of the elements in
commented earlier on this when we were discussing the
Period 3 and in Group IV of the Periodic Table.
formulae of the elements in Chapter 4.
,_
The changeover in properties is emphasised if we look
at Group rv. As we go down this group, the change is
Transition elements
from non-metal to metal. The metalloids, silicon and If we look at Period 4 in the Periodic Table, we see that
germanium, are in the centre of the group (Figure 13.13). there·is a whole 'block' of elements in the centre of the
Periodic Table. This block of elements falls outside the
The different structures of the elements in Periods 2 and
main groups of elements that we have talked about so far.
3 are reflected in their boiling points and melting points.
They are best considered not as a vertical group of elements
Figure 13. I 4 shows how the values for the melting points
but as a row or block. They are usually referred to as the
and boiling points of the elements of Period 3 increase
transition elements (or transition metals). Their properties
up to Group IV and then decrease to Group VIII.
make them among the most useful metallic elements
,,. available to us (Figure 13.15). They are much less reactive
than the metals in Groups I and II. Many have ex.cellent
ME
i 3 -
corrosion resistance, for example chromium. The very high
.....u 2 melting point of tungsten (3410 °q led to its use in the
0)
..... filaments of incandescent light bulbs.
i?;-
·;;;
C Many familiar objects are made from transition metals.
Q)
0 Figure 13.15 shows a range of these objects, including steel
0 nails, a vanadium spanner, silver cutlery, gold jack plugs,
copper pipe joints, !l-!1 iron magnet, a titanium camera body
2800 and chromium-plated balls on the Newton's cradle.
~ 2300
.....
~ 1800
~ 1300
:;;
a.
E 800
~ 300 e IAg-pelA
-200 I
Na Mg Al Si p S Cl Ar
2.8.1 2,8,2
giant
. --...
2,8,3 2,8,4 2,8,5
giant
2,8,6 2,8,7
simple
2,8,8
metall ic covalent molecular
Figure 13.1 4: Trends in the structure and physical properties

of the elements across Period 3.
Figure 13.15: Some everyday objects made from
transition metals.
271 )
271
Coloured t ransition
metal salts dissolve to
give coloured solutions.
Figure 13.1 6: Many of the compounds of transition metals are coloured and, when they dissolve, they give
coloured solutions.
These general properties mean that the transition metals

are useful in a number of different ways. In addition,
there are particular properties that make these metals
oxidation number: a number g iven to show
distinctive and useful for more specific purposes. One
whether an element has been oxidised or
important feature of transition metals is that their
reduced; the oxidation number of a simple ion is
compounds are often coloured (Figure 13.16).
simply the charge on the ion
General features of transition metals:
• they are hard and strong
• they have high density Questions
• they have high melting and boiling points. 7 Describe how metallic character changes across
D istinctive properties of transition metals: Period 2 or 3.
8 a Which metal is the softest and least dense in
• many of their compounds are coloured
Period 3?
• the transition metals, or their compounds, often act b Which of the elements in Period 3 has the
as catalysts. Iron, for example, is used as a catalyst in highest melting point?
the Haber process for making ammonia (Chapter 9).
9 State four differences between an alkali metal and a
.. • they often show more than one valency (variable
O"\idation number) - they form more than one type
transition metal such as nickel.
10 Which phrase (A- D) completes the following
of ion. For example, iron can form compounds statement?
containing iron(II) ions (Fe2•) or iron(III)
All transition metals in their compounds ...
ions (Fe3• ).
A .. . are white in colour
These metals can often form more than one type
B ... are magnetic
of oxide because of the different oxidation states
they can show. The oxides of the lower oxidation C ... form ions of the type M 2• and M3•
state are basic ionic oxides, e.g.,copper(II) oxide and D ... have variable oxidation states.
chromium(II) oxide . However, the oxides of the
highest oxidation states, e.g. chromium(VI) oxide
, tend to be covalent and produce acidic solutions
in water. Chromium(III) oxide (Crp,) is similar to
aluminium oxide (Alp,) in- being an amphoteric
oxide (see Chapter 11).
272 >
272
SUMMARY
The chemical elements can be organised into the Periodic Table based on increasing atomic (proton) number.
The electronic configuration of an element deter mines the group in which an element occurs in the Periodic
Ta ble and the chemical properties of the element.
The ionic charge of an element relates to the group number of that element.
The chemical and physical properties of the Group I alkali metals (lithium, sodium and potassium) vary as
we descend the group and we can predict the properties of other members of the group, given data.
> Information on given elements in a group can be used to identify trends within all the elements of that group.
Trends in the data for certain properties of the halogens can be used to predict the properties of other
halogens in the group.
T he noble gases (Group VIII) are unreactive, monatomic gases because they have eight electrons in their
outer shells.
T here is a trend from metallic to non-metallic character in the proper ties of the elements as we move across a
period in the Periodic Table.
The transition elements (transition metals) have certain common key characteristics.
> Transition metal atoms are able to form ions with variable oxidation numbers.
I
PROJECT
Elements card game Figure 13.17 shows a suggested set of informatior:i

to enter on the cards, although you could add in
further or alternative information (but do make it
Symbol: Li
relevant to your learning).
Name: Lithium
Having made the cards, deal out a set of cards
Atomic number: 3 betweeri a pair of you and challenge each other
according to the following criteria:
Mass number: 7
• for names and symbols - alphabetical
Group: I
precedence wins
Period: 2
f • for numbers - the higher number wins
Physical state at r.t.: Solid
• for physical state - solid beats gas; with the
one liquid trumping all.
Figure 13.17: Suggested layout for an elements card -
probably not a winning onel · As you work through the game you can ask each
other questions about the cards you are currently
This is a card game in which two people compete challenging with; which element is the more
with each other on a chosen value in a set of cards reactive of the two elements, what is the electronic
featuring a particular collection of objects; in this configuration of the atoms and so on. ·
case the elements. In groups, make a set of cards
Use the game to reinfor<:e your familiarity with
based on the first 36 elements of the Periodic Table.
the elements.
273
> CAMBRIDGE !GCSE™ CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
1 The figure shows an outline of the Periodic Table with certain elements marked.
w -
---
t--
V
y
X
I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I
Which combination of the elements V, W, X or Yin the table is a metal

and a non-metal?
-
Non-metal Metal
A y V
r B y X
C w X
D w V [1 I
2 The reactivity of elements within a group in the Periodic Table changes

with their position in the group. Which eombination in the table shows
the order of increasing reactivity of elements in Group I and Group Vil?
Group I Group VII

A Cs-. Li f-. I
B u -. Cs I-. F
C u -. cs F -+ I
D Cs-+ Li I -+ F ' [1 I
.. 3 The table shows pan of two groups of the Periodic Table.
Group I Group VII

lithium, Li
sodium, Na chlorine, Cl
potassium, K bromine, Br
iodine, I
Choose from the elements given:

a a solid Group VII element [1 I
b the Group I element with the lowes1 density [1 J
c an element that is a liquid at room temperature [1 J
d the two elements that would react most violently with each other [2)
[Total: SJ
l
~
274
CONTINUED .
4 A list of statements about elements of the Periodic Table is given below. COMMAND WORD
State whether each of the following statements is true or false. state: express in
a Elements are arranged in order of their mass numbers. (1) clear terms
I
b All elements in Group VLII, the noble gases, have eight electrons in
their outer shell. (1)
c Transition elements have hlgh densities. [1)
d Transition elements are all metals. (11
e Elements in the same period of the Periodic Table have the same
number of electron shells. [1 )
(Total: 5)
> 5 a Manganese is ;;11 important. transitio1l'mctaL Inl<>rmation about three

manganese c~>mpounds is given below.
• Manganese( 11) sulfate is a pale pink crystalline ,olid.
• Manganese( IV) oxide is a black solid which speeds up the
(' decomposition of hydrogen pcrnxidc.
• MangancsdVI I) oxide i's a purple liquid.
Which three charnctcristic properties of transition metals arc shown
in this infor111a1ion? [3]
( -
b Chromium forms three different metal oxides:
chr<1111ium(II) nxidc. CrO
chromium(lll) oxide. Cr,O ,
chromium(VIJ oxide. CrO,
CrO is a basic oxide. whik CrO, dissolves in .water to li.m11 a strong
acid. Whal docs this tell you abo ut the type of lwnding present in
/
these two oxitks'/ (2)
c Cr,O, has si111ilar bonding lo alumi11iu111 oxide. 1\ l,O ,. What type of
oxide is it likely to he'! · (1 I
[Total: 6)
I
I
~
f
r
275
- - ---
I can
, See
I Topic...
I Needs
more work
.I Almost
there
I toConfideat
move
on
---- - - · - -- - - - -- - - - - ----- I - - - - I
understand how the elements in the Periodic Table
13.1
are organised in order of increasing atomic number
explain the similari ties of elements in the same
13. l
group in terms of their electronic configu ration
describe the relationship between group number and
13.1
ionic charge
describe the trend in physicaJ and chemical
13.2
properties of the alkali metals (G roup I)
describe the trend in physical and chemical
13.2
properties of the halogens (Group VII)
describe the properties of the noble gases
13.2
(Group VIII)
identify trends in groups given information on
the elements
13.2 •
describe the change from metallic to non-metallic 1,
13.3
character of the elements across a period
describe the key characteristics of the transition
elements (transition metals) 13.3
describe the ability of ti:ansition elements to form ,,.

f3.3
ions with variable oxidation numbers
., >.!..,, ...\•~ _.9)J .;_,•. _ . ,.,;
~. ,_, ~ ,, .. ,.. ..
- - - - - - - - - - -----
276
understand the differences in :t he physical properties of metals and non-metals
• learn about the reactions of metals with water, acids and oxygen
• explore and appreciate the u.sefulness of metallic elements
• learn that alloys are mixtlJres of metals with other elements
• learn how diag rams can be used to represent the physical structure of alloys
... . . uses of ce~tai
consider how alloys
277
GETTING STARTED
Metals, and structures made from them, play an 3 Working with a partner, discuss the term 'alloy'.
imp ortant part in our lives.
a Where have you heard the term before?
1 Take a look at the immediate environment
around you. What objects do you see that are
b What do you think an alloy is?
made using metals? Be ready to share yoar ideas with others in
2 How many different metals can you list that are the class.
being used in those objects?
SMART ALLOYS REMEMBER THAT SHAPE 1
A series of metal alloys with remarkable properties

has recently found use in new and exciting
applications. These alloys, called shape memory
alloys, have great elasticity (they bend without
breaking) and a property not usually linked to
metals - memory! Ordinary metals do not have
any memory of their shape. If you sit on a pair of
aluminium spectacles and bend them permanently,
it is difficult to get them back to their original
shape. Shape memory materials behave differently.
They can be bent (deformed) at one temperature
but then recover their original, undeformed shape
-
'-
Figure 14.1: A spectacles frame made from nitinol can
when heated.
be flexed, bent or twisted but would return to its original
The first of these alloys to find widespread shape afterwards.
practical use was 'nitinol' (a nickel-titanium alloy).
There is now a range of these shape memory are stored away in the body of the rocket prior to
alloys, with some based on the original nickel- launching. The rocket is launched at a relatively low
titanium combination mixed with either copper temperature and the shape memory metal arms
or aluminium. Unlike many traditional metals are bent inwards with the solar panels safely folded
• and alloys, shape memory alloys are both strong up with the satellite. Once in space, the satellite
and flexible, easy to sterilise, unreactive and is released from the rocket. When exposed to the
biocompatible. Being biocompatible, they are used warmth of the Sun's rays, the memory metal arms
in medical and health-related equipment, including automatically spring back to their original shape
spectacles frames (Figure 14.1), dental implants and allowing the solar panels to fold out ?nd function.
miniaturised stents to hold veins and arteries open
and allow blood to flow. They are also lightweight Discussion questions
and resistant to corrosion, and have been widely
1 Nitinol is the name for the shape memory
used in engineering applications, such as in
alloy developed during the 1960s at the Naval
robot ics and the aerospace industry.
Ordnance Laboratory in the USA. Why do you
Orbiting satellites use solar panels to generate the think it was given this name by its discoverer?
power they use to carry out their functions. These
2 The study of the properties of material is called
solar panels are attached to the satellite by arms
material science. Which of the properties of
made of shape memory metal. The satellites
shape memory alloys make them particularly
suitable for the different applications?
278
14 M et allic elem e nt s and alloys
VIII
group:
□
~
I II Ill IV V VI VII
rea, ~ive
me ~ Is
non metal
Sc Ti V Cr Mn Fe Co Ni Cu Zn
-· other
~
- tr msitic n met,,ts ~
metah
Figure 14.2: Distribution of metals and non-metals in the Periodic Table.
The best way to identify a metal or non-metal is to

14.1 The properties check whether it conducts electricity or not. T he simple
apparatus for doing this was shown as the method for
of metals testing the electrical conducth'lty of a solid in Chapter 6.
A simple circuit is set up and any current flow is detected
by tpe bulb (or measured by an ammeter).
Physical properties of metals
All metals conduct electricity, even mercury, which
and non-metals is liquid at room temperature. All non-metals, except
graphite, do not conduct electricity. Together with
Most of the elements (70 out of a total of I 18 known
electrical conductivity, malleabilit~·, ductilit:v and thermal
elements) can be classified as metals_ They are positioned conductivity are the other physical properties that most
I to the left in the Periodic Table (Figure 14.2). The metals
clearly characterise a metal.
form a group of elements whose structures are held
together by metallic bonding (a form of bonding discussed
KEYWORDS
.. in detail in Chapter 3). This type of bonding gives rise to
many properties that the metals have in common. However,
there is wide variation in the level of these properties when
electrical cond uctivity: the ability to
conduct electricity
we look in detail at different metals. For instance, many
metals have a high density (e.g. iron), but the alkali metals malleability: the ability of a substance to be bent
(Group 1) have low densities (Chapter 13). or beaten into shape. Malleable is the word used
Non-metals lie to the right of the table and they tend to to descri be a substance that can be bent or beaten
have properties that are the opposite of the metals. This into shape.
transition, from left to right, is one of the major trends ductility: the ability of a substance to be drawn out
present in the structure of the Periodic Table and is into a wire. Ductile is the word used to describe a
discussed in Chapter 13. Non-metals are a less uniform substance that can be drawn out into a wire.
group of elements. Non-metals form either simple
molecular structures (e.g. hydrogen, oxygen and sulfur) thermal conductivity: the ability to conduct heat
or giant covalent structure (e.g. carbon). This means
that non-metals show a much wider range of properties, Metals have a crystalline structure in which the metal
reflecting the wider differences in their structure (see atoms are packed in layers that can slide over each other.
Chapter 3 for discussion of the bonding in non-metals).
279
This regular lattice structure gives rise to the characteristic thermal conduction
properties of metals. Metals are said to be workable
(malleable) and are usually easy to beat or bend into shape.
This is why metals are so useful to us for making things.
They can also be stretched into wires (they are ductile).
111111111,111111111
If a metal is subjected to a small force, it will stretch and faster vibrating atoms collide
then return to its original shape when the force is released. with slower vibrating atoms
However, if a large force is applied, the layers of atoms slide
over each other and stay in their new positions (Figure 14.3).
force -
applied
. . ." . ....
•:-:-:-:
• •
. .'.
4
before
•: •
A
. " . .. " ....

a
- after
wbonds
formed
Figure 14.4: The giant metallic lattice structure of metals
means that they are good conductors of heat .
These important physical properties that all metals show

Figure 14.3: The layers of meta l atoms in their structure mean
to a greater or lesser extent are dfrectly related to their
that they can slide over each other when a force is applied.
structural characteristics. Table 14.1 presents a summary
of the differences in the physical properties of metals and
Metals conduct heat well. This good thermal non-metals.
conductivity results from the structure of the metals.
When one part of a metal is heated, the metal atoms
vibrate more strongly (the vibration of atoms in solids KEYWORD
is discussed in Chapter I). The increased vibration of sonorous: a word to describe a metallic substance
the metal atoms where the metal is heated is passed
that rings like a bell when hit with a hammer
throughout the whole metal structure (Figure 14.4).
Physical property Metals Non-metals

Non-metals are solids or gases at room
Metals are usually solids (except for mercury,
melting points and temperature (except for bromine, which is a
which is a liquid) at room temperature. Many
boiling points liquid). Their melting and boiling points are
metals have high melting and boiling points.
often low.
. Non-metals are poor conductors of electricity
electrical conductivity All metals are good conductors of electricity. (except for graphite). They tend to be
insulators.
Non-metals are generally poor thermal
thermal conduct.ivity Metals are good conductors of heat. conductors (except diamond, which
conducts heat strongly).
The shape of a piece of metal can be
malleability and changed by hammering (they are malleable). Non-metals are not malleable; they are
ductility They can also be pulled out into wires (they brittle and break easily when hit.
are ductile).
Metals are usually strong and dense. When Most non-metals are softer than metals (but
strength and
a force is applied, they are hard and do not diamond is very hard). Their densities are
hardness
shatter (they are not brittle). often low.
ability to produce a Metals usually make a ringing sound when
Non-metals are not sonorous.
sound struck (they are sonorous).
colour and Metals are grey in colour (except gold and Non-metals vary in colour. They often have a
appearance copper). They can be polished. dull surface when solid.
Table 14.1: How the properties of metals and non-metals differ.
::-
280 >
280
14 M etallic elements and alloys
Sodium reacts violently with both air and water. Iron,

, Questions on the other hand, reacts much more slowly with air /ind
1 Sort the properties in the box into two sets. water, producing rust. Gold remains unchanged in the
a Those that are characteristic of a metal. presence of air and water.
b Those typical of a non-metal. Looking in more detail at these basic reactions reveals a
pattern of reactivity among metals. In this chapter and
is an insulator can be beaten into sheets the next, we will add progressively more detail to our
gives a ringing sound when hit understanding of the reactivity of metals.
conducts heat well
conducts electricity well Table 14.2 summarises the reactions of certain metals
has a dull surface with air, water and dilute acid. A gradual decrease in
reactivity can be seen moving down the table from the
2 State the names of the following. highly reactive (sodium and calcium) to the unreactive
a A non-metal that conducts electricity. (copper, silver and gold). Note that the true reactivity
of aluminium is only seen if its protective oxide layer
b Two metals that are soft.
is removed.
c A metal that is liquid at room temperature.
---
-
d A non-metal that conducts heat well.
3 List the three properties that most clearly help you
to tell the difference between a metal and a non-
v metal. Explain how the structure of a metal gives sodium burn very react with react very
rise to any two of these properties. calcium strongly in cold water strongly
air to form t o give to give
magnesium oxide hydrogen hydrogen
aluminium<•> react with
What learning strategies have you used to learn burn less steam, react less
tine
about the link between metallic bonding and strongly in when strongiy
metallic properties? Do you find it useful to air to form heated, to give
create summary diagrams or bullet point lists of iron oxide to give hydrogen
the key points? hydrogen
lead react
slowly to
do not do not
form oxide
Chemical reactions of metals copper layer when
react react
• heated
with.air, water and dilute acids
silver do not do not
The chemical properties of metals and non-metals are do not react
gold react react
also very different, which makes the distinction between
these two types of substances very important. Metals <•>These reactions only occur if the protective oxide
show some characteristic reactions with common layer is removed from the aluminium.
reagents such as water, oxygen and acids. However,
the strength and rate of these reactions varies greatly Table 14.2: Reactions of metals with air, water and dilute
( hydrochloric acid.
depending on the particular metal considered. We have
seen in the previous Chapter 13 that there are variations
in the reactivity of metals as one goes down a particular It is useful to look in more detail at the reactions
group of the Periodic Table. The reactivity of the of particular metals with air, water and dilute
Group I a lkali metals with water increases as we go down hydrochloric acid.
the group. Also, we saw that the transition elements
(transition metals) are less reactive than the alkali metals.
-
281 )
I'
281
Reactions of metals with air/ oxygen However, iron exposed to air and water will slowly form
In discussing the reactions of metals with air, it is an oxide layer (rust) on its surface. This layer of rust
important to note that oxygen is by far the most reactive (hydrated iron(III) oxide) does not stick to the surface of
of the gases present. Many metals react directly with the metal but flakes off This rusting process dama..,es the
oxygen to form oxides. Magnesium, for example, burns iron object.
brightly in air or oxygen to form a white powder of Aluminium is normally coated with a thin layer of
magnesium oxide. aluminium oxide (Alp3) by reaction with the oxygen
in the air. This oxide layer sticks to the surface of the
magnesium + oxygen -+ magnesium oxide aluminium and hides the reactivity of the metal.
2Mg(s) + -+ 2MgO(s)
Reactions of met als wit h water/steam
Iron only burns in air to give an oxide if it is in powder Reactive metals such as potassium, sodium and calcium
form (Figure 14.5), or as iron wool. all react with cold water to produce the metal hydroxide
and hydrogen gas.
metal + water -+ metal hydroxide + hydrogen
For example:
sodium
sodium + water -+ + hydrogen
hydroxide
2Na(s) + 2Hp(l) -+ 2Na0H(aq) + Hi(g)
calcium
calcium + water -+ + hydrogen
hydroxide
Ca(s) + 2Hp(I) -+ Ca(OH)iaq) + Hi(g)
Magnesium only reacts very slowly in cold water.

However, a much more vigorous reaction takes place if
steam is passed over heated magnesium. The magnesium
glows brightly to form hydrogen and magnesium oxide.
The hydrogen given off can be burnt when lit with a
splin t (Figure 14. 6).
-+ magnesium
magnesium + steam oxide + hydrogen
Figure 14.5: Iron dust ignited in a Bunsen flame. Mg(s)
Hydrogen gas is given off.

This b urns when lit with a burning splint.
steam metal
mineral
wool soaked
in water
heat heat
Figure 14.6: Heating magnesium in the presence of steam.
282)
282
14 Metallic elements and alloys
........
Zinc and iron will react in a similar way if steam is The summary of the reactions of metals with these
passed over the heated metal. reagents (Table 14.2) allows us to construct an
approximate order of reactivity for these metals. We will
Iron + steam --t iron oxide + hydrogen look in more detail at these and other observations in the
next chapter.
3Fe(s) + 4Hp(g) --t Fep4 (s) + 4H,(g)
Hydrogen gas is produced in all these reactions. You

should note that in these cases it is the metal oxide, not
Q uestions
the hydroxide, that is formed. 4 A word equation is shown here:
magnesium + hydrochloric acid -+ magnesium
In summary:
chloride + hydrogen
• if a metal reacts with cold water, a metal hydroxide What is the symbol equation for this reaction?
and hydrogen are formed
A 2Mg + HCI -+ MgCJ2 + Hl
• if a metal reacts only with steam, then a metal oxide
B Mg + 2HC1 - MgCll + H2
is formed.
C Mg + HCI - MgCl2 + Hl
D 2Mg + 2HCl--t MgCl 2 + H2
Reactions of metals with dilute
5 Select from this list two metals that will not react
hydrochloric acid with hydrochloric acid to produce hydrogen:
Moderately reactive metals such as magnesium, zinc or zinc, copper, iron, magnesium, silver
iron can be reacted safely with dilute acids to produce
hydrogen gas (Figure 14.7)
6 a Some metals react with cold water. Complete
the general word equation for this type
metal + hydrochloric acid -+ metal chloride + hydrogen of reaction.
For example: metal + water -+ metal _ ___ + _ _ __
b Other metals do not react with cold water but
+ hydrochloric -+ iron(II) + hydrogen
iron do react when steam is passed over the heated
acid chloride
metal. Complete the general word equation for
Fe(s) + 2HCl(aq) --t FeCl,(aq) + Hi(g)
this type of reaction.
metal +steam -+ metal _ ___ + _ _ _ _
zinc + hydrochloric -+ zinc chloride + hyd rogen C Write the chemical equation for the
acid
reaction when steam is passed over heated
Zn(s) + 21-ICl(aq) --t magnesium.
ii Balance the following equation for the
reaction between iron wi re and steam.
_fe + _ t t p -+ Fe 30 4 + _ H 2
Figure 14.7: The reaction between zinc and dilute

hydrochloric acid produces hydrogen gas.
283
It is the unreactive, or only moderately reactive,

14.2 Uses of metals transition metals that have proved most useful to us
The production of iron dates back to Middle Eastern historically for construction and other purposes. Iron
cultures in the Middle Bronze Age and then spreads and copper are perhaps the two most important of these
through India and China (Figure 14.8). The skills of transition metals. In addition to the transition metals,
the smiths and metalworkers stretch back th rough aluminium is increasingly used for a variety of purposes.
history. For example, the 'art' of making the blades
of Samurai swords, forged from traditional Japanese Uses of iron
steel, involves processes of heat treatment and folding The famous bridge at Ironbridge io Shropshire, England
that is truly astounding. Such technology grew out of (Figure 14.9), marks a historic Industrial Revolution io
practical understanding. 1t gave rise to a whole series Europe. Made from cast iron and opened in 1781, it was
of techniques and alloys that produced metals fit for a the first iron bridge in the world.
purpose. T his expertise has now been added to as the
structure of metals has been increasingly understood. We
now have a wide range of steels and other alioys suited
to demanding uses.
,-.,
Figure 14.9: The bridge at lronbridge was the first ever

bridge b uilt of iron and was awarded UNESCO World
Heritage status in 1986. It has a span of around 30m.
We use about nine times more iron than all the other
metals put together. Iron is a moderately reactive
transition metal. By itself, pure iron is quite soft and
weak, and therefore not very useful for construction.
Cast iron obtained directly from the blast furnace
(Chapter 16) can be used to make very large objects such
as the bridge structure at Ironbridge. Cast iron was used
in rails, boats, ships, aqueducts and buildings, as well
as in iron cylinders in steam engines. Iron production
and use was central to the Industrial Revolution using
new manufacturing processes in Europe and the United
States during the 18th century. Cast iron can even be
used in making cooking pots and pans as it conducts
heat well. However, the use of iron for smaller or more
sophisticated pieces of engineering was restricted as it
was too brittle for this widespread use.
The high level of carbon in cast iron (2-4%) disrupts the
Figure 14.8: The Iron Pillar of Delhi dates from the lattice structure of the iron and makes the metal liable
beginning of the 5th century and is remarkable for it s to shatter when too much force is applied (the metal is
resistance t o rusting. too brittle). The strength of iron can be improved by
284 J
284
carefully controlling the amount of carbon present and Aluminium is particularly useful because it is protected
by adding other metals to create different forms of steel from corrosion by the stable layer of alum inium '
to match the use intended. oxide that forms on its surface. This protective layer
stops the aluminium (a reactive metal) from reacting,
The use of iron was also complicated by the fact that it This makes aluminium foil containers ideal for food
rusts easily. When exposed to air and water, iron becomes packaging because they resist corrosion by natural acids
coated with an orange- red powder of hydrated iron(Ill) present in the food . A luminium is also used for external
oxide (rust), which flakes off and weakens the structure structures such as window frames because the metal
(Chapter 16). This problem has led to various methods resists weathering.
to combat rusting and also to the development of
stainless steel.
Uses of copper
Copper has a distinctive colour and is one of the least
Uses of aluminium
,: reactive metals in common use. It is used for water pipes
Aluminium was, for a long time, an expensive and little- and as roofing for buildings. Copper roofs, and indeed
used metal. In France, around the 1860s, at the Court statues, become coated with a green layer of basic
of Napoleon III (the nephew of Napoleon Bonaparte), copper(ll) carbonate, known as verdigris, when exposed
honoured guests used cutlery made of aluminium rather
to the atmosphere for a long time.
than gold. The breakthrough in its usefulness came in 1886
when Charles Hall and Paul Heroult independently found Copper has a very high electrical conductivity and is very
a way to obtain the metal by electrolysis (Chapter 16). ductile, and so can be easily drawn out as wire. A major
use of copper is in electrical cables and domestic wiring·
Aluminium is a light, strong metal and has good (Figure 14. J l ). It is also used in the circuit boards of
electrical conductivity. Increasingly, aluminium is used smartphones and other electronic equipment. The copper
for construction purposes. It is used in the construction used for wiring and circuit boards must be of high purity
- of some naval vessels and modern cars. It is commonly

used in aeroplanes, where it is usually alloyed with other
metals such as copper (Figure 14.10). Its low density and
good conductivity have also led to its use in overhead
(99.i 9%) or the electrical conductivity will be reduced
significantly. This is why copper is refined to very high
purity by elect rolysis.
power lines. The aluminium is very resistant to corrosion
and its low density prevents sagging of the cables
between pylons.
Figure 14.10: The world's first super.sonic passenger jet

Figure 14.11 : A major use for copper is in electrical cabling
Concorde was built out of an alloy containing over
.. 90% aluminium.
and domestic wiring .
285
> CAM BRIDGE IGCSE™ CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
Metal Key properties Uses

iron hard (but brittle and now replaced by steel) construction girders, large castings
good conductor of heat cooking utensils
copper strong but easily bent to shape water pipes
strong with high electrical conductivity electrical wiring and cables
zinc protective coating on iron and steel objects galvanising iron and steel to prevent rusting
aluminium low density and strong construction, e.g. aircraft and high-voltage power cables
resistant to corrosion by acids in food food containers
Table 14.3: Properties and uses of some major metals.
Table 14.3 summarises some of the major uses of key metals and the properties that give rise to those uses.
14.3 Alloys
The Periodic Table does not list substances such as steel,
bronze and brass, which in everyday use we call metals,
and which share the properties listed for metals. They
are not elements. They are alloy~, mixtures of elements
(usually metals) designed to have properties that are
useful for a particular purpose.
,...
'-
alloys: mixtures of elements (usually metals)

designed to have the properties useful for a
particular purpose, e.g. solder (an alloy of t in and
lead) has a low melting point
Figure 14.12: Bronze statue of Nelson Ma.ndela (Western
Cape, South Africa). ·
Some important alloys
$ Pure metals are not always the most useful for practical
purposes. Iron is q uite soft and rusts easily, and copper is
not very strong. However, we can modify the properties
of a metal to make it stronger or more resistant to
corrosion by making an alloy of it.
The use of alloys such as bronze stretches back into
human early history. Modern bronze (F igure 14.12) has
.a similar composition to the types of bronze developed
in Bronze Age cultures (90% copper and J0% tin) about
5000 years ago.
lronbridge (Figure 14.9) may have seen the construction
of the first iron bridge, but modern bridges arc now
made of steel. Here, iron is alloyed with other transition
elements and carbon to make it stronger. The strength Figure 14.13: The Chaotianmen Bridge over the Yangtze
of steel means that more visually pleasing and longer River in Chongqing City, China. The bridge is one of the
designs are structurally possible (Figure 14.13). world's longest through-arch steel bridges and has a span
of 552m.
.:::::
286
Making an alloy of one metal with another is one of the Strength is not the only property to consider when
• commonest ways of changing the properties of metals. designing an alloy. For example, solder is an alloy of tin
Alloys are formed by mixing the molten metals together and lead. It is useful for making electrical connections
thoroughly and then allowing them to cool and form a because its melting point is lower than that of either of
solid. Alloying often results in a metal that is stronger, the two separate metals.
harder and more corrosion resistant than the original
Also, steel, which rusts when in contact with oxygen and
individual metals. Other examples of alloys and their
water, can be prevented from doing so when alloyed with
properties are given in Table 14.4.
chromium and nickel. The transition metals chromium
and nickel are similar to aluminium in that they form
Typical Particular a p rotective oxide layer on their surface and so are
Alloy
composition properties and uses resistant to corrosion. The presence of these atoms in
copper 70% harder than pure the alloy gives the stainless steel formed a resistance to
copper; 'gold' rusting (Table 14.4).
coloured I musical
brass instruments, Structure of alloys
zinc 30% ornaments,
As we saw earlier in this chapter (and when discussing
electrical
metallic bonding in Chapter 3), the atoms in a pure
connections
metal are arranged in regular layers. When a force is
copper 90% harder than pure applied, the layers can slide over each other. When an
bronze copper/ statues, alloy is made using a mixture of metals, or a metal with a
tin 10% bells, machine parts non-metal, the alloy is not simply a mixture of different
iron 99.7% stronger and harder crystal regions but the atoms of the second element form
mild
than pure iron/ part of the overall crystal lattice (Figure 14.14).
steel
- carbon 0.3% car bodies

iron 74% harder than pure
chromium 18% iron; does not rust
I cutlery, surgical
stainless
instruments,
steel
nickel 8% reaction vessels
in the chemical
industry I
t in 50% lower melting
,,, point than either
solder t in or lead/ A mixture of metal crystals
lead 50% making electrical
connections
Table 14.4: Some important alloys.
KEYWORDS
brass: an alloy of copper and zinc; this alloy
is hard
.
stainless steel: an alloy of iro n t hat resists
corrosion; this steel contains a significant An alloy
proportion of chromium which results in the
Figure 14.14: An alloy is not a mixture of metal crystal
alloy being resistant to rusting
regions but a regular lattice of atoms.
....,
287
\\'.,hen a metal is alloyed with a second metal, the

different sized atoms make the lattice structure less
regular. The crystal lattice of the main metal present
is disrupted. Figure 14.15 shows how the presence of
the ' impurity' atoms (the larger atoms in this diagram)
force
makes it more difficult for the metal atoms to slide over
applied
each other. This makes the alloy stronger but more brittle
here
than the metals it is made from. The alloy tends to be
more brittle than the pure metal as the regularity of the
structure has been broken.
Figure 14.15: Alloys are stronger than pure metals because the
The alloy lattice is still held together by metallic bonding
layers cannot slide over each other easily as in a pure metal.
with delocalised electrons free to move between the
layers of the structure. Alloys, therefore, share the
same characteristic physical properties - malleability,
ductility, electrical and thermal conductivity - as the
metallic elements.
Questions Which of these materials are most suitable to

make the case and pins of the electric plug (Figure .
7 a The wiring.and connections involved in a 14.16)? Choose one of the alternatives A- D :
domestic electric circuit must be very safe.
Figure 14.16 shows the structure of a simple Case Pins
domestic electric plug. -~ , •. •
A x· y
B w X .._
C z y
D y z
b Which alloy is most often used for the pins of
such a p lug?
8 Electrical wiring requires use of a good.conductor
and insulation. F igure 14.17 shows the end of
. pins
some cabling.
Figure 14.16: An electric plug.
The properties of four materials, some of

which could be used in the home, are shown in
Table 14.5.
Electrical wire
MeltiAg point /
Material conductivity
•c Figure 14.17: Some domestic electric cable.
when solid
w -39 good a Which metal is usually used as the wire in
X - 20 to -10 poor this cable?
y 170 to 220 poor b What material is usually used for insulation in
z 1083 good the cable?
Table 14.5: The properties of some materials.
::::-
\.
288 >
288
9 Stainless steel is an alloy often used to make cutlery.

a Name two of the main metal ele~ents in
stainless steel.
b What are two of the properties of stainless steel
that make it particularly useful in cutlery?
ACTIVITY 14.1
Intriguing alloys! In groups, discuss the different alloys in t he photos

and their different uses. If you have samples of the
Alloys are metals designed for a purpose. The
alloys available, pass th ese around your group as
properties of the alloy improve on those of the
you discuss.
parent metals. By adjusting the composition of the
mixture, the properties best suited to a particular In your discussion, focus on: (You may want to
purpose are achieved. search the internet to help you.)
If samples of alloys are available in your laboratory, • the composition of these different alloys
then do examine them. Figure 14.18 shows examples
of some of the more important alloys while • the property that is being improved, or
Figure 14.1 shows a use of a shape memory alloy. designed for, in ea 7h case
• the uses that these alloys are designed for.

Draw up a table of your findings to share with other
groups. Follow the example shown:
Name What could this

Composition Properties
of alloy be used for?
Brass is
Brass composed
of ...
When considering the uses of brass and stainless
steel, in particular, think about the followi ng:
• Why is brass not used in electrical wiring?
• Why is stainless steel not used to build very
large structures such as bridges?
Figure 14.18: Some more important alloys in use (top)

pewter, solder; (middle) brass, stainless steel; (bottom)
mild steel, copper-nickel alloy.
Peer assessment
Ask your partner the following questions:
• What did I do well during our d iscussion about the d ifferent alloys?
• What is one thing I could improve on?
..t
, 289)
289
SUMMARY
Metals and non-metals have different physical properties.

The key physical properties of metals are that they conduct electricity, and are malleable and ductile.
Metals vary considerably in their reactivity with water, oxygen and dilute acids.
Some metals react strongly with cold water to produce alkaline solutions and hydrogen gas.
Other metals react only when heated with steam, while some do not react with water at all.
The most reactive metals can react with oxygen in the air.
A range of metals react with dilute acids to produce hydrogen, but there are some metals so unreactive that
they do not react with dilute acids.
Some metals are very useful, with a luminium being particularly useful for its low density and resistance
to corrosion.
Alloys are mixtures of metals and other elements, which are often chosen to increase the strength and
usefulness of the pure metal.
I
Stainless steel is a hard alloy created specifically to resist corrosion.
Alloys can be identified in diagrams of metallic structure by noting the different sizes of the atoms in the
layered arrangement shown.
Alloys are stronger and harder than pure metals as the layers in the structure can no longer slide over
> each other.
I
290)
290
PROJECT
Making predictions Construct a flow chart (Figure 14.19) of the tests

you would do to establish how reactive a metal is.
In this chapter, we have outlined some basic
reactions of metals with water and dilute acids. This You have access to the following reagents and
confirms that some metals are more reactive than apparatus to help you:
others. We can begin to construct an approximate
order of reactivity from such results. You can begin • dilute hydrochloric acid solution
to get an idea of such an order using the possible • cold, distilled water
reactions with water and acids.
• dilute sulfuric acid
• a steam generator and apparatus to test for
any reaction with steam.
Decide on a series of chemical tests that you
would carry out to decide approximately where
an unknown metal would be placed in an order
of reactivity (or reactivity series). Start yvith the
test that would show whether the metal was very
reactive. Then work out a sequence based on the
possible results at each stage.
Consider the following questions:
• Are you confident that you have the tests in
the best order?
r
• Would you expect the two acids to give
different results?
• Do the tests in your flow chart give you a
detailed suggestion of a reactivity series, or is
Figure 14.19: Constructing a flow chart.
more information required?
Once you've finished, check in groups that you are
confident of the products of the different types
of reaction you have used and that you can write
equations for them. Add these to your flow chart.
291)
291
1 What is produced when sodium metal reacts with water?
A oxygen gas and an acid solution
B hydrogen gas and a neutral solution
C hydrogen gas and an alkaline solution
0 oxygen gas and an alkaline solution [1]
2 Which of the following statements is true for all metals?
A They are grey in colour.
B They are weak and brittle solids.
C They react with water.
D They may be used to make alloys with other elements. [1]
3 The table shows some of the properties of metals and non-metals. For
each property, write True or False in the space provided to show whether
it applies to most metals, mast non-metals or to both.
1 .,,. , -•. · ·~ )(·r,1 -.., ',w
Pro0erty - lJietals Non-metals
They condu ct electricity
They react with oxygen in the air
They are brittle . 0

They can easily be bent and shaped
They have high melting points

[SJ
4 Aluminium is used for the following purposes: manufacturing aircraft,
overhead electrical power cables and food containers.
a Which property of aluminium is most important for its use in
aircraft manufacture? [1]
b Which property is most useful for its use in food containers? [1]
c Aluminium is a good conductor of electricity, but this is not why it is
used in overhead power cables. Why is it used for power cables? (1]
COMMAND WORD
d Electrical wiring in the home does not use aluminium. Which metal is
used? Suggest why this metal is preferred. [2] suggest: apply
e Brass is also important in the home for electrical connections. Which knowledge and
of these words correctly dt;Scribe brass? Choose all correct answers. [4) understanding to
situations where
Alloy Compound Conductor Element Metal Mixture
there are a range
f Stainless steel is used to make cutlery. In what ways does stainless of valid responses
steel differ from iron? [2] in order t o mi,ike
proposals/
(Total: 11)
put forward
considerat ions
292 >
- - - - --- -- --------
292
5 The figure shows an alloy and the metals from which it is made.
" , :y T T
...... COMMAND WORD

. . ...
...
,£-::~
v._{jj.\;,"' T '-lo- • ,: explain: set out
pure metal A alloy pure metal B
purposes or
reasons/make t he
a Explain why the two pure metals are malleable. (1) relationships between
things evident/
> '·~... b;_ Explain why the alloy is not malleable.
~
'
· · c Is the alloy able to conduct electricity? Explaih your answer. •
-- ' ~
1
-" ,:-
•,
.- ••
.
[1I
(2).
provide why and/or
(Total: 4) relevant evidence
293
Confident
See Needs Almost
I can to move
on
- -
compare the general physical properties of meta ls 14.1

and non-metals
describe the general chemical properties of metals 14. 1

in relation to their reactions wilh acids, water
a nd oxygen
describe the uses of meta ls; pa rticularly the uses of 14.2

a luminium, copper and stainless steel
describe an alloy as a mixtu re of a metal with 14.3

other elements, referring particularly to brass and
stainless steel
understand that alloys can be harder or stronger 14.3

than the pure metals and therefore more useful
identify representations of alloys from diagrams 14.3 •

of structu re
describe the use of a lloys in terms of their physical 14.3

> properties, including the use of stainless steel
explain, in terms of structure, bow alloys can be 14.3

> harder or stronger than the p ure metals because'the
layers can no longer slide over each other
•
294 )
294
• analy,se how different metals show differences in the strength of their reaction with water and dilute acid
• understand that some metals react very strongly with water or acid, while others do not react at all
• learn how this reactivity relates to the reactivity series and predict an order of reactivity given a set of
experimental results
• analyse how the different levels of reactivity of metals can be used to organise them into
a reactivity series
. .. .
reactions of metals
... ,.. . ...
• . .. .. •
295
GETTING STARTED ,',. "-~. . ~:· _,_

You will have seen from the two previous chapters, Discuss in class the different levels of reactivity
and possibly also from demonstrations, t he of metals with water and acid that you have
reactions of sodium and potassium with water. encountered. Can you relate the different levels
of reactivity to positions in the Periodic Table and
• Do all metals react in this way?
indeed to everyday life?
• Can you think of some metals that do not react
with water?
THE SEARCH FOR LONGER-LASTING BATTERY POWER
The reactivity series is the basis for powering electrode. The electrolyte solution completes the
modern technology. movement of charge in the circuit as the ions present
carry the charge between the electrodes. Such a cell
An unusual way to power a simple digital clock is with
converts chemical energy into electrical energy.
an electrochemic:al cell {battery) made using a potato
{Figure 15.1). The current is produced by pushing A simple electrochemical cell works best if the
two different metal electrodes {e.g. copper and zinc) metals used as the electrodes are far apart ln the
into the potato. The potato acts as the electrolyte. reactivity series. The further apart the metals are in
Connecting up the electrodes to the clock produces the reactivity series, the greater the cell voltage. This
a small current in the circuit, which powers the clock. explains the use of lithium, the very reactive metal
If you had enough potatoes you could even power at the top of Group I, as one of the electrodes in the
your smartphone! modern rechargeable lithium ion batteries found
in many portable consumer electronic devices. The
aim is to make the difference in reactivity as large
as is safely possible. The concern over transporting
lithium batteries in the baggage holds of aircraft is
precisely because of the reactivity of lithium. There
have been many instances of smartphones (and other
lithium ion devices) catching fire and exploding!
The importance of portable electric power is

. increasing as we move away from fossil fuels as
our main energy source. Whether it is for powering
electric cars or storing solar-generated electrical
energy in our homes, there is now a greater need
to develop more durable batteries. Research is
proceeding strongly with the possibility of solid-state
batteries being considered. ·
Figure 15.1: A potato-powered digital clock.
1 What are the environmental concerns over
This cell works because the two metals have different the need to develop more powerful batteries
reactivities. Zinc is more reactive than copper and and the fact that many types of battery are
so forms positive ions more easily. The zinc releases considered disposable?
electrons as its atoms become ions, and these
2 What is the one non-metal that is sometimes
electrons give the zinc electrode a negative charge.
found in batteries as it conducts an
The electrons move around the circuit to the copper
electric current?
296
15 Reactivity of met als
'
_15.1 The metal reactivity KEYWORDS :
• reactivity: the ease with which a chemical
senes substance takes part in a chemical reaction
Most of the elements in the Periodic Table are metals. reactivity series (of metals): an order of
Many of them are useful for a wide variety of purposes; reactivity, giving the most reactive metal first,
some, such as iron, have an enormous number of uses. based on results from a range of experiments
The early history of human life is marked by the metals involving metals reacting with oxygen, water,
used in making jewellery, ornaments and tools. Early dilute hydrochloric acid and metal salt solutions
civilisations used metals that could be found 'native' (e.g.
gold) for decorative items and then developed alloys such
as bronze. Even among the metals that were available,
there were obvious differences in resistance to corrosion. Establishing the basis of a
The Viking sword in Figure 1$.2 emphasises the different
reactivities of the gold and silver of the hilt and the iron reactivity series
of the blade. Such observed differences in the reactivity
of different metals (Figure 15.3) suggest that there may In reality a range of reactivity exists for the metals. This
be an order of reactivity built into the natural world. range can be observed by simply considering the reaction
of metals with air and water. The Group I metals are the
most reactive of all the metals and must be kept under
oil to avoid reaction with moist afr. The trend within any
metallic group is for reactivity to increase going down
the group.
Reactions with water

All the alkali metals react spontaneously with water
to produce hydrogen gas and the metal hydroxide
(Table 15.1). The reactions are exothermic. If water
Figure 15.2: This Viki ng sword had a handle made from
is dripped onto a small sample of the metal, the heat
gold and silver and an iron blade. The blade has corroded
produced ignites the hydrogen gas (Figure 15.4). For
badly but the handle is intact.
sodium the flame colour is yellow.
We have seen in our discussion of Group I of the
Periodic Table (Chapter 13) how reactivity changes in
a particular group. We also referred to the fact that the
transition metals are less reactive than the metals in
Groups I and II. Many of the important metals that we
use in different ways come from more than one group.
So, the question arises as to whether there is a broader
order of reactivity (a reactivity series), which includes all
the metals.
At the end of Chapter 14 we suggested that it may be
possible to put the metals into an approximate series
based on their reactions with oxygen, water or dilute
hydrochloric acid. We will now follow that further to
establish the reactivity series for metals, looking at the
reactions with water and dilute acid. We will then look
at metal displacement reactions that allow us to place
metals precisely in a series and consider the reasons for Figure 15.3: The copper in this bronze mask is coated g reen
the order we observe. (verd igris) through reaction with the air.
297
The reaction with water is the same in each case and

Table 15.1 summarises the order of reactivity for Group I.
Reaction with Reaction

Element
water with air
reacts steadily tarnishes
slowly to
lithium 2Li + 2Hp-+ give a layer
2LiOH + H2 of oxide
tarnishes
reacts strongly
quickly to
sodium increasing
2Na + 2Hp-+ give a layer
reactivity
2NaOH + H2 of oxide
tarnishes
reacts violently very quickly
potassium 2K + 2Hp-+ to give a
2KOH + H2 layer of 1.
oxide
Table 15.1: Reactions of Group I metals with air and water.
Group II metals shows similar trends in reactivity to

Group I. H~wever, they are less reactive than the metals
in Group I. Again, reactivity increases going down the
group. ,Magnesium reacts very slowly indeed when placed
in cold water. Bubbles of hydrogen form very slowly
on the m agnesium ribbon. A much stronger reaction
is obtained if steam is passed over heated magnesium
(Figure 15.6; see also Chapter 14). The magnesium glows
Figure 15.4: Reaction of sodium with water.
brightly to form hydrogen and magnesium oxide:
If a piece of sodium (or potassium) is placed on thy
magnesium + steam -+ ma~~~J!um + hydrogen
surface of water in a dish the heat produced is sufficient
to melt the sodium (or potassium) as it skips over the Mg(s)
* surface of the water (Figure 15.5).
Fig ure 15.5: Sodium floats in a ball on the surface of water as it reacts. The change in the colour of the indicat or solution
shows the solution produced is alkaline.
r.
v
298
15 Reactivity of metals
Calcium, however, reacts strongly with cold water, giving

off hydrogen rapidly:
calcium +
Ca(s)
water
+ 2Hp(I)
- calcium
hydroxide
-+ Ca(OH)z(aq)
+ hydrogen
+ 1¾(g)
Calcium hydroxide is more soluble than magnesium

hydroxide, so an alkaline solution is produced (limewater).
As the reaction proceeds, a white suspension is obtained
because not all the calcium hydroxide dissolves.
As we have seen in Chapter 14, moderately reactive
transition elements such as zinc and iron will also
react with steam in a similar way to magnesium. Other
transition metals such as copper, silver and gold do not
react with either water or steam. Based on the reactions
we have seen so far, we can put the metals considered
into an order of reactivity:
potassium calcium zuic copper gold
most reactive - - - - - - -- - least reactive
sodium magnesium iron sitv.fr
Reactions with d ilute acids

The alkali metals of Group I, and indeed calcium, are
too reactive to safely add to even dilute acids. They
do produce hydrogen but too vigorously. Other metals
Figure 15.6: Sequence of the reaction between steam and show a range of reactivity with dilute acid and this is
heated magnesium. summarised in Table 15.2.
Observations with dilute HCl(aq) or

Metal Equations
dilute H2S04(aq)
magnesium
strong reaction, bubbles of gas,
magnesium disappears, colourless
solution formed
Mg(s) + 2HCl(aq)
Mg(s) + H 2S04(aq)
-- MgCl 2(aq)
MgS04(aq) +
+ H2'g)
H2(g)
aluminium
slow to react in cold, but bubbles form
on heating, aluminium disappears,
colourless solution formed
2Al(s) + 6HCl(aq)
- 2AICl 3(aq)
2Al(s) + 3H 2S04(aq) -+ Al2'S04)}aq) + 3H2'g)

+ 3H 2(g)
...
zinc
bubbles of gas, zinc disappears,
colourless solution formed
Zn(s)
Zn(s)
+ 2HCl(aq)
+ H2S0iaq)
-- ZnCl 2(aq)
ZnS04(aq)
+ H2(g)
+ H2'g)
iron
bubbles of gas, iron disappears,
pale-g reen solution formed
Fe(s)
Fe(s)
+ 2HCl(aq)
+ H2S04 (aq)
-- FeCl 2(aq)
FeS04 (aq)
+ Hig)
+ Hitg)
copper no reaction
silver no reaction
gold no reaction
Table 15.2: Reactions of met als with dilute acids.
r
299
You will note from Table 15.2 that the reaction of

th<; metal and the acid always produces a salt an d K
hydrogen gas.
Na
metal + acid --+ a metal salt + hydrogen
Ca
The reactions of the metals with dilute acids that can be
Mg
carried out safely confirm the order of reactivity seen
with water/steam. (Al)
Zn
/ ctive Fe
r g Id H
/ From Table 15.2, you will see that aluminium reacts less uro Cu
strongly than would be expected. This occurs because !!! Figure 15.7: A reactivity series of met als
aluminium reacts easily with oxygen in the air to form a 0C Ag
with water and dilute acids, showing the
thin layer of aluminium oxide (AJ,OJ that extends over 0 Au position of hydrogen.
the whole metal surface. 0
4Al(s) + 30i(g) --+ 2Alp/s)

This unreactive oxide layer is very firmly attached to Questions
the metal and does not flake off. The layer acts as a
protective coating, slowing the reaction. Only when the 1 Th ree metals, X , Y and Z, react with dilute
oxide layer is removed is the true reactivity of aluminium hydrochloric acid in different ways.
observed . It is possible to remove the protective oxide Metal X: dissolves slowly with bubbles of gas given
layer and aluminium then shows a reactivity with off at a slow rate.
acids just below that of magnesium. The reactivity of Metal Y: dissolves very quickly and gas is p roduced
j aluminium (when not covered in a layer of oxide) puts

it in a position within the reactivity series just below
magnesium, but above zinc (Figure 15.7).
very rap idly indeed.
Metal Z: dissolves rapidly and bubbles of gas are
formed rapidly.
Study of the reactions of metals with water and acids From these reactions, which is the order of
allows us to place hydrogen in the reactivity series increasing reactivity for these three metals?
(Figure 15.7) even though it is not a metal. This is useful A ZXY B YXZ
as it demonstrates that metals higher in the series are
more reactive than hydrogen. They can displace the gas C XYZ D XZY
• from water or acids under appropriate conditions. 2 a Which gas is given off when the alkali metals
are reacted with water?
b Name the product, other than hydrogen, when
potassium is reacted with water.
C Write a word equation for the reaction of
sodium with water.
d Write a balanced chemical equation for the
reaction of p otassium with water,
3 a Give two characteristic properties of aluminium
that make it ~ery useful for construction.
b Why does aluminium not corrode like some
other metals such as iron?
C Select from this list a metal that will not react
with hydrochloric acid to produce hydrogen:
magnesium, iron, copper.
,--
.__
300
ACTIVITY 15.1
Mind-mapping the reactivity series Copy the framework shown and use the spaces
between the arrows, and alongside them, to fit in
The development of the metal reactivity series
information. Use:
draws information from several different types of
experiment. In your groups, you should think of • equations
the different reactions that provided evidence for
the series. • lists
Construct a mind map to show how the different • comments to increase the usefulness of the
areas lead from the central idea of reactivity. information on the map.
Figure 15.8 shows a possible starting structure to You can then discuss how to improve the mind map
by devising your own map of the connected ideas.
the map.
Try to make your maps as interesting as you can in
terms of design and present them to the class as
K
part of a discussion of this important concept.
Na
Ca
Mg
Reactivity
Al steam
of metals
Zn
Fe
H
.-,.;,
Cu
Ag
Au
Figure 15.8: A possible framework for a mind map on the

reactivity of metals.
. REFLECTION ~- .
This chapter discusses how the metal reactivity series is formed by considering the reactivity of metals with
air and water. Some of these reactions are not safe to perform in a school laboratory. Do you find images
and photographs of experiments useful?
( 15.2 ~etal displacement

I reactions ·
A displacement reaction can help us to place particular
metals more precisely in the reactivity series. We can use
KEYWORDS
this type of reaction to compare directly the reactivity of displacement reaction: a reaction in which a
two metals. In a displacement reaction, a more reactive more reactive element displaces a less reactive
metal displaces a less reactive metal from solutions of element from a solution of its salt
salts of the less reactive metal.
301
In this type of reaction, the two metals are in direct Copper displaces silver from solution, so copper is
'colllpetition'. If a piece of zinc is left to stand in a more reactive than silver. This reaction has been used
solution of copper(II) sulfate, a reaction occurs: to produce the 'silver pine tree' by using silver nitrate
on a strip of copper folded in the shape of a tree
zinc
+ copper(II) -+
zinc sulfate + copper (Figure 15.l 0).
sulfate
Zn(s) + CuSO.(aq) ~ ZnSO.(aq) + Cu(s)
grey blue colourless red- brown
The observed effect of the reaction is that the zinc metal
becomes coated with a red- brown layer of copper. The
blue colour of the solution fades. The solution will
eventually become colourless zinc sulfate (Figure 15.9).
Zinc displaces copper from solution, so zinc is more
reactive than copper.
.....
Figure 15.9: Zinc is more reactive than copper and displaces

copper from copper(II) sulfate solution.
The reverse reaction does not happen. A piece of copper

" does not react with zinc sulfate solution. Figure 1 5.10: A silver pine tree produced by a
displacement reaction.
Although copper is an unreactive metal when tested in
various ways, there are some metals that are even Jess
reactive. Silver is a metal that is Jess reactive than copper.
If copper metal is placed in a solution of silver nitrate,
then a reaction does occur. A deposit of silver grows on
the surface of the copper. The solution becomes blue
because of the formation of copper nitrate solution:
2AgNO/aq) + Cu(s) ~ Cu(NO3)i(aq) + 2Ag(s)
302)
302
Displacement reactions of metals Method
In this experiment, you will look at the reactions 1 Using a measuring cylinder, pour 10 cm 3 ofzinc
between metals and solutions of t heir salts. You will sulfate solution into a boiling tube.
investigate the relationship between the difference
2 Place the tube in a rack and, using a stirring
in reactivity of the metals involved and how
thermometer, record the temperature of
exothermic the reaction is.
t he solution.
3 Add one spatula measure of magnesium
You will need:
powder to the tube, start the stopclock and stir
• three boiling tubes the mixture.
• measuring cylinder {10cm3 or 25cm 3) 4 Record the temperature every 30 seconds for
five minutes, stirring between each reading.
• test-tube rack
5 Using a fresh tube, repeat the above
• spatula
experiment using copper sulfate solution and
• zinc sulfate solution (0.5 mol/dm3) zinc powder.
• copper sulfate solution (0.5 mol/dm3) 6 Again, record the temperature change over
five minutes.
• magnesium powder
7 Repeat the experiment again, this time using
• zinc powder
copper sulfate solution and iron powder.
• iron powder 8 Plot three graphs on the same grid showing
the temperature change over time for each
• stopclock
metal. Draw lines of best fit on each of the
• stirring thermometer (-10 to 100°C). three graphs.
i Safety Questions
Wear eye protection throughout. Be carefal with 1 What would you expect to happer:i if the
chemicals. Never ingest t hem and always wash your experiment was carried out using iron(II) sulfate
.. hands after handling t hem. solution an9 zinc powder? Explain your answer.
2 How could you improve the accuracy of
Getting started
your experiment?
Read through the method for this experiment and
create a table in which to record your results. What
will you need to record?
r What is a line of best fit? Working in pairs, discuss

!I how you would draw a line of best fit.
Peer assessment
r Discuss with your partner how well you worked together during the experiment. What do you think
went well? What do you think you could do better if you were asked to repeat the experiment?
f
r
i
~ 303 >
303
Displacement as a The ions of the less reactive metal, copper, gain electrons.
These copper ions are reduced to metallic copper. •
redox reaction Cu2•(aq) + 2e- ➔ Cu(s) Reduction half-equation
Reactive metals are good reducing agents. The most (gain of electrons)
reactive metals are those that can lose electrons most In these half-equations, you can see that it is the more
easily. Reactive metals are those most ready to form reactive metal that loses electrons. The zinc atoms
positive ions. From Chapter I 0, you will remember become positive ions. The more reactive a metal is, the
OILRIG: more easily it loses its outer shell electrons to form the
• oxidation is the loss of electrons positive metal ion.
• reduction is the gain of electrons. Although we do not often refer to them as such, the
reactions in which a metal displaces hydrogen from
The nature of the reaction taking place between zinc and water or an acid are also redox reactions. The reactive
copper sulfate can be explored in more detail by looking metal forms the positive ion during the reaction (loss of
at the ionic equation for the reaction: electrons). The hydrogen ions in water or the acid gain
copper(II) ➔ electrons and so are reduced. For the reaction between
zinc + zinc ions + copper magnesium and an acid, the two half-equations are:
ions
Zn(s) + Cu2•(aq) ➔ Zn2+(aq) + Cu(s) Mg(s)-+ Mg2+(aq) + 2e- Oxidation half-equation
(loss of electrons)
This shows that the reaction is a redox reaction
involving the transfer of two electrons from zinc atoms 2H •(aq) + 2e- -+ Hz(g) Reduction half-equation
to copper(II) ions. Zinc atoms are oxidised to zinc (gain of electrons)
ions, while copper(In ions are reduced (Figure 15.11). Consideration of these reactions with water and acids
In general, the atoms of the more reactive metal lose as redox reactions give justification to the inclusion of
0
electrons to become positive ions. hydrogen in the reactivity series even though it is not
a metal.
-•· 0
REDUCING AGENT
• Zn loses electrons Zn Displacement reactions in solution help us to compare
• Zn is oxidised directly the reactivity of two metals and to establish the
order of the reactivity series.
• Oxidation number }
increases
2e-
Questions
OXIDISING AGENT
• Cu 2• gains electrons
• Cu 2• is r-educed
8 Cu 2•
---•► 0
4
5
Write a word equation for the reaction between
magnesium and copper(II) sulfate solution.
State two observations you would see when a
piece of magnesium ribbon is placed in copper(II)
• Oxidation number sulfate solution.
decreases
6 Write a balanced chemical equation and an ionic
Figure 15.11 : The displacement reaction between zinc and equation for the reaction between magnesium and
copper(II) sulfate is a redox reaction. copper(II) sulfate solution.
7 We have a list of metals in a particular order in the
Because these are redox reactions, we can write separate reactivity series. Can you work out a memory aid
half-equations for the two parts of the reaction. The (mnemonic) to help remember the order?
more reactive zinc atoms lose electrons to form ions; they
are oxidised.
Zn(s) ➔ Zn 2•(aq) + 2e- Oxidation half-equation
Ooss of electrons)
304
~An overview of metal reactivity

Through our consideration of trends in the Periodic
Table, and the picture of metal reactivity we have
developed here, we understand that metals can be calcium Ca
placed in a sequence depending on their reactivity. By
using specific metal-displacement reactions, we can be magnesium Mg
.....
clear about the order of metals in the sequence. The
reactions of metals with water and acids help us to place aluminium Al ..
>
....
u
hydrogen in the sequence even though it is not a metal
(Figure 15.6). Information on the reactivity of metals has
(carbon C)
..
been found from various aspects of their chemistry: zinc Zn DI
C
• ease of extraction (Chapter 16)
• reactions with air or oxygen
• reactions with water
r,,.
• reactions with dilute acids
• metal displacement (redox) reactions.
The overall picture that emerges is summarised in gold Au
Figure 15.12. This is known as the reactivity series
of metals.
Figure 15.1 2: Reactivity series of metals.
Evidence for the position of carbon comes from the
'r
methods we can use to extract a metal (Chapter 16).
Carbon is placed between aluminium and zinc because We can see from these redox reactions that the most
it can reduce zinc oxide to form zinc but cannot reduce reactive metals are those that most readily lose
,. aluminium oxide. electron(s) to form positive ions. The most reactive
metals are the most powerful reducing agents, giving
electrons to other ions or compounds.
SUMMARY
..
Metals show di fferent levels of reactivity and can be arranged in a reactivity series of activity: potassium,
sodium, calcium, magnesium, aluminium, (carbon), zinc, iron, (hydrogen) copper, silver, gold.
The d ifferent levels of reactivity can be seen in the way the different metals react with such reagents as water
and dilute acids.
The elements of Group I (the alkali metals) are the most reactive metals at the top of the series.
Transition metals are more moderately reactive.
Some metals such as copper, silver and gold do not react with water or dilute hydrochloric acid and so are
placed at the bottom of the series.
>
)
Metal displacement reactions provide evidence that helps to bring detail to the reactivity series.
A more reactive metal will displace a less reactive metal from a solution of its salts.
> The position of a metal in the series is related to the tendency of the metal to form its positive ion in reactions.
r
> Metal displacement reactions are redox reactions.
I
rL
I
305
.. .
PROJECT . · ·
• •" JI
Understanding redox and the reactivity series • How does the idea of redox fit with the
Redox reactions are an important type of reaction reactions used in this chapter to place the
in Chemistry. You have met ideas on this type of metals in a detailed reactivity series? Conclude
reaction in both this and several earlier chapters your presentation by describing a particularly
(especially Chapter 10). important example of this type of reaction and
its significance.
Together with a partner, write a podcast script
(Figure 15.13) that describes the key features of
these reactions. In your podcast script:
• Explore the word 'redox' itself. What does

it st and for? Redox reactions can be seen
as competitions between elements. But
competitions for what?
• Discuss t he different definitions of the
processes involved, including:
• removal/addition of oxygen
• gain/loss of electrons.
Figure 15.13: Communicating ideas through a podcast.
.,....
EXAM-STYLE QUESTIONS ._ _ ,. .
1 Which of these metals will react with cold water to produce hydrogen gas?
A copper
B zinc
C potassium
D aluminium (1 I
.. 2 A student investigated the reactivity of a number of metals. First, she
took a strip of magnesium ribbon and dropped it into a beaker of dilute
hydrochloric acid. COMMAND WORD
a Describe what the student saw as the magnesium ribbon reacted. (2) describe: state the
b She then dropped a different strip of magnesium ribbon into cold points of a topic/
water. Describe what she saw. (1) give characteristics
and main features
She then tried the same experiments with three other metals: calcium, iron
and a third metal that she did-not know the name of. The results are shown
in the table.
Met al Reaction with acid Reaction with water

calcium reacted violently reacted rapidly
iron reacted slowly no reaction
magnesium reacted rapid ly no reaction
unknown metal reacted quite quickly no reaction
306
,. . ·- ~ ~ .
!.coNTINUED COMMAl-..lD WORDS
c Put the metals in increasing order of reactivity Oeast reactive first). [2] uggest: apply
d :,11,i ~• ,t the name of the 'unknown metal'. (11 knowledge and
understanding to
e Some of these reactions produced a gas. r "' a test for this gas.
situations where
Test: - - - - - -- - -- - - -- - -- - - - - - - - there are a range
of valid responses
Result-- - - - - - - - - - - -~ - - - -- [2]
in order to make
[Total: 8] proposals/
put forward
considerations
give: produce an
answer from a
given source or
recall/memory
identify· name/
select/recognise
exp ain. set out
purposes or
reasons/make the
things evident/
provide why and/or
re levant evidence
examine: investigate
closely, in detail
Wlncli reactant is tlic reducing agent in
Describe li·ow electrons arc franstc·rred clunng
,..
307 )
307
See Needs Confident

I can Almost
Topic... more work to move
there
on
- -- -
understand the concept of a reactivity series 15.l
state the order of the reactivity series 15.1
describe the reactions of potassium, sodium and
calcium with cold water 15.1
describe the reaction of magnesium with steam 15.1

describe the reactions of metals with dilute
hydrochloric acid 15.1
relate the reactions of metals to their position in the

reactivity series 15. 1
deduce an order of reactivity from a set of

experimental results 15.1
explain the apparent unreactivity of aluminium to

> the presence of a stable oxide layer on the metal 15.1 -
relate the reactivity series to the displacement
) reactions of several metals 15.2
308)
308
consider the methods of extraction of metals from their ores in the context of the reactivity series
of metals
• describe how moderately reactive metals can be extracted by reduction with carbon in a blast furnace,
while reactive metals are extracted by electrolysis
• describe how iron is extracted from hematite in a blast furnace.
• learn how aluminium is extracted from bauxite by the electrolysis of molten aluminium oxide
• discuss the causes of the rusting and describe some barrier methods of rust prevention
• • •
•
309
~~ . .__ -·--·---~,1
In your class groups, discuss which metals are most What stress do these considerations place on
abundant in the Eartb's crust. Extend your ideas concerns over the environment and the availability
to include less abundant metals that are in high of resources?
demand for applications in modern technology.
MINING THE OCEAN FLOOR

Concern over the impact of global warming and
climate change has focused considerable attention
on the need to reduce 0ur use of fossil fuels. One
aspect of this is the potential to use electric battery-
powered cars and this has placed an important
focus on improved battery technology. Currently,
the metal cobalt is an essential ingredient for the
rechargeable batteries needed to provide electric
cars with the needed power and storage capacity.
Demand for cobalt is therefore increasing rapidly
and the number of sites where cobalt can be mined
worldwide is very limited. Most of the world's cobalt
is mined iri the Democratic Republic of Congo.
Expanding production is not straightforward
and this is leading mining companies to consider ...~
\....I
obtaining cobalt from a very different location - the
deep-sea floor!
We are becoming increasingly aware of rocks on the

seabed, known as 'polymetallic nodules', that are
rich in metals such as manganese, nickel and cobalt
(Figure 16.1). The discovery of this potential res</urce
has raised enthusiastic attention over recent years.
Different regions of the seabed have been put
c forward as open to exploitation. Prototype mining
machines have' been designed and the pressure is
growing to develop mining operations given the
increasingly pressing need for these rare metals. Figure 16.1: A manganese nodule of the type found on
the ocean floor.
But what would be the environmental cost of
such deep-sea mining? Gathering these nodules
from the seabed would disturb the habitat of the Discussion questions
marine life, stirring up clouds of sand and silt. New
1 What are the environmental advantages
technology is being designed to reduce the impact and disadvantages of developing seabed
of what is effectively open-cast mining, but it surely mining? Think as broadly as you can about the
cannot eliminate all damage. There is significant related issues.
internati onal interest even though the financial costs
are great and there is need for international control 2 What are the problems associated with relying
of this development. on one major land-based source for a resource
that is likely to be in increasing demand?
310)
310
16 Extracti on and corrosion of m etals
Metals below carbon in the series can be extracted by

,16.1 Metal extraction heating their oxides with carbon, but those above carli>on
must be extracted by electrolysi-.. If a metal is below
and the reactivity series carbon in the reactivity series the oxygen in its oxide will
form covalent bonds more easily with carbon rather than
Some metals exist as pure metals in nature. Others are remain as the oxide ion. Carbon is the reducing agent,
very difficult to extract from their compounds contained removing the oxygen from the oxide.
in ores . Those metals that do not occur uncombined
(native) in the ground can usually be found as the metal If the metal is more reactive than carbon, then reduction
oxide, or a compound that can easily be converted to the must. be achieved by the reaction that takes place at the
oxide. To extract the metal from this oxide we need to cathode during electrolysis. The metal ions in the oxide
carry out a reduction (the removal of the oxygen from must gain electrons to produce the free metal. This is
the metal). the type of reaction that takes place in the electrolytic
extraction of aluminium.
In Chapter 15, we established that there is a reactivity
series based on the differences in reactivity of the various
metals. The most reactive metals are those that combine KEY WORDS
most strongly in their compounds or form positive ions ore: a naturally occurring mineral from which a
most easily. We placed hydrogen in that reactivity series metal can be extracted
because it is useful to know its reactivity relative to the
different metals. We found that hydrogen is less reactive electrolysis: the breakdown of iln ionic
than zinc, but more reactive than copper, for instance. compound, molten or in aqueous solution, by the ·
Hydrogen will remove oxygen (reduce) copper oxide to use of electricity
copper metal (Chapter I0); but hydrogen will not reduce
zinc oxide to zinc.
At the end of Chapter 15, we commented that it would
be useful to place carbon in the reactivity series as it is
a strong reducing agent providing a very useful method
of extracting metals. Practical experiments have shown
that carbon is between aluminium and zinc in the series
(Figure 16.2).
K
Na
Ca
Al
C
Zn
Fe
Cu
Au
Figure 16.2: Position of carbon in the Figure 16.3: The blast furnace at a steel-making plant uses
reactivity series. carbon to reduce iron ore.
311
Carbon as a reducing agent in metal extraction Getting started
In this experiment, you will heat copper(II) oxide You will need the roaring blue flame from the Bw ,sen
with carbon to see whether reduction takes place. burner produced when the air hole is fu lly open.
If the copper(II) oxide is reduced to copper then it Practise producing this flame prior to the experiment.
helps place carbon in the reactivity series. When heating the tube, you will need to hold the end
of the tube just above the blue cone in the flame.
You will need: Method
• test-tube 1 Place one spatula measure of copper oxide into
• test-tube holder the test-tube.
• test-tube rack 2 Add one spatula measure of powdered

charcoal. DO NOT mix the two.
• spatula
3 Set up the Bunsen burner on the
• Bunsen bumer heat-resistant mat.
• heat-resistarit mat 4 Place the test-tube in the test-tube holder and
heat t he two layers strongly for five minutes
• powdered charcoal
with the Bunsen burner.
• copper oxide.
5 Allow the test-tube to cool in the test-tube rack.
Safety 6 Look closely at the point where the two

powders join.
Wear eye protection throughout. Point the test-tube
away from you and others while heating it. Be careful Questions
with cnemicals. Never ingest them and always wash
1 What do you see at the place where the two
your hands after handling them.
powders join?
2 Write an equation for the reaction tha~
is occurring.
c Self-assessment
Was your experiment successful? How do you know?
Think about how you did each of the steps in the method. If you were to do this experiment again, is there
anything you would do differently?
Extract ion of iron from its ore

I'ro'n is the second most common metal in the Earth's
hematite: the major ore of iron, iron(III) oxide
crust The main ore of iron is hematite (FepJ. This ore
is rich in irpn, containing more than 60% iron. blast furnace: a furnace for extracting metals
(particularly iron) by reduction with carbon that
Production of iron in the blast furnace uses hot air blasted in at the base of the furnace
to raise the temperature
The iron is obtained by reduction with carbon in a blast
furnace (Figures 16.4 and 16.5). The furnace is a steel
312
16 Extraction and corrosion of metals
tower about 30 metres hign. lt is lined with refractory The iron produced flows to the bottom of the furnace
'(heat-resistant) bricks of magnesium ox.ide that are where it can be ' tapped off' as a liquid because the
cooled by water. The furnace is loaded with the 'charge' temperature at the bottom of the furnace is higher than
of raw materials, which consists of iron ore, coke (a form the melting point of iron (F igure 16.4).
of carbon made from coal) and limestone (a mineral form
of calcium carbonate). The charge is sintered (the ore is
powdered and heated with coke and limestone) to make
sure the solids mix well, and it is mixed with more coke.
Blasts of hot air are sent in to the furnace through holes
near the bottom of the furnace. A series of chemical
reactions takes place within the furnace to produce
molten iron. limestone,- -__,.,.....,,....,
~
waste gas to heat
coke, iron ore exchanger, to heat
walls of heat-
resistant magnesium
oxide·bricks, cooled
by water
hot air- -hotair
molten iron
Figure 16.4: A worker in protective clothing takes a sample

from a blast furnace in a steel works. Figure 16.5: Reduction of iron ore to iron in the
blast furnace.
KEYWORDS One of the major impurities in iron ore is sand

(silicon(IV) oxide, Si0 2 - also called silica). The
limestone: a form of calcium carbonate (CaCO3)
limestone added to the furnace helps to remove this
m ineral: a naturally occurring rock containing a impurity. The limestone (calcium carbonate) undergoes a
particular compound thermal decomposition reaction in tbe furnace produce
calcium oxide and carbon dioxide.
The carbon (coke) burns in the air blast and the calcium calcium
furnace gets very hot from the heat from this carbonate - oxide + carbon dioxide
exothermic reaction. The lime produced then reacts with the silica to form
calcium silicate <;lag.
carbon + oxygen - carbon dioxide
As carbon dioxide rises through the furnace it reacts with calcium + silicon(IV) - calcium silicate
oxide oxide
more carbon and is reduced to carbon monoxide.
carbon + carbon - carbon monoxide

dioxide
The most important reaction that then occurs is the slag: a molten mixture of impurities, mainly
reduction of the ore by carbon monoxide: calcium silicate, formed in the b last furnace
.,. iron(III) + carbon

oxide monoxide - iron + carbon dioxide
313)
313
The calcium silicate formed is also molten. It flows down produced in the furnace is taken and purified further
thefurnace and forms a molten layer of slag on top of and then turned into various forms of steel. Steels are
the iron (Figure 16.5). It does not mix with the iron, and alloys of iron and a defined amount of carbon, often
it is less dense. The molten slag is 'tapped off' separately. with other transition metals added depending on the
When solidified, the slag is used in concrete for buildings type of steel required. The addition of chromium and
and road surfacing. The hot waste gases escape from the nickel, for example, make the steel hard and resistant to
top of the furnace. The gases are used in heat exchangers corrosion (rusting). This alloy is known as stainless steel
to transfer heat to the incoming air. This helps to reduce (Chapter 14).
the energy costs of the process. The extraction of iron
is a continuous process. It is much cheaper than the KEYWORD
electrolytic processes used to extract other metals.
corrosion: the process that takes place when
The key features of the blast furnace extraction of iron
metals and alloys are chemically attacked by
from iron ore (hematite) are:
oxygen, water or any other substances found in
• the burning of carbon (coke) to provide heat and their immediate e nvironment ·
produce carbon dioxide
• the reduction of carbon dioxide to carbon monoxide
• the reduction of iron(III) oxide by carbon monoxide Questions
• the thermal decomposition of limestone (calcium 1 Why is limestone added to the blast furnace?
carbonate) to produce calcium oxide (lime) Write the balanced symbol equation for the thermal
• the use of limestone to remove the main impurity decomposition of the limestone to lime.
(sand) as slag (calcium silicate). 2 What is the reducing agent in the extraction
of iron from iron(III) oxide? Give the word
Chemistry of the blast furnace equation and the balanced symbol equation of the
reduction reaction.
A number of different reactions take place in the blast
furnace. The reaction that takes place depends on the 3 Write the word and symbol equation for the
position in the furnace and the temperature. Figure 16.6 production of the calcium silicate slag.
shows the regions of the furnace where the key reactions
take place and the chemical equations for those reactions.
Extraction of aluminium from
its ore
We have seen that reduction with carbon does not work
for more reactive metals. The metals are held in their
compounds (oxides or chlorides) by stronger bonds that
need a lot of energy to break them. This energy is best
e deoompose$ •nd sl•g fonns:
supplied by electricity. Extracting metals in this way is a
(s) -+ C•O(s) + CO,(g) three-stage process:
+ Si0 2(s) -+ CaSiO,(I)
sand slag • mining the ore
• purification of the ore
• electrolysis of the molten ore.
The extraction of a metal by electrolysis is expensive.
Figure 16.6: Key reactions of the extraction of iron and the
Energy costs to keep the ore molten and to separate the
regions of the blast furnace where they take place.
ions can be very high. Because of this, many of these
metals are extracted in regions where hydroelectric power
The iron produced in the blast furnace is only about 95% from dams is available. Aluminium plants (smelters) are
pure. The impurities are mainly carbon, but they also the most important examples. They produce sufficient
include sulfur, silicon and phosphorus. Most of the iron aluminium to make it the second most widely used metal
314 )
314
16 Extraction and ~orrosion of metals
.after iron. Although aluminium is the most common Hall-Heroult process

metal found in the Earth's crust, it is too reactive with The Hall- Heroult electrolytic process involves the
other elements to occur naturally as the free metal. following stages.
1 The bauxite is treated with sodium hydroxide
in a refinery to obtain pure aluminium oxide
(alumina). The alumina produced is shipped to the
electrolysis plant.
2 The purified aluminium oxide (Alpl) is dissolved
in molten cr~olite (another ore of aluminium).
Dissolving the aluminium oxide in cryolite lowers
the melting point of the oxide and therefore the
working temperature of the cell. The cryolite thus
provides a considerable saving in energy costs.
3 The molten mixture of aluminium oxide and
cryolite is electrolysed in a cell fitted with graphite
electrodes (Figure 16.8).
f waste gas filter
Figure 16.7: The major ore of aluminium is bauxite. Bauxite

usually contains some iron(III) oxide, which gives the ore its
brown colour.
Bauxite (Figure 16.7) is the major form of aluminium

oxide. Up to'25% of bauxite consists of impurities such
as iron(III) oxide and sand. The iron(III) oxide gives it a
red- brown colour.
lining electrode carbon casing
Aluminium is extracted from bauxite by electrolysis. The
bauxite is converted to alumina (aluminium oxide) using Figure 16.8: Electrolytic cell for extracting aluminium.
sodium hydroxide. Aluminium oxide is insoluble in water
and has a very high melting point (2030 °C) making it
difficult to change it into a suitable electrolyte. However, KEYWORD
in 1886, the Hall- Heroult electrolytic method for
extracting aluminium was invented independently by the cryolite: sodium aluminium fluoride (Na 3AIF6),
American chemist Charles Martin Hall and the French an ore of aluminium used in the extraction of
scientist Paul Heroult. aluminium to lower the operating temperature
of the electrolytic cell; now replaced by synthetic
sodium aluminium fluoride produced from the
KEYWORDS
common mineral fluorite
bauxite: the major ore of aluminium; a form of
aluminium oxide, Al 2O 3
electrolyte: an ionic compound that will conduct

electricity when it is molten or dissolved in water;
electrolytes will not conduct electricity when solid
315
Chemistry of the Hall-Heroult process KEY WORDS

The.electrolyte in the electrolytic cell is a solution of
alumina in cryolite as shown in Figure 16.8. Cryolite electrolytic cell: a cell consisting of an electrolyte
(sodium aluminium fluoride, Na 3AIFJ is a mineral and two electrodes (anode and cathode)
found naturally in Greenland. It is no longer mined connected to an external DC power source where
commercially there, and all the cryolite now used is positive and negative ions in the electrolyte are
made synthetically. Cryolite is used to lower the working separated and discharged
temperature of the electrolytic cell. The melting point
of aluminium oxide is 2030 °C. This is reduced to
900-1000°C by dissolving the aluminium oxide in cryolite. REFLECTION
The process is run continuously. Liquid aluminium is
What features helped you understand why
siphoned out and more alumina is added as necessary.
different methods of extraction are used for
The voltage used is quite low (S volts) but the current
different metals? Do you think you learnt more
flowing is very large (200 kiloamps). The large current
from the written text or from the figures? Would a
flowing through the electrolyte produces a lot of heat,
video or a visit in person help you to understand
which ·keeps the mixture molten.
this topic further?
Aluminium ions are attracted to the cathode. The
cathode is effectively the carbon lining of the cell.
Aluminium (melting point 660 °C) is discharged as a
liquid and sinks to the bottom of the cell, as shown in Q uestions
this half equation.
4 Why is aluminium expensive to extract?
AP•(!) + 3e- - Al(!)
5 Why is cryolite added to the electrolytic cell as well
f
The oxide ions are attracted to the carbon anodes where as alumina?
'-
they are discharged as oxygen gas. 6 Why does the anode in the electrolytic cell need
202-cl) .... O/g) + 4e- replacing regularly?
At the high temperature in the cell, the oxygen reacts

with the carbon in the electrodes forming carbon dioxide.
The carbon anodes slowly burn away and have to be
replaced frequently.
carbon + oxygen ....!!:!!... carbon dioxide

., C(s)
-heat
This means that the anodes need to be replaced regularly.

The cryolite is not used up by the electrolysis and so only
alumina needs to be added to keep the process running.
The Hall-Heroult process uses a great deal of energy
and it is also costly to replace the anodes. These costs
emphasise why the recycling of aluminium is important
as it is much cheaper to recycle the metal than to
manufacture it. The energy requirement for recycling
is about 5% of that needed to manufacture the same
amount of 'new' aluminium metal.
316 )
316
strongly to the surface of the metal. This micro-layer

.16.2 Corrosion of metals seals the metal surface and protects it from further
attack. Aluminium is a useful construction material
The problem of corrosion because it is protected by this layer. The protective layer
of aluminium oxide can be made thicker by electrolysis
When a metal is attacked by air, water or other (anodised aluminium).
surrounding substances, it is said to corrode. Most
metals corrode. They undergo a chemical reaction with lo contrast, when iron corrodes, the rust forms in flakes.
oxygen and other gases in the air to form compounds It does not form a single layer. The attack on the metal
that collect on the surface of the metal. Some very can continue over time as the rust flakes come off and
reactive metals such as sodium and potassium need holes can be formed in iron sheets by the rusting process.
to be stored under oil to keep them away from air and Chromium is another metal, similar to aluminium, that is
water. Others such as calcium will slowly corrode away to protected by an oxide layer. If chromium is alloyed with
powder over time. iron, a 'stainless' steel is produced. However, it would be
too expensive to use stainless steel for all the objects built
In the case of iron and steel, the corrosion process is out of iron. Electroplating a layer of chromium on steel
also known as rusting. Rusting is a serious economic is used to protect some objects from rusting (Chapter 6).
problem. Large sums of money are spent each year
replacing damaged iron and steel structures or protecting
structures from such damage. Rust is a red-brown Rust prevention
powder consisting mainly of hydrated iron(III) oxide
(Fep3·xHp). Water and oxygen are essential for iron to Many methods have been devised to protect iron and
rust (Figure 16.10). The problem is made worse by the steel from rusting.
presence of salt; seawater increases the rate of corrosion
as can be seen on countless shipwrecks around the world Barrier methods
(Figure 16.9). Acid rain also increases the rate at which
Rust can be prevented by a coating of material that
iron objects rust.
prevents the iron or steel from coming into contact
with water and oxygen. These methods are known as
barrier methods.
Painting
Painting is a very common method of protection, and is
used for objects ranging in size from ships and bridges to
garden gates. Some paints react with the metal to form
a stronger protective layer. However, generally, painting
only protects the metal for as long as the paint layer is
unscratched. Regular repainting is often necessary to
keep this protection intact.
Oiling and greasing

Figure 16.9: Rusted shipwreck on rocky beach. The oiling and/or greasing of the moving parts of
machinery forms a protective film, preventing rusting.
Again, the treatment must be repeated to continue
the protection.
rusting. the corrosion of iron and steel to form Plastic coatings
rust (hydrated iron(l11) oxide)
Plastic coatings are used to form a protective layer on
items such as refrigerators and garden chairs. The plastic
Aluminium is more reactive than iron, but it does not poly(vinyl chloride), PVC, is often used for this purpose.
corrode in the damaging way that iron does. Both metals
react with air. In the case of aluminium, a very thin
single layer of aluminium oxide forms, which sticks
317
'-
ACTIVITY 16.1
Causes of ru sting Tube 1 (control Tube 2

experiment)
The resu lts of an experiment to investigate rusting
are shown in Figure 16.10. The following tasks
are based on the experiment. Discuss each of air dry air
them with a partner before you attempt to write
anything down.
rusty iron
• What three things do the resu lts of this
I~,
nails
experiment tell you about rusting?
distilled
• Make a list of the apparatus you would need to water
carry out this experiment.
anhydrous
• Write an instruction sheet explaining, to calcium chloride
someone else, how they should carry out (drying agent)
the experiment.
Tube 3 Tube4
• Think of a possible fifth tube you could set up
to show a way of preventing rusting.
air
Discuss your answers with a partner and comment
on how each of you completed the task. Were you
able to evaluate the different causes clearly?
.. layer of
olive oil
pure
oxygen
I
(prevents air
dissolving
in the water) very rusty
iron nails
boiled distilled water

water (boiled
to remove any
dissolved air)
Figure 16.10: The results of an experiment to investigate

the factors that are involved in rusting. In tube 2, the air is
dry, so the nails do not rust. In tube 3, there is no oxygen
in the water, so the nails do not rust. In tube 4, pure
oxygen and water are present, so the nails are very rusty.
Electroplating Galvanising and sacrificial protection

An iron or steel object can be electroplated with a
layer of chromium or tin to protect against rusting Galvanising
(Chapter 6). A 'tin can' is made of steel coated on both An object may be coated with a layer of the more reactive
sides with a fine layer of- tin. Tin is used because it is metal, zinc. This is called galvanising. It has the advantage
unreactive and non-toxic. However, this does raise a over other barrier methods in that the protection still
problem. With both these metals, if the protective layer is works even if the zinc layer is badly scratched. Galvanising
broken, then the steel beneath will begin to rust. is in fact both a barrier method of protection, while the
zinc layer is unbroken, and a form of sacrificial protection,
if the zinc layer is scratched or broken. If the zinc layer is
broken it is still corroded away in preference to the iron as
zinc is a more reactive metal than iron.
318
16 Extraction and .corrosion of metals
The zinc layer (Figure 16.1 1) can be applied by several

•different methods. These include electroplating or
dipping the object into molten zinc. The bodies of
cars are dipped into a bath of molten zinc to form a
ship's hull
protective layer.
----- - made of steel
(mainly iron)
Figure 16.12: Blocks ofzinc (or magnesium) are used for the
sacrificial p'rotection of the hulls of ships.
KEY WORDS __., ,
galvanising: the protection of iron and steel

Figure 16.1 1: A photograph of zinc grains on a galvanised
objects by coating with a layer of zinc
fence post.
s,acrificial protection: a method of rust protection
Sacrificial protection involving the attachment of blocks of a metal
more reactive than iron to a structure; this metal is
Sacrificial protection is a method of rust prevention in corroded rather than the iron or steel structure
which blocks of a reactive metal are attached to the
iron surface. Zinc or magnesium blocks are attached to
oil rigs and to the hulls of ships (Figure 16.12). These
metals are more reactive than iron and will be cprroded
in preference to it: they 'sacrifice' themselves so the iron
Questions
does not rust. Underground gas and water pipes are 7 What two substances must be present before iron
connected by wire to blocks of magnesium to obtain the can rust? What other factors can increase the rate
same protection. In all cases, an electrochemical cell is set of rusting?
up. The metal blocks lose electrons in preference to the 8 What simple barrier methods can be used to
iron and so prevent the iron forming iron(IIl) oxide. The prevent rusting?
more reactive metal oxidises more readily than iron, so it
9 Steel is often plated with another metal. Chromium
'sacrifices' itself while the iron does not rust.
and zinc are both used. Suggest why zinc is more
effective at stopping rusting.
319
SUMMARY
The method of extracting a metal from its ore depends on the reactivity of the metal.
The least reactive metals, such as copper, silver and gold, can be found uncombined in the Earth's crust.
Metals that are less reactive than carbon can be extracted by heating with carbon in a blast furnace.
The main ore of iron is hematite.
Iron is extracted from hematite by reduction in a blast furnace.
The extraction of iron from hematite in a blast furnace can be described in a series of different stages.
The balanced symbol equations for the extraction of iron from hematite in a blast furnace are:
c+o2 - co2
> ·co2 + c .... 2co
1
Fep3 + 3CO -+ 2Fe + 3C0 2

The main ore of aluminium is bauxite.
Aluminium is more reactive than carbon and must be extracted by electrolysis.
Aluminium oxide is prepared from bauxite and is the molten electrolyte used to produce aluminium.
> Aluminium oxide is dissolvea in molten cryolite to lower its melting temperature and aluminium ions are
discharged at the cathode during the electrolysis to produce molten aluminium.
The carbon anodes need to be regularly replaced during the process because they slowly burn away
> during electrolysis.
> The reactions at the electrodes in the electrolytic cell can be represented by half-equations involving the loss
or gain of electrons.
Rusting of iron and steel requires the presence of oxygen and water, and is increased by the presence of salts
or acid rain.
'
Corrosion of iron and steel is a major problem and various methods have been devised for rust protection.
Barrier methods of rust prevention include painting, the use of oil or grease and coating the object in plastic.
) Galvanising an object by coating with zinc is both a barrier method of rust prevention and offers protection
even if the zinc layer is broken.
Sacrincial protection is a form of rust protection using blocks of a more reactive metal attached to an iron or
) steel structure; electrons are lost from the more reactive metal to the iron or steel to prevent the formation of
iron(III) oxide.
320 >
320
PROJECT
Less than super superyachts: changing

the design
The owners of superyachts have reported that the
hulls of their expensive vessels are rusting. The
rusting occurs as any exposed iron can react with
water and oxygen to from hydrated iron(lll) oxide.
more commonly known as rust. It is known that salt
in the sea water accelerates the rusting process
because salt water is a better electrolyte than pure
water. With the yachts selling for very high prices,
the company making them needs to:
• suggest solutions to existing owners that will
prevent further rusting Figure 16.13: A luxury superyacht.
• work with its current team of designers to

ensure the next generation of yachts do not To aid your work, you might want to research
experience the same problems. metals or alloys that do not corrode, but you should
also consider costs and any weight penalties due
You have been asked to research as many solutions to increased density. Your research could include
as possible and give the strengths and weaknesses novel metal alloys or even non-metallic materials.
of each.
Options for reducing rusting from the hulls of
1 Copy and complete the tables shown. Include current superyachts
additional rows as necessary.
2 Use your tables to prepare a presentation Scientific
The
that will be given to the company's board of reason
Suggested benefits Possible
directors. The presentation should explain why this
fix of this risks
why the problem has arisen, give the options approach
approach
available and then justify which proposal you would work
would recommend using to help fix the current
problem and which proposal you would
. recommend to ensure such issues do not arise
Options for preventing rusting from the hulls of
in the future.
future (next-generation) superyachts
Scientific
The
reason
Suggested benefits Possible
why this
fix of this risks
approach
approach
would work
r
321)
321
1 The figure shows a blast furnace for extracting iron from hematite.
~
hematite + X + Y
- - waste gases
hot air - - -+-- hotair

kon -+--
- - slag
What are X and Y?
X y
A lime coal
B limestone coal
C lime coke
D limestone coke ' (1I
., 2 Which treatment is used to prevent the rusting of an iron girder of a bridge?

A electroplating
B painting
C galvanising
D coating with grease (1)
3 The equation shows how iron(III) oxide is reduced to form iron in the
blast furnace.
iron(III) oxide(s) + carbon monoxide(g) -+ iron())+ carbon dioxide(g)
a What is the main ore of iron containing iron(III) oxide? [1 )
b Which substance in the equation is the reducing agent in the reaction? (11
c Why is the iron produced as a liquid? (1)
d Slag is also formed in the blast furnace. How is slag produced? (2)
[Total: 5)
322)
322
16 Extraction and corrosion of met als
CONTINUED
>
COMMAND WORDS
explain: set out
purposes or
reasons/make the
things ·evident/
provide why and/or
relevant evidence
suggest: §lpply
knowledge and
understanding to
situations where
> there are a range
of valid responses
in order-to make
proposals/
put forward
considerations
323
Confident
See Needs Almost ', ··- : to move
I can
Topic .. . more work there
on
- - -~- J --
understand how the ease of extraction of a metal
from its ore is related to its position in the reactivity 16.1
series of metals
describe the extraction of iron from hematite in the
16.1
blast furnace by heating with carbon
describe the chemical changes ta king place in the
blast furnace extraction of iron, including the 16.1
reduction of iron(III) oxide by carbon monoxide
describe the process of removing impurities from the
16. 1
furnace as a molten slag
state the balanced symbol equations for the
> reactions taking place in the blast furnace extraction
of iron
16.l
state that the main ore of a luminium is bauxite and

that aluminium is extracted from it by electrolysis 1.6.1
-
C
describe the extraction of aluminium by
> electrolysis, including the role of cryolite and the

electrode reactions
16. 1
state the conditions required for the rusting of iron

16.2
a nd steel
describe barrier methods for rust prevention,
16.2
• including painting, greasing and coating with plastic
describe the use of galvanising with zinc as both
> a barrier and sacrificial protection method of

rust prevention
16.2
explain sacrificial protection in terms of the
> reactivity of the metals used and the loss

of electrons
16.2
·' l
324
learn how to describe t he composition of clean dry air
• investigate common air pollutants and their adverse effects
• describe how carbon dioxide and methane are greenhouse gases linked to global warming and
climate change
• describe and state the photosynthesis reaction
• describe the tests for the presence and purity of water, and why distilled water is used in experiments
• discuss the sources of substances in water from natural sources and outline their impacts on human
health and the environment
• describe the main steps needed to purify the domestic water supply
exr.lain now ox·aes of itrogen form in ca~ engines ana are removea l:5y catalytic c •
... . . .
325
\
GETTING STARTED
Air and water are being contaminated with There is a wide range of pollutants generated by
substances produced because of human activities. manufacturing industries, power plants, farms
and transportation. Make a list of some of the
In a small group, discuss the import ance of clean air
pollutants you already know of and try to give their
and water to human life. Can you think of different sources. Having done this, discuss the impact these
types of air and water pollution (contamination with
pollutants can have on people's daily lives and
other substances) in and around the area where you whether your lifestyle choices contribute to local air
live or go to school?
and water pollution.
THE GROWING PROBLEM OF AIR POLLUTION
The air we breathe is a mixture of different gases. To meet these targets and improve air quality,
There are the non-toxic gases such as nitrogen governments need to change in part how their
and argon, which we simply breathe in and out, citizens lead their daily lives. Steps to do this
there is t he oxygen we require for respiration, but are already being made with cities banning
there are also some gases that have been linked to high-polluting vehicles or setting high tariffs
health problems, quality of life and environmental (congestion charges) to drive into city centres.
issues (Figure 17.1). These pollutant gases are Some governments are increasing taxes on
generally the result of human activity, with most companies or those technologies th at use fossi l
being produced either by burning fossil fuels or fuels. Governments can also choose to promote
because of modern intensive farming methods. more sustainable methods of farming and
These pollutants include oxides of nitrogen, sulfur encourage people to eat less meat in their diets.
d ioxide, carbon monoxide, methane, particulates
It is important to consider whether decisions
and carbon dioxide. Governments around the
world are aware of the seriousness of these about environmental effects should be left to
governments, companies or individuals. These
pollut ants and are gradually working toget her to
set strict limits on how much of the pollutants can are difficult decisions and many different factors
have to be considered. Individuals may feel
be released into the environment.
powerless to act in isolation or believe that
changes in lifestyle do not have a significant
impact. Companies may resist changes because
of concerns over increased prices. Governments
face problems as they are linked by large global
trade agreements and increasing tariffs to meet a
greener future in one country may simply result in
increased imports from places that have less-strict
environmental standards.
1 Think about how the air quality where you live
compares with other parts of the world. What
might be the reasons for the differences in
air quality?
Figure 17.1: High levels of industrial atmospheric
pollution are causing environmental problems. 2 What factors might encourage or prevent an
individual choosing more environmentally
friendly options in their day-to-day lifestyle?
326
17 Chemistry of our environment
, 17 .1 Air quality Air pollution

Human activity has contributed significantly to
atmospheric pollution and increased levels of oxides of
Composition of air nitrogen, sulfur dioxide, methane, carbon monoxide and
The atmosphere, a layer approximately 480 km thick that carbon dioxide. Carbon dioxide occurs naturally in the
surrounds the Earth, is made up of a mixture of air and air but, when present in larger quantities, it is classed
water vapour. Levels of water vapour are highly variable as a pollutant because it is partly responsible for global
and can range from 0.2% in high mountain regions to warming and the associated climate change.
4.0% in tropical rainforests. To compare samples of air,
the water vapour is removed to produce clean dry air.
KEYWORDS
Clean dry air consists mainly of 78% nitrogen (N2) and
21% oxygen (O;J (Figure 17.2). This leaves only 1% for atmosphere: the layer of air and water vapour
the other gases. Argon makes up 0.9% so the other gases surrounding the Earth
are only present in very small quantities. The remainder clean dry air: containing no water vapour and
includes carbon dioxide (CO;), other noble gases (neon, only the gases that are always present in the air
krypton and helium), methane, oxides of nitrogen and
sulfur dioxide. respiration: the chemical reaction {a combustion
reaction) by which biological cells release the
nitrogen energy stored in glucose for use by the cell or the
'f- 78% body; the reaction is exothermic and produces ·
oxygen carbon dioxide and water as the chemical
21% by-products
inert: a term that describes substances that do
not produce a chemical reaction when another
·-- argon
substance is added
0.90% _photosynthesis: the chemical process by which
plants synthesise glucose from atmospheric
other gases carbon dioxide and water giving off oxygen as a
0.06% by-product: the energy required for the process is
carbon dioxide captured from sunlight by chlorophyll molecules
0.04% in the green leaves of the plants
Figure 17.2: Composition of clean dry air. pollutants: substances, often harmful, which are
added to another substance
Oxygen is essential for respiration and so life on Earth is global warmihg: a long-term increase in the
dependent on it. We can extract oxygen from the air to
average temperature of the Earth's surface, which
treat people with respiratory problems in hospital and for may be caused in part by human activities
industrial welding.
climate change: :hanges in weather patterns
Nitrogen; as found in the atmosphere, is unreactive. Some
brought about by global warming
species of bacteria can use ('fix') nitrogen directly from. the
air to produce amino acids, but most living organisms are
unable to convert gaseous nitrogen into useful products.
Nitrogen can also be extracted from the air and is used as
an incl'f atmosphere for food packaging or combined with
hydrogen to produce ammonia. Anunonia is the starting
material for most fertilisers (Chapter 9).
Carbon dioxide, although used in 11TJc>tosynthesis and
produced by respiration, makes up just 0.04% of the
Eartll'l> atmos\)b.ere.
327
The following section will look at sulfur dioxide, oxides

KEYWORDS
of nitrogen (nitrogen ox.ides, NO), carbon monoxide
and particulates. The section will focus on the sources of particulates: very tiny solid particles produced
these pollutants and the problems they create, and will during the combustion of fuels
highlight possible ways of minimising their production.
Given the importance of global warming and climate acid rain: rain that has been made more acidic
change, the sources and impacts of carbon dioxide and than normal by the presence of dissolved
methane will be addressed separately in Topic 17.2. pollutants such as sulfur dioxide (SO) and oxides
of nitrogen (nitrogen oxides, NO)
Sulfur dioxide
Fossil fuels such as coal and crude oil often contain
sulfur as an impurity. When the fuel is burnt, the sulfur
combines with oxygen from the air to release sulfur
dioxide (SOJ.
S(s) + Oi(g) --+ SOi(g)
Sulfur dioxide has been linked to breathing difficulties
because it irritates the lining of the respiratory tract
and so is especially dangerous for people with asthma.
Sulfur dioxide, along with nitrogen oxide (see next), is
also known to react with oxygen and water vapour in the
air to form acid rain. Acid rain is harmful to life both on
land and in the water. Increased acidity levels in lakes
can kill fish and other aquatic life, while many plants are
extremely sensitive to pH levels. Some building materials
react with acid rain over time leading to increased rates
of damage and corrosion (Figure 17.3).
Figure 17.3: Medieval sculpture damaged by acid rain.
Figure 17.4: Formation of acid rain.
328
The main sources of sulfur dioxide are electricity Like sulfur dioxide, oxides of nitrogen have been linked
-generation using either coal or oil and burning fossil to the formation of acid rain (Figure 17.4). An exampJe
fuels such as petrol (gasoline) and diesel in vehicle of a reaction showing how nitrogen dioxide reacts with
engines (Figure 17.4). water to form nitric acid (HNO 3) is:
To prevent the harmful effects of sulfur dioxide,
3NOig) + Hp(I) -+ 2HNO3(aq) + NO(g)
scientists have researched ways to reduce the amounts
being released into the air. Removal of SO2 from A second problem linked to increased levels of oxides of
combustion gases is done in a chimney (' flue'). The flue nitrogen is the formation of photochemical ~mog. Smog
gases react with water to form an acidic solution that can results when several air pollutants react with sunlight
then be neutralised by the reaction with calcium oxide in to form the characteristic brown haze seen over many
a process known as desulfurisation or 'scrubbing' (this is large cities.
an acid- base reaction). To prevent the formation of SO2 ,
it is possible to remove most of the sulfur containing
KEY WORDS
compounds before combustion. This gives the ultra
low sulfur petrol and diesel which are required in most desulfurisation: the removal of sulfur dioxide
countries across the world. from the fumes of power stations
acid-base reaction: (see neutralisation)

Oxides of nitrogen
Oxides of nitrogen, also referred to as nitrogen oxides photochemical smog: a form of local atmospheric
(NO), is the general name given to represent several pollution found in large cities in which several gases
different oxides including nitric oxide (NO) and nitrogen react with each other to produce harmful products
dioxide (NOJ. Oxides of nitrogen form when nitrogen
and oxygen from the air react at high temperatures. Photochemical smog is harmful to human health, and
An example of this is:
- has been linked to respiratory disease and increased
numbers of asthma attacks.
Although oxides of nitrogen can form naturally, most
come from human activity. These include vehicle emissions,
power production and other industrial processes. The extent
to which human activity produces NO.. was shown by the
• dramatic reduction in airborne nitrogen oxide pollution
during the lockdowns enforced as part of t)ie response to
the 2020 worldwide coronavirus pandemic.
.,
329
One way to reduce levels of NOx emitted by vehicles is to Carbon monoxide is toxic to humans as it binds
use a catalytic converter connected as part of the exhaust irreversibly with haemoglobin in red blood cells
system (Figure 17.5). The toxic gases produced by the preventing them from carrying oxygen around the body.
engine are converted into less harmful gases before they
Carbon monoxide can be produced when there is a lack
are emitted into the atmosphere.
of oxygen getting into an engine. It can also be made
A catalytic converter uses a rare transition metal catalyst when the air inlets get blocked in a gas central heating
(e.g. platinum, palladium or rhodium), which is coated system as this prevents oxygen from entering the system.
as a thin layer onto a honeycomb support. Within a
To reduce emissions of carbon monoxide, heating
catalytic converter, carbon monoxide will react with
systems should be regularly checked, and any inlets
nitrogen oxide to release carbon dioxide and nitrogen:
cleaned. In vehicles, the catalytic converter also prevents
carbon nitrogen carbon harmful emissions of carbon monoxide from entering
+ -+ dioxide + nitrogen
monoxide oxide the atmosphere (Figure 17.5).
KEYWORDS
Catalytic converters can also catalyse other reactions to
further reduce the emissions of pollutant gases. catalytic converter: a device for converting
polluting exhaust gases from cars into less
Carbon monoxide dangerous emissions
Incomplete combustion occurs when a hydrocarbon incomplete combustion: a type of combustion

fuel is burned in a limited supply of oxygen. When this reaction in which a fuel is burnt in a limited
happens, one possible product is the pollutant carbon supply of oxygen; the incomplete combustion
monoxide (CO). The incomplete combustion of octane of hydrocarbon fuels produces carbon, carbon
(an important constituent of petrol) is shown by: monoxide and water (see also comptete
combustion)
carbon
octane + oxygen -+ monoxide + water complete comb\lstion: (see also incomplete
16CO + 18Hp combustion) a type of combustion reaction in
which a fuel is burnt in a plentiful supply of oxygen;
This should be compared to complete combustion of the complete combustion of hydrocarbon fuels
hydrocarbon. fuels that occurs in a plentiful supply of produces only carbon d ioxide and water
oxygen and releases only carbon dioxide and water. ,
.,
exhaust gases: unburnt fuel, carbon monoxide

and oxides of nitrogen, with carbon d ioxide,
water and nitrogen exhaust gases: carbon d ioxide,
water and nitrogen catalytic converter
Figure 17 .5: A catalytic converter converts harmful exhaust gases into safer gases.
330 >
330
17 Chemist ry of our environment
amounts in the atmosphere have resulted in global

Particulates
warming. Global warming causes an increase in average
; Like carbon monoxide, carbon particulates (' soot'
temperatures and, because of this, is leading to climate
particles) are formed as a result of incomplete combustion
change. There are several greenhouse gases including
of fuel. The incomplete combustion of octane to form water vapour, carbon dioxide, methane, nitrous oxide,
particulates is shown by: sulfur hexafluoride and chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs). In
particulate this section we will only look at two main greenhouse
octane + oxygen -+ + water gases: carbon dioxide and methane.
(soot)
-+ 16C + 18Hp
KEYWORDS
Particulates are linked to increased respiratory disease and
there is also evidence that they can cause cancer. greenhouse gas: a gas that absorbs heat
reflected from the surface of the Earth, stopping it
An important source of particulates is from diesel vehicles
escaping the atmosphere
where they are produced because of a lack of oxygen
getting into an engine. To reduce particulate emissions,
diesel vehicles are fitted with particulate traps (fine mesh
filters) that remove the particles from the exhaust gas. Release of carbon dioxide into
the atmosphere
Carbon dioxide (COJ is produced during ihe complete
Questions combustion of fossil fuels. Fossil fuels are used to produee
1 What are the percentages of nitrogen, argon and electricity and are the basis of many forms of transport.
oxygen in clean dry air? For example, methane (natural gas) produces carbon
dioxide when burnt in a plentiful supply of oxygen:
2 Describe some of the problems caused by acid rain.
3 Fuels undergo either complete or incomplete carbon
methane + oxygen -+ dioxide + water
combustion in oxygen.
a State the word equation for the incomplete CH4 + 202 -+ CO2 + 2Hp
combustion of methane to produce carbon
monoxide and water.
b Balance this symbol equation:
Release of methane into the atmosphere
_ C6H,. + _ 0 2 -+ _ co+ _Hp Like carbon dioxide, methane (CHJ is a greenhouse
gas with levels in the atmosphere increasing over recent
4 Explain how oxides of nitrogen are formed and give
years. Some of the reasons for rising levels of methane
some of the problems they are lin ked to.
in the atmosphere are linked to increased cattle farming
Give a balanced symb ol equation to show how a and more waste being generated by larger populations.
catalytic converter can remove carbon monoxide Cattle emit large amounts of methane as part of their
(CO) and nitrogen oxide (N O) from the exhaust digestive system. A single cow can produce over 1000
gases to produce only nitrogen and carbon dioxide. times the mass of methane compared with a human. The
decomposition of food waste under anaerobic conditions
by bacteria at landfill sites also releases large amounts of
17 .2 Carbon dioxide, methane into the atmosphere.
methane and climate

Global warming
l change
Greenhouse gases
Carbon dioxide and methane occur naturally in the
atmosphere and play an important role in maintaining a
constant temperature on Earth. This relatively constant
temperature is due to a natural phenomenon that scientists
Carbon dioxide, although produced naturally by
respiration, is considered a particularly important
pollutant. It is one of the greenhouse gases and increased
331
call the greenhouse effect . By trapping thermal energy Some energy is

refl.~ted from the Earth's surfac.e, the greenhouse gases radiated back into
maintain an average surfac.e temperature of around 15 °C. space as light
Without the greenhouse effect the average temperature and heat.
would be much lower~ possibly only -18 9 C. At this energy

radiated
temperature, life of the type we know would not exist. Over
by the Sun
the last 200 million years, levels of greenhouse gases have
remained relatively constant but because of human activity
this is now starting to change. Increased use of fossil fuels
and changes in farming have caused levels of carbon
dioxide and methane to rise, and this in turn has resulted
in an increase in the average surfac.e temperature of the
Earth. The increase is known as global warming and it has
resulted in changing weather patterns (climate change).
Scientists have linked global warming to increased levels
of greenhouse gases because of the strong correlations
between the conc.entration of the gases in the atmosphere
and the average recorded temperatures. Burning fossil fuels, forest fires, industry and
human activities produce various 'greenhouse
gases'. As these increase, more and more of the
KEY WORDS Sun's energy is trapped. The Earth warms up.
greenhouse effect: the natural phenomenon

Figure 17.6: The greenhouse effect.
in which thermal energy (heat) from the Sun is
'trapped' at the Earth's surface by certain gases in
the atmosphere (greenhouse gases)
Climate change
Global warming has brought about a range of
Greenhouse effect consequences for the Earth's climate. The impacts
of global warming differ from country to country
The greenhouse gases allow high-energy, short and general changes in weather patterns are known
wavelength radiation from the Sun to pass through the collectively as climate change.
atmosphere and reach the Barth's surfac.e. Some of ,
this thermal energy is absorbed and heats the oceans An important impact of climate change is that the
and land, and some is radiated (reflected) back into the increase in average temperature has caused quicker rates
• atmosphere. The heat radiated by the Earth has a lower of melting of the Earth's polar -ice caps and glaciers.
energy and a longer wavelength. The actual wavelength Th.is has led to rising sea levels and so there has been
of this reflected radiation falls within the infrared part of increased flooding in some low-lying countries and faster
the electromagnetic spectrum. The greenhouse gases such rates of coastal erosion. The melting of ice caps is also
as carbon dioxide and methane can absorb this infrared causing changes to the life cycles and migratory patterns
radiation and then reradiate (re-emit) it in all directions. of animals and birds. Polar bears who rely on sea ice as
As it is re-emitted in all directions, some comes back they travel between different hunting grounds have been
towards the Earth's surfac.e. This reduc.es the heat loss particularly badly affected.
to space and increases the temperature of the lower An increase in temperature can also lead to more severe
atmosphere. This phenomenon is called the greenhouse droughts. With higher temperatures, the soil dries out
effect because the absorption and reflection of heat more quickly, and this is then compounded by changes
that warms the atmosphere works in a similar way to a in rainfall. Very dry soil and low rainfall increase the
greenhouse (Figure 17.6). chances of crop failure and, in the longer term, arable
land can become so arid it turns to desert. In regions
such as California and parts of Australia, drying out of
grasslands as a result of climate change has increased the
frequency and severity of wildfires.
332
The problems linked to climate change are not limited Methods of transport are starting to change, and several
' to increased temperatures. For many countries, climate countries have committed themselves to the phasing out
change means more frequent, more extreme weather of diesel engines. T here is significant interest in moving
patterns. For some this has included more severe storms away from petrol cars to electric cars, although there are
and associated flooding and landslides. still issues about how the electricity used to power these
vehicles is created. Some manufacturers are also looking
While the effects of climate change can be disruptive
at developing fuel cell vehicles. Hydrogen fuel cells are of
to human ways of living, they can be catastrophic for
particular interest as the only chemical product is water
animals and plants. Many living organisms are extremely
(Chapter 6).
sensitive to even slight changes in average temperature.
For example, changes in temperature can lead to As well as reducing the CO2 being produced, steps are
differences in the seasons when plants bud and produce also being taken to remove CO2 from the atmosphere and
fruit, which then has consequences for the wildlife so reverse the impact of global warming. At electricity
whose life cycles depend on these plants. Changes in sea generating plants, it may be possible to capture the CO2
temperature can lead to bleaching of coral reefs and the before it is released into the atmosphere and then store it
associated loss of marine life. underground. An alternative method being used by many
countries is to plant additional trees (afforestation) which
Reducing the amount of CO2 released will capture the CO2 through photosynthesis.
into the atmosphere Photosynthesis is the process of taking in carbon dioxide

and water, and then using energy from sunlight in the
There are many steps that can be taken to reduce the
presence of chlorophyll to produce glucose and oxygen.
release of greenhouse gases at an individual, national
Glucose is necessary as the starting material for other
and global level. In recent years, governments from
carbohydrates including starch and cellulose. The word
around the world have tried to take steps together to
equation for photosynthesis is:
reduce their greenhouse gas emissions. There have been
important climate change conferences where agreements carbon dioxide + water --+ glucose + oxygen
have been m ade, including the Kyoto Protocol of 2005
I
The balanced symbol equation for photosynthesis is:
and the Paris Agreement of 2016. Increased public
awareness of the impact of climate change and a
stronger presence of environmental groups has placed
pressure on governments to react.
An important step towards decreased greenhouse gas KEY WORDS
emissions of carbon dioxide is to reduce our reliance on
renewable (resources): sources of energy and
fossil fuels for transportation and electricity generation.
.. This can be done by turning to renewable sources of
other resources that cannot run out provided t hey
are managed sustainably, or t hat can be made at
energy such as wind and solar. Many countries have
a rate faster than our current rate of use
started to remove coal power stations and replace them
with renewable energy sources. chlorophyll: a green pigment in plants which
traps energy from the Sun in photosynt hesis
333
Reducing the amount of methane 17.3 Water

-
......
released into the atmosphere

Methane is released by both rotting vegetation and Water is vital to life and plays an important role in many
livestock. Innovative approaches have been considered industrial processes. In this section, we will consider how
to reduce methane emissions from livestock, including to test for the presence of water, look at the differences
changes in their diet and even trying to capture the gases between distilled water and drinking water ('potable'
they produce. water), and consider some of the different substances
found in water from natural sources.
In the short term, a more realistic option for reducing
methane emissions from cattle is to better educate people
about the harmful effects of an excessively meat-rich diet. Tests for the presence and purity of water
There is evidence that encouraging greater dependence There are many colourless liquids, including water,
on plant-based food is being successful, with increasing ethanol and cyclohexane, so bow do we know whether
numbers of vegetarians and vegans around the world. water is present? Either of two simple chemical tests can
be used to show the presence of water (Chapter 9). Blue
Methane is also released by decomposing waste in landfill. cobalt chloride paper turns pink in the presence of water
To reduce the production of methane, better separation of (Figure 17.7). Anhydrous cobalt(ID chloride is converted
household waste might lower the amount of food waste to the hydrated salt.
going to landfill and so lower the amount of methane
being produced by bacteria. Landfill methane can be C0Cl2 + 6Hp ~ CoC½·6Hp
trapped and burnt as a clean energy source for generating
electricity or heat. blue pink
Questions
6 Name two greenhouse gases and give a source
for each.
7 Why are levels of carbon dioxide in the
atmosphere increasing?
8 What are some of the problems Jinked to climate
change and the melting of the ice caps? List some
of the strategies that could be used to reduce these
environmental issues.
The greenhouse gases allow short length, high-energy
radiation from the Sun to pass through the
atmosphere. What do they do to the longer wavelength Figure 17. 7: Test for the presence of water: blue cobalt
radiation reflected into space from the Earth's surface? chloride paper turns pink. Note the use of tweezers when
handling the test paper.
REFLECTION
Alternatively, solid white anhydrous copper(II) sulfate
How easy do you find it to apply your scientific forms blue hydrated copper(II) sulfate (CuSO4 ·5Hp) if
understanding to issues such as g lobal warming water is added to it (see Figure 9.3 in Chapter 9).
and climate change? Could you explain these
environmental issues to someone else? Are there CuSO4 + 5Hp ~ CuSO/5Hp
ariy other factors you would need to consider?
white blue
How can the scientific knowledge you have learnt
benefit people and the environment?
The purity of any substance, including water, can
be tested by recording its melting and boiling points
(Chapters 1 and 21). This is because pure water has a
fixed melting point of 0°C and boiling point of 100°C.
334
Distilled water calcium and magnesium salts. There are a large range of
metals that are needed in trace amounts to support good
' Tap water is a mixture of natural minerals (dissolved salts)
health. These include Group I metal ions (sodium and
and substances added due to human activity. Experiments
potassium), Group II metals (calcium and magnesium) and
that require water as a solvent should use distilled water
a range of transition metal ions (iron, cobalt, nickel, copper,
rather than tap water. This is because substanees dissolved
zinc and chromium). Calcium, for example, supports
in the tap water may interfere with experiments giving
the health of teeth and bones while iron is needed in the
unwanted side reactions. They would also interfere with the
production of haemoglobin (for use in red blood cells).
results of standard analysis, e.g. for metal ions. Distillation
(Chapter 21) removes the impurities and uses the key idea
that different substances have different boiling points. Substances that are harmful
Some metallic compounds
Substances in natural water Alongside the useful metallic compounds, water can be
Water from natural sources contains many dissolved contaminated with a range of potentially harmful metals.
substances. Some of these substances are beneficial and Heavy metals such as lead and mercury can enter water
some are potentially harmful. systems from a variety of sources including mining, metal
smelting, waste disposal, corrosion and metal processing
Substances that are beneficial plants. Lead can cause liver and kidney damage, and
mercury has been linked to damage of the nervous system.
Dissolved oxygen
One of the most important substances to be found Sewage
dissolved in water is oxygen. Oxygen is needed to support Wastewater (sewage) produced by humans includes a range
animal and plant life. The levels of oxygen present will of contaminants. Sewage is usually carried by underground
determine the number and variety of living organisms pipes (sewers) and taken to wastewater treatment plants to
that can be supported. remove the harmful materials. Any solids can be filtered or
digested and the treated liquid (effluent) returned into rivers
Oxygen enters the water either as a result of
or the sea. Leaks of sewage into drinking water can happen
photosynthesis by aquatic plants or through diffusion
during natural disasters such as extreme weather events or
of oxygen from the air (Figure 17.8). Oxygen is removed
earthquakes. When this happens, harmful microbes enter
from the water by respiration in plants and animals. The
the drinking water spreading diseases such as diarrhoea,
amount of oxygen dissolved in water is dependent on
cholera, dysentery, typhoid and polio.
temperature and whether it is saltwater or freshwater.
Nitrates and phosphates
oxygen supply oxygen consumption NPK fertilisers are used to increase crop yields by
to a river in a river adding three essential plant nutrients nitrogen (N),
I
0 2 diffuses from , phosphorous (P) and potassium (K) to the soil (Chapter 9).
sunlight
!-the atmosphere :
into water
,,,______,,,,...,..,.,,____,._
!
They are made from water-soluble compounds (salts) that
are easily absorbed through the roots of plants. These
water-soluble compounds create problems if there is heavy
rain after the fertiliser has been spread onto the crops.
~ fl
.a Under these conditions, instead of being taken in by the
r€s_piring plants the fertiliser will be washed over the surface of the
bacteria
soil and into waterways. This process is called run-off.
cornsume 0 2
photosynthesis respiration
Figure 17.8: Oxygen in river wate r.

run-off: water that travels over the surface of the
land before entering waterways such as rivers
Metallic compounds and lakes; run-off from farmland may contain
As water passes over and through different types of rock dissolved substances such as fertilisers
it can dissolve metallic compounds called minerals, e.g.
335
Figure 17.9: Rapid algae growth in a waterway possibly contaminated with phosphates and nitrates.
When fertilisers enter waterways, such as streams and rivers, pollutant, plastics are insoluble in water and so can be
they cause the rapid growth of algae. These algae form huge easily removed. The issues being caused by plastics are
blooms that cover the surface of the water (Figure 17.9) and due to the volume of waste being released.
block out sunlight. Without sunlight, aquatic plants that
Poor disposal of these materials combined with a lack
live below the surface are unable to photosynthesise and
of biodegradability has resulted in polymers being
die. This leads to a drop in oxygen levels in the water and so
released into waterways. As they do not breakdown
causes the death of many aquatic animals.
(biodegrade), they can rapidly accumulate. The impacts
The most common forms of pollutant that enter of accumulated plastics in our oceans and waterways on
water because of run-off are nitrates and phosphates. wildlife can be catastrophic.
Phosphates can also enter water because of washing; for
There are several aspects to the problem of plastic
example, pentasodium triphosphate (NasPPu) is widely
pollution of the oceans and waterways:
used as an ingredient in biological washing powders.'
• Larger sea creatures and sea birds can be trapped by
Plastics
.. Plastics are polymers (Chapter 20) and they are used discarded fishing nets.
• Large scale debris such as intact plastic bags can be
throughout our daily life. Unlike the other forms of
confused as prey such as jelly fish and so consumed
by whales, turtles and large fish. Once consumed
these plastic items can block the digestive system
and ultimately lead to death.
336
• Microplastic debris can accumulate in the surface The first step in purification is to remove large insoluble
layer of the ocean. These small pieces of plastic can objects such as rocks, plastic bags and branches, in a
easily be consumed by fish and damage the digestive process known as screening. The water is then taken to' a
systems of the animals. sedimentation tank. In the sedimentation tank the soil and
sand will drop to the bottom of the tank (as sediment).
The nature of plastics and the problems caused by their
pollution of the oceans are described in further detail in The next step in the process is to filter the water
Chapter 20. to remove smaller insoluble particles. The water is
often passed through a very fine sand to filter out
The growing awareness of plastic pollution bas resulted
these particles.
,- in several initiatives to minimise the problem. Methods
of removing plastics from water are being developed and Water may contain dissolved organic compounds that
chemists are also designing new polymers that can cause the water to have an unwanted odour or taste.
are biodegradable. The organic compounds, often present in exceptionally
low amounts, can be removed by using an activated
KEYWORD carbon filter.
Before water is distributed to homes, the final step is
biodegradable: a substance that can be broken disinfection. Disinfection is needed to kill harmful
down, or decomposed, by microorganisms waterborne microbes such as bacteria that can cause
disease. Different countries use different methods
( to disinfect water but one of the most common and
r Purification of domestic water effective methods is to add small amounts of chlorine-to
the water. Typically, chlorine is added at a concentration
Tap water, the domestic water supplied to our houses,
undergoes several purification steps from the point it is of 2- 3mg/dm3•
collected to the point it is delivered. In many countries, A summary of the main stages involved in water
-- domestic water is taken from lakes and reservoirs_ treatment is shown in Figure 17.10.
precipitators
river water
to clear solid
I pumping storage reservoir particles rapid gravity
sand filters
treated with a small

screens for straining amount of ozone to
floating rubbish disinfect the water
f
chlorine . .
m1crostrainers
activated carbon
a small amount granules absorb
of chlorine is used some of the
r=!I"====-"- to d isinfect water chemicals
drinki ng water
service reservoir
Figure 17.10: Purifying water for the domestic water supply.
l
337
Questions
1o' State a simple test, giving its result, for detecting the 14 Why is it important that scientists develop new
presence of water. biodegradable plastics rather than continuing to use
11 How could you prove that a sample of water the current types of plastic?
was pure? 15 Water from a lake contained microplastics, traces of
12 Nitrates and phosphates can enter waterways as dissolved organic compounds and microbes linked
a result of the run-off of fertiliser from fields. to diarrhoea. How would these three contaminants
Describe the problems that can be caused when be removed to enable the water to be sold as
this happens. domestic water?
13 Name two useful metals found in water samples and
state the reasons why they are useful. Name two
metals found in water that are not useful and state
the problems they can create.
ACTIVITY 17.1
A letter of concern! • In the first paragraph, you should state the

importance of ensuring water does not
Evidence from a recent survey suggests one
become contaminated by unwanted metal
country has given permits to mining companies
compounds. You need to give examples of the
who have allowed dangerous metal compounds to
problems that metal compounds cause and
contaminate local drinking water. The same country
then suggest steps to ensure that they do not
has opened themselves up to offer plastic disposal
enter the water.
for other countries and the evidence indicates
that significant amounts of this plastic waste are • In the second paragraph, you need to explain
not being recycled but are instead ending up in some of the problems associated with p lastic
waterways and being transported out to sea. waste and microplastics.
As an expert in water pollution, you have been • You should finish your letter with a reminder of
asked to write a letter to the president of this the importance of clean water and the need for
country highlighting the environmental concerns. countries to work together.
The letter should have the following structure. ·
Self-assessment
List three criteria for a good explanation of an environmental concern. How well do you think your
explanations about the effects of metal and plastic pollutants have met these criteria? Can you rewrite one
of your explanations adding further improvements?
338
The atmosphere is made up of a mixture of gases and includes a variable amount of water vapour.
Clean dry air (air without water vapour) is a mixture of nitrogen (78"/o), oxygen (21%), noble gases and
carbon dioxide.
'1'\\e mait'> a,t '?<:)\\>J.tat'>U. i.n<:l>J.de <:atbon dioxide (CO,), methane (CH.), oxides of nitrogen (NO J, sulfur
dioxide (SOJ, carbon monoxide (CO) and carbon particulates.
Oxides of nitrogen, NO.,, are formed when nitrogen and oxygen from the air react at high temperature. They
can cause respiratory problems, acid rain and photochemical smog. NO_, can be removed by the use of a
catalytic converter.
In a catalytic converter, CO and NO, react to produce nitrogen and carbon dioxide.
SO2 is formed when sulfur in fossil fuels reacts with oxygen during combustion. SO1 reacts with water vapour
to form acid rain. Levels of SO2 can be reduced by using ultra-low sulfur fuels (desulfurisation of fossil fuels)
or by neutralisation of flue gases.
CO and carbon particulates a re products of incomplete combustion of fossil fuel s and can cause health
problems. CO can be removed from exhaust gases using a catalytic converter and carbon particulates are
removed by using a particulate trap.
CO1 is a greenhouse gas produced by the combustion of fossil fuels; CH4 is a greenhouse gas released by cattle
and from rotting vegetation at landfill sites.
Greenhouse gases allow short wavelength energy from the Sun to reach the Earth's surface but trap a nd
re-emit t he longer wavelength radiat ion reflected from the Earth.
Plants remove CO1 from the atmosphere by photosynthesis.
The symbol equation for photosynthesis is 6CO2 + 6Hp - C6H 1p 6
+ 602.
I ncreased levels of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere have caused an increase in average temperatures
(global warming), which has a range of important environmental effects.
Strategies to reduce the effects of these environmental issues include using renewable sources of energy,
. decreasing the use of fossil fuels, planti ng more trees and a reduction in livestock farming .
The presence of water can be determined by using anhydrous copper(II) sulfate, which turns from white to
blue with water, or anhydrous cobalt(II) chloride, which turns from blue to pink with water; the purity of
water can be assessed by its melting point (0°C) and boiling point (100°C).
Distilled water is used in practical experiments because it contains fewer impurities than tap water. I
Water from natural sources contains a variety of substances; some of these substances are beneficial
(oxygen for aquatic life and some metal compounds for essential nut rients); others are harmful (some metal
compounds are toxic, sewage contains harm ful microbes and plastic are hazardous to aquatic life).
D omestic water supplies go through several purification steps, including screening, sedimentation and
r filtration (to remove solids), carbon filtration (to remove odours and taste) and chlorination (to kill
harmful m icrobes).
r•
339
....._,
PROJECT
The great energy debate At the end of the debate, the group should
produce a brief $urnm11ry of the arguments and
Your government needs to plan its energy
reach a consensus in order to produce an outline of
resources for future use (Figure 17.11). In a group of
a recommended plan for your government to use.
three, organise a debate, putting forward different
ideas for the plan.
• Person 1. You work for the oil industry. In your

presentation you must give reasons why it is
necessary to continue burning fossil foels. You
should think about the ways in which fossil
fuels are used, e.g. transport and heating and
the problems in swapping to alternatives. You
might also want to state ways in which you
have made improvements in how fossil fuels
are being used.
• Person 2. You represent suppliers of renewable
energy. In your presentation you need to
explain the benefits of moving to renewable
fuels. Think about the emissions benefits but
also any logistical concerns.
• Person 3 (the chair or judge). You will need to
listen to the presentations from each person
and then ask them additional questions.
Figure 17.11: Green energy versus polluting energy.
.,
340
- EXAM-STYLE QUESTIONS
1 The domestic water supply is treated in various ways to make it safe for
use. Which of the following treatments is designed to kill any bacteria
present in the water?
A sedimentation
B filtration through gi;avel beds
C treatment with chlorine
D passage through a carbon filter [1]
2 The pie chart shows the composition of clean dry air.
nitrogen
oxygen
other gases
COMMAND WORD
a What is the percentage of nitrogen in clean dry air? [1]
b Apart from nitrogen and oxygen, state the names of two other gases state: expre~s in
present in clean dry air. [2] clear terms
c The following questions relate to these four ga5e$, which are all found
as air pollutants.
A carbon monoxide C oxides of nitrogen
B methane D sulfur dioxide
Name the gas given off from decomposition in landfill waste
disposal sites. [1]
ii Name the gas produced when fuels bum incompletely. [1]
iii State which gases cause acid rain. (2)
iv State which gases are a harmful component of photochemical smog. [1)
[Total: 8)
3 The burning of fossil fuels is the main source of air pollution. Fuels are
burnt in vehicles and in power stations to make energy.
a When coal is burnt in power stations, sulfur dioxide is one of the
, pollutants formed. How can power stations prevent sulfur dioxide
from entering the atmosphere? (2)
b Oxides of nitrogen are produced in motor car engines. Where do the
oxygen and nitrogen come from? (1)
341 )
341
CONTINUED
c How can the burning of fossil fuels cause pollution of water in rivers
a~~~~ ~
d Carbon monoxide is produced in motor car engines.
i Why is carbon monoxide produced instead of carbon dioxide? (1]
ii Why is carbon monoxide harmful? [1)
COMMAND WORD
e Carbon monoxide and oxides of nitrogen can be removed from
exhaust gases by using a catalytic converter. Explain how, using a explain: set out
balanced symbol equation in your answer. (2) purposes or
[Total: 9) reasons/make the
> 4 The reaction shown occurs in catalytic converters.
2N02(g) + 4CO(g) ... 4CO/ g) + NiCg)
thi ngs evident/
provide why and/or
Which statement about this reaction is true?
relevant evidence
A Carbon monoxide is an oxidising agent and is oxidised to carbon dioxide.
i e· .Carbon monoxide is a reducing agent and is oxidised.
. .C 'Nitrog~n dioxide is an oxidising agent and o~idises nitrogen.
- ij p Nitrogen dioxide is a reducing agent and reduces carbon monoxide. [1)
I
~;i a Carbon dioxide in the atmosphere can ciluse,..global warming. 1'1itpe~{:.:_:
:J ·. a natural process that removes carbon dioxide from the atmosphere:
and give the balanced symbol equation for the reaction involved in ·
F , _ this
process. (3)
·; b Name another different gas that also causes global warming and
. _, name one natural source of this gas. (2)
1
. c Explain how the gases you have named caused global warming. (3)
[To~al: 8)
342 >
342
After studying this chapter, think about how confident you are with the different topics. This wilJ help you to see
state the composition of clean dry air 17.l

give the sources of the main pollutants: NOx, sulfur
dioxide, carbon monoxide, particulates, carbon 17. 1/17.2
dioxide and methane
state the problems caused by NOx, sulfur dioxide,
17.1
carbon monoxide and particulates
describe ways of reducing sulfur dioxide and NOx 17.1
state that carbon dioxide and methane are
greenhouse gases, which at higher concentrations
17.2
lead to global warming and the associated
climate change
.......
> descnbe how the greenhouse gases cause
global warming
give ways in which levels of greenhouse gas
17.2
emissions can be reduced
describe photosynthesis and give the word equation
17.2
linked to the process
> state the symbol equation for photosynthesis

describe tests for the presence and purity of ,water l/.J
explain why distilled water is used in

• 17.3
practical chemistry
explain the importance of dissolved oxygen in water 17.3
state that water can contain dissolved metal
compounds, some of which are beneficial and others 17.3
that are harmful to human health
';' explain that sewage can pollute water leading to
17.3
possible disease
give the problems caused when nitrates and
17.3
phosphates enter water by run-off
describe the problems caused by plastic
17.3
contamination in water
describe the main stages in the purification of the
17.3
domestic water supply
►
343)
,,.
343
.. • learn that a homologous series of organic compounds has the same general formula and similar
chemical properties
• state that alkanes are saturated compounds as all the carbon-carbon bonds are single covalent bonds
• understand that compounds containing at least one carbon-carbon double or tr-iple bond are
unsaturated molecules
• distinguish between saturated ar:id unsaturated molecules by testing
• learn that alcohols and carboxylic acids are further homologous series and that the type of organic
compound present is given a systematic name
• distinguish different organic comp,ounds by their molecular and displayed formu lae
344
18 Introduction to organic chemistry
..
r --- GETTING STARTED __ . . i ,· /
What do you understan d by t he word 'organic'? Discuss your understanding of th e word in groups·
The word has been linked to ideas related to and make a list of any substances that you would
:- t hink of as being organic. What element do t hey all
th e natural world. Organic molecules were once
believed to have distinctive chemical propert ies, contain? What molecules do we search for on other
making them unique to living organisms. It was planets and in t he dust of comets that would be
r
I
believed t hat there was a separate chemistry that evidence fo r life other than on Earth? Then come
together as a class to share your id eas.
took place in living things.
I
r
I
I
BUILDING A SPACE ELEVATOR
L Carbon is a non-metal in Group IV of the Periodic

f Table. The uniqueness of carbon lies in the different
I ways in which it can form bonds. This shows even in
I
l the element itself. Carbon exists in several different
rI forms (Chapter 3). The fu llerenes, carbon nanotubes
and graphene, have been d iscovered relatively
f
l recently and the exploitation of these types of
f, carbon is one of the major features of the exciting
r-
I new area of nanotechnology.
I One important property of carbon nanotubes and
I,,
grapherie is their amazing tensile strength. These
r ·-~ structures are far stronger than steel or titanium.
Carbon nanotubes and graphene also show very
high electrical conductivity. The prospect of using
i" these new materials for t he elevator cable has
given new belief in the idea of constructing a space Figure 18.1: Computer artwork of a future space elevator
elevator (Figure 18.1). viewed looking down the length of the elevator cable
towards the Earth.
The idea of a space elevator to carry humans into
orbit is not new - the Russian scientist Konstantin
Tsiolkovsky envisaged something like it at the end developing such an elevator and an International
Space Elevator Consortium has been set up. One
.. of the 19th century. However, today technology
development that must be explored is that of
is being developed to move the idea towards
reality. The elevator would comprise a huge (50km) generating nanotube or graphene structures for
),- base tower on Earth, with a cable connected to the cable t hat are much longer than those currently
r it that stretches into space to a point beyond available. However, the possibilities created by
geostationary orbit, at an altitude of more than t hese new materials are quite staggering.
35000km. Tracks and platforms along the tower
and cable would allow vehicles to move to d ifferent
levels, including into orbit without t he need to use 1 What do you understand of the purposes and
large rockets. advantages of developing a space elevator?
Preliminary experiments on aspects of the design 2 Discuss the structural similarities between
of a space elevator have been conducted from the graphite, graphene and the fullerenes to
International Space Station. Companies in Japan explain why they are able to conduct electricity
and China have expressed an interest in even though they are non-metallic .
...
345
18.1 Names and a Carbon can form four bonds, and carbon atoms can
join to one another to form long chains.
formulae of organic
compounds
b In alkanes, only hydrogen atoms are joined to the side
positions on the chains. Other atoms can be attached
Carbon's unique properties instead, forming other families of organic compounds.
The remarkable versatility and complexity of the
structures that carbon atoms can form is the very basis
of the different forms of life here on Earth. Amino acids,
simple sugar molecules and even fats may be relatively
simple molecules, but the construction of complex
molecules, such as long-chain carbohydrates and proteins, c Double bonds can occur in simple molecules
shows the versatility of carbon-containing compounds.
DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid), the molecule that makes • ~ g ~•ios~
life possible, is a complex organic molecule (Figure 18.2).
d Carbon atoms can also join to form ring molecules,

for example glucose, as shown here.
H H
H 't'-oH
. .)=-~-0
Hu\ I H~
HO.:t;~t~
I - H
H H 6H
e Long-chain fat molecules can be formed, as well as numerous
other molecules .
..
Figure 18.2: Two ways of showing a section of the complex

molecule DNA. Key
• carbon Q hydrogen ({;;, oxygen
Carbon is unique in the variety of molecules it can form.
The chemistry of carbon-containing compounds is known Figure 18.3: Carbon is very versatile and able to form chain
as organic chemistry. There are three:special features of and ring structures.
covalent bonding involving carbon (Figure 18.3):
• carbon atoms can join to each other to form long
chains; atoms of other elements can then attach to KEYWORDS
the chain
organic chemistry: studies on the structure,
• the carbon atoms in a chain can be linked by single, properties and reactions of organic compounds
double or triple covalent bonds that contain carbon in covalent bonding
• carbon atoms can also a rrange themselves in rings.
346 >
346
Only carbon can achieve all these different bonding

-arrangements to the extent that we see. Indeed, there KEYWORDS .
are more compounds of carbon than of all the other hydrocarbons: organic compounds th at contain
elements put together. carbon and hydrogen only; the alkanes and
Figure 18.3 gives some idea of how these bonding alkenes are two series of hydrocarbons
arrangements can produce different types of molecule. saturated hydrocarbons: hydrocarbons
molecules in which all t he carbon-carbon bonds
are single covalent bonds
Hydrocarbons
alkanes: a series of hydrocarbons with the general
One of the simplest types of organic compound is formula C0 H20• 2 ; they are saturated compounds
the hydrocarbons. Hydrocarbons are compounds that as they have only single bonds between carbon
contain carbon and hydrogen only. atoms in their structure
Alkanes The simplest alkane contains one carbon atom and is

The hydrocarbons studied at this level can be subdivided called methane. We discussed the covalent bonding in
into two 'families' of molecules. Some hydrocarbons are methane in Chapter 3. The series of alkanes compounds
saturated. These molecules contain only single covalent is built up by simply adding an extra carbon atom to
bonds between carbon atoms. Since carbon has a valency the chain (Figure 18.4 and Table 18.1). N ote that the
of 4 the bonds not used in making the chain are linked names of this series of hydrocarbons all end in -ane.
to h~drogen atoms (Figure 18.4). No further atoms can The first part of the name (the prefix) tells you the
be added to molecules of t hese compounds, which is number of carbon atoms in the chain. We will see later
why we say they are saturated. This family of saturated that these prefixes are used consistently in naming
hydrocarbons is known as the alkanes. organic compounds.
methane butane
H H H H H
I I I I I
H- C- H H- C- C-C-C- H
I I I I I
H H H H H
ethane pentane
H H H H H H H
I I I I I I I
H- C- C- H H-C - C- C- C- C-H
I I I I I I I
H H H H H H H
propane hexane
H H H H H H H H H
I I I I I I I I I
H- C- C-C-H H- c - c - c -c - c-c-H
I I I I I I I I I
H H H H H H H H H
Figure 18.4: Displayed formulae and structures of the first six alkanes.
----
347
- ~-
I .
hydrogen atoms compared with a similar alkane because
I
, I
of the presence of the carbon-carbon double bond. The.
__
~-,;A .. ,- ~-- --~
,,, , , ,p..-.lf~
' . C ,,;--- '
~
- ' • l'- •~
simplest alkene must contain two carbon atoms (which
methane 1 meth- CH 4 are needed for one carbon-carbon double bond to be
ethane 2 eth- C2H6
formed) and is called ethene. Figure 18.5 shows a dot-
and-cross diagram of the bonding in ethene and also the
propane 3 p rop- C3Hs structures of the first three alkenes. You will note that the
b utane 4 but- C4H10 names of all the alkenes end with -ene.
pentane 5 pent- CsH,2
hexane 6 hex- C6Hl4 two snared pairs
of e lectrons
Table 18.1 : Names and molecular formulae of the alkanes. (a double bond)
The formulae given in Table 18.1 are the molecular fonnulac ethene
of the compounds (Chapter 4). These formulae show the
H H
total numbers of each type of atom in a molecule of the \ I
C=C
compound. Each molecule increases by a-CHi- group as I \
H H
the chain gets longer (Figure 18.4). The formulae of these
molecules all fit the general formula C,.H21,+2 (where n is the
number of carbon atoms present). Therefore, if you know propane
the number of carbon atoms in an alkane molecule, then H H H
I I /
you can always work out the molecular formula. H- C- C=C
I \
In organic chemistry, the structure of a molecule is also H H
very important. Figure 18.4 shows the displayed formulae
of the first six alk:anes in the series. A d/spfuyed forrntll11 butene
shows the bonds between all the atoms in a molecule. The H H H H
displayed formulae of the alkanes emphasise the fact that I I I /
H- C- C- C=C
these molecules are saturated; all the bonds between carbon I I \
'r\ 'r\ 'r\
atoms are single bonds.
Figure 18.5: Bonding in ethene and structures of the first

three alkenes. ·
moll:!Cular formula: a formu la that shows the
$ actual number of atoms of each element present Table 18.2 shows the names and molecular formulae of
in a molecule of the compound the first five alkenes. Note that the same prefixes used
:·
for the alkanes are also used to indicate the number of
displayed formul a: a representation of the
carbon atoms in t he molecules of the alkenes.
structure of a compound th at shows a ll the atoms
and bonds in the molecule
Number:.:of?' ' · Prefix to Molecular
alkeM~: a series of hydrocarbons with the Al~ 1 ·carbon atoms name formula (CnHJ
genera l formu la CnH2n; they are unsatu rated
molecules as they have a C=C double bond ethene 2 eth- C2H4
somewhere in the chain p ropene 3 prop- C3H6
b ute ne 4 but- C4Hs
Alkenes pentene 5 pent- CsH,o
The ability of carbon atoms to form double bonds hexene 6 hex- C6H12
with each other gives rise to the illkc.-nes. The alkenes
are another family of hydrocarbons. Alkenes have the Table 18.2: Names and molecular formulae of t he first
general formula C. Hz,,. Note that there are two less five alkenes .
348
The presence of the carbon-carbon double bond in an Alkanes are already fully saturated and cannot take part
11.lkene molecule makes alkenes much more reactive lhan in addition reactions. An alkanc would give no reaction
alkanes (alkanes contain only carbon-carbon single with bromine water; the solution would stay orange-
bonds). Other atoms can add on to a lkene molecules brown (Figure 18.6a). The only way to introduce a new
when the double bond breaks open. The a lkenes are atom into an alkane is by substitution (Chapter 19).
unsaturated hydrocarbon\. This difference is the basis for
a simple test for unsaturation in a hydrocarbon molecule.
Alkynes are a third family of hydrocarbons. Toe alkynes Q uestions
are also unsaturated hydrocarbons as the molecules 1 Write down the names and molecular formulae of
contain a carbon-carbon triple bond. The simplest the first four alkanes.
member is ethyne (C2~ ) . We do not study the alkynes any 2 Draw the displayed formulae of methane
further at this level.
and butane.
3 Draw a diagram showing the arrangement of
Chemical test for unsaturation electrons in the bonding of ethene. Only show the
If an alkene, such as etheoe, is shaken with a solution outer (valency) electrons.
of bromine in water, the bromine loses its colour. 4 What do you observe if ethene is bubbled through
Bromine has reacted with ethene in an addition reaction, bromine water? Explain the difference between this
producing a colourless compound (Figure 18.6b). observation and what would occur if ethane was
bubbled through bromine water.
unsaturated hydrocarbons: hydrocarbons whose Homologous series of organic

molecules contain at least one carbon-carbon
double or triple bond compounds
addition reaction: a reaction in which a simple The presence of the carbon~rbon double bond in an
molecule adds across the carbon-carbon double alkene molecule gives this family of compounds their
bond of an alkene characteristic properties. The a lkenes have the properties
of unsaturated molecules, as distinct from the alkanes
that only have carbon~rboo single bonds. A family of
..
•
alkane
b
:7 1 alkene
organic compounds with similar chemical properties are
called a homologou c;eries. The atom, or group of atoms,
that gives the series its particular characteristic properties
is called the ~ mcliomtl group. For this reason, the
carbon-carbon double bond is known as the functional
group of the alkenes. Two other homologous series are
added the alcohols and the carboxylic acids. The functional
,, added group for the alcohols is the hydroxyl group (-OH),
and that of the carboxylic acids is the carboxyl group
(-COOH). All the members of a particular homologous
series contain the same functional group (Table 18.3).
h mologo i; Hries; a family of similar

compounds with similar chemical properties due
Figure 18.6: Test for unsaturation. Bromine water with a: an to the presence of t he same functional group
alkane and b: an alkene.
unctionz group· the atom or group of atoms
responsible for the characteristic reactions of
a compound
f
349
I I methane
alkanes -ane -c - c-
II CnH2r>+2
(n = 1)
ethene
alkenes -ene ' C=C '
/
/
CnH2n
(n = 2)
methanol
alcohols -ol - O- H CnH2n+10H
(n = 1)
0
/,, methanoic acid
carboxylic acids -oic acid -c C0 H 2n♦ 1 COO H
'o-H (n = 0)
Table 18.3: Different homologous series.
Alcohols
The alcohols are a homologous serie& of compounds H H
with the -OH functional group and the general formula I I
H- C-C- 0- H
CnH2n+10 H. The simplest member of the series is I I
methanol (CH OH). Methanol has one carbon atom H H
per molecule a~d its covalent bonding was discussed in ---
All alcohols
Chapter 3 (Figure 18.7). have the
-OH group.
.....
methanol
H Figure 18.8: Displayed formula and model of ethanol
I (C2H5OH).
H- C- 0 - H
I
H Note that the names all the alcohols have the same
ending (-ol). The early alcohols of the series i_i.re all
neutral, colourless liquids that do not conduct electricity.
., Figure 18.7: The displayed formula and bonding of

methanol (CHpH).
Carboxylic acids ·
The carboxyl acids are the fourth homologous series
The most important member of the a lcohol series, listed in Table 18.3. These properties of these acids are
determined by the presence of the -COOH functional
however, is ethanol (C2H pH). Ethanol is the second
mem ber of the series with two carbon atoms in each group in the molecule. The carboxylic acids have the
molecule (Figure 18.8). oeueral
e,
formula CnH2n+ ,COOH. The first member of the
series is methanoic acid (HCOOH), which is found in
stinging ants and nettles. However, the most important
of these acids is etbanoic acid (CHJCOOH), which is the
acid found in vinegar. The structures of these acids are
shown in F igure 18.9.
350 )
350
18 Introduction t o organic chemistry
The prefixes to the names of the alkanes are standard

methanoic acid and indicate the number of carbon atoms in the
H-C',,. chain (see Table 18.1 ). Therefore, a compound in any
homologous series with just one carbon atom will always
0 ~ have a name beginning with meth-, one with two carbon
All:~:;ic .
atoms eth- and so on. Hence the names of the early
acids have the
-COOH group. members of the alcohol and carboxylic acid series are as
shown in Figures 18.8 and 18.9. When a halogen atom
is introduced into a chain, the name of the compound
ethanoic acid contains a prefix indicating which halogen is present.
H
I o The different homologous series all have particular
H- C-C'9 endings to their names (Table 18.3).
I 'o-H
H Many different organic compounds are formed when a
hydrogen in the original alkane 'backbone' is replaced
by another group. The product formed when ethene
reacts with bromine in solution in hexane (Figure 18 .11)
illustrates the system of naming organic compounds.
propanoic acid butanoic acid

H H
H H H H H I I
I I ~o I I I ~o H- 1
C-C2- H
H-C-C-C H-c-c-c-c
I I 'o - H I I I 'o- H I I
H H H H H Br Br
Figure 18.9: The structures of methanoic acid, ethanoic Figure 18.11: Nam ing the product of adding bromine
acid, propanoic acid and butanoic acid; the first four to ethene (1,2-dibromoethane).
carboxylic acids.
The process of naming the addition product of ethene
and bromine is as follows:
Naming organic compounds • The product has two carbon atoms joined by a
single bond. So, it is named after ethane.
The alkanes are a homologous series of saturated
hydrocarbons. Their names all end in -ane, no matter • The molecule contains two bromine atoms. It is
how long the chain. Figure 18.i0 shows a model of called dibromoethane.
tetradecane (C14H30) . The names of the first six alkanes
• The bromine atoms are not both attached to the
were given earlier in Table 18.1.
same carbon atom. One bromine atom is bonded
to each carbon atom. The carbon atoms are
numbered I and 2. The full name of the compound
is 1,2-dibromoethane.
The naming of the early members of the alkenes,
alcohols and carboxylic acids is systematic and uses the
prefixes and name endings we have met earlier (Table
Figure 18.10: Model of a straight-chain alkane (C,4 HJ . 18.4). You will note that in naming ethanoic acid, that
the carbon atom of the - COOH functional group is
counted as part of the carbon chain. This is true when
naming any member of the carboxylic acid series. .,
351 >
351
. '°cl (w.'here
Compoun ,'..n,r.,,,
• 2'[' "~'· ¥r '·
,f81X Name ending Displayed formula
H H
"2 1 /
ethene eth- -ene C=C
H/ "H
H H
21 'I
H-C-C-0-H
ethanol eth- -ol
I I
H H
H 0
21 1 ~
ethanoic acid eth- -oic acid H-C-C
I "'-o-H
H
Table 18.4: Names and displayed formulae for members of different series with two carbon atoms in the chain.
6 What are the molecular and displayed formulae of

Questions propanoic acid?
5 What are the functional groups of the following 7 What are the correct names for the follow·ing
homologous series? straight-chain organic compounds?
a alkenes a C4H10
b alcohols b C3H6
c carboxylic acids. c C 3H,OH
d C/iPOOH
ACTIVITY 18.1
O rganic fl ash card s Through to questions on specific structures:

Organic chemistry involves several very specific • What is the displayed formula of propene?
words and definitions. In groups, get together , Use different cards to put the questions from
to devise a set of flash cards to aid your both directions (name -t structure /
understanding and help with revision. structure ... name).
The flash cards should have a question on the front Different groups could make cards covering
of t he card and the corresponding answer on the different types of molecule and structure.
back of the card. Construct a set of cards and use them to quiz each
Questions covered could range from the other in the group. Then compare notes with the
following suggestions: rest of the class to refine the content covered.
• What is a hydrocarbon? You could also investigate t he wide range of online
• What is a homologous series? software available for creating and using virtual
flash cards.
• What are t he formulae and.structures of the
d ifferent functional groups?
The naming and organisation of organic compounds and their molecules is in many ways highly systematic.
How do you visualise the different types of compound and remember their differences? Could you develop
a written approach to help you?
352 >
352
...
-18.2 Structural formulae, homologous series
I and isomerism
Structural formulae and homologous series
ln organic chemistry, the structure of a molecule is very However, there is a further way of representing the formula
important. Figure 18.5 shows the displayed formulae of the of an organic compound and this is the structural formula
first three alkenes in that series. So far, we have concentrated of the molecule. This type of formula is not as complex as
on showing the molecular formulae and the displayed drawing all the bonds of a structure but is an unambiguous
formulae for the members of the different homologous way of representing the way the atoms of a molecule are
series. A displayed formula is important because it shows arranged. Ethane has the molecular formula C2H6 and the
clearly all the bonds present in a molecule. molecule can be clearly represented by its structural formula
CH,CHr Table 18.5 shows the structural formulae of some
early members of different homologous series.
Homologous series Corn00und Molecular formula Structural fonnula KEY WORDS

ethane C2H6 CH3CH3
alkanes structural formula:
propane C3H, CH3CH2CH3 the structural formula
ethene C2H4 CH2•CH 2 of an organic
alkenes molecule shows how
propene CJH6 CH3CH• CH2 all the groups of
ethanol C2H5OH CH 3CHzOH atoms are arranged
alcohols in the structure;
propanol C3HpH CH 3CH 2CHzOH ethanol, CH3CHpH,
ethanoic acid CH3 COOH CH 3COOH for example
carboxylic acids
propanoic acid C2H5COOH CH3 CH 2COOH
Table 18.5: St ructural formulae o f representative molecules from different homologous series.
.
So far. we have only considered molecules made up of an 'straight' main chain. However. the atoins do not have to
unbranched, straight hydrocarbon chain. However, it is be arranged m this way. The fourth carbon atom can go
possible to have molecules where the chain is branched. off from the main chain to give the branched structure of
In butane, all four carbon atoms are arranged in one ?--nethylprnn:ine (Table 18.6).
butane 2-methvlDroDllne
Molecular formula C4 H10 C4 H10
H-~ _ H ] methyl group
Displayed formula
H H H H
I I I I
H - C - C-C - C - H
I I I I
H
,1
I~t
'i::
This carbon atom Is the
second in the chain.
H H H H H- C- - -H
I I I
H H H
Structural formula CH3CH2CH2CH3 CH3CH(CHJCH 3
alkane, bums to give CO2 and H2 O, alkane, bums to give CO2 and H2O,
Properties ,
boiling point 0 °C boiling point-12 °C
Tab!& 18.6: Two different alkanes w ith t he same molecular formula.
353
Two factors are important when naming the molecule of · members of the series. Under normal conditions, the first
2-methylpropane. The first is the name of the side-chain, four members of the straight-chain alkanes are gases,
in this case a CH3- group. When we remove a hydrogen and those between C 5H 12 and C 16H:14 (which are called C5
from an alkane chain, we are left with a group known to C, 6 alkanes) are liquids. The compounds in the alkane
as an alkyl group. Alkyl groups are named after the family with 17 or more carbon atoms are waxy solids.
hydrocarbon by changing the -ane ending to -yl. So we call Similar graphs can be plotted for the melting points and
CH3- a methyl group, C2H 5- an ethyl group and so on. densities of the a lkanes. The values of these physical
The second consideration is numbering the carbon properties show a progressive increase in value with
atom to which the side-chain is attached. In this case, it increasing chain length. The same trends in physical
is simple as the methyl group is attached to the middle properties are observed in other homologous series such
carbon in a chain of three carbon atoms; the second as the a lkenes or alcohols. This adds a further general
carbon, numbered 2. In general, where a hydrocarbon feature to the characteristics of a homologous series.
side-chain has replaced a hydrogen to produce a more A homologous series is therefore a series of organic
complex molecule we number the carbon atoms in the molecules having:
chain. The numbering always starts at one end of the • the same functional group
chain. The counting starts at the end which keeps the
number of the side-chain position as low as possible, and • the same general formula
we can then indicate where the side-chain is in the name. • members that differ from one to the next by a
Butane and 2-methylpropane are both alkanes and they -CH2- unit
have very similar chemical.properties as they have the same • a consistent trend in physical properties with
functional group. The difference between them shows increasing molecular size
itself mainly in their melting points and boiling points.
Hydrocarbons containing branched chains have lower • similar chemical properties.
melting points and lower boiling points than straight-chain
compounds with the same number of carbon atoms.
Figure 18.12 shows a graph of the increasing boiling
Structural isomerism of
points of the straight-chain alkanes with the length of hydrocarbons and alcohols
the hydrocarbon chain. As the length of the hydrocarbon
chain increases, the strength of the weak forces between The system of naming compounds emphasises the
the molecules (intermolecular forces) is increased. This importance of molecular structure. Molecules with the
shows itself in the increasing boiling points of the same molecular formula can have different structures.
We have seen in Table 18.6 that two members 0f the same
120 homologous series can have the same number of atoms
80
l in their molecules, but these atoms can be connected
*
V
0 40 l l )r
.
:.- , I
together in different ways. Butane and 2-methylpropane
.....
..., ,_ , have the same molecular formula (C4 Hio) but different
0 ,,
~
C
·5 structural formulae (CH 3C~CH 2CH3 and CH 3CH(CH 3)
a. --40 CH3, respectively}. This is known as structural isomerism,
en ,, and butane and 2-methylpropane are structural isomers
~ -80
·5 -120' I •
of each other.
al I
I
-160
KEYWORDS
1 234567
Number of carbon intermolecular forces: the weak attractive forces
atoms in one molecule that act between molecules
of the alkane
structural isomerism: a property of compounds
Figure 18.12: Plot of the boiling points of the first six that have the same molecular formula but
straight-chain alkanes (methane to hexane). different structural formulae ; the individual
compounds are known as structural isomers
354
18 Int roduction to organic chemistry
Structural isomerism can be shown by members of'any H

I
homologous series and can arise from changing the H H H H H H O H
position of the functional group in a molecule. In the
alkenes, the two forms of butene (C4H 8) are the first
I I I I
H- C-C-C -C - 0 - H
I I I I
H-t-t-t-t-H
I I I I
H H H H H H H H
examples of this. The two isomers are but- 1-ene and CH3CH2CH,CH,0H CH3CH 2CH(OH)CH,
but-2-ene (Figure 18.13).
but-1-ene , - - - - -- Here the

double bond
starts at the
H H H H first carbon.
\ I2I I
C
C' =C -C3 -C4 - H
I I I Figure 18.14: Structura l isomers of butanol (C.HpH).
H H H
but-2-ene Here the In this case, we must be careful as it would be easy to

double bond think that there should be a third isomer with the alcohol
starts at the group attached to the third carbon atom. This is not the
H H second carbon. case as that structure is identical to butan-2-ol turned
I I I I over on itself. There are just the two straight-chain
H- C'- 2 C= C3 -C4 - H
I I structural isomers of butanol. We will discuss these
H H isomers of alcohols further in Chapter 19.
Figure 18.13: But-1-ene and but-2-ene are structural

isomers of each other. Esters of carboxylic acids
The structures in Figure 18.13 are different. Again, the and isomerism
carbon atoms are numbered. The number added to the There is a further homologous series of organic
formula indicates the position of the double bond. In compounds that we have not discussed yet. This series
but-1-ene the double bond is between carbon atoms I of molecules are the esters formed when an alcohol
and 2, whereas in but-2-ene it is between carbon atoms 2 reacts with a carboxylic acid. For example, ethyl
and 3. This type of structural isomerism is also known as ethanoate is formed by the reaction between ethanol and
position isomerism. ethanoic acid:
This type of structural isomerism where the position
. of the functional group is moved within the molecule ethanoic acid + ethanol -+ ethyl ethanoate + water
also takes place in the alcohols. Here the carbon atom
to which the -OH group attaches changes. The alcohol
concerned must have three or more carbon atoms in This type of reaction is known as esterification. Figure
the chain for isomerism to take place. There are two 18.15 shows the displayed formula of ethyl ethanoate
structu ral isomers of propanol: and indicates how the ethyl group from ethanol has
• propan-1-ol, CH 3CH2CHzOH attached to the acid grouping.
• propan-2-ol, CH 3CH(OH )CH 3
KEYWORD
Here the -OH group is attached to the terminal carbon
atom in propan-1-ol, but to the central carbon atom in esters: a family of organic compounds formed
propan-2-ol. A similar situation can arise with butanol. by esterification, characterised by strong and
Figure 18.14 shows the two straight-chain position pleasant tastes and smells
isomers of butanol (C4H 90H).
355
Questions
8 Give the structural formulae of the
following compounds:
a propan-2-ol c propyl ethanoate.
b but-2-ene
9 Define the term structural isomerism.
10 Plot a graph of the boiling points of the first six
alcohols (Table 18.8) against the number of carbon
atoms in the molecule. Comment on the shape of
the graph.
Name of alcohol Boilina DOlnt / "C

methanol 65
Figure 18.15: Displayed formula and molecular model of
the ester, ethyl ethanoate (CH3COOC2HJ. ethanol 78
propan-1-ol 97
Esters are named after the acid from which they are butan-1 -ol 117
formed; the acid is indicated by the second, most pentan-1-ol 137
important, part of the name. This means that ethanoate
hexan-1 -ol 158
is the second part of this name. T he alkyl group from the
alcohol, ethyl in this case, is the first part of this name. Table 18.8: Boiling points of t he early members of the
Ethyl ethanoate is just one example of a series of esters. homologous series of alcohols.
Different combinations of alcohol and carbox.ylic acid
can produce different esters that are structural isomers
of each other. Table 18.7 shows an ex.ample of such
isomerism formed from different unbranched alcohols
and carboxylic acids. Propyl butanoate and butyl
propanoate are structural isomers of each other as they
have the same molecular formula.
Molecular
Ester Alcohol Carboxyllc acid Displayed formula of ester
., formula
H H H
I 11 -l'OHHH
H - C-C- C-C I I I
propyl butanoate propan-1-ol butanoic acid
I I I 'er-c-c-c- H
C,H,P2 H H H I I I
H H H
(<;H7CO<X;H 7)
H
I
H - C-c- c
H
I ,.o H
I
H
I
H
I
H
I
I I 'er-c - c-c - c - H
butyl propanoate C,H,Pz butan-1 -ol propanoic acid H H I I I I
H H H H
(C2 H5COOC4 HJ
Table 18.7: Propyl butanoate and butyl propanoate are structural isomers of each other.
356
Formulae and information Drawing the displayed formula each time we refer to
Every organic compound can be represented by several a compound can be unnecessary. A structural formula
dilferent types of formulae. These formulae are designed is designed to show information on structure without •
to give us information about the composition and nature showing all the bonds. The two straight-chain structural
of the compound. The first and most crucial is the isomers of butene can be written as CHF HFH=CH 2
molecular formula. This represents the actual number of (but-1-ene) and CH3CH=CHCH 3 (but-2-ene),
atoms present in the molecule; thus, for methane it is CH4 , for instance.
for ethane it is C2H 6, and so on. The final type of formula relevant to all compounds
As we have seen in this chapter, the molecular formula including organic substances is the empirical formula
does not indicate the structure of the molecule. It is the (Chapter 4). This formula is the simplest possible whole-
displayed formula for the compound that gives us that number ratio of the atoms in a compound; thus, for
information. A displayed formula shows the structure and methane it is CH,, but for ethane it is CHl'
all the bonding in the molecule. Examples of displayed
formula can be seen in Figure 18.4 and Table 18.7.
' SUMMARY
...
.: ;L:.. <
-!. •
·
.-
Homologous series of organic compounds (e.g. alkanes or alkenes) have the same general formula and similar
chemical properties because they contain the same fu nctional group.
Alkanes are a homologous series of saturated hydrocarbons as all the carbon-carbon bonds are single
covalent bonds.
..... Compounds containing at least one carbon- carbon double or triple bond are said to be unsaturated
(e.g. a lkenes are unsaturated as t hey conta in a carbon- carbon double bond).
Saturated and unsaturated compounds can be distinguished by testing with bromine water; unsaturated
compounds will decolourise bromine water.
Alcohols and carboxylic acids are further examples of homologous series and that organic compounds are
given a systematic name depending on which functional group is presem and the number of carbon atoms
present in their structure. .
Different organic compounds can be distinguished from each other by their molecular and
displayed formulae.
The molecules from various homologous series, including the esters of carboxylic acids, can be represented
and distinguished by their structural formulae.
Structural isomers are compounds with the same molecular formula but different structural formulae.
--
The general characteristics of a homologous series include increasing chain length, similar chemical
properties and related trends in physical properties.
-
Structural and displayed formulae of unbranched members of the different homologous series containing up
to four carbon atoms, including the unbranched esters formed from such alcohols and carboxylic acids, can
be drawn to represent the bonding in the different molecules.
·-
r
357
PROJECT
Modelling different homologous series these photos or sketches to help you to create a
classroom display that explains the homologous
Molecular modelling is an important aid to
series. Before you start, write a list of success
understanding tl:ie series of molecules studied in
criteria for a good chemistry display.
t his chapter and the nature of a homologous series.
Work in groups and use modelling kits (or
polystyrene spheres and cocktail sticks) to create
models of:
• the structures of members of different
series having the same number of carbon
atoms (Figure 18.16 shows hydrocarbon
molecules from different series containing two
carbon atoms)
• the early members of a particular
homolegous series (e.g. methanol,
ethanol, propane!)
• the possible isomers with a certain molecular
formula (propan-1-ol and propan-2-ol).
Figure 18.16: Molecular models showing the carbon-
Take photos of your models (or draw sketches) as carbon single, double and triple bonds of ethane, ethene
you produce t hem. Working in your groups, use
and ethyne.
Peer assessment
Look at another group's cla ssroom display. Use t he success criteria you created to write down two t hings
t hat the g roup have done well, and one thing t hey could improve next t ime.
3.S8 >
358
18 Introduction to o rganic chemistry
1 Organic compounds have names that correspond to the homologous

series they belong to. Four types of organic compound have names
ending in -ane, -ene, -ol or -oic acid. How many of these types of
compound contain oxygen?
A thi:et
B two
C one
D four f1]
2 The displayed formula of five organic compounds A-E are shown in the figure.
A B C
H H H H
I I I I ,;-o
H- C-C-C-H H-C-C
I I I ~ '-o- H
H H H
D E
H H H
I I I
H-C - 0 - H H-C-C-H
- I I I
H H H
Use these compounds to answer t he questions which follow. Each compound

A- E ean be used once, more than once or not at all. COMMAND WORDS
a State which compound is an alkene. [1] state: express in
b State which two compounds belong t~ the same homologous series. [2] clear terms
c State the functional group in the alkene homologous series. [1] describe: state the
d Alkenes are referred to as unsaturated compounds. Describe what is points of a topic/
meant by the term unsaturated. [1] give characteristics
e State the molecular formula and the empirical formula of compound C. [2] and main features
(Total: 7]
,..
359
CONTINUED
120
.. -.,,.
80
u
0 40 _
.....
...,
C
'6
0 ,,
., -
a. -40 /
en ,
!E ~
,,,
'6 - 120 , I
a:i
I
- 160
2 3 4 5 6 7
Number of carbon
atoms in one molecule
----- of the alkane COMMAND WORD

deduce conclud e
from available
information
,._
H H
H~c--c/_..H
. I -- cI
c
H_../ \H
H H
COMMAND WORD
give: produce an
answer from a
given source or
reca ll/memory
360 >
360
,-
r 18 Introduction to organic chemistry
....
-
.. . . .... .............. • -·-
. •
•• • ~
understand that a homologous series is a family
of compounds with the same general formula and
18.1
similar chemical properties because they contain the
same functional group
,..
~
state that the alkanes are a series of saturated

I
hydrocarbons as all the carbon-<:arbon bonds are 18.1
single covalent bonds
r understand that compounds containing at least
one carbon-carbon double or triple bond are 18.1
unsaturated molecules
describe the test to distinguish unsaturated and
18.1
saturated molecules using bromine water
understand that alcohols and carboxylic acids
r are further homologous series and that organic
, compounds are given a systematic name depending 18.1
~
on their functional group and the number of carbon
atoms they contain
r'
distinguish the different organic compounds by their
.
18.1
molecular and displayed formulae
:.
understand how to write the structural formulae
) of molecules from the different homologous series, 18.2
including the esters of carboxylic acids
,.
., define structural isomers as compounds with
> the same molecular formula but different

structural formulae
18.2
,
describe the general characteristics of a homologous
series, including increasing chain length, similar
r
> chemical properties and related trends in
physical properties
18.2
-understand how to draw the structural and

displayed formulae of unbranched members of
> different homologous series containing up to four

carbon atoms, including the unbranched esters
18.2
,. formed from such alcohols and carboxylic acids

j
r 361 )
361
ft
descr:ibe the alkanes as a series of generally unreactive compounds that burn readily and undergo
:substitution reactions with chlorine
• understand that alkenes can be obtained by catalytic cracking
• understand that ethanol is manufactured either by fermentation or by the catalytic hydration of ethene,
and that it can be used as a solvent and as a fuel
• describe the reactions of ethanoic acid with metals, bases and metal carbonates
.. •
•
.. .
362
... 19 Reactions of organic compounds
CONTINUED ,
GETTING STARTED . _ . ·. . :
The combustion of organic compounds is an familiar with? What are the dangers of their use?
important feature of this chapter. In groups, discuss Are you familiar with the ideas of complete and
your understanding of the meaning of the terms incomplete combustion of organic fuels?
combustion, burning and fuels. Which fuels are you
MOLECULAR ENVELOPES
Nanotechnology has recently brought a new able to carry substances to targeted locations in the
dimension to the idea of test-tube chemistry. body, such as transporting specific drugs to the site
The world's smallest test-tube has been made from of a tumour. Many of the most useful medicinal drugs
a carbon nanot1:Jbe built out of sheets of the latest do not like a water environment (they are,hydrophobic
revolutionary form of carbon known as graphene = water-hating). This makes it difficult to deliver them .
(Chapter 3). across cell membranes to the place in the body where
they are needed: The delocalised electrons present
The 'nano test-tube' was used to polymerise carbon-
in the structure Qf the graphene sheets means that
60 epoxide (C6p) molecules (Figure 19.1a). The water-liking molecules can be attached to the surface
spherical molecules of C/,00 join together in a straight of.the sheets. The desigried nanoparticles have a
line linked through the oxygen atoms. Without the water-liking outer surface and the drug is enclosed
restriction of the nano test-tube, random branching
in these capsules. The medical compounds are then
and tangling of the polymer chains occurs. However, delivered to the place where they are needed.
with the monomers lined up in the test-tube, the
polymer is unbranched and linear; the tube controls Professor Uchegbu is not only developing ways of
the direction of polymerisation. using nanoparticles in the absorption of hydrophobic
drugs, she is also researching potential uses of
a nanoparticles in the treatment of brain tumours,
';,' including how they could first identify, then target
and destroy diseased b~ain cells. Her university and
pharmaceutical industry research places her at the
very forefront of the development of revolutionary
medical work.
Figure 19.1 a: The smallest possible test-tube-an Discussion questions

experiment carried out in a nanotube. b: Professor ljeoma 1 Each layer of graphite, and of graphene, is
Uchegbu, an expert on pharmaceutical drug delivery made up of carbon atoms covalently bonded
using nanotubes. together. It is considered to be a.giant covalent
structure. How would the approximately
The use of a nanotube as a test-tube is just one spherical molecules of the fullerenes (C60 and C7C)
example of what can be done with this technology. be classified?
Professor ljeoma Uchegbu is directly involved in
2 What properties of the nanotubes make them
developing medical uses for nanotubes (Figure 19.1b).
useful for a drug delivery device? Does the fact
One key development has been the design of
that they have delocalised electrons present help
polymers that can form themselves into nanoparticles
in this use?
,-
,.
363
LPG has various compositions of propane and butane V

19.1 Characteristic depending on its use. The gases are kept as fjquids under •
pressure, but they vaporise easily when the pressure is
reactions of different released. In areas where there is no mains supply of
natural gas, propane tanks supply the fuel for heating
homologous series systems. Cylinders of butane gas are used in portable gas
fires in the home. Butane is also used in portable camping
stoves, blowtorches and gas lighters (Figure 19.3).
Chemistry of the alkanes'
The alkanes are quite unreactive compounds. Alkanes
are saturated molecules, so they cannot take part in
addition reactions. They are unaffected by acids or
alkalis. However, they can take part in substitution
reactions, particularly with chlorine.
Alkanes as fuels
The simplest alkane is methane (CHJ, which is the major
component of natural gas. Other alkanes are obtained
from the fractional distillation of petroleum. One
chemical property that all these alkanes have in common
is that they bum very exothermically. Natural gas and
various alkanes have therefore proved very useful fuels.
Compressed natural gas (CNG) bas been used as a
cleaner alternative fuel to petrol (gasoline) for vehicles·
ranging from long-distance motor coaches (Figure 19.2a)
to urban autorickshaws (tuk-tuks) (Figure 19.2b).
Propane and butane burn with very hot flames and are
sold as liquefied petroleum gas (LPG). LPG can also be
used as a fuel in autorickshaws and minibuses.
Figure 19.3: A butane portable camping stove.
Combustion of the alkanes

Alkanes burn readily (Figure 19.4). When they bum in a
good supply of air, the products are carbon dioxide and
water vapour:
carbon
methane + oxygen -+ + water
dioxide
CHig) + 2Oig) -+ CO/g) + 2Hp(g)
carbon
ethane + oxygen -+ + water
dioxide
2C2H/g) + 7Oig) -+ 4CO/g) + 6~O(g)
carbon
butane + oxygen -+ + water
diox,ide
Figure 19.2 a: India's first long-range CNG buses, which can
travel up to 1000 kilometres in a single fill, in New Delhi.
2C4H 1o(g) + 13OiCg) -+ 8COz(g) + I0Hp(g)
b: A TVS autorickshaw in Chennai, India.
364
19 Reactions of organic compounds
The same products are obtained whichever alkane is <; stitut - reactions with chlorine
burnt, so Jong as there is a sufficient oxygen supply. Note One reaction that alkanes will take part in is a rm
that the key to balancing the symbol equations for these
r 1l ion with chlorine. In these reactions a hydrogen atom
reactions is to baJance the oxygen correctly.
of the alkane is replaced by a chorine atom.
hydrogen
methane + chlorine -+ chloromethane +
chloride
hyd rogen
ethane + chJorine -+ chJoroethane +
chloride
A substituted chloroalkane is produced together with
hydrogen chloride gas. The hydrogen chloride gas can be
detected using moist blue litmus paper, which turns red.
t ac. r a reaction in which an

atom (or atoms) of a molecule is (are) replaced by
different atom(s), without changing the molecule's
Figure 19.4: Excess natural gas (mainly methane) is
general structure
sometimes flared off at oilfields.
---------- --
However, if the air supply is limited, then the poisonous The ubstit reaction of an alk n with ch orine is
gas carbon monoxide can also be formed. Carbon inte sting b ause it is a photod10.:1111,,1I rl'it, 111111:
monoxide is the product of incomplete combustion of a
n·ne sunhgh\ chlo methane+ hyhd
c lro?
on den
-
hydrocarbon. For example: rn t ane e
carbon + CH (g) + U .(g) CH (, (Ill + HCl(g)
methane + oxygen -+ water
monoxide
2CH.(g) + 302(g) -+ 2CO(g) + 4Hp(g)
Carbon monoxide (CO) is toxic because it interferes with , tocl I I e ct on a chemical reaction
the transport of oxygen around our bodies by our red where the activation energy requ ired to start the
blood cells. reaction is provided by light, usually 9f particular
Incomplete combustion can also wavelength, falling on the reactants
. produce fine particles of carbon
(particulates or 'soot'). These particles nne react m
of carbon have not even reacted to a,1olet l1sht
produce carbon monoxide. It is these chlon
fine carbon particles that can glow
yellow in the beat of a flame. They give
a candle flame or the 'safety' flame of a
Bunsen burner its characteristic yellow
colour (Figure 19.5).
The incomplete combustion of fossil C
fuels is a major cause of air pollution
(Chapter 17).
O=O O=O
Figure 19.5: 'Safety' flame of the
Bunsen burner. The air supply t o the flame Figure 19.6 : Modelling the reaction between methane
is restricted. and chlorine.
365
The reaction can continue further as more hydrogen H H H H H H H H

a b
atcfms are substituted. Compounds such as I I I I I I I I
H-C - C - C-C-CI H-C-C-C -C - H
dichloromethane (CH2Cl2), trichloromethane (CHCIJ I I I I I I I I
and tetrachloromethane (CCIJ are formed in this way. H H H H H H Cl H
Substituted alkanes are also good organic solvents. CH3CH2CH 2CH 2CI CH3CH 2CHCICH 3
l, 1, 1-trichloroethane is used frequently in dry-cleaning,
for example.
Other alkanes will react in a similar way with chlorine:
ethane + chlorine
- chloroethane
+ hydrogen
-
chloride
C2Hig) + Clig) C2HSCI(g) + HCl(g) Figure 19.7: Structures of a: 1-chlorobutane and
--
b: 2-chlorobutane: the isomers of C4H9 CI.
chlorobutane
+ hydrogen
butane + chlorine
chloride
C4Hig) + Clig) C4H 9Cl(l) + HCl(g)
Questions
Ethane forms just one monosubstituted product 1 The hydrocarbon propane is an importapt
CH 3CH2CI (chloroethane). Longer chain alkanes will constituent of liquified petroleum gas (LPG). For
produce a mixture of monosubstituted products as the burning of propane in an excess of air, give:
hydrogen atoms attached to different carbons can be
replaced. Propane will react to produce a mixture of the a a word equation
1-chloropropane (CH 3C8iCH2Cl) and 2-chloropropane b a balanced symbol equation.
(CH3CHC1CHJ isomers of C3~Cl. Butane will similarly 2 a Write a word equation for the incomplete
produce a mixture of two isomeric products. Figure 19.7 • combustion of methane.
shows the displayed and structural formulae, together b What is the formula of carbon monoxide?
with molecular models, of the two isomers formed .
c Why is carbon monoxide toxic?
1-Chlorobutane and 2-chlorobutane are the two isomers.
Remember that the counting starts at the end of the 3 Bromine reacts with alkanes in a similar way
molecule that keeps the number of the substituent to chlorine. Hydrogen bromide is made in the
position as low as possible. substitution reaction between propane and bromine:
propane + bromine - bromopropane +
I KEYWORD hydrogen bromide
a Draw the structure of propane.
isomers: compounds that have the same
b D raw the structure of a form of bromopropane.
molecular formula but different structural
arrangements of the atoms - they have different c The reaction between propane and bromine is a
structural formu lae photochemical reaction. Suggest what is meant
by photochemical.
Chemistry of alkenes
Alkenes are unsaturated hydrocarbons and are much.
more reactive than alkanes. Under suitable conditions,
molecules such as bromine, hydrogen and water (steam)
will add across the C=C double bond. The reactivity
of the alkenes makes them important for the synthesis
of other organic molecules. The most important source
of alkenes is from the catalytic cracking of long-chain
alkanes from petroleum.
366
r
Catalytic cracking as a source of alkenes

- The major source of hydrocarbons industrially is from
refining oil (Chapter 20). However, the demand for the
various fractions does not necessarily match their supply
from the fractional distillation process (Figure 19.8). For
lighter fractions such as petrol, the demand is greater
than the supply. The opposite is true for heavier fractions
such as kerosene (paraffin) and diesel oil (gas oil). Larger
molecules from these heavier fractions can be broken
into smaller, more valuable, molecules. This process is
called catalytic cracking ('cat cracking').
Figure 19.9: A cracking plant in an oil refinery.

Figure 19.8: There is not the same economic demand for all
the fractions from petroleum. The shortened hydrocarbon molecules are produced by
the following type of reaction:
decane ~ octane + ethene
KEY WORDS
C,0H22 ~ CsH,s + CzH4
catalytic cracking: the decomposition of long-
chain alkanes into alkenes and alkanes of lower Figure 19.10 uses the displayed formulae to show the
re lative molecular mass; involves passing the nature of the cracking reaction.
larger alkane molecules over a catalyst heated
H H H H H H H H' H H
to 500°C I I I I I I I I I I
H- c-c-c-c-c-c-c- c- c-c - H
fractiona l distillation: a method of d istillation I I I I I I I I I I
using a fractionating column, used to separate H H H H H H H H H H
liquids with different boiling points
Cracking takes place in a huge reactor (Figure 19.9).

In this reactor, particles of catalyst (made of powdered H H H H H H H H H H
I I I I I I I I I I
minerals such as silica, alumina and zeolites) are mixed H-c-c-c - c- c- c- c- c - H + C=C
with the hydrocarbon fraction at a high temperature I I I I I I I I I I
around 500°C. The cracked vapours containing smaller H H H H H H H H H H
molecules are separated by distillation. Figure 19.10: Cracking decane to produce octane
and ethene.
367
This is just one of the possible reactions when decane The paraffin vapour passes-over the catalyst that is kept
is cracked. T he molecules may not all break in the hot. The gases produced in the cracking reaction can be
same place. The alkene fragment is not always ethene: collected in test-tubes. These gases produced can then be
propene and but-1-ene may also be produced. Some tested to see if they are alkenes using the bromine water
hydrogen is also broken off from the long-chain alkanes test (Chapter 18). For safety, the delivery tube can 1Je
being cracked. fitted with a safety valve (Bunsen valve) to prevent cold
water being drawn back into the hot apparatus.
All cracking reactions give:
• an alkane with a shorter chain than the original and a delivery tube
a short-chain alkene
• or two or more alkenes and hydrogen.
aluminium oxide
All the products of cracking are useful. The shortened heat granules (catalyst) water
alkanes can be blended with the gasoline fraction to
enrich the petrol. The alkenes are useful as raw materials medicinal
paraffin
for making several important products. Figure 19 .11
shows the various important uses for the ethene
produced, while other alkenes are also useful: safety valve
• propene can be polymerised to polypropene

b slit in rubber tube
(also referred to as polypropylene); while butene
polymerises to produce synthetic rubber glass rod
• the hydrogen produced can be used for the synthesis
of ammonia in the Haber process (Chapter 9) or as
a fuel.
Figure 19.12 a: Cracking of a long-chain alkane in the
laboratory. b: Use of a Bunsen safety valve to prevent
'suck back'.
Combustion of alkenes
Alkenes are similar to other hydrocarbons when burnt.
They give carbon dioxide and water vapour as. long as
the air supply is sufficient:
carbon
ethanol ethene + oxygen -+ + water
dioxide
The presence of the carbon-<arbon double bond in

an alkene molecule makes these molecules much more
reactive than alkanes (alkanes contain only carbon-
carbon single bonds). Alkenes take part in addition
reactions in which two substances react to form just one
single product.
Figure 19.11: Important products can be made from ethene

Bromination
produced by catalytic cracking.
Alkenes can take part in addition reactions. Other
atoms can add on to alkene molecules when the double
The cracking reaction can be carried out in the
bond breaks open. This difference in reactivity between
laboratory using medicinal paraffin oil (Figure 19.12).
unsaturated alkenes and saturated alkanes produces
The catalyst is heated strongly first and then the paraffin.
a simple test for unsaturation using aqueous bromine
368 >
368
(Chapter 18). Bromine water is decolorised when shaken Hydrogenation

, with au alkene. The addition of bromine to an alkene
Hydrogen reacts with allcenes to form alkanes. The .
can be carried out using a solution of the halogen in an
unsaturation of the alkene is removed to produce the
organic solvent such as ethanol.
corresponding alkane. The addition of hydrogen across a
The addition of bromine to an alkene can be carried out carbon-<:arbon double bond is known as hydrogenation.
using a solution of the halogen in an organic solvent Ethene reacts with hydrogen if the heated gases are
such as ethanol. In this case, the bromine atoms add passed together over a nickel catalyst. The unsaturated
across the double bond in the alkene. The double bond ethane is the product (Figure 19.15):
in ethene breaks open and forms new bonds to the ethene + hydrogen iso..300•~ ethane
bromine atoms (Figure 19 .13). The red- brown colour nickel
of the bromine is Jost during the reaction as the product
in each case is colourless. This type of reaction, where
a double bond breaks and adds two new atoms, is an
addition reaction.
Figure 19.15: Hydrogenation of ethene.
,..
Other alkenes also react in a similar way to produce the
H
H H I saturated alkene. Note that the isomers but-1-ene and
'c,..,.. H - C-Br but-2-ene both produce the same product on the addition
II + Br-Br -+ I of hydrogen.
,..,..c, H - C - Br
H H I
H
but-1-ene butane but-2-ene
ethene + bromine -+ 1,2-dibromoethane
propene + bromine - 1,2-dibromopropane Hydrogenation reactions similar to the reaction with
CH 3CH -CH2 + Br2 -+ CH 3CHBrCH 2Br etbene are used in the manufacture of margarine from
vegetable oils, such as corn oil and sunflower oil. These
Figure 19.13: Bromination of ethene and propene showing are edible oils and contain long-chain carboxylic acids.
displayed and structural formulae. ' The hydrocarbon chains of these acids·contain one or
more carbon-carbon double bonds; they are unsaturated
The product formed if the reaction is carried out with molecules (Figure 19.16).
bromine water is more complex. The bromine is stilJ
decolourised, but the colourless product includes an KEYWORD
added-OH group from the water (Figure 19.14).
hydrogenation: an addition reaction in which
hydrogen is added across the double bond in
an alkene
C 2H, + Br2 + HzO - CH2BrCH 2OH + HBr

bromoethanol
Figure 19.14: Addition product (2-bromoethanol) of the

reaction between ethene and bromine water.
,.
r
1
369
the alkene molecule. Propene (CH 3CH=CH 2) and

but-1-ene (CH 3CH2CH=CH2) give a mixture of products
0 as the water molecule can add across the double bond
in two different ways. Propene produces a mixture
OH of propan-1-ol (CH3CH 2CHpH) and propan-2-ol
(CH CH(OH)CHJ, with propan-2-ol the major product.
But;n-1-ol also produces a mixture of two isomers as
the product (Figure 19.17) with butan-2-ol the major
isomer formed:
butan-1-ol butan-2-ol
H H H H H H H H
I I I I I I I I
H-C-C-C-C - 0 - H H- C- C- C- C- H
I I I I I I I I
H H H H H H OH H
Figure 19.17: Products of hydration of but-1-ene, with
Figure 19.16: Sunflower oil and its products are rich in fats
butan-2-ol the major product.
conta ining unsaturated molecules (note the carbon-carbon
double bonds in the chain).
The hydration of but-2-ene produces just one product,
butan-2-ol.
Hydrogen reacts with the vegetable oil when it passes
over a nickel catalyst at about 60 °C. By hydrogenating
some, but not all, of the carbon-carbon double bonds, KEYWORD
the liquid vegetable oil can be made into a solid but
hydration: the addition of the elements of water
spreadable fat (margarine).
across a carbon-carbon double bond; H- adds to
one carbon, and - OH to the other
Cat alytic addition of steam
Another important addition reaction is the reaction used
in the manufacture of ethanol. Ethanol is an important
ind ustrial chemical and solvent. It is formed when a Questions
mixture of steam and ethene is passed over a catalyst of
4 What are the molecular and displayed formulae of
immobilised phosphoric(V) acid (the acid is adsorbed on
1,2-dibromoethane?
silica pellets) at a temperature of 300°C and a pressure
40f 6000 kPa: 5 One source of hydrogen for the Haber process
to make ammonia is the catalytic cracking of
ethene + steam 3oo•c, 6000 kPa , ethanol ethane. Write the word and symbol equations for
...
phosphoric acid
C2HPH(g) this reaction.
6 Unsaturated hydrocarbons take part in
This reaction produces the ethanol of high purity needed
addition reactions.
in industrial organic chemistry.
a Write a word equation for the reaction between
Other alkenes can be hydrated by similar reactions. propene and hydrogen.
Care is needed in identifying the product when the
b Write a symbol equation for the reaction
carbon-carbon double bond is located at the end of
between butene and steam.
370
Fermentation is an important chemical reaction in many

19.2 Chemistry of different industries, for example in the production of •
biofuels and the baking of bread.
ethanol Fermentation can be carried out in the laboratory using
the apparatus in Figure 19.19. The airlock allows gas
Manufacture and uses to escape from the vessel but prevents airborne bacteria
entering. Fermentation is an anaerobic process. It
of ethanol takes place under conditions where there is no air or
oxygen available.
Ethanol is one of the best-known organic compounds.
It is just one of a whole family of compounds called
alcohols. The alcohols are a homologous series of
compounds that contain -OH as the functional group airlock
(Figure 19.18). containing
water
H H
I I
H-C-C- 0-H
I I - +---- glucose solution
H H
with yeast
Figur-e 19.19: A laboratory fermentation vessel.
Figure 19.18: Bonding and structure of ethanol (CH,CHpH).

KEYWORDS
alcohols: a series of organic compounds

Fermentation
containing the functional group -OH and with the
Ethanol can be produced industrially by fermentation.
general formula C"H2o+10H
Ethanol and carbon dioxide are the natural waste
products of yeasts when they ferment sugar. Sugar is fermentation: a reaction carried out using a living
present in all fruit and grains, and in the sap and nectar organism, usually a yeast or bacteria, to produce
of all plants. Yeasts are single-cell, living fungi found a useful chemical compound; most usually refers
in many places including the surfaces of leaves and in to the production of ethanol
the soil and air. Yeasts contain enzymes that catalyse
the fermentation of sugar by anaerobic respiration
to gain energy; there is no oxygen present during the
Hydration of ethene
, process. When we produce ethanol by fermentation, we
use specific forms of yeast to avoid unwanted reactions The alternative industrial method of making ethanol
taking place. As ethanol is toxic to yeast, fermentation is involves the catalytic addition of steam to ethenc that
self-limiting. Once the ethanol concentration has reached we saw earlier. In this method, ethene and steam are
about 14%, or the sugar runs out, the multiplying yeast compressed to 6000 kPa and passed over a catalyst of
die and fermentation ends. The best temperature for immobilised phosphoric(V) acid at 300°C, and high
carrying out the process is between 25 and 35 °C. The purity ethanol is produced.
reaction is catalysed by enzymes in the yeast:
glucose ~ ethanol + carbon dioxide
371 )
371
Ethanol by the catalytic hydration of ethene Ethanol by fermentation

o;iginates from a non-renewable
made from read ily-renewable resources
resource (petroleum)
small-scalEl equipmMt capable of
relatively simple, large vessels
withstanding pressure
a continuous process a batch process - need to start process again each t ime
a fast reaction rate a relatively slow process
ethanol must be purified by subsequent distillation - though
yields highly pure ethanol
fermented product can be used as it is for some purposes
a sophisticated, complex method a simple, straightforward method
Table 19.1: Comparison of the industrial methods of ethanol production.
Comparing the methods of ethanol fuel production (Figure 19.20). Ethanol produced by
fermentation of sugar from sugar cane bas been used
production as an alternative fuel to petrol or mixed with petrol
The two different methods of producing ethanol have (gasoline) to produce 'gasohol'.
their own advantages and disadvantages. The method
chosen will depend on the availability of resources
and the main purpose for producing the ethanol. A
comparison of the methods is summarised in Table 19.l.
The ethanol produced by fermentation comes from a
renewable resource. When used as a fuel, the ethanol
produced in this way is potentially 'carbon-neutral'.
The carbon dioxide released during fermentation and
by burning the fuel is balanced by the carbon dioxide
absorbed from the atmosphere by the crop, usually sugar
cane, as it grows.
Uses of ethanol
Ethanol is an important solvent and a raw material for Figure 19.20: An ethanol and petrol station in
" making other organic chemicals. Many everyday items Sao Paulo, Brazil.
use ethanol as a solvent. These include paints, glues,
perfumes, aftershave and printing inks. Ethanol is a renewable resource and has the potential to .
reduce petroleum imports. Countries in Asia, Europe and
Ethanol burns with a clear flame, giving out a lot of beat:
the Americas have developed various blends of 'gasohol';
carbon the most common being an El O blend of I0% ethanol and
ethanol + oxygen -+ dioxide + water 900/o petrol. ' Gasohol' and other oxygenated fuels have the
advantage of reducing the emissions of carbon monoxide
from cars. With responsible development and control,
On a small scale, ethanol can be used as methylated spirit biofuels have the potential to reduce future environmental
(ethanol mixed with methanol or other compounds) in pollution. However, issues of sustainability must be
spirit lamps and stoves. However, ethanol is such a useful considered too. Land is needed to grow biofuel crops, so
fuel that some countries have developed it as a fuel for overuse of biofuels could encourage unsustainable levels of
cars, usually when blended with petrol. deforestation (Chapter 17).
Brazil was one of the first countries to produce ethanol
fuel, in I 973. With a climate ideally suited for growing
sugar cane, the country remains a world leader in ethanol
372
ACTIVITY 19.1
The profile of a molecule In a group, produce an information leaflet that

hig hlights and summarises these different aspects
Ethanol (Figure 19.21) is a highly important
of ethanol. Include:
organic comp ound with important industrial and
social implications. • a depiction of it s molecular st ructure
• the methods of industrial production
• it s usefulness as a fuel and solvent.

Illustrate your leaflet with colourful images from
magazines or downloaded from the internet.
Wh en complete, come toget her as a class to

compare leaflet s and th e different ways of
illustrating the impact of this compound.
Figure 19 .21: Ethanol: an important laboratory chemical

and fuel.
Peer assessment
Use the time you are in a group producing the poster on e_thanol to question and challenge each other on
the details of the structure, reactions and uses of ethanol. Include questions on how the compound fits into
the general series of compounds known as the alcohols.
19.3 Carboxylic acid~ and esters

The t ilrboxylk acids are another homologous series of
Carboxylic Molecular formula Ball-and-stick
organic compounds. All these acids have the functional
acid C0 H2,,..1COOH models
group - COOH attached to a hydrocarbon chain.
-
Table 19.2 shows the molecular formulae and models of
the first two members of the series.
The compounds have the general formula CnH2n.,COOH
(or CnH2n+,C0 2H). When naming a carboxylic acid,
remember that the carbon atom of the acid group is
counted as the first carbon in the chain. T hat is why
methanoic
acid
HCOOH ---,.
CH3COOH is the formula of ethanoic acid: there are two H
I .f'o
~
carbon atoms in the molecule. H- C - C
et hanoic
I '-o-H
acid H
KEYWORDS
CH 3COOH
carboxylic acids: a h9mologous series of organic
compounds containing the functional group -COOH Table 19.2: The first two members of the carboxylic acid
(-C02 H), with the general formula C0 H™ 1COOH homologous series.
- -- -
373 >
373
...,.
The first two acids in the series are liquids at room
temperature, although ethanoic acid will solidify if the
Reactions of ethanoic acid as
temperature falls only slightly. The acids dissolve in water
to produce solutions that are weakly acidic. Methanoic
an acid
acid is present in nettle stings and ant stings, while A solution of ethanoic acid will show the characteristic
ethanoic acid (once called acetic acid) is well known as the reactions of an acid.
acid in vinegar.
• Ethanoic acid solution will react with reactive
metals such as magnesium to give a salt and
hydrogen gas:
( Formation of ethanoic acid by ethanoic . magnesium
I oxidation of ethanol
.d
ac1
2CH3COOH +
+ magnesmm -+
ethanoate
+ hydrogen
Vinegar is a weak solution of ethanoic acid (previously Mg -+ (~COO)zMg +

called acetic acid). It is produced commercially
• It will react with bases to form salts:
from wine by biochemical oxidation using bacteria
(A cetobacter). T he production of wine vinegar is an
example of traditional biotechnology. The bacteria used
ethanoic
acid
+
sodium
hydroxide
... sodium
ethanoate
+ water
are naturally present in the air and wine can simply CH 3COOH + NaOH -+ CH 3COONa + Hp
become ' vinegary' if it is left open to the air.
The same oxidation can be achieved quickly by powerful • Vinegar can be used as a 'descaler' in hard water
oxidising agents such as warm acidified potassium areas. The ethanoic acid in vinegar reacts with
manganate(VII): limescale (calcium carbonate), producing carbon
dioxide and dissolving the scale:
ethanol + oxygen -+ ethanoic acid + water
calcium + ethanoic -+ calcium + te + carbon
from oxidising agent carbonate acid ethanoate wa r dioxide
C 2HpH + 2[0] -+ CH 3COOH + Hp CaC03 +2CH,COOH-+ (CH3COO)zCa+ Hp+ CO2
Figure 19.22 shows the apparatus used for this oxidation. Commercial descalers are often based on weak acids (e.g.
The condenser is arranged vertically to prevent the volatile methanoic acid, HCOOH) or moderately strong acids
alcohol escaping; this would be dangerous as ethanol (e.g. sulfamic acid, H3NSO,).
is highly flammable. The use of apparatus set up in this Ethanoic acid is a weak acid (Chapter 11). Whereas
way is known as refluxing. The colour of the potassium a strong acid such as hydrochloric acid is completely
manganate(VU) solution turns from purple to colourless. split into ions, ethanoic acid only partially dissociates
1~ water out
into ions in water. A dynamic equilibrium is set up in
the solution. The solution does contain an excess of
hydrogen ions (W) over hydroxide ions (OH-), so the
solution is weakly acidic:
-
water in
ethanoic acid ~ ethanoate ions + hydrogen ions
ethanol + I
potassium KEYWORD
manganate (VII)
refluxing: a practical technique using a (reflux)
t
heat
condenser fitted vertically to condense vapours
from an experiment back into a flask
Figure 19.22: Oxidation of ethanol with acidified potassium

manganate(VII) under reflux.
374
Esterification Questions
Alcohols react with organic acids to form sweet-smelling 7 Give two advantages of using ethanol as a fuel.
oily liquids known as esters. Ethanoic acid will react with 8 a What are the essentials needed for the
ethanol, in the presence of a few drops of concentrated production of ethanol by fermentation?
sulfuric acid, to produce ethyl ethanoate. This type of
b Name the gas produced d uring fer mentation.
reaction is known as estcrification. Esterification is a
reversible reaction and concentrated sulfuric acid is a c The molecular formula of ethanol is C 2Hp H .
catalyst for the forward reaction: D raw the displayed formula for ethanol.
d When ethanol is heated with an excess of
ethanoic acid + ethanol cone. tt,so. acidified potassium manganate(VJI), it is
converted to ethanoic acid:
ethyl ethanoate + water

ethanol
(C2Hp H) - ethanoic acid
(CH3COOH)
What type of chemical reaction is this?
CH3COOC2Hs(I) + HzO(I) 9 The flavour and smell of foods are partly due to
Figure 19.23 shows the displayed formulae for the esters. An ester can be made from ethanol and
organjc reactants and product. The water given off ethanoic acid.
comes in part from the acid and partly from the alcohol. a Name trus ester.
Ethyl ethanoate is just one example of an ester. The b Write a word equation for the reaction between
naming and structures of the esters formed by the ethanol and ethanoic acid.
straight-chain alcohols and acids of up to four carbon
atoms are discussed in Chapter 18. The ester family of
-- compounds have strong and pleasant smells. Many of

these compounds occur naturally. They are responsible
for the flavours in fruits and for the scents of flowers;
butyl butanoate, for instance, gives the flavour to
pineapples. We use them as food flavourings and in
perfumes. The ester group or link.age is also found in
complex molecules such as natural fats and oils, and in
man-made polyester fibres.
KEY WORD
esterificati on: the chemical reaction between an
alcohol and a carboxylic acid that produces an
ester; the other product is water
H O H H H 0
I ~ ,.. I I
H-C- C
I
: H7"""0- C - C- H
':'••••••..••
o::.:H •: I I
- H-t-<
I
7 7 + Hp
0 -C-C -H
H H H H I I
H H
CH,COOC,H,
ethyl ethanoate
Figure 19.23: The water released during esterification is p artly from the acid and partly from the alcohol.
,.
"
~
-
r. 375)
375
) CAMBRIDGE IGCSEtM CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
The alkanes are a generally unreactive series of hydrocarbons that burn readily and are used as fuels; they
also undergo substitution reactions with chlorine.
The substitution reactions of alkanes with chlorine are photochemical reactions in which ultraviolet light
> provides the activation energy for the reaction.
Alkenes can be obtained from the catalytic cracking oflong-chain alkane molecules present in the fractions
obtained from -the fractional distillation of petroleum.
> Alkenes are more reactive than alkanes and take part in addition reactions with bromine, hydrogen and steam.
Ethanol can be manufactured by fermentation or the catalytic hydration of ethene and that it can be used as a
solvent and a fuel.
> The; two methods of manufacturing ethanol have their own distinctive advantages and disadvantages.
Ethanoic acid reacts as a characteristic acid with metals, bases and metallic carbonates.
> Ethanoic acid is formed by the bacterial or chemical oxidation of ethanol.
> The reaction of a carboxylic acid with an alcohol produces an ester and water.
PROJECT
.....
Charting linked reactions In your class, make sure each group is creat ing a
chart for a different alkene.
When studying the d ifferent types of reaction
that a compound, or group of compounds, can Include as many rea·ati©ns as you can.
take part in, it is often useful to draw a reaction
summary. Figure 19.24 shows such a chart for the Once all groups have finished, explain your chart to
characteristic reactions of acids. the rest of the class. Make notes while other groups
are explaining theiralkene reaction chart.
Working in a group, use a large sheet of paper to
create a similar chart for an alkene of your choice. Working together as a class, can you link all t he
charts together to make one global chart for all the
reactions covered in this chapter?
salt+ water +
/ carl:1on dioxide
metal car!ionate or
(if metal more reaotive hydro~ncarbonate
than hydro~n) (antacid)

acids
~
metal hydroxide metal oxide
ammonia
/ (base) (base) ~
(ba se)
salt+water
i
ammonium salt+ water
salt+water
Figure 19.24: Chart of the reactions of acids.
376
'
: . REFLECTION
Devising a chart of reactions such as that for ethanoic acid or the alkenes can be a helpful tool to organise
your overall understanding of a topic. Did drawing up the chart help you understand t he relationships of
ideas within t he topic?
1 The two compounds whose structures are shown in the figure have
similar chemical properties.
H H H H H H
I I I I I I
H- C- C- C-0- H H-C- C-C- H
I I I I I I
H H H H O H
I
H
What is the reason for this?

Their molecules have the same:
A relative molecular mass
B fu.nctional group
C number of oxygen atoms
..._ D number of carbon atoms (1)
2 The names of some organic compounds are listed below.

A ethane D methanoic acid
B ethanoic acid E methanol
C ethanol
Use the organic compounds A- E to answer the questions that follow.
Each compound can be used once, more than once or not at all.
a Which compound is found in vinegar? (1)
b Which two compounds react together to form the ester
ethyl methanoate? (2)
c Which compound is a gas at room temperature and pressure? (1)
[Total: 4)
3 Ethane and ethene are both hydrocarbon gases.

a What do you understand by the term 'hydrocarbon'? (1]
b Bromine water can be used to distinguish between the two
gases. What result would be seen if ethane was bubbled through
bromine water? (1)
c Ethene reacts with steam to produce ethanol. What conditions are
needed to make this reaction happen? (2)
377
CONTINUED CO_MM/~~D WORD

d Give two uses of ethanol. (2) give: prod uce an
e Ethene is used as a monomer in the formation of poly(ethene). answer from a
What is the name of the process by which poly(ethene) is made? (1) given source or
(Total: 7) recall/memory
>
-
water out
condenser
water in
. . . .IL-- ethanoic acid

--- t + ethanol
heat
378
SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST . __
..
... .
...........
- . .. ....,
.. . -" " • ■ •,n•,._.,. •
--
- • ...
......,.
. • . .
mn
describe alkanes as a series of generally unreactive
hyd rocarbons that are used as fuels and undergo 19.l
substitution reactions with chlorine
understand that the substitution reactions of
> the alkanes are photochemical reactions using
ultraviolet light to provide activation energy
19.1
describe bow alkenes are obtained from long-chain

alk anes present in fractions obtained from the 19.1
distillation of petroleum
describe how alkenes take part in addition reactions
I 19.l
with bromine, hydrogen and steam
describe how ethanol can be manufactured by
fermentatio n or the catalytic hydration of ethene 19.2
and can be used as a solvent or a fuel
understand the advantages and disadvantages of the
> two methods of producing ethanol
19.2
understand how ethanoic acid can be formed by the

I
19.2
bacterial or chemical oxidation of ethanol
describe the reactions of ethanoic acid with metals,
19.2
bases and metal carbonates
>
describe the reaction of a carboxylic acid and an

.> alcohol to form an ester
19.3
,.
379
lea.rn that the major fossil fuels are coal, natural gas and petroleum
• describe how fractional distillation can be used to separate petroleum into a range of fractions
• define polymers as long-chain molec.ules built up from smaller molecules (monomers)
describe how plastics are made from synthetic polymers
• describe the environment~! challenges posed by plastics
380
20 Petrochemicals and polymers
You will be aware of the importance of fossi l fuels resources benefitted our lives? Environmental
to the way we current ly live. Discuss in groups how concerns mean t hat we need to explore alternatives
the use of t hese natural resources has affected to some uses of t hese resources. What changes do
us economically and practically. What are the you feel are the most crucial?
three major fossil fuels? How has our use of these
t ENZYMES THAT RECYCLE PLASTICS
In 2016, something remarkable was d iscovered in

a Japanese recycl ing plant. Among the discarded
bottles, bacteria were found t hat could break
down t he plastic, PET. Researcbers found that
bacteria called ldeonella sakaiensis can use PET,
one of the most common forms of plastic used in
making drinks bottles and food containers, as it s
main sourne of energy and carbon. The bacteria
were isolated from a sample of PET-contaminated
sediment near t he p lastic bottle recycling faci lity.
The researchers found the bacteria had evolved an
enzyme (a biological catalyst) capable of turning
PET back into its original components. These
bacteria, and t he enzyme they contain, could
revolutionise plastic recycling.
The PET-digestiRg enzyme, given the name
PETase, has been isolated and its protein structure
determined (Figure 20.1). The computer model
shows how complex the protein is. The protein Figure 20.1: Computer model of the structure of the
chain folds in a S!')ecific way so t hat it can catalyse PETase enzyme.
a partieular reaction. Remarkably, by manipulating
the str1Jcture of the protein, researchers improved
Discussion qi1estions
its ability to d igest PET by 20%. Further studies
have improved the efficiency 0f the enzyme even 1 What are t he issues that make t he recycling of
more and made it stable at 72°C, close to the plastics so important to t he management of
perfect temperature for fast degradation. This the environment?
modified enzyme was able to break down the vast
2 What are t he key features of catalysts,
majority of one tonne of waste PET bottles in only
and enzymes in particular, that make them
ten hours.
particularly useful in plastic recycling?
Enzymes are r:ion-toxic, biodegradable and can be
produced in large EJUantities by microorganisms.
More development is needed but it appears
enzyme technology has the potential to help
society deal with plastic waste.
381 )
381
20.1 Petroleum and Formation of petroleum

Petroleum is one of the Earth's major natural resources,
its products the result of a process that began up to 400 million
years ago. When prehistoric madne creatures died,
they sank to the seabed and were covered by mud. The
Fossil fuels change into petroleum and natural gas was brought
about by high pressure, high temperature and bacteria
Fossil fuels were formed in the Earth's crust from material
acting over millions of years. The original organic
that was once living. There are three major fossil fuels:
material was broken down into hydrocarbons.
• coal • natural gas • petroleum.
Geological movements and pressure created reservoirs
These fossil fuels all contain hydrocarbons. Coal comes of oil and gas. These reservoirs are nol lakes of oil
from fossil plant material. Petroleum (sometimes called or pockets of gas. Instead, the oil or gas is spread
crude oil) and natural gas are formed from the bodies of throughout the pores in coarse rocks such as sandstone
marine microorganisms. Methane is the main component or limestone, in much the same way as water is held
of natural gas but petroleum is a complex mixture of in a sponge. Oilfields and gas fields are detected by a
many different hydrocarbons. The formation of these fuels series of geological and seismic surveys. Once a field is
took place over many millions of .years. These fuels are established, production oil rigs can be set up, on land or
therefore a nOfi-renewable and finite resource. at sea (Figure 20.2).
KEY. WORDS . , . •~. ~'i

fossil fuels: fuels, such as coal, oil and natural gas,
formed und erg round over geolo gical periods of time
from the rema ins of plants and animals
coal: a black, solid fossil fu el formed underground

over geological periods of t ime by conditions
of high pressure and temperature acting on
decayed vegetation
natural gas; a fossil fuel formed underground over

geological periods of time by conditions of high
pressure and temperature acting on the remains '
of dead sea creatures; natural gas is more t han
90% methane
petroleum (or crude oil)i a fossil fuel formed

underground over many millions of years by Figure 20.2: An oil rig in the Caspian Sea.
conditions of high pressure and temperat ure acting
on t he remains of dead sea creatures
- non-renewable (finite) resour-ces: sources of energy, Fractional distillation of petroleum

such as fossil fuels, and other resources formed in the Petroleum is a mixture of many different hydrocarbon
Earth over many millions of years, which we are now molecules. Most of the petroleum that is extracted from
using up at a rapid rate and cannot replace the ground is used to make fuel, but around l 0% is used
as a chemical r~edstock, or raw material, in the chemical
chemical feedstock~a chemical element or industry. Before the petroleum can be used, the various
compound which can be used as a raw material for hydrocarbon molecules are separated by refining. This
an industrial process making useful chemical products is done by fractlo1Ull distJUation at an oil refinery.
fractional distillation: a method of distillation using
a fractionating column, used to separate liquids with
different boiling points
382
Appr9.~imate oumber
Approxim~
Fraction of Cii!rbon atoms in
boiling range / °C
hydrocarbons
refi nery gas 1-4 c,-C4 below 25
petrol (gaso line) 4- 12 Cr C,2 40- 100
r naphtha 7- 14 90-150
C7- Cl4
kerosene (paraffin) 12-1 6 150-240 chain length, b.p. and viscosity decrease
C9-C16
from t he bottom to t he top of t he
diesel oil (gas oil) 14-18 c ,.-C,8 220-300 fractionating column; volatility increases
fuel oil 19-25 C,9- C2s 250-320
lubri cating fraction 20-40 C20- C40 300-350
bitumen over 70 >C10 above 350
Table 20.1: Various petroleum fractions (not e the different terms used in different parts of the world for the same fraction).
At a refinery, petroleum is separated into different groups cools as it rises further up the column. The different
of hydrocarbons that have different boiling points. These fractions cool and condense at different temperatures,
groups are known as fractions. These different boiling and therefore at different heights in the column. The
points are roughly related to the number of carbon fractions condensing at the different levels are collected
atoms (chain length) in the hydrocarbons (Table 20.1). ·on trays. Fractions from the top of the tower are called
'light' and those from the bottom are called 'heavy'. Each
Separation of the hydrocarbons takes place by fractional
fraction contains a number of different hydrocarbons.
distillation using a fractionating column (or tower). At
The individual single hydrocarbons can then be obtained
..... the start of the refining process, petroleum is preheated
by'further distillation. Figure 20.3 shows the separation
to a temperature of 350-400 °C and pumped in at the
into different fractions and some of their uses.
base of the tower. As it boils, the vapour passes up the
tower. It passes through a series of bubble caps, and
fractions (from distillation): the different mixtures

t hat d istil over at different temperatures during
fract ional distillation
fractionating column: th e vertical column that is
used to bring about th e separation of liquids in
fractional distillation
383
.,__,.
,------= ~ refinery gas

bottled gas for
heating and cooking
~
=5:--. petrol (gasoline)
used as fuel in cars
---
r-i naphtha
1:::1 used as a chemical feedstock
FRACTIONATING TOWER 100°c
~
(showing bubble caps and trays)
diesel oil
~
I.,.,".llw--□Ml'4" used as a fuel in
diesel engines
petroleum-
,-:::::;;:
1 • A :,:;··;;;"'A
;"';;;;:::
;; = ;:;::::::2
?L use 1n sh'1ps an d
fueldoil
(crude oil)
home heating
lubricating oil
used in waxes and polishes
34o•c bitumen
used for surfacing roads
Figure 20.3: Fractional distillation of petroleum in a refinery.
Catalytic cracking ■ Supply from refinery

All of the fractions obtained from the distillation of Ill Demand from customers
petroleum are useful (see Figure 20.3). However, some 50
~ are more useful than others, and there is a greater
demand for those fractions. 40
30
The demand for the various fractions from the refinery
does not necessarily match with their supply from the *
oil (Figure 20.4). The petroleum from different oilfields
v;aries in composition so the values shown here are
C
variable, but the general trend is true. There is a greater V) <tJ Q) Q) '6
demand for the lighter fractions such as petrol that have
<tJ
m ....
.J::
.J::
C
Q)
V)
(/)
Q)
Q)
Q)
E
~ a. 0
shorter chain length. The opposite _is true for heavier Q) <tJ
C
e
Q)
::,
u. 2
:0
fractions such as paraffin and diesel.
C
<.:: ...... ~ ......
Q) Q) m
0::: .5 C
·.:;
0V) Cl)
Cl)
u
(.'.) ]
::,
_J
Figure 20.4: Differences in supply and demand for the

refinery fractions.
384
The longer molecules from these heavier fractions can Several different reactions can take place during cracking
,be broken into shorter, more valuable, alkane molecules. and the mixture of products must be separated by fractional
Short alkenes and hydrogen are also produced. We distillation. All the products are useful. The shortened •
introduced this process, known as catalytic cracking alkanes can be blended with the petrol fraction to enrich
('cat cracking'), in Chapter 19 where we discussed the petrol. Hydrogen can be used in the Haber process for
saturated and unsaturated hydrocarbons. All cracking making ammonia (Chapter 9) and potentially as a fuel for
reactions give: vehicles. The alkenes are useful as raw materials (a chemical
feedstock) for making several important products including
• an alkane with a shorter chain than the original, and
addition polymers such as poly(ethene) and poly(propene).
a short-chain alkene
• or two or more alkenes and hydrogen.
For example: Questions
decane -+ pentane + propene + ethene 1 Put the following fractions in order of increasing
boiling point: paraffin, diesel, petrol, refinery gas,
C,0H22 -+ CsH12 + CJH6 + C2H• bitumen, naphtha.
2 State a use for the following fractions from the
butene + hydrogen distillation of petroleum (crude oil): bitumen, fuel oil,
C4 H8 + ~ diesel, kerosene.
3 Explain what is meant by 'catalytic cracking', and
write word and balanced symbol equations to show
how decane can be cracked to give octane and ethene.
ACTIVITY 20.1
Refined sudoku Natural gas Methane gas

Work in pairs. The aim is to devise and use this Refinery gas Heating / cooking
logic puzzle to help you learn, and t est each other
Gasoline Fuel-cars
on, the different fractions produced from the
distillation of petroleum. Many of you will have Naphtha Chemical feedstock
solved these puzzles with the numbers 1 to 9. Kerosene Jet fuel
Here we are creating our puzzle using the ,names Diesel oil Diesel engi,nes
of the fractions from the distillation of petroleum
and, because we need nine items, another related Fuel oil Fuel-ships
fossil fuel, natural gas (Table 20.2; Figure 20.5). Lubricating oil Lubricants
Alternatively, you can set up a puzzle using the uses Bitumen Roads
of the fractions (the right-hand column).
Table 20.2: Fossil fuel products and their uses.
The puzzle is based on a grid and you need to work

out the contents of the blank squares (Table 20.3).
The rules for filling in the grid are:
• no entry into the horizontal squares can
be repeated
• no entry in the vertical squares can
be repeated
• there can be no repeat entries in each of the
Figure 20.5: Technicians inspect pipelines at natural gas 3 x 3 boxes in the grid.
storage plant.
385)
385
CONTINUED
Table 20.3 is an example set up for you to try. Complete the puzzle using the names of the fractions.
This puzzle is a relatively easy one.
Natural Refinery Lubricating

Bitumen Gasoline Kerosene
gas gas oil
Lubricating
Gasoline Bitumen Kerosene
oil
Lubricating
Bitumen
oil
Natural Refinery
Fuel oil
gas gas
Gasoline Naphtha
Lubricating
Naphtha Fuel oil
oil
Natural
Diesel oil
gas
Refinery Lubricating Natural

Kerosene
gas oil gas
-../
....
Refinery Lubricating
Diesel oil Fuel oil Naphtha Bitumen
gas oil
Table 20.3: A sudoku puzzle grid using the petroleum refinery fractions.
Having completed the first puzzle, each use a blank • Which fractions have t he highest boiling points?
grid to set up a puzzle for your partner t o try. You
can use the fraction names again, or the uses. You • How do properties such as the chain length of
can change the difficulty by altering t he number the molecules and the viscosity of the fractions
.. of squares you fil l in at the start (Table 20.3 has 32 vary between the fractions?
spaces filled; a harder puzzle could have as few as A third column of data, such as the length of the
28 filled spaces). carbon chains in t he fractions, could be included
While working on t he puzzle, discuss with your in the puzzle. Would it be useful for you to set up a
partner the basis of t he separation that gives these puzzle based on that data?
'different fractions:
Peer assessment • could explain how the chain length of

molecules vary
Once you've completed the puzzle and finished
your discussion, use the following checklist to • could explain how the viscosity of the
peer assess: fractions vary.
My partner ... Is there anything your partner could do to improve
• d iscussed which fractions had the highest their knowledge on this topic?
boiling point
.....
........
386)
386
20 Petrochemicals and po lymers
_20.2 Polymers KEYWORDS
All living things contain polymers. Proteins, polymer: a substance consisting of very large
carbohydrates, wood and natural rubber are all polymers. molecules made by polymerising a large number
Synthetic polymers, often called plastics, are to be of repeati ng units, or monomers
found everywhere in modern technological societies,
proteins: polymers of amino acids formed by a
ranging from car and aircraft components to packaging
condensation reaction; they have a wide variety
and clothing.
of biological functions
Polymers are large organic molecules and are made
up of many small repeating units known as monomers monomer: a small molecule, such as ethene,
(Figure 20.6) joined together by polymerisation. These which can be polymerised to make a polymer
units are repeated any number of times from about a polymerisation: t he chemical reaction in which
hundred to more than a million. molecules (monomers) join together to form a
long-chain polymer
amino acids: naturally occurring organic
compounds that possess both an amino (-NH2'
group and an acid (- COOH) group in the
molecule; there are 20 naturally occurring
amino acids and they are polymerised in cells to
make proteins
H H H H H H H H H H
monomer: \ I \ I \ I \ I \ I
Figure 20.6: Making a chain of beads is similar to joining c- c c-c C= C C= C C= C
et~ene I I \ I \ I \ I \
monomers together to make a polymer. H \ H H H H H H H H
H H .+
H H H H H H H
Some polymers are homopolymers, containing just double bond~t-t-
break open I I
-t-t- -t-t- -t-t- -t-t-
one monomer. Poly(ethene), poly(propene) and H H
I I I I
H
I I
H
I
H H H H ~ H
poly(chloroethene) are three examples of homopolymers.
Other polymers are copolymers, made of two or more H H H H H
+H H H H H
polymer:
different types of monomer. For example, nylon is made
from two monomers and biological proteins are made poly(ethene) -t-t-t-t-t-t-t~t-t-t-
1 I I I I I I I 1 I
HHH H HHHHHH
from 20 different monomers (amino acids).
Addition polymerisation
T he alkene fragments from the catalytic cracking of
petroleum fractions produced the starting monomers for Figure 20.7: The polymerisation of ethene produces
the first plastics. Alkenes such as ethene contain a C=C poly(ethene).
double bond. These molecules can take part in addition
reactions (Chapter 19) where the double bond is broken Various conditions can be used to produce different
and other atoms attach to the carbons. The double bond types of poly(ethene). Generally, a high pressure, a
in ethene enables many molecules of ethene to join to temperature at or above room temperature and a catalyst
each other to form a large molecule ca lled poly(ethene) are needed. The reaction can be summarised by the
(F igure 20.7), where n is a very large number. Note that equation shown in Figure 20.8.
when you draw out a section of the polymer chain, you
must show the open continuation bonds at the end of the
section (Figure 20.7).
387
-.....
high pressure wrong. It is important to realise that the -CH 3 group is
ethene poly(ethene) a side-group here; the methyl group does not become
heat, catalyst
part of the chain. The chain is formed by the carbon
I\H~-~H1\
atoms that are joined by the C=C bond in the monomer.
high pressure
Poly(propene) is commonly referred to as polypropylene.
heat, catalyst Figure 20.11 shows models of poly(propene),
poly(chloroethene) and poly(tetrafluoroethene).
Figure 20.8: Polymerisation of ethene; a very large number
of monomers (n) are joined together.
Poly(ethene) was found to be a chemically resistant

material that was very tough and durable, and a very
good electrical insulator.
) Other alkene molecules can also produce addition
I polymers. Propene will polymerise to produce
poly(propene) (Figure 20.9):
H H H H H H H H
I \ \
monomer:
propane
\
C=C,
\
c- cI c- cI c- cI
I \ I \ I \ \
H CH 1 H CH, H CH, l CH1
H H H H
+ H H H H
double bond, I I I I I I I I
break open
-C-C- -c-c- -c- c- -c-c-
I I I I I I I I C
H CH, H CH, H CH, H CH,
H H H H H H H H
polymer. I I I I I I I I
poly(propane) - c- c- c-c- c- c- c- c-
1 I I I I I I I
H CH,H CH, H CH3 H CH,
Figure 20.11 a: Poly(propene), b: poly(chloroethene) and
Figure 20. 9: The polymerisation of propene showing four c: poly(tetrafluoroethene).
repeating units joining together.
The equations that summarise the formation of
As we saw earlier for the polymerisation of ethene, the poly(chloroethene) and poly(tetrafiuoroethene) are
reaction to form poly(propene) can be summarised by shown in Figure 20. 12.
the equation in Figure 20.10.
chloroethene - - poly(chloroethene)
propene poly(propene) (vinyl chloride) (PVC)
HHj n(H>=<H] - H
I Hi
I
t-
I
c-c
~
I
tH 3
n
H Cl t- c-c
~ ti n
tetrafluoroethene - - poly(tetrafluoroethene)
Figure 20.10: The polymerisation of propene monomers to
(PTFE)
form poly(propene).
The long-chain molecule of poly(propene) is similar

in structure to poly(ethene) but with a methyl (-CH)
Lt-t-1F1
\F
group attached to every other carbon atom in the
chain (Figures 20.9 and 20.10). Be careful, the diagram Figure 20.12: The equations for the formation of PVC
of the structure of poly(propene) is quite easy to get and PTFE.
388)
388
You can see from this discussion that there are different Poly(chloroethene) (PVC) is stronger and harder than
' ways to represent the formation and structure of an poly(ethene) and therefore good for making pipes for
addition polymer. Table 20.4 illustrates how to represent plumbing. PTFE bas some unusual properties: it is very
the structure of the polymer formed from a given stable at high temperatures and forms a very slippery
monomer, and also the reverse process of deducing the surface. The properties of some addition polymers are
monomer used from the structure of the polymer.
From fflOIIOllNHt•
•
to each other
.:..
:· ,,n,,,,
draw the monomers with their double bonds next
From
•
to-~
given in Table 20.5.
,v.
identify the repeating unit - it will have two carbon

atoms with a single bond between them; put a
bracket round it
• remove the double bonds and draw single bonds
in the space between the monomers • draw that unit as a separate molecule with a
double bond in it
CH 3 H CH, H monomer /CH1 H \ CH, H polymer

I I I I I I I I I I
C= C C= C ..J.. C-c ..:... c - C-
I I I I \ I I/ I I
H H H H H H1 H H
er, 7+er, 7 +
C!i, H
I I
- c- c - c- c - C= C
I I I I I I
H H H H polymer H H monomer
Table 20.4: How to deduce the relationship between monomer and addition polymer.
Po (and trade name(s)) Monomer Exan Rta

ethene plastic bags,
poly(ethene) (polyethylene,
tough, durable bowls, bottles,
polythene, PE) CH2,.CH2 ing
propene crates and
poly(propene) (polypropylene, PP) tough, durable boxes, plastic
CH3CH• CH 2 ro
poly(chloroethene) (polyvinyl chloroethene strong, hard (not as insulation, pipes
chloride, PVC) CH • CHCI flexible as polythene) and guttering
poly(tetrafluoroethene) tetrafluoroethene non-stick surface, non-stick frying
(polytetrafluoroethylene, Teflon, withstands high pans, non-stick
PTFE) CF2• CF2 tem ratures ta s and 'oints
phenylethene (styrene) insulation,
light, poor conductor
poly(phenylethene) (polystyrene, PS) packaging
C6H5CH•CH 2 of heat
(foam)
Table 20.5: Examples of some widely used addition polymers.
389
Such synthetic polymers are very versatile. Many, for • during addition, the double bonds open up and the
example poly(propene), are easy to shape by melting and monomer molecules join to themselves to make a ·
moulding. Poly(propene) is therefore used to make sturdy molecule with a very long chain (remember to put in
plastic objects such as crates (Figure 20.13a). However, it then when representing the structure).
can also be drawn out into long fibres for making ropes
(Figure 20.13b). Poly(propene) is particularly suited to rope KEYWORDS
manufacture as it is elastic, stronger than alternative natural
materials and sufficiently lightweight that it will float. addition polymer: a polymer formed by an
addition reaction - the monomer molecules
contain a C=C double bond
Questions
4 State what is meant by addition polymerisation and
give an equation for the formation of poly(ethene)
from ethene.
5 Draw the structure of the repeating unit in the
following polymers:
a poly(propene)
b poly(chloroethene) (PVC)
6 a What common bonding feature must all
monomers, whether substituted or not, contain? •
b Draw the structure of the addition polymer
made from styrene monomers (show at least
three repeating units in your structure).
Condensation polymerisation
A condensation polymer is one that is formed when a
condensation reaction takes place between the monomers
to join them together in the polymer chain. A condensation
reaction is one in which two molecules react together to
form a new, larger molecule with the elimination of a
small molecule, usually water. We will now consider two
Figure 20.13 a: Plastic crates made of poly(propene) on
types of condensation polymer: polyamidcs and polyesters.
a conveyer belt at a distribution centre. b: Different forms of
poly(propene) fibres. KEYWORDS
condensation reaction: a reaction where two

The main features of addition polymers can be summarised
or more substances combine together to make
as follows:
a larger compound, and a small molecule is
• all polymers are long-chain molecules made by joining eliminated (given off}
together a large number of monomer molecules
polyamide: a polymer where the monomer units
• addition polymerisation involves monomer molecules are joined together by amide (peptide) links, e.g.
that contain a C=C double bond nylon and proteins
• addition polymers are homopolymers, made from a polyest er: a polymer where the monomer units
single monomer are joined together by ester links, e.g. PET
390 >
390
The reaction between a carboxylic acid and a molecule

' containing an amine group (- NH 2) produces a
compound known as an amide. The link between the
two parts of the newly formed molecule is an amide link
(Figure 20.14a).
a forming an amide link
0 H 0 H
II :··· ----- -------··; I 11 I
-C-y-OH H-y-N- -C-N- + H,0
................. .....
acid amine amide
water
eliminated
b forming an ester link Figure 20.15: Nylon fishing nets.
0 0
,. II :·· ........... ····; II Nylon is a copolymer of two different monomers, a
- C-y-OH H-t- 0 - - - C-0 - + H,0 diamine and a dicarboxylic acid (Figure 20.16). Each
....... --~--- -- -- --- . alcohol monomer consists of a chain of carbon atoms (which
acid ester
water
eliminated
are shown here simplified as blocks). At both ends of t_he
monomers are functional groups. An amine group
Figure 20.14: Condensation reactions involved in forming (-NH} on the first monomer reacts with a carboxylic
polyamides and polyesters. a: Forming an amide link. acid group (-COOH) on the second monomer to make a
b: Forming an ester link. link between the two molecules. Each time a link is made,
a ..yater molecule is lost.
The reaction between an alcohol and a carboxylic
first monomer second monomer
acid (esterification) forms an ester. The link between
(a diamine) (a dicarboxylic acid)
the two parts of an ester molecule is an ester link
(Figure 20.14b). H" /H o'\. .f'o
T he polymerisation of a large number of ·-- + / N-0-N ,__. . . ........
+ . .,(C----C 'x •....
....H : :H H-0\ ', 0-H
appropriate monomers using one or other of these , '··-······· ·· "- ..... .
condensation reactions produces a polyarnide or a forms· a water molecule
polyester, respectively.
polymer
(a polyamide)
Nylon (a polyamide)
In the early 1930s, the American company DuPont was an amide (peptide) link
conducting research into artificial fibres. Knowledge of '\.- -··,
0 ,'Q ', 0 0
silk and wool gave clues as to how protein molecules II : II : II II
are built. Wallace Carothers, the leader of organic ----c-o-:-c-~-r--~-c-o-c-~----~---·
chemistry at DuPont, imitated the linkage in proteins I
. . ., _I-!: H H H
and produced the first synthetic fibre, ' nylon'. Nylon is
a solid when first formed, but it can then be melted and
forced through small holes. The long filaments cool, and Figure 20.16: The formation of a polyamide (nylon) by
the fibres produced are stretched to align the polymer condensation polymerisation.
molecules and then dried. The fibres can be woven into
fabric to make shirts, ties, sheets and so on, or turned
into ropes, nets (Figure 20.15) or racket strings. However,
,ylon is not j ust made into fibres. It has proved to be a
~ry versatile material and can be moulded into strong
plastic items such as gearwheels.
l 391 >
391
) CAMBRIDGE IGCSE™ CHEMISTRY: CO URSEBOOK
As a result, this type of polymer is known as a This demonstration ~hows the producllon of nylon at •
condensation polymer. Because an amide link (or peptide the interface between two reactant layer, A solution of
link) is formed during condensation polymerisation. the first monomer (the dicarbox)lic acid in cyclohexane)
nylon is known as a polyamide, is caJefully floated on an aqueous solution of th~
second monomer (the d1amine). 1'J\ Ion forms at the
Take careful note of the structure of the two
interface and can be pulled out as fast a~ 11 1s produced.
monomers used to make the synthetic polyamide, nylon
forming a long thread the ·nylon rope (Figure 20.17).
(Figure 20.15). The fact that each has the same functional
Remember that you do not need to k1w,, the names
group at either end of the molecule results in an important
of the monomers. JUSt the type of functional groups
feature of the polymer produced. T his feature is that the
the1 contain.
direction of each amide link is the opposite of the two link
regions immediately on either side of it. It is important to
remember this when drawing the structure of a section of PET ·a polyest er)
the nylon chain (see F igure 20. 16). Condensation pol~mensation can also be used Lo make
A version of nylon polymerisation can be carried out m other polymers v. ith properties different from those of
the laboratory (Figure 20.17). nylon. Po(resters are condensation copolyme~ made
from tv ·o monome~. One monomer has an alcohol group
a (-OH) at each end: this monomer 1s a d1ol. The other
Rod is rotated. monomer has a carboxylic acid group (-C'OOII) al each
end: it s a dicarboxylic acid. When the monomer· react in
1
conder ;ation pol)mensation. an e ter link is formed. with

+ -- - Nylon fibre is pulled out. water being lost each time (Figure 20 18) Note th.it the
directions of the ester links in the synthetic polyester chain
are alternating. This feature of synthetic polymers made
First monomer, dissolved
from b1functional monomers that each have the same
in an organic solvent.
functiohal group at either end is true for both polyam1des
Polymerisation occurs and polyesters (see Figures 20.16 and 20.18).
at t he interface between
the two liquids.
Second monomer,
dissolved in water. con ensatio polymer: a polymer formed
by a condensation reaction, e.g. nylon is.
produced by the condensation reaction b etween
1,6-diaminohexane and hexanedioic acid; this
is the type of polymerisation used in biological
systems to produce proteins, nucleic acids and
polysaccharides
amide link (or peptide link): the link between
monomers in a protein or nylon, formed by a
condensation reaction between a carboxylic acid
g roup on o ne monomer and an am ine group on
the next monomer
ester link: the link produced when an ester is
formed from a carboxylic acid and an alcohol;
also found in polyesters and in the esters present
in fats and vegetable oils
Figure 20.17: Nylon is a polyamide and can be made in

the laboratory.
392 >
392
first monomer second monomer Comparing addition and

has alcohol has carboxylic acid
functional groups functional groups condensat ion polymerisation ·
0 0 Some very useful synthetic polymers have been made
'\-
.•. +
....•/
0-0-0 +
, •........... ✓.
c~c,Ix ····· + ... by the two types of polymerisation. Both methods take
H •\ :.........
H H-0\ ~ 0-H Sm<1ll molecu1es and make long repeating chains from
...... - - -- ·'(.. - - ... .
them Howe, er. there are differences bet,,een the two
forms a water molecule
methods. These are summarised in Table 20.6.
polymer
(polyester) Addition Condensation
an ester link polymerisation polymerisation
'\..-- .. usually many molecules of two
0 0 0
0
,'Q
monomers usually
\
II : II : II II molecules of a
···-C-D-;-C-O+-ffl-O-C-0-C-O--a-O-··
. : monomers
single monomer used
'· used monomer is monomers contain
unsaturated, reactive functional
usually contains a groups at ends of
Figure 20.18: The formation o f a polyester (PET) C=C double bond each molecule
by condensation. condensation
an addition
reaction with
reaction -
PET 1s the most common polyester polymer used in reaction loss of a small
monomers join
products all over the world. It can be found in a wide taking molecule (usually
together by
variety of packaging for both food and drink. as well as place water) each time
opening the C=C
--... in clothing fibres (Figure 20. 19). Most PET produced a monomer joins
double bond
globally is for use in synthetic fibres (in excess of 60%) the chain
with bottle production accounting for about 30% of two products
global demand. only a single - the polymer
product - the plus water (or
polymer some other small
molecule)
can·be
nature of
non• biodegradable
product
biodegradable (nylon takes 40-50
years)
PET can be
hydrolysed back
resistant to acids
to monomers by
acids or alkalis
Table 20.6. A comparison of the processes of making
synthetic polymers.
N atural polymers (proteins)

All living organisms rely on polymers for their existence.
These polymer, range from the very complex DNA that
Figure 20.19: A polyester shirt made from recycled makes life nself possible to the more strail?~ forward
PET b ottles. p roteins and carbohydrates that keep hvmg things
393)
393
functioning. The tissues and organs of our bodies are

made up of protein. In addition, enzymes, which are
responsible for controlling the body's chemical reactions,
are proteins. Proteins are built from amino acid monomers.
There are 20 different amino acids used, and they each
contain two functional groups: an amino group (- NH2)
and a carboxylic acid group (-COOH) (Figure 20.20).
a Amino Acid
00-t-
an amide (peptide) link
H H
'>---·-.
:o \ H O
" N- C+C-C~C-C
I : II :I .f'
+ Hp
/ I ' I ' I "
H H :, N : CH OH
·- •• _ _ __ , 3
a dipeptide
Figure 20.21: Condensation reaction between glycine

and alanine.
When this is repeated many times using the different

amino acids, a polymer is formed. Short polymers (up to
15 amino acids) are known as peptides. Longer chains
are calLed polypeptides or proteins. The structure of
a protein molecule can be drawn where the different
amino acids are represented by differently shaded boxes
(Figure 20.22).
0 0 0
II II II
···-N--B-C - N- - -C- N- 0 -C- ···
I I I
Figure 20.20 a: The structure of an amino acid showing the H H H
two functional groups; R represents the different types of
., side-chain. b: The structure of alanine, where R = - CH 3
(a methyl group). Figure 20.22: Diagram representing the structure of a
protein chain, showing the links between three different
The difference between the 20 amino acids used to make amino acid~.
proteins lies in the different side-chains (R- ). Alanine,
shown in Figure 20.20b has a methyl group as the
side-chain (R = -CHJ The simplest amino acid is
glycine, where R = - H.
Questions
7 a What are the essential features of condensation
Glycine and alanine are the two simplest amino acids.
polymerisation?
_ When they react together, an amide linkage (or peptide
linkage) is formed to produce a dipeptide (two amino b Name t wo artificial condensation polymers, and
acids joined together) (Figure 20.21). This reaction is a specify the type of linkage present in each.
condensation reaction and a water molecule is eliminated 8 Draw a schematic diagram representing the
in forming the amide link. formation of the polyester, PET. Show the linkage
between the monomers (the structure of the
monomer is not required and can be represented as
a block).
394 >
394
9 Nylon is a synthetic polymer that is held together by

the same linkage as protein molecules. KEYWORD
a What is the name of this linkage? plastics: polymers that can be moulded or
b Draw a diagram of the structure of nylon shaped by the action of heat and pressure
(again, the structure of the monomer is not
required and can be represented as a block).
c Give a major difference between the structure The reuse, recycling and disposal of
of nylon and of a protein.
plastic waste
Plastic waste is a common sight all over the world
20.3 Plastics today. Plastic products are light, cheap and resistant
to corrosion - characteristics that have resulted in
P lastics are a group of polymeric materials characterised a significant rise in the u se of plastics over the past
by their plasticity - their ability to be moulded or 30 years, as they have been introduced to replace
shaped under heat and pressure. This property makes traditional materials in a wide variety of applications.
plastics incredibly versatile. Many plastics have other Increased use means increased waste. The problem
advantageous properties, too. They can be extremely with plastic waste arises because most plastics are not
strong but also low-density, so are useful for products biodegradable, although research is taking place to find
that need to be tough but lightweight such as soft-drinks microorganisms that can break them down.
bottles. Low conductivity means that plastics are ideal for
Not all modern plastics are single-use and go straight
heat-retaining products, including food containers and
to waste, however. For example, PET can be used to
insulating foam. Some plastics are also very flexible, which
make items such as soft-drinks bottles, and these can
makes them useful for items ranging from plastic bags to
be re-used or recycled. PET also creates bottles that
,,. garden hoses. Plastics are also increasingly being used in
are lightweight, strong and mouldable, which are all
3D printing, which has applications in many important
benefits for manufacturers. To encourage reuse and
areas, including the production of respirator masks and
recycling of PET drinks bottles, many countries operate
the creation of prosthetic limbs (Figure 20.23).
deposit schemes, where consumers can return used
bottles to ' reverse vending' machines or collection points
(Figure 20.24).
Figure 20.24: Commuters in Rome, Italy, trade used plastic

bottles for transit credit at a reverse vending machine.
Unfortunately, reuse practices like tl1ese are not available

Figure 20.23 a: Respirator masks and b : a prosthetic hand or suitable for most plastics. So what should we do
made from recycled plastics by 3D printing. with our waste plastic? Recycling is clearly preferable
.....
l 395)
395
to disposal, both economically and environmentally, Environmental challenges

as simply throwing plastics away means they go into The use of plastics and, at times, our casual disposal
landfill. However, recycling is not always easy. Most of them poses a number of environmental problems. In
plastic products are made or several different types of
recent years, there has been increasing awareness of the
plastic, which may need to be recycled in dilTerent ways
need to adapt our use of these advantageo us materials in
- or which may not be recyclable at all. Most products
the following ways:
now have identification num bers and/or symbols on them
that indicate their type and whether or not they can be • to reduce the level of plastic packaging
recycled. Optical scanners are also being introduced at wherever possible
recycling plants to help sort the waste, alongside manual • to avoid the use of 'single-use plastic' (and the
sorting methods. Once separated into its different types, subsequent littering with it)
the plastic waste can be recycled using the most suitable
method. Granu lated plastic produced from PET plastic • to reuse and recycle wherever possible.
bottles can be supplied to manufacturers for melting and There are alternatives to recycling for the disposal of
re-moulding into useful products (Figure 20.25). plastic waste but all have their detrimenta l effects.
• Incineration can be used to burn plastic waste,
although care must be taken not to release toxic
fumes into the air. Incineration of PVC, for
instance, can re lease acidic fumes of hydrogen
chloride. Open-air burning of plastic occurs at lower
temperatures, and normally releases toxic fumes
containing dioxins and furans. Controlled high-
temperature incineration, above 850°C, must be
carried out to break down these toxins. Municipal
solid waste incinerators a lso normally include flue
gas treatments to reduce pollutants further.
• Disposal in landfill sites suffers from the problem
that most plastics are not biodegradable and
therefore the plastic waste increasingly fills the
Figure 20.2 5: Plastic pellets (PET) produced at a recycling space available. This imposes expansion problems
centre; these pellets (nurdles) will be sent for processing on the site and uses up natural resources. Research
and reuse . is being carried out to produce plastics that are
biodegradable or photodegradable (broken down
As mentioned earlier (see Table 20.6) the ester linkage by sunlight). However, in all these cases there is the
4
that joins the monomer units in the polyester (PET) problem of degradation products leaching into the
can be broken down by acid or alkaline hydrolysis. groundwater of a locality used for a land.fill site.
Hydrolysis is the reverse of the condensation reaction • Accumulation in oceans. Plastic pollution of the
that produced the polymer. The monomers produced oceans is a major problem that has been highlighted
by this hydrolysis could be re-polymerised and the new in recent years (and is discussed in the context of
polymer moulded into new objects. other types of pollution in Chapter 17). Increased
awareness of this problem has been part of the
KEY WORD background to the drive to reduce the level of
'single-use plastics' in our shopping and packaging.
hydrolysis: a che mical reaction between Images of ocean wildlife a nd sea birds harmed by
a covalent compound and water; covalent interaction with waste plastic debris in the oceans
bonds are broken during the reaction and the have highlighted the problem. The importance of
elements of water are added to the fragments; the problem means that projects to collect plastic
can be carried out with acids or alkalis, or by waste from the oceans have been started in various
using enzym es regions (Figure 20.26).
396
Figure 20.26: Debris removal from the ocean around the

Hawaiian Islands (NOAA, National Ocean and Atmospheric
Administration, USA).
Figure 20.27: The location of the Great Pacific

The debris can be most evident when it is washed up
garbage patches.
on beaches after a storm. However, concern has been
developed further with the realisation of the presence
of 'ocean garbage patches' in various areas of the major While high concentrations of items of litter - bottles
oceans of the world. The major currents that occur in and plastic bags - can be found in the ocean, much of
the debris is actually small pieces of floating plastic
-
our oceans cause circulation effects or 'gyres' in various
regions. There are five major ocean-wide gyres- the not immediately visible to the naked eye. This type of
North At.lantic, South Atlantic, North Pacific, South pollution arises in the form of microplastics. Some of
Pacific and Indian Ocean gyres. the small pieces of plastic in the ocean arise from the
break-up of larger objects by the oceans themselves but
One unwanted effect of these major current rotations is much of them originate from processes in the plastics
that a great amount of the plastic waste in the oceans industry. These microplastics take the form of nurdles
is collected into what have been called ocean 'garbage and microbeads (Figure 20.28a and b).
patches (or trash vortices)'. F igure 20.27 shows \he
location of the two Great Pacific garbage patches, the
Western Garbage Patch (left), and the Eastern Garbage
• Patch (right), in the North Pacific Ocean. These patches microplastics: small pieces of plastic less than
contain exceptionally high concentrations of plastics, 5 mm in length that enter natural ecosystems from
chemical sludge, wood pulp and other debris that have a variety of sources including cosmetics, clothing
become trapped by the flows of the North Pacific and industrial processes: nurdles and microbeads
Current. As the wind and waves stir up this huge mix are d ifferent types of microplastic
of debris, it spreads widely - not only for thousands of
kilometres across the surface of the ocean, but polluting
a large region immediately below the surface, too. Since
the discovery of the Eastern Garbage Patch in 1987
similar regions have been found in the South Pacific,
North Atlantic and Indian Ocean gyres.
397)
397
Figure 20.28 a: Nurdles (plastic beads) found on a beach. b: A scanning electron microscope photograph of plastic
microbeads from cosmetics on a single red blood cell to show the scale .
Nurdles are pre-production plastic pellets and resin

materials (usually under 5mm in diameter). Nurdles
Questions
serve as raw material in the production of plastic 10 What are the dangers in simply burning plastics to
products and these small plastic beads find their way to dispose of them?
coastal waterways and oceans. 11 Explain the difference between the reuse and the
Microbeads are the much smaller plastic spheres (less recy cling of plastics.
than Imm in diameter) found in cosmetic facial scrubs, 12 What are two problems that need to be overcome in
shower gels and toothpastes. As with nurdles, they can the effective recycling of plastics?
accumulate in the world's oceans, lakes and estuaries,
harming marine life and entermg the food chain. They
are an avoidable form of plastic pollution and in recent
years many countries have introduced a ban on the use
of microbcads in cosmetics.
.,
The use and misuse of plastics is a major

environmental issue. Do you feel confident that
you can develop st rategies t hat will enable you
to form reasoned judgements and take actions
where necessary?
398
""-
SUMMARY
The major fossil fuels are coa l, natura l gas a nd petroleum, with methane being the main constituent of
natura l gas and petroleum being a mixture of hydrocarbons.
Fractional distillation can be used to separate petroleum into a range of useful fractions, with these fractions
, progressively varying in chain length, volatility, viscosity and boiling point.
The fractions from the distillation of petroleum each have distinctive uses.
The longer chain a lkanes of the heavier fractions can be sho rtened by catalytic cracking, and this process
also yields hydrogen a nd alkenes for use in other industrial processes.
Polymers are lo ng-chain molecules built up from a large nu mber of monomer molecules, with poly(ethene) as
an example of the addition polymerisation of ethene mo nomers.
> T he structure of an addition polymer or its repeat unit can be identified from the formu la of a given alkene.
Polymers can also be formed by condensation reactions, with polyamides (nylon) and polyesters (PET) being
> two majo r forms of condensation polymer.
> The structure of a condensation polymer or its repeat unit ca n be identified from given monomers.
Addition a nd condensation polymers depend on different types of monomers, linkage regions a nd means
> of formation.
~ > PET can be converted back to its monomers and re-polymerised.

(
I
--
,
> P roteins are natural condensation polyamides formed from amino acid monomers.
Plastics are made from synthetic polymers and the proper ties of plastics raise problems for their disposal.
~ There are environmental challenges posed by the disposal of plastics in landfi ll sites, toxic fumes from
incineration and the accumulation of plastic debris in the oceans.
399
) CAMBRIDGE IGCSE™ CHEMIST~Y: COURSEBOOK
....
PROJECT
Making sense of plastics Figure 20.2·9 shows a 3D printer in use; a positive use
of plastics to produce an object for a specific use.
Work in pairs to design a campaigA brochure

that outlines the advantages and disadvantages
of using plastics. You can search the internet to
help you.
Try to distinguish t he advantages/disadvantages

that are:
• part of the nature of the plastics themselves
• the result of our misuse of the materials.
When everyone has finished, come together as a

class to discuss the content 0f the brochures you
have created. Consider the following que_stion:
Figure 20.29: A technician using a 30 printer.
To what extent do you agree t hat there should be a
ban on single-use plastic items?
400
20 Petrochemicals and polymer,s
1 Butane, ethanol and hydrogen are all used as fuels or being developed as
such. Which of these substances produce both carbon dioxide and water
when used as fuels (see the table)?
butane ethanol hydrogen

A yes yes yes
B yes no yes
C no yes no
D yes yes no [1 I
2 Some of the fractions separated from petroleum are:

A bitumen C petrol (gasoline)
B kerosene D refinery gas
Use the fractions A-D to answer the following questions.
Each fraction may be used once, more than once or not at all.
a Which fraction is not used as a fuel? [1)
~
r b Which fraction has the highest boiling point? [1]
~ •-.,;,.~ c Which fraction is used to power motor vehicles? (1)

[Total: 3)
t
~ 3 a Petroleum is a mixture of compounds from the same homologous

series. What is the name of this series? [ff
r• b Petroleum can be separated mto fractions by fractional distillation.
• Which physical properties of the comp0unds in.each fraction make
= this separation possible? [1]
( c What is the main use of the kerosene fi;action? [1]
r d The heavier fractions are sometimes era<.:ked to form alkenes.
., What conditions are needed for this process? [2]
ii What product is formed during cracking which is not a hydrocarbon? [1]
e A long-chain molecule from petroleum was cracked to form two
t
r
!.
different alkenes.
Complete the equation.
c10H22 - c.H8 + 2__ + __ [2)
[Total: 8]
I 4 Plastics are used in every aspect of life. Many thousands of tonnes of

plastics are used every day.
Plastics cause a pollution problem both on land and•in water unless they
are biodegradable.
a What is the meaning of the term 'biodegradable'? (2)
~ What happens to most plastics that are discarded in rubbish? (1)
401 )
401
) CAMBRIDGE !GCSE™ CH EMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
CONTIN UED
c Why can plastics cause problems if they get into the oceans? [2]
d Some plastics are burnt to produce energy. Why does th,is cause
pollution problems? [1]
[Total: 6)
addition
condensation
condensation
addit ion
H H 0
"- I ~•
N- C-C
/ I "-
H H- C-H OH
I
H
,;--.,
V
402
SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST _
,-, - --~ - - - ---
i,.. "" .- - .. ·- See -!"'!~
, ee d s Al mos; ·' . ,~C~nfident
I
I can
...
•
Topic...
,
J°
more work
~ • to move
· . ·"
I - ~
~ . L_ __ - ., ~ J_ ~ · - -•
name the major fossil fuels as coal, natural gas and

petroleum, with methane the main constituent of natural 20.1
gas and petroleum being a mixture of hydrocarbons
describe how petroleum can be separated into useful
fractions by fractional distillation, with these fractions
20. 1
progressively varying in chain length, volatility, viscosity
and boiling point
describe how each di!Terent fraction from the distillation
20.1
has its distinctive uses
understand that alkenes and hydrogen can be obtained
from catalytic.cracking of the longer alkane molecules in
20.1
certain fractions, with the shortened alkanes being used
to enrich the economically more important fracti ons
define polymers as long-chain molecules built up
from large numbers of monomer molecules, with
20.2
poly(ethene) as an example of addition polymerisation
of ethene monomers
identify the structure of an addition polymer or its
20.2
repeating unit from the formula of a given alkene
understand that polymers can also be formed py
condensation reactions, with polyamides (nylon)
20.2
and polyesters (PE1) being two major forms of
condensation polymer
identify the structure of a condensation polymer or its
repeat unit from given monomers and draw diagrams of 20.2
the structures of nylon and PET
describe the differenoes between addition and
20.2
condensation polymerisation
describe proteins as natural condensation polyamides
formed from amino acid monomers, and describe the 20.2
general structure of amino acids and proteins
describe how plastics are made from synthetic polymers
20.3
and how their properties raise problems for their disposal
identify the environmental challenges posed by the
disposal of plastics in landfill sites or by incineration, 20.3
and the accumulation of plastic debris in the oceans
..__..
403 >
403
develop an understanding of experimental design
learn how to select the most appropriate methods and apparatus to use in an experiment together with
th'eir possible advantages and disadvantages
• name appropriate apparatus for measuring different variables
• explore and identify techniques to separate and purify different substances
• discover how melting and boiling points can be used to identify and assess the purity of a substance
• describe how chromatography can be used to separate mixtures of soluble coloured substances
404
21 Experimental design and separation techniques
CON TINUED
) - state and use the equation to determine the R, value.
) describ e how paper chromatography can be used to separate mixtures of sol~ble colourless
· substances using a locating agent.
GETTING STARTED
Chemists need to be able to design experiments 1 What should you include as you plan
carefully and safely. Work in groups of three of four your experiment?
to consider the scenario below and discuss the
questions that follow. 2 Can you think of any general hazards that
would need to be taken into consideration?
You have been asked to plan an experiment to
,.. analyse how temperature affects the rate at which a 3 How would you reduce any risk?
,. new drug can be produced. The drug is produced 4 What measurements would you need to make?
I
,. as a white precipitate (insoluble salt) when solutions
of two chemicals A and B are mixed together.
r
,, SAFE DRINKING WATER FOR ALL
r
.....
...,... Safe drinking water is considered a basic human right Ap alternative,
by the United Nations. Many people take access larger-scale approach
l to clean drinking water for granted. However, it is is desalination, which
r! estimated that around 800 million people lack even
a basic drinking-water service. The problems are
removes salt and
other minerals from
t:. being compounded with growing populations and water using distillation
r
J
the pressures caused by climate change increasing
the demand for clean water. Traditional supplies such
or membrane filtration
(reverse osmosis).
t
as reservoirs and wells cannot meet the demand and Desalination is energy Figure 21.1: Chemists working
L . so research has focused on alternative methods to intensive and ha.s an in a laboratory at a desalination
! provide clean water. Many of these approaches are

based on simple separation techniques.
environmental impact plant in Oman.
as the toxic brine
produce can damage coastal and marine ecosystems.
fi For small-sc::ale production it is possible to distil water.

This approach involves boiling and then condensing
the water. It is therefore energy intensive, and if fossil
fuel is used it is also unsustainable. This problem can
The process works well for countries with limited
freshwater but with access to seawater. The Middle
East has most of the world's desalination capacity,
with Oman producing over nearly 90% of its drinking
be overcome by using small solar-powered distillation
l units. The stills are simple black-bottomed containers

filled with water and covered with clear glass or
plastic. Sunlight is absorbed by the black material and
water from desalination (Figure 21.1).
A novel approach to supplying clean water is to use

mini personal water filtration systems ('filter straws')
l
increases the rate of evaporation. The evaporated to drink directly from natural water sources. The
water is trapped by the clear cover and funnelled filter straws contain many hollow fibre micro-tubes
away. Most pollutants do not evaporate and remain that trap contaminants while allowing clean water
in t he container. The stills are usually used in remote to pass through. The straws are highly effective at
areas with limited freshwater, but only produce small removing not only small particles of mud and sand
I
volumes of water and require access to sunlight. but also filter out harmful microbes.
I
405
CONTINUED
1 What are tKe strengths and weaknesses of using 2 What does the filter straw need to be able
portable distillation units and desalination to to remove from the water? Would you drink
produce drinking water? untreated river water using one of these straws?
21.1 Experimental design At the design stage you should plan which equipment to
use and write a method detailing how to use it. You need
to evaluate alternative approaches, taking into account
Planning an experimental a ny possi ble advantages and disadvantages of each
approach, that may help you to improve the method .
investigation
There are several steps to consider when planning an
experimental investigatio n (Figure 21.2).
Selecting the correct apparatus
The type of apparatus used in an experiment w ill depend
Suggest a hypothesis - Draw on on the scale and the accuracy of the resu lts required.
an 'idea' to be tested. information: The scale of an experiment is a meas ure of the amoun t
- from notes,
Is it a problem worth testing? the library and of product needed. A small-scale experiment as carried out
the int\!met. in a laboratory may produce milligram or gram amounts
of a product, whereas large-scale experiments of the type
Decide which variables used in industry will produce many ton nes of material. The
Consult Draw up a plan of te checil, and which ..,___ _ accurac;, is a measure of how close a result is to its true
your - experiments te to keep cons.tant.
teacher. test the 'idea'. value. The apparatus chosen for an experiment should give
Cheose the apparatus
and chemicals needed. pn.>cise results (results that are close to each other).
!
Carry out the experiments,
Yo u need to be able to identify common p ieces of
laboratory equipment (Figure 21.3), and should be aware
making notes on what happens of the purpose and accuracy of the apparatus.
[
and recording measurements.
!
Draw up a summary of results
KEY WORDS
in tables and graphs. accuracy: how cl ose a value is to the tru e value
Draw conclusions from results
and work out what they mean. precision: t he degree to which repeat
measurements are consistent (cl ose to each other)
!
Try to decide whether the results
support the original 'idea'..
Do they suggest further tests Equipment for measuring time, mass,
and 'ideas'?
temperature and pH
Figure 21,2: Steps involved in planning an experimental Time is measured using a stopclock or stopwatch.
tivestigation. Measurement of time is particu larly useful when
determining the rate of a chemical reaction (Chapter 8).
D igital stopwatches are capable of reading to two
T he choice of a pparatus requires careful thought. It is
decimal places, i.e. to within 1/100 second (0.01 seconds).
a lso necessary to consider the level of accuracy, how
to control variables, sources of error and any steps to Mass can be meas ured approximately in spatula
minimise safety concerns. amounts, e.g. add one spatula of a compound to 2cm 3
of acid, or more accurately by using a top-pan balance.
406)
406
,_
~ ~
test boiling
u u Il
beaker conical measuring
Li g
graduated evaporating
tube tube flask cyl inder beaker dish
J
Bunsen burner
m
tripod
◊
gauze filter funnel
C1cf'
eye prote<.iion
burette
~ syringe
~
m
dropping
pipe tte
stopclock balance
~
mortar and
pestle
/ I I
thermometer volumetric
pipette
spatula
Figure 21.3: Common laboratory equipment.
A simple balance may have a low resolution, e.g. 0.1 g,

whereas more complex balances may have a higher
resolution of 0.001 g or greater. The resolution is the
smallest change in a measurement that can be detected.
Temperatures in practical work are measured in degrees
Celsius {0 C) using a thermometer. Often these; are simple
liquid thermometers (spirit or mercury), which can be
read to the nearest degree. It is also possible to use a
digital temperature probe, which can provide a higher
level of resolution, e.g. to within 0.1 °C.
pH can be measured using either universal indicator
paper or more accurately with a digital probe
(Figure 21.4). A digital probe may read to 0.1 or Figure 21.4: Digital pH meter being used by a research
even 0.0 1 on the pH scale, giving significantly higher scientist to test water quality.
resolution. However, calibration may be required
before using a digital meter; this involves using known
standards to check values. KEYWORDS
resolution: the smallest d ivision on the

Equipment for measuring volume instrument, e.g. this could be 1 mm on a ruler or
Volume can be 'measured using a beaker, a measuring 0.1 g on a balance
cylinder, a syringe, a volumetric pipette or a burette. T he
equipment used depends on the accuracy needed. For calibration: the process of checking that the
example, a beaker could be used to prepare a water-bath device gives accurate values by using it to read
containing I 00cm 3 of water, but it could not be usc:•l to samples with known values
407
) CAMBRIDGE IGCSE™ CHEM ISTRY: COURSEBOOK
......
a. b
gas collecting
upturned
measuring cylinder
reaction - - ~f-- water

mixture
Figure 21.5: Collecting and measuring the volume of a gas: a: in a gas syringe and b: over water in an inverted
measuring cylinder.
accurately measure 25.0cm3 of alkali for use in an more accurate as the mean is closer to the true value. In
acid- base titration (Chapter 22). For general use, a the diagrams in Figure 21 .6, the true value is represented
measuring cylinder will often provide a sufficient level as the centre spot of the circle.
of accuracy. A volumetric pipette is the most accurate
piece of apparatus for measuring a fixed volume of accurate not accurate accurate not accurate
liquid (typically volumetric pipettes are either 10.0cm3 precise precise not precise not precise
or 25.0cm 3). A burette is the most accurate piece of
apparatus for measuring a variable volume (often
between 0 and 50.Qcm3).
Some experiments produce a gas. The volume of gas
released during a reaction can give useful information
Figure 21.6: Accuracy versus precision.
for quantitative purposes as well as when investigating
rates of reactfbns (Chapter 8). Most experiments use
one of two standard methods for capturing a gas: direct
capture into a gas syringe or by displacement.of water in Repeatable and reproducibility
., a measuring cylincler (Figure 21 .5). Care must be taken if
the gas is bubbled through water as some gases (e.g. CO) When chemists carry out reactions, they should consider
are sparingly soluble in water. the different factors that influence their results. Data
needs to be both repeatable (reliable) and reproducible.
Data is repeatable when the same person has conducted
Accuracy and precision of the an experiment several times and obtained similar results.
Data can only be reproducible when several different
data recorded people have performed an experiment with similar
variables and obtained similar results.
The data obtained from an experiment should be accurate;
this means that the value obtained is close to the true
value. For example, in an acid-base titration, the true KEY WORD
volume of acid needed to neutralise 25.0cm3 of alkali
repeatability: where an experiment (or series of
is 14.J0c013• When carried out, one student recorded
experiments) can be repeated using the same
values of 12.4Scm3, 12.55cm3 and 12.5cm3• This data is
method and obtain reproducible (similar) resu lts
precise as the repeated values show only a small difference
but is not accurate. Another student recorded values of
l4.30cm3, 14.00cm3 and 14. I 5cm3• This data is not precise
as the repeated values show larger clifferences, but it is
408)
408
Variables reduced by repeating an experiment several times, removing

any anomalous data and taking an average. Systematic
· To ensure experimental work is both repeatable and errors mean the data is wrong by the same amount each·
reprod ucible, the variables need to be considered when time. An example of this is a zero error, i.e. the apparatus
planning an experiment. There are three main types is producing a value when it should not. For example, if
of variable: there is no mass on a top-ban balance the reading should
• controlled variable be 0.OOg. Systematic errors can be reduced by 'taring' the
apparatus or subtracting the zero error from all results.
• independent variable
• dependent variable KEY WORDS
random errors: these are unpredictable variations

KEY WORDS
in results caused by factors such as human errors
control variabfe: a variable t hat is kept the same systematic errors: these are consistent errors
during an investigation that may arise because of a problem with the
independent variable: the variable that is altered experimental design or in a piece of equipment
during a scient ific investigation being used
dependent variable: the variable that is anomalous: something that is unusual or

measured during a scientific investigation unexpected and deviates from the normal; one
of a series of repeated experimental results that
is much larger or smaller than the others is an
A controlled variable is a variable that is kept constant anomalous result
throughout an experiment. As an example, consider a
student who wanted to investigate how the type of metal zero error: a type of systematic error in a measuring
changed the rate of reaction when added to sulfuric acid. To instrument, e.g. the reading o n a balance may not
give repeatable results, as the rate of a reaction is dependent reset to zero when there is nothing on the balance
on both concentration and temperature, they would have to
use the same starting temperature and concentration of the An awareness of accuracy and sources of error is important
acid in each experiment. Temperature and concentration in evaluating the results of an experiment. Tables and
are therefore controlled variables. graphs of results should be checked for results that do not
The independent variable is the variable that is changed fit the pattern. A typical graph is shown in Figure 2 1.7.
during an experiment. In the experiment investigating how
the type of metal changed the rate of reaction, the type 180
of metal is the independent variable. The independent
variable forms the x-axis (horizontal axis) of a graph. The ~ 160 - -
dependent variable is the variable that is measured during ] 140 ,j.:.
an experiment, e.g. the rate of the reaction, and this will &:
form the y-axis (vertical axis) of a graph. .,,-~
2
~
g 80 ;---
_Sources of error and display .,
-I<
E
60
;=
of observations 40
20
As part of the experimental design, it is useful to
consider the sources of error. Almost every measurement
so 60
has some degree of error or uncertainty in it. Some
Temperatvre 1°C
pieces of apparatus are more accurate than others.
Figure 21. 7: Plotting a graph is important to get the most
There are two main types of sources of error: random errol'S
from experimental data. This sample g raph is from an
and systcnuttlc crroN1. The impact of random errors can be experiment such as the one in Chapter 8 (Figure 8.12).
409
When plotting graphs, the line through the points should results of 1.23 min, 1.22 min and 1.23 min. The teacher
be a'i best-fit' line. Do not try to include points that are said that this data was accurate but not precise. Was
obviously out of place. The line you draw, after carefully the teacher correct? Explain your answer.
plotting the points, should show the general trend or 3 A student used a balance with a resolution of 0.1g to
pattern of the results. Very often this will be a straight line measure 1.3 g of magnesium ribbon. They added this
or a gentle curve. Try to draw the line so that the points are to 10.0cm 3 of l.0mol/dm3 hydrochloric acid using
evenly scattered on either side of the line. If a curve seems a 20cm3 measuring cylinder with a resolution of
to be the best fit, then make the line as smooth as possible. 0.5cm3. Which of these readings would have given the
largest source of error? How could any random errors
The key points when drawing graphs are:
associated with this experiment be reduced?
• plot thejodependent variable ('Temperature' in Figure
21.7) on the x-axis (horizontal axis)
• plot the dependent variable ('Time' in Figure 21.7) on 21 .2 Separation and
the y-axis (vertical axis)
• make the scales as large as possible: the scales do not
purification
have to start at zero
• label each axis with the name of the variable and
Standard separation techniques
its units A mixture can be separated using physical processes.
Different types of mixture require different standard
• give the graph a title
techniques, including:
• plot the points with a cross (or a dot in a small circle)
using a sharp pencil
• using a suitable solvent
• draw the best-fit line, which does not have to pass

• filtration . ·
through all the points and which may be a straight line • cryt;tallisation
or a curve. • simple distillation
A point that does not fit the pattern is probably due to a • fractional distiUation
random error in a particular reading. A line that should
pass through the origin but does not do so could be due to a • chromatography .
systematic error.
KEYWORDS
~ Safety filtration: the separation of a solid from a liquid,

using a fine fi lter paper which does not allow the
Safety is of great importance in experiments. You should solid to pass through
be aware of the possible dangers associated with the
apparatus and with those cherrucals that can pose a risk. crystallisation: the process of forming crystals
from a saturated solution
When you plan your investigation, it is important
to assess the risks associated with each part of the simple distillation: a distillation method for
experiment and to take the relevant safety precautions. separating the liquid solvent from a solution
containing d issolved solids
fractional distillation: a method of distillation
Questions using a fractionating column, used to separate
1 A student wanted to accurately measure the liquids with different boiling points
temperature change for the reaction between a solution
chromatography: a technique employed
of sodium carbonate and hydrochloric acid . What
for t he separation of mixtures of dissolved
eqwpment would you advise they select to measure the
substances, which was originally used to separate
temperature and volumes? ·
coloured dyes
2 The true time for a reaction is 1.06 min. A student
measured the time for the experiment and recorded
410)
410
This sectionfocuses on techniques using a suitable solvent, Filtration

, filtration, crystallisation and distillation. Chromatography
will form the basis of Topic 21.3.
Filtration is used to separate an insoluble solid from a
liquid (Figure 21 .8a). The liquid part that passes through
The method of separation selected depends on the the filter is called the filtrate and the solid part that
states of the chemicals involved. To separate a mixture remains after filtration is called the residue. The useful
containing a solid and a liquid, e.g. fine mud particles product could be either the filtrate or the residue and
from water, requires filtration. To separate a mixture of care is needed to avoid disposing of the wrong part.
two or more liquids with different boiling points requires For very fine solids, filtration can be carried out using a
distillation. To remove water from a solution to give a Buchner funnel and vacuum flask (Figure 21 .8b).
salt (ionic compound) requires crystallisation. It may be
possible to separate two solids using a suitable solvent a
that will dissolve one solid and not the other. An example ,,.--::;:::,.,..._ _ _ _ fllter paper
of this is the separation of salt and sand. The salt would
dissolve into the water giving a solution, whereas the sand
is insoluble and could then be removed by filtration.
-..;i~;'Z;~~:=--- filter funnel
The solid remains in the
filter as the residue.
Separation using different solvents support

Differences in solubilities can be used as a simple method
for separating mixtures of solids. Compounds with
- -!-"""",--- - The liquid filters
different types of structure will show different solubilities. through: it is called
For example, metallic structures are insoluble in all the filtrate.
solvents. Ionic compounds, such as sodium and potassium
salts, are often very soluble in water (dissociating into their b
ions). Simple molecular substances such as the halogens
are soluble in hexane and water but others, particularly t,<:=:::::,.,4,__ ___ A Buchner funnel has a
organic compounds, dissolve in hexane but not water. perforated plate, which
is covered by a circle of
Giant covalent compounds, such as diamond and silicon filter paper.
dioxide, are insoluble.
When separating a mixture of two solid5, the method is A vacuum pump is connected
to select a solvent in which one is soluble and the other is to the side-arm flask; it
insoluble. After adding the solvent, the mixture should be speeds up the flow of
filtered (see next section). This gives a residue, wh'ich can be liquid through the funnel.
dried (the insoluble material) and a solution of the soluble
compound. The soluble compound can be recovered by
evaporating the solvent. For example, to separate a mixture Figure 21.8: Filtration separates an insolub le solid from
of sulfur and iron filings, toluene is added as the solvent. a liquid.
The mixture is then filtered and the solvent.evaporated. The
iron filings are insoluble and so are left behind on the filter
paper. The sulfur dissolved into the toluene and is produced Crystal lisation
after evaporation of the toluene. Crystallisation is used to remove water from a solution
containing an ionic compound (salt). This process works
KEYWORDS because the water has a lower boiling point than the salt.
Evaporation can be carried out by carefully heating the
solution: formed when a substance (solute) sample in an evaporating basin or by placing the basin
dissolves into another substance (solvent) over a beaker of boiling water. Using boiling water avoids
overheating the sample and prevents material from being
residue: the solid left behind in the fi lter paper
lost because of rapid boiling of the liquid. To obtain larger
after filt rati on has taken place
crystals, a little water can be evaporated and then the
filtrate: the liquid that passes through t he filter solution left to cool and evaporate at room temperature.
paper during filtration The crystals can be dried between filter papers.
411 )
411
EXPERIMENTAL SKILLS 2 1. 1
Filtration and crystallisat ion of sodium chloride Method
This experiment uses a simple two-part method 1 Grind two heaped spatulas of rock salt using
for obtaining pure crystals of sodium chloride the mortar and pestle.
(salt) from rock salt. You will learn how to use the
techniques of fi ltration and crystallisation. 2 Carefully t ransfer the ground up salt t o a
beaker and add 50cm 3 of cold water. St ir t he
mixture with a glass rod.
You will need:
3 Carefully set up the equipment as shown in
• sample of rock salt Figure 21 .9 and fi lter the mixture into a conical
• spatula flask. This will remove the insoluble materials
and leave a solution of sodium chloride and
• mortar and pestle water (the fi lt rate).
• glass rod
• 50cm 3·measuring cylinder liquid and ~

insoluble solid ,
• 3
100cm beaker ~. ..
filter paper ~ ' ..
• filter funnel and filter paper
filter funnel - ¥ - filtered solid
• 100cm3 conical flask ~ - (residue)
• evaporating basin
• Bunsen burner
• filtered liquid ) !\
• tripod - (filtrate) -----./e)
• gauze
Figure 21.9: Filtration to remove the insoluble
• heat-resistant mat. components o f the rock salt mixture .
Safety 4 Place the fi ltrate into an evaporating basin and

heat over a water-bath (Figure 21.10). A llow
., Wear eye protection throughout. Ensure long hair
water to evaporate until crystals of salt start to
is t ied back when using a Bunsen burner. Care must
form when a glass rod is placed in th e solut ion.
be taken when evaporating the water to avoid the
salt from spitting.
Getting started a - - - - solution in

evaporating, dip a evaporating basin
You should check the different solubilities of sand glass rod into the
solution from time -....,.-- boiling water
and sodium chloride by placing one spatula of each
to time. When small · .,..,~-11111(![:
into a beaker containing 10cm 3 pf water. Does the crystals form on the gauze
sand dissolve? Does the salt dissolve? What does rod, take the solution
this tell you about the solubilities of these two off the water-bath
and leave it to cool.
substances? Can you link t he difference in solubility
to t he bonding in the substances?
Figure 21.10: Evaporation method to produce the
salt crystals.
412
'
CONTINUED
5 Leave the evaporating basin overnight so that 2 What advantage is t here t o the rock salt being
the rest of th e water evaporates. ground up using a mortar and pestle rather
than leaving it in larger pieces?
6 Pat d ry the crystals between filter p apers.
3 Why is it possible to obtain salt crystals by
Questions crystallisation? Would this method work for
1 In filtration, t he liquid t hat passes through t he preparing iodine crystals from an aqueous
fi lter paper is called t he filtrate. What general solution of iodine?
name is given to t he insoluble part?
Distillation
Simple distillation is used to separate the solvent from a
KEY WORDS
solution containing a dissolved solid. The boiling point
of the Liquid is usually very much lower than that of anti-bumping granules: small granules that help
the dissolved solid. The liquid solvent is more volatile reduce the size of bubbles formed when a liquid
than the dissolved solid and can easily be evaporated b oils; used for safety to stop th e flask shaking
off in a distillation flask. Anti-bumping granules are
often added to the liquid being distilled to prevent the distillate: the liquid collected in the receiving
formation of 'large bubbles in the Liquid during boiling flask during d ist illation
(Chapter I). The solvent vapo ur is condensed by passing desalination: the removal of d issolved salts and
it down a water-cooled condenser and then collected as rr,inerals from seawat er to produce d rinking water
the distillate.
Seawater is a solution of various salts in water and Separating the liquids from a mixture of two (or more)
Figure 21 .11 shows how pure water can be obtained miscible liquids is again based on the fact that the
by simple distillation. Simple distillation can be used liquids will have different boiling points. However, the
to obtain drinking water from salt water on a large boiling points are closer together than for a solid-in-
scale (desalination). liquid solution and fractional distiHation must be used
(Figure 21. 12a). In fractional d istiHation, the most
volatile liquid in the mixture distils first and the least
. thermometer
volatile liquid distiJs last.
water out
condenser
anti-
bumping
granules
.....
heat
water in
6
6
pure water
Figure 21 .11 : Simple distillation of seawater.
413
a thermometer
water out
condenser
fractionating
column
{glass beads) ,
water in
ethan o l - 8
water
electrical heater
Figure 21.12 a: Separating a mixture of ethanol (alcohol) and water by fractional distillation. b: A close-up of the glass beads
in the fractionating column.
For example, ethanol boils at 78 °C whereas water boils at back into the flask because the temperature of the column
I00 °C. When a mixture of the two is heated, ethanol and is below its boiling point of 100°C.
water vapours enter the fractionating column. Glass beads
in the column provide a large surface area for condensation The temperature on the thermometer stays at 78 °C until
(Figure 21. 12b). Evaporation and condensation take place all the ethanol has distilled over. Only then does the
many times as the vapours rise up the column. There is a temperature on the thermometer rise to 100 °C and the
range of temperatures in the column; higher at the bottom water distils over. By watching the temperature carefully,
and lower at the top. Ethanol passes through the condenser the two !~quids (fractions) can be co.llected separately.
first as the temperature of the column is raised above its Fractional distillation is a very important industrial
boiling point. Water condenses in the column and flows process and is used in the separation of petroleum
fractions (Chapter 20).
EXPERIMENTAL SKILLS 21 .2
Distillation: pure water from inky water Safety

In this experiment a m ixt ure of ink and wat er will be Wear eye protect throughout . Ensure long hair is
separated to g ive pure water. The experiment uses t ied back when using a Bunsen burner.
simple distillation and is based on the different
boiling points of the water and ink (wa ter has a Getting started
lower boiling p oint t han ink). Dist illation is used to produce petrol from
petroleum and in the purification of ethanol
You will need: (Chapter 19). What two processes take p lace
• inky water (m ixture of ink and water) during distillation?
• round-bottomed flask Method

• t hermometer 1 Set t he equipment up as shown in Figure 21 .11 .
• Liebig condenser 2 Place the inky water into the round-bottomed
flask and add a few anti-bumping granules to
• Bunsen burner or electric heater
(heating mantle) the round-bottomed flask (these are unevenly
shaped pieces of an insoluble material added
• anti-bumping g ranules to a liquid to make them boil more calmly).
• conical flask. 3 Gently heat t he inky wa ter.
414
21 Ex perimental design and separation techniques
CONTINUED _
4 Record the temperat ure at which the liquid Questions

starts to boil using th e thermometer.
1 What property of the components in a mixture
5 Collect the distillate in a conical flask. Record of liquids is used to bring about separation?
its appearance in comparison to t he inky water. 2 What temperature does steam condense at?
3 The t echnique used in this experiment is simple

distillation. Explain how distillation is used to
separate a mixture of liquids.
Compof!ent 1 Ce>mponent 2 Technique Example

Use of suitable solvent - separates on Sand (giant covalent) and
Solid Solid sodium chloride (ionic).
basis of different solubilities
Filtration - separates the solid Copper(II) oxide (residue) and
Insoluble solid Liquid water (filtrate).
(residue) and the liquid (filtrate)
Crystallisation - the liquid is
Soluble solid Liquid Copper(II) sulfate from water.
evaporated to leave the solid
Liquid Distillation/fractional distillation
A mixture of different
Liquid - separates on basis of different
(miscible) hydrocarbons, e.g. crude oil.
boiling points
Table 21.1: Overview of separation techniques.
Selecting the correct KEY WORDS
separation technique pure substance: a single chemical element

or compound - it melts and boils at definite
We have looked at a range of simple separation
temperatures
techniques. When selecting which technique to use, the
most important consideration is the nature of the mixture mixture : two or more substances mixed together
to be separated. Table 22. l provides an overview of which but not chemically combined - the substances
technique to use for a range of two-component mixtures. can be separated by physical means
Testing purity by melting When a substance is impure, the melting point wi ll change.
Whereas a pure substance melts at a defined, specific
point analysis temperature, a sample containing impurities (i.e. a mixture)
will melt at a lower temperc:1.ture (Chapter I.). Seawater is
The physical separation techniques we have looked at impure water and it freezes at a temperature well below
provide methods to produce pure ijUbstauc~s from a 0°C. In addition, the impurity reduces the sharpness of the
mlxtuni. A simple test for purity is to measure a melting melting point. An impure substance melts over a range of
point or boiling point and compare this to a standard
temperatures, not at a particular temperature.
reference value. For example, pure water (ice) melts at 0°C,
pure copper melts at 1085°C, pure aspirin (acetylsalicylic
acid) melts at 135°C and pure oxygen melts at - 218.8°C.
As with other physical properties, melting and boilinp:
points can be used to identify a substance.
415
Measuring the melting point of a sample therefore

provides a simple check for sample purity. Melt ing
points are measured accurately using digital meters or
an electrically heated melting-point apparatus. In the
melting-point apparatus, a capillary tube is filled with
a small amount of the solid and is placed in a heating
block (Figure 21.13 a, b). The melting is viewed thro ugh
a magnifying lens. Alternatively, the sample in the
capillary tube can be attached to a thermometer and
mel ti ng achieved using a water or oil bath (Chapter I).
The presence of impurities will also alter the temperature
at which a substance boils. As with melting points, pure
substances have fixed, weU-defmed boiling points (e.g. pure
water boils at 100°C). The presence of an impurity will
lead to the boiling point being raised above this val ue.
Figure 21.13 a: An electrically heated Figure 21.13 b: Magnified view through a lens of a
sample being analysed for its melting point in a melting
melting-point apparatus.
point apparatus.
ACTIVITY 21.1 - ; - ;' •· .

,~ ,• • •• ~ " • "'"-~L,.1.6!.. .. ~ .
A game of separation selection and replace them wi th blank ones.

If a b lank is picked up, the player needs to
Use a simple game to test other students'
correctly complete it.
understanding of separation techniques. The
options include: 2 Chemical pairs. Produce a set of 16 playing
cards th at match up a word or technique to its
1 Missing labels. On a piece of card produce
description (they could include diagrams, e.g.
a neat diagram of the apparatus used for a
on one card a diagram of a condenser and on
particular type of separation technique. On
its pair t he word condenser). Shuffle t he cards
a separate piece of card produce a set of
and lay out face down in a 4x4 grid. Take it in
labels to go with the diagram you have just
turns to turn cards over in order to correctly
drawn and cut the labels out from the card.
ident ify pairs.
Test another student on their ability to place
the labels in t he correct places. To extend 3 A game of your choice. You can design a
this game design use more than one set of completely different game to help you to
equipment and have the labels jumbled up. learn the different types of separation and
If you want to add an extra level of challenge purification techniques.
t-o the game, then remove labels from your
416
CONTINUED
Peer assessment
In pairs, first discuss the game design. Think about how easy it was to start playing the game. How clear
were the rules, was there any confusion? How engaging was the game? For example, would people wa nt to
play it more than once?
Secondly, think about the chemistry that was being learnt by playing the game. Were the questions too
easy/too hard? How could the design be improved to make it more challenging? Are there other topics
that you have learnt about that could also be taught/revised using the game format you used?
Finally, you could be the first to write a short product review for when this game becomes a
commercial success.
n Stage 1
21.3 Chromatography • The solution is sponed and allowed to dry.
Separating two or more dissolved solids in solution can • The original spot is identified as A.
The solvent begins to move up the
t
r
be carried out by chromatography. There are several types
of chromatography, but they all follow the same basic
principles. Paper chromatography was originally developed
-l paper by capillary action.
0
Stage 2
as a method for separating soluble pigments (coloured • The solvent moves up the paper,
substances such as dyes and inks) using filter paper. taking d ifferent components along
at different rates.
The colour substances separate if:
•
•
the pigments have different solubilities in the solvent
the pigments have different degrees of attraction for
-1
solvent -..cJ
.
the fi lter paper. front •1

•
1•
Stage 3
The separation of the mi><ture is complete.
• The different components string out
These two factors determine how fast the pigments move along the paper.
-
across the filter paper.
A drop of concentrated solution is usually placed on a
.. pencil line (the baseline or origin) near the bottom edge of a
strip of chromatography paper. A pencil is used to draw the Figure 21 .1 4: Stages of separation in paper chromatography.
line as it does not dissolve and in terfere with the separation.
The paper is then clipped in the solvent. The level of the
solvent must start below the sample. Figure 21.14 shows KEY WORDS
stages of separation using paper chromatography.
paper chromatography: a simple type
The substances separate according to their solubility of chromatography used to separate the
in the solvent. As the solvent moves up the paper, the components of soluble substances based on their
substances are carried with it and begin to separate. The rate of migration in a solvent (mobile phase) on
substance that is most soluble moves fastest up the paper. sheets of filter paper (stationary phase)
An insoluble substance would remain at the baseline.
T he chromatography run is stopped just before the solvent front: the moving boundary of the
soh·ent front reaches the top of the paper. Figure 21.15 liquid solvent that moves up the paper
shows the separation of some inks in which you can see during chromatography
the solvent front rising up the paper. The final product of
chrom atogram: the result of a paper
a chromatography experiment can be dried and is known
chromatography run, showing where the spots of
as a chromatogram . the samples have moved to
l
'I 417)
417
) CAMBRIDGE IGCSE™ CH EMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
,...,
Paper chromatography can be used to check for the •
purity of a substance. If the sample is pure, it should only
give one spot when run in several different solvents. The
identity of the sample can also be checked by comparing
its movement to that of a sample we know to be pure.
The distance moved by a particular spot can be measured
l and related to the position of the solvent front. The ratio

of these distances is called the R, value (Figure 21 . I 7).
R
'
distance moved by the substance
=--- - --~-~- ----
distance moved by the solvent front
Figure 21.15: Separation of mixtures of inks by

paper chromatography.
Many different solvents are used in chromatography. Figure 21.17: Measuring R1 values for substances A and B
Water and organic solvents (carbon-containing solvents) on a chromatogram.
such as ethanol, ethanoic acid solution and propanone
are commonly used. Organic solvents are useful because The R, value is always the same for a particular substance
they dissolve many substances that are insoluble in waler. in a specific solvent at a given temperature, and can be
When an organic solvent is used, the process is carried used to identify unknown substances by comparison with
out in a tank with a lid to stop the solvent evaporating. reference values. From the chromatogram in Figure 21 . I 7
Using chromatography, we can get more information it can be seen that the Rr values for substances A and B
about the substances present in a mixture. Figure 21.16 are 0.67 and 0.25. respectively. As an R1 value is a ratio, it
shows a chromatogram of a mixture of dyes (labelled X). always ranges between Oand I and does not have any units.
The three dyes present in the mixture can be seen as the As mentioned earlier, paper chromatography was originally
spots vertically above where the sample was spotted on used to separate solutions of coloured substances (dyes
the baseline. By running pure samples of known dyes A, and pigments) since they could be seen as they moved up
B and C (sometimes known as reference standards), we the paper. However. the usefulness of chromatography has
can determine whether any of these dyes were present in been greatly increased by the use of fo.-ating aJ!ent, (Figure
• the mixture X. 21.18) to separate mixtures of soluble colourless substances.
A locating agent reacts with a colourless substance to
produce coloured spots or spots that glow under ultraviolet
'' ' '

0
light. The chromatography paper is treated with the
locating agent after the chromatography run.
0
X A B C
R, value: in chromatography, the ratio of the
distance travelled by the solute to the distance
Figure 21.16: A chromatogram of a mixture of dyes X. travelled by the solvent front
locating agent: a compound that reacts
By looking horizontally across the chromatogram, we
with invisible, colourless spots separated by
can see that mixture X contains dyes A and C, but not
chromatography to produce a coloured product
dye B. The chromatogram also shows there is a dye in X
that can be seen
that has not been identified in this experiment.
418 )
418
....
fine tube for

level reached by
spotting samples
the solvent (the
onto the paper
chromatography cover paper being drawn solvent front)
thermometer
paper through locating agent
r\ ----. oven
0 paper coiled \
in a cylinder locating
G 0
--+- --+- agent / --+- --+- 0 0
G-M-E A pencil
line and
glass "
jar
I /.,
~ s hallow
••
u........--...u G M E A
letters solvent dish
Preparing the paper 2 Running the 3 Treating with 4 Heating the paper 5 The developed
and spotting on the chromatogram the locating agent to bring up the chromatogram
samples colou r of the spots
Figure 21 .18: Chromatography using a locating agent to detect the spots on the paper. Alternatively, the locating agent can
be sprayed on the paper.
Chromatography has proved very useful in the analysis

of biologically important molecules such as sugars,
amino acids and nucleotide bases. The technique can
also be used to detect illegal substances in blood or urine
(Figure 21. 19) and to identify contaminants in food or
drinking water.
Questions
4 A simple chromatogram from a red marker pen
showed two dots in a vertical line. What does this
tell you about the ink used in this pen? '
. 5 A student tried to separate some inks from a black

marker pen using paper chromatography but the
ink remained on the baseliJ1e. Why did the ink not
move and what should the student do to improve
the experiment?
6 When analysing a chromatogram, the distance
moved by the solvent from the baseline was
2.8cm and the distance travelled by the sample was
2.3cm. Calculate the R1 value for this compound to
2 decimal places. Using the same ink, but a larger
piece of chromatography paper, the solvent front
had travelled 9.7cm. Predict, to I decimal place, the
distance moved by the sample.
Figure 21.1 9: Paper chromatography is one of several

different types of chromatography that work on the
same principle.
419
---
'-
Paper chromatography Method

This experiment provides a simple method 1 Draw a pencil line (baseline) horizo ntally on
fo r analysing the colours in different food your piece of chromatography paper and add
dyes o r inks. You will learn how to produce a three crosses (X) at regu lar intervals. Under
paper chromatogram. each cross write a letter A, B or C.
You will also calculate R1 values. 2 Add a drop of dye A carefully in the centre of
the first cross, this should be done with the
..
You will need:
t hree different inks or liquid food dyes
labelled A, B and C
capillary tube. If using a pipette just touch the
end onto the paper, do not squeeze. To get
the best results use small amounts of sample as
larger amount s will g ive very streaky results.
• 250cm 3 beaker 3 Repeat with th e other dyes adding to the
crosses labelled B and C.
• water or ethanol as the solvent
• rectangular piece of chromatography 4 Attach the paper to a splint or pencil using

paper (approximately 8cm x 4cm) a clip and suspend the paper in the solvent
(water). It is essential that the height of t he
• capillary tube or dropping pipette solvent is between the bottom of the paper
and the baseline.
• pencil
5 The solvent should start to travel up the
• rt1ler
chromatography paper and any soluble dyes
• splint or pencil and bulldog clip to will 'start to move from the baseline.
suspend the paper in the solvent
6 Remove the paper from the water after the
• hairdryer. solvent has t rave lled about 80% of the way up
the paper.
Safety 7 Mark the solvent front with a pencil to show
how far the solvent moved.
Wear eye protection throughout. Ethanol is toxit
and so you must-wash hands after use. Ethanol is 8 Dry the chromatogram carefully with
4
also highly flammable and so this experiment must the hairdryer.
not be conducted near lit Bunsen burners.
9 Deduce the R, values for the different dyes.
Getting started
The experiment can be repeated using ethanol as
Selecting the correct solvent for a chromatography an alternative solvent . If using ethanol, a lid should
experiment is important. If the samples are too be added to the equipment.
soluble, they will travel with the solvent front and
n9t separate; if tre samples are insoluble, they will Questions
remain-0n ·tfieihaseline. Test t he solubility of an ink
1 A student repeated the experiment using inks
by p lacing -a small amount onto a piece of paper
from a selection of permanent pens and the
and then submerge the paper in a small amount of
following method :
solvent. Does the ink remain on the paper or does
it start to dissolve into the solvent? Does the ink a Draw a b aseline in pen horizontally on
d issolve more rapidly in different solvents? your p iece of chromatography paper. The
baseline should be about 0.5cm from the
b ottom of the paper.
420)
420
CONTINUEQ
b Add a drop of ink at regular interva ls along e Mark the solvent front in pencil.
the baseline.
Can you spot the errors in their method?
c Attach the paper to a pencil using a bulldog Explain what the impact of each mistake they
clip and suspend the paper in water so t hat have made would be.
the baseline is just covered by the water.
2 Why would a lid be required if ethanol was
d Remove from the water once the solvent used as a solvent?
has travelled all the way up the paper.
ACTIVITY 21.2 . .
Mixing it up In pairs, compare your facts and then work

together to identify which three facts you think are
1 Write down five facts linked to the different
the most important.
separation techniques, e.g. t he liquid that
passes through the filter paper is called the
filtrate (Figure 21.20).
2 Write down two detailed explanat ions as to
how two of the different separation techniques
work, e.g. fractional distillation involves heating
a mixture to its boiling point, different fractions
have different boiling points and so evaporate
at d ifferent temperatures, etc.
3 Identify one question you still have about
Figure 21 .20: Filtering flower essence at a perfume
separation techniques or one technique you
factory in France.
are not yet confident with.
Peer assessment
Look at your partner's explanations of two d ifferent separation techniques. What are the strengths in your
partner's explanations? How could their explanation be improved?
Finally, find an answer or explanat ion for your part ner's question or t ry to explain t o t hem the technique
they are not yet confident with.
One of the key skills in chemistry is the ability to design an experiment. In this chapter, we have considered
not only the way in which apparatus is selected but also the techniques used to purify the products
of chemical reactions. How will you apply your understanding of experimental design to suggest
improvements in future practical experiments? Thinking back to the f low diagram g iven in Figure 21.2,
of
what aspects your experimental work do you still need to develop? How could you do this?
421 )
421
SUMMARY
T here are different factors involved in the design and planning of an experiment, including choice of
apparatus, level of accuracy, variables, sources of error and safety.
Different methods or pieces of apparatus each have advantages and disadvantages, and these should be
accounted for when choosing which to use.
T he correct apparatus to select when measuring time is a stopwatch or stopclock; temperature, a thermometer;
mass, a balance; volume, the appropriate glassware and pH is Universal Indicator or a pH meter.
There is a range of different separation and purification techniques, including use of a solvent (to separate two
solids), filtration (to separate an insoluble solid from a liquid), crystallisation (to separate an solub le solid from a
solution) and simple or fractional distillation (to separate a liquid from a solution or a mixture of liquids).
The correct separation technique needs to be selected for a given mixtu re.
Melting point and boiling point data can be used to identify substances and assess their purity.
Paper chromatography is a simple separation technique and a chromatogram can be used to determine
whether a sample is a pure substance or a mixture.
A reference sample is used to compare samples in chromatography.
An Rr value is a ratio calculated from a chromatogram and is the distance moved by the substance divided by
I the distance moved by the solvent front.
> A locating agent can be used to highlight the position of soluble colourless substances in a chromatogram.
PROJECT
Separllltions Are Us 4 You have outlined what sort of mixture each

method can be used to separate.
'Separations Are Us' is a new business that aims
to sell technical know-how to chemical companies You may want to extend your brochure by iricluding
around the world. Their aim is to help companies information on the possible strengths and
purify products through distillation, filtration, weaknesses of the different methods being offered.
* crystallisation and chromatography (Figure 21 .21).
You may want to extend your brochure to include
You have been asked to produce an advertising information about using melting points as a check
brochure for the company that summarises each for product purity.
of these processes and that gives some possible
applications of each.
As you work through your leaflet/brochure, ensure
you meet all of the fol lowing criteria:
1 You have included at least four different
separation techniques.
2 For each technique you have given a simple
d iagram t o show the apparatus needed.
Figure 21 .21: A technician adjusting the valves on
3 You have explained the chemistry involved in
industrial filtration tanks.
each method.
422
1 Coloured sweets contain edible dyes. These dyes can be separated by
chromatography. The figure shows chromatograms obtained from three
different orange sweets.
•
red •
red
'
0 @
yellow yellow yellow
'
I
•
red
I
I
•
red
t sweet 1 sweet 2 sweet 3
How many different red dyes were present iA these orange sweets?
A 4 B 3 C 2 D 7 [1]
2 The diagrams A-F in the figure show the stages in an experiment fo

separate a mixture of copper(II), sulfate and copper(II) oxide and
prepare clean dry crystals of cop~r(II) sulfate.
wmixture rinse with

water
add wate r and stir
A B C
heat to leave to dry filter

evaporate
on filter paper
D E F
a Name the two pieces of apparatus drawn in D. [2]

b The experiment would not work if the different steps were in this
order. Using the letters A-F, place the diagrams in the correct order. [2]
423
CONTINUED -. · ·
-
c What colour would the solution be in the beaker in C? (1)
d Why was the mixture stirred with water and not acid? [1]
[Total: 6)
COMMAND WORD
3 Malachite is an ore of cop~r which contains copper carbonate, CuCOr
You are provided with a large lump of malachite. Describe an experiment describe: state the
to obtain a sample of pure copper from this ore. points of a topic /
g ive characteristics
Your answer should include:
and main features
• details of all apparatus used
• details of any chemicals used
• how you would separate the copper formed from any mixtu.re. (6)
4 The following questions refer to different items of common

laboratory apparatus.
a Why might a measuring cylinder be used instead of a gas jar to
collect a gas over water? [1)
b Why is a measuring cylinder not used to measure 13.6cm3 of a liquid? (1)
c How can a Bunsen burner be adjusted to produce the hottest flame? (1.)
d Why is a thermometer needed when ethanol is separated from water
by distillation? (1)
e When crystallising.from a solution, how do you know when•to
....,..,
stop heating? (1)
[Total: 5)
S Proteins arc long chains of different amino acids joined together. Design
an expcrimcnt to discover which amino acids make up a particular protein.
You arc provided with a concentrated solution Qf the protein that has
been split into its individual amino acids. You arc <1lso provided with
d1romatography apparatus. All amino acids arc colourless compounds
that are soluble in water. [6]
,......
--
424
SELF-EVALUATION CHECKLIST · ·
gaps in your knowledge and help you to lecarn more effeetively.
~~~~~:"· I
understand the different factors involved in the
21.1
design and planning of an experiment
name appropriate apparatus for the measurement of
21.1
time, temperature, mass, volume and pH
state possible advantages/disadvantages for selecting
21.1
a particular method or piece of apparatus
explain the terms solvent, solute, solution, saturated
21.2
solution, residue and filtrate
describe how a mixture of solids can be separated by
/
21.2
using different solvents
explain how filtration can be used to separate an
21.2
insoluble compound from a solvent or solution
describe how to crystallise a soluble salt from
21.2
a solution
explain how simple and fractional distillation can be
/ 21.2
used to separate mixtures of liquids
identify the most suitable separation technique when
21.2
given information about the substances present
describe the use of melting and boiling points to
21.2
determine purity
explain how to carry out a simple paper
21.3
chromatography to separate coloured compounds
use a chromatogram to compare an unknown to a
known sample and deduce whether a substance is 21.3
pure or a mixture . .
recall and use the equation to calculate Rr values 21.3
describe how locating agents can be used to identify
21.3
soluble colourless substances in chromatography .
425
learn how characteristic colours produced by flame tests can be used to identify metal cations
• explore how precipitation reactions with solutions of sodium hydroxide and ammonia can be used to
identify aqueous cations
• discover how chemical analysis is used to determine the presence of anions
• develop simple practical techniques for proving the identity of different gases
• describe acid-base titration as a form of quantitative analysis
• learn how to identify the end-point of a titration using an indicator.
426
22 Chemical analysis
Chemists analyse samples of water, soil and air. demonstrated where there are noticeable changes
When looking at these samples, chemists need when a certain substance is present. Discuss in
to detect the presence of different substances groups the possible reactions that could be used
quickly and accurately, particularly t hose that may as t ests and the changes that would need to be
be harmful to life. Can you think of the crit eria monitored. Who would need access to the findings
for a chemical test that can be used to identify of these tests and why? What would the analytical
the p resence of a particular substance? Think chemists need to do to ensure their conclusions
about reactions you have carried out or seen were valid?
BOTTLED WATER - FINDING A SOLUTION TO WHAT IONS IT CONTAINS

Analytical tests are routinely used across all areas of
Chemistry, including in the analysis of bottled water.
The tests can help scientists to understand what
chemicals are eith er present (posit ive test) or not
present (negative test). The results of these tests can
be qualitative, giving a yes/no answer, or quantitative,
giving the actual amount of something present. For
example, silver nitrate is added to domestic drinking
water as a test for chloride ions. This is a qualitative
test and the formation of a white precipitate (a
positive result) would mean chloride ions were
present in the water.
Bottled mineral water is sold in high and increasing Figure 22.1: Supermarkets carry a large range of different
volumes across the world (Figure 22.1). It is a bottled waters.
mixture containing water and several soluble metal
compounds, known as minerals. These minerals Discussion questions
dissolve as the water passes through different types
of rock. Minerals are made up of a cation (the, metal 1 Some people m ight describe mineral water as
ion) and an anion (a non-metal ion). Some minerals being pure. Why do you t hink this could be?
are beneficial to health, but care is also needed as Can you explain why chemically this is not true?
•
in high concentration some can cause illness. A s 2 Bottled mineral water is not allowed to be
examples, very high levels of potassium can cause treated other than by filtration to remove sand
problems such as the life-threatening condition particles and needs to have a guaranteed
known as hyperkalaemia and high levels of chloride consistent chemical composition. What
ions are toxic. To ensure product quality, legally each problems might this create for the companies
company that sells mineral water needs to display selling bottled mineral water?
both the names and quantities of the ions that are
present. Chemical tests are necessary to determine
the quality and safety of minera l water in order to
ensure potentially harmful or 'fake' drinking water
does not reach the consumer.
427
...,,
The test for the presence of metal cations involves taking
2?.1 Tests to identify a nichrome vi1re probe and lirst heating it in a roaring
Bunsen flame. The wire is then dipped into hydrochloric
common cations acid. These two steps arc repeated several times until no
residual colour is evident in the flame. T his is done to
We a ll require certain levels of metal ions (cations) such clean the probe by removing traces of metal ions from
as sodium, potassium, copper, iron and zinc to maintain previous experiments. The probe is then dipped into the
a healthy body. However, in larger concentrations, some acid again to wet it before placing the probe into the test
metal ions can become dangerous to human health, e.g. sample. The wet probe will pick up a few crystals. The
high levels of lead ions are linked to Alzheimer's Disease. probe is then placed into a roaring flame and the colour
It is important for analytical chemists to detect the is recorded. These steps arc outlined in Figure 22.3 (and
presence of metal ions in solution and in the following form the basis for Experimental Skills 2.1 in Chapter 2).
sections we will look at two qualltati~·e approaches
to identifying a range of cations. These are the flame 1. Heat up the wire 3. Dip the wire salt to
test and precipitation reactions with aqueous sodi um be tested
hydroxide or aqueous ammonia.
Flame tests to identify

metal cations
As we have seen in Chapter 2, the distinctive colours
produced in a firework display result from the different
2. Dip the wire in 4. Hold sample in the edge
metal compounds that are used in the manufacture of
concentrated HCI of a hot flame
the fireworks. The colours produced are due to electrons
changing energy level in the different metal ions. This
same principle is used as the basis for the flame test to
test for the presence of some metal cations. In particular, j
the flame test is widely used for metal ions of the
elements found in Group I (alkali metals) and Group II
(Figure 22.2).
• qualitative (analysis): the process used to Figure 22.3: Method for the flame test.
determine the presence or absence of a substance
in a given sample
cation: a positive ion that wouldl:ie attracted to the

cathode in electrolysis
Figure 22.2: Some Group II metals give characteristic colours in the flame test: a: calcium, b: strontium and c: barium.
428
- Lithium, u• Sodium, Na• Potassium, K• Calcium, Ca2• Barium, Ba 2• Copper(II), Cu2•
Flame
Red Yellow Lilac Orange- red Light green Blue-green
colour
Table 22.1: Standard colours obtained with the flame test for different metal ions.
Different metal ions produce characteristic colours

(Table 22.1 ).
Questions
1 Explain how a nichrome wire probe and Bunsen
An a lternative method is lo take a wooden splint and dip
burner can be used to show the presence of
it in a solution of the metal ion for an extended period
sodium ions.
of time. The wooden splint wil l absorb the test chemical
and can then be placed into a roaring Bunsen burner 2 Flame tests on three different metal sulfates (SO/-)
flame (Figure 22.4). This will give similar results to those gave three different coloured flames: lilac. red and
recorded in Table 22. l. You must take care not to set light green. What metal ion was present in each
the splint o n fire. If this does happen the flame will turn test? Deduce the formulae of the three sulfates that
yellow and the results will be void as the yellow flame were tested.
of the burning wood will dominate the colour of the 3 A flame test was carried out using a wooden
metal ion. splint soaked ma salt solution prepared with tap
water. The flame test produced an orange- red
colour. Why might a conclusion that this sample
contained calcium ions not be valid? How could
the expenmental design be improved to ensure a
valid result?
Using aqueous sodium

hydroxide or aqueous ammonia
to idertify aqueotJs cations
It is possible to predict observations just by looking at
a balanced chemical equation that includes the <
I . For example, the reaction between copper(II)
carbonate and sulfuric acid can be represented using the
following symbol equation:
CuCOis) + H1SO.(aq) -+ CuSO4(aq) + COz(g) + H1O(1)
.e s~ is symbols used to show the p hysical

state of the reactants and products in a chemical
reaction: they are s (solid), I (liquid), g (gas) and aq
(in solution in water)
Figure 22.4: Using a splint, or rolled paper, as an alternative
method for the flame test: the yellow flame shows the
presence of sodium.
429
.,__
The state symbols enable us to say that if we observed
this- reaction, we would see the disappearance of the
solid CuC03 and effervescence (bubbling) as CO2 gas
'I
was produced. In this section, we will see reactions where
a solid (a precipitate) is formed when two solutions
are added together. The symbol equations will include
aqueous (aq) state symbols in the reactants and a solid
(s) as one of the products.
Not all aqueous ions produce characteristic flame
colours and so alternative tests are needed. A commonly
used test is to add aqueous sodium hydroxide
Figure 22.5: Precipitation reaction as sodium hydroxide
NaOH(aq). When sodium hydroxide solution is added to
solution is added to a solution containing aqueous iron(U) ions.
a solution containing a metal cation (usually a transition
metal ion), an insoluble metal hydroxide is formed in a
precipitation reaction (Chapter 4). The transition metals If left to stand, iron(II) hydroxjde will slowly oxidise to
are particularly well suited to this test as they form iron(III) hydroxide at the surface of the reaction leading
compounds with characteristic colours. to a change in colour (green to brown) (Figure 22.5).
Precipitation reactions are less useful for salts containing You can use a solution of aqueous sodium hydroxide
Group I or Group II metal ions. Salts of the Group I to test for cations including aluminium, ammonium,
metals tend to be solu ble (Chapter 12) while those of calcium, chromium(III), copper(II), iron(JI), iron(III)
Group II, if they do produce a precipitate, will produce a and zinc. The result of the precipitation reaction for each
white precipitate that requires additional tests to identify ion is given in Table 22.2.
the specific metal ion. Care needs to be taken when trying to identify
aluminium, zinc and calcium ions as all of these ions
KEY WORDS produce"'a white precipitate. This means that a further
stage in the analysis is needed. You can identify the
precipitate: an insoluble salt formed during a calcium ions as they do not redissolve when an excess
precipitation reaction of sodium hydroxide is added; both zinc an<! aluminium
ions will redissolve. As an alternative, to show the
precipitation reaction: a reaction in which an
insoluble salt is prepared from solutions of two
presence of calcium ions you could also do a flame test
suitable soluble salts
(the calcium ions would produce a characteris_tic orange-
red coloured flame). To distinguish between the zinc and
aluminium ions you need to repeat the test but using
. ammonia solution (the results for this test are shown in
Precipitation with aqueous sodium the next section).
hydroxide
Several aqueous cations react with a solution containing
hydroxide ions to produce a characteristic precipitate.
For example, aqueous iron(II) ions will initially produce
a green precipitate when dilute sodium hydroxide is
added (Figure 22.5).
iron(ll) + sodium -+
iron(II) + sodium
chloride hydroxide hydroxide chloride
FeCli(aq) + 2NaOH(aq) -+ Fe(OH)is) + 2NaCl(aq)
430)
430
Cation Positive result when NaOH(aq) added

~
White precipitate, this redissolves when an excess of NaOH(aq) is added to give a clear,
Aluminium, Al3+
colourless solution
Ammonium, NH/ No precipitate but produces ammonia on warming
Calcium, Ca 2+ White precipitate, t his is insoluble in excess NaOH(aq)
Chromium (Ill), Cr3+ Green precipitate, this will redissolve in excess NaOH(aq)
Copper(II), Cu 2• Light blue precipitate, this is insoluble in excess NaOH(aq)
Green precipitate, this is insoluble in excess NaOH(aq) but starts to turn brown near the
lron(II), Fe2 •
surface if left to stand
lron(III), Fe 3• Red-brown precipitate, this is insoluble in excess NaOH(aq)
White precipitate, this will redissolve in ElXCess NaOH(aq) to give a clear,

Zinc, Zn 2+
colourless solution
Table 22.2: Results o f p recipitation rea.c tions using NaOH(aq).
Questions
4 Dilute sodium hydroxide solution was added
* dropwise to copper(II) sulfate solution to form a
light blue precipitate of copper(Il) hydroxide. Which
of these symbol equations is/are correct?
A CuSO4 + NaOH -+ CuOH + NaSO4
B CuSO.(aq) + 2NaOH(l) -+ Cu(OH)2(s) + N<½SO.(aq)
C CuSO.(aq)+ 2NaOH(aq) -+ Cu(OHMs)+ Na2SO.(aq)
D CuSO.(aq)+ NaOH(aq) - Cu(OH\(s)+ Na2SO.(s)
E CuSO4 + 2NaOH - Cu(OH\ + Na2SO4
5 Which equation from question 4 reveals that the
reaction involves precipitation?
6 A few drops of dilute sodium hydroxide solution
(NaOH(aq)) were added to a sample of aluminium
chloride (AICl/aq)), and this produced a white
precipitate. Write the balanced equation for this
reaction, including state symbols.
431 >
431
\\
Precipitation with aqueous ammonia
A solution of ammonia (NH 3) will alsQ lead to
precipitation reactions with solutions containing
aqueous metal cations (Table 22.3). The initial changes 0
with dil ute ammonia solution are generally similar to
those when using aqueous sodium hydroxide. This is
because am monia forms a weakly alkaline solution in
water and only produces a low concentration of aqueous
hydroxide ions.
Ammonia solution prod uces slightly different results
when it is added in excess. For solutions containing zinc
o r alumini um ions, a few drops of ammonia solution
will produce a white precipitate. When an excess is
added it is possible to distinguish between the two metal
Figure 22.6: Precipitation reaction as ammonia solu tion is
cations as the aluminium precipitate is insoluble, but the
added to a solution containing aqueous copper(II) ions.
zinc precipitate dissolves to give a colourless solution.
The other difference to note is that copper(II) ions will
initially give a characteristic pale blue precipitate but this
wi ll redissolve when excess ammonia is added, producing
a dark blue solution (Figure 22.6).
Cation Positive resi.ilt when NH3(aq):pdded
Aluminium, AP+ White precipitate; insoluble in excess NHiaq)
Ammonium. NH; No reaction
Calcium, Ca 2 + No precipitat e or very slight white precipitate
Chromium (Ill), Cr3+ Green precipitate; insolubl,e in excess NH3(aq)
Copper(II), Cu 2+ Light blue precipitate; soluble in excess NH/aq) producing a dark blue solution
Green precipitate; insoluble in excess NHiaq) but starts to t urn brown near the surface if
lron(II), Fe2+
left to stand
lron(IH), Fe3 + Red-brown precipitate; insoluble in excess NH3(aq)
Zinc, Zn 2 • White precipitate; redissolve in excess NH 3(aq) to give a clear, colourless solution
Table 22.3: Results of precipitation reaction using N Hiaq).
..,,.,.
432 >
432
Testing for aqueous cations af ter a further ten minutes. Has t here been any
change in the colour of the precipitate?
This experiment provides methods for the
identificat ion of common metal ions and the
Method
ammonium ion (NH,•) using sodium and ammonium
hydroxide solutions. The method can be used in Part 1: Using sodium hydroxide
parallel with the tests for common anions discussed
1 Place 2 cm 3 of a solution of the test sample into
in the next section to confirm the identity of an
a clean test-tube.
ionic compound.
2 Slowl y add a few drops of dilute 0.Smol/dm 3
You will need: sodium hydroxide solution and record the
colour of any precipitate formed.
• test-tubes
3 Continue to add dilute sodium hydroxide unt il
• test-tube rack it is in excess. This is necessary as some of the
precipitates initially formed will redissolve.
• Bunsen burner and heat-resistant mat
• 10cm 3 measuring cylinder 4 Additional step: to test for the ammonium
ion (NH 4 •) repeat steps 1 and 2 but then
• d ropping pipette warm gent ly using a Bunsen burner. If a gas is
produced then it should turn damp red litmus
• 0.5 mol/dm 3 sodium hydroxide solution
paper blue (see also test for ammonia gas in
• 0.5mol/dm 3 ammonia solution Topic 22.3).
• damp red litmus paper Part 2: Using ammonia solution
• test samples including 0.2 mol/dmi 1 Place 2cm 3 of a solution of the test sample into
solutions of the following compounds: a clean test-tube.
copper(II) sulfate, iron(II) sulfate, iron(III)
2 Slowly add a few drops of dilute ammonia
chloride, ammonium chloride, zinc
solution (NH 3(aq)) and record the colour of any
sulfate, chromium(III) sulfate, aluminium
precipitate formed.
chloride and calcium chloride. '
3 Cont inue to add dilute ammonia solution until
Safety it is in excess. This is necessary as some of the
precipitates initially formed will redissolve.
Wear eye protection throughout. Be careful with
chemicals. Never ingest them and always wash your Questions
hands after handling them. Avoid the chemicals
1 The reaction between transition metal ions
coming into direct contact with skin; if they do then
and sodium hydroxide produces coloured
rinse the affected area under running water.
precipitates. What is a precipitate?
Getting started 2 Transition metals can form more than one ion.
Take 2cm 3 of a solution of iron(II) sulfate and place What difference did you note between the
it in a cl ean, dry t est-tube. Then use the d ropping precipitates of iron(II), Fe 2•(aq) and iron(ll1),
pipette to add a few drops of 0.5 mol/dm3 sodium Fe 3•(aq)?
hydroxide solution to the tube. Note the formation 3 Ammonia turns red litmus blue. What does this
of a precipitate and in particular its colour. tell you about ammonia?
Leave the test-tube in a rack and look at it again
433
Sy_mmary of tests for aqueous cations Ou est ions

The flame test and the simple precipitation reactions
using aqueous sodiu m hydroxide or aqueous ammonia 7 5 cm 3 of iron(II) and iron(III) chloride were placed
provide qua li tative methods of ana lysis for identifying into separate clean test-tubes and a few drops of
aqueous cations. It is important when planning an aqueous sodium hydroxide solution were added to
analytical experimen t to use a stepwise approach. This each tube. Describe the observations for the positive
could include initia lly always starting with a flame test test results expected for each salt.
as this is a very quick and easy method. If the flame 8 5 cm 3 of copper(II) sulfate solution was placed into
test does not yield a positive test result then sodium a clean test-tube and aqueous sodium hydroxide was
hydroxide solution should be added. A simple overview added dropwise. In another experiment, 5cm3 of
of how to analyse the results of the precipitate test is copper(U) sulfate solution was placed into a clean
shown in Figure 22.7. test-tube and dilute ammonia solution was added
dropwise. Describe fully what would be seen during
When carrying out these tests it is important that the each experiment.
aqueous solutions are prepared using distilled water.
This is because tap water can contain dissolved minerals 9 A few drops of NaOH(aq) were added to a sample
(me ta l compounds). These minerals may include metal containing an unknown aqueous metal ion. The
ions such as calcium and zinc that would potentially result was a green precipitate. A student concluded
interfere with the tests (Chapter 17). Also note that not that the sample contained chromium(III) ions. Was
all metal salts form soluble compounds, e.g. many metal their conclusion valid? If not, what shouid be done
carbon ates show low levels of solubility (Chapter 12). to provide a valid result?
Add sodium
hydroxide
solution.
ls
yes precipitate no
coloured?
., 9rey-
9reeo 9reen
Which
r=7
001,,,,
Ugh<
blue
'
00
Add excess
sodium hydroxide
solution.
Does
precipitate
yes
Cr3• Fe•- Fe3' Cu••

! redissolve? l
! !
Add excess Repeat with
sodium hydroxide ammonia solution.
! i
Does Does
precipitate precipitate
dissolve in d issolve in
excess? yesf excess?
Figure 22.7: A s tra tegy for identifying m etal cations.
434
10 A solution of a metal ion produced white precipitates T he reaction of solid magnesium carbonate with dilute
with dilute ammonia and aqueous sodium hydroxide. hydrochloric is:
The solution is known to contain either calcium, zinc magnesium+ hydrochloric magnesium carbon
or a luminium ions. During a class discussion, student car b onate ac1•ct ---+
ch1 on·ct e + water + ct·1ox1·cte
A said they would do a flame test to prove whether
MgC03(s) + 2HCl(aq) ---+ MgC12(aq) +Hp(!)+ CO/g)
the solution contaiped calcium ions. Student B said
they would add an excess of sodium hydroxide to test
for zinc or aluminium ions. Why would student Ns
approach give valid results? What was wrong with the Halide ions
suggestion made by student B and what change in
The test for halide ions (chloride (CJ-), bromide (Br-)
reagent would lead to a valid conclusion?
and iodide (I-)) is the formation of a precipitate when
a solution of acidified silver nitrate is added. The test
22.2 Tests to identify produces different colours of precipitate: a-chloride
forms a white precipitate; a bromide forms a cream
precipitate and an iodide forms a yellow precipitate
common anions (Figure 22.9). The presence of carbonate ions in the test
sample can interfere with this reactio n and so they need
The previous sections have considered the main tests for
the presence of common cations (positive ions), but as to be removed. This is done by the addition of an acid,
which reacts with carbonates to produce carbon dioxide,
ionic compounds contain both a positive and a negative
ion (anion), analytical techniques are needed for both water and salt. The silver nitrate solution is acidified by .
adding a small amount of nitric acid.
anions and cations. The common anions include single
elements (monatomic ions), e.g. chloride (CJ-), bromide
(Br) and iodide (I-), and compound ions, which as the
name suggests contain more than one element, one
of which is oxygen, e.g. carbonate (COt) and nitrate
(N03-). Some elements form more than one compound
ion and an example of this is sulfur, which exists as
sulfate (SO/-) and sulfite (SO/-).
Carbonate ions
The test fo r carbonate ions (CO/-) relies on the fact that
carbonates react with di lute acids to release carbon dioxide.
As this reaction takes place in solution, the gas formed Figure 22. 9: Precipitates produced in the tests for halide ions
is visible as effervescence. Proof that the gas formed is using acidified silver nitrate. The precipitates are silver chloride
carbon dioxide is determined by bubbling the gas through (white), silver bromide (cream) and silver iodide (yellow).
limewater. If carbon dioxide is present, the limewater
changes from clear to cloudy/milky (Figure 22.8). A solution containing sodium chloride reacts with
silver nitrate solution to produce a white precipitate of
silver chloride.
sodium sodium silver
+ silver nitrate ---+
+ chloride
nitrate
chloride
antacid
NaCl(aq) ---+ NaNO,(aq) + AgCl(s)
tablet
dilute limewater
hydrochloric (calcium
acid hydroxide
solution}
Figure 22.8: Testing for carbonate ions.
435
solution containing sulfite ions, a redox reaction takes

StJlfate ions place (Chapter 10) and the resulting solution is colourless. ·
The test for sulfate ions (SO/-) is the addition of
acidified bariu.m nitrate solution. As with the test for
halide ions, the presence of carb0nate ions can interfere Nitrate ions
with the results. The barium nitrate is therefore acidified
The standard test for nitrate ions (N03-) involves adding
using a small volume of nitric acid (or hydrochloric
aqueous sodium hydroxide, aluminium foil and then
acid). If carbonate ions are present, then a white
heating gently. As with the test for sulfite ions, this involves
precipitate of barium carbonate will form. In the
a redox reaction. The nitrate ions are reduced to produce
presence of sulfate ions, barium nitrate solution reacts to
ammonia (NH3) and the aluminium metal is oxidised to
produce a white precipitate of barium sulfate.
give All+. The ammonia produced is a gas and can be
A solution containing sodium sulfate reacts with barium tested by placing damp red litmus paper above the neck
nitrate solution to produce a white precipitate of barium of the reaction vessel. The positive result for ammonia is a
sulfate and a solution of sodium nitrate. colour change of the damp red litmus from red to blue.
+ sulfate ..... barium + sodium

barium sodium
nitrate sulfate nitrate Summary of tests for anions
Ba(N03>i(aq) + Na2SO/aq) ..... BaS04(s) + 2NaNOiCaq)
The tests for the anions are unique to individual ions, except
for the Group VII halide ions. The presence of carbonate
ions can lead to false results if not removed because most
Sulfite ions carbonates are insoluble. Trus need to acidify reagents to
The most commonly occurring anion of sulfur is sulfate remove carbonate requires care to ensure the correct acid/
(S0,2-); however, sulfite ions (SO/-) also exists. The test reagent pair are selected. For example, using sulfuric acid to
for sulfite uses its oxidation to sulfate by a transition acidify barium nitrate solution would introduce sulfate ions. .....
metal ion. Some transition metal compounds are excellent This would lead to the immediate precipitation of barium ,.__,.
oxidising agents, e.g. acidified potassium manganate(VII), sulfate before adding it to any test sample.
KMn04 • A solution of acidified potassium
Table 22.4 summarises the tests for anions.
manganate(VII) has a purple colour. If it is added to a
Anion Test Test result

add dilute hydrochlori<:: acid; test for effervescence (fizzing}, carbon dioxide
carbonate (CO/-}
carbon dioxide gas produced (test with limewater)
., acidify with dilute nitric acid, then add
chloride (Cl-) (in solution} white precipitate of silver chloride formed
aqueous silver nitrate
acidify with dilute nitric acid, then add
bromide (B,) (in solution} cream precipitate of silver bromide formed
acidify with dilute nitric acid, then add
iodide (1 -J (in solution) yellow precipitate of silver iodide formed
acidify with dilute nitric acid
sulfate (S042-J (in sol,ution} (or hydrochloric acid}, then add barium white precipitate of barium sulfate formed
nitrate solution
add dilute hydrochloric acid, then
sulfite (SO/ -J decolourises t he purple potassium
add aqueous potassium
manganate(VII} solution
manganate(VII} solution
add aqueous sodium hydroxide, then add
nitrate (N03- ) (in solution) ammonia gas given off (test with moist
aluminium foil and warm carefully; test for
red litmus}
ammonia gas
Table 22.4: Tests for anions.
436
Questions
-11 The test for carbonate ions can use any dilute acid. 13 A student testing for sulfate ions used barium nitrate
Hydrochloric acid is most commonly used but dilute acidified with dilute sulfuric acid instead of the
sulfuric acid or nitric acid would also work. Explain recommended hydrochloric acid. Would this change in
why the type of acid used does not matter. Your acid have any impact on the student's results? Explain
answer should refer to the equations for each acid your answer fully.
when added ,to sodium carbonate solution. 14 In the test for nitrate ions (NO; ), the nitrate ion is
12 Two solutions were prepared, one of magnesium iodide reduced to ammonia (NHJ and the aluminium is
(M&lz) and the other of magnesium chloride (MgC1i)- oxidised. Write a half equation for the oxidation of
How could acidified silver nitrate (AgNOi) be used to aluminium meta.I to aluminium ions.
show which solution contained the magnesium iodide?
Give equations for the two reactions.
ACTIVITY 22 .1
Memorising th e standard tests for ions 2 After one minute, pass your cards to
Work with a partner to produce a set of flash cards your partner.
for the standard tests for ions (Figure 22.10). One 3 Take it in turns to test each other by stating
person could focus on the aqueous anions and the the standard test and result and asking for the
other person could focus on the aqueous cations. ion. For example, 'Which ion could be tested
for by using the flame test and gives a blue-
On the front side of each flash card, write the
green flame?' If your partner gives the correct
formula and name of the ion being tested. The
answer (Cu 2•), give their card back, if not you
cations should include u•, Na•, K•, Ba 2• , Ca 2•, Cu 2•,
Fe 2• , Fe 3•, Cr♦• Zn2• and NH/ . The anions should can keep it.
include Cl-, Br, 1-, SO/ -, SO/-, NO3- and CO/·. To 4 Keep taking alternate turns to test each other
help, you might use two different colours for the until all five cards have been used.
cards, one colour for cations and the other colour
for anions. 5 At the end of the round, count up the number
of cards each of you have. The player with the
On the reverse of each flash card give the test/ most cards wins that round.
reagent and result, e.g. u• would be 'Test/reagent
= flame test', 'Result = red'. Some ions would You can use your set of flash cards to play further
require two tests, e.g. AP• would be 'Test/reagent rou nds of the game by:
•
= NaOH(aq)', 'Result = white precipitate that will • swapping the original set of five cards between
redissolve' and 'Test/reagent= NH 3(aq)', 'Result= you and your partner
white precipitate'
• shuffle all of the cards and then deal each
Once you have produced a set of flash cards, player five new cards
covering both the anions and cations, follow the
instructions that follow: • test by stating the ion and asking for the
standard test
1 Each person selects five cards at random from
the set of flash cards and spends one minute • test by stating the ion and asking for the
learning what is on them. standard test and its result.
Self-assessment
How many cards did you win? What tests do you know really well? Which tests do you think you could learn
more about? What other information could you have included on the cards to help you remember the
tests? Did you think about using online software for creating virtual flash cards?
,..
437)
437
~2.3 Tests to identify

common gases
Animals and birds have been used to detect the presence
of low levels of chemicals in a wide range of situations.
Detection ('sniffer') dogs are trained to use their sense
of smell to search for illegal drugs and canaries have
been used in coal mines to detect the build-up of carbon
monoxide and other toxic gases before they affect
humans. Analytical chemists still use very simple tests to
detect common gases such as hydrogen, oxygen, carbon
dioxide, chlorine, ammonia and sulfur dioxide.
Hydrogen
Hydrogen {H 2) is a colourless and odourless gas. The
standard test for hydrogen is to place a ligh ted spli nt at
the neck of a test-tube. If hydrogen is present, there will
be a characteristic ' squeaky pop' sound due to a small
explosion as the hydrogen and oxygen rapidly react. The
test is often referred to as 'the squeaky pop test' and the
reaction involved is the rapid combustion of hydrogen to
produce water.
......
._
Oxygen Figure 22.10: A glowing splint being relit by oxygen in a

Oxygen (02) is a colourless, odourless gas. The standard test-tube.
test for oxygen is to place a glowing splint into a test-
tube of the gas. If oxygen is present the splint will relight
(Figure 22.10). This is because substances burn mueh
more rapidly in pure oxygen.
bubble carbon dioxide
through limewater
Carbon dioxide
Carbon dioxide (CO2) is a colourless, odourless gas.
To test for carbon dioxide the gas is bubbled through
limcwater (a dilute aqueous solution of calcium
hydroxide) (Figure 22.11). If carbon dioxide is present the
Figure 22.11: The limewater test for carbon dioxide.
!imewater turns from clear and colourless to cloudy/milky
due to the formation of insoluble calcium carbonate.
.....
438
Chlorine Ammonia
Chlorine (Cl2) is a toxic, green gas with a distinctive odour. Ammonia (NH3) is a colourless gas with a distinctive,
The standard test for chlorine is to use damp blue.litmus pungent odour. The standard test for ammonia gas is to
paper. The damp blue litmus paper will initially tum red use damp red litmus paper. The damp red litmus paper
before being bleached white (Figure 22.12). The chlorine will tum blue. This is because ammonia will dissolve in
gas reacts with the water to form hydrochloric acid (HCI) water to form a weak base (ammonium hydroxide).
and hydrogen chlorate(!) (hypochlorous acid, HCIO). The
presence of hydrochloric acidic results in the blue litmus
paper turning red. The hypochlorous acid is a bleaching Sulfur dioxide
agent and causes the litmus paper to tum white.
Sulfur dioxide (SO) is a colourless, toxic gas with an
unpleasant odour. The standard test for sulfur dioxide
is to pass it over a piece of filter paper dampened with
a solution of acidified potassium manganate(VII). The
purple colour of potassium manganate(Vll) is removed
and the solution becomes colourless. The colour change
is due to the manganate(VII) ions that are deep purple
being reduced to form manganese(II) sulfate, which is
very pale pink (almost colourless). During this reaction
the sulfur dioxide is oxidised to form sulfuric acid.
Summary of tests for

common gases
Figure 22.12: Testing for chlorine. Damp blue litmus paper Chemists need to check for the presence of different gases.
is held over a test-tube of chlorine. The chlorine vapour For example, in industrial settings being able to detect
turns the strip red and then bleaches it white. leaks of chlorine, ammonia and sulfur dioxide can reduce
the risk of serious accidents. Table 22.S summarises the
test used for a particular gas and the positive result given.
If damp red litmus is used for the test for chlorine than it
Chlorine is acutely toxic, oxidising and hazardous to
is simply bleached white.
the aquatic environment and sulfur dioxide is corrosive
and acutely toxic so tests involving these gases should
be carried out in a well-ventillated laboratory or a
fume cupboard .
.
Gas Test Positive result
Hydrogen (HiJ Lit splint Produces a squeaky pop
Oxygen (02) Glowing splint The splint is relit
Carbon dioxide (CO} Bubble through limewater Turns from clea~ to cloudy/milky
Chlorine (Cl 2_) Damp litmus paper Bleached white
Ammonia (NH) Damp red litmus paper Turns from red to blue
Sulfur dioxide (SO} Solution of acidified potassium manganate(VII) Decolourised (purple to colourless)
Table 22.5: Summary of tests for gases.
439
Questions be clamped vertically above the conical flask and a white

tile may be placed under the conical flask to help see
15 A colourless, odourless gas produced a white any colour change. The volume added from the burette
precipitate when bubbled through limewater. during a titration is called the tittc volume.
a What gas was present?
b Give the balanced symbol equation for the
reaction between the gas and the limewater
(calcium hydroxide).
16 A colourless, odourless gas did not relight a glowing
splint and did not turn limewater cloudy. What
conclusions can you make about this gas?
17 The test for sulfur dioxide involves the reaction with
acidified potassium manganate(VII).
a Why is there a colour change?
b Given that this is a redox reaction (one which
involves oxidation and reduction), using the
equation, identify which element is oxidised
and which is reduced.
2KMnO4 (aq) + 5SO/g) + 2Hp
.... K2so. + 2MnSO.(aq) + 2HlSOiaq)
22.4 Quantitative
analysis: acid-base
tit rations
Titration, a form of quantitative analysis, is used
to determine the concentration of a wide range of
substances. Titrations are used in many industries, ,
including agriculture, food production, cosmetic
manufacturing, pharmaceutical companies, water works
* and mining organisations. Here we will consider the use
of titrations in determining the concentrations in an Figure 22.13: Performing an acid- base titration using
acid- base titration . methyl orange as indicator.
In an acid- base titration, a specified, fixed volume
of base is placed into a conical flask by means of a
volumetric pipette and filler. Typical pipette volumes
are either 10.0cm3 or 25.0cm 3 and the pipettes used are
highly accurate. quantitative (ana{ysis):·the process used to
determine the amount or percentage of a substance
The acid is dispensed using a burette, a piece of in a g iven sample
glasswat:e that gives an accurate but variable volume
of liquid. After carefully recording the start volume, add-base titration: a method of q uantitative
the acid is added to the base by opening the tap at the chemical analysis where an acid is added slowly
bottom of the burette (Figure 22.13). The burette should to a base until it has been neut ra lised
titre: the volume of solution added from the
burette d uring a t itratio n
440
To determine the point at which the alkali has been

KEY WORD
Meutralised, acid- base titrations use an indicator . An
indicator is a chemical that gives a clear colour change indicator: a substance that changes colour when
at the end-point for the reaction. Care must be taken to added to acidic or alkaline solutions, e.g. litmus
add the acid dropwise from the burette as the end-point or thymolphthalein
is approached. The conjcal flask must also be swirled to
ensure everythlng is mixed and the reaction is complete.
There are many different indicators including methyl Titrations are repeated until three consecutive results
orange and thymolphthalein. Methyl orange turns from within ±0.10 cm 3 are obtained. The first run in a titration
yellow in basic conditions to red in acidic conditions, experiment is a trial or pilot run. As the end-point is
whereas tbymolphthalein is blue in basic conditions and unknown, this first run is used to give an approximate
colourless in acidic conditions (Chapter 11). titre volume. Any subsequent titrations will be added
dropwise as the end-point is approached and then a
When measuring the volume added from the burette it mean titre should be calculated. See Chapter 5 for details
is important to be very precise. Read carefully from the of the calculations required to work out concentration in
base of the meniscus and to an accuracy of ±0.05cm3• an acid- base titration.
You should read with your eyes positioned horizontal
to the meniscus (Figure 22.14). Two readings need to The titration described here is for a titration involving
be taken from the burette: the start volume and end solutions of an acid and an alkali (e.g. the titration
volume. T he volume of liquid added from the burette is method for preparing a soluble salt in Chapter 12).
calculated as the difference between these two values. Tit rations can also be carried out using an -acid solution
and an insoluble base (see Experimental Skills 11.1 in
Chapter 11).
50
meniscus Questions
•
18 A titration uses two accurate pieces of glassware.
What are they and how do they differ?
40
19 Why should methyl orange or thymolphthalein
11:--7----- ~
be used to detect the end-point of an acid-base
titration rather than using Universal Indicator?
20 When carrying out a titration the method states
' the conical flask must also be swirled'. Why is
eye level this important?
. 21 A titration was repeated five times and the titre
volumes were: l2.70cm3, 12.15cm3, 12.35cm3,
12.10cm 3 and 12.!0cm3 . If these results were to
be used to calculate a concentration, what was the
mean titre?
Figure 22.14: How to take an accurate burette reading.
441 >
441
To identify different cations, anions and gases • You might even consider writing a short story:
you will need to know the results of many In the Lithuanian forest was a redwood cabin
different tests. There are different approaches to which Natalie entered, removing her yellow
remembering this type of information: cap. Kristoff in his lilac jumper sat with a Cat
by the orange-red glow of the fire. Hidden
• You could spend time repeating the
here are t he first four flame colours: Li (red), Na
info rmation for each test and resu lt or ask your
(yellow), K (lilac) and Ca (orange-red).
peers to ask you questions.
Which of these approaches do you think works best
• You could write a mnemonic (a sentence that
for you? How could you assess which approach is
helps you to recall a list of words). For example,
most effective in learning the standard tests for
you may already use OIL RIG as a mnemonic
ions and gases?
to remind yourself t hat Oxidation Is Loss (of
elec trons) Reduction Is Gain (of electrons).
,.
1
SUMMARY .. _.,.,;,..~u.~; ,·
Flame tests can be used to identify the presence of metal cations based on the characteristic colour of the
flames produced: Li•(red), Na•(yellow), K•(lilac), Ca2•(orange-red), Ba2•(light green) and Cu 2+(blue- green).
Precipitation reactions with aqueous solutions of sodium hydroxide or ammonia can be used to test for the
metal aqueous cations AP•, Ca2• , Cu2•, Fe2+, FeH, Cr3+ and Zn 2 . •
Sodium hydroxide can also be used to test for ammonium ions, which are reduced to ammonia,
To test for anions: carbonate ions are detected by effervescence with di lute acid, which produces carbon
dioxide. Halide ions are detected by precipitation reactions with acidified silver nitrate. Sulfate ions are
detected by a precipitation reaction with acidified barium nitrate. Sulfite ions are detected by a redox reaction
with acidified potassium manganate(VII) whicr produces a visible colour change (purple to colourless).
Nitrate ions are detected by a redox reaction using aluminium, which produces ammonia gas.
The tests for common gases are: hydrogen gives a squeaky pop with a lit splint, oxygen relights a glowing
splint, carbon dioxide turns limewater milky, chlorine bleaches damp litmus paper. ammonia turns damp
red litmus paper blue and sulfur dioxide turns acidified aqueous potassium manganate(VII) from purple
to colourless.
Quantitative analysis provides information about the amount of substance present.
Acid- base titrations are a commonly used form of quantitative analysis, which use high Iy accurate glassware
(the pipette and burette).
The end-point of a titration is detected by a colour change in an indicator: methyl orange turns from
yellow to red (basic to acidic conditions), whereas thymolphthalein turns from blue to colourless (basic to
acidic conditions).
442
PROJECT
The chemical detective You will need to write an experimental plan which
your classmates can then evaluate. The plan should
A very busy technician had taken five bottles include: a list of chemicals, a list of tests and the
containing white crystalline solids out of the
methods for each experiment, and the positive test
,store cupboard for use by the school's chemistry
results that would be expected.
teacher (Figure 22.15). The samples were old and
unfortunately the labels fell off. The teacher end~d T0 evaluate another group's plan, consider the
up with a tray of five bottles each with a different following points:
white solid and five labels: sodium carbonate,
sodium chloride, zinc chloride, ammonium sulfate
1 Have all the chemical solutions required
been stated?
and ammonium carbonate.
2 Are the methods given clear/logical?
Rather than disposing of the chemicals and buying
new ones, working with a partner can you identify 3 Does their plan lead to valid results?
-the lowest number of tests the teacher would need
to positively identify all five compounds?
Figure 22.15: Correct labelling of reagent bottles is

important to ensure laboratory safety.
443
EXAM-STYLE QUESTIONS .. . .
1 A solution of an unknown salt is tested in two ways. First, excess

• ammonia solution is added to one portion of the solution and a white
precipitate is formed that then re-dissolves. A second portion of the
unknown salt is tested with excess sodium hydroxide solution. Again, a
·white precipitate is formed that re-dissolves.
What metal ion is present in the unknown solution?
A Ca2•
B AP•
C Cu2•
D Zn2 (1)
2 A mixture of two solid salts (X and Y) was tested. The mixture was a
white powder. The mixture was added to water in a boiling tube and
the mixture was shaken. Some of the.solid dissolved and the resulting
solution was filtered.
a Why was the solution filtered?
Tests were carried out separately on the filtrate and the residue.
Tests on filtrate
Aqueous sodium hydroxide was A white precipitate formed-that

added slowly until in excess re -dissolved
Aqueous am monia was added slowly A white precipitate formed that
until in excess remained in excess
An acidified solut ion 9f silver nitrate
was added No react ion was ob served
An acidified solution of barium

nitrate was added A w~ite precipitate was formed
., Tests on residue
Dilute hyd rochloric acid was added Effervescence occurred producing

a gas th at t urned lime wat er m ilky
Aqu eous sodium hydro xide was A white precipitate t hat d id not
added slowly until in excess redissolve was formed
COMMAND WORD
b Identify the salt present in the: identify: name/
Ftlti'ate {X) (21 select/recogn ise
ii Residue (Y) [2]
c Which salt was soluble in water? (1 l
[Total: 6)
444 >.
444
3 The table shows some salts and the results of tests carried out on the salts.
Complete the table.
slowly adding
adding acidified
salt flame test excess aqueous
silver nitrate
sodium hydroxide
potassium sulfate no reaction
green colour no reaction cream precipitate
lithium iodide no reaction
no colour green precipitate,
white precipitate
produced re-dissolves
(6)
I COMMAND WORDS
4 a What two tests can you do to prove that a sample of pale green
crystals is iron(Il) sulfate? State the tests and give the observed result state: express in
of each tes clear terms
Test I (2) give. produce an
ii Testil [2] answer from a
b A white crystalline salt of sodium produces a gas when dilute given source or
hydrochloric acid is added to it. What two tests can you do to show recall/memory
whether the substance is sodium carbonate, sodium sulfite or neither?
State the tests and give the observation expected with a positive test.
Test A [2]
ii Test B [2]
[Total: 8)
5 Vinegar contains ethanoic acid and can be made from wine or malt
(germinated and dried cereal grains). You'are provided with two bottles
of vinegar, one bottle of vinegar made from wine and one bottle of
~ vinegar made from malt. Design an experiment to discover which of
these vinegars contains the more concentrated solution of ethanoic acid.
Your answer should include.
• details of the apparatus used
• any measurements made
• how you decide which vinegar contains the most acid.
445
After studying this chapter, think about bow confident you are with the different topics. This will help you to see
give the characteristic colours for the flame test for

22.l
the metal cations: Li+, Na+, K+, Ca2+, Ba2• and eu2•
describe how aqueous solutions of sodium
hydroxide or ammonia can be used to identify the 22.1
cations AP+, Cai+, Cu 2• , Fe2• , Fe3 +, Cr3 • and Zn2•
describe a simple test for the presence of
22.1
ammonium ions
describe the tests to identify carbonate, halide,
22.2
sulfate, sulfile and nitrate anions
describe the tests to identify different gases
(hydrogen, oxygen, carbon dioxide, chlorine, 22.3
ammonia and sulfur dioxide)
state the difference between quantitative and
22.4
qualitative analysis
explain what a burette and a pipette are used for in a
22.4
titration experiment
describe how to perform an .acid- base titration 22.4
give the colour changes for methyl orange and
thymolphthalein used to identify the end-point of 22.4
an acid- base titration
446
Glossary
>G\ossary
Command Words
Below are the Cambridge International definitions for command words which may be used in exams. The
information in this section is taken from the Cambridge International syllabus (0620/0971) for examination from
2023. You should always refer to the appropriate syllabus document for the year of your examination to confirm
the details and for more information. The syllabus document is available on the Cambridge International website
www.cambridgeinternational.org.
anaJyse: examine in detail to show meaning, identify explain: set o ut purposes or reasons/make the
elements and the relationship between them relationships between things evident/provide why and/or
calculate: work out from given facts, figures or how and support with relevant evidence
information give: produce an answer from a given source or recall/
compare: identify/comment on similarities and/or memory
differences identify: name/select/recognise
consider: review and respond to given information justify: support a case with evidence/argument
contrast: identify/comment on differences predict: suggest what may happen based on available
deduce: conclude from available information information
define: give precise meaning show (that): provide structured evidence that leads to a
given result
demonstrate: show how or give an example
skelcb: make a simple freehand drawing showing the key
describe: state the points of a topic/ give characteristics
features, taking care over proportions
and main features
state: express in clear terms
determine: establish an answer using the information
available suggest: apply knowledge and understanding to
situations where there are a range of valid responses in
evaJuate: judge or calculate the quality, importance,
order to make proposals/ put forward considerations
amount, or value of something
examine: investigate closely, in deta'il
Key Words
accuracy: how close a value is to the true value acidic oxides: oxides of non-metals that will react with
acid: a substance that dissolves in water, producing bases and dissolve in water to produce acid solutions
H•(aq) ions - a solution of an acid turns litmus red and ) activation energy (E,): the minimum energy re{!uired to
has a pH below 7. start a chemical reaction - for a reaction to take place
) Acids act as proton douors the colliding particles must possess at least this amount
acid base reaction: (see neutralisation) of energy
acid-base titration: a method of quantitative chemical addition polymer: a polymer formed by an addition
analysis where an acid is added slowly to a base until it reaction - the monomer molecules contain a C=C
has been neutralised double bond
acid rain: rain that has been made more acidic than addition reaction: a reaction in which a simple molecule
normal by the presence of dissolved pollutants such as adds across the carbon- carbon double bond of
sulfur dioxide (S02) and oxides of nitrogen (nitrogen an alkene
oxides, NO,)
447
) adsorption: the attachment of molecuJes to atmosp.here: the layer of air and water vapour
a.solid surface surrounding the Earth
alcohols: a series of organic compounds containing the atom: the smaJiest particle of an element that can take
functional group -OH and with the general formula part in a chemical reaction
C,,H2n. 1OH atomic number (or proton number) (Z): the number of
alkali metals: elements in Group I of the Periodic Table; protons in the nucleus of an atom
they are the most reactive group of metals atomic theory: a model of the atom in wh.ich electrons
alkalis: soluble bases that produce OH-(aq) ions in can only occupy certain electron shells (energy levels)
water - a solution of an alkali turns litmus blue and has moving outwards from the nucleus of an atom
a pH above 7 ) Avogadro constant: the number (6 x 1023) of
alkanes: a series of hydrocarbons with the general characteristic particles in 1 mole of a substance
formula C.H 2,,.2; they are saturated compounds as ) Avogadro's law: equal volumes of any gas, under the_
they have only single bonds between carbon atoms in same conditions of temperature and pressure, contam
their structure the same number of particles
alkenes: a series of hydrocarbons with the general balanced chemical (symbol) equation: a summary of a
formula C.H2.; they are unsaturated molecules as they chemical reaction using chemical formulae - the total
have a C=C double bond somewhere in the chain number of any of the atoms involved is the same on
alloys: mixtures of elements (usually metals) designed to both the reactant and product sides of the equation
have the properties useful for a particular purpose, e.g. base: a substance that neutralises an acid, producing a
solder (an alloy of tin and lead) has a low melting point salt and water as the only products.
) amide~ (or peptide link): the link between _monomers ) Bases act as proton acceptors
in a protem or nylon, formed by a condensation reaction basic oxide: oxide of a meta.I that will react with acids to
between a carboxylic acid group on one monomer and neutralise the acid
an amine group on the next monomer ...,.
bauxite: the major ore of aluminium; a form of
amino acids: naturally occurring organic compounds aluminium oxide, Alp3
that possess both an amino (- NHJ group and an acid
(-COOH) group in the molecule; there are 20 naturally biodegradable: a substance that can be broken down, or
occurring amino acids and they are polymerised in cells decomposed, by microorganisms
to make proteins blast furnace.: a furnace for extracting metals
amphoteric compound: a compound (hydroxide or metal (particularly iron) by reduction with carbon that uses
oxide) that reacts with both an acid and an alkali to give hot air blasted in at the base of the furnace. to raise
a salt and water the temperature
., anion: a negative ion which would be attracted to the boiling: the process of change from liquid to gas at
anode in electrolysis the boiling point of the substance; a condition under
which gas bubbles are able to form within a liquid - gas
anhydrous: an adjective to describe a substance without molecules escape from the body of a liquid, not just
water combined with it from its surface
anode: the electrode in any type of cell at which boiling point: the temperature at which a liquid boils,
oxidation (the Joss of electrons) takes place - in when the pressure of the gas created above the liquid
electrolysis it is the positive electrode equals atmospheric pressure
anomalous: something that is unusual or unexpected and ) bond energy: the energy required to break a particular
deviates from the normal; one of a series of repeated type of covalent bond
experimental resuJts that is much larger or smaller than
the others is an anomalous result brass: an alloy of copper and zinc; this alloy is hard
antacids: compounds used medically to treat indigestion burette: a piece of glass apparatus used for delivering a
by neutralising excess stomach acid variable volume of liquid accurately
anti-bumping granules: small granules that help reduce calibration: the process of checking that the device
the size of bubbles formed when a liquid boils; used for gives accurate values by using it to read samples with
safety to stop the flask shaking known values
448)
448
Glossary
carboxyHc acids: a homologous series of organic ) closed system: a system where none of the reactants
eompounds containing the functional group -COOH or products can escape t he reaction mixture or the
(-C0 2H), with the general formula C,,H2,,+JCOOH container where the reaction is taking place
catalyst: a substance that increases the rate of a coal: a black, solid fossil fuel formed underground
chemical reaction but itself remains unchanged at the over geological periods of time by conditions of high
end of the reaction pressure and temperature acting on decayed vegetation
catalytic converter: a device for converting polluting ) collision theory: a theory which states that a chemical
exhaust gases from cars into less dangerous emissions reaction takes place when particles of the reactants
catalytic cracking: the decomposition of long-chain collide with sufficient energy to initiate the reaction
alkanes into alkcnes and alkanes of lower relative combustion: a chemical reaction in which a substance
molecular mass; involves passing the larger alkane reacts with oxygen - the reaction is exothermic
molecules over a catalyst heated to 500 °C complete combustion: (see also incomplete combustion) a
cathode: the electrode in any type of cell at which type of combustion reaction in which a fuel is burned in
reduction (the gain of electrons) takes place; in a plentifot supply of oxygen; the complete combustion
electrolysis it is the negative electrode of hydrocarbon fuels produces only carbon dioxide
cation: a positive ion which would be attracted to the and water
cathode in electrolysis compound: a substance formed by the chemical
ceramic: material such as pottery made from inorganic combination of two or more elements in
chemicals by high-temperature processing fixed proportions
chemical bonding: the strong forces that bold atoms (or compound fertiliser: a fertiliser such as a NPK fertilizer
ions) together in the vario us structures that chemical or nitrochalk that contains more than one compound to
substances can form - metallic bonding, covalent provide elements to the soil
bonding and ionic bonding compound. ion: an ion made up of several difTerent
chemical feedstock: a chemical element or compound atoms covalently bonded together and with an overall
which can be used as a raw material for a n industrial charge (can also be called a molecular ion; negatively
process making useful chemical products charged compound ions containing oxygen can be
chemical formula: a shorthand method of representing called oxyanions)
chemical elements and compounds using the symbols of ) compromise temperature: a temperature that gives
the clements sufficient product and a reasonable and economic rate
chemical reaction (change): a change in which a new of reaction
substance is formed • condensation: the change of a vapour or.a gas into
a liquid; during this process heat is given om to
. chemical symbol: a letter or group of letters representing
an element in a chemical formula the surroundings
) condensation polymer: a polymer formed by a
chemiluminescence: light given out by certain
condensation reaction, e.g. nylon is produced by the
chemical reactions
condensation reaction between I ,6-diaminohexane and
chlorophyll: a green pigment in plants which traps energy hexanedioic acid; this is the type of polymerisation used
from the sun in photosynthesis in biological systems to produce proteins, nucleic acids
chromatogram: the result of a paper chromatography and polysaccharides
run, showing where the spots of the samples have ) condensation reaction: a reaction where two or
moved to more substances combine together lo make a larger
chromatography: a technique employed for the compound, and a small molecule is eliminated
separation of mixtures of dissolved substances, which (given oil)
was originally used to separate coloured dyes concentration: a measure of how much solute is
clean dry air: containing no water vapour and only the dissolved in a solvent to make a solution. Solutions
gases which are always present in the air can be dilute (with a high proportion of solvent), or
climate change: changes in weather patterns brought concentrated (with a high proportion of solute)
about by global warming ) Contact proces.~: the industrial manufacture of sulfuric
acid using the raw materials sulfur and air
449
control variable: a variable that is kept the same during distillate: the liquid collected in the receiving flask
at1 investigation during distillation
corrosion: the process that takes place when metals and distillation: the process of boiling a liquid and
alloys are chemically attacked by oxygen, water or any then condensing the vapour produced back into a
other substances found in lheir immediate environment liquid: used to purify liquids and lo separate liquids
corrosive: a corrosive substance (e.g. an acid) is one that from solutions
can dissolve or 'eat away' at other materials (e.g. wood, dot-and-cross diagram: a diagram drawn to represent
metals or human skin) the bonding in a molecule, or the electrons in an ion;
covalent bonding: chemical bonding formed by the usually only the outer electrons arc shown and they are
sharing of one or more pairs of electrons between represented by dots or crosses depending on which atom
two atoms they are from
) cryolite: sodium aluminiw11 fluoride (Na 3AlFJ, an ore downward delivery: a method of collecting a gas which is
of aluminium used in the extraction of aluminium to denser than air by passing it downwards into a gas jar
lower the operating temperature of the electrolytic cell. ductile· a word used to describe the property that metals
Now replaced by synthetic sodium aluminium fluoride can be drawn out and stretched into wires
produced from the common mineral fluorite. ductility: the ability of a substance to be drawn out into
crystallisation: the process of forming crystals from a a wire
saturated solution ) dynamic (chemical) equilibrium: two chemical reactions,
decanting: the process of removing a liquid from a solid one the reverse of the other, taking place at the same
which has settled or from an immiscible heavier liquid time, where the concentrations o f the reactants and
by careful pouring products remain constant because the rate at which
decomposition: (see also thermal decomposition) a type of the forward reaction occurs is the same as that of the
chemical reaction where a compound breaks down into
simpler substances
reverse reaction
electrical conductivity: the ability to conduct electricity
...
.._,
dehydration: a chemical reaction in which water is electrical conductor: a substance that coud ucts electricity
removed from a compound but is not chemically changed in the process
density: expresses the relationship between lhe electrodes: the points where the electric current enters or
mass of a substance and the volume it occupies: leaves a battery or electrolytic cell
density = mass/volume electrolysis: the breakdown of an ionic compound,
dependent ,ariable: the variable which is measured . molten or in aqueous solution, by the use of electricity
during a scientific investigation electrolyte: an ionic compound that will conduct
desalination: the removal of dissolved salts and minerals electricity when it is molten or dissolved in water;
• from seawater to produce drinking water electrolytes will not conduct electricity when solid
) desulfurisation: an industrial process for removing electrolytic cell: a cell consisting of an electrolyte and
contaminating sulfur from fossil fuels such as petrol two electrodes (anode and cathode) connected to an
(gasoline) or diesel external DC power source where positive and negative
diatomic molecules: molecules containing two atoms, io ns in the electrolyte are separated and discharged
e.g. hydrogen, H 2 electron: a subatomic particle with negligible mass and a
diffusion: the process by which different fluids mix as charge of -1; electrons are present in all atoms, located
a result of the random molions of their particles in the shells (energy levels) o utside the nucleus
displacement reaction: a reaction in which a more electronic configuration: a shorthand method of
reactive element displaces a less reactive element from describing the arrangement of electrons within the
a solution of its salt electron shells (or energy levels) of an atom; also
referred to as electronic structure
displayed formula: a representation of the structure of
a compound which shows a ll the atoms and bonds in electron shells (energy levels): (of electrons) the allowed
the molecule energies of electrons in atoms - electrons fill these shells
(or levels) starting with the one closest to the nucleus
) dissociation: the separation of a covalent molecule into
ions when dissolved in water
.._.
450
Glossary
electroplating: a process of electrolysis in which a metal filtrate: the liquid that passes through the filter paper
~object is coated (plated) with a layer of another metal during filtration
electrostatic forces: strong forces of attraction between filtration: the separation of a solid from a liquid, using
particles with opposite charges - such forces are a tine filter paper which does not allow the solid to
involved in ionic bonding pass through
element: a substance which cannot be further divided fluid: a gas or a liquid; they are able to flow
into simpler substances by chemical methods; all formula unit: this unit of an element or compound is
the atoms of an element contain the same number the molecule or group of ions defmed by the chemical
of protons formula of the substance
) empirical formula: a formula for a compound which fossil fuels: fuels, such as coal, oil and natural gas,
shows the simplest ratio of atoms present formed underground over geological periods of time
end point: the point in a titration when the indicator just from the remains of plants and animals
changes colour showing that the reaction is complete fractional distillation: a method of distillation using
endothermic changes: a process or chemical reaction a fractionating column, used to separate liquids with
which takes in heat from the surroundings. different boiling points
) !:iH for an endothermic change has a positive value. fractionating column: the vertical column which
energy level diagram: see reaction pathway diagram is used to bring about the separation of liquids in
enthalpy (H): the thermal (heat) content of a system fractional distillation
enthalpy change (llH): the heat change during the course fractions (from distillation): the different mixtures
of a reaction (also known as heat of reaction); can be that distil over at different temperatures during
r either exothermic (a negative value) or endothermic

(a positive value)
enzymes: protein molecules that act as
fractional distillation
freezing point: the temperature at which a liquid turns
into a solicl - it has the same value as the melting point;
a pure substance has a sharp freezing point
biological catalysts
) ester link: the link produced when an ester is formed fuel: a substance that can be used as a source of energy,
from a carboxylic acid and an alcohol; also found usually by burning (combustion)
in polyesters and in the esters present in fats and fuel cell: a device for continuously converting chemical
vegetable oils energy into electrical energy using a combustion
) esterification: the chemical reaction between an alcohol reaction; a hydrogen fuel cell uses the reaction between
and a carboxylic acid that produces an ester; the other hydrogen and oxygen
product is water f1111ctional group: the atom or group of atoms responsible
., ) esters: a family of organic compounds formed by for the characteristic reactions of a compound
esterification, characterised by strong and pleasant ) galvanising: the protection of iron and steel objects by
tastes and smells coating with a layer of zinc
evaporation: a process occurring at the surface of a ) giant covalent structures: a substance where large
liquid, involving the change of state from a liquid into a numbers of atoms are held together by covalent bonds
vapour at a temperature below the boiling point forming a strong lattice structure
exothermic changes: a process or chemical reaction ) giant ionic lattice (structure): a lattice held together by
in which heat energy is produced and released to the the electrostatic forces of attraction between positive
surroundings. and negative ions
) 6.H for an exothermic change has a negative value. ) giant metallic lattice: a regular arrangement of positive
fermentation: a reaction carried out using a living metal ions held together by the mobile 'sea' of electrons
organism, usually a yeast or bacteria, to produce a moving between the ions
useful chemical compound; most usually refers to the giant molecular lattice (structure): substance where large
production of ethanol · numbers of atoms are joined by covalent bonds forming
fertiliser: a substance added to the soil to replace a strong lattice structure
essential elements lost when crops are harvested, which
enables crops to grow faster and increases the yield
451 >
451
) giant structures: these are lattices where the structure ) hydrogenation: an addition reaction in which hydrogen js
repeats itself in all directions; the forces involved added across the double bond in an alkcne
a re the same in all directions holding the whole ) hydrolysis: a chemical reaction between a covalent
structure together compound and water; covalent bonds are broken during
global warming: a long-term increase in the average the reaction and the elements of water are added to the
temperature of the Earth's surface, which may be caused fragments; can be carried out with acids o r alkalis, or by
in part by human activities using enzymes
greenhouse effect: the natural phenomenon in which immiscible: if two liquids form two layers when they are
thermal energy from the Sun is ' trapped' at the Earth's mixed together, they are said to be immiscible
surface by certain gases in the atmosphere (greenhouse incomplete combustion: a type of combustion reaction in
gases) which a fuel is burned in a limited supply of oxygen; the
greenhouse gas: a gas that absorbs heat reflected from incomplete combustion of hydrocarbon fuels produces
the surface of the Earth, stopping it escaping the carbon, carbon monoxide and water (see also complete
atmosphere combustion).
group number: the number of the vertical column that an independent variable: the variable that is altered during
element is in on the Periodic Table a scientific investigation
groups: verticaLcolumns of the Periodic Table indicator: a substance which changes colour when
containing clements with similar chemical properties; added to acidic or alkaline solutions, e.g. litmus
atoms of elements in the same group have the same or thymolphtbalein
number of electrons in their outer energy levels inert: term that describes substances that do not produce
) Haber process: the industrial manufacture of ammonia a chemical reaction when another substance is added
by the reaction of nitrogen with hydrogen in the insoluble: a substance that does not dissolve in
presence of an iron catalyst a particular solvent
) half-equations: ionic equations showing the reactions insulator: a substance that does not conduct electricity V
at the anode (oxidation) and cathode (reduction) in an

) intermolecular forces: the weak attractive forces which
electrolytic celJ
act between molecules
halides: compounds formed between an element and
intermolecular space: the space between atoms or
a halogen, e.g. sodium iodide
molecules in a Jjquid or gas. The intermolecular space is
halogen displacement reactions: reactions in which small in a liquid, but relatively very large in a gas.
a more reactive halogen displaces a less reactive ha!ogen
ionic bonding: a strong electrostatic force of·attraction
from a solution of its salt
between oppositely charged ions
halogens: elements in Group VJJ of the Periodic Table -
) ionic equation: the simplified equation for a reaction
• generally the most reactive group of non-metals
involving ionic substances: only those ions which
hematite: the major ore of iron, iroo(IH) oxide actually take part in the reaction are shown
homologous series: a family of similar compounds with Ions: charged particles made from an atom, or groups of
similar chemical properties due to the presence of the atoms (compound ions), by the loss or gain of electrons
same functional group
Isomerism: the property shown by molecules whjch have
hydrated salts: salts whose crystals contain combined the same molecular formula but different structures
water (water of crystallisation) as part of the structure
) isomers: compounds which have the same molecular
hydrated substance: a substance that is chemically formula but different structural arrangements of the
combined with water; hydrated salts are an important atoms - they have different structural formulae
group of such substances
isotopes: atoms of the same element which have the
) hydration: the addition of the elements of water across same proton number but a different nucleon number;
a carbon-carbon double bond; H- adds to one carbon, they have different numbers of neutrons in their nuclei;
and -OH to the other some isotopes are radioactive because their nuclei are
hydrocarbons: organic compounds which contain carbon unstable (radioisotopes)
and hydrogen only; the alkaoes and alkenes a re two
series of hydrocarbons
4S2)
452
Glossary
kinetic particle theory: a theory which accounts for the metalloid (semi-metal): element which shows some of the
, bulk properties of the different slates of matter in terms properties of metals and some of non-metals, e.g. baron
of the movement of particles (atoms or molecules) - and silicon
the theory explains what happens during changes in metals: a class of chemical elements (and alloys) which
physical state have a characteristic shiny appearance and are good
lattice: a regular three-dimensional arrangement of conductors of beat and electricity
atoms, molecules or ions in a crystajline solid methyl orange: an acid-base indicator that is red in
law of conservation of mass: matter cannot be lost or acidic and yellow in alkaline solutions
gail1ed in a chemical reaction - the total mass of the microplastics: small pieces of plastic less than 5mm in
reactants equals the total mass of the products length that enter natural ecosystems from a variety of
lime: a white solid known chemically as calcium oxide sources including cosmetics, clothin,g and industrial
(CaO), produced by heating limestone; it can be used processes: nurdles and microbeads are different types
to counteract soil acidity, to manufacture calcium of microplastic
hydroxide (slaked lime) and also as a drying agent mineral: a naturally occurring rock containing
limestone: a form of calcium carbonate (CaCO) a particular compound
limewater: a solution of calcium hydroxide in water; it is miscible: if two liquids form a completely uniform
an alkali and is used in the test for carbon dioxide gas mixture when added together, they are said to be
) limiting reactant: the reactant that is not in excess miscible
litmus: the most common indicator; turns red in acid mixture: two or more substances mixed together but not
and blue in alkali chemically combined - the substances can be separated
by physical means
) locating agent: a compound that reacts with invisible,
colourless spots separated by chromatography to molar concentration: the measure of the concentration
produce a coloured product which can be seen of a solution in terms of the number of moles of
the solute dissolved per cubic decimetre of solution
main-group elements: the elements in the outer groups (mol/dm3)
of the Periodic Table, excluding the transition elements
(Groups I- VJJl) ) molar gas volume: 1 mole of any gas has the same
volume under the same conditions of temperature and
malleability: the ability of a substance to be bent or pressure (24dm3 at r.t.p.)
beaten into shape
molar mass: the mass, in grams, of 1 mole of a substance
malleable: a word used to describe the property that
metals can be bent and beaten mto sheets mole: the measure of amount of substance in
chemistry; 1 mole of a substance has a mass equal to
mass: practical measure of quantity of a sample found its relative formu la mass in grams - that amount of
by weighing on a balance substance contains 6.02 x 1023 (the Avogadro constant)
mass concentration: the measure of the concentration of atoms, molecules or formula units depending on the
a solution in terms of the mass of the solute, in grams, substance considered
dissolved per cubic decimetre of solution (g/dm 3) molecular formula: a formula that shows the act ual
mass number (or nucleon number) (A): the total number number of atoms of each element present in a molecule
of protons and neutrons in the nucleus of an atom of the compound
mass spectrometer: an instrument in which atoms or molecule: a group of atoms held together by
molecules are ionised and then accelerated; the ions are covalent bonds
then separated according to their mass monomer: a small molecule, such as ethene, which can be
matter: anything that occupies space and bas mass polymerised to make a polymer
melting point (m.p): the temperature at which a solid nanotechnology: the study and control of matter on a n
turns into a liquid - it has the same value as the freezing atomic and molecular scale; it is aimed at engineering
point; a pure substance has a sharp melting point working systems at this microscopic level
) metallic bonding: an electrostatic force of attraction
between the mobile 'sea' of electrons and the regu lar
array of positive metal ions within a solid metal
453
natural gas: a fossil fuel formed underground over ) oxidising agent: a su bstance which oxidises another
geological periods of time by conditions of high substance duri ng a redox reaction
pressure and temperature acting on the remains of dead paper chromatography: a simple type of chromatography
sea creatures; natural gas is more than 90% methane used to separate the components of soluble substances
neutralisation: a chemical reaction between an acid and based on their rate of migration in a solvent (mobile
a base to produce a sail and water only; summarised by phase) on sheets of filter paper (stationary phase)
the ionic equation H+(aq) + OH-(aq) ➔'HP(l) particulates: very tiny solid particles produced du1ing
neutron: an uncharged subatomic particle present in the the combustion of fuels
nuclei of atoms - a neutron has a mass of I relative to ) percentage composition: the percentage by mass of each
a proton element in a compound
nitrogen fixation: the <;lirect use of atmospheric nitrogen ) percentage purity: a measure _of the purity_ of the
in the formation of important compounds of nitrogen; product from a react10n earned out expemnentally:
most plants cannot fix nitrogen directly, bu~ bacteria
present in the root nodules of certain plants are able mass of pure product
percentage purity = - - -- - - -- - X JOO
to take nitrogen from the atmosphere lo form essential mass of impure product
protein molecules ) percentage yield: a measure of the actual yield of a
noble gases: elements in Group VIII - a group of stable, reaction when carried out experimentally compared to
very unreactive gases the theoretical yield calculated from the equ~tion:
non-electrolytes: liquids or solutions that do not take actual yield
part in electrolysis: they do not contain ions percentage yield = X 100
predicted yield
non-metals: a class of chemical elements that are period: a horizontal row of the Periodic Table
typically poor conductors of heat and electricity
period (row) number: the horizontal row of the Periodic
non"renewable (finite) resources: sources of energy, such Table that an ·element is in
as fossil fuels, and other resources formed in the Earth
over many millions of years, which we are now using up periodic property: a property of the elements that
at a rapid rate and cannot replace shows a repeating pattern when plotted against proton
number (Z)
NPK fertiliser. fertilisers to provide the elements
nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium for improved Periodic Table: a table of elements arranged in order
plant growth of increasing proton number (atomic number) to show
the similarities of the chemical elements with related
nucfens: (of an atom) the central region of an atom ,that electronic configurations
is made up of the protons and neutrons of the atom; the
electrons orbit around the nucleus in different 'shells' or petrol (or gasoline): a clear flammable liquid derived
* 'energy levels' from petroleum used primarily as a fuel in most
combustion engines; it i~ obtained by the fractional
ore: a naturally occurring mineral from which a metal distillation of petroleum
can be extracted
petroleum (or crude oil): a fossil fuel formed
organic chemistry: studies on the structure, properties underground over many millions of years by conditions
and reactions of organic compounds, which contain of high pressure and temperature acting on the remains
carbon in covalent bonding of dead sea creatures
oxidation: there are three definitions of oxidation: pH scale: a scale running from below O to 14, used for
i a reaction in which oxygen is added to an element or expressing the acidity or alkalinity of a solution; a
compound neutral solution has a pH of 7
ii a reaction involving the loss of electrons from an
atom, molecule or ion ) photoc~e~caf reaction: a ~hemical reaction where .
the activat10n energy req mJed to start the reaction 1s
[ iii a reaction in which the oxidation state of an element provided by light, usuaUy of a particular wavelength,
is increased
falling on the reactants
oxidation numbc1r: a number given to show whether an
element has been oxidised or reduced; the oxidation photochemicai smog: a form of local atmospheric
number of a simple ion is simply the charge on the ion pollution found in large cities in which several gases
react with each other to produce harmful products
454
Glossary
photosynthesis: the chemical process by which plants proton number (or atomic number) (Z): the number
synthesise glucose from atmospheric carbon dioxide of protons in the nucleus of an atom (see also atomic
,. and water giving off oxygen as a by-product: the energy number)
required for the process is captured from sunlight by pure substance: a single chemical element or compound
chlorophyll molecules in the green leaves of the plants - it melts and boils at de.finite precise temperatures
physical change: a change in the physical state of qualitative (analysis): the process used to determine the
a substance or the physical nature of a situation presence or absence of a substance in a given sample
that does not involve a change in the chemical
substance(s) present quantitative: the ability to put numerical values to the
properties being studied
plastics: polymers that can be moulded or shaped by the
action of heat and pressure quantitative (analysis): the process used to determine the
amount or percentage of a substance in a given sample
pollutants: substances, often harmful, which are added
to another substance rancid: a term used to describe oxidised organic material
(food) - usually involving a bad smell
) polyamide: a polymer ~here the mo~omer units are
joined together by am1de (peptide) lmks, e.g. nylon and random errors: these are unpredictable variations in
proteins results caused by factors such as human errors
) polyester: a polymer where the monomer units are joined reactants: (in a chemical reaction) the chemical
together by ester links, e.g. PET substances that react together in a chemical reaction
polymer: a substance consisting of very large molecules reaction pathway diagram (energy level diagram):
made by polymerising a large number of repeating units a diagram that shows the energy levels of the reactants
or monomers and products in a chemical reaction and shows whether
the reaction is exothermic or eudothermic
polymerisation: the chemical reaction in ,~hich molecules
(monomers) join together to form a long-chain polymer reaction rate: a measure of bow fast a reaction
takes place
porous pot: an unglazed pot that has channels (pores)
through which gases can pass reactivity: the ease with which a chemica l substance
takes part in a chemical reaction
) position of equilibrium: the_ mixture _o f rea~tants_ and.
products at which a reversible react10n 1s m equi11bnum reactivity series of metals: an order of reactivity, giving
under a particular set of physical conditions of the most reactive metal first, based on results from
temperature and pressure . a range of experiments involving metals reacting with
oxygen, water, dilute hydrochloric acid and metal
precipitate: an insoluble salt formed d'u ring salt solutions
a precipitation reaction
redox reaction: a reaction involving both reduction
precipitation: the sudden formation of a solid when and oxidation
either two solutions are mixed o r a gas is bubbled into
a solution ) reducing agent: a substance which reduces another
substance during a redox reaction
precipitation reaction: a reaction in which an insoluble
salt is prepared from solutions of two suitable reduction: there are three definitions of reduction:
soluble salts i a reaction in which oxygen is removed from a
compound
precision: the degree by which repeat measurements are
I
ii a reaction involving the gain of electrons by an atom,
consistent (close to each other) molecule or ion
products: (in a chemical reactio_n) the substance(s) iii a reaction in which the oxidation state of an element
produced by a chemical reaction is decreased
proteins: polymers of amino acids formed by a ) refluxing: a practical technique using a (reflux)
condensation reaction; they have a wide variety of condenser fitted vertically to condense vapours from an
biological functions experiment back into a flask
proton: a subatomic particle with a relative mass of l relative atomic mass (A,): the average mass of naturally
and a charge of + I found in the nucleus of all atoms occurring atoms of an element on a scale where the
carbon-12 atom. has a mass of exactly 12 units
455
) (;AMBRIDGE IGCSE™ CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
\...
relative formula mass (M,): the sum of all the relative saturated solution: a solution that contains as much
atumic masses of the atoms present in a 'formula unit' dissolved solute as possible at a particular temperature •
of a substance (see also relative molecular mass) ) 'sea' of delocalised electrons: term used for the free,
relative molecular mass (M.): the S\lm of all the relative mobile electrons between the positive ions in a
atomic masses of the atoms present in a molecule (see metallic lattice
also relative formula mass) significant figures: the number of digits in a number, not
renewable resources: sources of energy and other including any zeros at the beginning; for example the
resources which cannot run out provided they are number of significant figures in 0.0682 is three
managed sustainably, or wbjch can be made at a rate simple distillation: a distillation method for separating
faster than our current rate of use the liqllid solvent from a solution containing
repeatability: where an experiment (or series of dissolved solids
experiments) can be repeated using the same method simple molecular substances: substances made up of
and obtain reproducible (similar) results individual molecules held together by covalent bonds:
residue: the solid left behind in the filter paper after there are only weak forces between the molecules
filtration has taken place slag: a molten mixture of impurities, mainly calcium
resolution: the smallest division on the instrument, silicate, formed in the blast furnace
e.g. this could be 1mm on a ruler or 0. lg on a balance solubility: a measure of how much of a solute dissolves
respiration: the chemical reaction (a combustion in a solvent at a particular temperature
reaction) by which biological cells release the energy soluble: a solute that dissolves .iu a particular solvent
stored in glucose for use by the cell or the body; the
solute: the solid substance that has dissolved in a liquid
reaction is exothermic and produces carbon dioxide and
water as the chemical by-products (the solvent) to form a solution
solution: formed when a substance (solute) dissolves into
re,-ersible reaction: a chemical reaction that can go either
forwards or backwards, depending on the conditions another substance (solvent)
) R, value: in chromatography, the ratio of the distance solvent the liquid that dissolves the solid solute to form
travelled by the solute to the distance travelled by the a solution; water is the most common solvent but liquids
solvent front in organic chemistry that can act as solvents are called
organic solvents
) r.tp1: room temperature and pressure: the
standard values are 25 °C/298 Kand 101.3 kPa/1 solvent front: the moving boundary of the liquid solvent
atmosphere pressure that moves up the paper during chromatography
sonorous: a word to describe a metallic substance that
nm-off: water whlch travels over the surface of the land
before entering waterways such as rivers and lakes; rings like a bell when hit with a hammer
., runoff from farmland may contain dissolved substances stainless steel: an alloy of iron that resists corrosion;
such as fertilisers this steel contains a significant proportion of chromium
which results in the alloy being resistan t to rusting
rust: a loose, orange-brown, flaky layer of hydrated
iron(m) oxide, Fep3-xHp, found on the surface of iron ) standard soJution: a solution whose concentration is
or steel known precisely - this solution is then used to find the
rusting: .the corrosion of iron and steel to form rust concentration of another solution by titration
(hydrated iron(UI) oxide) state symbols: symbols used to show the physical state
) sacrificial protection: a method of rust protection of the reactants and products in a chemical reaction:
involving the attachment of blocks of a metal more they ares (solid), 1(liquid), g (gas) and aq (in solution
in water)
reactive than iron to a structure; this metal is corroded
rather than the iron or steel structure states of matter: solid, liquid and gas are the thTee states
salts: ionic compounds made by the neutralisation of an
of matter in which any substance can exist, depending
acid with a base (or alkali), e.g. copper(Il) sulfate and on the conditions of temperature and pressure
potassium nitrate stoichiometry: the ratio of the reactants and products in
saturated hydrocarbons: hydrocarbons molecules a balanced symbol equation
in which all the carbon-carbon bonds are single
covalent bonds
456
Glossary
) strong acid: an acid that is completely ionised volumetric pipette: a pipette used to measure out a
-.when dissolved in water - this produces the highest volume of solution accurately
possible concentration of H+(aq) ions in solution, e.g. ) water of crystallisation: water included in the structure
hydrochloric acid of certain salts as they crystallise, e.g. copper(ll)
) structural formula: the structural formula of an organic sulfate pentahydrate (CuS0/5Hp) contains 6.ve
molecule shows how all the groups of atoms are arranged molecules of water of crystallisation per molecule of
in the structure; ethanol, CHpH.pH, for example copper(II) sulfate
) structural isomerism: a property of compounds that ) weak acid: an acid that is only partially dissociated into
have the same molecular formula but different structural ions in water - usually this produces a low concentration
formulae; the individual compounds are known as of H +(aq) in the solution, e.g. ethanoic acid
structural isomers word equation: a summary of a chemical reaction using
subatomic particles: very small particles - protons, the chemical names of the reactants and products
neutrons and electrons - from which all atoms are made zero error: a type of systematic error in a measuring
sublimation: the direct change of state from solid to gas instrument, e.g. the reading on a balance may not reset
or gas to solid: the liquid phase is bypassed to zero when there is nothing on the balance
substitution reaction: a reaction in which an atom
(or atoms) of a molecule is (are) replaced by
different atom(s), without changing the molecule's
general structure
suspension: a mixture containing small particles of an
insoluble solid, or droplets of an insoluble liquid, spread
(suspended) throughout a liquid
systematic errors: these are consistent errors which may
arise due to a problem with the experimental design or
in a piece of equipment being used
thermal conductivity: the ability to conduct heat
tbymolphthalein: an acid- base indicator that is colourless
in acidic solutions and blue in alkaline solutions
titration: a method of quantitative analysis using
volume of another solution using a burette until ao end
point is reached
titre: the volume of solution added from the burette
during a titration
transition metals (transition elements): elements from
the central region of the Periodic Table - they are hard,
strong, dense metals that form compounds that are
often coloured
universal indicator: a mixture of indicators that bas
different colours in solutions of different pH
unsaturated hydrocarbons: hydrocarbons whose
molecules contain at least one carbon-carbon double or
triple bond
volatile: term that describes a liquid that evaporates
easily; it is a liquid with a low boili'ngpoint because
there are only weak inten;nolecular forces between the
molecules in the liquid
volatlllty: the property othow easily a liquid evaporates
457
•
.i:,,
V1 '-../
00
'-../ The Periodic Table of Elements n

)>
Group 3::
a,
I II Ill IV V VI VII VIII ::u
-
1 2 6
H He Gl
,,...,, m
Key 1 4 ci
nVI
-
3 4 etomlc ntJfl'IOef 5 6 7 8 9 10
Li
"""""
7
Be
""Y'9 "'"'
·-
atomic symbol
ro&atlve atomic mass
B
"""'
11 12
·
..C.,.,
- - N
14
0
16
F
ft.Jolil.e
19
Ne
20
n
m
:c
...
:I:
--
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Na Mg Al Si p s Ar m
mun,
23
._,...,.,,
24
-lum
27
.....
28 31 """
32
Cl
_,.,.
35.5
._
40
3::
iii
-t
- - - -
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
K
,,.,_,.,
39
Ca
""""'
40
Sc
45
..,_
Ti
48
·- V
51
Cr
52
Mn
"""""""'
55
...
Fe
56 -·
Co
59
Ni
""""
59 -
Cu
64
Zn
,.,.
65
Ga
...,,,
70
Ge
"""'73"""'"'
As
75
Se
""""'m
79
Br
80
Kr
,.,....,
84
~
8C
Rb
37
-
rubiCaJITI
- - --
38
Sr
....,.,,,,
39
y
)'Ctlum
·-
40
Zr
41
Nb Mo
42
rnct,bd-,um
43
Tc
- ..
. 44
Ru
N-lum
Rh
45
Pd
46
poiltM!b,.,n
47
Ag
48
Cd
49
In
indk.lm
50
,.
Sn
- _..... -
51
Sb Te
52
lllllurium
53
I Xe
54
::u
VI
m
a,
-.. -- .. .._-
85 88 89 91 93 96 101 103 106 108 112 115 119 122 128 127 131
458
- - -
55 56 57-71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86
Cs Ba Hf Ta w Re Os Ir Pt Au Hg Tl Pb Bi Po At.... Rn 0
133
barium
137
,..,..,
178
tanlaklm
181
u,,gs•n
164 186
°""'190"m lltdium
192
..........
195
....
197 201
.,....,,
204 207 209
_,.,m
- -
.....
-
;,II;
- - -- -- --
87 88 89-103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118
Fr Ra ..,,_ Rf Db Sg Bh Hs Mt Os Rg Cn Nh F! Mc Lv Ts Og
,,......
- ""'-""' -lum
- "'""'"'
- - -
haasiom
- - - -19<>-
- '°""""'
- "' - - "'°""""m
- """'-°""" - -
- -- - -
57 58 59 60 81 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71
lanthanoids La Ce Pr Nd Pm Sm Eu Gd Tb Dy Ho Er Tm Yb Lu
fenttiar.Jm ceri...,, ....,..,.... ..,..,.,,. ,......,,
"""'165""' lutic!Jvm
139 140
praseod~m
14 1 144 - 150 152 157 159 183 167 "'""""
169 "'""""'
173 175
-- - --- - -
89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
actinoids Ac Th Pa u Np Pu Am Cm Bk Cf Es Fm Md No Lr
edlnlum
- 232 231 238
neptunklm
-
,........
-
...,....,..,
- """""'
- - - - -
........
-
...,
-
IIWl'Onchvn
-
The volume of one mole of any gas is 24dm3 at room temperature and pressure (r.t.p.).
I ,
<
Index
-> Index
accuracy of data 406, 408 aluminium atomic number 33-4
acid-base titrations 117- 18, 440-1 corrosion 317 atomic theory 38- 9
acid rain 229, 328, 329 extraction 314-16 atoms I I, 30-4
acidic oxides 228 reaction with acids 299 Avogadro's constant 102-103
acids uses 285 Avogadro's law 114
carboxylic 350-1, 373-4 aluminium oxide 80, 109, 229 282
concentration 168- 9, 174-5 285,300 ' '
balanced symbol equations 83-5
properties 221- 5, 227 amide links 39 1,392
barium nitrate 436
reactions with bases and amides 391
barium sulfate 252- 3, 436
alkalis 231- 2, 248- 9 amino acids 387, 394
barrier methods of rust prevention
reactions with carbonates ammonia 317-18
232- 3, 248-9,252,435 displacement from salts 226 bases 222, 225~7, 231 - 2
reactions with metals 231 molecular structure 50, 54 basic oxides 228
248- 9, 281,283, 299- 300
precipitation with aqueous batteries 139
strong and weak 234-5 432 bauxite 315
activation energy 156, 176-7 synthesis (Haber process) 184,
biodegradable substances 337
addition polymerisation 387-90 190- 3
393 ' biofuels 372
tests for 439
addition reactions 349, 368-9 biological washing powders 172
ammonium chloride 186
adsorption 176 blast furnaces 312- 14
ammonium dichromate 83
air, reactions of metals with 281 Bohr, N iels 38- 9
ammonium ion 76
282 ' boiling 4.6, 12
ammonium nitrate 112. 197
air pollution 326, 327- 31 boiling point
ammqniurn sulfate 80-1, 89
alanine 394 alkanes 354
amphotcric compounds 229
alcohols 350, 371 covalent compounds 56
anhydrous substances 185, 246
alkali metals 57, 85, 262, 263, definition 6
anions 58, 129, 435-6
265-7,297- 8 ionic compounds 59-60
anode reactions 131- 2, 134-5
see also lithium; potassium; metals 65, 280
sodium anodes 128
non-metals 280
alkaline earth metals 298- 9 anomalous data 409
pure substances 7
see also calcium; magnesium antacids 225, 233
bond energy 155
alkalis 222,224-7,231 - 2 anti-bumping granules 413
bottled water 427
alkanes 347-8, 350, 351, 364-6 argon 42, 269
brass 287
alkenes 348- 9, 350,366-70 atmosphere, composition of the
327 bromide ions 435
alkyl groups 354 bromination reactions 368- 9
atmospheric pressure 6
alkynes 349 bromine 267- 9, 368- 9
atom economy 100- 101
aUoys 15, 278, 286-8 bromoethanol 369
atomic microscopy 29
bronze 286, 287
....
459
> CAMBRIDGE IGCSETMCHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK
Buchner funnels 411 chemical bonding 50, 154-5 condensation reactions 390
burettes 25 I , 440-1 chemical changes 150-1 Contact process 169, 189, 194-5
butane 347- 8, 353-4, 364 chemical equilibria 186-90 controlled variables 409
butanoic acid 351 chemical feedstock 382 cooling curve 8, 13
butanol 355, 370 chemical 'footbridges' 108, 115 copolymers 391- 2
butene 348,355,369 chemical formulae 50, 104-106 copper
butyl propanoate 356 chemical symbols 75 oxidalion numbers 210
chemiluminescence 150-1 purity 112
calcium 228, 282, 299 chloride ions 435 reaction with oxygen 205- 206,
calcium carbonate 89, 108, 166-7, chlorine 207, 228
187,313 ion formation 58 reaction with silver nitrate 302
calcium chloride 59, 81 isotopes 35, 37 uses 285
calcium hydroxide 299 molecular structure 52 copper electrodes 136
calcium oxide 80 as an oxidising agent 208 copper(ll) carbonate L11 , 285
calcium silicate 313- 14 properties 267- 8 copper(II) chrornate(V{) 128- 9
calcium sulfate' 252 reactivity 268-9 copper(II) oxide 111 , 205- 206, 207
calculation triangles 103-104, ll6 substitution reactions with copper(II) sulfate
calibration 407 alkanes 365-6 anhydrous 185,334
car bon tests for 439 crystals 104, 106, 185, 246
covalent bonding 346-7 chlorophyll 333 solutions JI 6, 134-5, I 36, 208,
isotopes 35 chrlorobutane 366 302,304
'V
reaction with oxygen 228 chromatograms 417 corrosion 206,3 14, 3 17- 19
in the reactivity series 311 chromatography 410, 417- 19 see also rusting
carbon dioxide chromium plating 139,3 18 corrosive substances 221
. in the atmosphere 327, 33 1- 3 clean dry air 327 covalent bonding 5 1- 6
formu la 77 climate change 327, 332-4 covalent compounds 56, 63--4,
77-9
laboratory preparation 233 closed syslems 187
coal 382 cracking, catalytic 366-8, 384-5
molecular structure 55
cryolite 3 15- 16
• subli mation 5 coba lt 310
C()ba\t(ll)~atoowlt\e \ \(} crystallisation lS,4l0, 4H
test's fot 4?>i
carbon monoxide 330, 365 cobalt(IJ) chloride 110, 186, 247
carbon nanotubes 345 collision theory 174-7 Dalton, John 31
carbonate ions 76, 435 combustion 205-206, 330, 364-5, decomposition reactions 129
carbonates 232- 3, 248- 9, 252,435 368 delocalised electrons 65
carboxylic acids 350- 1, 373-4 complete combustion 330 deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) 346
catalysts 165, 171 -2, 176, 185, 190 compound fertilisers 197 dependent variables 409
catalytic converters 174, 330 compound ions 75-6 desalination 405,413
catalytic cracking 366-8, 384-5 compounds 30,49, 75-6,89- 90 desulfurisation 194, 329
cathode reactions 131- 2, 134-5 compressed natural gas (CNG) 364 deuterium 35, 36
cathodes 128 condensation (change of state) 4, deuterium oxide 36
6, 13-14 diamond 63-4
cations 58, 129, 428-34
condensation polymerisation 390-3 diatomic molecules 51
cattle farming 33 1
460)
460
Index
diesel vehicles 331 electroplating 136, 138- 9, 318 ' footbridge ' calculation method
electrostatic forces 57, 59 108, 115
~ diffusion · 16-17
disinfection of water supply 337 elements 30, 49, 75 formula unit 88
formulae
displacement reactions 208; 211, empirical formulae 78, 105- 106,
301- 302, 304 357 displayed 348, 353-4, 357
displayed formulae 348, 353-4, 357 end-point 251 empirical 78, 105-106, 357
dissociation 234-5 endothermic c):i.anges 14, 151 molecular 78, 105- 106, 348,
distillate 413 endothermic reactions 151-6 357
distillation 405, 41 3-14 energy level diagrams (reaction structural 353-4, 357
distilled water 335 pathway diagrams) 152- 3 forward reactions 185
DNA (deoxyribonucleic acid) 346 energy levels (electron shells) 38-40 fossil fuels 382
dot-and-cross diagrams 52, 58 enthalpy I 54 fractional d istillation 367, 382- 3,
enthalpy change 154, 156 410, 414
double bonds 53, 346, 348- 9
enzymes 172, 381 fractionating columns 383
drinking water 337, 405
error, sources of 409-410 fractions, petroleum 383
droughts 332
ester links 39 I , 392 freezing 4, 13- 14
ductile materials 65
esterification 375 fuel cells 139-40, 209
ductility 279, 280
esters 189, 355-6, 375 functional groups 349
dynamic equilibrium I87
ethane 78, 347-8, 364
:., ethanoic acid 234-5, 350- 1, 352, galvanising 318- 19
electrical conductivity
373-4 gas phase reactions 189
covalent compounds 56
ethanol 350, 352, 370,,371-2 gases
ionic compounds 59-60, 62,
ethene 55,348, 352, 368, 369, 371 diffusion 16-17
128, 129
ethyl ethanoate 355-6, 375 general characteristics 3
liquids 127- 9
evaporation 4, 5, 12 molar volume 113- 15
metals 65, 279, 280
excess reactants l 09- 110 movement of particles in 12
non-metals 280
exoth,ermic changes 14 pressure of reacting 169, I75,
solids 126-7, 129
exothermic reactions 151-6, 176-7 189, 190, 19·1, 194
electrical conductors 126
experimental design 406-410 solubility 16
electrochemical cells 139, 296
explosions 165 tests for 438- 9
electrodes 128
volumechanges 12, 13- 14
electrolysis
fast reactions 164 volume measurement 173-4,
definition 127, 311 408
molten ionic compounds fermentation 371
'gasohol' 372
130-2 fertilisers 190, 193, 197, 335-6
gasoline (petrol) 128
solutions 132-6, 208- 209 filtrate 411
giant covalent structures 63-4
electrolytes 128, 315 filtration 41 O
giant ionic lattices 62-4
electrolytic cells 129, 132, 316 finite resources 382
giant metallic lattices 63, 65-6
electrolytic conductivity 129 flame tests 428- 9
global warming 327, 331- 2
electron shells 38-40 fluids 3
glucose 205, 346
electronic configuration 36, 38-42; see also gases; liquids
glycine 394
263-4 fluorine 268
graphene 48,64,345
electrons 31, 32- 3, 65, 127
graphite 63-4, 129
461 )
461
graphs 409-4 I 0 hydration reactions 370, 371 incomplete combustion 330, 365
Green Chemistry 100-101, 12 I hydrazine 204 independent variables 409
greenhouse effect 332 hydrocarbons 347- 9 indicators 222, 44 I
greenhouse gases ,331 see also alkanes; alkenes; inert substances 327
Group I elements (alkali metals) alkynes insoluble salts 252-3
57, 85, 262,263, 265- 7, 297-8 hydrochloric acid insoluble substances 15,246
see also lithium; potassium; calculation of concentration insulators 127
sodium I 18
intermolecular forces 13, 56, 354
Group II elements (alkaline earth reaction with metals 231,281,
metals) 298- 9 intermolecular space 12
283
iodide ions 435
see a lso calcium; magnesium reaction with sodium
hydroxide 235-6 iodine 187, 267- 9
Group VII elements (halogens) 52,
57, 267- 9 reaction with sodium ionic bonding 57-60
see also bromine; chlorine; thiosulfate 170-1 ionic charge 79, 264
fluorine; iodine hydrogen ionic compounds
Group VIII elements (noble gases) atomic structure 32 bonding in 58- 9
42, 51 , 264, 269- 70 displacement from acids 231 definition 50
see also argon; helium; neon displacement from water electrical conductivity 59- 60,
group number (Pe1iodic Table) 42 282- 3 62,128, 129
groups (Periodic Table) 261 as a fuel 125, 140- 1, 204 electrolysis of molten 130-2
in the Haber process 192-3 formulae 79-81
Haber process 169, 184, 190- 3 ions 224-5,234--6 melting points 59- 60
half-equations 131 - 2, 135 isotopes 35, 36 physical properties 59
halide ions 435 liquid 2 ionic equations 86- 7, 253
halides 267 molecular structure 51- 2 ionic lattices 59, 62-4
Hall- Heroult process 315 in the Periodic Table 262 ions 57-8, 127- 9,264
halogen displacement reactions reaction with alkenes 369-70 see also anions; cations
208, 21 I, 268 reaction with oxygen 84, 204 iron
halogens 52, 57, 267-9 relative molecular mass 88, 89 extraction 312- 14
., see also bromine; chlorine; tests for 438 oxidation numbers 210
fluorine; iodine hydrogen chloride 53, 54, 115 reaction with acids 283, 299
heating cw-ves 8 hydrogen iodide 187, 189 reaction with oxygen 174, 228
heavy metals 335 hydrogen-oxygen fuel cells 139-40, reaction with steam 283
helium 32-3, 42, 269- 70 209 rusting 282, 285, 317-18
hematite 206, 312 hydrogen peroxide 78, 17 1- 2 uses 284-5
hexane 347- 8 hydrogenation reactions 369- 70 iron sulfide 50- 1
Hofmann voltameter 132 hydrolysis 396 iroo(Il) sulfate 186
homologous series· 349, 353-4 hydroxide ions 224-5, 235-6, 430-1 iron(Ill) oxide 206
hydrated copper(II) sulfate 104, hydroxides, metal 282- 3 isomers 354-5, 366, 369
106, 185,246
isotopes 34-7, 88
hydrated magnesium sulfate 89,
ice, ordinary and heavy-water 36
113
impurities 7, 415- 16 kinetic particle theory of matter
hydrated salts I86, 246
incineration 396 I 1- 14
hydrated substances 246
462)
462
Index
landfill disposal 396 mass measurement 406-407 methane

'lattices 8, 12 mass number 33-4 in the atmosphere 331-2, 334
law of conservation of mass 83 mass spectrometers 34 molecular structure 50, 54,
Le Chatelier's principle 189 matter, states of 3- 7 347- 8
lead iodide 253 melting 4, 12 reaction with oxygen L53-6,
205,364-5
Jead(II) bromide 128, 130-1, 135-6 melting point
metbanoic acid 350- 1, 373
lime 108 covalent compounds 56
methanol 55, 350
limestone 108, 166-7, 313 definition 4
methyl orange 222, 441
limiting reactants 109-110 ionic compounds 59- 60
2-methylpropane 353-4
liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) 364 measurement 415-16
microbeads 397-8
liquids metals 65, 280
microplastics 337, 397
diffusion in I 6 non-metals 280
microscopes 29
electrical conductivity 127- 9 pure substances 7
mineral water 427
general characteristics 3 Mendeleev, Dmitri lvanovicb 260
minerals 335
movement of particles in 12 metal cations 428-34
miscible liquids 15
solubility of gases in 16 metal displacement reactions 208,
211 , 301- 302 mixtures 14, 50- 1, 415
solubility of solids in 15
metal oxides 227- 8, 272, 282, 283 molar concentration 115
volume measurement 407-408
metallic bonding 65-6 molar gas volume 114
lithium 33, 37, 266, 298
metallic conductivity 129 molar mass 102- 104
litmus 222
metalloids 262, 263 mole (unit) 100- 105, 108- 119
locating agents 418- 19
metals molecular compounds 50
corrosion 317-19 molecular formulae 78, 105-106,
magnesium 348,357
definition 49
isotopes 37 molecules 11
electrical conductivity 65, 279,
reaction with acids 299 molten ionic compounds 130-2
280
reaction with oxygen 84, monomers 387
e1'traction 311- 16
89- 91 , 104-105, 150, 228,
melting points 65, 280 moscovium 74
282
reaction with steam 282, in the Periodic Table 262
298- 9 physical properties 65, 279- 8 I nanoparticles 363
magnesium chloride 79 reactions with acids 231, natural gas 382
magnesium oxide 59, 84, 89- 91 , 248-9, 281, 283, 299- 300 neon 35, 42, 269
104- 105 reactions with oxygen 281, 282 neutral oxides 229
magnesium sulfate 89, 113 reactions with water 281 , neutralisation reactions 86, 225,
main-group elements 262, 263 282- 3,297- 9 231, 235- 6
malleability 279, 280 reactivity series 297- 300, 305, neutrons 31, 32- 3
31 1- 16 'nickel silver' alloy 139
malleable materials 65
uses 284-6 nihonium 74
manganate(VII) ion 212, 436
see also alkali metals; alkaline nitrate ions 76, 436
manganese 2 I0
earth metals; transition metals
manganese(IV) oxide 171 nitrate pollution 335- 6
marble 166-7 nitric acid 231, 329
margarine 369-70
mass concentration 115
463
nitrogen reaction with magnesium 84, poly(phenylethene) 389

• ·in the atmosphere 327 89-91, 104-105, 150,228,282 poly(propene) 388, 389, 390
in the Haber process 192- 3 reaction with methane 153-6, polystyrene (poly(phenylethene))
205, 364-5 389
reaction with nitrogen 151 , poly(tetrafluoroethene) 388, 389
in plants 197
153
reaction with oxygen 151 , 153 polyvinyl chloride
reaction with phosphorus 228 (poly(chlorocthene)) 388, 389
nitrogen dioxide 329- 30
reaction with sodium 228 position isomerism 355
nitrogen fixation 190
reaction with sulfur 228 position of equilibrium 188 90
nitrogen monoxide 151, 153,
tests for 438 potassium 85, 197,266,298
329-30
noble gases 42, 51, 264, 269- 70 potassium iodide 212
see a!so argon; helium; neon paper chromatography 417- 18 potassium manganate(VII) 212,
particulates 328, 331 436
non-electrolytes 128
pentane 347-8 powders 165, I 66
non-metals 262, 280
peptide links 392 precipitate 430
non-renewable resources 382
peptides 394 precipitation reactions 86-7,
NPK fertilisers 197, 335- 6
252-3,430-1
nucleon number 33-4 percentage composition 112
precision of data 406, 408
nucleus, atomic 3 I percentage purity 111
pressure
nurdles 397- 8 percentage yield 11J
effect on gas reactions 169,
nylon 391- 2 period number (Periodic Table) 42
175, 189, 190, 191, 194
Periodic Table 41- 2, 261- 72
effect on gas solubility 16
ocean pollution by plastics 396-7
periods (Periodic Table) 261
effect on gas volume 12, 13
'
PET (polyester) 392- 3, 395
octane 331 products, reaction 83
petrol (gasoline) 128
oganesson 74 propane 347- 8, 364
petroleum 382- 5
ores 311 propanoic acid 35 1
pH measurement 407
oxidation 135, 205-206, 207, 211 propanol 355, 370
pH scale 223-4
oxidation numbers 209-211, 272 propene 78, 348
phosphate pollution 335-6
oxides, metal 227- 9, 272, 282, 283 propyl butanoate 356
phosphorus 197,228
• oxides of nitrogen 329- 30 proteins 387, 393-4
phosphorus oxide 105-106
oxidising agents 207,304 proton number (atomic number)
photochemical reactions 365 33-4
oxygen
photochemical smog 329 protons 31. 32- 3, 236
dissolved 335
photosynthesis 327, 333 PTFE (poly(tetrafluoroetbene))
physical changes 150 388,389
reaction with aluminium 109,
282,300 plastic waste 336-7, 395- 6 pure:substaoces 7, 415
reaction wi th calcium 228 plastics 381 , 395-8 purification of water 337
reaction with carbon 228 pollutants 327 purity measurement 4 I 5-16
reaction with copper 205- 206, polyamides 390-1 PVC (poly(chloroethene)) 388, 389
207,228 poly(chloroethene) 388, 389
reaction with hydrogen 84, polyesters 390-1, 392- 3 qual.itative analysis 428
204 poly(ethene) 387-8, 389 quantitative analysis 440-1
reaction with iron 174, 228 polymerisation 387-94 quartz 64
polymers 387- 94
-----
464
.. Index
r.t.p. (room temperature and sacrificial protection 319 solids

~ pressure) 114 safety, experimental 410 arrangement of particles in' 12
R 1 value 418 salt, common (sodium chloride) electrical conductivity 126-7,
radioisotopes 36 231,243,244 129
rancid food 206 salts general characteristics 3
random errors 409 in common use 244 solubility 15
rate of reaction electrolysis 133- 5 surface area 166-8, 174
effect of catalysts 171- 2, 176 preparation 248-53 solubility
effect of gas pressure 175 solubility 245- 7 gases 16
effect of reactant see also ionic compounds ionic compounds 60, 62
concentration 166-9, 174-6 sand 64 salts 245- 7
effect of temperature 170-1, saturated hydrocarbons 347- 8 solids 15
176
saturated solutions I 5 soluble salts 248-52
reactant concentration 166- 9
scanning tunnelling microscopes soluble substances 15, 246
reactants 83, 109- 110 (STM) 29 solutes 14, I 15
reaction pathway diagrams 152- 3 sea level rise 332 solutions
reactivity series of metals 297- 300, 'sea' of delocalised electrons 65 characteristics 14, 15-16
305, 311- 16
sea salt 244 concentration 115- 17, 168- 9,
recycling of plastic waste 395- 6
seawater 7 174-5, 176, 189, 190
redox reactions 206, 207-212, 304
separation techniques 410-19 electrolysis 132- 6, 208- 209
reducing agents 207, 304
sewage 335 solvent front 4 l 7
reduction 135, 205-206, 207,211
shells, electron 38-40 solvents 14, 411
refluxing 374
significant figures 112 sonorous substances 280
refrigerators I 49
silicon(IV) oxide 64, 78- 9, 105 soot 331, 365
relative atomic mass 34, 36- 7, 87- 8
silver chloride 253, 435 spectator ions 86, 253
relative formula mass 88- 92
silver nitrate 302, 435 stainless steel 287, 31 7
relative molecular mass 88-92
silver plating 139 standard pressure 6
renewable resources 333
simple distillation 410, 413 standard solutions 117
repeatable data 408
slag 313-14 state symbols 86, 429- 30
reproducible data 408
soap making 220 states of matter 3- 7
residue 411
sodium 57,228, 266, 282, 298 steam, reacrions of metals with
resolution 407 282- 3,298- 9
sodium carbonate 80
respiration 205, 327 steels 286, 314
sodium chloride
reverse reactions I85 stoichiometry 100- 101
as common salt 231, 243, 244
reversible reactions 185- 90 strong acids 234- 5
crystal structure 62, 232
mom temperature and pressure structural formulae 353-4, 357
electrolysis 133-4
(r.t.p.) 114
ionic bonding 49 7 50, 58 structural isomerism 354-5
row number (Periodic Table) 42
relative formula mass 88 subatomic particles 31, 32- 3
run-off 335-6
solutions 116, 133-4, 208 sublimation 4, 5
rust prevention 317-18
sodium hydroxide 104, 117, 134, substitution reactions 365-6
rusting 282, 285, 317
235- 6,430- 1 sugar solution 116
sodium thiosulfate 170-l sulfate ions 76, 436
solder 287 sulfite ions 436
465
sulfur 114, 170,228 tennessine 74 waste disposal 396 7

su]Jur dioxide thermal conductivity 279, 280 water
in the atmosphere 328- 9 thymolpbthalein: 222, 441 in the action of acids and
in the Contact process 189, time measurement 406 bases 222
195 tin plating 139, 318 boiling 6
conversion into sulfur trioxide titration 11 7- 18, 25 1- 2, 440- 1 bottled 427
189 detection 186
titre 440
relative formula mass 88-9 dissolved substances in natural
transition metals 209- 210, 262,
tests for 439 263, 271 - 2 335-7
volume calculations 114 see also cobalt; copper; iron; electrolysis 132
sulfur trioxide 189, 195 manganese in hydration reactions 370,
sulfuric acid triple bonds 53, 349 371
clouds 227-8 tritium 35, 36 molecular structure 49, 54
electrolysis of J32- 3 reactions of metals with 281,
manufacture (Contact process) 282- 3, 297- 9
ultraviolet light 365
194-5 relative molecular mass 88
un iversal indicator 222-3
reaction with metals 231 tests for 334
unsaturated hydrocarbons 349
surface area 166-8, 174 water of crystallisation 91, 246
suspensions 14 water supply 337, 405
valency 77 weak acids 234-5
systematic errors 409
verdigris 285
word equations 83
vinegar 374 V
temperature volatile liquids 6
effect on gas solubility 16 yeasts 371
volatility 6
, , elTect on gas volume 12, .13 ' volcano reaction' 83
effect on position of zero error 409
volume measurement 407-408
equilibrium 189, 190, 192 zinc
volumetric pipettes 251
effect on reaction rate 170- 1, reaction with acids 283, 299
176 reaction with copper(l l) sulfate
measurement 407 solution 208, 302, 304
reaction with steam 283
use in galvanising 318- 19
zinc oxide 206, 229
466
>Acknowledgements
The authors and publishers would like 10 thank the following/or l'eviewing this coursebook: Farhat Deeba, Joan I/ope-Jones and farina Iqbal
The authors and publishers acknowledge the following sources of copyright ma1erial and are grateful for 1he permissions gramed. While every
effort has bee11 made, it has 1101 always bee11 possible to identify the sources of all the material used, or 10 trace all copyright holders. If OIIY
omissions are brought ro our 11otice, we will be happy 10 include the appropriate acknowledgeme111s on reprinting.
~:ks to the following/or permission to reproduce images:
Tllustration, by !ech-Set Ltd
Unit 1: Nikl..-ytok/GI; NASA, ESA and Erich Karkoschka (University of Arizona); Charles D. Winters/SPL; Instants/GI; Menahem Kahana/
GT: Adam Gault/GI; Simon Mu.rrell/Gl; Andrew Lambert Photography/SPL; Andrew Mcclenaghao/SPL; Andrew Lambert Photography/
SPL; NASA/JPL Photojournal; Schon/GI; Unit 2: Paper Boat Creative/GI; Don Eigler, IBM Almaden Research Center: Image originally
created by IBM Corporation; Stocktrek Images/GI; Charles D. Winters/SPL; GrPhotoStock/S PL; Ray Bradshaw/GI;
Unit 3: M ina De La O/GT: Maciej Frolow/GI; Bet_Noire/G I; G IPhotoStock/SPL; Giphotostock/SPL; Nobelmuseet/Wikimcdia: Martyn F.
ChiUmaid/SPL; Adam Gault/GI; INchendio/GI; Wikimedia; Unit 4: Charles D. Winters/SPL; Andrew Lambert Photography/SPL; MvH/
GI; GIPhotoStock/SP L; Steven Puetzcr/GI; Sergio Amiti/GI: Unit 5: Caracterdesigo/GI; IP Galaotemik D.UJGI; Asafta/GI; Cover of
Green Chemistry, Vol. 17, No. 6, June 2015 published by the Royal Society of Chemists; Unit 6: Monty Rakusen/Gl; Paul Kane/GI; Vwpics/
✓
I Nano Ca lvo/Universal Images Group/G T; Trevor Clifford Pho tography/SPL; Monty Rakusen/GI; Robert Houser/GT; David Becker/GI;
Unit 7: Andre Schoenherr/GI; Westend61/Gl ; G IPhotoStock/SPL; Duncan UGI; ViewStock/GI; Geography Photos/Universal lmages
Group/GI; Peoplelmages/Gl; Unit 8: Jose A. Bernat Bacete/GI: Marylexa/GI; Khaled Desouki/GI; Al Feno/GI: Martyn F. Chillmaid/SPL;
Charles D.Wimcrs/SPL; Charles D.Winters/SPL; Roger Harris/SPL; Martyn F. Chillmaid/SPL; J.C. Revy. ISM/SP L: Astrid & Hanns-
Frieder Mich ler/SPL; H. Armstrong Robe rts/ClassicStock/GT; Gary Yeowell/GI; Unit 9: Westend6I/GI; U niversal History Archive/Universal
Images Group/GI; Wikimedia; Martyn F. ChillmaidiSPL; Andrew Lambert Photography/SPL (x3); Deutches Museum voo Meisterwerken
der Naurwissenschaft und Technik; Darryl Dyck/Bloomberg/GI; Martyn F. Chillmaid/SPL; Zorazhuang/G l; MirageC/Gl; Paul Hennessy/
NurPhoto/O1: Unit 10: Andrew Lambert Photography/SPL (x3); Trevor Clifford Pbotography/SPL (x2); )lfartyn F.Chilhnaid/SPL; Eclipse_
images/GI: Unit 11: Napaporn Leadprathom/GI; Kola Sulaimon/Gl; Lacaosa/GI; Andrew Lambert Photograpby/SPL; Andrew Lambert
Photograp hy/SPL; Andrew Lambert Photography/SPL; E uropean Space Agency/SPL; Leslie Garland Picture Library: R ichard Packwood/
GI; Martyn t-:Chilhnaid/SPL; Charles D.Winte rs/SPL; Gusto lmage.s/SPL; Arnold Fisher/SP L; Andrew Lambert Photography/SPL; Turtle
Rock Scientiflc/SPL; lryna Veldich/GI; Unit 12: Abstract Aerial Art/GI; Tuul & Bruno Morandi/GT; Jamain/Wikimedia; Biris Paul Silviu/
GI; Richard Harwood; Martyn F.Chillmaid/SPL: Martyn F.Chillmaid/SPL; Andrew Lambert Photography/SPL; GIPhotoStock/SPL; Jami
Tarris/GI; Beautifulchemistry.net/SPL; Unit 13: Image Source/GI; Carlos Jones, Oak Ridge National Lab; M C Talbot; Andrew Lambert
Photography/SPL; Andrew Lambert Photography/SP!:; Atlantide Pbototravel/Gl ; Richard Harwood; Martyn F.ChiUmaid/SPL; Siriwat
Nakha/Gl ; Unit 14: Peter Dazelcy/GJ; Turtle Rock Scientific/Science Source; SPL; Charles D.Winters/SPL; Universal History Archive/
GI: Dea/S.Vaonini/GI; James King-Holmes/SPL; Volker Pape/GI; Ullstein bild/GI; Du Kai photographer/G I: Masako Ishida/G I; Mongkol
Nitirojsakul/GI; Pltoto_Concepts/Gl; Francesco Cana fotografo/GI: Monty Rakusen/GJ; Thomas Lehtinen/GI ; Jsolie/GI; Sean Gladwell/
GI; Unit 15: Alextov/GI; Jeffrey Coolidge/GI; Werner Forman/GI; Tim Graham/G I; Charles D.Wimers/O1; Turtle Rock Scicntific/SPL;
Martyn F.Chillrnaid/SPL; Charles D. Winters/SPL; Charles D. Wimers/SPL; Joseph Scherschel/Gl; Reccp-bg/Gl; Unit 16: Marc Friederich/
GI; Ribeiroantonio/GI; Matthew Horwood/G I; Rosenfeld Images Ltd/SPL; Ben Jolmson/SPL; George Karbus Photography/GI: MC Talbot;
laughingmango/GI; Unit 17: Rapeepong Puttakumwong/Gl; Sarote Pruksachat/GI; Wlkimcdia; Andrew Holt/GI: Byronsdad/G I; Manya
F.Cbillmaid/SPL; Douglas Sacha/GI; Tristan Savatier/GI; Si-GaVGJ; Ruben Ramos/GI: Unit 18: Andrew Brookes/GI: Christian Darkin/
r
SPL; Andrew Lambert Photography/SPL; Richard Harwood; Martyn F. Chillmaid/SPL; Andrew Lambert Photography/SPL;
Unit 19: I lirkophoto/GI; Ljeoma Uchegbu/Wikimedia; Sonu Mehta/Hindustan Times/Gl; Martyn F. Chillmaid/SP.L; Haidar Moltammed
Ali/GI; David Taylor/SPL; Paul Rapson/SPL; Paul Rapson/SPL; David R . Frazier/SPL; Trevor Clifford Photography/SPL; Friedrich Saurer/
SPL: Adam Brackenbury/SPL; Unit 20: Paranyu Pitha:,-11rungsarit/GI; Wikimedia; Sputnik/SPL: Anthony Brawley/GI; VCG/GI; David
Talbot/Richard Harwood; Bess Adler/Bloomberg/GI; Science&Society Picture Library/GI; Adrian Bicker/SPL; Charles D.Winters/SPL;
Kyodo News/GI; William Campbell /GI; Lisa Maree Williams/GI; Stefano Montesi/GI; Bloomberg Creative Photos/GI; NOAA via Flickr;
Mikkel Juul Jcnsen/SPL; Educalioo Images/GI; Steve Gschmeissner/SPL; Wladimir Bulgar/SPL; Brent Durand/GI; Unit 21: Anchalee
Phanmaha/GJ; Sultan Al-Hasani/GI; Tdub303/GI; Andrew Lambert/SPL: Richard Harwood; Andrew Lambcrt/SPL; Andrew Lambert/
SPL: Science & Society Picture library/GI; Giraudou Laurent/G I; Jock Fistick/Bloomberg/GI; Unit 22: SPL: Felix Wong/South China
Morning Post/GI; Andrew Lambert/SP L; Andrew Lambert/SPL; Andrew Lambert/SPL: Andrew Lambert/SPL; Turtle Rock Scientific/
Science Sourcc/SPL; Turtle Rock Scientific/SPL; R ichard H arwood; Andrew Lambert Photography/SPL; Richard Harwood; Martyn
F.Chillmaid/SPL; Martyn F.Chillmaid/SPL; BraunS/GJ.
Key: GI= Getty Images; SPL = Science Photo Library
467
✓ Supports the full Cambridge !GCSE
and !GCSE (9-1) Chemistry syllabuses
(0620/0971) for examination from 2023
✓ Has passed Cambridge lnternational's

ri gorous quality-assurance process
✓ Developed by subject experts
ISBN 978-1 - 108- 95160-9
1111111111111
9 78 1108 951609 >
468

Cambridge IGCSE Chemistry Coursebook 5e - Pagenumber

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationCHEMISTRY

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cambridge IGCSE Chemistry Coursebook 5e - Pagenumber

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cambridge IGCSE Chemistry Coursebook 5e - Pagenumber

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CAMBRIDGE

UN IVE RS ITY PRE SS

University Printing House, Cambridge cs2 8es, United Kingdom

Cambridge University Press is part of the University of Cambridge. ...

7 Chemical energetics 148

5 Chemica l calculations 99 12 Preparation of salts 242

13 The Periodic Table 259 19 Reactions of organic compounds 362

~- 18 Introduction to organic chemistry 344 Appendix: Periodic Table 458

> -H ow to use this book '

SCIENCE IN CONTEXT Questions

Command words that appear in the syllabus and

WORKED EXAMPLE SELF/PEER ASSESSMENT

There is a summary of key points at the end of each chapter.

• explain diffusion in terms of the movement of particles

LORD OF THE RINGS

Figure 1.2: Saturn and its rings. A photograph taken by the

1~ 1 States of matter The volume of a gas at a fixed temperature can easily be

Physical state Volume ' Density Shape

Large increases, or decreases, in temperature and

Melting and freezing

Figure 1.5: Relationship between the melting and boiling

Evaporation, boiling and condensation

Eventually, at a certain temperature, a liquid becomes

Pure substances Effect of impurities

EXPERIMENTA L SKILLS 1.1

Plotting a cooling' curve Safety

.. 4 Remove the tubes from the water-bath and

1 Which of the two substances is a pure

2 marks if you did it really well

Have you plotted each point precisely and correctly?

Total (out of 14):

Questions energy absorb ed energy absorbed

7 As an a lternative to following the cooli ng of a

A solid cannot A liquid can flow; it is a A gas is a fluid

Time Figure 1.14: The basic d ifferences between the physical

These faster moving

The key points about the processes taking place during

sbsptnsion: a mixture containing small particles

.... ~e~l~i\ t:lon, _~~r•a r~action in which an

Solubility of solids in liquids

Solubility of gases in liquids

• diffusion does not take place in solids as the

Not all gases diffuse at the same rate. The speed at

Figure 1.20: Bromine vapour diffuses throughout the

EXPERIMENTAL SKILLS 1.2

Investigating diffusion in liquids Met hod

• pota,ssium iodide solution

Wear eye protection throughout. Use tweezers

.. t he skin. Silver nitrate is also hazardous to the

Questions porous pot

Figure 1.23: Gas d iffusi on through a porous pot a: with air

> CAMBRIDGE IGCSE™ CHEMISTRY: COURSEBOOK

Which change of state is shown?

4 Which of A- D in the figure shows the process 0f diffusion?

5 An experiment on the diffusion of ammonia and hydrogen chloride gases

., t•· •l• \' .,;;, * • -

solid liquid gas COMMAND WORDS